JEE

MAIN
CRASH
COURSE
PHYSICS
RECORDED LECTURES WORTH ₹5000
1300+ Topicwise Recorded Lectures

Quick Revision with Important Critical Questions + Past Year

Points & Formulas Questions
Chapterwise Practice Complete Coverage of JEE
Questions Syllabus
HOW TO CHECK RECORDED CLASSES
1. Open the App and click on 2. Click on continue learning 3. Click on V-Buddy icon
My Courses

4. You can see your course list

here.

Scan this
QR Code for
Free Recorded
Classes

HOW TO ACCESS THE SOLUTIONS TO

THE QUESTIONS INSIDE THIS BOOK?
You can access JEE Crash Course solutions to the questions in the book by
scanning the QR code.

You will find chaper-wise answers for Physics, Chemistry and Mathematics.
FOUNDER’S NOTE
Dear JEE Aspirants,

Are you feeling overwhelmed by the vast JEE syllabus and limited time to prepare?

We understand the pressure you're under. That's why we've created our JEE Crash Course Book, a
meticulously designed resource tailored to help you maximize your preparation in a short amount
of time.

This book offers a concise and focused approach to the JEE syllabus, highlighting the most
important concepts and topics. Our expert faculty have carefully selected these topics based on
their high-frequency appearance in previous exams.

With our JEE Crash Course, you'll benefit from:

Essential Concepts: A clear and concise presentation of core JEE concepts.
Practice Problems: A wide range of practice questions to reinforce your understanding.
Time-Management Strategies: Tips and techniques to optimize your exam-taking skills.
Expert Guidance: Insights from experienced JEE educators to help you stay motivated and focused.

We believe in your potential to succeed, and our JEE Crash Course is designed to give you the tools
and confidence you need to achieve your goals.

Let's make the most of your time and crack the JEE exam together!

Best regards,

Anand Prakash
Academics Head & Founder
 EXAM PATTERN

Paper No. of Total

Subject
Questions Marks

Physics, Chemistry,
Paper I 90 300
Mathematics

Mathematics & Drawing

Paper 2A 82 400

Mathematics, General Aptitude

Paper 2B 105 & Planning 400

EXAM SYLLABUS
MATHEMATICS
UNIT 1: SETS, RELATIONS, AND FUNCTIONS: Sets and their representation: Union, intersection, and complement of sets and
their algebraic properties; Power set; Relation, Type of relations, equivalence relations, functions; one-one, into and onto
functions, the composition of functions.

UNIT 2: COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS: Complex numbers as ordered pairs of reals, Representation of
complex numbers in the form a + ib and their representation in a plane, Argand diagram, algebra of complex number,
modulus, and argument (or amplitude) of a complex number, Quadratic equations in real and complex number system
and their solutions Relations between roots and co-efficient, nature of roots, the formation of quadratic equations with
given roots.

UNIT3: MATRICES AND DETERMINANTS: Matrices, algebra of matrices, type of matrices, determinants, and matrices of
order two and three, evaluation of determinants, area of triangles using determinants, Adjoint, and evaluation of inverse
of a square matrix using determinants and, Test of consistency and solution of simultaneous linear equations in two or
three variables using matrices.

UNIT 4: PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS: The fundamental principle of counting, permutation as an arrangement
and combination as section, Meaning of P (n,r) and C (n,r), simple applications.

UNIT 5: BINOMIAL THEOREM AND ITS SIMPLE APPLICATIONS: Binomial theorem for a positive integral index, general term
and middle term, and simple applications.
UNIT 6: SEQUENCE AND SERIES: Arithmetic and Geometric progressions, insertion of arithmetic, geometric means
between two given numbers, Relation between A.M and G.M.

UNIT 7: LIMIT, CONTINUITY, AND DIFFERENTIABILITY: Real–valued functions, algebra of functions, polynomials, rational,
trigonometric, logarithmic, and exponential functions, inverse function. Graphs of simple functions. Limits, continuity, and
differentiability. Differentiation of the sum, difference, product, and quotient of two functions. Differentiation of
trigonometric, inverse trigonometric, logarithmic, exponential, composite, and implicit functions; derivatives of order up
to two, Applications of derivatives: Rate of change of quantities, monotonic-Increasing and decreasing functions,
Maxima and minima of functions of one variable.

UNIT 8: INTEGRAL CALCULAS: Integral as an anti-derivative, Fundamental integral involving algebraic, trigonometric,
exponential, and logarithmic functions. Integrations by substitution, by parts, and by partial functions. Integration using
trigonometric identities.
Evaluation of simple integrals of the type

The fundamental theorem of calculus, properties of definite integrals. Evaluation of definite integrals, determining areas
of the regions bounded by simple curves in standard form.

UNIT 9: DIFFRENTIAL EQUATIONS: Ordinary differential equations, their order, and degree, the solution of differential
equation by the method of separation of variables, solution of a homogeneous and linear differential equation of the
type

UNIT 10: CO-ORDINATE GEOMETRY: Cartesian system of rectangular coordinates in a plane, distance formula, sections
formula, locus, and its equation, the slope of a line, parallel and perpendicular lines, intercepts of a line on the
co-ordinate axis.
Straight line
Various forms of equations of a line, intersection of lines, angles between two lines, conditions for concurrence of three
lines, the distance of a point form a line, co-ordinate of the centroid, orthocentre, and circumcentre of a triangle.
Circle, conic sections
A standard form of equations of a circle, the general form of the equation of a circle, its radius and central, equation of a
circle when the endpoints of a diameter are given, points of intersection of a line and a circle with the centre at the origin
and sections of conics, equations of conic sections (parabola, ellipse, and hyperbola) in standard forms, A standard
form of equations of a circle, the general form of the equation of a circle, its radius and central, equation of a circle when
the endpoints of a diameter are given, points of intersection of a line and a circle with the centre at the origin and
sections of conics, equations of conic sections (parabola, ellipse, and hyperbola) in standard forms.

UNIT 11: THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY: Coordinates of a point in space, the distance between two points, section
formula, directions ratios, and direction cosines, and the angle between two intersecting lines. Skew lines, the shortest
distance between them, and its equation. Equations of a line.

UNIT 12: VECTOR ALGEBRA

Vectors and scalars, the addition of vectors, components of a vector in two dimensions and three-dimensional space,
scalar and vector products.
UNIT 13: STATISTICS AND PROBABILITY: easures of discretion; calculation of mean, median, mode of grouped and
ungrouped data calculation of standard deviation, variance, and mean deviation for grouped and ungrouped data.
Probability: Probability of an event, addition and multiplication theorems of probability, Baye's theorem, probability
distribution of a random variate.

UNIT 14: TRIGONOMETRY: Trigonometrical identities and trigonometrical functions, inverse trigonometrical functions, and
their properties.

PHYSICS

UNIT 1: PHYSICS AND MEASUREMENT: Units of measurements, System of Units, S I Units, fundamental and derived units,
least count, significant figures, Errors in measurements, Dimensions of Physics quantities, dimensional analysis, and its
applications.

UNIT 2: KINEMATICS: The frame of reference, motion in a straight line, Position- time graph, speed and velocity; Uniform
and non-uniform motion, average speed and instantaneous velocity, uniformly accelerated motion, velocity-time,
position-time graph, relations for uniformly accelerated motion, Scalars and Vectors, Vector. Addition and subtraction,
scalar and vector products, Unit Vector, Resolution of a Vector. Relative Velocity, Motion in a plane, Projectile Motion,
Uniform Circular Motion.

UNIT 3: LAWS OF MOTION: Force and inertia, Newton’s First law of motion; Momentum, Newton’s Second Law of motion,
Impulses; Newton’s Third Law of motion. Law of conservation of linear momentum and its applications. Equilibrium of
concurrent forces.
Static and Kinetic friction, laws of friction, rolling friction.
Dynamics of uniform circular motion: centripetal force and its applications: vehicle on a level circular road, vehicle on a
banked road.

UNIT 4: WORK, ENERGY, AND POWER: Work done by a constant force and a variable force; kinetic and potential energies,
work-energy theorem, power. The potential energy of spring conservation of mechanical energy, conservative and
non-conservative forces; motion in a vertical circle: Elastic and inelastic collisions in one and two dimensions.

UNIT5: ROTATIONAL MOTION: Centre of the mass of a two-particle system, Centre of the mass of a rigid body; Basic
concepts of rotational motion; moment of a force; torque, angular momentum, conservation of angular momentum and
its applications; The moment of inertia, the radius of gyration, values of moments of inertia for simple geometrical
objects, parallel and perpendicular axes theorems, and their applications. Equilibrium of rigid bodies, rigid body rotation
and equations of rotational motion, comparison of linear and rotational motions.
The moment of inertia, the radius of gyration, values of moments of inertia for simple geometrical objects, parallel and
perpendicular axes theorems, and their applications. Equilibrium of rigid bodies, rigid body rotation and equations of
rotational motion, comparison of linear and rotational motions.

UNIT 6: GRAVITATION: The universal law of gravitation. Acceleration due to gravity and its variation with altitude and
depth. Kepler’s law of planetary motion. Gravitational potential energy; gravitational potential. Escape velocity, Motion of
a satellite, orbital velocity, time period, and energy of satellite.

UNIT 7: PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS AND LIQUIDS: Elastic behaviour, Stress-strain relationship, Hooke's Law. Young's modulus,
bulk modulus, and modulus of rigidity. Pressure due to a fluid column; Pascal's law and its applications. Effect of gravity
on fluid pressure.Viscosity. Stokes' law. terminal velocity, streamline, and turbulent flow.critical velocity. Bernoulli's
principle and its applications.Surface energy and surface tension, angle of contact, excess of pressure across a curved
surface, application of surface tension - drops, bubbles, and capillary rise. Heat, temperature, thermal expansion;
specific heat capacity, calorimetry; change of state, latent heat. Heat transfer-conduction, convection, and radiation.
UNIT 8: THERMODYNAMICS: Thermal equilibrium, zeroth law of thermodynamics, the concept of temperature. Heat, work,
and internal energy. The first law of thermodynamics, isothermal and adiabatic processes.
The second law of thermodynamics: reversible and irreversible processes.

UNIT 9: KINETIC THEORY OF GASES: Equation of state of a perfect gas, work done on compressing a gas, Kinetic theory of
gases - assumptions, the concept of pressure. Kinetic interpretation of temperature: RMS speed of gas molecules:
Degrees of freedom. Law of equipartition of energy and applications to specific heat capacities of gases; Mean free path.
Avogadro's number.

UNIT 10: OSCILLATIONS AND WAVES: Oscillations and periodic motion – time period, frequency, displacement as a
function of time. Periodic functions. Simple harmonic motion (S.H.M.) and its equation; phase: oscillations of a spring
-restoring force and force constant: energy in S.H.M. - Kinetic and potential energies; Simple pendulum - derivation of
expression for its time period:
Wave motion. Longitudinal and transverse waves, speed of the travelling wave. Displacement relation for a progressive
wave. Principle of superposition of waves, reflection of waves. Standing waves in strings and organ pipes, fundamental
mode, and harmonics. Beats.

UNIT 11: ELECTROSTATICS: Electric charges: Conservation of charge. Coulomb's law forces between two point charges,
forces between multiple charges: superposition principle and continuous charge distribution.
Electric field: Electric field due to a point charge, Electric field lines. Electric dipole, Electric field due to a dipole. Torque on
a dipole in a uniform electric field.
Electric flux. Gauss's law and its applications to find field due to infinitely long uniformly charged straight wire uniformly
charged infinite plane sheet, and uniformly charged thin spherical shell. Electric potential and its calculation for a point
charge, electric dipole and system of charges; potential difference, Equipotential surfaces, Electrical potential energy of
a system of two point charges and of electric dipole in an electrostatic field.
Conductors and insulators. Dielectrics and electric polarization, capacitors and capacitances, the combination of
capacitors in series and parallel, and capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with and without dielectric medium
between the plates. Energy stored in a capacitor.

UNIT 12: CURRENT ELECTRICITY: Electric current. Drift velocity, mobility, and their relation with electric current. Ohm's law.
Electrical resistance. V-l characteristics of Ohmic and non-ohmic conductors. Electrical energy and power. Electrical
resistivity and conductivity. Series and parallel combinations of resistors; Temperature dependence of resistance.
Internal resistance, potential difference, and emf of a cell, a combination of cells in series and parallel. Kirchhoff’s laws
and their applications. Wheatstone bridge. Metre Bridge.

UNIT 13: MAGNETIC EFFECTS OF CURRENT AND MAGNETISM: Biot - Savart law and its application to the current carrying
circular loop. Ampere's law and its applications to infinitely long current carrying straight wire and solenoid. Force on a
moving charge in uniform magnetic and electric fields.
Force on a current-carrying conductor in a uniform magnetic field. The force between two parallel currents carrying
conductors-definition of ampere. Torque experienced by a current loop in a uniform magnetic field: Moving coil
galvanometer, its sensitivity, and conversion to ammeter and voltmeter.
Current loop as a magnetic dipole and its magnetic dipole moment. Bar magnet as an equivalent solenoid, magnetic
field lines; Magnetic field due to a magnetic dipole (bar magnet) along its axis and perpendicular to its axis. Torque on a
magnetic dipole in a uniform magnetic field. Para-, dia- and ferromagnetic substances with examples, the effect of
temperature on magnetic properties.

UNIT 14: ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION AND ALTERNATING CURRENTS: Electromagnetic induction: Faraday's law. Induced
emf and current: Lenz’s Law, Eddy currents. Self and mutual inductance. Alternating currents, peak and RMS value of
alternating current/ voltage: reactance and impedance: LCR series circuit, resonance: power in AC circuits, wattless
current. AC generator and transformer.
UNIT 15: ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES: Displacement current. Electromagnetic waves and their characteristics, Transverse
nature of electromagnetic waves, Electromagnetic spectrum (radio waves, microwaves, infrared, visible, ultraviolet.
X-rays. Gamma rays), Applications of e.m. waves.

UNIT 16: OPTICS: Reflection of light, spherical mirrors, mirror formula. Refraction of light at plane and spherical surfaces,
thin lens formula, and lens maker formula. Total internal reflection and its applications. Magnification. Power of a Lens.
Combination of thin lenses in contact. Refraction of light through a prism. Microscope and Astronomical Telescope
(reflecting and refracting)
and their magnifying powers.
Wave optics: wavefront and Huygens' principle. Laws of reflection and refraction using Huygens principle. Interference,
Young's double-slit experiment, and expression for fringe width, coherent sources, and sustained interference of light.
Diffraction due to a single slit, width of central maximum. Polarization, plane-polarized light: Brewster's law, uses of
plane-polarized light and Polaroid.

UNIT 17: DUAL NATURE OF MATTER AND RADIATION: Dual nature of radiation. Photoelectric effect. Hertz and Lenard's
observations; Einstein's photoelectric equation: particle nature of light. Matter waves-wave nature of particle, de Broglie
relation.

UNIT 18: ATOMS AND NUCLEI: Alpha-particle scattering experiment; Rutherford's model of atom; Bohr model, energy
levels, hydrogen spectrum. Composition and size of nucleus, atomic masses, Mass-energy relation, mass defect; binding
energy per nucleon and its variation with mass number, nuclear fission, and fusion.

UNIT 19: ELECTRONIC DEVICES: Semiconductors; semiconductor diode: I-V characteristics in forward and reverse bias;
diode as a rectifier; I-V characteristics of LED. the photodiode, solar cell, and Zener diode; Zener diode as a voltage
regulator. Logic gates (OR. AND. NOT. NAND and NOR).

UNIT 20: EXPERIMENTAL SKILLS: Familiarity with the basic approach and observations of the experiments and activities:
1.Vernier calipers -its use to measure the internal and external diameter and depth of a vessel.
2.Screw gauge-its use to determine the thickness/ diameter of thin sheet/wire.
3.Simple Pendulum-dissipation of energy by plotting a graph between the square of amplitude and time.
4.Metre Scale - the mass of a given object by the principle of moments.
5.Young's modulus of elasticity of the material of a metallic wire.
6.Surf ace tension of water by capillary rise and effect of detergents,
7.Co-efficient of Viscosity of a given viscous liquid by measuring the terminal velocity of a given spherical body,
8.Speed of sound in air at room temperature using a resonance tube,
9.Specific heat capacity of a given (i) solid and (ii) liquid by method of mixtures.
10.The resistivity of the material of a given wire using a metre bridge.
11.The resistance of a given wire using Ohm's law.
12.Resistance and figure of merit of a galvanometer by half deflection method.
13.The focal length of;
(i)Convex mirror
(ii) Concave mirror, and
(ii)Convex lens, using the parallax method.
14.The plot of the angle of deviation vs angle of incidence for a triangular prism.
15.The refractive index of a glass slab using a travelling microscope.
16.Characteristic curves of a p-n junction diode in forward and reverse bias.
17.Characteristic curves of a Zener diode and finding reverse breakdown voltage.
18.Identification of Diode. LED, Resistor. A capacitor from a mixed collection of such items.
 CHEMISTRY
PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY

UNIT I: SOME BASIC CONCEPTS IN CHEMISTRY: Matter and its nature, Dalton's atomic theory: Concept of atom, molecule,
element, and compound:: Laws of chemical combination; Atomic and molecular masses, mole concept, molar mass,
percentage composition, empirical and molecular formulae: Chemical equations and stoichiometry.

UNIT 2: ATOMIC STRUCTURE: Nature of electromagnetic radiation, photoelectric effect; Spectrum of the hydrogen atom.
Bohr model of a hydrogen atom - its postulates, derivation of the relations for the energy of the electron and radii of the
different orbits, limitations of Bohr's model; Dual nature of matter, de Broglie's relationship. Heisenberg uncertainty
principle. Elementary ideas of quantum mechanics, quantum mechanics, the quantum mechanical model of the atom,
and its important features. Concept of atomic orbitals as one-electron wave functions: Variation of and 2 with r for 1s
and 2s orbitals; various quantum numbers (principal, angular momentum, and magnetic quantum numbers) and their
significance; shapes of s, p, and d - orbitals, electron spin, and spin quantum number: Rules for filling electrons in orbitals
– Aufbau principle. Pauli's exclusion principle and Hund's rule, electronic configuration of elements, and extra stability of
half-filled and completely filled orbitals.

UNIT 3: CHEMICAL BONDING AND MOLECULAR STRUCTURE: Kossel-Lewis approach to chemical bond formation, the
concept of ionic and covalent bonds.
Ionic Bonding: Formation of ionic bonds, factors affecting the formation of ionic bonds; calculation of lattice enthalpy.
Covalent Bonding: Concept of electronegativity. Fajan’s rule, dipole moment: Valence Shell Electron Pair Repulsion
(VSEPR) theory and shapes of simple molecules.
Quantum mechanical approach to covalent bonding: Valence bond theory - its important features, the concept of
hybridization involving s, p, and d orbitals; Resonance.
Molecular Orbital Theory - Its important features. LCAOs, types of molecular orbitals (bonding, antibonding), sigma and
pi-bonds, molecular orbital electronic configurations of homonuclear diatomic molecules, the concept of bond order,
bond length, and bond energy.
Elementary idea of metallic bonding. Hydrogen bonding and its applications.

UNIT 4: CHEMICAL THERMODYNAMICS: Fundamentals of thermodynamics: System and surroundings, extensive and
intensive properties, state functions, Entropy, types of processes.
The first law of thermodynamics - Concept of work, heat internal energy and enthalpy, heat capacity, molar heat
capacity; Hess’s law of constant heat summation; Enthalpies of bond dissociation, combustion, formation, atomization,
sublimation, phase transition, hydration, ionization, and solution.
The second law of thermodynamics - Spontaneity of processes; S of the universe and G of the system as criteria for
spontaneity. G (Standard Gibbs energy change) and equilibrium constant.

UNIT 5: SOLUTIONS
Different methods for expressing the concentration of solution - molality, molarity, mole fraction, percentage (by volume
and mass both), the vapour pressure of solutions and Raoult's Law - Ideal and non-ideal solutions, vapour pressure -
composition, plots for ideal and non-ideal solutions; Colligative properties of dilute solutions - a relative lowering of
vapour pressure, depression of freezing point, the elevation of boiling point and osmotic pressure; Determination of
molecular mass using colligative properties; Abnormal value of molar mass, Van’t Hoff factor and its significance.

UNIT 6: EQUILIBRIUM: Meaning of equilibrium is the concept of dynamic equilibrium.

Equilibria involving physical processes: Solid-liquid, liquid-gas - gas and solid-gas equilibria, Henry's law. General
characteristics of equilibrium involving physical processes.
Equilibrium involving chemical processes: Law of chemical equilibrium, equilibrium constants (Kp and Kc) and their
significance, the significance of G and G in chemical equilibrium, factors affecting equilibrium concentration,
pressure, temperature, the effect of catalyst; Le Chatelier’s principle.
UNIT 7: REDOX REACTIONS AND ELECTROCHEMISTRY: Electronic concepts of oxidation and reduction, redox reactions,
oxidation number, rules for assigning oxidation number, and balancing of redox reactions.
Electrolytic and metallic conduction, conductance in electrolytic solutions, molar conductivities and their variation with
concentration: Kohlrausch’s law and its applications.
Electrochemical cells - Electrolytic and Galvanic cells, different types of electrodes, electrode potentials including
standard electrode potential, half-cell and cell reactions, emf of a Galvanic cell and its measurement: Nernst equation
and its applications; Relationship between cell potential and Gibbs' energy change: Dry cell and lead accumulator; Fuel
cells.

UNIT 8: CHEMICAL KINETICS

Rate of a chemical reaction, factors affecting the rate of reactions: concentration, temperature, pressure, and catalyst;
elementary and complex reactions, order and molecularity of reactions, rate law, rate constant and its units, differential
and integral forms of zero and first-order reactions, their characteristics and half-lives, the effect of temperature on the
rate of reactions, Arrhenius theory, activation energy and its calculation, collision theory of bimolecular gaseous
reactions (no derivation)

INORGANIC CHEMISTRY

UNIT 9: CLASSIFICATION OF ELEMENTS AND PERIODICITY IN PROPERTIES: Modem periodic law and present form of the
periodic table, s, p. d and f block elements, periodic trends in properties of elements atomic and ionic radii, ionization
enthalpy, electron gain enthalpy, valence, oxidation states, and chemical reactivity.

UNIT 10: P- BLOCK ELEMENTS: Group -13 to Group 18 Elements, General Introduction: Electronic configuration and general
trends in physical and chemical properties of elements across the periods and down the groups; unique behaviour of
the first element in each group.

UNIT 11: d - and f- BLOCK ELEMENTS: Transition Elements General introduction, electronic configuration, occurrence and
characteristics, general trends in properties of the first-row transition elements - physical properties, ionization enthalpy,
oxidation states, atomic radii, colour, catalytic behaviour, magnetic properties, complex formation, interstitial
compounds, alloy formation; Preparation, properties, and uses of K2Cr2O7, and KMnO4.
Inner Transition Elements
Lanthanoids - Electronic configuration, oxidation states, and lanthanoid contraction.
Actinoids - Electronic configuration and oxidation states.

UNIT 12: CO-ORDINATION COMPOUNDS: Introduction to coordination compounds. Werner's theory; ligands, coordination
number, denticity. chelation; IUPAC nomenclature of mononuclear co-ordination compounds, isomerism;
Bonding-Valence bond approach and basic ideas of Crystal field theory, colour and magnetic properties; Importance of
co-ordination compounds (in qualitative analysis, extraction of metals, and in biological systems).

INORGANIC CHEMISTRY

UNIT 13: PURIFICATION AND CHARACTERISATION OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS: Purification - Crystallization, sublimation,
distillation, differential extraction, and chromatography - principles and their applications.
Qualitative analysis - Detection of nitrogen, sulphur, phosphorus, and halogens.
Quantitative analysis (basic principles only) - Estimation of carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen, halogens, sulphur, and
phosphorus.
Calculations of empirical formulae and molecular formulae: Numerical problems in organic quantitative analysis.

UNIT 14:SOME BASIC PRINCIPLES OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY: Tetravalency of carbon: Shapes of simple molecules -
hybridization (s and p): Classification of organic compounds based on functional groups: and those containing
halogens, oxygen, nitrogen, and sulphur; Homologous series: Isomerism - structural and stereoisomerism.
Nomenclature (Trivial and IUPAC)Covalent bond fission - Homolytic and heterolytic: free radicals, carbocations, and
carbanions; stability of carbocations and free radicals, electrophiles, and nucleophiles.
Electronic displacement in a covalent bond- Inductive effect, electromeric effect, resonance, and hyperconjugation.
Common types of organic reactions - Substitution, addition, elimination, and rearrangement.

UNITS 15: HYDROCARBONS: Classification, isomerism, IUPAC nomenclature, general methods of preparation, properties,
and reactions.
Alkanes - Conformations: Sawhorse and Newman projections (of ethane): Mechanism of halogenation of alkanes.
Alkenes - Geometrical isomerism: Mechanism of electrophilic addition: addition of hydrogen, halogens, water, hydrogen
halides (Markownikoffs and peroxide effect): Ozonolysis and polymerization.
Alkynes - Acidic character: Addition of hydrogen, halogens, water, and hydrogen halides: Polymerization.
Aromatic hydrocarbons - Nomenclature, benzene - structure and aromaticity: Mechanism of electrophilic substitution:
halogenation, nitration.
Friedel-Craft's alkylation and acylation, directive influence of the functional group in mono-substituted benzene.
halogens, water, hydrogen halides (Markownikoffs and peroxide effect): Ozonolysis and polymerization.

UNIT 16: ORGANIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING HALOGENS: General methods of preparation, properties, and reactions;
Nature of C-X bond; Mechanisms of substitution reactions.
Uses; Environmental effects of chloroform, iodoform freons, and DDT.

UNIT 17: ORGANIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING OXYGEN: General methods of preparation, properties, reactions, and uses
ALCOHOLS, PHENOLS, AND ETHERS
Alcohols: Identification of primary, secondary, and tertiary alcohols: mechanism of dehydration.
Phenols: Acidic nature, electrophilic substitution reactions: halogenation. nitration and sulphonation. Reimer - Tiemann
reaction.
Ethers: Structure.
Aldehyde and Ketones: Nature of carbonyl group; Nucleophilic addition to >C=O group, relative reactivities of aldehydes
and ketones; Important reactions such as - Nucleophilic addition reactions (addition of HCN. NH3, and its derivatives),
Grignard reagent; oxidation: reduction (Wolf Kishner and Clemmensen); the acidity of -hydrogen. aldol condensation,
Cannizzaro reaction. Haloform reaction, Chemical tests to distinguish between aldehydes and Ketones.
Carboxylic Acids: Acidic strength and factors affecting it.

UNIT 18: ORGANIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING NITROGENGeneral methods of preparation. Properties, reactions, and uses.
Amines: Nomenclature, classification structure, basic character, and identification of primary, secondary, and tertiary
amines and their basic character.
Diazonium Salts: Importance in synthetic organic chemistry.

UNIT 19: BIOMOLECULES: General introduction and importance of biomolecules.

CARBOHYDRATES - Classification; aldoses and ketoses: monosaccharides (glucose and fructose) and constituent
monosaccharides of oligosaccharides (sucrose, lactose, and maltose).
PROTEINS - Elementary Idea of -amino acids, peptide bond, polypeptides. Proteins: primary, secondary, tertiary, and
quaternary structure (qualitative idea only), denaturation of proteins, enzymes.
VITAMINS – Classification and functions.
NUCLEIC ACIDS – Chemical constitution of DNA and RNA.
Biological functions of nucleic acids.
Hormones (General introduction)

UNIT 20: PRINCIPLES RELATED TO PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY: Detection of extra elements (Nitrogen, Sulphur, halogens) in
organic compounds; Detection of the following functional groups; hydroxyl (alcoholic and phenolic), carbonyl (aldehyde
and ketones) carboxyl, and amino groups in organic compounds.
Compact JEE Physics Module
--- CHAPTER INDEX ---
 PHYSICS NOTES
EQUATIONS & ANSWERS
A. Units for Physical Quantities B. Fundamental Physical Constants C. Conversionfactors and alternativeunits
Base Units Symbol Unit Base Units Symbol Unit Unit Description
Length l, x Meter - m Mass of electron me 9.11×10–31 kg
Angle º (degree)
Mass m, M Kilogram - kg Mass of proton mp 1.67×10–27 kg
Avogadro Constant NA 6.022×1023 mol–1 CGS unit (g cm2/s2)
Energy Erg
Temperature T Kelvin - K 1 erg = 10–7 J
Elementary charge e 1.602×10–19 C
Time t Second - s Electron
Faraday Constant F 96,485 C/mol Energy 1 eV = 1.602×10–19 J
Volt
Electric Current I Ampere - A (C/s)
Speed of light c 3×108 m s –1
CGS unit (g cm/s2 = erg/cm)
Derived Units Symbol Unit Force Dyne
Molar Gas Constant R 8.314 J mol–1 K–1 1 dyne = 10–5 N
Acceleration a m/s2 Boltzmann Constant k 1.38×10–23 J K–1 Volume Liter 1 L = 1 dm3
Ang. Accel. radian/s2 Gravitation Constant G 6.67×10–11 m3 kg–1 s–2
Pressure Bar 1 Bar = 105 Pa
Ang. Momentum L kg m2/s Permeability of Space µ0 ×10–7 N/A2

Ang. Velocity radian/sec Permittivity of Space 0 8.85×10–12 F/m Length Angstrom 1 Å = 1×10–10m

Angle , radian

Capacitance C Farad F (C/V)

MATHEMATICAL CONCEPTS
Charge Q, q, e Coulomb C (A s) A. Vector Algebra b. Cross or Vector Product :
1. Vector : Denotes directional character using (x, y, z) C = A × B = |A| |B|sin e
Density kg/m3 components fig 1 – Angle between A and B, vector e is
a. Unit vectors : i along x, j along y, k along z perpendicular to A and B
Displacement s, d, h meter - m
b. Vector A = Ax i + Ay j + Az k i j k
Electric Field V/m c. Length of A = | A| = Ax2 + Ay2+ Az2 A × B = Ax Ay Az
2. Addition of vectors A & B, add components: Bx By Bz
Electric Flux e Vm
A + B = (Ax+B x)i + (Ay+B y) j + (Az+B z)k Sample : Vector Product :
Electromotive Sample Addition and Length Calculations : A = 2i + j B = i + 3j
E Volt - V
Force (EMF) A=3i+4j –3k |A| = 9 + 16+ 9 i j k
A × B = 2 1 0 = (6 – 1) k = 5k
Energy E, U, K Joule J (kg m2 s–2) = 34 = 5 .83 1 3 0
Entropy S J/K B=–2i+6j+5k |B| = 4 + 36 + 25 •If A and B are in x-y plane, A × B is along
= 65 = 8.06 the + z direction
Force F Newton - N (kg m/s2 = J/m) C
• is the angle formed by AB: sin =
A+B=i+10 j+2k |A+B| = 1 + 100 + 4 A B
Frequency f, Hertz - Hz (cycle/s) Given : |A| = 5 |B| = 10 |C| = 5
= 105 = 10.25
Heat Q Joule - J Note: |A| + |B| |A + B| sin = 5/( 5 × 10 ) = 5/ 50 = 1/ 2
3. Multiply A & B: < AB:
Magnetic Field B Tesla (Wb/m2) a. Dot or scalar product : A • B = |A| |B|cos = c. The Right-Hand Rule gives the orientation of
(Ax Bx) + (Ay By ) + (Az Bz ) vector e fig 4
Magnetic Flux m Weber Wb (kg m2/A s2) Note: is the angle between A and B; B. Trigonometry
A • B = 0, if fig 2 1. Basic r elations for a triangle fig 5
Momentum p kg m/s y
Sample : Scalar pr oduct : sin = r Values Of sin, cos and tan
Potential V Voltage V (J/C) A = 5i + 2j B = 3i + 5j rad [º] sin cos tan
A • B = 3 × 5 + 2 × 5 = 15 + 10 = 25 cos = r x
0 [0º] 0.00 1.00 0.00
Power P, P Watt - W (J/s) |A|= 25 + 4 = 29 = 5.385
y sin 0.50 0.866 0.577
|B|= 9 + 25 = 34 = 5.831
tan = x = cos 0.707 0.707 1.00
Pressure P Pascal - Pa (N/m2)
25 sin2 + cos2 = 1 0.866 0.50 1.732
Resistance R Ohm (V/A) cos = A : B = =0.796
A B 5 .385 # 5 .83 2. Sinand Cos waves 1.00 0.00

Torque Nm = cos-1 fig 3 fig 6 0.00 –1.00 0.00

Velocity v m/s

Volume V m3

Wavelength meter - m

Work W Joule - J (N m)

Compact Notes | 1
MATHEMATICAL
MATHEMATICALCONCEP
CONCEPTS( cont.)
TS ( cont.) PHYSICS
PHYSICS&&MEASUREMENT
MEASUREMENT
C.C.Geometry
Geometry 77 A.A. Understand
Understand Your
Your Data
Data • •Electrostatic
Electrostaticpotential
potentialenergy:
energy:
Circle
Circle r 2r; 2Circumference
; Circumference= =2 2 1.1. Vector
Vector vs.vs.scalar
scalar q1 q12 q2 r r
a. a. Vector
Vector : Hasmagnitude
: Has magnitudeand anddirection
direction UcUc 0 )0 )r r q2q2 1414
1 ...... ...
q1q...
Sphere
Sphere : Volume= =4/34/3r 3r 3
: Volume r 2r 2 r r
b.b. Scalar
Scalar : Magnitudeonly,
: Magnitude only,nonodirection
direction 2 2
Cylinder
Cylinder: Volume: Volume= =h hr 2r 2 cc ;
0 0units
; units
are
are
J m/C
J m/C
2.2. Number
Number andandunitunit
Triangle
Triangle: Sum : Sumofofangles
angles= =180º 180º figfig7 7 r in
r inm,m,q1qand
1 andq2qin 2 inCoulomb
Coulomb
r r a. a. Physical data,
Physical data, constants
constants and and equations
equations have have
D.D.
Coordinate
CoordinateSystems Systems numericalvalues
numerical valuesand andunits
units Units
Units
ofofUcU=c = (J (J
m/Cm/C2)C
2)C
2/m
2/m
==J Jfigfig
1414
1.1.
OneOnedimension
dimension(1-D) (1-D): position
: position= =x xfigfig8 8 b.b.AA correctanswer
correct answermust mustinclude
includethethecorrect
correctnumerical
numerical 5.5.
Using
UsingConversion
ConversionFactors Factors
• •The The x position
x position is is
described
described relative
relative
toto
anan
origin
origin valuePLUS
value PLUSthethecorrectcorrectunitunit a. a.
Purpose
Purpose: :Modify
Modifyexperimental
experimentaldata datatoto
2.2.
TwoTwodimensions
dimensions(2-D) (2-D) figfig9 9 hh
r r 3.3. Significantfigures
Significant figures(sigfig)
(sigfig) match
match thetheunits
unitsofofconstants
constantsand
andequations
equations
x= r cos, y, =
x =r cos r sin, r,2r=2 =x2x+2 +y2y2
y =r sin a. a.
TheThe # of
# of sigfigs
sigfigs reflects
reflects thethe accuracy
accuracy ofof experimental
experimental b. b.
SISIunits
units
: MKS
: MKS (m-kg-s)
(m-kg-s) and
and
CGS
CGS (cm-g-s)
(cm-g-s)
a. a.
Calculate
Calculate(r,(r,) from ) from(x,(x,y):y): data; calculations
data; calculations must must accommodate
accommodate this this c. c.
Common
CommonEnglish Englishunits:units:Foot,
Foot,pounds,
pounds,
-1ycm
-1 c ym uncertainty
uncertainty BTU,
BTU,calories
calories
r =r = x2x+2+y2 y;2 ; = =sinsin r r b.b.
ForFormultiplication
multiplication: :The The# #ofofsigfigs
sigfigsininthethefinalfinal d.d.
Conversion
Conversionfactors factorsareareobtained
obtainedfrom
fromanan
b.b.
Calculate
Calculate(x,(x,y)y)from from(r,(r, ), ),ororx xand andy y 88 answeris islimited
answer limitedbybythetheentry entrywith
withthethefewest
fewestsigfigs
sigfigs equality
equalityofoftwo twounits
units
components
componentsofofa vector a vector“r” “r”with angle; ;
withangle c. c.
ForFor addition: The
addition : The# of# of decimal
decimal places
places inin
thethe final
final answer
answer Sample
Sample : 100
: 100cmcm= =1 1mm
x= r cos; y; =
x =r cos y =r sin
r sin –x–x 0 0 +x+x is is
givengiven byby thethe entry
entry with
with thethe fewest
fewest decimal
decimal places
places •This
•Thisequality
equality gives
givestwo
twoconversion
conversion factors:
factors:
Sample
Sample : :Generate
Generatex xand andy yvector
vector v =v = dx/dt;
dx/dt; d.d. Rulesforfor
Rules “roundingsigfigs”
“rounding sigfigs” 1m1m &&100 100cmcm
a= a= dv/dt
dv/dt •If•Ifthethelast
lastdigit
digitis is>5,
>5,round
roundupup 100
100 cmcm 1m1m
components,
components, given:
given: r =r = 5.0, = =r r(30º)
5.0, (30º) •If•Ifthethelast
lastdigit
digitis is<5,
<5,round
rounddowndown
66 •Use
•Use 1st1factor
thethe st factor
toto
convert
convert
“cm”
“cm”toto
“m”
“m”
Polar 9 9
y y Polar •If•Ifdigit
digit= =5,5,round
roundupupif ifpreceding
precedingdigit
digitis isodd
odd
x= x =r cos
r cosbrbrl =l =5.05.0× × 0.866= =4.33
0.866 4.33 Samples
Samples : : Sample
Sample : 54
: 54 cmcm × × 1m1m = = 0.54
0.54 mm
66 r r 100
100 cmcm
1.245+ +0.40.4= =1.61.6(1(1decimal
1.245 decimalplace)
place)
y= y =r sin
r sin brbrl =l =5 5× × 0.50= =2.50
0.50 2.50 1.345× ×
1.345 2.42.4= =3.23.2(2(2sigfigs)
sigfigs)
•Usethethe2nd2ndtotoconvert
•Use convert“m” “m”toto“cm”
“cm”
66
Checkyour
Check your work: x:2x+2 +y2y=2 =r 2r 2
work Units
Unitsofofbasic
basicvariables
variables Sample
Sample : 2.3
: 2.3 mm × ×100100 cmcm= = 230
230 cmcm
xx 1m1m
2.52.52+ 2+ 4.334.33 2= 2=6.25
6.25+ +18.75 18.75= =25.00
25.00 Cartesian: B.B. SolvethetheProblem
Solve ProblemStrategically
Strategically
Cartesian: (x,(x,
y)y) time:
time:
second
second
s s position:
position:
meter
meter
mm
2 2
checks,r r = =25.00
It Itchecks, 25.00 Polar:
Polar: (r,(r,) ) a. a.
TwoTwokey keyissues
issues: :
3.3.
Three
ThreeDimensions
Dimensions(3-D) (3-D) mass:
mass:kilogram
kilogram
kgkg volume: m3m3
volume: 1.1. Understandthethephysics
Understand physicsprinciples
principles
a. a.
Cartesian
Cartesian( x, ( x,y, y,z):z):The
Thebasicbasiccoordinate
coordinate 1010 2.2. Havea correct
Have a correctmathematical
mathematicalstrategystrategy
system
system Cylindrical
Cylindrical density:
density:
kg/m 3 3
kg/m Temperature:
Temperature:
KK b.b. Usefulsteps
Useful stepsininproblem
problemsolvingsolving: :
b.b.
Cylindrical
Cylindrical: (r, : (r,, z), z)figfig1010 zz 1.1. Preparea rough
Prepare a roughsketch
sketchofofthetheproblem
problem
•Polar
•Polarcoordinates,
coordinates,with witha za axis
z axis zz velocity:
velocity:
m/s
m/s acceleration:
acceleration:
m/s 2 2
m/s 2.2. Identifyrelevant
Identify relevantphysical
physicalvariables,
variables,
•Calculate
•Calculate(r,(r,) from ) from(x,(x,y);y); physicalconcepts
physical conceptsand andconstants
constants
calculate(x,(x,y)y)from
calculate from(r,(r,) ) yy energy:
energy:
Joule
Joule
J =J kg m2m
= kg /s22/s2 force:
force:
Newton
Newton
NN= kg
= kg
m/s 2 2
m/s Pitfall- do
! ! Pitfall - donotnot simply
simply search
search forfor
thethe
•Same
•Sameprocess processasasforfor2-d 2-dpolar;
polar; “right”
“right” equation
equation inin your
your notes
notes oror text
text
z: z:same
sameasasCartesian
Cartesian r r ! ! Pitfall
Pitfall: :IfIfthe
theunits
unitsare
arewrong,
wrong,the
theanswer
answerisis 3. 3. Describe thethe physics
Describe physics using using a a
c. c.
Spherical
Spherical: (r, : (r,, , ) ) xx wrong!
wrong! mathematical diagram,
mathematical diagram, with with
x= x =r sin
r sin cos cos, y, = y =r sin
r sin sinsin, , x =x =rcos
rcos, ,
Hint
Hint: Before
: Beforedoing
doingthethecalculation:
calculation: appropriate
appropriate symbols
symbols andand a coordinate
a coordinate
y =y =rsin
rsin, ,
r cos, r,2r=2 =x2x+2 +y2y+2 +z2z2figfig1111
z =z =r cos 2 2 * *Check
Checkallallconstants
constantsand andvariable
variableunits
units system
system
r r= = x x+2 +
2 y2y2 4.4. Obtainthetherelevant
Obtain relevantphysical
physicalconstants
constants
•Calculate
•Calculate(r,(r,, , ) from ) from(x,(x,y, y,z) z) * Take
* Takespecial
specialcare
careif ifyou
youderive
derivethetheequation
equation
•Calculate
•Calculate(x,(x,y, y,z) z)from from(r,(r,, , ) ) 1111 DoDoyou youhave
haveallallthetheessential
essentialdata?
data?
4.4.
Dimensional
Dimensionalanalysis analysis
Hint:Follow
Hint: Followthethestrategystrategyforfor2-d2-d Spherical
Spherical Verify
Verifythatthatconstants
constantsand andvariables
variablesininananequation
equationresult
result Hint
Hint : : You You may may have have extra extra
zz information
information
polarcoordinates
polar coordinates r r ininthethecorrect
correctoverall
overallunit
unit
E.E.Use
UseofofCalculus
CalculusininPhysics Physics Samples
Samples : :TheTheenergy
energyunit unitis isJoules
Joulesforforkinetic,
kinetic, 5.5.
TheThehard hardpart part: :Derive
Deriveororobtainobtaina a
1.1. Methodsfrom
Methods fromcalculus
calculusareareused usedinin mathematical expression
mathematical expression forfor thethe
yy gravitational
gravitationaland andCoulombic
Coulombicenergy energy
problem;use
problem; usedimensional
dimensionalanalysisanalysistoto
physicsdefinitions,
physics definitions,and andthethederivations
derivations
ofofequations
equationsand andlaws
laws • •Kinetic
Kinetic : K: K= =1 mv
1 mv
2 2 checkthetheequation,
check equation,constants
constantsand anddata
data
22
mm v v1212 6.6.
TheTheeasy
easypart part: Plug
: Plugnumbers
numbersinto intothethe
Physical
Physical meanings
meanings ofof calculus
calculus expressions: x x
expressions: mm ininkg,kg,
v in
v inm/s
m/s Units UnitsofofK K= =kgkg equation
equation andand use
use thethe calculator
calculator toto obtain
obtain
dFd]Fx]gxg x = x= r sin cos
r sin cos, , m2m/s22/s=2 =
J J figfig1212 thethenumerical
numericalanswer answer
a. a. Derivative
Derivative - slope
- slope ofofthethe curve:
curve:
dxdx y =y = r sin sinsin, ,
r sin • •Gravitational
Gravitationalpotentialpotentialenergy:
energy: 1313 7.7. Checkthe
Check thefinal
finalanswer,
answer,using usingthe the
b. b. Integral
Integral - area
- area under
under thethe F(x)dxz =z =
curve:F(x)dx
curve: r cos, ,
r cos UgU=g =mmg gh h Constant:Constant:g g= =9.89.8m/s 2 2
m/s mm original
original statement
statement ofofthethe problem,
problem, your
your
Samples
Samples : : r 2r=2 =x 2x+2 +y2y+2 +z2z2 sketchand
sketch andcommon
commonsense; sense;arearethethe
mm ininkg,kg,h hininmm hh
• Position:
• Position:x or x orF(x)F(x) UnitsofofUgU=g =kgkgmm
Units 2/s22/s=
2=J J figfig1313 units&&sign
units signcorrect?
correct?
Velocity:
Velocity:v(x) v(x)= =dFdF ] x]gxg
dtdt Common
Commonderivatives
derivatives
Acceleration:a a= =dvdv
Acceleration: ] x]gxg and andintegrals
integrals
• Power
• Powerand work: dtdt
andwork: ] x]gxg F(x) MECHANICS
MECHANICS
F(x) dFdF
F(x) F(x)dxdx
P P= =dW dW dxdx
dtdt A.A.
Motion
Motionalong
alonga Straight
a StraightLine Line B.B.Motion
Motioninin Two
Twoandand Three
ThreeDimensions
Dimensions
• Energy
• Energyand andforce:
force: 0 0 constantconstant xx 1.1.
Goal
Goal
: Determine
: Determineposition,
position,velocity,
velocity,acceleration
acceleration 1.1.
Goal
Goal: Similar
: Similartoto“A,”
“A,”with
with2 2oror3 3dimensions
dimensions
E E= =Fdx Fdx 1 12 2 2.2.
KeyKey
terms
terms: Acceleration:
: Acceleration: a= a= dv/dt;
dv/dt;
velocity:
velocity: v =v = dx/dt
dx/dt 2.2.
KeyKeyconcept
concept : :Select
SelectCartesian,
Cartesian,polar polaroror
2.2.
Other
Otherusefulusefulexpressions:
expressions: xx 11 xx
22 spherical
spherical coordinates,
coordinates, depending
depending onon thethe
type ofof
type
3.3.
KeyKeyEquations
Equations: x: = x =vi tvi+t 1+ at
1 at
2 2 vf v=f =vi v+i +at at
d]dF] F:G:gGg dGdG dFdF 22 motion
motion
a. a. == F F + +G G 1 x13x3
dxdx dxdx dxdx x2x2 2x2x 33 x(t),
x(t),v(t)
v(t)forforvariable
variablea a figfig1515 Sample
Sample :A : Aprojectile
projectileis islaunched
launchedat atangle angle
d (dF(F' G' )G) 1 1dFdF F FdGdG xx xx xx with
withvriv;rihow
; howdodowewesetsetupupthetheproblem?
problem?
b.b. == - - 1515
dxdx G Gdxdx G2G2dxdx xnxn nxnx n –1 1 1 xnx
n –1 + 1n + 1
n+ n+11 Step
Step1 .1Define
. Definex as
x ashorizontal
horizontaland andy vertical
y vertical
c. c.
Partial
Partialderivative
derivative: : Step
Step2 .2Determine
. Determineinitial
initialvxivxi
andandvyivyifigfig1616
11 - -1 1 ln x a=
a=00 a>
a> 00 a<
a< 00
2F2(Fx(, xy, yz), z) dFdF ln x vxivxi
= =vrivricos
cos vyivyi= =vrivrisinsin
== , , xx x2 x2
2x2x dxdx
t t t t t t
holdholdy & y &z constant
z constant 1 1 x ln 1616
d. d.
Gradient
Gradient Operator
Operator (Del) (Del)= = lnlnx x xx x lnx x– –x x vv vv vv r r vyvy
/ /x +x +/ /y + y +/ /z z x x x x vi vi
ee ee e xe x
e. e.
Integration
Integrationbybyparts parts: : v0v0
udvudv = =uvuv – –vdu vdu sin(x)
sin(x) cos(x)
cos(x) –cos(x)
–cos(x) a=
a=00 a>
a>00 a<
a< 00 vxvx
f. f.Symbol
Symbolforforintegration
integrationofof t t t t t t
cos(x)
cos(x) x) x) sin(x)
sin(x) v0v0 Step 3.3.
Step Identify axa-xGravitational
Identify - Gravitational
force
force
=>=>
aya=y –g
= –g
closed
closedsurfacesurfaceororvolume:volume:# #

Compact Notes | 2
 Step
Step4 .4Identify
. Identifya ya-y No - Nohorizontal
horizontalforce force=>=>a xa=x =0 0 c. c.
Power
Power == Work/time
Work/time: W :W = =Power
Powert or t orP(t)
P(t)dtdt b.b.Moment
Momentofofinertia inertia: :
Step
Step5 .5Develop
. Developx-x-and andy-equations
y-equationsofofmotion motion d.d.
Wnet
Wnet= =K final
K final– –K initial
K initial
; K; Kis isconverted
convertedtotowork work I =I = mimrii 2r,i 2with, with r i rabout
i about thethe center
centerofof mass
massalong
alongaa
x= x =vixvtix+t +1 a1xat 2xt=2 =vitvit Sample
Sample : Determine
: Determine thetheworkwork expended
expended inin lifting
lifting specific
specificaxis axis
22 a 50kgkgbox
a 50 box1010m;m;given: given:a a= =g g= =9.89.8m/s m/s2 2
HintHint: :I Ifunctions
functionsasasthetheeffective effectivemass massforfor
y= y =viyvtiy+t +1 a1yat 2yt=2 =viyvtiy–t –1 gt
1 gt
2 2 Equations
Equations: F: F= =mmg => g => WW = =mmg gd d rotational
rotationalenergy energyand andmomentum
momentum
22 22 2× 2×
Calculation
Calculation: W :W == 5050 kgkg×× 9.89.8m/sm/s 1010 mm == 4,900
4,900J J Sample
Sample : I: for
I forbodies
bodiesofofmass massm:m: figfig2424
C.C.
Newton’s
Newton’sLaws LawsofofMotion Motion
F. F.Potential
PotentialEnergy Energy&&Energy EnergyConservation
Conservation
1.1.Goal
Goal: Examine
: Examineforce forceand andacceleration
acceleration Twirling
Twirling thin
thinrodrod ofoflength,
length, L L
1.1.Goal
Goal: Use
: Use energy
energy conservation
conservationtoto study
study thetheinterplay
interplay LL 2424
2.2.KeyKeyconcepts
concepts : Newton’s
: Newton’sLaws Laws : :
LawLaw#1#1 .A . Abodybodyremainsremainsat atrest restororininmotion
motionunless
unless
ofofpotential
potentialand andkinetic
kineticenergy
energy I =I =1 1mm L 2L 2
1212
2.2.KeyKeyEquations
Equations
influenced
influencedbybya force a force Rotatingcylinde
Rotating cylinde r of
r ofr adius,
r adius, RR
a. a.
Potential
Potentialenergy energy: Energy: Energyofofposition:
position:U(r);U(r);
LawLaw#2#2 . Forces
. Forcesacting actingonona abody bodyequal equalthethemass
mass
multiplied
multiplied byby thethe acceleration; acceleration; force force and and
gravitation
gravitation(U(U= =mgh), mgh), I =I =1 1mm RR 2 2
RR
22
acceleration
accelerationdetermine determinemotion motion electrostatic
electrostatic(U(Ua aqq/r) qq/r)
Rotating
Rotatingsphere sphere ofofr adius,
r adius, RR
LawLaw#3#3 . Every
. Everyaction actionis iscountered
counteredbybyananopposing
opposing b.b.
E E= =K K + +U UConservative
Conservativesystem: system:NoNoexternal externalforce force
I =I =2 2mm 2 2 RR
action
action Sample
Sample : Examine
: ExamineK K &&U Uforfora launched
a launchedrocket rocket RR
55
3.3.
KeyKeyequations
equations: : Initial
Initial: h: h= =0,0,therefore,
therefore,U U= =mmg gh = h =0 0
a. a.
LawLaw#2#2 : F: F= =mm a aoror F F= =mm aa Sample
Sample : DeterminethetheI for
: Determine I fora aspherical
sphericalEarth,
Earth,
E E= =KiK=i =1 m 1 mv 2v 2
i i
22 assumeuniform
assume uniformM;M;
Hint
Hint: Forces
: Forcesarearevectors!
vectors!
b.b.
Types
Typesofofforces
forces : Body - gravity:FgF=g =mm
: Body- gravity: gg Next,
Next,resolve
resolveinto intox and
x andy components:
y components:KxiKxi &&KyiKyi Data:MM
Data: = =6 ×10
6 ×10 2424 kg,kg,r =r =6.4×10
6.4×10 6m 6m

•Surface
•Surface- friction:
- friction:= =FfF=f =µFµF Note:
Note:KxKxis isconstantconstantduring during I =I =2 2
M Mr 2r=2= 2 2× ×
6×10 6×10 2424
kg kg× ×
(6.4×10
(6.4×10 6 m)
6 m)
2 2
n n yy 2020 55 55
thetheflight
flight 2 2
Sample
Sample : :F tF texerted
exertedonon = =9.89.8× × 37 37
1010 kgkgmm 2 2
F nF n 1717 AtAtmax maxheightheight: K : yK=y =0;0;U U= =
object
objectonona horizontal
a horizontalplane plane
mmg gh = h =KxiKxi e. e.
Rotational
RotationalEnergy Energy = =1 I1 I 2 2
F fF=f =µFµF =
n n =µF µF =
g g µ
= µ
m m g g F F
f f F tF t 22
Final
Finalstatestate: Rocket
: Rockethits hitsthethe xx f. f.Torque
Torque : : = =I I = =r ×r × F F(ang.
(ang.acceleration
accelerationforce)force)
NetNetforce
force= =F tF–t –F fF ffigfig1717 mm ground:
ground:U U= =0,0,K K = =KiKi 1 1 3 3
I. I.Angular
Angular Momentum
Momentum
Sample
Sample : Objectononplane
: Object plane figfig2020 1.1.Goal
Goal : Quantify
: Quantifythetheforce, force,energy energy
inclinedat atangle
inclined angle; ;
Ff
f

G.G.Collisions
Collisionsand andLinear
Linear Momentum
Momentum figfig2121 2525
F

andandmomentum
momentumofofrotating rotatingobjects objects
examineFgF&
examine g& F fF f 1.1.Goal
Goal: Examine
: Examinemomentum momentumofofcolliding collidingbodiesbodies 2.2.KeyKeyvariables
variablesand andequations
equations
F nF=n =F gFcos
g cos = = mmg cosg cos 1818
m
m

Hint
Hint : For
: For2-D 2-Doror3-D, 3-D,use use 2121 a. a.
Angular
Angular momentum
momentum: :
F fF=f =µFµFn= n=µ µmmg cos g cos L L= =I I = =r ×r × p p= =r ×r × vdmvdm
F nF n Cartesian
Cartesiancomponents
components
F tF=t =mmg gsinsin figfig1818 mm 1 1 r r
2.2.KeyKey Variables
Variablesand andEquations
Equations b. b. Torque: : = =
Torque r ×r ×F F= = dL/dt;
dL/dt;
e. e.
LawLaw#3#3 : : a. a.
Types
Typesofofcollisions
collisions : : note:
note: vector
vector cross
cross product
productfigfig 2525 F F
F 12
F 12= =–F–F ororm1ma11a=1 =–m –m FF F gF g
2121 2 a22a 2 t t •Elastic
•Elastic : Conserve
: Conserveenergy energy J. J.Static
StaticEquilibrium
Equilibriumand andElasticity
Elasticity
Sample
Sample : Examine
: Examinerecoil recoilofof FtFt mm
•Inelastic
•Inelastic : Energy
: Energylost lostasasheat heatoror 2 2 1.1.Case
Case1 :1Examine: Examineseveral severalforces forcesactingactingonona body
a body
bullet
bulletfired
firedfrom
froma rifle
a rifle deformation
deformation • •Guiding
Guidingprinciplesprinciples: Equilibrium
: Equilibriumis isdefined definedas:as:
Rifle
Riflerecoil
recoil= =a (bullet)
a (bullet)× × m(bullet)
m(bullet) b.b.
Relative
Relativemotion motionand andframes
framesofofreference
reference : A :A body
body force
force= =0 0&& torque torque= =0 0
D.D.
Cir
Cir
cular
cularMotion
Motion figfig1919 moves
moveswith withvelocity
velocityv vininframe frameS;S;ininframeframeS’,S’,thethe TheThepoint pointofofbalance
balanceis isthethecenter centerofofmassmass
1.1.
Goal
Goal : Examine
: Examinebody bodymoving
movinginina circular
a circularpath;
path; velocityis isv’;v’;if ifVs’Vs’is isthethevelocity
velocity velocityofofframe frameS’S’ HintHint: :Evaluate
Evaluateeach each
useuse2-d 2-dpolar coordinates:(r,(r,) )
polarcoordinates: relative
relativetotoS,S,then thenv = v =Vs’Vs’+ +v’v’ component;
component;any anynetnetforce force
Key
Keyvariables
variables: : mm mm
c. c.
Linear
Linear Momentum
Momentum: p: p= =mmv v moves
movesthetheobject, object,any anynetnet 1 1 x1x1 x2x2 2 2
distance
distancefrom
from d.d.
Conserve
ConserveK K&&p pforforconservative conservative system system(no (no torque
torquerotatesrotatesthetheobject object 2626
r r mm external
externalforces):
forces): Sample
Sample : Beam
: Beambalance balance
rotation
rotationcenter
center
figfig2626 For
For equilib
equilibrium:
rium:
1 1mv 2 2
mv = = mv 1 1 mv 2 2 mv mv AA F1F1
anglewith
angle with 22 i i 22 f f i =i = mv mvf f mm 1 x11x=1=mm2 x22x2
rad
rad atat 2.2.Case
Case2.2.Examine Examine deformation
deformation 27a
27a
reference(x)(x)axis
reference axis 1919 Sample
Sample1-d 1-dproblem:
problem:Two Twobodies
bodiescollide,
collide,stick stick ofofa solid
a solidbody body
a ca c s s KeyKeyEquation Equation: :Stress l l
Stress0=0=elastic l l
elasticmodulus
modulus× ×strain; strain;
together
together and and move
move away
away from
from thethe
collision
collision sitesitefigfig
2222
rad/s angular
rad/s angularvelocity
velocity modulus
modulus : stress/strain
: stress/strain AA
=Fforce/change
=lFforce/change F(Hooke’s
1F1
(Hooke’s Law)
Law)
Conservation
Conservationofofmomentum momentum: : Note:
Note:Force Force isl is
longitudinal
longitudinal
m1mv11iv1i+ +m2mv22iv2i= =(m(m 27a
27a
r r 1+ 1+ m2m)v2)v
f f •Linear(Tensile)
•Linear (Tensile)Stress Stress : Young’sModulus
: Young’s ModulusY Y
2 2 angular
angular
rad/s
rad/s v1v1 v2v2 FF/ A/ A l0 l0 l l
acceleration
acceleration 2222 mm mm YY ==1 1
2 2 before
1 1 before collision
collision DlD / ll0/ l0 Note:
Note:Force Force F lFisl Ais
longitudinal
Alongitudinal F1F1
motion
motionarc;arc;
s s mm mm 1 1mm 2 2 vf vf after after collision
collision figfig27a27a 27a27a
s =s =r r ( (ininrad)
rad)
f. f.Impulse:
Impulse:I =I =F Ft or t orF(t)dt
F(t)dt l0 lx0 x l l
Hint
Hint
: For
: Fora full
a fullrotation,
rotation, s s r =r = circumference
circumference g.g.
Momentum
Momentumchange change: p:finpfin= =pinitpinit+ +I I
ofofa circle
a circleofofradius
radiusr r Note:Force
Note: Force F lFisl is
longitudinal
longitudinal
H.H.
Rotation
Rotationofofa Rigid
a RigidObject
Object FtFt
2.2.
Tangential
Tangentialacceleration
acceleration && velocity:
velocity: vt v=t =r r ; a; ta=t =r r; ; 1.1.
GoalGoal : Examine
: Examine thethe
rotation
rotation ofof a rigid
a rigid body
body ofof
aa •ShapeStrStress:
•Shape ess:Shear
ShearModulus
Modulus AS AS 27b
27b
along
alongpath
pathofofmotion
motionarcarc defined
definedshape shapeandandmass
mass F /FA/ A xx
v v
2 2 S S= = t t
3.3.
Centripetal
Centripetal acceleration:
acceleration:a ca= c =r r; directed
; directedtowards towards 2.2.
Key Keyvariables
variablesand andequation
equations:s: DxD/ xh/ h
hh
thethecenter
center figfig1919 a. a.Center
Center ofofmass
mass: x:cm , y,cmycm
xcm , z,cmzcm figfig27b
27b FtFt
Sample
Sample : Determine
: Determinevt vatt atthetheEarth’s
Earth’sequator
equator AA 27b
27b
Rm Rmxx Rm Rim yii yi RmRm zz
Equation
Equation: v:t v=t =
r r Data
Data : r: =r =
6.378
6.378 ×× 6m
1010 6m xcmxcm = = i ii i ycmycm
== zcm
zcm= = i ii i Fixed
Fixedface
face
Rm Rimi Rm Rimi RmRimi xx
×× 6060××6060 secsec
== 86,400
86,400 ss Sample
Sample : Calculate
: Calculate thethe center
center ofof massmassforfora 1a kg
1 kg Note:h hForce
Note: ForceF tFist is
tangential
tangential toto
face
face
AA
Convert totoSISI
Convert : : × ×1 1day/86,400
day/86,400s =s = &&a 2a 2kgkgball ballconnected
connectedbybya 1.00 a 1.00mmbar bar FtFt
-5 -5 AA 27b
27b
7.37.3× ×
1010 rad/s
rad/s ball1:1:x1x=1 =0.00,
ball 0.00,m1m=1 =1 1kg; kg;m1mx11x=1 =0.00 0.00kgkgmm Fixed
Fixedface
face
Calculatevt:vt:
Calculate ball
ball2:2:x2x=2 =1.00 1.00mm 2= 2= 2 2kg;kg;m2mx2 2x=2 =2.00 2.00kgkgmm Note:Force
Note: ForceF tFist is
tangential
tangential toto
face
face
AA
6m 6m -5 -5 hh
vt v=t =
r r== 6.378
6.378××1010 ×× 7.37.3
××1010 rad/s
rad/s
vt v=t =
465
465
m/s
m/s mm i =i = 1 1kgkg+ +2 2kgkg= =3 3kgkg •Volume
•VolumeStress Stress: Bulk
: BulkModulus
ModulusB B
E.E.Energy
Energyand and Work
Work mm VV
i xii x=i =
m1mx11x+1 +m2mx22x=2 =0.000.00+ +2.00 2.00= =2.002.00kgkgmm F F/ A/ A
1.1.Goal
Goal: :Examine
Examinethetheenergy
energyand andworkworkassociated
associated BB == n n Fixed
Fixed face
face
Rm Rm x x 2 .00 kgkg
2 .00 mm DVD/VV/ V
with
withforces
forcesacting
actingononananobject
object xcmxcm= = i ii =i = = =0.66 0.66mm Note:Force
Note: ForceF tFist is
tangential
tangentialtoto
face
face
AA
RmRimi 3.00
3.00kgkg figfig27c
27c
2.2.KeyKeyequations
equations: : 27c
27c
Hint
Hint : The
: Thecenter
centerofofmass
massis isnearer
nearerthetheheavier
heavier VV
a. a.
Kinetic energy:1 mv
Kineticenergy: 1 mv
2; 2energy
; energyofofmotion
motion ball
ball figfig2323 FnFn
22
b.b.Work:
Work:Force Forceacting
actingover
overa distance
a distance 0.66m
0.66m
•For
•ForF(x):
F(x):Work
Work= =F(x)F(x)dxdx 0.33m
0.33m 2323 27c
27c
•Fora constant
•For a constantforce:
force:WW = =F Fd dcoscos= =F F× × r r VV
V–V–V V
1 k1gkg 2 k2gkg FnFn
• • is isthetheangle
anglebetween
betweenthetheF Fand andr r
•W •Wmaximum
maximumforfor = =0 0(note:(note:sin(
sin(= =0)0)= =1)1) center
center
ofof
mass
mass Note:
Note:Force
ForceF nFis
n is
normal
normal
toto
face
face
AA
27c
27c

Compact Notes | 3
MECHANICS(continued) WAVE MOTION
K. Universal Gravitation r A. Descriptive Variables
1. Goal : Examine gravitational energy and force fig 28 M1 ... ... M2 28 1. Types : Transverse, longitudinal, traveling, standing, harmonic
2. Case 1 : Bodies of mass M1 & M2 separated by r a. General form for transverse traveling wave: y = f(x – vt) (to the
3. Key equations : m 29 right) or y = f (x + vt) (to the left)
GM M b. General form of harmonic wave : y = Asin(kx– t) or y = Acos(kx– t)
a. Gravitational Energy : Ug = r1 2
GM1 M2 h c. Standing wave : Integral multiples of m fit the length of the
b. Gravitational force : Fg = 2
r2 oscillating material
d2 y 1 d2 y
d. General wave equation : =
c. Acceleration due to gravity : g = G M(earth)/ r 2 dx2 v2 dt2
e. Superposition Principle : Overlapping waves interact => constructive
For objects on the Earth’s surface, g = 9.8 m/s 2 30
and destructive interference
Sample : Verify “g” at the Earth’s surface
Harmonic Wave Properties
Equation : g = G M(earth)/r 2 Wavelength (m) Distance between peaks
k
Given : M = 6×1024 k, r = 6.4×106 m Period T (sec) Time to travel one
6.67 # 10 - 11 m3 kg- 1# 6 # 10 24 kg m f= 1
Calculation : = = 9.8 ms 2 Frequency f (Hz)
] 6.4 # 10 6 mg2 T
4. Case 2 : A body interacts with the Earth fig 29 HOOKE’S 2r
Angular Frequency (rad/s) f
5. Key Equation : LAW T
a. Gravitational potential energy : Ug = m g h; object on Wave Amplitude A Height of wave
the Earth’s surface, h = 0; Ug = 0 Speed v (m/s) v= f
l 31
b. Weight = gravitational force; Fg = m g Wave number k (m–1) k = 2r
m
Sample : Calculate escape velocity , vesc , for an orbiting
m 2. Sample : Determine the velocity and period of a wave with
rocket of mass m at altitude h = 5.2 m and f = 50.0 Hz
Hint: K = Ug at point of escape; r = h + r (earth) F 1 32 Equations : v = f T= 1
f
Data : = 5.20 m; f = 50.0 Hz
1 m v 2 = GmM ; therefore, v = 2 GM
2 esc r esc r A2 Calculations : v = f = 5.20 m × 50.0 = 260 m/s
Note: vesc varies with altitude, but not rocket mass A1 T = 1 = 1 Hz = 0.02 s
f 50
L. Oscillatory Motion F2 B. Sound Waves
P F1 32
1. Goal : Study motion & energy of oscillating body 1. Wave nature of sound : Compression wave displaces the medium
2. Simple harmonic motion (1-d) P1 33 carrying the wave
a. Force: F = –k x (Hooke’s Law) Air 2. General speed of sound : vA=2 tB ;
b. Potential Energy: Uk = 1 k x2 Surface note: B =ABulk
1 Modulus (measure of volume compressibility)
2 c RT F2 Cp
h Liquid For a gas : v = P ; note: = (ratio of gas heat capacities)
c. Frequency = 1 k M Cv
2r m fig 30 P2
Sample : Calculate speed of sound in Helium at 273 K
3. Simple Pendulum
Air 34 Helium : Ideal gas, = 1.66; M = 0.004 kg/mole
a. Period: T = l c RT
g Surface v=
b. Potential energy: Ug = m g h Liquid M
V 1.66 # 8 .314 kg m2 / s2 # 273 K
1 g =
c. Frequency = fig 31 0 .004 kg
2r l Fb
4. For both cases : = 941 , 900 m 2 / s 2 = 971 m/s note: applies to the units
a. Kinetic energy : K = 1 m v2 3. Loudness as intensity and r elative intensity
2 35 a. Absolute Intensity (I = Power/Area) is an inconvenient measure of
b. Conservation of Energy : E = U + K P1
P2
M. Forces in Solids and Liquids loudness
1. Goal 1 : Examine properties of solids & liquids V1 V2 b. Relative loudness: Decibel scale (dB) : = 10 log I ; I0 is the
I0
threshold of hearing; (I0) = 0
a. Density of a solid or liquid : = mass A2
c. Samples : Jet plane: 150 dB; Conversation: 50 dB; a change in 10 dB
volume A1

•Common unit: g/cm3; g/L; kg/m3 Flow Th rough a Hose represents a 10 fold increase in I f'
4. Doppler effect: The sound frequency shifts due to relative motion
• . Sample : A piece of metal, 1.5 cm × 2.5 cm × 4.0 cm, has a mass of 105.0 g; of source and listener; f
determine v0 - listener speed; vs - source speed; v - speed of sound
Equation : = m f ' v + v0 f ' v - v0
V = v- v = v+ v
f f
Data : m = 105.0 g, V = 1.5 × 2.5 × 4.0 cm3 = 15 cm3
s s

Calculate : = 105.0/15.0 g/cm3 = 7.0 g/cm3

b. Pressure exerted by a fluid: P = force
area Key: Identify relative speed of source and listener
c. Pascals’ s Law : For an enclosed fluid, pressure is equal at all points in the vessel
. Sample : Hydraulic press : F = P/A for enclosed liquid; A is the surface area of
the piston inserted into the fluid THE RMODYNAMICS
Equation : A1F 1 = A2 F 2; cylinder area determines force fig 32 A. Goal: Study of work, heat and energy of a system fig 36
d. A column of water generates pressure, P increases with depth; Key Variables
Equation : P 2 = P 1 + gh fig 33 Heat: Q +Q added to the system
e. Archimedes’ Principle : Buoyant force, Fb , on a object of volume V submerged
Work: W +W done by the system
in liquid of density : Fb = Vg fig 34
Energy: E System internal E 36
2. Goal 2 : Examine fluid motion & fluid dynamics
a. Properties of an Ideal fluid : Non-viscous, incompressible, steady flow, no turbulence Enthalpy: H H = E + PV Q W
At any point in the flow, the product of area and velocity is constant: A1v1 = A2v2
Entropy: S Thermal disorder
b. Variable density: 1A1v1 = 2 A2v2; illustrations: gas flow through a smokestack, system
Temperature: T Measure of thermal E E
water flow through a hose fig 35
c. Bernoulli’ s Equation : For any point y in the fluid flow, P + 1 v2 + g y = constant Pressure: P Force exerted by a gas
2
•Special case : Fluid at rest P 1 – P 2 = g h Volume: V Space occupied

Compact Notes | 4
 THERMODYNAMICS (continued) ELECTRICITY & MAGNETISM

PHYSICS NOTES
Types of Processes E.The Kinetic Theory of Gases A. Electric Fields and Electric Charge
1. Goal: Examine kinetic energy of gas molecules 1. Goal : Examine the nature of the field generated by an
E = 0, Q =W
Isothermal T=0 2. Key Equations : E = 1 Mv2 and E = 3 RT electric charge, and forces between charges
PV = constant
2 2 2. Key Variables and Equations
Adiabatic Q=0
E = –W
PV = constant
EQUATIONS & ANSWERSa. Speed, vrms = 3RT
M
a. Coulomb C: “ampere sec” of charge
b. e - charge on an electron; 1.6022 × 10–19 C
Sample : Calculate the speed of q1 q2
P=0
W = P V, c. Coulomb’ Law - electrostatic force: F = 1 e
Isobaric: Helium at 273 K 4 rf 0 r 2
H=Q •Vector direction defined by e
A. Units for Physical Quantities B.Helium
Fundamental Physical
: M = 0.004 Constants
kg/mole C. Conversionfactorsand alternativeunits
E = Q; d. Electric Field : E = Fq
Isochoric
Base Units V =0
Symbol Base
vrms 3 RT
= Units = Symbol Unit
W = 0 Unit M Unit Description
–31
Hint : Calculation shortcut :
Length l, x
B. Temperature & Thermal Meter
Energy-m Mass of 8 .314 kg m2 / s2 # m
3 #electron e
273 K9.11×10 kg Angle 9N q1 ] Cgq2 ] C g
F = 9 ׺ 10
(degree)
1. Goal : Temperature is in Kelvin, absolute Mass of proton 0 .004 kg mp 1.67×10–27 kg r ] mg2
Mass m, M Kilogram - kg
temperature : T(K) = T(ºC) + 273.15 Note: q in Coulombs and CGSr inunit
meters
(g cm2/s2)
Avogadro 1, 702 , 292 m/s
vrms = Constant NA = 1305 m/s 23 mol–1
6.022×10 Energy ErgPrinciple : Forces
Note: T(K) is always positive; lab temperature 3. Superposition
Temperature T Kelvin - K 1 erg = 10–7 J and fields are
must be converted from ºC to Kelvin (K) b. Kinetic energy
Elementary : K = 3 RT
charge for IdealeGas 1.602×10 –19 C composites of contributions from each charge
Time t
Sample : Convert Second - s Kelvin:
35º C to 2
Electron
c. For real
Faraday gas : Add terms
Constant F for96,485
vibrations
C/mol R Fi , E = R Ei ;
F = Energy Hint
1 eV:=Forces and–19
1.602×10 electric
J fields
T(K) = T(ºC) + 273.15 = 35 + 273.15 = Volt
Electric Current I Ampere - A (C/s) and rotations are vectors
308.15 K Speed of light c 3×108 m s –1
2. Thermal Expansion F.Entropy & 2nd Law of Thermodynamics B. Gauss’s Law CGS unit (g cm/s2 = erg/cm)
Derived Units Symbol Solid, Liquid
of or Gas
Unit Force Dyne
a. Goal : Determine the change in the length 1. Molar
Goal: GasExamine
Constant the driving R force for 8.314 J mol–1 K–1 1. Goal : Define electric flux1, dyne
a process e = 10 N
–5

Acceleration
(L) or volume a (Vm/s ) 2as a function of 2. Key Variables : –23 –1 2. Key Variables and Equations :
Boltzmann
a. Entropy Constant
: S, thermal disorder; k dS = dQ J K
1.38×10 Volume Liter 1 L = 1 dm3Q
Ang. Accel.
temperature
radian/s2
T–11 3 –1 –2 a. Gauss’s Law : e = # E × dA = f
b. Solid: DL = T Gravitation
b. S(univ) =Constant
S(system) + S(thermal G 6.67×10
bath) m kg s 0

L b. The electricBar
Pressure flux, e , depends1 Bar = 10 on5 the
Pa total charge in
Ang. Momentum DV L kg m2/s 3. Permeability
Guiding Principle of Space : 2 nd Law
µ of –7 2
0 ×10 N/A the closed region of interest
c. Liquid : = T
V Thermodynamics:
Ang. Velocity radian/sec Permittivity of Space 8.85×10 –12 F/m C. Electric Potential
Length & Coulombic
Angstrom 1 Å = 1×10 Energy
–10m
^T - Th nR For any process, Suniv > 0; one exception: 0
d. Gas : V = 2 1 1. Goal : Determine Coulombic potential energy
P Suniv = 0 for a reversible process
Angle , radian 2. Key Variables and Equations :
Q 4. Examples : a. Potential energy : U = 1 q1 q2
Capacitance
3. Heat capacity : C = Farad or QF =(C/V)C T a. Natural heat flow: Q flows 4 rf 0 r
DT MATHEM ATICALCONCEPTS 38 U = 1 q1
a. Special cases : C –constant P; C –constant V from T hot to Tcold fig 38 T b. Potential : V(q ) =
Charge Q, q,pe Coulomb Cv(A s) A. Vector Algebra hot b. Cross or1Vector q2 Product
4 rf 0: r
•Ideal Gas : Suniv = Shot
1. Vector + Scold
: Denotes =
directional character using (x, y, z) A × B = |A|
C = potential |B|sin edepending on |r|
Density 3 Note: The is scalar,
kg/m Cp
Cp = 5 R; Cv = 3 R; = = 5 = 1.667 –
Q components
+
Q
Q
=vectors
fig- 1Tcold
Thot Q c. For an – Angle
array of between
charges, q , A and=B,Vvector e is
V
i total i
2 2 Cv 3 Thot a.TUnit Thot :Tcold
i along x, j along y, k along z perpendicular to A and B
Displacement
b. Carnot’s Law s, d,: For
h ideal
metergas:
-m C –C =R cold
q1 (C) q2 ( C)
p v b. Vector A = Ax i + Ay j + Az k d. Shortcut to U(ri): Uj =k9 × 109J
• E = Cv T; H = Cp T hintc.:LengthSuniv > 0 for a T r (m)
Electric Field V/m of A = | A| = Ax2 + Ay2+coldAz2 A × B = Ax Ay Az
•Exact for monatomic gas, modify for 3. Continuous chargeBdistributions : V = 1 dq fig 41
natural process
2. Addition of vectors A & B, add components: x By Bz 4 rf 0 r
molecular gases
Electric Flux e Vm b. PhaseA +changeB = (A +B : )iS+ (A = y+B y) j + (Az+B z)k SampleSample : Vectorspher
: Conducting Product e, :
Q ( phase changex) x 41
Electromotive 37 Sample Addition and Length Calculations : Radius R,ACharge = 2i + jQ B = i + 3j R
E Volt - V T ( phase change )
Force (EMF) Boyle's Law Charles' Law A=3i+4j –3k |A| =T2 9 + 16+ 9 i j k
Q
c. Ideal Gas S(T): S = nCp ln V = 1 A × Bfor= r2 1R0 = (6 – 1) k = 5k
Energy E, U, K Joule J (kg m2 s–2) =T1 34 = 5 .83
4 rf 0 R
Volume (L)

Volume (L)

1 3 0 V kQ
Entropy S J/K Gas: S(V): S = nRln
d. Ideal B=–2i+6j+5k
V
|B| = 2 4 + 36 + 25 V = 1 •IfQAfor and rB > are
R in x-y plane, A × B is along
V1 4 rf 0 r kQ R r
= 65 = 8.06 the + z direction
Force Pressure (Pa) F NewtonTemperature
- N (kg m/s(K)2 = J/m)
G. Heat Engines 4. Dielectric ef fect: V& F depend on R C
1. Goal: Examine Q j+2k |A+B| = 1 + 100 + 4 the dielectric• isconstant,
the angle formed ; replace by AB: sin =
C. Ideal Gas Law; PV = nRT fig 37 A+B=i+10 Qhot A B
Frequency f, Hertz - Hz (cycle/s) and W of an 39 Thot 0 with 0Given for the: material;
|A| = 5 |B| = 10 |C| = 5
r
1. Goal : Simple equation of state for a gas = 105 = 10.25
engine V( ) = 1 V(vacuum)
Heat 2. Key Variables : P(Pa),
Q Joule3),- T(K
V(m J ), n moles of 2. ThermalNote:Engine |A| +: |B| |A + B| l sin = 5/( 5 × 10 )Conducting = 5/ 50 = 1/ Sphe
2 re
–1 K–1 3. Multiply A & B: W F( ) = < AB:
1 F (vacuum
gas (mol); gas constant R = 8.314 J mol The engine )
Magnetic Field B Tesla (Wb/m2) a. Dot or scalar product : A • B = |A| |B|cos = c.l The Right-Hand Rule gives the orientation d of42
! Pitfall : Common errors in T, P or V units transfers Q from a D. Capacitancevector and Dielectrics
(A B ) + (A B ) + (A B ) e fig 4
3. Key
Magnetic Applicationsm: Weber Wb (kg m2/A s2)
Flux hot to a cold x x y y z z
Q V
Note: is the angle between A and B; 1. Goal: Study capacitors, plates with
B. Trigonometry
a. P Ä 1 , T fixed: Boyle’s Law reservoir, and Qcold Tcold charge1.Q separated
Basic by afor
r elations vacuum or
a triangle fig 5
Momentum V p kg m/s A • B = 0, if fig 2
produces W fig 39 : Scalar pr oduct :
Sample y A
dielectricsinmaterial
= r fig 42 Values Of sin, cos and tan
b. P Ä T, V fixed 3. EfficiencyA = 5i of
Potential V Voltage V (J/C) + 2j B = 3i + 5j 2. Key Equations : rad [º] sin cos tan
c. V Ä T, P fixed: Charles’ Law A • B = 3 × 5 +Q2cold × 5 = 15 + 10 = 25 cos = ,xrC = Q , V is0 the
engine: p = W = 1 – a. Capacitance
V [0º] 0.00 1.00 0.00
Power d. Derive thermodynamic
P, P Wattrelationships
- W (J/s) Q
|A|= hot25 + 4 = 29 Q hot
= 5.385 measured voltage
D. Enthalpy and 1st Law of Thermodynamics b. Parallel
tan plate
y
= xcapacitor,
= cossin vacuum, with 0.50 0.866 0.577
area A,
1.
PressureGoal : Determine P Q, E and W;
Pascal - Pa (N/m ) W 2and Q |B|= 9
Carnot+ 25 =
Cycle 34 = 5.831 40
0.707 0.707 1.00
P A Q
depend on path; E is a state variable, A :B 25 spacing d: C =
sin2 + cos2 0= d1 ; E = A 0.866 0.50 1.732
A cos f0
Resistance
independent of path R Ohm (V/A) Qhot= A B = 5 .385 # 5 .83 =0.796 2. Sinand Cos waves 1.00 0.00
c. Parallel plate capacitor, dielectric , with area A,
2. Guiding Principle : = cos-1 fig 3 fig 6 0.00 –1.00 0.00
Torque
st
Nm B T=0 spacing d: C = 0 A
a. 1 Law of Thermodynamics : E = Q – W d
Thot
•Key idea: Conservation
Velocity v m/s of Energy
W 3. Capacitors in series : 1 = / 1
b. Examine the T, P, W & Q for the problem Ctot Ci
Volume
3. Enthalpy : H = EV + PV; m3 H = E + P V 4. Capacitors in parallel : Ctot = Ci fig 43
a. H = Q for P = 0 (constant
Wavelength meter - m pressure) D T=0
b. Variable temperature: H = Cp dT Tcold Two Capacitors in Series 43
Qcold C
Work c. For constant CW p: HJoule= Cp- JT(N m) V C1 1 C1 C2
4. Work : W = PdV = 1 + 1 or C tot =
4. Idealized heat engine: Carnot Cycle fig 40 C2 Ctot C1 C 2 C1 +C2
a. W depends on the path or process a. Four steps in the cycle: two isothermal,
b. Ideal Gas, Reversible, Isothermal: two adiabatic; for overall cycle: E = 0 Two Capacitors in Parallel
W = nRTln V2 and S = 0
T
V1 b. Efficiency = 1 – cold C1 C2 C = C +C
c. Ideal Gas, Isobaric: W = P V Thot tot 1 2

Compact Notes | 5
ELECTRICITY& BEHAVIOR OF LIGHT
MAGNETISM(continued) A. Basic Properties of Light Reflection and Refraction
E. Current and Resistance 1. Goal : Examine light and its interaction with matter Incident
Ray 47
1. Goal: Examine the current, I, quantity of charge, Q, 2. Key variables :
resistance, R; determine the voltage and power dissipated a. c: speed of light in a vacuum 1

2. Key Equations : 2
b. Index of refraction : n; nc = speed of light in medium
r
44 Reflected Refracted
a. Total charge , Q = It Ray n1 n2
Two Resistors in Series Ray
b. V = IR, or R = V c. Light as electromagnetic wave : f = c
I R1 Light characterized by “color” or wavelength Normal
c. Resistors in Series : Rtot = R1+R2 d. Light as particle : e = hf ; energy of photon
R2
Rtot = Ri fig 44 3. Reflection and Refraction of Light fig 47
d. Resistors in Parallel : a. Law of Reflection : 1 = r fig 48 r
Two Resistors in Pa r allel 1
1 = 1 fig 44 b. Refraction : Bending of light ray as it passes from n1 to n2 48
Rtot Ri R1 R2
1 = 1 + 1 •Snell’s Law : n1sin 1 = n2sin 2, n1, n2 are the indices of refraction of
e. Power = IV = I R 2 Rtot R1 R2 two materials fig 49
F. Direct Current Circuit n Normal
1. Goal : Examine a circuit R1 R2 c. Internal Reflectance : sin c = n2
or R tot = 1
containing battery, R1 +R2
Light passing from material of higher n to a lower n may be
resistors and capacitors; trapped in the material
determine voltage and current properties 4. Polarized light : E field is not spherically symmetric
1 1> 2
n1
2. Key Equations and Concepts : a. Examples : Plane/linear polarized, circularly polarized Air
Glass
a. EMF: Circuit voltage; E = Vb + IR; battery voltage b. Polarization by reflection from a dielectric surface at angle c ;
Vb = Ir, r internal battery resistance n2 n2
Brewster’s Law : tan c = n 2
1
b. Junction : Connection of 3 or more conductors
B. Lenses and Optical Instruments 49
c. Loop : A closed conductor path
1. Goal : Lenses and mirrors generate images of objects
d. Resistors in series or parallel => replace with Rtot
2. Key concepts and variables
e. Capacitors in series or parallel => replace with Ctot Lens and Mirror Properties
a. Radius of curvature: R = 2f
3. Kir choff’s Cir cuit Rules b. Optic axis : Line from base of object
I 2 45 Parameters + sign - sign
a. For any Loop: V = IR; through center of lens or mirror
I1 converging lens diverging lens
Hint : Conserve energy
I3 c. Magnification : M = ss' f focal length
concave mirror convex mirror
b. For any Junction: I = 0;
I1 = I2 + I3
Hint : Conserve charge; d. Laws of Geometric Optics : s object dist. real object virtual object
define “+” flow fig 45 1 + 1 = 1 ; s =- h
s s' f s' h' s’ image dist. real image virtual image
G. Magnetic Field: B
1. Key concepts: e. Combination of 2 thin lenses: h object size erect inverted
a. Moving charge => Magnetic Field B 1 = 1 + 1 or f= f1 f2
f f1 f2 f1 + f2 h’ image size erect inverted
b. Magnetic Flux : m = # BdA
3. Sample Guidelines for ray tracing:
c. Force on charge, q and v, moving in B:
a. Rays that parallel optic axis pass through “f ”
F = qv × B = qvBsin ; v parallel to B => F = 0; v
b. Rays pass through center of the lens unchanged
perpendicular to B => F = qvB
c. Image forms at convergence of ray tracings
d. Magnetic Moment of a Loop: M = IA
Sample ray tracings: fig 50, a,b,c
e. Torque on a loop: = M × B
f. Magnetic Potential Energy : U = – M • B Plane mirror: Law of Reflection
50a Spherical Concave M
g. Lor entz For ce: Charge interacts with E and B; Converging Lens
F = qE + qv × B s s' s s'
H. Faraday’s Law and Electromagnetic Induction - 50b
O I
Key Equations: h h'
f
1. Faraday’s Law : Induced EMF: E = # E ds = Object Image f
I
–d m/dt
2. Biot-Savart Law : Conductor induces B; current I,
n0
length dL: dB = 4 r IdL × rr3 50a
Plane mirror: Law of Reflection
n0 I Converging Lens Spherical Concave Mirror
3. Sample : Long conducting wire: B(r) = 4 r r
s s' C. Interference
s of Light
s' Waves 50c
I. Electromagnetic Waves- Key Equations and Concepts: 50b
O I 1. Goal : Examine constructive and destructive interference of
1. Transverse B and E fields; E = c h light waves h'
B f
y 2. Key Variables and Concepts :
E/B Wave 46 Object Image f
a. Constructive interference : fig 51 I
O R f
b. Destructive interference : fig 52
x c. Huygens’ Principle : Each portion of wave front acts as a I
z
B source of new waves
3. Diffraction of light, from a grating with spacing d, produces
2. c = 1
an interference pattern; dsin = m ; (m = 0, 1, 2, 3,...)
n 0f 0
3. Electromagnetic Wave: c = f fig 46 4. Single-slit experiment , slit width a ; destructive interference
J. Maxwell’s Equations: Q for sin = mm a ; (m = 0, ±1, ±2...)
1. Gauss’s Law for Electrostatics : # E • dA = f ;
key: Charge gives rise to E
0
5. X-ray dif fraction from a crystal with atomic spacing d ; 2dsin = m ; (m = 0, 1, 2, 3,...)
2. Gauss’s Law for Magnetism : # B • dA = 0; 51
y y 52
y y1 y2
y
key: Absence of magnetic charge
3. Amper e-Maxwell Law : y1

# B • ds = µ0 I + µ0 0 ddtU e ; x x
key: Current + change in electric flux => B
dU m
4. Faraday’s Law : # E • dS = – ; y2 1
dt
3

Compact Notes | 6
 CHAPTER 0 Basic Mathematics & Vectors



 
 AB Ax  Bx Ay  By Az  Bz

Ax A A
  y  z
Bx By Bz
          
 ABC ABC A B C

     
  A B  C C A B
      
ms i.e. v  ms 
 AB  AB A B

v ms 
v      i.e.
v ms 
v
          R  P  Q  PQ   PQ
 A A  A A A A  A  A
     
A A A A A A
  
  i.e.
AB A=B AB
   R  P  Q  PQ   P Q
AB A B A  B



  
R  P Q   P Q
 
 P Q

 
 A B 
 
 AB

 
 A B
  
AB AB
     
A B A B


  A
 
  A B
 B   
 B 
 

  B
 
  A B
A   
  A 
 

 i  jk

Page 2 Compact Study Material Chapter 0 : Basic Mathematics & Vectors

      m/s.
 ABC A BC 
     
 A BC  A B C
     
 A B A B  A B
    
 A A A   An  A A A   An m s N W

 n m s NE m s S W
  
 ABC A B C
  ‘a’
A B
ABOD
BEFO
z
B E
a j k
P Q
A H a
Q a j i
G O F
y
ak i a

D a
/ a i k x
i j k i j k
 
i j i j A B
   
AB AB
 
t xt t  t  t A B

 n   
n  
   n    
   n  
 

 n    n  
  n  
 n    

A  A  A A 

A  A A  A

 
 
ABCDEFGH
AB  AC  AD  AE  AF  AG  AH

AO  i  j  k
A B

H C

O
G D

F E

i j k  i j k

i j k i j k
Chapter 1 : Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry Compact Study Material Page 3

A B C D P
y N
O
T
AB  BC  CD N
N Q

AB  AC  AD  AO  OB  OC x' x
O

N
AB  BC  CD  AD  AO N R
S y
O
A D
 i j i j

i j j j
B C
F F F

F  F  F

F F F

I II
I II
I II
OP OQ OR OS OT I II

N
    
  i j P Q R R  P
x y  
 P Q

Q

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 Units, Dimensions and
CHAPTER
IMPORTANT POINTS
1 Measurement
 Poiseuille (unit of viscosity) = Pascal (unit of pressure) ×
Second. i.e. Pl : Pa – s.
 The dimensions of a physical quantity are the powers to
 The unit of power of lens (dioptre) gives the ability of the
which basic units (not fundamental units alone) should be raised
lens to converge or diverge the rays refracted through it.
to represent the derived unit of that physical quantity.
 The dimensions of a physical quantity do not depend on  The order of magnitude of a quantity means its value (in
the system of units. suitable power of 10) nearest to the actual value of the quantity.

 A physical quantity that does not have any unit must be  Angle is exceptional physical quantity, which though is a
dimensionless. ratio of two similar physical quantities (angle = arc / radius) but
still requires a unit (degrees or radians) to specify it along with
 The dimensional formula is very helpful in writing the unit
its numerical value.
of a physical quantity in terms of the basic units.
 Solid angle subtended at a point inside the closed surface is
 The standard of Weight and Measures Act was passed in
India in 1976. It recommended the use of SI in all fields of 4π steradian.
science, technology, trade and industry.  A measurement of a physical quantity is said to be accurate
 The dimensions of many physical quantities, especially if the systematic error in its measurement is relatively very low.
those in heat, thermodynamics, electricity and magnetism in On the other hand, the measurement of a physical quantity is
terms of mass, length and time alone become irrational. said to be precise if the random error is small.
Therefore, SI is adopted which uses 7 basic units.  A measurement is most accurate if its observed value is
 The pure numbers are dimensionless. very close to the true value.
 Generally, the symbols of those basic units, whose  Errors are always additive in nature.
dimension (power) in the dimensional formula is zero, are  For greater accuracy, the quantity with higher power should
omitted from the dimensional formula.
have least error.
 Physical quantities defined as the ratio of two similar
 The absolute error in each measurement is equal to the
quantities are dimensionless.
least count of the measuring instrument.
 The physical relation involving logarithm, exponential,
 Percentage error = Relative error × 100.
trigonometric ratios, numerical factors etc. cannot be derived by
the method of dimensional analysis.  The unit and dimensions of the absolute error are same as
that of quantity itself.
 Physical relations involving addition or subtraction sign
cannot be derived by the method of dimensional analysis.  Absolute error is not dimensionless quantity.
 If units or dimensions of two physical quantities are same,  Relative error is dimensionless quantity.
these need not represent the same physical characteristics. For
Value of 1 part on main scale (s)
example torque and work have the same units and dimensions  Least Count =
Number of parts on vernier scale (n)
but their physical characteristics are different.
 The standard units must not change with space and time.  Least count of vernier callipers
That is why atomic standard of length and time have been value of 1 part of  value of 1 part of 
=  − 
defined. Attempts are being made to define the atomic standard  main scale (s)   vernie r scale (v)
for mass as well.
⇒ Least count of vernier callipers = 1 MSD – 1 VSD
 Any repetitive phenomenon, such as an oscillating
where; MSD = Main Scale Division
pendulum, spinning of earth about its axis, etc can be used to
VSD = Vernier Scale Division
measure time.
 The product of numerical value of the physical quantity (n) Pitch(p)
 Least count of screw guage =
and its unit (U) remains constant. No. of parts on circular scale (n)

That is : nU = constant or n1U1 = n2U2.  Smaller the least count, higher is the accuracy of
 The product of numerical value (n) and unit (U) of a measurement.
physical quantity is called magnitude of the physical quantity.  Larger the number of significant figures after the decimal in
Thus : Magnitude = nU a measurement, higher is the accuracy of measurement.
Chapter 1 : Units, Dimensions and Measurement Compact Study Material Page 5

 Significant figures do not change if we measure a physical 3. The position of a particle at time 't' is given by the relation
quantity in different units. V0
x(t ) = [1 − e −α t ]
α
 Significant figures retained after mathematical operation
(like addition, subtraction, multiplication and division) should be where V0 is a constant and α > 0 . The dimensions of
equal to the minimum significant figures involved in any V0 and α are respectively.
physical quantity in the given operation.
(a) M L T  and  T  (b) M L T  and  T 
0 1 0 −1 0 1 0 −2

 Significant figures are the number of digits up to which we

are sure about their accuracy. (c) M0L1T−1  and  T−1  (d) M L T  and T 
0 1 −1 −2
   
 If a number is without a decimal and ends in one or more 4. When a wave traverses a medium, the displacement of a
zeros, then all the zeros at the end of the number may not be particle located at x at time t is given by
significant. To make the number of significant figures clear, it is y = a sin(bt − cx)
suggested that the number may be written in exponential form.
where a, b and c are constants of the wave. The dimensions
For example 20300 may be expressed as 203.00×102, to
of b are the same as those of
suggest that all the zeros at the end of 20300 are not significant.
(a) Wave velocity (b) Amplitude
 1 inch = 2.54 cm (c) Wavelength (d) Wave frequency
1 foot = 12 inches = 30.48 cm = 0.3048 m 5. A physical quantity is measured and the result is expressed
1 mile = 5280 ft = 1.609 km as nu where u is the unit used and n is the numerical value.
If the result is expressed in various units then
 1 yard = 0.9144 m
(a) n ∝ size of u (b) n ∝ u2
 1 slug = 14.59 kg
(c) n ∝ u (d) n ∝ 1 / u
 1 barn = 10–28 m2
6. Which pair of following quantities has dimensions different
 1 litre = 103 cm3 = 10–3 m3 from each other

5 (a) Impulse and linear momentum

 1 km/h = m/s
18 (b) Plank’s constant and angular momentum
1 m/s = 3.6 km/h (c) Moment of inertia and moment of force
(d) Young’s modulus and pressure
 1 g/cm3 = 1000 kg/m3
7. If area ( A ) velocity ( v ) and density ( ρ ) are base units,
 1 atm. = 76 cm of Hg = 1.013 × 105 N/m2
then the dimensional formula of force can be represented as
1 N/m2 = Pa (Pascal)
(a) Avρ (b) Av2 ρ
 When we add or subtract two measured quantities, the
(c) Avρ 2 (d) A 2v ρ
absolute error in the final result is equal to the sum of the
absolute errors in the measured quantities. 8. The time dependence of a physical quantity?

 When we multiply or divide two measured quantities, the P = P0 exp(−α t 2 )

relative error in the final result is equal to the sum of the relative where α is a constant and t is time. The constant α
errors in the measured quantities.
(a) Will be dimensionless

(b) Will have dimensions of T −2

Critical Questions
(c) Will have dimensions as that of P
1. The SI unit of Stefan's constant is: (d) Will have dimensions of equal to the dimension of P
multiplied by T −2
−1 −2 −4 −1 −1
(a) Ws m K (b) J s m K

(c) J s − 1 m −2 K − 1 (d) W m −2 K −4 9. If E, M, J and G denote energy, mass, angular momentum

EJ 2
2. What are the dimensions of Boltzmann’s constant and gravitational constant respectively, then has the
M 5 G2
(a) MLT K  (b) ML T K 
−2 −1 2 −2 −1
dimensions of
(a) Length (b) Angle
(c) M 0LT −2  (d) M L T K 
0 2 −2 −1
  (c) Mass (d) Time
Page 6 Compact Study Material Chapter 1 : Units, Dimensions and Measurement

10. A body moving through air at a high speed ‘ v ’ experiences 19. In Ohm’s law experiment, the reading of voltmeter across
x
a retarding force ‘ F ’ given by F = K A d v where ‘ A ’ is the resistor is 12.8 V and current through resistor is 0.30 A.
Find the resistance of resistor,
the surface area of the body, ‘ d ’ is the density of air and
(a) 42.67 Ω (b) 42.667 Ω
‘ K ’ is a numerical constant. The value of ‘ x ’ is:
(c) 42.3 Ω (d) 43Ω
(a) 1 (b) 2
(c) 3 (d) 4 20. To find the value of g using simple pendulum, T = 2.0 s,

11. If the acceleration due to gravity is 10 ms–2 and the units of l = 1.0 m . Estimate maximum permissible error in g. Also
length and time are changed to kilometer and hour, find the value of g .
respectively, the numerical value of the acceleration is (a) (10 ± 2%)ms−2 (b) (10 ± 0.2%) ms −2
(a) 360000 (b) 72000
(c) (9.8 ± 2%)ms −2 (d) (9.8 ± 0.2%)ms −2
(c) 36000 (d) 129600
21. A Vernier callipers having main scale of 10 cm containing
12. The power of a motor is 200 W. If the unit of length is 100 divisions. If n be number of divisions on Vernier scale of
halved, that of mass is doubled and that of time is also length l. Vernier calliper is designed to have a least count of
doubled, the power of the motor in the new system is 0.02 cm, then
(a) 3200 W (b) 12.5 W (a) l = 0.8 cm, n = 10 (b) l = 0.5 cm, n = 10
(c) 12.5 new unit (d) 3200 new unit (c) l = 0.2 cm, n = 10 (d) l = 0.4 cm, n = 9
13. The time period of a body under S.H.M. is represented by 22. A Vernier calliper is having 1 main scale division = 1 mm.
T = P a Db Sc . Where P is pressure, D is density and S is Ten divisions of Vernier scale coincide with nine divisions of
surface tension, then values of a, b and c are main scale. If two jaws of instrument touch each other, the
3 1 8th division of Vernier scale coincide with a mark of main
(a) − , ,1 (b) −1, −2,3 scale and the zero of the Vernier scale lies to the right of the
2 2
zero of main scale. While measuring the length of cylinder,
1 3 1 1
(c) ,− ,− (d) 1, 2, the zero of the Vernier scale lies slightly to the left of 3.2 cm
2 2 2 3
and the fourth Vernier division coincides with a mark of the
14. The dimensions of mobility are length cylinder is
(a) [M−1L0 T 2 A−1] (b) [M1L0 T −2 A1] (a) 3.06 cm (b) 3.15 cm
(c) [M 0 L1T −2 A −1 ] (d) [M0L−1T 2 A −1] (c) 3.16 cm (d) 3.22 cm
15. In the expression for torque τ = a × L + b × I / ω . 23. In five complete rotations, the distance moved by screw on a
L represents angular momentum, I is moment of inertia and linear scale is 0.5 cm. There are 100 divisions on circular
ω is angular velocity. The dimensions of a × b are: scale. While measuring the thickness of a metal plate by the
screw gauge, there are five divisions on the main scale and
(a) [M 0 L0 T −4 ] (b) [M1L0 T −2 A1]
35 divisions coincide with the reference line. Calculate the
(c) [M 0 L1T −2 A −1 ] (d) [M0L−1T 2 A −1] thickness of metal plate
16. Which of the following will not have the dimensions of (a) 5.35 cm (b) 0.535 cm
potential energy (c) 0.6 cm (d) 0.7 cm
(a) Torque × angular displacement 24. In screw gauge, the distance moved by screw on the linear
(b) Rotational inertia × (angular frequency)2 scale is 10 mm in 10 complete rotations. There are
(c) Position vector × rate of change of momentum 50 divisions on the circular scale. When nothing is put in
(d) Displacement × momentum between the studs, 45th division of the circular scale
17. If µ = 2sin θ , the error in measurement of θ is ∆θ , then coincides with the reference line. While measuring the
fractional error in measurement of µ is thickness of glass plate, the main scale read four divisions
and circular scale reads 30 divisions. Find the thickness of
(a) cos θ ∆θ (b) cot θ
the plate
(c) cot θ ∆θ (d) sin θ ∆θ (a) 9 mm (b) 10 mm
mm (c) 11 mm (d) 4.6 mm
18. If F = G 1 2 2 , in measurement of F, m1, m2 and r the
r 25. If y = a − b , then percentage errors in a and b are 2% and
percentage error are 1%, 2%, 2% and 4% respectively. Find
3%. Find maximum percentage error in y, if a = 5 m and
the maximum percentage error in measurement of
gravitational constant G. b = 3m.
(a) 9% (b) 4% (a) 5% (b) −1%
(c) 13% (d) 15% (c) 1% (d) 9.5%
Chapter 1 : Units, Dimensions and Measurement Compact Study Material Page 7

26. In the case of convex lens, if object distance is 30.0 cm and

image distance is 60.0 cm. Find the focal length of lens. Past Year Questions
(a) (20 ± 0.06) cm (b) (20 ± 0.05) cm 1. If L, C and R represent inductance, capacitance and
(c) (10 ± 0.06)cm (d) (40 ± 0.05)cm resistance respectively, then which of the following does not
represent dimensions of frequency [IIT-JEE 1984]
27. The radius of a cylindrical wire is measured by screw gauge
is 1.25 mm. The length of wire is 25.0 cm and the mass of 1 R
(a) (b)
wire is 12 g. The density of wire is RC L
1 C
(a) (9.8 ± 1.0)g cm−3 (c) (d)
LC L
(b) (9.8 ± 1.01267)g cm−3
2. Dimensional formula for angular momentum is [IIT 1983]
−3
(c) (9.8 ± 0.1)g cm (a) ML T 2 −2
(b) ML T 2 −1

(c) MLT −1
(d) M 0 L2 T − 2
(d) (9.80 ± 0.01)g cm−3
3. The dimensional formula for the modulus of rigidity is
28. In a tangent galvanometer, current i is proportional to tan θ
[IIT 1982]
, where θ is angular deflection. The relative error in i will be 2 −2 −1 −3
(a) ML T (b) ML T
least when θ is equal to
(c) ML−2T −2 (d) ML−1T −2
(a) 30° (b) 45°
4. The dimensional formula for Planck's constant (h) is
(c) 60° (d) 90°
[IIT 1985]
29. The least count of a stopwatch is 1/5 second. The time of
20 oscillations of a pendulum is measured to be 25 seconds. (a) ML−2T −3 (b) ML2T −2
The minimum percentage error in the measurement of time (c) ML2T −1 (d) ML−2T −2
period will be
5. Out of the following, the only pair that does not have
(a) 0.1% (b) 8% identical dimensions is [AIEEE 2005]
(c) 1.8% (d) 0.8% (a) Angular momentum and Planck's constant
30. In a vernier callipers, N divisions of vernier scale coincide (b) Moment of inertia and moment of a force
with (N−1) divisions of main scale in which one division (c) Work and torque
represents 1 mm. The least count of the instrument in cm
(d) Impulse and momentum
should be
6. The dimension of magnetic field in M, L, T and C (coulomb)
(a) N (b) N − 1 is given as [AIEEE 2008]
1 1 (a) MT 2 C–2 (b) MT–1 C–1
(c) (d)
10 N N −1 –2 –1
(c) MT C (d) MLT–1 C–1
31. Which one of the following statements is false
7. Dimensional formula of capacitance (or farad) is [IIT 1983]
(a) SI unit of all types of energy is joule
(a) M − 1 L − 2 T 4 A 2 (b) ML 2 T 4 A − 2
(b) If error in calculating volume of a sphere is 9%, error in
(c) MLT −4
A2 (d) M − 1 L − 2 T − 4 A − 2
measuring its radius is 3%
8. Which of the two have same dimensions [AIEEE 2002]
(c) Two quantities can be divided only when they have
(a) Force and strain
same dimensions
(b) Force and stress
(d) Two quantities can be subtracted only when they have
(c) Angular velocity and frequency
same dimensions
(d) Energy and strain
32. A train goes from station A to D via stations B and C. The
9. The physical quantities not having same dimensions are
measured distances between various stations are:
[AIEEE 2003]
A to B = 648 km, B to C = 64.8 km, C to D = 6.48 km.
−1 / 2
Total distance covered by the train in proper significant (a) Speed and (µ 0ε 0 )
figures is (b) Torque and work
(a) 719.2 km (b) 719.3 km (c) Momentum and Planck's constant
(c) 719 km (d) 719.28 km (d) Stress and Young's modulus
Page 8 Compact Study Material Chapter 1 : Units, Dimensions and Measurement

10. Which of the following groups have different dimensions 18. The force of interaction between two atoms is given by
[IIT-JEE 2005]  x2 
F = αβ exp −  x is the distance, k is the
 α kt  ; where
(a) Potential difference, EMF, voltage  
(b) Pressure, stress, young's modulus Boltzmann constant and T is temperature and α and β are
(c) Heat, energy, work-done two constants. The dimension of β is [JEE (Main) 2019]

(d) Dipole moment, electric flux, electric field (a) M 2 L2T −2 (b) M 0 L2T −4
11. Inductance L can be dimensionally represented as
(c) M 2 LT−4 (d) MLT−2
[IIT 1983]
19. If speed (V ) , acceleration (A) and force (F) are considered
(a) ML T 2 −2
A −2
(b) ML T 2 −4
A −3
as fundamental units, the dimension of Young’s modulus
(c) ML − 2 T − 2 A − 2 (d) ML 2 T 4 A 3 will be [JEE (Main) 2019]
12. Dimensional formula of magnetic flux is [IIT 1982]
(a) V −4 A2 F (b) V −2 A2 F −2
(a) ML T 2 −2
A −1
(b) ML T 0 −2
A −2

(c) V −4 A−2 F (d) V −2 A2 F 2

(c) M 0 L−2 T −2
A −3 (d) ML 2 T − 2 A 3
ε0
13. Dimensional formula for latent heat is [IIT 1983, 89] 20. In SI units, the dimensions of is [JEE (Main) 2019]
µ0
(a) M 0 L2 T − 2 (b) MLT −2

(a) A−1TML3 (b) AT2 M −1 L−1

(c) ML 2 T − 2 (d) ML 2 T − 1
ε 0 LV (c) AT−3 ML3 / 2 (d) A2T 3 M −1 L−2
14. The quantity X = : ε 0 is the permittivity of free
t 21. If Surface tension (S) , Moment of Inertia (I ) and Planck’s
space, L is length, V is potential difference and t is time. constant (h) , were to be taken as the fundamental units, the
The dimensions of X are same as that of dimensional formula for linear momentum would be
[IIT-JEE 2001] [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) Resistance (b) Charge 1/ 2 1/ 2 0 1 / 2 2 / 3 −1
(a) S I h (b) S I h
(c) Voltage (d) Current
(c) S3 / 2I 1 / 2h0 (d) S1 / 2 I 1 / 2h−1
1
15. Dimensions of , where symbols have their usual 22. In the formula X = 5YZ 2 , X and Z have dimensions of
µ0ε 0
capacitance and magnetic field respectively. What are the
meaning, are [AIEEE 2003]
dimensions of Y in SI units [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) [LT −1 ] (b) [L−1T]
(a) [ M −2 L0 T −4 A −2 ] (b) [M −3 L−2 T 8 A 4 ]
−2 2 2 −2
(c) [L T ] (d) [L T ]
(c) [M −2 L−2T 6 A 3 ] (d) [M −1 L−2 T 4 A 2 ]
αZ
α − 23. Which of the following combinations has the dimension of
16. In the relation P = e kθ P is pressure, Z is the distance, k
β electrical resistance (ε 0 ) is the permittivity of vacuum and
is Boltzmann’s constant and θ is the temperature. The µ 0 is the permeability of vacuum [JEE (Main) 2019]
dimensional formula of β will be [IIT (Screening) 2004]
µ0 µ0
(a) [M 0 L2T 0 ] (b) [M 1L2T1 ] (a) (b)
ε0 ε0
(c) [M 1L0T −1 ] (d) [M 0 L2T −1 ]
ε0 ε0
(c) (d)
17. Expression for time in terms of G (universal gravitational µ0 µ0
constant), h (Planck constant) and c (speed of light) is
24. The density of a material in SI units is 128 kg m−3 . In certain
proportional to [JEE (Main) 2019]
units in which the unit of length is 25 cm and the unit of
hc 5 Gh
(a) (b) mass is 50g , the numerical value of density of the material
G c3
is [JEE (Main) 2019]
3
c Gh (a) 410 (b) 40
(c) (d)
Gh c5 (c) 640 (d) 16
Chapter 1 : Units, Dimensions and Measurement Compact Study Material Page 9

25. Let L , R, C and V represent inductance, resistance, 31. A screw gauge gives the following reading when used to
capacitance and voltage, respectively. The dimension of measure the diameter of a wire.
L Main scale reading : 0 mm
in SI units will be [JEE (Main) 2019]
RCV Circular scale reading : 52 divisions
2 −2
(a) [LT ] (b) [LA ] Given that 1 mm on main scale corresponds to 100
divisions of the circular scale.
(c) [LTA] (d) [ A −1 ]
The diameter of wire from the above data is [AIEEE 2011]
26. A wire has a mass 0.3 ± 0.003 g , radius 0.5 ± 0.005 mm
(a) 0.52 cm (b) 0.052 cm
and length 6 ± 0.06 cm . The maximum percentage error in
(c) 0.026 cm (d) 0.005 cm
the measurement of its density is [IIT (Screening) 2004]
32. A student measured the length of a rod and wrote it as
(a) 1 (b) 2
3.50 cm. Which instrument did he use to measure it
(c) 3 (d) 4 [JEE (Main) 2014]
V (a) A meter scale
27. The resistance R = , where V = 100 ± 5 volts and
I
(b) A vernier calliper where the 10 divisions in vernier scale
I = 10± 0.2 amperes. What is the total error in R
matches with 9 division in main scale and main scale
[AIEEE 2012] has 10 divisions in 1 cm
(a) 5% (b) 7% (c) A screw gauge having 100 divisions in the circular scale
5 and pitch as 1 mm
(c) 5.2% (d) %
2 (d) A screw gauge having 50 divisions in the circular scale
28. A student measures the time period of 100 oscillations of a and pitch as 1 mm
simple pendulum four times. That data set is 90 s, 91 s, 95 s 33. In an experiment the angles are required to be measured
and 92 s. If the minimum division in the measuring clock is using an instrument. 29 divisions of the main scale exactly
1 s, then the reported mean time should be coincide with the 30 divisions of the vernier scale. If the
[JEE (Main) 2016] smallest division of the main scale is half-a-degree (=0.5°)
(a) 92 ± 5 .0 s (b) 92 ± 1 .8 s then the least count of the instrument is [AIEEE 2009]

(c) 92 ± 3 s (d) 92 ± 2 s (a) One minute (b) Half minute

29. The current voltage relation of diode is given by (c) One degree (d) Half degree
1000V / T
I = (e − 1) mA , where the applied voltage V is in volts 34. The circular divisions of shown screw gauge are 50. It moves
and the temperature T is in degree Kelvin. If a student 0.5 mm on main scale in one rotation. The diameter of the
makes an error measuring ±0.01 V while measuring the ball is [IIT-JEE 2006]

current of 5 mA at 300 K, what will be the error in the value

0 1
of current in mA [JEE (Main) 2014] 10
5
30
25
0 20
(a) 0.2 mA (b) 0.02 mA
(c) 0.5 mA (d) 0.05 mA
30. A student performs an experiment for determination of
(a) 2.25 mm (b) 2.20 mm
4π 2l
g = 2 and he commits an error of ∆ l. For that he takes (c) 1.20 mm (d) 1.25 mm
T
35. Two full turns of the circular scale of a screw gauge cover a
the time of n oscillations with the stop watch of least count
∆ T and he commits a human error of 0.1 sec. For which of
distance of 1 mm on its main scale. The total number of
the following data, the measurement of g will be most divisions on the circular scale is 50. Further, it is found that
accurate [IIT-JEE 2006] the screw gauge has a zero error of – 0.03 mm. While
measuring the diameter of a thin wire, a student notes the
∆l ∆T n Ampli. of oscill.
main scale reading of 3 mm and the number of circular scale
(a) 5 mm 0.2sec 10 5mm
divisions in line with the main scale as 35. The diameter of
(b) 5 mm 0.2sec 20 5mm the wire is [AIEEE 2008]
(c) 5 mm 0.1sec 20 1mm (a) 3.73 mm (b) 3.67 mm
(d) 1 mm 0.1sec 50 1mm (c) 3.38 mm (d) 3.32 mm
Page 10 Compact Study Material Chapter 1 : Units, Dimensions and Measurement

36. A spectrometer gives the following reading when used to (a) 0.80 mm (b) 0.70 mm
measure the angle of a prism.
(c) 0.50 mm (d) 0.75 mm
Main scale reading : 58.5 degree
Vernier scale reading : 09 divisions 41. There are two Vernier callipers both of which have 1 cm
Given that 1 division on main scale corresponds to 0.5 divided into 10 equal divisions on the main scale. The
degree. Total divisions on the vernier scale are 30 and Vernier scale of one of the callipers (C1 ) has 10 equal
match with 29 divisions of the main scale. The angle of the divisions that correspond to 9 main scale divisions. The
prism from the above data [AIEEE 2012]
Vernier scale of the other calliper (C 2 ) has 10 equal
(a) 58.59 Degree (b) 58.77 Degree
(c) 58.65 Degree (d) 59 Degree divisions that correspond to 11 main scale divisions. The
 readings of the two calliper are shown in the figure. The
4 MLg 
37. In the determination of Young’s modulus  Y = by measured values (in cm) by calliper C1 and C2
 π ld 2 
using Searle’s method, a wire of length L = 2m and respectively, are
diameter d = 0.5 mm is used. For a load M = 2.5 kg, an
2 3 4
extension l = 0.25 mm in the length of the wire is observed.
Quantities d and l are measured using a screw gauge and a C1
micrometer, respectively. They have the same pitch of
0.5 mm. The number of divisions on their circular scale is
100. The contributions to the maximum probable error of 10
0 5
the Y measurement [IIT JEE 2012]
(a) Due to the errors in the measurements of d and l are
2 3 4
the same
(b) Due to the error in the measurement of d is twice that
due to the error in the measurement of l C2
(c) Due to the error in the measurement of l is twice that
due to the error in the measurement of d
0 5 10
(d) Due to the error in the measurement of d is four time
that due to the error in the measurement of l
38. The density of a solid ball is to be determined in an (a) 2.87 and 2.86 (b) 2.87 and 2.87
experiment. The diameter of the ball is measured with a (c) 2.87 and 2.83 (d) 2.85 and 2.82
screw gauge, whose pitch is 0.5 mm and there are 50
divisions on the circular scale. The reading on the main 42. The density of a material in the shape of a cube is
scale is 2.5 mm and that on the circular scale is 20 divisions. determined by measuring three sides of the cube and its
If the measured mass of the ball has a relative error of 2%, mass. If the relative errors in measuring the mass and length
the relative percentage error in the density is [IIT-JEE 2011] are respectively 1.5% and 1% the maximum error in
(a) 0.9% (b) 2.4% determining the density is [JEE (Main) 2018]
(c) 3.1% (d) 4.2%
(a) 4.5% (b) 6%
39. The diameter of a cylinder is measured using a vernier
calliper with no zero error. It is found that the zero of the (c) 2.5% (d) 3.5%
vernier scale lies between 5.10 cm and 5.15 cm of the main
43. A copper wire is stretched to make it 0.5% longer. The
scale. The vernier scale has 50 divisions equivalent to
2.45 cm. The 24th division of the vernier scale exactly percentage change in its electrical resistance if its volume
coincides with one of the main scale divisions. The diameter remains unchanged is [JEE (Main) 2019]
of the cylinder is [JEE 2013] (a) 2.5% (b) 0.5%
(a) 5.112 cm (b) 5.124 cm
(c) 2.0% (d) 1.0%
(c) 5.136 cm (d) 5.148 cm
40. A screw gauge with a pitch of 0.5 mm and a circular scale 44. The pitch and the number of divisions, on the circular scale,
for a given screw gauge are 0 . 5 mm and 100 respectively.
with 50 divisions is used to measure the thickness of a thin
When the screw gauge is fully tightened without any object,
sheet of Aluminium. Before starting the measurement, it is
the zero of its circular scale lies 3 divisions below the mean
found that when the two jaws of the screw gauge are line. The readings of the main scale and the circular scale,
brought in contact, the 45th division coincides with the main for a thin sheet, are 5 . 5 mm and 48 mm respectively, the
scale line and that the zero of the main scale is barely visible. thickness of this sheet is [JEE (Main) 2019]
What is the thickness of the sheet if the main scale reading is (a) 5.740 mm (b) 5.950 mm
0.5 mm and the 25th division coincides with the main scale
(c) 5.725 mm (d) 5.755 mm
line [JEE (Main) 2016]
Chapter 1 : Units, Dimensions and Measurement Compact Study Material Page 11

45. The diameter and height of a cylinder are measured by a 52. A student measuring the diameter of a pencil of circular
meter scale to be 12.6 ± 0.1 cm and 34 .2 ± 0 .1cm , cross-section with the help of a vernier scale records the
respectively. What will be the value of its volume in following four readings 5.50 mm, 5.55 mm, 5.45 mm
appropriate significant figures [JEE (Main) 2019] 5.65 mm. The average of these four readings is
(a) 4264 ± 81 cm3 (b) 4300 ± 80 cm3 5.5375 mm and the standard deviation of the data is
(c) 4260 ± 80 cm3 (d) 4264.4 ± 81.0 cm3 0.07395 mm. The average diameter of the pencil should
therefore be recorded as [JEE (Main) 2020]
46. The least count of the main scale of a screw gauge is 1mm .
The minimum number of divisions on its circular scale (a) (5.5375 ± 0.0739) mm (b) (5.5375 ± 0.0740) mm
required to measure 5µ m diameter of wire is (c) (5.538 ± 0.074) mm (d) (5.54 ± 0.07) mm
[JEE (Main) 2019] 53. A screw gauge has 50 divisions on its circular scale. The
(a) 200 (b) 50 circular scale is 4 units ahead of the pitch scale marking,
(c) 500 (d) 100 prior to use. Upon one complete rotation of the circular
47. In a simple pendulum experiment for determination of scale, a displacement of 0.5 mm is noticed on the pitch
acceleration due to gravity (g), time taken for 20 scale. The nature of zero error involved, and the least count
oscillations is measured by using a watch of 1 second least of the screw gauge, are respectively [JEE (Main) 2020]
count. The mean value of time taken comes out to be 30 s . (a) Negative, 2 µ m (b) Positive, 10 µ m
The length of pendulum is measured by using a meter scale (c) Positive, 0.1 m m (d) Positive, 0.1 µ m
of least count 1 mm and the value obtained is 55.0 cm . 54. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum is
The percentage error in the determination of g is close to L
[JEE (Main) 2019]
T = 2π . Measured value of 'L' is 1.0 m from meter scale
g
(a) 0.2 % (b) 0.7 % having a minimum division of 1 mm and time of one
(c) 6.8 % (d) 3.5 % complete oscillation is 1.95 s measured from stopwatch of
48. In the density measurement of a cube, the mass and edge 0.01 s resolution. The percentage error in the determination
length are measured as (10.00 ± 0.10) kg and
of 'g' will be [JEE (Main) 2021]
(0.10 ± 0.01) m, respectively. The error in the measurement (a) 1.13% (b) 1.03%
of density is [JEE (Main) 2019] (c) 1.33% (d) 1.30%
(a) 0.07 kg / m3 (b) 0.10 kg / m3 55. In a typical combustion engine the work done by a gas
3 3 − βx 2
(c) 0.01 kg / m (d) 0.31 kg / m molecule is given by W = α 2 β e kT , where x is the
49. The area of a square is 5.29cm2 . The area of 7 such displacement, k is the Boltzmann constant and T is the
squares taking into account the significant figures is temperature. If α and β are constants, dimensions of α
[JEE (Main) 2019] will be [JEE (Main) 2021]
2 2
(a) 37.0 cm (b) 37 cm (a) [M L T −2 ] (b) [M L T −1 ]
(c) 37.03 cm 2 (d) 37.030 cm2 (c) [M 0 L T 0 ] (d) [M 2 L T −2 ]
50. The dimension of stopping potential V0 in photoelectric 56. The force is given in terms of time t and displacement x
effect in units of Plank’s constant ‘h’, speed of light ‘c’ and by the equation F = A cos Bx + C sin Dt
Gravitational constant ‘G’ and ampere A is AD
The dimensional formula of is [JEE (Main) 2021]
[JEE (Main) 2020] B
(a) h−2 / 3c −1 / 3G4 / 3 A−1 (b) h2 / 3c 5 / 3G1 / 3 A−1 (a) [M 2 L2 T −3 ] (b) [M 1 L1 T −2 ]
(c) h1 / 3G2 / 3c1 / 3 A−1 (d) (h)0 (c)5 (G)−1 ( A)−1 (c) [M 0 L T −1 ] (d) [ML2 T −3 ]
51. The least count of the main scale of a vernier callipers is 57. Match List – I with List – II
1mm. Its vernier scale is divided into 10 divisions and List – I List – II
coincide with 9 divisions of the main scale. When jaws are (A) Magnetic Induction (ii) ML2T −2 A−1
touching each other, the 7th division of vernier scale
(B) Magnetic Flux (ii) M 0 L−1 A
coincides with a division of main scale and the zero of
vernier scale is lying right side of the zero of main scale. (C) Magnetic permeability (iii) MT −2 A −1
When this vernier is used to measure length of a cylinder the (D) Magnetization (iv) MLT −2 A −2
zero of the vernier scale between 3.1 cm and 3.2 cm and
Choose the most appropriate answer from the options given
4th VSD coincides with a main scale division. The length of
below [JEE (Main) 2021]
the cylinder is : (VSD is vernier scale division)
(a) (A)-(iii), (B)-(ii), (C)-(iv), (D)-(i)
[JEE (Main) 2020]
(b) (A)-(iii), (B)-(i), (C)-(iv), (D)-(ii)
(a) 3.2 cm (b) 3.21 cm
(c) (A)-(ii), (B)-(iv), (C)-(i), (D)-(iii)
(c) 3.07 cm (d) 2.99 cm (d) (A)-(ii), (B)-(i), (C)-(iv), (D)-(iii)
Page 12 Compact Study Material Chapter 1 : Units, Dimensions and Measurement

58. Which of the following equations is dimensionally incorrect V

60. The resistance R= , where V = (50 ± 2)V and
Where t = time, h = height, s = surface tension, θ = angle, I
ρ = density, a, r = radius, g = acceleration due to gravity, I = (20 ± 0.2)A . The percentage error in R is 'x' %. The
v = volume, p = pressure, W = work done, Γ = torque, value of 'x' to the nearest integer is ___. [JEE (Main) 2021]
∈ = permittivity, E = electric field, J = current density, 61. Three students S1 ,S2 and S3 perform an experiment for
L = length [JEE (Main) 2021] determining the acceleration due to gravity (g) using a
4
π pa simple pendulum. They use different lengths of pendulum
(a) W = Γθ (b) v = and record time of different number of oscillations. The
8η L
observations are as shown in the table
2 s cos θ ∂E
(c) h = (d) J =∈ Student Length of No. of Total time Time
ρrg ∂t
No. Pendulum oscillations for n period
Numerical Questions : (cm) (n) oscillations (s)
59. The diameter of a spherical bob is measured using a vernier 1 64.0 8 128.0 16.0
calliper. 9 divisions of the main scale, in the vernier callipers, 2 64.0 4 64.0 16.0
are equal to 10 divisions of vernier scale. One main scale
3 20.0 4 36.0 9.0
division is 1 mm . The main scale reading is 10 mm and
(Least count of length = 0.1 cm ,
8 th division of vernier scale was found to coincide exactly
Least count for time = 0.1 s)
with one of the main scale division. If the given vernier
callipers has positive zero error of 0.04 cm, then the radius If E1 , E 2 and E3 are percentage errors in 'g' for students

of the bob is_________ × 10 cm −2

[JEE (Main) 2021] 1, 2 and 3 respectively, then the minimum percentage
error is obtained by student no._______
[JEE (Main) 2021]

CRITICAL QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 d 2 b 3 c 4 d 5 d 6 c 7 b 8 b 9 b 10 b

11 d 12 d 13 a 14 a 15 a 16 d 17 c 18 c 19 d 20 a

21 a 22 a 23 b 24 c 25 d 26 a 27 a 28 b 29 d 30 c

31 c 32 c

PAST YEAR QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 d 2 b 3 d 4 c 5 b 6 b 7 a 8 c 9 c 10 d

11 a 12 a 13 a 14 d 15 d 16 a 17 d 18 c 19 a 20 d

21 a 22 b 23 b 24 b 25 d 26 d 27 b 28 d 29 a 30 d

31 b 32 b 33 a 34 c 35 c 36 c 37 a 38 c 39 b 40 a

41 c 42 a 43 d 44 d 45 c 46 a 47 c 48 d 49 c 50 d

51 c 52 d 53 b 54 a 55 c 56 d 57 b 58 b 59 52 60 5

61 1

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER
IMPORTANT POINTS
2 Motion in One Dimension
 Speedometer measures the instantaneous speed of a
vehicle.
 For one dimensional motion the angle between
acceleration and velocity is either 0° or 180° and it does not  When particle moves with speed v1 up to half time of its
change with time. total motion and in rest time it is moving with speed v2 then
v + v2
 For two dimensional motion, the angle between vav = 1
acceleration and velocity is other than 0° or 180° and also it 2
may change with time.  When particle moves the first half of a distance at a speed
 During rotational motion of the body, there is change in the of v1 and second half of the distance at speed v2 then
orientation of the body, while there is no change in the location 2v1v2
of the body from the axis of rotation. vav =
v1 + v 2
 During translational motion of the body, there is change in
the location of the body.  When particle covers one-third distance at speed v1, next
 A point object is just a mathematical point. This concept is one third at speed v2 and last one third at speed v3, then
introduced to study the motion of a body in a simple manner. 3 v1v2v3
vav =
 The choice of the origin is purely arbitrary. v1v 2 + v 2v3 + v3v1
 
 If the angle between a and v is 90°, the path of the particle  For two particles having displacement time graph with
is a circle. slopes θ1 and θ2 possesses velocities v1 and v2 respectively then
 The particle speed up, that is the speed of the particle increases υ1 tan θ1
  =
when the angle between a and v lies between 0° and +90°. υ 2 tan θ 2
 The particle speeds down, that is the speed of the particle
   Velocity of a particle having uniform motion = slope of
decreases, when the angle between a and v lies between
displacement–time graph.
+90° and 180°.
 The speed of the particle remains constant when the angle  Greater the slope of displacement-time graph, greater is the
  velocity and vice-versa.
between a and v is equal to 90°.
 The distance covered by a particle never decreases with  Area under v – t graph = displacement of the particle.
time, it always increases.
 Slope of velocity-time graph = acceleration.
 Displacement of a particle is the unique path between the
initial and final positions of the particle. It may or may not be  If a particle is accelerated for a time t1 with acceleration a1
the actually travelled path of the particle. and for time t2 with acceleration a2 then average acceleration is
 Displacement of a particle gives no information regarding a1t1 + a2 t 2
aa υ =
the nature of the path followed by the particle. t1 + t 2
 Magnitude of displacement ≤ Distance covered.  If same force is applied on two bodies of different masses
 Since distance ≥ |Displacement|, so average speed of a m1 and m2 separately then it produces accelerations a1 and
body is equal or greater than the magnitude of the average
velocity of the body. a2 respectively. Now these bodies are attached together and
 The average speed of a body is equal to its instantaneous form a combined system and same force is applied on that
speed if the body moves with a constant speed system so that a be the acceleration of the combined system,
 No force is required to move the body or an object with then
uniform velocity. a1 a 2
a=
 Velocity of the body is positive, if it moves to the right side a1 + a 2
of the origin. Velocity is negative if the body moves to the left
side of the origin.  If a body starts from rest and moves with uniform
acceleration then distance covered by the body in t sec is
 When a body reverses its direction of motion while moving
along a straight line, then the distance travelled by the body is proportional to t2 (i.e. s ∝ t 2 ).
greater than the magnitude of the displacement of the body. In So we can say that the ratio of distance covered in 1 sec,
this case, average speed of the body is greater than its average
2 sec and 3 sec is 12 : 2 2 : 3 2 or 1 : 4 : 9.
velocity.
Page 14 Compact Study Material Chapter 2 : Motion in One Dimension

 If a body starts from rest and moves with uniform (i) The maximum height attained = H = u2/2g.
acceleration then distance covered by the body in nth sec is (ii) Time taken to go up (ascent) = Time taken to come down
proportional to (2n − 1) (i.e. s n ∝ (2n –1)) (descent) = t = u/g.
So we can say that the ratio of distance covered in 1st, 2nd (iii) Time of flight T = 2t = 2u/g.
and 3rd is 1 : 3 : 5. (iv) The speed of the body on returning to the ground = speed
 A body moving with a velocity u is stopped by with which it was thrown upwards.
application of brakes after covering a distance s. If the same (v) When the height attained is not large, that is u is not large,
body moves with velocity nu and same braking force is the mass, the weight as well as the acceleration remain constant
applied on it then it will come to rest after covering a with time. But its speed, velocity, momentum, potential energy
distance of n2s.
and kinetic energy change with time.
u2 (vi) Let m be the mass of the body. Then in going from the
As υ 2 = u 2 − 2as ⇒ 0 = u 2 − 2as ⇒ s= , s ∝ u2
2a ground to the highest point, following changes take place.
[since a is constant]
(a) Change in speed = u
So we can say that if u becomes n times then s becomes n2
(b) Change in velocity = u
times that of previous value.
(c) Change in momentum = m u
 A particle moving with uniform acceleration from A to B
(d) Change in kinetic energy = Change in potential energy
along a straight line has velocities υ1 and υ 2 at A and B
= (1/2) mu2.
respectively. If C is the mid-point between A and B then velocity
(vii) On return to the ground the changes in these quantities are
υ 12 + υ 22 as follows
of the particle at C is equal to υ =
2
(a) Change in speed = 0
 The body returns to its point of projection with the same (b) Change in velocity = 2u
magnitude of the velocity with which it was thrown vertically
(c) Change in momentum = 2mu
upward, provided air resistance is neglected.
(d) Change in kinetic energy = Change in potential energy = 0
 All bodies fall freely with the same acceleration.
(viii) If, the friction of air be taken into account, then the motion
 The acceleration of the falling bodies do not depend on the of the object thrown upwards will have the following properties
mass of the body.
(a) Time taken to go up (ascent) < time taken to come down
 If two bodies are dropped from the same height, they reach (descent)
the ground in the same time and with the same velocity.
(b) The speed of the object on returning to the ground is less
 If a body is thrown upwards with velocity u from the top of than the initial speed. Same is true for velocity (magnitude),
a tower and another body is thrown downwards from the same momentum (magnitude) and kinetic energy.
point and with the same velocity, then both reach the ground (c) Maximum height attained is less than u2/2g.
with the same speed.
(d) A part of the kinetic energy is used up in overcoming the
 When a particle returns to the starting point, its average friction.
velocity is zero but the average speed is not zero.
 A ball is dropped from a building of height h and it reaches
 If both the objects A and B move along parallel lines in
after t seconds on earth. From the same building if two balls are
the same direction, then the relative velocity of A w.r.t. B is
given by vAB = vA – vB thrown (one upwards and other downwards) with the same
velocity u and they reach the earth surface after t1 and t2
and the relative velocity of B w.r.t. A is given by vBA = vB – vA
seconds respectively then
 If both the objects A and B move along parallel lines in the
opposite direction, then the relative velocity of A w.r.t. B is given t = t1t 2
by vAB = vA – (– vB) = vA + vB
and the relative velocity of B w.r.t. A is given  A particle is dropped vertically from rest from a height. The
by vBA = – vB – vA time taken by it to fall through successive distance of 1m each
will then be in the ratio of the difference in the square roots of
 Suppose a body is projected upwards from the ground
the integers i.e.
with the velocity u. It is assumed that the friction of the air is
negligible. The characteristics of motion of such a body are as 1 , ( 2 − 1 ), ( 3 − 2 ).......( 4 − 3 ),........ .
follows.
Chapter 2 : Motion in One Dimension Compact Study Material Page 15

Critical Questions 8. A disc arranged in a vertical plane has two grooves of same
length directed along the vertical chord AB and CD as
1. A body starts from rest and is uniformly accelerated for
shown in the fig. The same particles slide down along AB
30s. The distance travelled in the first 10 s is x1 , next 10s is and CD. The ratio of the time t AB / tCD is
x2 and the last 10s is x3 . Then x1 : x2 : x3 is the same as
A C
(a) 1 : 2 : 4 (b) 1 : 2 : 5 60°
(c) 1 : 3 : 5 (d) 1 : 3 : 9
2. A body moves with velocity v = lnxm/s where x is its D
position. The net force acting on body is zero at
(a) 0 m (b) x = e 2 m
B
(c) x = em (d) x = 1m (a) 1 : 2 (b) 1: 2

3. A particle starts moving rectilinearly at time t = 0 such that (c) 2:1 (d) 2 :1
its velocity ‘v’ changes with time ‘t’ according to the 9. Balls are thrown vertically upward in such a way that the
equation v = t 2 − t where t is in seconds and v is in m/s. The next ball is thrown when the previous one is at the
time interval for which the particle retards is maximum height. If the maximum height is 5 m, the number
(a) t < 1 / 2 (b) 1 / 2 < t < 1 of balls thrown per minute will be

(c) t >1 (d) t < 1 / 2 and t > 1 (a) 40 (b) 50

(c) 60 (d) 120
4. A particle is projected vertically upwards from a point A on
10. The variation of velocity of a particle moving along straight
the ground. It takes t1 time to reach a point B but it still
line is shown in the figure. The distance travelled by the
continues to move up. If it takes further t 2 time to reach the particle in 4 s is
ground from point B then height of point B from the ground v(m/s)
is
1
(a) g(t1 + t 2 )2 (b) g t1 t 2 20
2
10
1 1
(c) g(t1 + t 2 )2 (d) g t1 t 2 t (s)
8 2
1 2 3 4
5. A ball is thrown vertically down with velocity of 5 m/s. With
(a) 25 m (b) 30 m
what velocity should another ball be thrown down after
(c) 55 m (d) 60 m
2 seconds so that it can hit the 1st ball in 2 seconds
11. If position time graph of a particle is sine curve as shown,
(a) 40 m/s (b) 55 m/s
what will be its velocity-time graph
(c) 15 m/s (d) 25 m/s
x
6. A force F = Be acts on a particle whose mass is m and
−Ct

whose velocity is 0 at t = 0 . It’s terminal velocity (velocity

after a long time) is:
C B t
(a) (b)
mB mC v v

BC B
(c) (d) −
m mC
(a) (b)
7. The displacement-time graph of a moving particle is shown
below. The instantaneous velocity of the particle is negative t t
at the point x
v v
(a) C D

(b) D
E F (c) (d)
(c) E
C t t
(d) F
t
Page 16 Compact Study Material Chapter 2 : Motion in One Dimension

12. Acceleration versus velocity graph of a particle moving in a 15. A body A is thrown vertically upwards with such a velocity
straight-line starting form rest is as shown in figure. The that it reaches a maximum height of h. Simultaneously
corresponding velocity-time graph would be: another body B is dropped from height h. It strikes the ground
and does not rebound. The velocity of A relative to B v/s time
a
graph is best represented by: (upward direction is positive)

VAB
VAB
v (a) (b)

v v t t

(a) (b) VAB

VAB
(c) (d) t
t t
t
v v 16. An object A is moving with 10 m/s and B is moving with
5m/s in the same direction of positive x-axis. A is 100 m
(c) (d) behind B as shown. Find time taken by A to Meet B

10 m/s 5 m/s
t t
A B
13. The acceleration of a particle which moves along the
positive x-axis varies with its position as shown. If the 100 m
velocity of the particle is 0.8 m/s at x = 0, the velocity of the (a) 18 sec. (b) 16 sec.
particle at x = 1.4 is (in m/s) (c) 20 sec. (d) 17 sec.
17. It takes one minute for a passenger standing on an escalator
a
(in m/s2) to reach the top. If the escalator does not move it takes him
3 minutes to walk up. How long will it take for the passenger
0.4 to arrive at the top if he walks up the moving escalator
0.2 (a) 30 sec. (b) 45 sec.
(c) 40 sec. (d) 35 sec.
0 0.4 0.8 1.4 x (in m)
Past Year Questions
(a) 1.6 (b) 1.2
1. An automobile travelling with a speed of 60 km / h, can
(c) 1.4 (d) None
brake to stop within a distance of 20 m. If the car is going
14. The x-t graph of a particle moving along a straight line is
twice as fast, i.e. 120 km/h, the stopping distance will be
shown in figure
[AIEEE 2004]
x
(a) 20 m (b) 40 m
Parabola
(c) 60 m (d) 80 m
2. All the graphs below are intended to represent the same
motion. One of them does it incorrectly. Pick it up.
O T 2T t
[JEE (Main) 2018]
The v-t graph of the particle is correctly shown by Position Velocity
v
v
(a) 0 (b) 2T
(a) Time (b) Time
T
T 2T t 0
t

Velocity distance
v v

(c) 2T (d) Time Time

0 T 0
t T 2T t (c) (d)
Chapter 2 : Motion in One Dimension Compact Study Material Page 17

3. A particle starts from origin at time t = 0 and moves along 10. An object moving with a speed of 6.25 m / s, is decelerated
the positive x-axis. The graph of velocity with respect to time dυ
is shown in figure. What is the position of the particle at time at a rate given by = −2.5 υ where υ is the
dt
t = 5s [JEE (Main) 2019]
instantaneous speed. The time taken by the object, to come
V(m/s) to rest, would be [AIEEE 2011]
(a) 1s (b) 2s
3 (c) 4s (d) 8s
2 11. The velocity of a particle is v = v 0 + gt + ft 2 . If its position is
x = 0 at t = 0, then its displacement after unit time (t = 1)
t(s) is [AIEEE 2007]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(a) 6 m (b) 9 m (a) v0 + 2g + 3 f (b) v0 + g / 2 + f / 3

(c) 3m (d) 16 m (c) v0 + g + f (d) v 0 + g / 2 + f

4. Speed of two identical cars are u and 4u at a specific 12. Two stones are thrown up simultaneously from the edge of a
instant. The ratio of the respective distances in which the cliff 240 m high with initial speed of 10 m / s and 40 m / s
two cars are stopped from that instant is [AIEEE 2002] respectively. Which of the following graph best represents
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 4 the time variation of relative position of the second stone
(c) 1 : 8 (d) 1 : 16 with respect to the first (Assume stones do not rebound after
5. A particle starts from rest. Its acceleration (a) versus time (t) hitting the ground and neglect air resistance, take
is as shown in the figure. The maximum speed of the g = 10m / s 2 ) . (The figures are schematic and not drawn to
particle will be [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004] scale) [JEE (Main) 2015]
a
(y2–y1)m (y2–y1)m
(a) 110 m/s 10 m/s2 240 240
(b) 55 m/s
(c) 550 m/s
t(s) (a) (b)
(d) 660 m/s 11 t(s) t(s)
t→ 8 12 t→ 12
6. A particle has an initial velocity of 3ˆi + 4 ˆj and an acceleration
(y2–y1)m (y2–y1)m
of 0.4ˆi + 0.3ˆj . Its speed after 10 s is [AIEEE 2009]
240 240
(a) 10 units (b) 7 2 units (c) (d)
(c) 7 units (d) 8.5 units
7. A small block slides without friction down an inclined plane
t(s) t(s)
starting from rest. Let Sn be the distance travelled from time 8 12 8 12

Sn 13. The given graph shows the variation of velocity with

t = n − 1 to t = n. Then is [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004]
Sn+1 displacement. Which one of the graph given below correctly
2n − 1 2n + 1 represents the variation of acceleration with displacement
(a) (b)
2n 2n − 1 v

2n − 1 2n v0
(c) (d)
2n + 1 2n + 1
8. A bullet fired into a fixed target loses half of its velocity after
penetrating 3 cm. How much further it will penetrate before x [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2005]
x0
coming to rest assuming that it faces constant resistance to a a
motion [AIEEE 2005]
(a) 1.5 cm (b) 1.0 cm (a) (b)
(c) 3.0 cm (d) 2.0 cm x x

9. A particle located at x = 0 at time t = 0, starts moving along

the positive x-direction with a velocity 'v' that varies as
a a
v = α x . The displacement of the particle varies with time
as [AIEEE 2006] (c) (d)
(a) t (b) t1/2 x x
(c) t3 (d) t2
Page 18 Compact Study Material Chapter 2 : Motion in One Dimension

14. A body is a rest at x = 0. At t = 0, it starts moving in the 19. A particle starts from origin O from rest and moves with a
positive x-direction with a constant acceleration. At the same uniform acceleration along the positive x − axis. Identify all
instant another body passes through x = 0 moving in the figures that correctly represent the motion qualitatively
positive x-direction with a constant speed. The position of (a= acceleration, v = velocity, x = displacement, t = time)
[JEE (Main) 2019]
the first body is given by x1 (t) after time 't' and that of the
second body by x2 (t) after the same time interval. Which of
(A) (B)
the following graphs correctly describes ( x1 − x 2 ) as a
a v
function of time 't' [AIEEE 2008]
O t O t
(x1–x2) (x1–x2)

(a) (b)
t t (C) x (D) x
O O

O t O t
(x1–x2) (x1–x2)
(a) (A) (b) (A), (B), (D)
(c) (d) (c) (B),(C) (d) (A), (B), (C)
t t 20. The position vector of a particle changes with time
O O

according to the relation r (t) = 15t ˆi + (4 − 20t )ˆj . What is
2 2
15. The position co-ordinates of a particle moving in a 3  D
the magnitude of the acceleration at t = 1
coordinate system is given by
[JEE (Main) 2019]
x = a cos ω t, y = a sin ω t and z = a ω t . (a) 25 (b) 100
The speed of the particle is [JEE (Main) 2019] (c) 40 (d) 50
(a) 3 aω (b) 2aω 21. The position of a particle as a function of time t , is given by
x(t) = at + bt 2 − ct 3 , where a, b and c are constants.
(c) 2aω (d) aω
When the particle attains zero acceleration, then its velocity
16. A particle is moving with a velocity v = K(yˆi + xˆj), where K will be [JEE (Main) 2019]
is a constant. The general equation for its path is b2 b2
(a) a + (b) a +
[JEE (Main) 2019] 3c 4c
2 2
(a) y = x + constant (b) y = x + constant b2 b2
(c) a+ (d) a +
c 2c
(c) xy = constant (d) y 2 = x 2 + constant
22. A passenger train of length 60m travels at a speed of
17. In a car race on straight road, car A takes a time t less than 80 km / hr . Another freight train of length 120m travels at a
car B at the finish and passes finishing point with a speed ‘v’ speed of 30km / hr .The ratio of times taken by the
more than that of car B. Both the cars start from rest and passenger train to completely cross the freight train when: (i)
travel with constant acceleration a1 and a2 respectively, they are moving in the same direction and (ii) in the
Then ‘v’ is equal [JEE (Main) 2019] opposite direction is [JEE (Main) 2019]

2a1a 2 25 3
(a) t (b) 2a1a2 t (a) (b)
a1 + a 2 11 2
5 11
a1 + a 2 (c) (d)
(c) t (d) a1a2 t 2 5
2
23. A person standing on an open ground hears the sound of a
18. A particle moves from the point (2.0ˆi + 4.0ˆj ) m, at t = 0 , jet aeroplane, coming from north at an angle 60° with
with an initial velocity (5.0ˆi + 4.0 ˆj )ms −1 . It is acted upon by ground level. But he finds the aeroplane right vertically
above his position. If v is the speed of sound, speed of the
a constant force which produces a constant acceleration
plane is [JEE (Main) 2019]
(4.0ˆi + 4.0 ˆj )ms −2 . What is the distance of the particle from
2v 3
the origin at time 2s [JEE (Main) 2019] (a) (b) v
3 2
(a) 20 2m (b) 15 m v
(c) (d) v
2
(c) 10 2m (d) 5 m
Chapter 2 : Motion in One Dimension Compact Study Material Page 19

24. Ship A is sailing towards north-east with velocity 29. A ball is dropped vertically from a height d above the
 ground. It hits the ground and bounces up vertically to a
v = 30ˆi + 50ˆj km / hr where î points east and ĵ, north.
height d / 2 . Neglecting subsequent motion and air
Ship B is at a distance of 80 km east and 150 km north of resistance, its velocity v varies with the height h above the
Ship A and is sailing towards west at 10 km / hr . A will be ground as [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000]

at minimum distance from B in [JEE (Main) 2019] v v

(a) 4.2 hrs (b) 2.6 hrs
d
(c) 3.2 hrs (d) 2.2 hrs h h
d
(a) (b)
25. The stream of a river is flowing with a speed of 2km / h . A
swimmer can swim at a speed of 4 km / h . What should be
the direction of the swimmer with respect to the flow of the
river to cross the river straight [JEE (Main) 2019] v v

(a) 90° (b) 120°

(c) d (d) d
(c) 60° (d) 150° h h

26. Two balls A and B of same masses are thrown from the top
of the building. A, thrown upward with velocity V and B,
thrown downward with velocity V, then [AIEEE 2002]
30. A ball is thrown upward with an initial velocity v0 from the
(a) Velocity of A is more than B at the ground
surface of the earth. The motion of the ball is affected by a
(b) Velocity of B is more than A at the ground 2
drag force equal to mγ v (where m is mass of the ball, v
(c) Both A and B strike the ground with same velocity
is its instantaneous velocity and γ is a constant). Time
(d) None of these
taken by the ball to rise to its zenith is [JEE (Main) 2019]
27. A ball is released from the top of a tower of height h meters.
1  γ  1  γ 
It takes T seconds to reach the ground. What is the position (a) tan −1  v  (b) ln  1 + v0 
γg  g 0 γg  g 
of the ball in T/3 seconds [AIEEE 2004]    
(a) h/9 meters from the ground 1  γ  1  2γ 
(c) sin − 1  v  (d) tan − 1  v 
(b) 7h/9 meters from the ground γg  g 0 2γ g  g 0
   
(c) 8h/9 meters from the ground 31. The velocity (v) and time (t ) graph of a body in a straight
(d) 17h/18 meters from the ground line motion is shown in the figure. The point S is at
28. A ball is thrown vertically upwards. Which of the following 4.333 seconds. The total distance covered by the body in
graph/graphs represent velocity-time graph of the ball during 6 s is
its flight (air resistance is neglected) [JEE (Main) 2017] A B
v (m/s) 4

v v 2
S D
O (in s)
1 2 3 4 5 6 t
–2
t t C
[JEE (Main) 2020]
37
(a) m (b) 12 m
3
(A) (B)
49
(c) 11 m (d) m
4
v v 32. When a car is at rest, its driver seed rain drops falling on it
vertically. When driving the car with speed v, he sees that
t t rain drops are coming at an angle 60° from the horizontal.
On further increasing the speed of the car to (1 + β ) v, this
angle changes to 45°. The value of β is close to
(C) (D)
[JEE (Main) 2020]

(a) A (b) B (a) 0.50 (b) 0.41

(c) C (d) D (c) 0.37 (d) 0.73
Page 20 Compact Study Material Chapter 2 : Motion in One Dimension

33. If the velocity-time graph has the shape AMB, what would 36. A balloon was moving upwards with a uniform velocity of
be the shape of the corresponding acceleration-time graph 10 m / s. An object of finite mass is dropped from the
[JEE (Main) 2021]
V balloon when it was at a height of 75 m from the ground

A B level. The height of the balloon from the ground when

object strikes the ground was around
time (t) 2
(Takes the value of g as 10m / s ) [JEE (Main) 2021]
M
 (a) 200 m (b) 300 m
a a
(a) (b) (c) 125 m (d) 250 m
t t 37. Water drops are falling from a nozzle of a shower onto the
floor, from a height of 9.8 m. The drops fall at a regular
a a interval of time. When the first drop strikes the floor, at that
(c) (d) instant, the third drop begins to fall. Locate the position of
t t second drop from the floor when the first drop strikes the
floor [JEE (Main) 2021]
34. A stone is dropped from the top of a building. When it (a) 2.45 m (b) 7.35 m
crosses a point 5 m below the top, another stone starts to
(c) 2.94 m (d) 4.18 m
fall from a point 25 m below the top. Both stones reach the
bottom of building simultaneously. The height of the
Numerical Questions :
building is [JEE (Main) 2021]
(a) 50 m (b) 35 m 38. The distance x covered by a particle in one dimensional
(c) 45 m (d) 25 m motion varies with time t as x 2 = at 2 + 2bt + c . If the
35. A boy reaches the airport and finds that the escalator is not acceleration of the particle depends on x as x − n , where n
working. He walks up the stationary escalator in time t1 . If is an integer, the value of n is [JEE (Main) 2020]
he remains stationary on a moving escalator then the 39. A swimmer can swim with velocity of 12 km/h in still water.
escalator takes him up in time t 2 . The time taken by him to Water flowing in a river has velocity 6 km/h. The direction
walk up on the moving escalator will be [JEE (Main) 2021] with respect to the direction of flow of river water he should
t +t swim in order to reach the point on the other bank just
(a) t 2 − t1 (b) 1 2
2 opposite to his starting point is _________°. (Round off to
t1 t 2 t1 t 2 the Nearest Integer) (find the angle in degree)
(c) (d)
t 2 − t1 t 2 + t1 [JEE (Main) 2021]

CRITICAL QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 c 2 d 3 b 4 d 5 a 6 b 7 c 8 b 9 c 10 c

11 c 12 d 13 b 14 b 15 c 16 c 17 b

PAST YEAR QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 d 2 d 3 b 4 d 5 b 6 b 7 c 8 b 9 d 10 b

11 b 12 c 13 a 14 a 15 c 16 d 17 d 18 a 19 b 20 d

21 a 22 d 23 c 24 b 25 b 26 c 27 c 28 d 29 a 30 a

31 a 32 d 33 c 34 c 35 d 36 c 37 b 38 3 39 120

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER 3 Motion in Two Dimension

 p  
i
 m u
 
O G M 

Y 
 
M

u P X,Y)
u

H R 
G X g
O
R

O M
u R
u    u  H 
g
u 

 mu 
 mu  u
T t
g
 mu 

 
 
O G
u
H 
g

u 
mu 
  
u
T 
g
 

 g 
vx=u  vy

 n
n
n
m vx = mu cos.


mv x

 mu  



 Page 22 Compact Study Material Chapter 3 : Motion in Two Dimension

 
 
r v
 
r ac
 
ac  v
  
ac  a t
      
   r ac at v
   
vr r ac at v

kg
 
F  t i   t j t t

 Fc mac , m r m
   
   
       
  
 
   

 t
x t y t
ac  r


h
u


 h h
u u
g g

 h h
u u
g g
x-z

t

V  ai  b  ct j


ba ba
c c
  
    ba
c


   
  
u   u  
  
    u   u  
Chapter 3 : Motion in Two Dimension Compact Study Material Page 23

A B
A  B


A B

u = 15 ms−1 m/s

P B
m
 

 
A

B


A B
 

 

ms 
t t
ms  

 

 


m/s m/s
m/s



Page 24 Compact Study Material Chapter 3 : Motion in Two Dimension

t v t

v t v t
t
v
t v


t t


 v v

t t

t s x  l
t

A B x a x  kx  x k 

x m B  

 

X
v
t s
A

A B t

 x


x x
t

t t

x
x
s

t t
Chapter 3 : Motion in Two Dimension Compact Study Material Page 25

B C m m

r r
D
C t

mr mr m m

m r r

V0
B
m

D C
D C
D C
D D
XY
y  kx
v t  i  j
y m
P m m t

y  x y  x x x
a
x  y y x  y

y
 
a gk a gk
a gk a gk
  a
k
  U
r

k

a
k k

a a

a
P R 

v v v v
s A B i j  i j
R R R R
m
v v v v
 i j  i  j
A R R R R
m
. m r ac
t ac  k rt

B
 mk r t mk r t
m s m s
mk r t
m s
Page 26 Compact Study Material Chapter 3 : Motion in Two Dimension


a


a

 v
v
a

 v v
a
 M
a
L V A
P
'P' B 
st  s A

t m  B

'P' t
y  
 
B P x,y
  
  L x

 V
m    A

x
O A
 O
m s m s

m s m s
P Q
P R
A t yz
v Q
P A t
AB v
tP 

tQ P Q 
y
B
Q x
A B


v
P Q
P C
P Q
t P  tQ tP  tQ
P Q
tP  tQ P Q
Chapter 3 : Motion in Two Dimension Compact Study Material Page 27

KLM N vo
d 
K LL MM vo

N N K

o o

d d
sec sec o
v v
t
d d
sec sec x t yt
v v
t

v  K yi  xj K   t  

t   t  
y x  yx 
K
y x xy 

K K
ms  K K
m
 u 
m s

m s m s

vb x u
x t 
t  


 

b 
b
R
b  t t
b 

t t R t t R

v t t  t t 
R R
H
v v u
 
g g n
H u n
v v
 
g g
gH n u gH  n u
A B km s
g H  nu n  g H  n u
km s
i  j m/s i
j g m/s

y x x y x x

y x x y x x
Page 28 Compact Study Material Chapter 3 : Motion in Two Dimension

R
u R
 h h
t P Q

R  hh R  hh
P Q Vr
R  hh R hh
 
 
u  ms 
 

vr vr
g ms

u

vr vr


cm cm
cm cm

t ms  
r t  ti  t j  t

t s R  

v t at
g ms
R   
v a r
m m   
v a r
m m   
v r a

  
u R v r a
t t
tt m
R v

R g R g s

R g R g FL

g
y x x 
v
v g ms

 
  



 v  ms  R
 

  
    v  ms 
 
 
 v   v 
  m  g  mg 
  
  v  ms    s R 



  s R  

   v   v 
  
  v  ms  m  g  m g  
   R  sR 
   s  
Chapter 3 : Motion in Two Dimension Compact Study Material Page 29

v
v  t  t   h
s
s
 
   v h
h
g
   
ghv  h

gh
h
v

ghv 
h

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER 4 Newton's Laws of Motion
gh  gl 


 l h
t 
g   g


t 

 t 
   
 F F F
   
F F F  


Fg Fem Fw i.e.
Fn 
Fg Fw Fem Fn


  m 
  V v
M

m M v

F ma. 

 dm
 u
N SI dt
 N dyne. u
 gf gwt CGS dm

kgf kgwt SI dt
 gf dyne kgf N  mg + a, a

 u dm
 
HF m dt
a
M m  
 I  F  t 
H F
M m  N-s.
 

 a 
m g+a
 
m g–a
 
mg
 
l h 
g sin 
Chapter 4 : Newton's Laws of Motion Compact Study Material Page 31

A t
u
B v m/s)

‘u'

t s
 B

u  u 

u  u 

A B
F
A B
F
NB  NA  m

NA  NB  A
2m m F 2m m
B F

NA  NB 

NA  NB 

kg kg

A B
M


M

A
B
 
M
M

W
W W
   

W 
 
Page 32 Compact Study Material Chapter 4 : Newton's Laws of Motion

m aa t a 

F g

a = a0t

F = 2mg
T T
m
m
m

t 7.5 t

T T

A B A
t t t
t

m m

A B
m m

kg m2
m1


a A
B
a

A A
m


B C

g g 
g g
g  g  g g
Chapter 4 : Newton's Laws of Motion Compact Study Material Page 33

A B C
A B
A B g
S

g
A B
g

a m/s kg
g kg A C

g
kg B

kg F  k x
k N m
cm

m/s m/s
m/s m/s
l kg
N m
l

F
ms ms
ms ms
F F a

F F

a a a a

 m/s

kg
m
kg kg m
g m s

N N
N N
Page 34 Compact Study Material Chapter 4 : Newton's Laws of Motion

 kg
 kg
kg
A B
A
ms 

ms  B


ms

a
a a a
m
a

a P aa aa
 aa aa
F

x F
p
S

m m R
P
P
a a t
F a F x P Q
m a x m a x R S
m
F x F a x
p t F  kt
m a m x
v
T p p
k T
V
v  k k
p p

p p
k k
 Vv V v v
V V 
v   v  v M kg
v v v 
W W W
M kg
M kg
M kg
W
W
M kg
W m kg x
kg m/s ms 

g m/s
kg ms  kg ms 
N N
N N kg ms  kg ms 
Chapter 4 : Newton's Laws of Motion Compact Study Material Page 35

F
F

g
ms
N
N

xt N N N, N
kg N N N N
F F F m
F F
F
x m

F m F F mF
F F m F m
t s
kg
Ns Ns
Ns Ns

kg
m/s
g ms 
N N N N
N N N N
X-Y P Q F F


Pt Ai kt  j kt A k Q

 
 
M
 m P
 kg

cm  Pm
P
m s M m
PM Pm
 N m  N m M m M m
A B C kg
 N m  N m
kg kg
B
C
ms 
A
B
N
ms  ms  N C
 
ms ms N
Page 36 Compact Study Material Chapter 4 : Newton's Laws of Motion

P C
N 

ms o

kg o

P o
m m m
o

m M
C

Mg m
m m
mg
g/
M m m g M

M m M g
m  kg m  kg
m  kg m  kg

m
g m s m

m s m T
kg m
m s
kg
m s T
m kg
m s m
kg m
m
M k

kg kg
F M m s
m N
mF M  mF
M m g m s
mF MF W W
m M m M W W
P Q kg
N A
U A B M

A B
 
B
m s N
M m s 
P Q

U  U 
U U
 
Chapter 4 : Newton's Laws of Motion Compact Study Material Page 37


F i j N kg

r

t s AB AC P
i j m i j m N A

i j m i j m
m A
N

P B

m
 
D
vs
C
F F

N P AB
D
x AC
x AC xN x
N N
D
F F o o
 
o o
N N  

x
N
D x
D

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER
IMPORTANT POINTS
5 5.
Friction
A block of mass 5kg and surface area 2m2 just begins to
slide down an inclined plane when the angle of inclination is
 Force of friction always acts in a direction opposite to that 30°. Keeping mass same, the surface area of the block is
of the relative motion between the surfaces. doubled. The angle at which this starts sliding down is:
 Force of friction is non-conservative force. (a) 30° (b) 60°
(c) 15° (d) None
 Rolling friction is much less than the sliding friction. This
6. A truck starting from rest moves with an acceleration of
knowledge was used by man to invent the wheels.
5 m/s 2 for 1 sec and then moves with constant velocity. The
 The friction between two surfaces increases (rather than to
velocity w.r.t. ground v/s time graph for block in truck is
decrease), when the surfaces are made highly smooth. (Assume that block does not fall off the truck)
 The atomic and molecular forces of attraction between the µ = 0.2
two surfaces at the point of contact give rise to friction between
the surfaces.

Critical Questions
 5 m/s
1. A force F = ɵi + 4 ɵj acts on block shown. The force of friction 3 m/s
acting on the block is (a) (b)

F 1 sec 1 sec
y

1 kg 5 m/s
(c) (d) None of these
x µ = 0.3

(a) −ɵi (b) −1.8 ɵi 2.5 sec

(c) −2.4 ɵi (d) −3iɵ

Past Year Questions
2. A body of mass m moves with a velocity v on a surface
1. Which of the following is correct, when a person walks on a
whose friction coefficient is μ. If the body covers a distance s
then v will be: rough surface [IIT 1981]
(a) The frictional force exerted by the surface keeps him
(a) 2 µ gs (b) µ gs
moving
(c) µ gs / 2 (d) 3 µ gs
(b) The force which the man exerts on the floor keeps him
3. If the coefficient of friction between an insect and bowl is μ moving
and the radius of the bowl is r the maximum height to which (c) The reaction of the force which the man exerts on floor
the insect can crawl in the bowl is:
keeps him moving
r  1  (d) None of the above
(a) (b) r 1 − 
1+ µ2  1+ µ2  2. A horizontal force of 10 N is necessary to just hold a block
 
stationary against a wall. The coefficient of friction between
(c) r 1 + µ 2 (d) r 1 + µ 2 − 1 the block and the wall is 0.2. The weight of the block is
4. A body is moving down a long inclined plane of slope 37º. [AIEEE 2003]
The coefficient of friction between the body and plane varies
as µ = 0.3 x , where x is distance travelled down the plane.
The body will have maximum speed.
10 N
3 2
(sin 37° = and g = 10 m/s )
5
(a) At x = 1.16 m (b) At x = 2 m (a) 2 N (b) 20 N
(c) At bottom of plane (d) At x = 2.5 m (c) 50 N (d) 100 N
Chapter 5 : Friction Compact Study Material Page 39

3. What is the maximum value of the force F such that the 9. A block kept on a rough inclined plane, as shown in the
block shown in the arrangement, does not move figure, remains at rest upto a maximum force 2 N down the
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003] inclined plane. The maximum external force up the inclined
F 1 plane that does not move the block is 10 N . The coefficient
µ=
2 3 of static friction between the block and the plane is
60°
[Take g = 10m / s 2 ] [JEE (Main) 2019]
m=√3kg
3
(a)
(a) 20 N (b) 10 N 4 10N
(c) 12 N (d) 15 N 1
(b)
4. A block of mass 0.1 kg is held against a wall by applying a 2 2N
horizontal force of 5 N on the block. If the coefficient of 3
friction between the block and the wall is 0.5, the magnitude (c) 30°
2
of the frictional force acting on the block is [IIT 1994] 2
(d)
(a) 2.5 N (b) 0.98 N 3
(c) 4.9 N (d) 0.49 N 10. Two blocks A and B of masses m A = 1 kg and mB = 3 kg are
5. A block of mass m is placed on a surface with a vertical kept on the table as shown in figure. The coefficient of friction
x3 between A and B is 0.2 and between B and the surface of the
cross section given by y = . If the coefficient of friction is table is also 0.2. The maximum force F that can be applied on
6
0.5, the maximum height above the ground at which the B horizontally, so that the block A does not slide over the
block can be placed without slipping is [JEE (Main) 2014] block B is (take g = 10 m / s 2 ) [JEE (Main) 2019]

(a) 1/6 m (b) 2/3 m

A
(c) 1/3 m (d) 1/2 m
6. A block of mass 2 kg rests on a rough inclined plane making B F
an angle of 30° with the horizontal. The coefficient of static
friction between the block and the plane is 0.7. The frictional
force on the block is [IIT 1980] S
(a) 12 N (b) 8 N
(a) 9.8 N (b) 0.7 × 9.8 × 3 N
(c) 16 N (d) 40 N
(c) 9. 8 × 3 N (d) 0.8 × 9.8 N
11. A marble block of mass 2 kg lying on ice when given a
7. Given in the figure are two blocks A and B of weight velocity of 6 m/s is stopped by friction in 10s. Then the
20 N and 100N, respectively. These are being pressed coefficient of friction is [AIEEE 2003]
against a wall by a force F as shown in the figure. If the (a) 0.01 (b) 0.02
coefficient of friction between the blocks is 0.1 and between (c) 0.03 (d) 0.06
block B and the wall is 0.15, the frictional force applied by
12. Consider a car moving on a straight road with a speed of
the wall on block B is [JEE (Main) 2015]
100 m/s. The distance at which car can be stopped is
(a) 100 N [µk=0.5] [AIEEE 2005]
F
(b) 80 N A B (a) 100 m (b) 400 m
(c) 120 N (c) 800 m (d) 1000 m
(d) 150 N 13. A block P of mass m is placed on a frictionless horizontal
8. A block of mass 10 kg is kept on a rough inclined plane as surface. Another block Q of same mass is kept on P and
shown in the figure. A force of 3 N is applied on the block. connected to the wall with the help of a spring of spring
The coefficient of static friction between the plane and the constant k as shown in the figure. µ s is the coefficient of
block is 0.6. What should be the minimum value of force P, friction between P and Q. The blocks move together
such that the block does not move downward performing SHM of amplitude A. The maximum value of
the friction force between P and Q is
(take g = 10 m / s 2 ) [JEE (Main) 2019]
P [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004]
(a) kA
(a) 32 N
10kg kA µs
(b) 23 N (b) Q
2
(c) 25 N 3N (c) Zero Smooth P
(d) 18 N 45° (d) µ s mg surface
Page 40 Compact Study Material Chapter 5 : Friction

14. A block of mass 5 kg is (i) pushed in case (A) and (ii) pulled 17. A circular disc with a groove along its diameter is placed
in case (B), by a force F = 20 N , making an angle of 30° horizontally. A block of mass 1kg is placed as shown in the
with the horizontal as shown in the figures. The coefficient of figure. The co-efficient of friction between the block and all
surfaces of groove in contact is µ=2/5. The disc has an
friction between the block and floor is µ = 0.2 . The
acceleration of 25 m/s2. Find the acceleration of the block
difference between the accelerations of the block in case (B)
with respect to disc [given cos θ = 4 / 5, sin θ = 3 / 5]
and case (A) will be (g = 10ms −2 )
F = 20N

30°
30° a=25m/s2
θ
F = 20N (B)
(A)
[JEE (Main) 2019] [IIT-JEE 2006]
2 2
(a) 0.8 ms −2
(b) 0 ms −2 (a) 10 m/s (b) 5 m/s
(c) 20 m/s2 (d) 1 m/s2
(c) 3.2 ms −2 (d) 0.4 ms −2
18. A block of base 10 cm × 10cm and height 15 cm is kept on an
15. A point particle of mass m, moves along the uniformly rough inclined plane. The coefficient of friction between them is
track PQR as shown in the figure. The coefficient of 3 . The inclination θ of this inclined plane from the
friction, between the particle and the rough track equals µ . horizontal plane is gradually increased from 0°. Then
The particle is released, from rest, from the point P and it [IIT-JEE 2009]
comes to rest at a point R. The energies, lost by the ball, (a) At θ = 30° , the block will start sliding down the plane
over the parts, PQ and QR, of the track, are equal to each (b) The block will remain at rest on the plane up to certain
other and no energy is lost when particle changes direction θ and then it will topple

from PQ to QR (c) At θ = 60° , the block will start sliding down the plane
and continue to do so at higher angles
The values of the coefficient of friction µ and the distance
(d) At θ = 60° , the block will start sliding down the plane
x(= QR), are respectively close to [JEE (Main) 2016]
and on further increasing θ , it will topple at certain θ
P
Numerical Questions :
19. A block starts moving up an inclined plane of inclination
h=2m 30° with an initial velocity of v0 . It comes back to its initial
v0
position with velocity . The value of the coefficient of
30º R 2
Horizontal Q kinetic friction between the block and the inclined plane is
Surface I
close to , The nearest integer to I is
(a) 0.2 and 3.5 m (b) 0.29 and 3.5 m 1000
[JEE (Main) 2020]
(c) 0.29 and 6.5 m (d) 0.2 and 6.5 m
20. As shown in the figure, a block of mass 3 kg is kept on a
16. An insect crawls up a hemispherical surface very slowly (see
1
the figure). The coefficient of friction between the insect and horizontal rough surface of coefficient of friction . The
3 3
the surface is 1/3. If the line joining the centre of the
critical force to be applied on the vertical surface as shown
hemispherical surface to the insect makes an angle α with
at an angle 60° with horizontal such that it does not move,
the vertical, the maximum possible value of α is given by
will be 3x. The value of x will be
[IIT-JEE 2001]
 2 3 1
 g = 10 m / s ; sin 60° = ; cos 60° = 
 2 2 
α

µ= 1 m= 3 kg
3 3
60°
(a) cot α = 3 (b) tan α = 3
(c) sec α = 3 (d) cosec α = 3 [JEE (Main) 2021]
Chapter 5 : Friction Page 41

21. A boy of mass 4 kg is standing on a piece of wood having 22. The coefficient of static friction between two blocks is 0.5
mass 5 kg . If the coefficient of friction between the wood and the table is smooth. The maximum horizontal force that
can be applied to move the blocks together is ________ N
and the floor is 0.5, the maximum force that the boy can
(take g = 10 ms −2 )
exert on the rope so that the piece of wood does not move
from its place is _______N. (Round off to the Nearest 1 kg µ = 0. 5
Table
Integer) [Take g = 10 ms −2 ]
2 kg F

T
T
F
T [JEE (Main) 2021]
R

[JEE (Main) 2021]

CRITICAL QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 a 2 a 3 b 4 d 5 a 6 a

PAST YEAR QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 c 2 a 3 a 4 b 5 a 6 a 7 c 8 a 9 c 10 c

11 d 12 d 13 b 14 a 15 b 16 a 17 a 18 b 19 346 20 3.33

21 30 22 15

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 Work, Energy, Power and
CHAPTER
IMPORTANT POINTS
6 Collision
 When the work is done by the body, its potential or kinetic Critical Questions
energy decreases. 1. A small cube with mass M starts at rest point 1 at a height
 When work is done on a body, its kinetic or potential 4R, where R is the radius of the circular part of the track.
energy increases. The cube slides down the frictionless track and around the
 Energy is a promise of work to be done in future. It is the loop. The force that the track exerts on the cube at point 2 is
stored ability to do work. nearly _________ times the cube’s weight Mg.

 Potential energy of a system increases when a conservative P1

force does work on it. P2
 When the momentum of a body increases by a factor n,
then its kinetic energy is increased by factor n2. 1R
R
 If the speed of a vehicle is made n times, then its stopping
2
distance becomes n times.
 Conservation laws can be used to describe the behaviour of (a) 1 (b) 2
a mechanical system even when the exact nature of the forces (c) 3 (d) 4

involved is not known. e.g., nuclear forces. 2. The potential energy for a force field F is given
 Mass and energy are interconvertible. That is mass can be by U (x, y) = sin(x + y) . The force acting on the particle of
converted into energy and energy can be converted into mass.  π
mass m at  0,  is
 A mass m (in kg) is equivalent to energy (in J) which is  4
equal to mc2 where c = speed of light.
(a) 1 (b) 2
 The collision generally occurs for very small interval of time.
1
 The mutual forces between the colliding bodies are action (c) (d) 0
2
and reaction pair. In accordance with the Newton’s third law of
motion, they are equal and opposite to each other. 3. Assume the aerodynamic drag force on a car is proportional
to its speed. If the power output from the engine is doubled,
 In the elastic collisions the forces involved are conservative.
then the maximum speed of the car
 In the elastic collisions, the kinetic or mechanical energy is (a) Is unchanged
not converted into any other form of energy.
(b) Increases by a factor of 2
 Collisions between two ivory or steel or glass balls are
(c) Is also doubled
nearly elastic.
(d) Increases by a factor of four.
 The force of interaction in an inelastic collision is non- 
conservative in nature. 4. A particle moves with a velocity v = (5ɵi − 3ɵj + 6kɵ )m/s under

 In head on collisions, the colliding bodies move along the the influence of a constant force F = (10ɵi + 10ɵj + 20kɵ )N .
same straight line before and after collision. The instantaneous power applied to the particle is:
 In the oblique collisions the colliding bodies move at certain (a) 200 J/s (b) 40 J/s
angles before and/or after the collisions. (c) 140 J/s (d) 170 J/s
 An engine pulls a train of mass m with constant velocity. If 5. A car of mass 'm' is driven with acceleration 'a' along a
the rails are on a plane surface and there is no friction, the straight level road against a constant external resistive force
power dissipated by the engine is zero. 'R'. When the velocity of the car is 'V', the rate at which the
engine of the car is doing work will be:
 In the above case if the coefficient of friction for the rail is µ,
(a) R V (b) maV
the power of the engine is P=µmgv.
(c) ( R + m a )V (d) (m a − R ) V
 In the above case if the engine pulls on a smooth track on
an inclined plane (inclination θ), then its power P=(mg sinθ) v. 6. A block of mass m is hung vertically from an elastic thread of
force constant mg/a. Initially the thread was at its natural
 In the above case if the engine pulls upwards on a rough length and the block is allowed to fall freely. The kinetic
inclined plane having coefficient of friction µ , then power of the energy of the block when it passes through the equilibrium
engine is P=(µ cosθ+sinθ)mg v. position will be:
 If the engine pulls down on the inclined plane then power (a) m ga (b) mga / 2
of the engine is P=(µ cosθ–sinθ)mg v. (c) Zero (d) 2mga
Chapter 6 : Work, Energy, Power and Collision Compact Study Material Page 43

7. A toy car of mass 5kg moves up a ramp under the influence 14. Two racing cars of masses m1 and m2 are moving in circles
of force F plotted against displacement x. The maximum of radii r1 and r2 respectively. Their speeds are such that
height attained is given by each makes a complete circle in the same time t. The ratio of
the angular speeds of the first to the second car is
ymax (a) 1 : 1 (b) m1 : m2

x=0 x = 11 m (c) r1 : r2 (d) m1 m2 : r1 r2

100 15. A block of mass m is suspended by a light thread from an

F elevator. The elevator is accelerating upward with uniform
80
60 acceleration a. The work done by tension on the block
40 during t seconds is:
20 m
(a) (g + a)at 2 T a
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 x 2
m
(b) (g − a)at 2
(a) ymax = 20 m (b) ymax = 15 m 2
m
m
(c) ymax = 11 m (d) ymax = 5 m (c) g at 2
2
8. A particle is released from rest at origin. It moves under (d) 0
influence of potential field U(x ) = x 2 − 3 x , kinetic energy at 16. A road is banked at an angle of 30° to the horizontal for
x = 2 is negotiating a curve of radius 10 3 m . At what velocity will
(a) 2 J (b) 1 J a car experience no friction while negotiating the curve
(c) 1.5 J (d) 0 J (a) 54 km/hr (b) 72 km/hr
9. A man who is running has half the kinetic energy of the boy (c) 36 km/hr (d) 18 km/hr
of half his mass. The man speeds up by 1m/s and then has 17. A car travelling on a smooth road passes through a curved
the same kinetic energy as the boy. The original speed of portion of the road in form of an arc, of circle of radius 10m.
the man was If the mass of car is 500kg, the reaction on car at lowest
point P where its speed is 20m/s is
(a) 2 m/s (b) ( 2 − 1) m/s

(c) 2m/s (d) ( 2 + 1) m/s

10. The work done in joules is increasing the extension of a
P
spring of stiffness 10 N/cm from 4 cm to 6 cm is:
(a) 35 kN (b) 30 kN
(a) 1 (b) 10
(c) 25 kN (d) 20 kN
(c) 50 (d) 100
18. A car starts from rest on a circular path with a constant
11. The P.E. of a certain spring when stretched from natural
magnitude tangential acceleration. Slipping does not take
length through a distance 0.3m is 10J. The amount of work
place in one revolution. The angle between acceleration and
in joule that must be done on this spring to stretch it through
velocity at the end of one revolution is α . Find the value of
an additional distance 0.15 m will be
tan α
(a) 10 J (b) 20 J
2π
(c) 7.5 J (d) 12.5 J
(a) 1 (b) 2
12. The work done by the frictional force on a surface in (c) 3 (d) 4
drawing a circle of radius r on the surface by a pencil of 19. A particle is rotating with a constant speed at inner surface
negligible mass with a normal pressing force N (coefficient of of a fixed hollow sphere. The normal reaction on the blocks
friction µ k ) is: at points A, B, C and D are N1, N 2 , N3 and N4 , respectively.
(a) 4π r 2 µ k N (b) −2π r 2 µk N Then, C
2
(c) −3π r µk N (d) −2π r µk N
13. A body of mass m accelerates uniformly from rest to a speed
v0 in time t0. The work done on the body till any time t is D B

1 t 2  1 2  t0 
(a) mv02  2  (b) mv0  
2 t 2  t 
 0 
3
A
 t  t  (a) N1 = N 2 = N 3 = N 4 (b) N1 > N 2 > N 3 , N 2 = N 4
(c) mv02   (d) mv02  
 t0  t
 0 (c) N1 > N 3 > N 2 , N 2 = N 4 (d) N1 < N 2 < N 3 , N 2 = N 4
Page 44 Compact Study Material Chapter 6 : Work, Energy, Power and Collision

20. An insect is moving with constant speed on the path shown 25. A spring gun of a spring constant k = 4000 N/m is held in a
in figure. vertical position. It projects a ball of mass 2 kg at a height of
A C
4 m above its initial compression. The initial compression in
D the spring is
(a) 10 cm (b) 20 cm
B (c) 30 cm (d) 40 cm
At which point normal reaction on the insect is minimum 26. A particle of mass m moves rectilinearly due to force
(a) A (b) B F = F0 − bx , where F0 and b are positive constants, x is the
(c) C (d) D distance from the point, where the particle was initially at
21. A particle is moving on a circular path of radius 18m with an rest. Find the distance covered by the particle till the
1 moment it came stand still
angular velocity ω = ω0 t where, ω0 = rad/s 2 . The F0 2F0
9 (a) (b)
acceleration of the particle at t = 3 s is b b
3F0 F0
(a) 2 m/s 2 (b) 3 m/s 2 (c) (d)
b 2b
(c) 2 2 m/s 2 (d) 10 m/s 2 27. A conservative force of 10 2 N acting on a particle of mass
22. The situation shown in figure, the block B of mass 2kg in m in XY-plane making an angle 45° with X-axis as shown in
hanging vertically downward and the block A is revolving the given figure. Find work done by conservative force
around it. The acceleration of the block A at steady state is between origin and point A (1m,1m,0)
Y

A 45°
X
(a) Zero (b) 10 J
B
(a) 10 N (b) 10 3 N (c) 20 J (d) 30 J
28. A simple pendulum mounted on a car. The car starts to
(c) 20 3 N (d) 30 3 N
accelerate on horizontal surface with constant acceleration
23. A wheel has eight equally spaced very thin spokes. It is g
a0 = . The maximum deflection of pendulum form
rotating about vertical axis passing through the centre (as 3
shown in figure) with 5π rad/s . A vertical arrow passes the vertical is
gap between the spokes without hitting the spoke. The
(a) 30° (b) 45°
maximum possible length of arrow is
(c) 60° (d) 90°
29. A collar of mass 10 kg is released from rest from position A.
When spring is in natural length and slides along a rough
vertical fixed rod. The block comes in rest at point B, 4 m
below the point A. The spring constant of spring is 100 N/m
and natural length of spring is 3 m . Find work done by
friction
1 O
(a) 0.3 m (b) m A
80
1 1
(c) m (d) m
20 10
24. The conservation principle of mechanical energy requires
that:
(a) The acceleration should be zero
B
(b) There should be no external forces
(c) The motion should be restricted to the gravitational
(a) −100 J (b) −200 J
force
(d) The force should be conservative (c) −300 J (d) −400 J
Chapter 6 : Work, Energy, Power and Collision Compact Study Material Page 45

30. A conservative force of magnitude 100 N is directed along 35. A small block of mass m is lying at rest at point D of a
the line y = 3 + x is acting on a block of mass m = 1 kg . hollow smooth cylinder moving horizontally with constant
Find work done by the conservative force, when block acceleration a0 . The minimum value of horizontal
displaces from A (3,1) to B (1, 3) acceleration a0 of the cylinder, so that the block can just
(a) Zero (b) 100 J reach at the point A is
(c) 200 2 J (d) 400 2 J
(a) g / 3
31. The potential energy of a particle on the line y = 2x are C
B
same at every point. The conservative force on the particle (b) g / 2 A
a0
at (1, 2) may be
(a) 4ɵi + 3 ɵj (b) 4ɵi + 8 ɵj (c) g
m
(c) 8ɵi + 4 ɵj (d) −8ɵi + 4 ɵj (d) 2g D
32. Initially, spring of spring constant 100 N/m is in its natural
length. The block of mass 1kg released from rest, the 36. A smooth chain of mass 6kg and length 10m is placed on a
maximum power of weight of the block, is horizontal table. Due to a small jerk, chain starts to slide
down from rest. Find the speed of chain when chain slip off
completely
(a) 5W k (a) 1 m/s (b) 5 m/s
(b) 10 W (c) 10 m/s (d) 15 m/s
(c) 20 W 37. The potential energy of a particle at A, B, C, D and P are
(d) 40 W m = 1kg U A = 2 J, U B = 5 J, UC = 8 J, U D = 5 J and U P = 5 J . The
33. The work done by the force F = bx ɵi + by ɵj around the path conservative force on the particle at point P is
shown in the given figure, is
D C B C
(0, a) (a, a)
0.2m
P Q

(a) Zero A D
2 3
(b) a b
3
0.2m
(c) a3b
4 3 (0, 0) (a, 0) (a) 10 N along PQ (b) 15 2 N along PA
(d) a A B
3 (c) 5 N along PC (d) 5 N along PA
34. Variation of potential energy along X-direction is shown in
the graph. The correct statement about conservative force is 38. In the situation shown in the figure, m1 = m2 = 10 kg,
H = 0.04 m and spring constant is k = 200 N/m . The
U
system is initially in equilibrium, what work perform to bring
m1 on floor slowly

m1
X
A B C

(a) x-component of conservative force at point B is maximum m2

(b) x-component of conservative force at point A is towards H
k
positive X-axis
(c) x-component of conservative force at point C is along
negative X-axis
(a) 0.1J (b) 0.2 J
(d) x-component of conservative force at point C is along
positive X-axis (c) 0.3 J (d) 0.4 J
Page 46 Compact Study Material Chapter 6 : Work, Energy, Power and Collision

39. A sphere of mass m is moving with a velocity 4iɵ − ɵj . It hits a u2 sin 2θ 2 u2 sin 2θ
(a) (1 + e) (b) (1 + e+ e )
wall and rebounds with velocity ɵi + 3 ɵj . The coefficient of g 2g
restitution between the sphere and the wall is u2 sin 2θ u2 sin 2θ
2
(c) e (d) (1 + e+ e )
3 9 g g
(a) (b)
4 16
44. A particle is moving as such r = b sin ωt ɵi + b cos ωt ɵj . The
4 2
(c) (d) trajectory of the particle is
15 3
40. A rocket has a mass of 21000kg of which 15000kg is fuel. (a) Straight line (b) Parabola

The rocket engine can exhaust fuel at the rate of 190 kg s −1 (c) Circle (d) Ellipse

with an exhaust velocity 2500 ms −1 relative to the rocket. If 45. A particle of mass m moves on a circular path of radius r
with constant speed in the influence of the force v × b , where
the rocket is fired vertically upwards, its final velocity at the
b is a constant vector. The speed of v of the particle is
burn out is (in ms −1 )
rb 2rb
[Given, In (3.5) = 1.253] (a) (b)
m m
(a) 2735 (b) 2935 rb 3rb
(c) 2535 (d) 1975 (c) (d)
2m 4m
41. A pile of loose link chain of mass per unit length λ lies on a
46. A ball of mass m is dropped from a height h to hit the
rough surface with coefficient of kinetic friction µ k . One ground and then rebound to a certain height. The process
end of the chain is being pulled horizontally along the carries on and the ball continues to hit the ground time and
surface by a constant force F. Determine the acceleration of again. The coefficient of restitution between the ground and
dx the ball is e . The total distance travelled by the ball before
chain in terms of x and =v.
dt coming to rest is

h  1 + e2   1 + 2e 2 
(a)   (b) h 
2  1 − e 2  1 − 2e 2 
F   

 1 + e2   1 − 2e 2 
(c) h  (d) h 
X  1 − e 2   1 + 2e 2 
   
F v2 F v2
(a) − µk g + (b) − µk g −
λx x λx λx 47. A small ball of mass m is placed on the top of a super ball of
mass M. The two balls are dropped to the floor from height
F v2 F v2
(c) − µk g − (d) − µk g + h. How high does the small ball rise after the collision?
λx 2x λx 2x
Assume that collisions are elastic and neglect the size of balls
42. A sphere moving with velocity v strikes elastically with a
wall moving towards the sphere with velocity u. If the mass
m
of the wall is infinitely large, the work done by the wall
during collision will be
(a) mu(u + v) (b) 2mu(u + v)
M
2 3
(c) mu(u + v) (d) mu(u + v)
3 2
43. A ball is projected with initial velocity u at angle θ with the
horizontal. Then, horizontal displacement covered by the (a) 6 h (b) 8 h
ball as it collides third time with the ground would be (c) 9 h (d) 12 h
(coefficient of restitution is e)

u
Past Year Questions
1. A particle of mass 100g is thrown vertically upwards with a
speed of 5 m/s. The work done by the force of gravity
during the time the particle goes up is [AIEEE 2006]
Smooth θ (a) –1.25 J (b) 1.25 J
x (c) 0.5 J (d) –0.5 J
Chapter 6 : Work, Energy, Power and Collision Compact Study Material Page 47

2. A light inextensible string that goes over a smooth fixed 7. A spring of spring constant 5 × 103 N/m is stretched initially
pulley as shown in the figure connects two blocks of masses by 5cm from the unstretched position. Then the work
0.36 kg and 0.72 kg. Taking g = 10 m / s 2 , find the work required to stretch it further by another 5 cm is
[AIEEE 2003]
done (in joules) by the string on the block of mass 0.36 kg
during the first second after the system is released from rest (a) 6.25 N-m (b) 12.50 N-m
[IIT-JEE 2009] (c) 18.75 N-m (d) 25.00 N-m
8. A uniform chain of length 2 m is kept on a table such that a
length of 60 cm hangs freely from the edge of the table. The
total mass of the chain is 4 kg. What is the work done in
pulling the entire chain on the table [AIEEE 2004]
(a) 7.2 J (b) 3.6 J
(a) 6 Joule (b) 5 Joule (c) 120 J (d) 1200 J

(c) 8 Joule (d) 2 Joule 9. A force F = −K(yˆi + xˆj) (where K is a positive constant) acts
on a particle moving in the x-y plane. Starting from the
3. A block of mass m is kept on a platform which starts from
origin, the particle is taken along the positive x- axis to the
rest with constant acceleration g / 2 upward, as shown in
point (a, 0) and then parallel to the y-axis to the point (a, a).
figure. Work done by normal reaction on block in time t is
The total work done by the forces F on the particle is
g [IIT-JEE 1998]
m a=
2 (a) − 2 Ka 2
(b) 2 Ka 2

[JEE (Main) 2019]

(c) − Ka2 (d) Ka
2
mg 2 t 2
(a) (b) 0 10. A time dependent force F = 6 t acts on a particle of mass
8
1kg. If the particle starts from rest, the work done by the
mg 2 t 2 3mg 2 t 2
(c) − (d) force during the first 1 sec. will be [JEE (Main) 2017]
8 8
(a) 18 J (b) 4.5 J
4. If W1,W2 and W3 represent the work done in moving a
(c) 22 J (d) 9 J
particle from A to B along three different paths 1, 2 and 3
−2
respectively (as shown) in the gravitational field of a point 11. A body of mass m = 10 kg is moving in medium and
mass m, find the correct relation between W1,W2 and W3 2
experiences a frictional force F = −kv . Its initial speed is
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003] 1 2
v0 = 10ms −1 . If after 10 s, its energy is mv0 , the value of
(a) W1 > W2 > W3 B 8
k will be [JEE (Main) 2017]
m
(b) W1 = W2 = W3 −1
(a) 10 Kg m s −1 −1
(b) 10 Kg m−1
−3
1 2
(c) W1 < W2 < W3 (c) 10 −3 Kg s −1 (d) 10 −4 Kg m −1
3
12. A uniform cable of mass ' M ' and length ' L ' is placed on a
(d) W2 > W1 > W3 A th
1
horizontal surface such that its   part is hanging below
n
5. When a rubber-band is stretched by a distance x, it exerts a
2 the edge of the surface. To lift the hanging part of the cable
restoring force of magnitude F = ax + bx where a and b upto the surface, The work done should be
are constants. The work done in stretching the unstretched
[JEE (Main) 2019]
rubber-band by L is [JEE (Main) 2014]
2MgL MgL
1 2 (a) (b)
2
(a) aL + bL
3
(b) (aL + bL3 ) n2 n2
2
MgL
(c) (d) nMgL
aL2 bL3 1  aL2 bL3  2n 2
(c) + (d) + 
2 3 2  2 3 
 13. If a body of mass 200 g falls from a height 200 m and its
6. A spring of force constant 800 N/m has an extension of total P.E. is converted into K.E. at the point of contact of the
5 cm. The work done in extending it from 5 cm to 15 cm is body with earth surface, then what is the decrease in P.E. of
[AIEEE 2002] the body at the contact (g = 10 m / s 2 )
(a) 16 J (b) 8 J (a) 200 J (b) 400 J
(c) 32 J (d) 24 J (c) 600 J (d) 900 J
Page 48 Compact Study Material Chapter 6 : Work, Energy, Power and Collision

14. Consider the following two statements : 21. Two particles of masses m1 and m2 in projectile motion
1. Linear momentum of a system of particles is zero  
have velocities v1 and v2 respectively at time t = 0. They
2. Kinetic energy of a system of particles is zero, Then  
collide at time t 0 . Their velocities become v1 ' and v 2 ' at
[AIEEE 2003]
(a) 1 implies 2 and 2 implies 1 time 2t 0 while still moving in air. The value of
(b) 1 does not imply 2 and 2 does not imply 1 |(m1 v1 ' + m2 v2 ' ) − (m1 v1 + m2 v2 ) | is
(c) 1 implies 2 but 2 does not imply 1 [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001]
(d) 1 does not imply 2 but 2 implies 1
(a) Zero (b) (m1 + m2 )gt 0
15. A lorry and a car moving with the same K.E. are brought to
rest by applying the same retarding force, then [IIT 1973] 1
(c) 2(m1 + m2 )gt 0 (d) (m1 + m2 )gt0
(a) Lorry will come to rest in a shorter distance 2
(b) Car will come to rest in a shorter distance 22. The potential energy of a 1 kg particle free to move along
(c) Both come to rest in a same distance the x-axis is given by
(d) None of the above  x4 x 2 
V ( x ) =  − J
16. An athlete in the olympic games covers a distance of 100 m  4 2 
in 10 s. His kinetic energy can be estimated to be in the The total mechanical energy of the particle is 2 J. Then, the
range [AIEEE 2008] maximum speed (in m/s) is [AIEEE 2006]
5 5
(a) 2 × 10 J – 3 × 10 J (b) 20,000 J – 50,000 J
(a) 2 (b) 1 / 2
(c) 2,000 J – 5,000 J (d) 200 J – 500 J
17. The block of mass M moving on the frictionless horizontal (c) 2 (d) 3 / 2
surface collides with the spring of spring constant K and 23. A mass of M kg is suspended by a weightless string. the
compresses it by length L. The maximum momentum of the horizontal force that is required to displace it until the string
block after collision is [AIEEE 2005] makes an angle of 45° with the initial vertical direction is
(a) Zero [AIEEE 2006]
ML 2 Mg
(b) (a) Mg 2 (b)
K 2
(c) MK L M (c) Mg( 2 − 1) (d) Mg( 2 + 1)
2
KL 24. The potential energy function for the force between two
(d)
2M atoms in a diatomic molecule is approximately given by
18. If a body looses half of its velocity on penetrating 3 cm in a a b
U(x) = 12 − 6 , where a and b are constants and x is the
wooden block, then how much will it penetrate more before x x
coming to rest [AIEEE 2002] distance between the atoms. If the dissociation energy of the
(a) 1 cm (b) 2 cm molecule is D = [U( x = ∞) − U at equilibrium ] , D is [AIEEE 2010]
(c) 3 cm (d) 4 cm
b2 b2
19. A 2 kg block slides on a horizontal floor with a speed of (a) (b)
6a 2a
4 m/s. It strikes a uncompressed spring, and compresses it till
the block is motionless. The kinetic friction force is 15 N and b2 b2
(c) (d)
spring constant is 10,000 N/m. The spring compresses by 12a 4a
[AIEEE 2007] 25. A particle is placed at the origin and a force F = k x is acting
(a) 5.5 cm (b) 2.5 cm
on it (where k is positive constant). If U(0) = 0 , the graph of
(c) 11.0 cm (d) 8.5 cm
U(x) versus x will be (where U is the potential energy
20. A particle free to move along the x-axis has potential energy
function) [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004]
given by U(x)=k [1–exp (–x)2] for –∞≤ x ≤+∞, where k is a
positive constant of appropriate dimensions. Then U(x) U(x)
[IIT-JEE 1999]
(a) At point away from the origin, the particle is in unstable (a) x (b) x
equilibrium
(b) For any finite non-zero value of x, there is a force
directed away from the origin
U(x) U(x)
(c) If its total mechanical energy is k/2, it has its minimum
kinetic energy at the origin (c) (d)
x x
(d) For small displacements from x=0, the motion is simple
harmonic
Chapter 6 : Work, Energy, Power and Collision Compact Study Material Page 49

26. A block of mass 2 kg is free to move along the x-axis. It is at 29. A tennis ball is dropped on a horizontal smooth surface. It
rest and from t = 0 onwards it is subjected to a time- bounces back to its original position after hitting the surface.
dependent force F (t) in the x-direction. The force F(t) The force on the ball during the collision is proportional to
the length of compression of the ball. Which one of the
varies with t as shown in the figure. The kinetic energy of the
following sketches describes the variation of its kinetic
block after 4.5 seconds is [IIT-JEE 2010]
energy K with time t most appropriately? The figures are
F(t) only illustrative and not to the scale [JEE 2014]
4N K
K
(a) (b)
4.5s t t
O 3s t
K K
(a) 4.50 J (b) 7.50 J (c) (d)
(c) 5.06 J (d) 14.06 J t t
27. Consider a rubber ball freely falling from a height h = 4.9 m 30. A person trying to lose weight by burning fat lifts a mass of
onto a horizontal elastic plate. Assume that the duration of 10kg upto a height of 1m 1000 times. Assume that the
potential energy lost each time he lowers the mass is
collision is negligible and the collision with the plate is totally
dissipated. How much fat will he use up considering the
elastic. Then the velocity as a function of time and the
work done only when the weight is lifted up? Fat supplies
height as a function of time will be [AIEEE 2009]
3.8 × 107 J of energy per kg which is converted to
v y mechanical energy with a 20% efficiency rate
(a) v1 h
(take g = 9.8 ms −2 ) [JEE (Main) 2016]
O t t
(a) 6.45 × 10 −3 kg (b) 9.89 × 10 −3 kg
v (c) 12.89 × 10 −3 kg (d) 2.45 × 10 −3 kg
+v1 y 31. A bullet of mass 10 g moving horizontally with a velocity of
(b) h
O t 400 ms −1 strikes of wooden block of mass 2 kg which is
–v1 t
suspended by a light inextensible string of length 5m. As a
result the centre of gravity of the block is found to rise a
v
y vertical distance of 10 cm. The speed of the bullet after it
+v1 h
emerges out horizontally from the block will be
(c) O
t1 2t1 3t1 4t1 t (a) 160 ms −1 (b) 100 ms −1
–v1
(c) 80 ms −1 (d) 120 ms −1
v
y
32. In a collinear collision, a particle with an initial speed v0
h strikes a stationary particle of the same mass. If the final
(d) O t kinetic energy 50% greater than the original kinetic energy,
t1 2t1 3t1 4t1 t
the magnitude of the relative velocity between the two
28. A particle which is constrained to move along the x-axis, is particles after collision, is [JEE (Main) 2018]
v0
subjected to a force in the same direction which varies with (a) 3 v0 (b)
the distance x of the particle from the origin as 2
v0
F ( x ) = −k x + ax 3 . Here k and a are positive constants. For (c) (d) 2 v0
3
x ≥ 0 , the functional form of the potential energy U(x) of
33. A block of mass m, lying on a smooth horizontal surface, is
the particle is [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002] attached to a spring (of negligible mass) of spring constant k.
U(x) U(x) The other end of the spring is fixed, as shown in the figure.
(a) (b) The block is initially at rest in
its equilibrium position. If now F
m
the block is pulled with a
x x constant force F, the maximum
speed of the block is [JEE (Main) 2019]
U(x) U(x) F πF
(c) (d) (a) (b)
π mk mk
F 2F
(c) (d)
x x mk mk
Page 50 Compact Study Material Chapter 6 : Work, Energy, Power and Collision

34. A force acts on a 2kg object so that its position is given as a 39. A wedge of mass M = 4 m lies on a frictionless plane. A
2 particle of mass m approaches the wedge with speed v .
function of time as x = 3t + 5 . What is the work done by
this force in first 5 seconds [JEE (Main) 2019] There is no friction between the particle and the plane or
(a) 850 J (b) 900 J between the particle and the wedge. the maximum height
(c) 875 J (d) 950 J climbed by the particle on the wedge is given by
35. A particle of mass 20g is released with an initial velocity [JEE (Main) 2019]
5m / s along the curve from the point A, as shown in the 2v 2 2v 2
figure. The point A is at height h from point B . The (a) (b)
7g 5g
particle slides along the frictionless surface. When the
particle reaches point B, its angular momentum about O will v2 v2
2 (c) (d)
be : (Take g = 10m / s ) [JEE (Main) 2019] 2g g
O −1
40. A bullet of mass 20 g has an initial speed of 1ms just
a=10m before it starts penetrating a mud wall of thickness 20 cm . If
the wall offers a mean resistance of 2.5 × 10 −2 N the speed
A
h=10m of the bullet after emerging from the other side of the wall is
close to [JEE (Main) 2019]

(a) 3 kg − m 2 / s B (b) 6 kg − m 2 / s (a) 0.3 ms −1 (b) 0.1 ms −1

(c) 2 kg − m 2 / s (d) 8 kg − m 2 / s (c) 0.7 ms −1 (d) 0.4 ms −1

36. A particle which is experiencing a force, given by
  41. A body of mass m accelerates uniformly from rest to v1 in
F = 3ˆi − 12ˆj , undergoes a displacement of d = 4ˆi . If the time t1. As a function of time t, the instantaneous power
particle had a kinetic energy of 3 J at the beginning of the delivered to the body is [AIEEE 2004]
displacement, what is its kinetic energy at the end of the
mv1t mv12 t
displacement [JEE (Main) 2019] (a) (b)
t1 t1
(a) 9 J (b) 15 J
(c) 10 J (d) 12 J mv1 t 2 mv12 t
(c) (d)
37. A particle moves in one dimension from rest under the t1 t 12
influence of a force that varies with the distance travelled by
42. A ball hits the floor and rebounds after inelastic collision. In
the particle as shown in the figure. The kinetic energy of the
particle after it has travelled 3 m is this case [IIT 1986]
(a) The momentum of the ball just after the collision is the
3 same as that just before the collision
Force
(in N)
2 (b) The mechanical energy of the ball remains the same in
1 the collision
x
1 2 3 (c) The total momentum of the ball and the earth is
Distance [JEE (Main) 2019] conserved
(in m)
(a) 5 J (b) 4 J (d) The total energy of the ball and the earth is conserved
(c) 2.5 J (d) 6.5 J 43. Three objects A, B and C are kept in a straight line on a
38. A ball is thrown vertically up (taken as +z − axis) from the frictionless horizontal surface. They have masses m, 2m and
ground. The correct momentum- height (p-h) diagram is m; respectively. The object A moves towards B with a speed
[JEE (Main) 2019] 9 m/s and makes an elastic collision with it. Thereafter, B
p p
makes completely inelastic collision with C. All motions
occur on the same straight line. Find the final speed (in m/s)
(a) h (b) h of the object C [IIT-JEE 2009]
O O

m 2m m
p p A B C
(c) (d) (a) 3 m / s (b) 4 m / s
h h
O O
(c) 5m/ s (d) 1 m / s
Chapter 6 : Work, Energy, Power and Collision Compact Study Material Page 51

44. A mass 'm' moves with a velocity 'v' and collides inelastically 49. A particle A of mass m and initial velocity v collides with
with another identical mass. After collision the Ist mass m
a particle B of mass which is at rest. The collision is
v 2
moves with velocity in a direction perpendicular to the
3 head on, and elastic. The ratio of the de-Broglie
initial direction of motion. Find the speed of the 2 mass nd wavelengths λ A to λ B after the collision is
after collision [AIEEE 2005] [JEE (Main) 2017]
2 λA 1 λA 1
(a) v (a) = (b) =
v λB 2 λB 3
3
3 λA λA 2
v (c) =2 (d) =
(b) v At rest
3 m
λB λB 3
m
(c) v 50. A moving block having mass m , collides with another
Before collision After collision
stationary block having mass 4 m . The lighter block comes
(d) 3v
to rest after collision. When the initial velocity of the lighter
45. A ball of mass 0.2 kg rests on a vertical post of height 5 m. block is v , then the value of coefficient of restitution (e) will
A bullet of mass 0.01 kg, travelling with a velocity v m/s in a be
horizontal direction, hits the centre of the ball. After the (a) 0.5 (b) 0 . 25
collision, the ball and bullet travel independently. The ball
(c) 0.8 (d) 0 . 4
hits the ground at a distance of 20 m and the bullet at a
51. It is found that if a neutron suffers an elastic collinear
distance of 100 m from the foot of the post. The initial
collision with deuterium at rest, fractional loss of its energy is
velocity v of the bullet is [IIT-JEE 2011]
p d , while for its similar collision with carbon nucleus at rest,
v m/s
fractional loss of energy is p c . The values of p d and p c
are respectively : [JEE (Main) 2018]
(a) (0, 0) (b) (0, 1)
(c) (.89, .28) (d) (.28, .89)
0 20 100 52. A satellite of mass M is in a circular orbit of radius R
(a) 250 m / s (b) 250 2 m/ s about the centre of the earth. A meteorite of the same mass,
(c) 400 m / s (d) 500 m / s falling towards the earth, collides with the satellite
completely in elastically. The speeds of the satellite and the
46. A shell is fired from a cannon with velocity v m/sec at an angle meteorite are the same, just before the collision. The
θ with the horizontal direction. At the highest point in its path subsequent motion of the combined body will be
it explodes into two pieces of equal mass. One of the pieces [JEE (Main) 2019]
retraces its path to the cannon and the speed in m/sec of the (a) In the same circular orbit of radius R
other piece immediately after the explosion is [IIT 1984] (b) Such that it escapes to infinity
(a) 3v cos θ (b) 2v cos θ (c) In an elliptical orbit
3 3 (d) In a circular orbit of a different radius
(c) v cos θ (d) v cos θ 53. A simple pendulum, made of a string of length l and a bob
2 2
of mass m , is released from a small angle θ 0 . It strikes a
47. A particle of mass m moving in the x direction with speed
2 v is hit by another particle of mass 2m moving in the y block of mass M , kept on a horizontal surface at its lowest
point of oscillations, elastically. It bounces back and goes up
direction with speed v. If the collision is perfectly inelastic,
to an angle θ1 . Then M is given by [JEE (Main) 2019]
the percentage loss in the energy during the collision is close
to [JEE (Main) 2015]  θ + θ1  m  θ 0 − θ1 
(a) m  0  (b)  
(a) 44% (b) 50% 
 θ 0 − θ1  2  θ 0 + θ1 
(c) 56% (d) 62%
m  θ 0 + θ1   θ − θ1 
48. Two small particles of equal masses start moving in opposite (c)   (d) m  0 
2  θ 0 − θ 1  
directions from a point A in a horizontal circular orbit. Their  θ 0 + θ1 
tangential velocities are v and 2v, respectively, as shown in 54. A piece of wood of mass 0.03kg is dropped from the top of
the figure. Between collisions, the particles move with a 100 m height building. At the same time a bullet of mass
constant speeds. After making how many elastic collisions,
other than that at A, these two particles will again reach the
0.02kg is fired vertically upward, with a velocity 100ms−1
point A [IIT-JEE 2009] from the ground. The bullet gets embedded in the wood.
v A
2v
Then the maximum height to which the combined system
(a) 4 reaches above the top of the building before falling below is
(b) 3 (g = 10ms −2 ) [JEE (Main) 2019]
(c) 2 (a) 10 m (b) 20 m
(d) 1 (c) 30 m (d) 40 m
Page 52 Compact Study Material Chapter 6 : Work, Energy, Power and Collision

55. An alpha- particle of mass m suffers 1 − dimensional elastic (c) 6.5 m / s and 6.3 m / s (d) 3.2 m / s and 12.6 m / s
collision with a nucleus at rest of unknown mass. It is
61. A body of mass 4 kg moving with velocity 12 m/s collides with
scattered directly backwards losing, 64% of its initial kinetic another body of mass 6 kg at rest. If two bodies stick together
energy. The mass of the nucleus is [JEE (Main) 2019]
after collision, then the loss of kinetic energy of system is
(a) 3.5 m (b) 1.5 m [AIEEE 2008]
(c) 4m (d) 2 m (a) Zero (b) 288 J
22 (c) 172.8 J (d) 144 J
56. If 10 gas molecules each of mass 10 −26 kg collide with a
62. Three blocks A, B and C are lying on a smooth horizontal
surface (perpendicular to it) elastically per second over an
surface, as shown in the figure. A and B have equal masses
area 1m 2 with a speed 10 4 m / s, the pressure exerted by
m while C has mass M. Block A is given an brutal speed v
the gas molecules will be of the order of [JEE (Main) 2019] towards B due to which it collides with B perfectly
(a) 100 N / m2 (b) 1016 N / m 2 inelastically. The combined mass collides with C, also
(c) 103 N / m2 (d) 104 N / m2 5
perfectly inelastically th of the initial kinetic energy is lost
57. A body of mass m1 moving with an unknown velocity of 6
in whole process. What is value of M/m [JEE (Main) 2019]
v1 ˆi , undergoes a collinear collision with a body of mass m2
A B C
moving with a velocity v2 ˆi . After collision, m1 and m2
m m m
move with velocities of v3 ˆi and v4 ˆi respectively. If
m2 = 0.5m1 and v3 = 0.5v1 then v1 is [JEE (Main) 2019] (a) 2 (b) 4
v (c) 5 (d) 3
(a) v4 − 2 (b) v4 − v 2 63. A particle of mass m is projected with a speed u from the
4
v2 ground at an angle θ = π / 3 w.r.t. horizontal (xaxis) .
(c) v4 + v2 (d) v4 − When it has reached its maximum height, it collides
2
58. A body of mass 2 kg makes an elastic collision with a completely inelastically with another particle of the same
second body at rest and continues to move in the original mass and velocity u ˆi . The horizontal distance covered by
direction but with one fourth of its original speed. What is the combined mass before reaching the ground is
the mass of the second body [JEE (Main) 2019] [JEE (Main) 2020]
(a) 1.5 k g (b) 1.8 kg
3 3 u2 u2
(c) 1.0 kg (d) 1.2 kg (a) (b) 2 2
8 g g
59. A particle of mass ' m' is moving with speed ' 2v' and
5 u2 3 2 u2
collides with a mass ' 2m' moving with speed ' v ' in the (c) (d)
8 g 4 g
same direction. After collision, the first mass is stopped
completely while the second one splits into two particles m
64. Particle A of mass mA = moving along the x-axis with
each of mass ' m' , which move at angle 45 ° with respect to 2
the original direction. The speed of each of the moving velocity v0 collides elastically with another particle B at
particle will be [JEE (Main) 2019]
m
(a) v /(2 2 ) (b) 2v rest having mass mB = . If both particles move along the
3
(c) v / 2 (d) 2 2v x-axis after the collision, the change ∆ λ in de-Broglie
60. Two particles of masses M and 2 M moving as shown, wavelength of particle A, in terms of its de-Broglie
with speeds of 10 m / s and 5 m / s , collide elastically at the wavelength (λ0 ) before collision is [JEE (Main) 2020]
origin. After the collision, they move along the indicated 3 5
directions with speeds v1 and v 2 respectively. The values of (a) ∆λ = λ0 (b) ∆λ = λ0
2 2
v1 and v 2 are nearly (c) ∆λ = 2λ0 (d) ∆λ = 4λ0
M 2M
v1 65. Two particles of equal mass m have respective initial
10m/s
 ˆi + ˆj 
30° 30° velocities u ˆi and u   . They collide completely
 2 
45° 45°  
inelastically. The energy lost in the process is
5m/s v2
[JEE (Main) 2020]
2M M [JEE (Main) 2019] 3 2 2
(a) 6.5 m / s and 3.2 m / s (b) 3.2 m / s and 6.3 m / s (a) mu2 (b) mu
4 3
Chapter 6 : Work, Energy, Power and Collision Compact Study Material Page 53

1 1 (a) 841.4 m/s (b) 821.4 m/s

(c) mu 2 (d) mu 2
3 8 (c) 831.4 m/s (d) 811.4 m/s
66. A 60 HP electric motor lifts an elevator having a maximum 70. A particle of mass m moves in a circular orbit under the
total load capacity of 2000 kg . If the frictional force on the C
central potential field, U(r) = − , where C is a positive
elevator is 4000N , the speed of the elevator at full load is r
constant. The correct radius – velocity graph of the particle's
close to (1 HP = 746W , g = 10ms −2 ) [JEE (Main) 2020]
motion is [JEE (Main) 2021]
−1 −1
(a) 1.5ms (b) 1.9ms
r r
(c) 2.0ms−1 (d) 1.7ms −1
67. A small ball of mass m is thrown upward with velocity u
(a) (b)
from the ground. The ball experiences a resistive force
O v O v
mkv2 where v is its speed. The maximum height attained
by the ball is [JEE (Main) 2020]
r r
2
1 ku 1  ku 2 
(a) tan−1 (b) ln 1 +
2k g k  2 g 
(c) (d)
1 ku2 1  ku 2 
(c) tan−1 (d) ln 1 + O v O v
k 2g 2k  g 
71. A body at rest is moved along a horizontal straight line by a
68. Given below are two statements : one is labelled as machine delivering a constant power. The distance moved
Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R by the body in time ' t ' is proportional to [JEE (Main) 2021]
Assertion A : Body 'P' having mass M moving with speed 3 1
'u' has head-on collision elastically with (a) t 2 (b) t 2
another body 'Q' having mass 'm' initially at 3 1

rest. If m << M, body 'Q' will have a (c) t4 (d) t 4

maximum speed equal to '2u' after collision. 72. A porter lifts a heavy suitcase of mass 80 kg and at the

Reason R : During elastic collision, the momentum and destination lowers it down by a distance of 80 cm with a
kinetic energy are both conserved. constant velocity. Calculate the work done by the porter in
In the light of the above statements, choose the most lowering the suitcase (Take g = 9.8 ms −2 ) [JEE (Main) 2021]
appropriate answer from the options given below (a) −62720.0 J (b) +627.2 J
[JEE (Main) 2021]
(c) −627.2 J (d) 784.0 J
(a) A is not correct but R is correct
(b) Both A and R are correct but R is NOT the correct 73. Given below is the plot of a potential energy function U(x).
explanation of A for a system, in which a particle is in one dimensional
(c) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct motion, while a conservative force F(x) acts on it. Suppose
explanation of A that Emech = 8 J, the incorrect statement for this system is
(d) A is correct but R is not correct U(J)
69. A large block of wood of mass M = 5.99 kg is hanging from
two long massless cords. A bullet of mass m = 10g is fired 10
into the block and gets embedded in it. The (block + bullet) Emech = 8J
8
then swing upwards, their centre of mass rising a vertical 6
distance h = 9.8 cm before the (block + bullet) pendulum
4
comes momentarily to rest at the end of its arc. The speed of
2
the bullet just before collision is : (Take g = 9.8 ms–2)
0 x
x1 x2 x3 x4

[Where K.E. = Kinetic Energy] [JEE (Main) 2021]

(a) At x = x 2 , K.E. is greatest and the particle is moving at
the fastest speed
m h (b) At x < x1 , K.E. is smallest and the particle is moving at
 M
v the slowest speed
[JEE (Main) 2021]
Page 54 Compact Study Material Chapter 6 : Work, Energy, Power and Collision

(c) At x = x 3 , K.E. = 4 J Numerical Questions :

(d) At x > x 4 , K.E. is constant throughout the region 75. A cricket ball of mass 0.15 kg is thrown vertically up by a

74. A block moving horizontally on a smooth surface with a bowling machine so that it rises to a maximum height of
speed of 40 m / s splits into two parts with masses in the 20 m after leaving the machine. If the part pushing the ball
ratio of 1 : 2 . If the smaller part moves at 60 m / s in the applies a constant force F on the ball and moves
same direction, then the fractional change in kinetic energy horizontally a distance of 0.2 m while launching the ball,
is [JEE (Main) 2021]
the value of F (in N) is (g = 10 ms −2 ) [JEE (Main) 2020]
1 2
(a) (b)
3 3
1 1
(c) (d)
4 8

CRITICAL QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 c 2 a 3 b 4 c 5 c 6 b 7 c 8 a 9 d 10 a

11 d 12 d 13 a 14 a 15 a 16 c 17 c 18 b 19 b 20 c

21 c 22 b 23 b 24 d 25 b 26 b 27 c 28 c 29 b 30 a

31 d 32 b 33 a 34 d 35 c 36 c 37 b 38 d 39 b 40 a

41 b 42 b 43 d 44 c 45 a 46 c 47 c

PAST YEAR QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 a 2 c 3 d 4 b 5 c 6 b 7 c 8 b 9 c 10 b

11 d 12 c 13 b 14 d 15 c 16 c 17 c 18 a 19 a 20 d

21 c 22 d 23 c 24 d 25 a 26 c 27 c 28 d 29 b 30 c

31 d 32 d 33 c 34 b 35 b 36 b 37 d 38 c 39 b 40 c

41 d 42 c 43 b 44 a 45 d 46 a 47 c 48 c 49 c 50 b

51 c 52 c 53 a 54 d 55 c 56 a 57 b 58 d 59 d 60 c

61 c 62 b 63 a 64 d 65 d 66 b 67 d 68 c 69 c 70 d

71 a 72 c 73 b 74 d 75 150

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER 7 
Rotational Motion
kgm rad s 

 kgm s 




m
v r
L  mvr  mr 
 
 


 

 X,Y Z 

m x m x   mn x n
m x
i
i i

X  n
m m   mn
m i
i


n  
m y m y   mn yn
m y i i
d
 

Y  i
n
d 
m m   mn
m
i
i

n

m z m z   mn z n
m z
i
i i

Z  n
m m   mn
m
i
i


 
n

i.e. mr 
i
ii



 K 
  
  K  R 

 

 

  ring   shell   disc   solid sphere





Page 56 Compact Study Material Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion

L L

L
Y

2L

X
L J m
i  j i  j O
r  r 

r  i  j r  i  j
J
m m

J
Y
m O
J J
m
J
a
O X m
l

A v B
a   a 
   
   
 a  a  B
    l
   

A B
 v
 
uA  uB  A

v  v 
g  

v  v 
 
B
OA OB
uB XY Ix Iy Iz
m X, Y Z
uA
Y
Ix  Iy  Iz
A
Ix  Iy  Iz

I x  Iy  Iz ° °
X
O
Iz  Iy  I x
Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion Compact Study Material Page 57

AB CD L R 
m X P

C
Y

P
B r 
A
O 
R

D
X
mL mL

mL mL vp   r  i  r  j

vp   r  i  r  j
R
R M vp   r  i  r  j
Z
 vp   r  i  r  j
MR Y
R
  F h
   MR
 
  X
   MR
 
F
 
   MR
 
h

P h

t P Rh R

t R h R

v2 v2
m R

v v

t t
R R R R m
v v v v
v2 v2
2m m

v v

t t
R R R R mv mv
v v v v mv mv
Page 58 Compact Study Material Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion

B A C m A
AB R B R
BC AB BC C R

A A
A B
C A C
h B h B

 
C C
a
a
a
a
m l x

y-
g 
xy

ml ml

ml ml

ms

P I
m r
PQR
R
P Q
PI
RI
PI
RI S R
M L
I
g g
Rr Rr
g g I I I
Rr Rr
 

M r
m  m m  m m m m

Mr Mr
m

Mr Mr
m m
IA IB
A B A
B
I A  IB
I A  IB m m

I A  IB
I A  IB
Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion Compact Study Material Page 59

M R r m
h
MR

 mgh r  h
mgh r  h
r h

mg h r  h
r h


  sin
N

  tan L L

l 
O
L
gl  N
gl 

gl  gl 

t
t t
t

v
P 

P l l
v  
v 
v 
v 
l




 ° °

     
g g    g   g
    
l l
     
g  g   g   g

l l    
Page 60 Compact Study Material Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion

 
 k CM v  v i O
h R

mvR 
k y
v

mvR  R
k
v
l= m
mvR  m R
h= m  k
x
O
mvR 
 k

 
P

v r
  R C

m l P

 v= ms
C R
r


 
ml  ml 
 

ml  ml 
l x M
m
m
x v
x P l
F

F v
 
 
C
L M
x

P
g

m g  g
m v    
L  L

 g  g
   
 L   L
m
v

v/2 v/2 
n

mv mv  
n n
mv mv n n
Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion Compact Study Material Page 61

m H v n
H
h CM

m  n 
n g   g
H v  n 

h  n  n 
  g  g
 n   n 

v v

v v

M L

M
p K

L L
p p

L L

K K
R p

x x
K

R R

R A M
R B M
C M B
C A

C
B
Page 62 Compact Study Material Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion

L x
x x=L
n
x
m x k  n
 L
m
a a x cm
a a n
a y x cm n

y
XCM XCM

x
L

L L
n n
a a O O

a a
XCM XCM
T
L L
F P
AB L L
n
P n
O
O
C
l 
A B rcm

 P
F
l

m
C L
l l m

l l
L L m L
m
 
XY X rcm  Lx  Ly rcm  Lx  Ly

m m  
rcm  Lx  Ly rcm  Lx  Ly
y cm
A B C D mA  m
y cm y cm mB  m mC  m mD  m
y cm y cm
R
R
R
 Y
 a
B C

a
X
z R
A D
h z  
a a
h h
a a
R ij ij
h h
aij
R
Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion Compact Study Material Page 63

ABCD M l
a b
HBGO P

b H a b l l
A B
a b
 
  M P M
E G g g
O
l l
g g
D C l l
F a

cm
 a b  a b
   
   
 a b  a b cm
   
   
g g g
m r
x y

AB
Y
P

m g


r A
g m m
0 m m O
r
P
   
 m m  m m B
    g g
   
r r



m

m




m

m

g  g
    r r
M l A B

IA IB

 IA  IB IA  IB
I A  IB I A I B  d A dB
z dA dB
M R

t

x

g g R
  R
l l
g g R R
 
l l
Page 64 Compact Study Material Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion

M
R

MR P
MR

P
MR
O

ma ma MR MR

ma ma MR MR

R M
M R
R

MR MR
 
MR MR
R
 

R M R

MR MR

MR MR

l
R I
l R

MR MR

MR MR

L 
O
XX R M

X X
o
R
R
O

L L MR MR
 
L L MR MR
 
Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion Compact Study Material Page 65

ABC M R
D, E F r  r  r
G
G
I
DEF ABC I  aMR
I a

A
I I

I I
D E M R
I  I G r
 r  kr
I
I B C
F
D M R
MR MR
D D M
R
MR MR
OO
D
M R
O
M

O R
D D
I
D
I
MR MR

I I
MR MR

cm cm cm
I b a
I
 
cm cm  
 r 
cm cm

x b
I x
I x x a
Ix

Ix
ab a  b  ab

a  b  ab ab
O x O x
Ix
Ix Fk

Fi  j Fij

O x O Fi  j Fij
x
Page 66 Compact Study Material Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion

R R L

AB  BC AB
F 
F
R R A

R R R R   z
F
B
x
a
f mg f
a C
F N N
F
 
F
N  
m
M L
F t t t

m L
kg m
m M

R F
m
m F
R 
m

g g FR
FR
g
g FR FR
m
m  
F F
l 
F F XY-
k  
k F i  j
  k  O

z

F

F
O y
m
m/ m
l x m
k k
l l
i j k F i j k F
k k
l l i j k F i j k F
Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion Compact Study Material Page 67

kg g cm
Nm N AB
m
AB s

A
 
cm
 

A B
R R  t B

 
 Nm  Nm
Y 
 
Nm  Nm
l
A
X
T x x
R
R B

T x T x
  
v A  vB t


l x l x
 R  R  i  R  R  i
T x T x
  R  R  i  R  R  i
m
m l x l x

m PC v
t s
O

C
l L
mvL
m v
mvl P r
mvr
h
l
O

m
x  x a  t y  y b  t
t

m x b  y a  k  m x b  y a k

 my a k
Page 68 Compact Study Material Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion

M R

M
O


m
x
R O
z
O


R R

R R
M R m m
a a

M l a


  
O L
 
z
r m m

m

l

l a
r r a
O

r
r
ma 

L z L ma 

O ms 
L L
L L

m
l
M
 rad s
J MV

L
M M

J = MV
VL VL
V L V L
Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion Compact Study Material Page 69

a v
z z
O
O  
r r
a

v
M t t
O T O T
O
z z
v a v a
 
v r r

O t O t
 v T T
B 
v
A B
v 
t
g
 A  B  A  B
A     B
Y



X

t t mg v t i  mg v t j

 t  t mg v t k  mg v t k

  i j k

t t m
P
 t  t xy
  O 

O P LO
t 
t LP
O
Z
 P
t O
v
tT

 O m

O 
 
z LO LP
 
 LO LP
v  
O LO LP
 
LO LP
Page 70 Compact Study Material Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion

L M l m


m
l  l
g g
l  l 
M M g g
M m M m cm
M M 
M m M m
rad s  g ms 

m r t  ti  t j
t
ij  k i

 k k 
A
B IA IB I A  IB
KA KB

K A  KB K A  KB
K A  KB KA  KB
 
k I

K
k k
 
I I
k k
K K  
I I
K K kg m
ABC
A J
AO
rad s
AB AC
s s
s s
A I
I




O
B a C
Ef Ei
E f  Ei

I l I
 

I
I
Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion Compact Study Material Page 71

M L
 O AB CD

CD O
l l  L AB CD
O CD
  
Mgl Mgl   
 
  B D
Mgl  Mgl  
C
O
Q P C
v P vQ vC
A C
P Q C
vQ  vC  v P
vQ  vC  v p Q
g g
vP C
vQ  v P vC 
P
vQ  vC  v P g g

R
M

F F
mR mR
F F
mR mR
g g
kg
g g
m
P Q
N
P
Q
s
rad s
N
P Q rad s
P Q
rad s
P Q
rad s
Q

hsph hcyl
hsph
hcyl
Page 72 Compact Study Material Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion


I
R
I
R

m Pab
AB
y Cx m
  m cm
y A A


Pa b
A B
x m

mg mg
gC gC
mg mg
gC g m
ab C k 
m 
l


m m
k  m k m
ml  axis m m 
ml  k  m k  m
R r
ml 
ml  MI AB 
MI
kg kg
M MI
cm cm cm

A
kg

cm cm r

C D
kg kg R
cm M

cm cm kg
cm cm kg B
cm cm kg r R R r
cm cm kg R r R r
Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion Compact Study Material Page 73

cm M z 
cm B
CD
l
AB kg m 

A C

M A r M
L L/

r B LB
D
LB
 kg m  kg m
LA
kg m  kg m
LA LB

kg cm 
m
F i j
P P O
Q

Y
 kgm kgm F P

kgm  kgm

cm

cm
a m
v
 O X
Q
cm

     

   
a v
 M r

v v
m
g  g 
v v
g  g  M M m
 
M m M
r M m M
 
I mg M m M m

h
kg m
gh
gh
I  mr
kg
mgh mgh
I  mr I  mr m s
M l rad/s

 M
A LA z m

M B LB
v
Page 74 Compact Study Material Chapter 7 : Rotational Motion

a kg m
F
b
 
b

a
F ms  g ms

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER 8 
Gravitation
rms

 r r

 v v  r r




s


kms


 
G  n
 n


 n
n


  ve

 x

x
 x

KE PE
x
 x

x
 x

x





 m

 


Page 76 Compact Study Material Chapter 8 : Gravitation

 h ge gp

v es  g Rh
ge
gp  g p  ge

ge
g p  ge gp 
 kms

R n

ve
R
 r n
a
ar



 R R

km/s
R  
 h

R
  h  2R
  gR 
 R  h  1

2
h R v gh
v

ve

ve
v
M R v

ve  v ve  v

GM
M M x
R
x
GM
R R

m
GM
 h
R M M
h

GM   
 
R  
m nR
 R
 n   n 
  mgR   mgR
 
 n   n 
mgR
 nmgR
n
Chapter 8 : Gravitation Compact Study Material Page 77

A B m
R R A Re vi
v B
vf Re Me
v v
Gm  
v f  vi    
v v Me R  
GMe  
v f  vi    
R  

me   re   GM e  
v f  vi    
  R  
G 

re re GM  
v f  vi    
R  
re re
M
R R
P
GM

A B R
P
C GM
M A B A   R
R
C B C GM R
R R
C A
GM

R

  m m
 

r
r
 m m   G 
 G r   r m m 
r r    
r r  
r  G 
R 
G m m
  r mm 
   
R

M R
m R R R
R R
m
m m
GMm
R m R/
O
GMm O d
R
R Gd m m G
GMm
m m d
R
R
GMm  G
 m m d 
m m Gd
R 
Page 78 Compact Study Material Chapter 8 : Gravitation

 A B
A B
VA
VB
d
d R d
 R  R
g g
 R Rg
g g

R
M
R
Gm
v v
R Gm R
M
M Gm Gm
v v
R R
GMm L xa x  L a
R m x
GMm GMm
A  Bx
R R

       
Gm  A    BL  Gm A    BL
 a L a   aL a 
       
Gm A    BL Gm A    BL
  a a  L     a a  L  
M
M a a a
a
M

M
GM
a a
GM a
a
GM
a
GM
a
M a
a
v M a
g
g
GM GM
v
a a
ve  v ve  v
GM GM
ve  v ve  v a a
Chapter 8 : Gravitation Compact Study Material Page 79

K ms 
r 
r ms 
R
T   m
TR T R  m  m
T R T R  m  m
m m r

th R
Gm

r
Gm Gm
 
R R r r
M
R R R
R
R h g
V
R R r  G

R  GM  GM
R
R R
 GM  GM
R R R
d M
dR
R R R
d
dR P
R
P
R

R
R

R 
GM GM
R   
R R
GM GM

 R R
kgm 
kg
g R
 m m s km
ms 
N N
 Joules  Joules
N N
 Joules  Joules
m
s R
mgR mgR
mgR mgR
s s m

s s m m
m m
Page 80 Compact Study Material Chapter 8 : Gravitation

E
km s

km s  km s 

km s  km s 
E E

 E E


nth
ve  kms  vs
R

 n   n 
   
   
R R
 n 
vs  km s  vs  km s   
Rn R 
vs  km s  vs  km s 

A B m m  rR

R B  rR
R 
K A KB
v r r 

v v
‘h’
  km E

E h E E R r
R r
v v

 km  km
 km  km
v r
R R r
‘m’

km hrs
R km

mv mv
hrs hrs
mv mv hrs hrs

 kg
 m
O O

O hours

G  Nm kg 

 m s  m s hours hours
 m s  m s hours hours
Chapter 8 : Gravitation Compact Study Material Page 81

T
T R
R R nth
T T R T

 n  n
 
T  R 
T R
n

M T R n T R
R R m
L
GmM GmM
R R L L
GmM GmM m m
R R L L
h m m
g
h  R R
R
h R

g d
d
 
gR R
gR 

gR gR
km

m
u
R R
  kg m
  m
G  
Nm kg G
M
m GM   GM 
u   m u  
 R   R 

m  GM 
 m  GM 

u u
 R   R 
   

mA mB dM t
 bv t v t
rA rB TA TB dt
mA mB

bv
TA  r A   bv t 
  TA  TB rA  rB Mt
TB  r 
bv bv
TA  TB m A  mB TA  TB  
Mt Mt
Page 82 Compact Study Material Chapter 8 : Gravitation

m m d kg
kg m
m V kg m
V
d d
  G  G
 Gm Gm
 G  G
Gm Gm M R

d  d M R r
kg m
m
GM M GM M
V V
r r
G G M M G M M
 G  V V
r r
RE
G  G
 r
r
M
 r r r r r r
L      
RE R E RE RE RE RE
r r r r r r
L L      
R E RE RE RE R E RE
M M
L L
M M
R R
km s

h
km s 
  kilometre/s
Re  h   Re   
     h    vi
g  R   g  Re  
 e     R
 
R
    x
Re  h  Re  ve vi   ve x
  R      h    y
g  g  Re 
  e     
 

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER 9 
Elasticity

 



 
 

 


 

 


  Y 










 
YA i.e.
K
L
 
 r

 P

P

 
 



kg


 kg
Page 84 Compact Study Material Chapter 9 : Elasticity

L d
 
L d L d
 
L d L d

 

 
 
F

 
  B
n

 B B
B  n B n 


B B

B  n B n 
g
 
m
 
A
  m
L l F
mg mg
A A
mg
Fl Fl
A
Fl Fl U
L L x

B C
x
A
p
t C


x A B
B
x B C
p p
x B C
B B
x A B
p p B
B B
Chapter 9 : Elasticity Compact Study Material Page 85

A, B C
T
m A

B A

T C

A B
m C Y

 Y
A R F
L A
Y 
R F
Y 
Y  F
F F F 
Y  
F   F F F

g




 
 
 
 

 
R
  
A B  h
R
A B R
R  
A B
h R
R
Page 86 Compact Study Material Chapter 9 : Elasticity

P P 

P P m l
P P
l
M,V m M,V

h h d

d V  M d V  M
cm V  M V  M

d V  M d V  M

h
h V  M V  M

V V

d 


h

g
L
d d
h h
L
h
L
R H
d d

d
d  d d

d
d dd

W W
W
H

 gHR  HR W W W W
W W W W
 gHR  gHR
W W W W
W W W W
Chapter 9 : Elasticity Compact Study Material Page 87

 R
 h H
S L
L R

h   T
  h
  
h

Y

V 
SY   T SY T
d
SY   T SY   T
L W
V d  
a W
V  g  a d    S
L
V d g

W W  W
S S
W  W W W
L
S S
R
L R
  Y Y

 

Y Y
l mm

mm A M
l L B
l l 
A B
B
m
F
A A
mm 
mm kg

M L
 mm g m/s  
L M

 N/m  N/m ML M
 
 N/m  N/m  L
Page 88 Compact Study Material Chapter 9 : Elasticity

MPa
N

mm mm
mm mm
m
mm
L
A
 C
F mm

T Y  N m  N m

F F
 N m  N m
AT A T 
F F  N m  N m
AT AT
M kg N
mm
m mm
J J
mm
J J
P
K

mm
mm mm
cm
mm P
PK 
kg K
cm P 
ms  K PK
r
K

Nm Nm 
m
Nm Nm
mm
kg g  m s mg mg
Ka Ka
Ka Ka
 Nm   Nm  mg mg

 Nm   Nm  m
L A
A B
Y
A m R B
m mm
R mL YA
f f
 YA  mL
mm mm
mA YL
mm mm f f
 YL  mA
Chapter 9 : Elasticity Compact Study Material Page 89


K
P m kg
m rad s 
PK P
 K   Nm

 cm
K K
P P
W W
l T  N m W W
l T  
m  
m
kg kg

l l
kg
g m s
l T l T
T T
W
l T l T kg
T T W

kg
l l

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 10
Page 90 Compact Study Material Chapter 10 : Surface Tension

CHAPTER Surface Tension






  h
h g

 

 
 R
R T T



 R n
 RT n 
n   







 





  

 
  
 
 


r r r

p

p r r r p r r r

r r r r r r

 p r r r p r r r
r r r r r r
Chapter 10 : Surface Tension Compact Study Material Page 91

A R r
R r R
T T r
Y

R 
r

TR TR w g w g
AY AY R R
T T
TR TR w g w g
AY AY R R
T T

r T cm cm

 Nm
rT
 r rT  mJ  mJ

 mJ  mJ
rT
r rT r A B

N m

A B cm cm
L T
N m nB n A nA nB

T T A B
g  g 

T T
g  g  
r

U r

 N
cm

r r

r r

Nm Nm
Nm Nm
Page 92 Compact Study Material Chapter 10 : Surface Tension

M
r
r
M
M

M M
P
P

 

t
h r
t h r
r r

P P

mm
t
t
A  Nm   kg m 
B h

h
A B A B
g ms 
m m
m m
r
A B A B
R T
J

T  T
cm   
J r R rJ

T  T
cm   
J r R rJ
a b ba

cm cm
cm ab ab
ab ba
 ab ba
 ab ab
D  m
h  
m g m s r r

rhg
  N m

rr r r

rr r r
r r
Chapter 10 : Surface Tension Compact Study Material Page 93

cm
cm cm
cm

 cm

m   kgm g ms 

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER 11 
Fluid Mechanics
















 




C

  
N
N
 NA
NA

 










Chapter 11 : Fluid Mechanics Compact Study Material Page 95

H v
D
x

D HD DH
V0
D HD DH

v v

v v

x 


P P



H
T
x x H   T
P P T T 

x x

A

t
 
h h 

  

O t O t 


h h


     
     
O t O t
Page 96 Compact Study Material Chapter 11 : Fluid Mechanics

c

c
c
d
c
   
c    
   
cm    
L M
cm A

cm Hg 
cm cm x
cm cm
 Mg Mg  LA 
  
a v k k  M 
Mg  LA  Mg  LA 
     
k  M  k  M 
L L H
A
v v L

v v P

d H/ d
L
L
d d
H/
d

l h

V
l h
half
l h l
l h h
V V l h
V V gm/cm
gm/cm
d d
gm/cm

d
d
Chapter 11 : Fluid Mechanics Compact Study Material Page 97

  
m
T P ms 

ABCD 
 m

 
 m  m
 
R  m  m
P Rh R  gh RT

P Rh R gh RT B

P R R gh RT h
C
P R R gh RT
D m
m/s
mm

L y
mm mm R y

  N m R
 kg m g m s L
L

mm mm L
L
mm mm 

r
 v

r
v
r v
 Pa
r v
d d r v
 Pa d d
m
kg m
cm
 ms 
m m
m m m m
m m
m


m s
cm
 kg m
kg kg cm cm
kg kg cm cm
Page 98 Compact Study Material Chapter 11 : Fluid Mechanics

 
cm
g

kg m 
g
 m Pa s
 h
g


ms  g
cm

m km
V
m V

 
 m  m
 
m  
m kgm g ms 
R v
 Nm  Nm

 Nm  Nm
R mm
v
h m
v v

d
 T fw  kg m

fa  kg m g m s

  Nsm 

T T
r r
d g d g ms  ms 

T T ms  ms 
r r
d g d g

kg m
cm
kg
 rad s  h cm

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 Thermometry, Thermal
CHAPTER 12 Expansion and Calorimetry

 C
K


 atm
atm


t C P mm  C



e.g. K K

 

C C K
calories C 
C i.e.

 

  Q  
    
  mc 

e g.

 cal gm oC



 cal gm  C 

 
 K   

 C m gm C C
C m gm C C
Page 100 Compact Study Material Chapter 12 : Thermometry, Thermal Expansion and Calorimetry


  x  C  x


C


C
C
  Y Y

  
 
 Cu   C  Al   C
Y Y
Cu  C
Al  C
I
 I
T
ABCDEFGH
 I T  I T   
x   C y   C z   C
 I T  I T
L
y
T Y 
A B

C
D
 Y
Y 

  F G
x
Y Y E
cm H
z
E 
 
 ABCD   C  BCGH   C
 
 CDEH   C  EFGH   C
EA t EA t t
EA t t E t

W t W
s l W

W   s  l t W  s  l t
W  s  l t W t  s  l
W W


C 
 m  Al

C 
C
W W W W
W W
Chapter 12 : Thermometry, Thermal Expansion and Calorimetry Compact Study Material Page 101

 
 
C

L
T T

L L T T
cm

cm
L L
 
L C

C
 
 
 C  C

 
 C  C

 
C  x y

x
 


X
 
 
X

x
x


 C
x

 s
 C 

C s C
 C 


C  C

C  C
L

l C  C
C C 
C   C
C C
Page 102 Compact Study Material Chapter 12 : Thermometry, Thermal Expansion and Calorimetry

C mm
cm M
C C C
 Nm m M

 K

 Pa  Pa C N m

 Pa  Pa g ms

PT  Kg Kg
Kg Kg
L r
T T
Y T
T T
 C g C F
C
g
F  r YT F  r YT
 J g C F  r YT F  r YT
 J g C kg C
C  J g
 rms
g g V

g g
 J kg C
A B
C A C B
 kJ kg
T C
A B
T
C C K
C C
k N m
g kg
cm

 J kg K
M S
 J kg K t

K 
K t
 
K K
M  C
  t t
 cal g C M C
C t
t

cal g
kg m
M M
  kg
M M
M M C C

M M
C C
Chapter 12 : Thermometry, Thermal Expansion and Calorimetry Compact Study Material Page 103

grams kg C kg C
C g
C
C
g g kcal kg per C kcal kg C
g g kcal kg
m P kg kg
kg kg
t
C kg
kg C
Pm Pt
t m C kg

m t
Pt Pm
C

T  C
L cal g C cal g J
L T T L joule cal
ms
T L T L
ms
litres
ms
P

g T
kW g
C g
litres C C T
 C
P
 cal gm C

C C
C C
g
C
g g
C
C
kJ kg  K  J kg 
K 

kg m 
J kg  K  J kg  K 

J kg  K  J kg  K 

litre g A C g
kW C B C
J s C
C C g A C g B
kJ kg C

min s min s C C
min min C C
Page 104 Compact Study Material Chapter 12 : Thermometry, Thermal Expansion and Calorimetry

kg C

JK  a T
kg 
C T
T  T

Jkg  K  JKg  K 
 a  T  a T

a  T a  T
mm mm
g C U
U

C T  
Nm

  J kg
 g ms 

  J kg
  kg m 
mm mm
g g
g g mm mm

g m s x
y z C C 
x y C
y z C
x z
cal g C cal   C C
C C
C C
C C
L L
cc C

Vm C


 L  L    
C      o
C

L L
 Vm
   L L
cc
  L L

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER 13 Kinetic Theory of Gases


 fvib
fvib  poly 
Pn Tn Tn  fvib

 T v vrms P 

 V – b
  
b  NA r  r NA
 
rms

  H
m

 m

Mve R
T ve
R R
R M
R

 f CP CV  R

 g mole
NA
K
NA   g mole   kg mole
T K P atm litre

 litre
eg g g g

 mole M gram litre 

 vrms : vav : vmp = 


 vrms m/s vav m/s
vmp m/s



Page 106 Compact Study Material Chapter 13 : Kinetic Theory of Gases

Vrms

Va

Vmp

Vrms  Va  Vmp  Vs

Va  Vmp  Vrms  Vs

Vmp  Va  Vrms  Vs

va v Vrms  Va  Vs  Vmp

A B C
va  v va  v T
A
va  v v
O B N C O
v
N O A
O
V N B V
O C
v v
v v V V V

PV kT kT M

O N

u u u

u
u

u
E
P E
MkT pV M V
Chapter 13 : Kinetic Theory of Gases Compact Study Material Page 107

T T

m m
g n n
n T n T n T n T
g n n n n
nn T n n T
U U
n n nn
A B
P atm
Å
A 
 s  s
 s  s
B
V

m 
U U U U

U U U  U

N

N N


N N

 N N A B
A N, m
B N
m x
A V Ax x B
VBx VAx VBx


K


  C C
k 
 



kms

 kg

 

 
Page 108 Compact Study Material Chapter 13 : Kinetic Theory of Gases

n AB

PV
nR P
A
PV P
nR
PV P B
nR
PV V V
V
nR

T T V V P P

O
T P
T T T T He
TT PV P V TT PV P V T
PVT P V T PVT P V T P P
P P
V T
PV RT
P P

V P
P  P
P
P  P 

P  P 
T m
C C
 Pa ni
T V nf
V
n f  ni
T
  V VT    
 
 

 V  
PP      P V
T  T T   V  
T T  T
. K K
V V
 
PV PV
R R
T T  T T T  T PV PV
K K R R
Chapter 13 : Kinetic Theory of Gases Compact Study Material Page 109

g
r nr n e  r C

R J k mole
n n 
kJ kJ
n  n 
kJ kJ


kB   J K
NA   kg
 m
 ms 

K K
 K K
atm rms
m s C atm
C rms

m s m s
A B C m s m s
T
HCl
A O B N C
HCl
O N
v m kB
O A V N
B V O
C mv mv
V V V kB kB

VV kT M mv mv
kB kB

T  m mol O
K
kT kT O
Tk kT nm m s
atm
O
K

 s
K

Cp Cv
 
 s  s
 
 s  s
C p  Cv  R C p  Cv  R
u
u K C p  Cv  R C p  Cv  R
 Vrms 
rms  
 Vrms  J kg K

J kg K J kg K
J kg K J kg K
Page 110 Compact Study Material Chapter 13 : Kinetic Theory of Gases

J
C
P V
PV n  n CP
Cv J J
J J
C  CP CP  C
n n
C  Cv C  Cv T

C  Cv CP
n n
C  CP Cv RT RT
RT RT
moles C Q
C
C C T
R cal mol K
cal cal
cal cal Q Q
g g
CP Q Q
CV

Cp Cv

C p  Cv  a C p  Cv  b
O
eV
N
a b a b
eV
ab a b
kg
 N m kg m
K
O N

J J
J J
Cp CV

A J mol  K 
B
kg  N m
kg m
A B
A B  J  J
A B
 J  J
A B
r.m.s.
K
J m
K
R J mol K
 
J mol K J mol K  J m s  J m s
J mol K J mol K  
J m s  
J m s
Chapter 13 : Kinetic Theory of Gases Compact Study Material Page 111

T T T
m m m
n n n

T T T n T n T n T
n n n

n T n T n T n T n T n T
n T n T n T n T n T n T
 Pa
nm
 
m k  JK
nm nm
l nm nm
l l l

T m  C 
   P  
 CV 
R g

RT  l  l  RT  l  l 
   
g  l l  ng  l l  AB C
nRT   nRT  l  l  m A  m B  mC
    
g l l  g  l l 

m
 Pa v A  v B  vC  
vA vB vC
 J J
 J  J v A  v B  vC   
vA vB vC
C
f
C 

f f
 

f f

T

T
T
RT l l

T
nm T
nm
l  l
 
l  l
 

l  l
 
l  l
 
Page 112 Compact Study Material Chapter 13 : Kinetic Theory of Gases

p
dp
v  ap
dv
pp v

R mp mp
ap me me
eR
 mp  me
p  
C m  mp
ae R  e 

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER 14 P
Thermodynamics
V
H U PV
U

 Q Q U PV
Q H

W
U U Q W
T
 W
K m
P
x

W  W W W
M
W
M x 
P P

W
P a
Kx
W mg b

V
W  P V  Kx  mgx
a  b 
 b  a
Vf
W  Vi
P dV

P-V Vi
Vf L

 L M
 P
T
T T
RT RT RT N
PV RT  V    dV  dT
P  
Vf T     RT 
 W  Vi
P dV   T
 
T   
 dT  RT O


K

L
M N
N
 P V PV x x M
L

R R R
C  CV   
x   x
K


M N M
L

L
N
Page 114 Compact Study Material Chapter 14 : Thermodynamics


 
 
A

P P
A A

P V V
T P
P

PA PA
PA PA V
V
AB
PV A B

2P A

P B

V 2V

P-T

PV
T V
T V
p T T

T T T

P
PV
R
V0,P0
PV
R
PV 2V0,P0
Patm 
R
V
Chapter 14 : Thermodynamics Compact Study Material Page 115

T T P
T
T
P P
P P
X Y

X Y K
X m Y
m m
m m
M
H
K g

MgH RT  MgH RT
MgH RT MgH RT

m/s


R

R

 
R R
K K
K K
m 
P B 
m 
P

P
V P
A
B
C

V P V P
V
C A

B
Page 116 Compact Study Material Chapter 14 : Thermodynamics

a b
PQRSP acb Q
W 
adb Q
adb
Q
P
P

S R
c b

PQ RS PQ QR a d
OR RS RS SP V

P
P

C B

V A
T

AB
AB
AB
AB
BC
W W
A B

P
B
A

T
W  W
W  W
W  W
W
W
p V
p V Q
W

Q W
Q  W Q  W
Chapter 14 : Thermodynamics Compact Study Material Page 117

U U
T
A B Q
A B U RT RT
AB RT RT
P
A 
A

KJ kJ
B
KJ KJ
V
A B
U  U  U  U  U U

Q  W  Q  W 
P

A B

U  U
U  U
U  U
U U

R J mol K

J J
J J
dW  dQ 

incorrect

A B
 J  J

 J
 J
J
J
Page 118 Compact Study Material Chapter 14 : Thermodynamics

PV

Pi  Pa Vi  m

Pf   Pa Vf   m P P, V P, V
A B
P V  PV
PV

Pi PV D C
P, V P, V
Vf O V
A B
ACB ADB ACB J
J J J
ADB J
J J
ADB
A B P
K A
C B
B

A D
A K
B V
J J
K K
J J
K K

ABC BC VT  K K
A B C K K K T
R
B
P K
RT KRT

K
RT T

K CAB
A K C
Pa
V P
C A
R
CA R
AB R B
BC R
Vm
ABCA
J J
J J
J CA
A B
Vm Q A Q B
C B
U A U B

A Q A  QB U A  U B
P f
P N/m Q A  QB U A  U B A

Q A  QB U A  U B B
J J
i
J J Q A   Q B  U A   U B V
Chapter 14 : Thermodynamics Compact Study Material Page 119

abca
ca J V V
J ab J
bc abc

T
c
P
T
a b L L

V
T T
J J
L  L
J J  
L  L
 
P
L L 
 
P P L L 
 
P P  kJ

 dV/dP V P
R J mol K

 

P
P V V
V

 P P
W
P P P P W  P P W 
R T P P W P P W 
P-V

U U
u T P  
V V  P
T
R
T  eR T  e R

T T V
R R
He O O He
He Ar O N

M 
Vq V q
v
 C 
  P 
 C 
 V 
 
  Mv Mv
 R R

   Mv  
Mv
R R
Page 120 Compact Study Material Chapter 14 : Thermodynamics

J C

V C
V ln ln ln ln
ln ln ln ln
K  kJ K  kJ

K kJ K  kj
T

T
TV x  x

T
S
S S
T

T T K
n
CV T T

nR nR K K K K
CV  nR CV  nR K K K K
nR nR
CV  nR CV  nR K

litre

C
R J mol  K 
K
J J
K
J J
K
ABCDA
atm C C

R J mol K
J J B C
P
J J

 cal D
P
A
C C.

 J  J V V

 J
Chapter 14 : Thermodynamics Compact Study Material Page 121

A B
T  K
T B 

T  K T
P

K K
K K

T V

T
T T T T T T V V

 T T


V V
T

 T T

T
Q
T  TT T  T T W U
T  T T T  T T

T  T T T  TT
W 
T  T T T  TT
Q 

C U  W 

Q 

C C C C U 

C C C C

CP
  
CV


J

  
   
 

J J
 
 
  J J
Page 122 Compact Study Material Chapter 14 : Thermodynamics

n ABCA

AB T C
V V  V
P P
BC P C C
V C C

C A
P P mole
ABCA K mole K
P
K
A
P

kV
P B C C nR
C
n
V
V V V
Q
  Q
nRT   nRT 
  xR
x
nRT
R

CD 
A D
N/m

N/m
B
C J
P P kPa

J  J
J  J

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER 15 Transmission of Heat
e.g.

   t
  TD dm dm TD
 Lf  
R dt dt Lf R
   
 
    C
L, K, A C



C

dQ

dt
 d

dt

 
  dQ
cal/m J/s etc
dt
d
Qs ts Qp C/min
dt
Qp tp Rs
tp  
Qs ts Rp

R Qp t 
RS  Rp  R    p 
Qs  ts  A B

A B

t K C
 
t K C

 min sec

  C  C
t  C  C t
     t t
C


C C
C


Page 124 Compact Study Material Chapter 15 : Transmission of Heat

d
k k r r T T

r r
r r
r r r
T
r r r r
r  r T
 
r 
 

Y
cm C
C
K K cms
K K

K K K K
CGS
K K K K

P Q
P Q cal/s cal/s
cal/s cal/s
d d
P P Q K K
Q T T

 Q   P  K Td K T d K T K d
P   P
    Q  K d K d d d
 P  
K d K d  K dT K d T
 T T
 Q   Q   T T  K d K d
      P  
 P  P  P 
C
E C

q q2 g s
E E q q

k k
x
o
C s
ohm volt

m cm

K cal m C sec
K
J J cal
K K
K
o x
C C
s s
o
C s s
Chapter 15 : Transmission of Heat Compact Study Material Page 125

K K x x
T T T >T °C °C
 A T T K 
 f 
 x  C
o
C B
o C
C
o A
T K K T C
C
o C
C
x x
AB x A C ABC
B C P B A B
C
T T
cal/g C TC
cal/g P TC
x A  T

 

A B
 

c r K
A B W/m°C K
W/m°C 
K
rc rc
C A B C  
rc rc
o o  
C C
o o C
C C
AB 2L
Q R PQ RS
L
PQ AB
m C P AB
C S C
P Q

PQ L/
RS PQ A B
 P Q
 K PQ L/ L

C C
mm mm
C C
mm mm
T K
T K m

o WK m
C
A
o
C o
C Wm  Wm 
o
C o
C Wm  Wm 
Page 126 Compact Study Material Chapter 15 : Transmission of Heat

R
R R
K
K

K K
K  K

K K T T T

K  K T

I T
T
K K d d


   
T T T T T T
T T T T T T
d d
 K K 

 


 
 E

 
T

  T
 T


T T T
T T T
T T T
T T T
K

nm nm U nm
nm U nm nm
U b  nm K

T x y
U  U 
t
U U U U
e a
T
T R R
e x  ey a x  ay T
e x  ey a x  ay y
e x  ey a x  ay x

e x  ey a x  ay t
Chapter 15 : Transmission of Heat Compact Study Material Page 127

S S
S
 x
S
 

S
S x x

 

x x

 n

T n
T

t t 
   
  T   T
   
e   t

 
  T T

 
   

e
e

cm
W K
0 0
t t

 
 

R 0 0
T K t t

r A B
C
A  kg m
 r R T r  
J kg K B
r R T r k g m J kg  K 

R T r
 r R T r

A B C m m m
C C
A B
T T A
B
nm nm nm
t t
Qa Qb Qc
C C

T A T B
Qa Qb

Qc Qa  Qb  Qc B A
t t
Page 128 Compact Study Material Chapter 15 : Transmission of Heat

C C s
C CD KW 
minutes AB
A B D C C C
C C CD P
C C P
r r r r

A B
K
 C C C
  

K   K   r r
C D
r r rr
 K r r    r r  
r r r r

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER 16 Simple Harmonic Motion


 
 k k k k h l 

k l
l  
 m
k k B
l  h
m m
T T T   T  
k k
A v

T  T T v gl  

TT W  U  mgl  
T
T T

 l g KEmean  mgl  
g n
T n
  mv
T TA  mg  mg mg 
l
l g n
T mg 
T n
 
T

 k
T n
nk
T
n t
n keff  n k

T
T 
n
A A
 v x A
v x

v v x x
 T 
x x v v

v x v x v x v x
a v 
v v x x

 y a t y b t y A t yA t  t

y  y y

 ya tb t y  A  t 

A a b  b a
Page 130 Compact Study Material Chapter 16 : Simple Harmonic Motion

x A t  t A B
B

A
T y  t m
A m T T
A T A T 
A T  A T 

B O A
A A 
A
B’ O’ A’

T T
T T

t
ms t

 

 
T
O T
A
T O T
O A A
a a T T
a a A A
T T


v v
v
v v



A A
A d y
 y y t
m dt
a
v

v2 v2
A T
t
a2 a2
y  A y  A

v2 v2
T T
a 2
a 2 T T
Chapter 16 : Simple Harmonic Motion Compact Study Material Page 131

cm
ABCDE C AE
B D
cm AE 2R B D
 
A B C D E
 
R R
kg
R R
m

FN
k
x cm

xm

m k m k
  
k  k
  m m
 
kg k k k




   
 t   t 
   
    t t
t     t
    T

T t t T  t t

. .    
. . T t t T t t
P Q x
x A  t
O P Q t  
t
O O
A A
A
m/s

cm

T A

A/ 


T AT
AT T  
Page 132 Compact Study Material Chapter 16 : Simple Harmonic Motion

m
k
e
e
 

 

m
P Q
K

 m m
P Q 
k k
K K  m  m
K K k k

K K
K K

m
y t  t

t
A
y
V
g  g  A
g g
v v
g  
g
g g v v

A B
a f
O’ x y

a  
x t y  t  
 

a a

a a

 
T y  t   y  t
 
T
Chapter 16 : Simple Harmonic Motion Compact Study Material Page 133

x v a

T
A
A
a T   v aT x
aT  v aT v
A A
A A
ml


 
y    t  y  t cm 
 
 kg m

  rad s  rad s 

rad s  rad s 
 

f
A  x
X X A
f f
X A
f f
 
  s

x x t A t
  s s
x t A  t  
 
x t B  t  s s
B 
x
 
A A xA t
  t
A A
x

PE PE
cm cm s

Hz Hz
Hz Hz
xt
t x
t s
x cm

ts


 cm s cm s


cm s   cm s
Page 134 Compact Study Material Chapter 16 : Simple Harmonic Motion

KE PE K
d

E E K

K
KE PE K  K  K

PE KE K
d d
K K K 

E
d y
KE E  Ky 
dt
PE
d K
KE
d
PE 
K
K K
M 
 K
K

t
Mg/K Mg/K  
Mg/K Mg/ K
 

x  

x  
x m kg
x
L m
x

x x
x x
(SHM)
A x x L

(PE) (KE)
m
A A

s a
t s a
xt  A

t s
a

a

Chapter 16 : Simple Harmonic Motion Compact Study Material Page 135

KE

s s
T T T t
s s

KE

s s
T T T t
s s

L
KE

T t
L L
 
g  g 
KE
L L
 
g g 
T T t T

y  kt k m s T
T
T

wt 
  g mole 
N m N m
N m N m

cm cm

A T M
TM

 Y
 Y
g

  T   A  T   Mg
 M     M   
 T   Mg  T   A

y t t cm  T   A   T   A
  M      
  T   Mg   TM 
  Mg
 
cm s cm s T

cm s cm s
Page 136 Compact Study Material Chapter 16 : Simple Harmonic Motion

M N
m k
k2
m
t M N
 k k k k
 rad s

t k k k k
v P
M
P m O
A M
t s v
m
g m s A

Z A 
 
A 
 
v
M M m
M m M
O X
m P  M   M  m
   
 M  m  M 
m s m s S
m s m s S
M
M

y x y

y
x
m
rad s
M M
S S
 B
rad s m

x
M M
  S S
rad s rad s B

rad s rad s
x
T

th
M

T
T/
T T
m/M

T T
Chapter 16 : Simple Harmonic Motion Compact Study Material Page 137

k
M
A

k k V
P
k k
M
A
P

k k
A P V MP
M
 VM  A 

A P MV
k A k A  A P
 MV
k k
k A k A M
k k k k

v Q

E

  Mh 
E T   
 PA  h
+Q
 MA  M
T    
 Ph 

P A
 M 
T   
 PAh 

T   MPhA

L
minute
k. A m X
X
A Y

T

 m  YA  kL m 
   
k  YAk 
mYA mL e t s
 
kL YA t  s 

t
t
b

kg/m t t

tt tt b b
t t t t b b
Page 138 Compact Study Material Chapter 16 : Simple Harmonic Motion

m
k  x t t
F t t  

m y
  m   y t t
m
m   

kg m
kg
cm U
k  N m

Nm  see figure

x g ms x T

e
cm cm N grams 
cm cm N

k
cm
AB B
l m
O

x t  e t
 t  t

k A s s
 m s s
S.H.M.
k
 m
O
k T
 m
B O s
T T T
T
k
 m

l
T
k l t
l l  nl n tT
k k k k T
t

T
t
n
n

n
n
Chapter 16 : Simple Harmonic Motion Compact Study Material Page 139

M A B m

k
T A L K C
m v
m A B A

M m
A C A B
M m
M m m m m
A k
M M
M
A
M m m mv
v
M K K
A
M m
m mv
M K K
X

k x x
v v

x x x x
M T  T 
k v v v v

x x x x
 T  T 
v v v v

KE
k k
 M  M

k k
 Mg   Mg 
YA  t 
A
t Y

x

 

 

R
F R
m

TR TR
ms
TR TR g ms
Page 140 Compact Study Material Chapter 16 : Simple Harmonic Motion

a
T m kg

xa kmh
x

m
xt A t    N m
t s

cm  cm s

x x

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER 17 
Waves & Sound
 

 
v v
n   n
l l
 
 
i.e., i.e., 




n n n etc
 n n x n x

x beats/sec
n n n n n x n x

Middle clamping : N  N x
beats per sec
A A
n n N x

v l N
n  n  n n  n
l
End clamping :
N A
n n

l 
v
n  n  n n  n
l


x
v
vs  x v  v s







y a  t kx y a kx t


Page 142 Compact Study Material Chapter 17 : Waves and Sound

 A B
A
B
v T
A B


  C Y   d 

x
A B RA RB

Y Y  ft  x  y

B
  Y   Y V

A x
  Y   Y

R A  RB

AB v RB  R A

v R A  RB
CD v
v

A t
 x
z x t s
 x
z

B ms x
C
ms x

D ms x
ms x

x t
 
m  kx   t  
 
x
 
 kx   t  
y x t  x  t
 
 
y x t  x  t   t  kx  
 
y x t  x  t
 
  t  kx  
y x t  x  t  
Chapter 17 : Waves and Sound Compact Study Material Page 143

A
B
Hz

B A
O

B A B A
 

 

B A B A

 
m
Y  t x t x

x

t x x t
 t x t x


v
h
f f f
v v

n n n
n  n  f  f  f n 
h h f f
f n  f  n  

v v ya kx   t

x

h h a kx   t a kx   t

 a kx   t a kx   t
kg m

m M
m

ms  y a t kx

M  a
a
m  a
Page 144 Compact Study Material Chapter 17 : Waves and Sound

s


 

 


F P
t FAP FBP FBP
u FAP P
v P cm

uvt t uv 

uv uv
t uv uvt
uv uv
S S

m m
S S F

dB

n


 
 
 
 

  
r
A 

A r kr   t A r kr   t

Ar kr   t Ar kr   t
Chapter 17 : Waves and Sound Compact Study Material Page 145

m m
m

m m
m m
P
m m
m m
dB
O
ms He

ms ms
ms ms

 m

RT  J mole 
RT  J mole 
I I
M

A  B

A B M 
I I
I I M  

M 

M 
 Hz
m/s
m/s

Hz Hz
Hz Hz
Page 146 Compact Study Material Chapter 17 : Waves and Sound

x x
v yx t A kx   t  
x t y

v v
A
v v
cm x

 kg m 

 Pa
 



kHz kHz
kHz kHz yx t  
t x x y
M t
m(m<<M)
ms  x  axis
a ms 
ms  a x  aixs

ms
g g
x  axis
ms 
g g
x  axis
ms 
yx t

y x t  e  ax bt  ab xt

x a b
x b a
b
b
x
y xt   xt
m s Hz Hz
 
y

   
    t

       y

y x
   t
y  t x  metres x
 
t y
ms

y
yA kx   t

A k t
d dk xt
Chapter 17 : Waves and Sound Compact Study Material Page 147

cm
cm

beats/sec
cps
kg
beats/sec
M

cps cps
M
cps cps
y A k xct
kg kg
y A k xct
kg kg

ct  ct 
 k  k

T T

ms
s
T
m m
T
m m
T

cm T
cm/s
g/m
kg
metre

n n
cm
Hz Hz
Hz Hz

m
m t,

kg/m N/m y

P
Hz Hz x

Hz Hz
m
 
jm s  jm s
ms
Hz Hz  
i m s  im s
Page 148 Compact Study Material Chapter 17 : Waves and Sound

L m g
L r r N
Hz
L n
n n n
cm cm
cm cm

kg m  g m y t x
  t x  SI
y m     
  s m 
N N
N N
N N
L A B
N N
r r
m

A P B q
g ms 
p q
s s A B

s  s

L L
m kg
N
t
t
th

s s Y x t
s s SI
l T m m
m m
cm
m
Hz
n.

m/s n
m s Hz m s Hz
Hz
m s Hz m s Hz

AB
CD m cm
O BO x
x cm
st

AB nd
CD x x
BO x x
A B
A

A B

D
L f
x
m

L L f f
L L f f
Chapter 17 : Waves and Sound Compact Study Material Page 149

L
  KHz

Hz

L L

L  L  Hz
  cm

f Hz
f cm
f
n th
ms  ms 
ms  ms 
n f  f n f  f
Hz
v
n f  f n f  f

Hz l  cm l  cm

cm v

cm ms  ms 
ms  ms 

cm/s cm/s m s
cm/s cm/s

ms
m m m
m m m

m m
m m

cm
k Hz
C kHz A A
m s kHz
B
kHz
B A
cm cm
cm cm
m
m
ms 
N Hz
ms 
 ms 
grams grams
grams grams
Page 150 Compact Study Material Chapter 17 : Waves and Sound

y  A x  t S m s
y  A x  t
x Hz
sec

m s

kHz Hz Hz
Hz Hz
A km hr
m s B
km hr B Hz
kHz kHz A v
kHz kHz 
vib sec  ms 
km hr Hz Hz
Hz Hz
ms S S
vib sec vib sec
Hz
vib sec vib sec
S S u m/s
cm
m s u
km h
m s m s m s
m s m s
Hz Hz
Hz Hz

m s
f
m s f
m s f f

L x
x L
y  A x L t E
y  A x L t
A B
E
E E E E
ms  E E E E
A Hz W
B dB
B  ms 

W m
Hz Hz
Hz Hz cm cm
cm cm
Hz
Hz
Hz Hz
Hz ms  m s
 m s
km hr km hr
km hr km hr
Chapter 17 : Waves and Sound Compact Study Material Page 151


   
kgcm 
I 
m


I I
I I Y  Nm 
L

 kgm  N
Hz km hr
Hz L Hz
m m Hz
m m m/s
g cm
cm y x t
Hz x t

m s x N
x

cm cm
kms 
cm cm 
nm x m x

Å Å c  ms 
km km
km km

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER
IMPORTANT POINTS
18 Electrostatics
 No point charge produces electric field at it’s own position.
 Electric field is always directed from higher potential to  Two charged spheres having radii r1 and r2 , charge
lower potential. densities σ 1 and σ 2 respectively, then the ratio of electric field
 An electric field is completely characterized by two physical E1 σ 1 r22  Q 
quantities Potential and Intensity. Force characteristic of the on their surfaces will be = = σ = 
E2 σ 2 r12  4π r2 
field is intensity and work characteristic of the field is potential.
 In air, if intensity of electric field exceeds the value
 The electric field on the surface of a conductor is directly
3 × 10 6 N/C , air ionizes.
proportional to the surface charge density at that point i.e, E ∝ σ
 A positive charge if left free in electric field always moves  A small ball is suspended in a uniform electric field with the
from higher potential to lower potential while a negative charge help of an insulated thread. If a high energy X–ray beam falls on
the ball, X-rays knock out electrons from the ball so the ball is
moves from lower potential to higher potential.
positively charged and therefore the ball is deflected in the
 For a short dipole, electric field intensity at a point on the direction of electric field.
axial line is double the electric field intensity at a point on the
equatorial line of electric dipole i.e. Eaxial = 2Eequatorial →
E
 After earthing a positively charged conductor electrons flow
from earth to conductor and if a negatively charged conductor is F= QE
earthed then electrons flows from conductor to earth.

+ – X–Ray
+ –
+ + –
e – – – e–
+
+
+
+ –
–
–  It is a common misconception that the path traced by a
+ – positive test charge is a field line but actually the path traced by
a unit positive test charge represents a field line only when it
moves along a straight line.
 When a charged spherical conductor is placed inside a
hollow insulated conductor and connected through a fine
1
 It is interesting to note that dipole field E ∝
decreases
conducting wire the charge will be completely transferred from r3
the inner conductor to the outer conductor. much rapidly as compared to the field of a point charge
 1
 E ∝ 2 .
 r 
+Q
 Franklin (i.e., e.s.u. of charge) is the smallest unit of charge
while faraday is largest (1 Faraday = 96500 C).
 The e.s.u. of charge is also called stat coulomb or Franklin
(Fr) and is related to e.m.u. of charge through the relation
 Lightening-rod arrestors are made up of conductors with emu of charge
= 3 × 1010
one of their ends earthed while the other sharp, and protects a esu of charge
building from lightening either by neutralising or conducting the
 Recently it has been discovered that elementary particles
charge of the cloud to the ground.
such as proton or neutron are composed of quarks having
 With rise in temperature dielectric constant of liquid decreases. charge (± 1 / 3 ) e and (± 2 / 3 ) e. However, as quarks do not
 If X-rays are incident on a charged electroscope, due to exist in free state, the quanta of charge is still e.
ionisation of air by X-rays the electroscope will get discharged  Inducting body neither gains nor loses charge.
and hence its leaves will collapse. However, if the electroscope  Dielectric constant of an insulator can not be ∞
is evacuated. X-rays will cause photoelectric effect with gold and
 For metals in electrostatics K = ∞ and so Q' = − Q; i.e. in
so the leaves will further diverge if it is positively charged (or
uncharged) and will converge if it is negatively charged. metals induced charge is equal and opposite to inducing charge.
 A truck carrying explosives has a metal chain touching the
 Two point charges separated by a distance r in vacuum and
ground, to conduct away the charge produced by friction.
a force F acting between them. After filling a dielectric medium
having dielectric constant K completely between the charges,  Coulombs law is valid at a distance greater than 10 −15 m.
force between them decreases. To maintain the force as before  Ratio of gravitational force and electrostatic force between
separation between them has to be changed to r K . This (i) Two electrons is 10–43/1. (ii) Two protons is 10–36/1
distance known as effective air separation. (iii) One proton and one electron 10–39/1.
Chapter 18 : Electrostatics Compact Study Material Page 153

 Decreasing order to fundamental forces  Two large conducting plates X and Y kept close to each
FNuclear > FElectromagnetic > FWeak > FGravitational other. The plate X is given a charge Q1 while plate Y is given a
 Electric field intensity and electric potential due to a point charge Q2 (Q1 > Q2 ) , the distribution of charge on the four faces
charge q, at a distance t1 + t2 where t1 is thickness of medium a, b, c, d will be as shown in the following figure.
of dielectric constant K1 and t2 is thickness of medium of
dielectric constant K2 are : Q1 X Q2 Y X  Q1 − Q2  Y
− 
1 Q 1 Q  2 
E= ; V= b d ⇒
4 πε 0 (t1 K1 + t2 K2 )2 4 πε 0 (t1 K1 + t2 K2 )
 Q1 + Q2  Q Q2   Q1 + Q2 
   1
−
  
 If an electron (charge e and mass m) is moving on a a c  2 
circular path of radius r about a positively charge infinitely long  2   2 
linear charge, (charge density λ) then the velocity of electron in  When dielectric is partially filled between the plates of a
eλ parallel plate capacitor then it’s capacitance increases but
dynamic equilibrium will be v = . potential difference decreases. To maintain the capacitance and
2πε 0m
potential difference of capacitor as before separation between
 A metal plate is charged uniformly with a surface charge the plates has to be increased say by d ' . In such case
density σ. An electron of energy W is fired towards the charged t
metal plate from a distance d, then for no collision of electron K=
t − d'
Wε 0
with plate d =  In series combination equivalent capacitance is always
eσ lesser than that of either of the individual capacitors. In parallel
 It is a very common misconception that a capacitor stores combination, equivalent capacitance is always greater than the
charge but actually a capacitor stores electric energy in the maximum capacitance of either capacitor in network.
electrostatic field between the plates.  If n identical capacitors are connected in parallel which are
 Two plates of unequal area can also form a capacitor, but charged to a potential V. If these are separated and connected in
effective overlapping area is considered. series then potential difference of combination will be nV.
 Two capacitors of capacitances C1 and C2 are charged to
potential of V1 and V2 respectively. After disconnecting from
batteries they are again connected to each other with reverse
polarity i.e., positive plate of a capacitor connected to negative
plate of other. Then common potential is given by
d Q − Q2 C1V1 − C2V2
V= 1 = .
C1 + C2 C1 + C2
 At the centre of the line joining two equal and opposite
 Capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor doesn't depends
charge V = 0 but E ≠ 0.
upon the charge given, potential raised or nature of metals and
thickness of plates.  At the centre of the line joining two equal and similar
charge V ≠ 0, E = 0 .
 The distance between the plates is
kept small to avoid fringing or edge + –
effect (non-uniformity of the field) at the + –
Critical Questions
boundaries of the plates. + –
+ – 1. A particle of charge q = 1.6 × 10 −19 C and mass
+ – m = 12 × 10 −24 kg is shot between two capacitor plates with
+ – a potential difference of 300V and separation of 2cm.
If dimensions of plates are as shown in figure, then the
greatest initial velocity for which the particle will not be able
 Spherical conductor is equivalent to a spherical capacitor to come out of plates is
with it’s outer sphere of infinite radius.
 A spherical capacitor behaves as a parallel plate capacitor if + + + + +
it’s spherical surfaces have large radii and are close to each other.
 The intensity of electric field between the plates of a parallel + 2 cm
plate capacitor (E = σ/ε0) does not depend upon the distance 1 cm
between them.
− − − − −
 The plates of a parallel plate capacitor are being moved 10 cm
away with some velocity. If the plate separation at any instant of
time is ‘d’ then the rate of change of capacitance with time is (a) 10 3 m /s
1
proportional to 2 . (b) 10 4 m /s
d
(c) 105 m /s
 Radial and non-uniform electric field exists between the
spherical surfaces of spherical capacitor. (d) Particle never comes out of region of plates
Page 154 Compact Study Material Chapter 18 : Electrostatics

2. A small ball of mass m and charge q is rotated in a vertical 6. A very large thin plate has uniform surface charge density σ
plane by using a string of length l. An electric field E also It is touched to a long and wide slab of thickness d with
exists in the region which points upwards. If ball is imparted uniform volume charge density ρ E . Then, field inside the
a horizontal velocity v at top of the vertical circle, such that
slab is
tension in the string in the lower most position of ball is 15
σ + ρE (x − d) d
times of the weight of the ball, then v is (a) ,0 < x < d
ε0
l l
(a) (10 mg + qE ) (b) (5 mg + qE ) σ + ρE (x − d)
m m (b) ,0 < x < d
2ε 0
l l σ
(c) (10 mg + 5 qE) (d) ( mg + qE ) σ + ρE (2 x − d) x ρE
m m (c) ,0 < x < d
2ε 0
3. A positively fixed charged ring is placed on a horizontal
σ + ρE (2 x − d)
surface on the earth. A positively charged particle (d) ,0 < x < d
released from a height R on its axis. The variation of total
ε0
potential energy as a function of separation between particle 7. An electron enters a region of a uniform field, midway
and ring is correctly depicted by which of the following between two charged plates. E = 3.8 × 10 3 N/C, plate
graphs. separation is 1.0 cm, length of region of uniform field is
nearly 3.464 cm. If path of electron is symmetrical, i.e., they
u u enter and leave the region of field at same angle θ0 , just
(a) (b) missing the top plate. Then, θ0 is
3.464 cm
n n
n=R n=R − − − − −
u u

1 cm
(c) (d) Centre
n n θ0 θ0 line
n=R n=R + + + + +

4. A positively charged thin metal ring of radius R is fixed in

(a) 45° (b) 30°
the XY-plane, with its centre at origin. A negatively charged
(c) 60° (d) 18°
particle is released from rest at the point (0,0, c), c > 0.
8. If a charge q is placed at mid-point of edge of a cube, then
Consider the following statements. total flux through the faces of the cube is
(i) The electric field at P due metallic ring is always q q
(a) (b)
directed towards origin. 8ε 0 4ε 0
(ii) The negatively charged particle is accelerated towards q 2q
(c) (d)
origin and undergoes periodic motion. 2ε 0 ε0
Which of these are correct : 9. If there is only one type of charge in the universe, then
(a) Only (i) (b) Only (ii)
(a) ∫ E.ds ≠ 0 for any surface
(c) Both (i) and (ii) (d) Neither (i) nor (ii)
5. A point charge Q is on the axis of a short cylinder at its (b) ∫ E.ds = 0 on any surface
centre. The diameter of the cylinder is equal to its length l.
Then, total flux through the curved sides of the cylinder
(c) ∫ E.ds cannot be defined

(a) Cannot be found as Gaussian surface drawn is not q

(d) ∫ E.ds = ε 0 , if charges of magnitude q were inside the
symmetrical to charge
surface
Q  1 
(b) Is equal to 1 −  10. Electric charges of 1µC, −1µC and 2µC are placed in air at
2ε 0  2
the corners A, B and C respectively of an equilateral triangle
Q ABC having length of each side 10 cm. The resultant force
(c) Is equal to
ε0 on the charge at C is
Q (a) 0.9 N (b) 1.8 N
(d) Is equal to
2 ε0 (c) 2.7 N (d) 3.6 N
Chapter 18 : Electrostatics Compact Study Material Page 155

11. Two equal point charges each of magnitude Q are located at 17. Two identical point charges are placed at a separation of l. P
point (± a, 0, 0) . A third point charge of mass m and charge is a point on the line joining the charges, at a distance x
−Q revolves around the X-axis in a circle of radius r from any one charge. The field at P is E. E is plotted against
attraction to point A and B. Kinetic energy of rotating x for values of x from close to zero to slightly less than l.
particle is given by Which of the following best represents the resulting curve
E E
2Q 2r 2 Q 2r 2
(a) (b)
4πε 0 (r 2 + a 2 )3/ 2 4πε 0 (r 2 + a 2 )3/ 2 (a) (b)

Q 2r 2Q 2r
(c) (d)
4πε 0 (r 2 + a 2 )1/ 2 4πε 0 (r 2 + a 2 )1/ 2 x x
O L O L
12. Potential to which a soap bubble of radius R be charged, so E E
that pressure outside and inside is same will be (take, P0
atmospheric pressure and T = surface tension of soap film) (c) O L (d) L
x O x
Tr 3Tr
(a) V= (b) V =
ε0 ε0
18. A particle of mass m and charge Q is placed in an electric
8Tr 5Tr field E which varies with time t ass E = E0 sin ω t. It will
(c) V= (d) V =
ε0 ε0
undergo simple harmonic motion of amplitude
13. A circular ring of radius r is placed at mid-point of a dipole
QE02 QE0
of dipole moment with its plane perpendicular to axis of (a) (b)
mω 2 mω 2
dipole. Electric flux passing through the ring is (take length
of dipole = 2 l ) QE0 QE0
(c) (d)
mω 2 mω
q  1 
 2q  1 
 19. Four charges are arranged at the corners of a square ABCD,
(a) 1− (b) 1−
2lε 0  1 + (r 2 /l 2 )  lε 0  1 + (r 2 /l 2 )  as shown. The force on +ve charge kept at the centre of the
 
square is
q  1  B +q −q C
(c) 1−  (d) 0
ε0  1 + (r /l ) 
2 2
(a) Zero

14. A spherical metal shell of radius r is given a charge q. Stress (b) Along diagonal AC
developed in the shell due to charging is (c) Along diagonal BD
−2q +2q
q2 q2 A D
(a) 2 4
(b) 2 4
(d) Perpendicular to the side AB
4π ε 0 r 16π ε 0r
20. Two free positive charges 4q and q are a distance l apart.
2
q What charge Q is needed to achieve equilibrium for the
(c) (d) Zero
32π 2ε 0r 4 entire system and where should it be placed form charge q
15. A point charge 50 µ C is located in the XY-plane at the 4 l 4 l
(a) Q= q (negative) at (b) Q= q (positive) at
 9 3 9 3
point of position vector r0 = 2ˆi + 3 ˆj . What is the electric
 l l
field at the point of position vector r = 8ˆi − 5 ˆj . (c) Q = q (positive) at (d) Q = q (negative) at
3 3
(a) 1200 V /m (b) 0.04 V /m 21. Six charges are placed at the corner of a regular hexagon as
(c) 900 V /m (d) 4500 V /m shown. If an electron is placed at its centre O, force on it will
   be B
16. A point charge q is placed at origin. Let E A , E B and EC be A
−q 3q
the electric field at three points A(1, 2, 3), B(1,1, −1)
and C(2, 2,2) due to charge q. Then
  −2q O −2q
  F C
[i] EA ⊥ EB [ii] EB = 4 EC

Select the correct alternative :

(a) Only [i] is correct q 2q
(b) Only [ii] is correct E D
(c) Both [i] and [ii] are correct (a) Zero (b) Along OF
(d) Both [i] and [ii] are wrong (c) Along OC (d) None of these
Page 156 Compact Study Material Chapter 18 : Electrostatics

22. A charged particle of charge q and mass m is released from 26. The charger per unit length of the four quadrant of the ring
rest in an uniform electric field E. Neglecting the effect of is 2λ, − 2λ, λ and − λ respectively. The electric field at the
gravity, the kinetic energy of the charged particle after time centre is y
't' seconds is
Eqm
2 2 2
E q t −2λ 2λ
(a) (b)
t 2m
2E 2t 2 Eq 2m x
(c) (d) R
mq 2t 2
23. Two identical positive charges are fixed on the y-axis, at
−λ
equal distances from the origin O. A particle with a negative λ
charge starts on the x-axis at a large distance from O, moves λ λ
(a) − ˆi (b) ˆj
along the +x-axis, passes through O and moves far away 2πε 0 R 2πε 0 R
from O. Its acceleration a is taken as positive along its
direction of motion. The particle’s acceleration a is plotted 2λ ˆ
(c) i (d) None
against its x-coordinate. Which of the following best 2πε 0 R

represents the plot 27. The direction (θ ) of E at point P due to uniformly charged
a
a finite rod will be
Ey y
(a) (b) x
x O d
O θ
x
+ 90° θ P Ex
a a +
+
x + 30°
(c) (d)
O x O +
+

24. Four equal positive charges are fixed at the vertices of a

(a) At angle 30° from x-axis (b) 45° from x-axis
square of side L. Z-axis is perpendicular to the plane of the
square. The point z = 0 is the point where the diagonals of (c) 60° from x-axis (d) None of these
the square intersect each other. The plot of electric field due 28. Two equal negative charges are fixed at the points [0, a]
to the four charges, as one moves on the z-axis. and [0, −a] on the y-axis. A positive charge Q is released
E E
from rest at the points [2a,0] on the x-axis. The charge Q
will
(a) Execute simple harmonic motion about the origin
(a) (b)
(b) Move to the origin and remain at rest
(c) Move to infinity
Z O Z
O L L (d) Execute oscillatory but not simple harmonic motion
2 29. A small particle of mass m and charge –q is placed at point
E E P on the axis of uniformly charged ring and released. If
R >> x, the particle will undergo oscillations along the axis
of symmetry with an angular frequency that is equal to
(c) (d) Q

Z Z
O O L
2L R
2
P
25. A non conducting ring of radius R has uniformly distributed
positive charge Q. A small part of the ring, of length d, is
x
removed (d<<R). The electric field at the centre of the ring
will now be
3
(a) Directed towards the gap, inversely proportional to R qQ qQx
2 (a) (b)
(b) Directed towards the gap, inversely proportional to R 4πε 0mR 3 4πε 0mR 4
3
(c) Directed away from the gap, inversely proportional to R qQ qQx
2
(c) (d)
(d) Directed away from the gap, inversely proportional to R 4πε 0 mR 3 4πε 0 mR 4
Chapter 18 : Electrostatics Compact Study Material Page 157

30. A charged particle having some mass is resting in 34. An equilateral triangle wire frame of side L having 3 point
equilibrium at a height H above the centre of a uniformly charges at its vertices is kept in x-y plane as shown.
charged non-conducting horizontal ring of radius R. The Component of electric field due to the configuration in z
force of gravity acts downwards. The equilibrium of the direction at (0, 0, L) is [origin is centroid of triangle]
particle will be stable y
(a) For all values of H (b) Only if H > R/ 2
9 3 kg q
(a)
(c) Only if H < R / 2 (d) Only if H = R/ 2 8 L2
31. In space of horizontal EF(E=(mg)/q) exist as shown in
(b) Zero
figure and a mass m attached at the end of a light rod. If x
mass m is released from the position shown in figure find the 9 kg
(c)
angular velocity of the rod when it passes through the 8 L2
bottom most position. q
(d) None −2q

θ = 45° 35. A simple pendulum has a length ℓ, mass of bob m. The bob
mg
E= is given a charge q coulomb. The pendulum is suspended in
θ q
a uniform horizontal electric field of strength E as shown in
figure, then calculate the time period of oscillation when the
m bob is slightly displace from its mean position is
E
m

+q
q 2q
(a) (b)
l l
3q 5q
(c) (d)
l l q, m
32. Find the force experienced by the semicircular rod charged
with a charge Q, placed as shown in figure. Radius of the  
wire is R and the infinitely long line of charge with linear ℓ  ℓ 
(a) 2π (b) 2π  
density λ is passing through its centre and perpendicular to g  g + qE 
the plane of wire.  m 
+
+  
+ + +  ℓ  ℓ
+ +
(c) 2π   (d) 2π
 g − qE
2
  qE 
+ R +  m  g2 +  
+ + m
+
+
+ 36. The potential difference between points A and B in the
+ + given uniform electric field is:
+
λQ λQ
(a) (b) (a) Ea
2π 2ε 0 R π 2ε 0 R
C B
λQ λQ
(c) (d) 2 2
4 π 2ε 0 R 4πε 0 R (b) E (a + b )
b
33. A wheel having mass m has charges +q and −q on E
diametrically opposite points. It remains in equilibrium on a (c) Eb
rough inclined plane in the presence of uniform vertical A
electric field E = E
+q (d) ( Eb / 2)
mg
(a) E
q
−q 37. An equipotential surface and a line of force:
mg
(b) (a) Never intersect each other
2q
mg tan θ θ (b) Intersect at 45°
(c)
2q (c) Intersect at 60°
(d) None (d) Intersect at 90°
Page 158 Compact Study Material Chapter 18 : Electrostatics

38. Which of the following is a volt: 46. A unit positive point charge of mass m is projected with a
(a) Erg per cm (b) Joule per coulomb velocity V inside the tunnel as shown. The tunnel has been
(c) Erg per ampere (d) Newton/(coulomb × m 2 ) made inside a uniformly charged non conducting sphere.
The minimum velocity with which the point charge should
39. An infinite non conducting sheet of charge has a surface
be projected such it can it reach the opposite end of the
charge density of 10 −7 C/m 2 . The separation between two
tunnel, is equal to
equipotential surfaces near the sheet whose potential differ
by 5 V is (a) [ ρ R 2 /4mε 0 ]1/ 2
R/2
(a) 0.88 cm (b) 0.88 mm
(c) 0.88 m (d) 5 × 10 −7 m (b) [ ρ R 2 /24 mε 0 ]1/ 2

40. In a uniform electric field, the potential is 10 V at the origin (c) [ρ R 2 /6mε 0 ]1/ 2
of coordinates, and 8 V at each of the points (1,0,0),(0,1,0)
(d) Zero because the initial and the final points are at same
and (0,0,1) . The potential at the point (1,1,1) will be potential
(a) 0 (b) 4 V 47. A positively charged body ‘A’ has been brought near a
(c) 8 V (d) 10 V neutral brass sphere B mounted on a glass stand as shown
41. In a regular polygon of n sides, each corner is at a distance r in the figure. The potential of B will be:
from the centre. Identical charges are placed at (n− 1)
corners. At the centre, the intensity is E and the potential is + B
V. The ratio V/E has magnitude. +
+ +
(a) (b) r (n − 1) +
rn +
+ +
(c) (n − 1)/r (d) r (n − 1)/n + +
+
42. In a certain region of space, the potential is given by: A +
V = k[2 x 2 − y 2 + z 2 ] . The electric field at the point (1,1,1)
has magnitude (a) Zero (b) Negative
(a) k 6 (b) 2k 6 (c) Positive (d) Infinite
48. A charge ‘q’ is placed at the centre of a conducting spherical
(c) 2k 3 (d) 4k 3
shell of radius R, which is given a charge Q. An external
43. When the separation between two charges is increased, the charge Q′ is also present at distance R ′(R ′ > R) from ‘q’.
electric potential energy of the charges
Then the resultant field will be best represented for region
(a) Increases (b) Decreases r < R by: [where r is the distance of the point from q]
(c) Remains the same (d) May increase or decrease
44. When a negative charge is released and moves in electric
Q
field, it moves toward a position of
(a) Lower electric potential and lower potential energy R’
(b) Lower electric potential and higher potential energy q Q’

(c) Higher electric potential and lower potential energy R

(d) Higher electric potential and higher potential energy
45. A bullet of mass m and charge q is fired towards a solid
E E
uniformly charged sphere of radius R and total charge +q. If
it strikes the surface of sphere with speed u, find the
minimum speed u so that it can penetrate through the
sphere. (Neglect all resistance forces or friction acting on (a) (b)
bullet except electrostatic forces)
q r r
(a) R R
2πε 0 mR
+ + q
q E E
(b) + + + +
4 πε 0 mR +q u
+ + + +
(c) q + + + +
m
8πε 0 mR R
+ + + + (c) (d)
3q + +
(d)
4πε 0mR r
R r
R
Chapter 18 : Electrostatics Compact Study Material Page 159

49. In the above questions, if Q’ is removed then which option 54. Three concentric conducting spherical shells carry charges as
is correct: follows +4Q on the inner shell, –2Q on the middle shell and
E E –5Q on the outer shell. The charge on the inner surface of
the outer shell is:
(a) 0 (b) 4 Q
(a) (b) (c) −Q (d) −2Q
55. Three concentric metallic spherical shell A, B and C or radii
r r a, b and c (a<b<c) have surface charge densities
R R
E E
−σ , +σ and − σ respectively. The potential of shell A is
(a) (σ /ε 0 )[a + b − c] (b) (σ /ε 0 )[a − b + c]

(c) (σ /ε 0 )[b − a − c ] (d) None

(c) (d) 56. Both question (i) and (ii) refer to the system of charges as
r r
shown in the figure. A spherical shell with an inner radius ‘a’
R R and an outer radius ‘b’ is made of conducting material.
A point charge +Q is placed at the centre of the spherical
50. A positive point charge Q is kept (as shown in the figure)
inside a neutral conducting shell whose centre is at C. An shell and a total charge – q is placed on the shell.
external uniform electric field E is applied. Then:

E
a
Q

b
C
Q
(i) Charge −q is distributed on the surfaces as
(a) Force on Q due to E is zero (a) −Q on the inner surface, −q on outer surface
(b) Net force on Q is zero (b) −Q on the inner surface, −q + Q on the outer surface
(c) Net force acting on Q and conducting shell considered (c) +Q on the inner surface, −q + Q on the outer surface
as a system is zero
(d) The charge −q is spread uniformly between the inner
(d) Net force acting on the shell due to E is zero
and outer surface
51. The net charge given to an isolated conducting solid sphere:
(ii) Assume that the electrostatic potential is zero at an
(a) Must be distributed uniformly on the surface
Infinite distance from the spherical shell. The
(b) May be distributed uniformly on the surface
electrostatic potential at a distance R (a<R<b) from
(c) Must be distributed uniformly in the volume
the centre of the shell is
(d) May be distributed uniformly in the volume
(a) 0
52. The net charge given to a solid insulating sphere:
KQ
(a) Must be distributed uniformly in its volume (b)
a
(b) May by distributed uniformly in its volume
(c) Must be distributed uniformly on its surface Q−q
(c) K
R
(d) The distribution will depend upon whether other
charges are present or not Q−q  1 
(d) K  where K = 
53. A dipole having dipole moment p is placed in front of a solid R  4 πε 0 
uncharged conducting sphere as shown in the diagram. The
57. A positive charge q is placed in a spherical cavity made in a
net potential at point. A lying on the surface of the sphere is;
positively charged sphere. The centres of sphere and cavity
(a)
kp cos φ A 
r2 are displaced by a small distance ℓ . Force on charge q is:
r 
kp cos 2 φ R (a) In the direction parallel to vector ℓ
(b) φ
r2 (b) In radial direction
d P
(c) Zero (c) In a direction which depends on the magnitude of
2
2kp cos φ charge density in sphere
(d)
r2 (d) Direction can not be determined
Page 160 Compact Study Material Chapter 18 : Electrostatics

58. If the electric potential of the inner metal sphere is 10 volt 62. A charge Q is kept at the centre of a conducting sphere of
and that of the outer shell is 5 volt, then the potential at the inner radius R1 and outer radius R2. A point charge q is kept
centre will be at a distance r (> R2 ) from the centre. If q experiences an
electrostatic force 10 N then assuming that no other charges
are present, electrostatic force experienced by Q will be:
a
(a) −10 N (b) 0
b
(c) 20 N (d) None of these

63. A solid metallic sphere has a charge +3Q. Concentric with

(a) 10 volt (b) 5 volt
this sphere is a conducting spherical shell having charge – Q.
(c) 15 volt (d) 0
The radius of the sphere is a and that of the spherical shell is
59. An infinite number of concentric rings carry a charge Q each b(> a). What is the electric field at a distance r (a < r < b)
alternately positive and negative. Their radii are 1, 2, 4, 8... from the centre
meters in geometric progression as shown in the figure. The
1 Q 1 3Q
potential at the centre of the rings will be (a) (b)
4πε 0 r 4πε 0 r
Q 1 3Q 1 Q
4 (c) (d)
Q 4πε 0 r 2 4 πε 0 r 2
3
Q
2
64. Two identical conducting spheres, having charges of
Q 1
opposite sign, attract each other with a force of 0.108 N
when separated by 0.5 m. The spheres are connected by a
conducting wire, which is then removed, and thereafter,
they repel each other with a force of 0.036 N. The initial
charges on the spheres are
Q
(a) Zero (b) (a) ±5 × 10 −6 C and ∓ 15 × 10 −6 C
12πε 0
Q Q (b) ±1.0 × 10 −6 C and ∓ 3.0 × 10 −6 C
(c) (d)
8πε 0 6πε 0
(c) ±2.0 × 10 −6 C and ∓ 6.0 × 10 −6 C
60. Two uniformly charged non-conducting hemispherical
sheets each having uniform charge density σ and radius R (d) ±0.5 × 10 −6 C and ∓ 1.5 × 10 −6 C
form a complete sphere (not stuck together) and surround a
concentric spherical conducting shell of radius R/2. If 65. The capacitance (C) for an isolated conducting sphere of
hemispherical parts are in equilibrium, then minimum radius (a) is given by 4πε 0a. If the sphere is enclosed with
surface charge density of inner conducting shell is: an earthed concentric sphere. The ratio of the radii of the
(a) −2σ (b) −σ / 2 n
spheres being then the capacitance of such a sphere
(c) −σ (d) 2σ (n − 1)
61. A point charge q is brought from infinity (slowly so that heat will be increased by a factor
developed in the shell is negligible) and is placed at the n
centre of a conducting neutral spherical shell of inner (a) n (b)
(n − 1)
radius a and outer radius b, then work done by external
agent is (n − 1)
(c) (d) a . n
n
66. Three long concentric conducting cylindrical shells have
b
radii R, 2 R and 2 2 R. Inner and outer shells are
q
a connected to each other. The capacitance across middle and
inner shells per unit length is:
1
ε0
3 6πε 0
kq 2 (a) (b)
(a) 0 (b) ln2 ln 2
2b
π ε0
kq 2 kq 2 kq 2 kq 2 (c) (d) None
(c) − (d) − 2 ln2
2b 2a 2a 2b
Chapter 18 : Electrostatics Compact Study Material Page 161

67. The energy stored in the capacitor as shown in the figure (a) 72. A 2 µF capacitor is charged to a potential = 10 V. Another
−6
is 4.5 × 10 J. If the battery is replaced by another capacitor 4 µF capacitor is charged to a potential = 20 V. The two
of 900 pF as shown in figure (b), then the total energy of capacitors are then connected in a single loop, with the
system is positive plate of one connected with negative plate of the
–
other. What heat is evolved in the circuit?
+ + –
+ – + – (a) 300 µJ (b) 600 µJ
+ – + –
+ – + – (c) 900 µJ (d) 450 µJ
+ – 900pF
900pF 73. In the circuit shown in figure charge stored in the capacitor
+ – of capacity 5 µ F is
+ –
+ – 2µf 2µf 5µf 4µf
+ – 100 V – 900pF 2µf 3µf
+
(A) (B)

−6 −6
(a) 4.5 ×10 J (b) 2.25 × 10 J
−6
(c) 0 J (d) 9 ×10 J
68. A capacitor of capacitance C is charged to a potential
difference V from a cell and then disconnected from it. A
charge +Q is now given to its positive plate. The potential 100 V
difference across the capacitor is now (a) 60 µC (b) 20 µC
Q
(a) V (b) V + (c) 30 µC (d) Zero
C
Q Q 74. Plate A of a parallel air-filled capacitor is connected to a
(c) V + (d) V − , if V < CV
2C C spring having force constant k and plate B is fixed. If a
charge +q is placed on plate A and charge −q on plate B
69. A conducting body 1 has some initial charge Q, and its
then find out extension in spring in equilibrium. Assume
capacitance is C. There are two other conducting bodies,
area of plate is ‘A’
2 and 3, having capacitances: C2 = 2C and C3 → ∞ .
Bodies 2 and 3 are initially uncharged. “Body 2 is touched
with body 1. Then, body 2 is removed from body 1 and AB
touched with body 3, and then removed”. This process is + −
repeated N times. Then, the charge on body 1 at the end + −
must be
(a) Q/3 N (b) Q/3 N −1
Q2 Q2
(a) (b)
(c) Q /N 3 (d) None K ∈0 A 4 K ∈0 A
70. A capacitor of capacitance C is initially charged to a Q2
(c) (d) None of these
potential difference of V volt. Now it is connected to 2 K ∈0 A
a battery of 2 V with opposite polarity. The ratio of heat
75. Three uncharged capacitors of capacitance
generated to the final energy stored in the capacitor will be
C1 = 1 µ F, C2 = 2 µ F and C3 = 3 µ F are connected as
(a) 1.75 (b) 2.25
(c) 2.5 (d) 1/2 shown in figure to one another and to points A, B and D
71. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is connected to a potential φ A = 10 V , φB = 25 V and φ D = 20 V . Determine
battery and is charged to a potential difference V. Another the potential (φ0 ) at point O.
capacitor of capacitance 2C is similarly charged to a A
potential difference 2V . The charging battery is now
C1
disconnected, and the capacitors are connect in parallel to
each other in such a way that the positive terminal of one is (a) 20 V
connected to the negative terminal of the other. The final O
energy of the configuration is (b) 30 V C3
C2
3
(a) Zero (b) CV 2
2 (c) 40 V
25 9 B D
(c) CV 2 (d) CV 2 (d) 10 V
6 2
Page 162 Compact Study Material Chapter 18 : Electrostatics

76. Five capacitors are connected as shown in the figure.

3µF
Initially S is opened, and all capacitors are uncharged.
When S is closed, steady state is obtained. Then find out 5µF 2µF
potential difference between the points M and N.
S
M
4 µF 2 µF 4 µF 4µF
(a) +8.57 µ C (b) −8.57 µ C
(c) +11.42 µ C (d) −11.42 µ C
7V 31 V 80. In the circuit shown, the energy stored in 1 µ F capacitor is
5 µF
6 µF 1.2 µF
3 µF
N
(a) 14 (b) 12
1 µF
(c) 10 (d) 15
4 µF
77. Find the potential difference Va − Vb between the points a
and b shows in each parts of the figure.
24 V
2V a 2V (a) 40 µ J (b) 64 µ J
6V 4 µF
(c) 32 µ J (d) None
12 V 81. What is the equivalent capacitance of the system of
a b capacitors between A and B
2 µF
A
C C
24 V 1 µF
b 2 µF
2 µF
(a) (b)
C C C
7 72
(a) Zero, − V = −10.3 V (b) One, − V = −10.3 V
72 7
7 B
7 72 (a) C (b) 1.6 C
(c) One, − V = −10.3 V (d) Zero, − V = −10.3 V
72 7 6
78. Each plate of a parallel plate air capacitor has an area S. (c) C (d) None
What amount of work has to be performed to slowly 82. From a supply of identical capacitors rated 8 µ F, 250 V, the
increase the distance between the plates from x1 to x 2 ? If: minimum number of capacitors required to form a
(i) The charge of the capacitor, which is equal to q composite 16 µ F,1000 V is
q 2 ( x 2 + x1 ) q 2 ( x 2 − x1 ) (a) 2 (b) 4
(a) (b)
2 ∈0 S 2 ∈0 S (c) 16 (d) 32
q 2 ( x 2 − x1 ) q 2 ( x1 − x 2 ) 83. In the circuit shown in figure, the ratio of charges on
(c) (d)
∈0 S 2 ∈0 S 5 µ F and 4 µF capacitor is:
(ii) The voltage across the capacitor, which is equal to V, is 2 µF
kept constant in the process.
3 µF
 1 1   1 1 
∈0 SV 2  −  ∈0 SV 2  − 
x
 1 x 2  x
 2 x1
(a) (b)
2 4 5 µF
 1 1   1 1 
∈0 SV 2  −  ∈0 SV 2  +  4 µF
x
 2 x1 x
 2 x1
(c) (d)
2 2
79. If charge on left plate of the 5 µF capacitor in the circuit 6V
segment shown in the figure is −20 µC the charge on the
(a) 4/5 (b) 3/5
right plate of 3 µ F capacitor is
(c) 3/8 (d) 1/2
Chapter 18 : Electrostatics Compact Study Material Page 163

84. In the circuit shown, a potential difference of 60 V is applied 87. A capacitor of capacitance C0 is charged to a potential V 0
across AB. The potential difference between the point M and is connected with another capacitor of capacitance C as
and N is shown. After closing the switch S, the common potential
2C across the two capacitors becomes V. The capacitance C is
A M
given by
s

R
60 V C C

V0 C0 C

C0 (V0 − V ) C0 (V − V0 )
(a) (b)
B N V0 V0
2C
C0 (V + V0 ) C0 (V0 − V )
(a) 10 V (b) 15 V (c) (d)
V V
(c) 20 V (d) 30 V 88. Three large plates are arranged as shown. How much
charge will flow through the key k if it is closed
85. Find the equivalent capacitance across A and B
Q 2Q
23 µ F 7µF
5Q d 2d
(a)
6
4Q
(b)
1µF 3
A 13 µ F B
3Q
(c)
12 µ F 2
(d) None K
89. Five conducting parallel plates having area A and separation
between them d, are placed as shown in the figure. Plate
10 µ F 1µF number 2 and 4 are connected wire and between point A
and B, a cell of emf E is connected. The charge flown
through the cell is E
28 15
(a) µF (b) µF
3 2
3 ε 0 AE A B
(a)
(c) 15 µ F (d) None 4 d
1 2 3 4 5
2 ε 0 AE
86. Find equivalent capacitance across AB (all capacitances (b)
3 d
in µF )
4ε 0 AE
(c)
d
10 ε 0 AE
(d)
17 2d

90. Five identical capacitor plates are arranged such that they
A B make capacitors each of 2 µ F. The plates are connected to

13 1 a source of emf 10 V. The charge on plate C is

5
10 V
1 (a) +20 µ C
6 A
(b) +40 µ C
B
20 (c) +60 µ C C
(a) µF (b) 9 µF
3 D
(d) +80 µ C
(c) 48 µ F (d) None E
Page 164 Compact Study Material Chapter 18 : Electrostatics

91. Three plates A, B and C each of area r2 are separated by 3. Two small spheres each having the charge +Q are
0.885 mm from each other as shown in the figure. A 10 V suspended by insulating threads of length L from a hook.
This arrangement is taken in space where there is no
battery is used to charge the system. The energy stored in
gravitational effect, then the angle between the two
the system is
suspensions and the tension in each will be [IIT 1986]

o 1 Q2 o 1 Q2
(a) 180 , (b) 90 ,
4πε 0 (2L) 2 4πε 0 L2
A
o 1 Q2 o 1 Q2
(c) 180 , 2
(d) 180 ,
B 4πε 0 2L 4πε 0 L2
10 V 4. Two spherical conductors B and C having equal radii and
C carrying equal charges in them repel each other with a force
F when kept apart at some distance. A third spherical
conductor having same radius as that of B but uncharged is
brought in contact with B, then brought in contact with
(a) 1µJ (b) 10 −1 µ J Cand finally removed away from both. The new force of
repulsion between B and C is [AIEEE 2004]
(c) 10 −2 µ J (d) 10 −3 µ J
(a) F / 4 (b) 3F / 4
92. Four metallic plates are arranged as shown in the figure. If (c) F/8 (d) 3F / 8
the distance between each plate is d , then capacitance of 5. A charge Q is placed at each of the opposite corners of a
the given system between points A and B is (Given d << A ) square. A charge q is placed at each of the other two
corners. If the net electrical force on Q is zero, then Q/q
d equals [AIEEE 2009]

A (a) − 2 2 (b) –1
d 1
B (c) 1 (d) −
2
d
6. Two charges, each equal to q, are kept at x = − a and
x = a on the x-axis. A particle of mass m and charge
ε0 A 2ε 0 A q
(a) (b) q0 = is placed at the origin. If charge q0 is given a small
d d 2

(c)
3ε 0 A
(d)
4ε 0 A displacement (y << a) along the y-axis, the net force acting
d d on the particle is proportional to [JEE (Main) 2013]
(a) y (b) − y
Past Year Questions
(c) 1 / y (d) −1 / y
1. Consider a neutral conducting sphere. A positive point
7. Three charges −q1 , + q 2 and −q 3 are placed as shown in
charge is placed outside the sphere. The net charge on the
sphere is then [IIT-JEE 2007] the figure. The x-component of the force on −q1 is

(a) Negative and distributed uniformly over the surface of proportional to [AIEEE 2003]

the sphere q2 q3
(a) − sin θ Y
b2 a2
(b) Negative and appears only at the point on the sphere – q3
q2 q3
closest to the point charge (b) − cos θ
b2 a2
(c) Negative and distributed non−uniformly over the entire
q2 q3
surface of the sphere (c) + sin θ a
θ
b2 a2 b
(d) Zero q2 q3 X
(d) + cos θ – q1 +q2
2. Three concentric metallic spherical shells of radii R, 2R, 3R, b2 a2
are given charges Q1, Q2 , Q3 , respectively. It is found that 8. Four charges equal to – Q are placed at the four corners of a
the surface charge densities on the outer surfaces of the square and a charge q is at its centre. If the system is in
shells are equal. Then, the ratio of the charges given to the equilibrium the value of q is [AIEEE 2004]

shells, Q1 : Q2 : Q3 , is [IIT-JEE 2009] Q Q

(a) − (1 + 2 2 ) (b) (1 + 2 2 )
4 4
(a) 1 : 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 3 : 5 Q Q
(c) − (1 + 2 2 ) (d) (1 + 2 2 )
(c) 1 : 4 : 9 (d) 1 : 8 : 18 2 2
Chapter 18 : Electrostatics Compact Study Material Page 165

9. Four point +ve charges of same magnitude (Q) are placed 13. Let a total charge 2Q be distributed in a sphere of radius R
at four corners of a rigid square frame as shown in figure.
, with the charge density given by ρ(r) = kr where r is the
The plane of the frame is perpendicular to Z − axis. If a –ve
distance from the centre. Two charges A and B of −Q
point charge is placed at a distance z away from the above
frame (z<<L) then each, are placed on diametrically opposite points, at equal
distance a from the centre. If A and B do not experience
Q Q any force, then [JEE (Main) 2019]

3R −1 / 4
(a) a = (b) a = 2 R
21 / 4
L
(c) a = 8 −1 / 4 R (d) a = R / 3
Z-axis
14. The magnitude of electric field E in the annular region of a
Q Q
charged cylindrical capacitor [IIT 1996]
(a) – ve charge oscillates along the Z–axis (a) Is same throughout
(b) It moves away from the frame (b) Is higher near the outer cylinder than near the inner
(c) It moves slowly towards the frame and stays in the cylinder
plane of the frame (c) Varies as 1 / r , where r is the distance from the axis
(d) It passes through the frame only once
(d) Varies as 1 / r 2 , where r is the distance from the axis
10. A uniformly charged thin spherical shell of radius R carries
uniform surface charge density of σ per unit area. It is made 15. A metallic solid sphere is placed in a uniform electric field.
of two hemispherical shells, held together by pressing them The lines of force follow the path(s) shown in figure as
with force F (see figure). F is proportional to [IIT-JEE 2010] [IIT 1996]
1 1
2 2

F F 3 3
4 4

(a) 1 (b) 2
1 1
(a) σ 2R2 (b) σ 2R (c) 3 (d) 4
ε0 ε0
16. Six charges, three positive and three negative of equal
1 σ2 1 σ2
(c) (d) magnitude are to be placed at the vertices of a regular
ε0 R ε 0 R2
hexagon such that the electric field at O is double the electric
11. Three charges +Q, q, + Q are placed respectively, at field when only one positive charge of same magnitude is
distance, 0, d / 2 and d from the origin, on the x- axis. If the placed at R. Which of the following arrangements of charges
net force experienced by +Q, placed at x=0, is zero, then is possible for P, Q, R, S, T and U respectively
value of q is [JEE (Main) 2019] [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004]
P Q
(a) +Q / 2 (b) +Q / 4

(c) −Q / 2 (d) −Q / 4 U R
O
12. Charge is distributed within a sphere of radius R with a
A
volume charge density ρ (r ) = 2 e − 2r / a , where A and a are T S
r
constants. If Q is the total charge of this charge distribution, (a) +, –, +, –, –, + (b) +, –, +, –, +, –
the radius R is [JEE (Main) 2019] (c) +, +, –, +, –, – (d) –, +, +, –, +, –
    17. Two point charges +8q and −2q are located at x = 0
   
1 a 1
(a) a log   (b) log   and x = L respectively. The location of a point on the x-
 Q  2  Q 
1−  1−  axis at which the net electric field due to these two point
 2π aA   2π aA  charges is zero is [AIEEE 2005]
a  Q   Q  (a) 8 L (b) 4 L
(c) log  1 −  (d) a log  1 − 
2  2π aA   2π aA 
(c) 2 L (d) L / 4
Page 166 Compact Study Material Chapter 18 : Electrostatics

18. Which of the field patterns given below is valid for electric 22. Let there be a spherically symmetric charge distribution with
field as well as for magnetic field 5 r 
charge density varying as ρ (r ) = ρ 0 
[IIT-JEE 2011]
−  upto r = R ,
4 R
and ρ(r) = 0 for r > R , where r is the distance from the
origin. The electric field at a distance r(r < R) from the
(a) (b) origin is given by [AIEEE 2010]
ρ0r  5 r  4πρ 0 r  5 r 
(a)  −  (b)  − 
4ε 0  4 R  3ε 0  3 R 
ρ0r  5 r  4 ρ 0r  5 r 
(c)  −  (d)  − 
4ε 0  3 R  3ε 0  4 R 
23. A spherical portion has been removed from a solid sphere
having a charge distributed uniformly in its volume in the
(c) (d)
figure. The electric field inside the emptied space is
[IIT-JEE 2007]
(a) Zero everywhere
(b) Non-zero and uniform
(c) Non-uniform
19. A long cylindrical shell carries positive surface charge σ in
(d) Zero only at its center
the upper half negative surface charge −σ in the lower half.
24. Consider a uniform spherical charge distribution of radius
The electric field lines around the cylinder will look like R1 centred at the origin O . In this distribution, a spherical
figure given in (figure are schematic and not drawn to scale)
cavity of radius R2 , centred at P with distance
[JEE (Main) 2015]
OP = a = R1 − R2 (see figure) is made. If the electric field
  
+ + ++ + + ++ inside the cavity at position r is E(r ) , then the correct
(a) +
––
+
– (b) +
––
+
–
–– ––– –– ––– statement(s) is(are)

R2
(c) + + ++ (d) + + ++
P
+ + +
––
+
–
a
––
–– ––
–– –– ––– R1
O
[JEE 2015]
20. An electron of mass me initially at rest moves through a
certain distance in a uniform electric field in time t1 . A

proton of mass m p also initially at rest takes time t 2 to (a) E is uniform, its magnitude is independent of R2 but

move through an equal distance in this uniform electric field. its direction depends on r

Neglecting the effect of gravity, the ratio of t 2 / t1 is nearly (b) E is uniform, its magnitude independs of R2 and its
equal to [IIT 1997 Cancelled]

direction depends on r

(a) 1 (b) (m p / me )1 / 2 (c) E is uniform, its magnitude is independent of a but its

direction depends on a
(c) (me / m p )1 / 2 (d) 1836 
(d) E is uniform, and both its magnitude and direction
21. Let E1(r), E2(r) and E3(r) be the respective electric fields at 
depends on a
a distance r from a point charge Q, an infinitely long wire 25. A solid sphere of radius R has a charge Q distributed in its
with constant linear charge density λ, and an infinite plane volume with a charge density ρ = k r a , where κ and a are
with uniform surface charge density σ. If constants and r is the distance from its centre. If the electric
E1(r0 ) = E2(r0 ) = E3 (r0 ) at a given distance r0 , then R 1
field at r = is times that at r = R , find the value of a
[JEE 2014]
2 8
[IIT-JEE 2009]
λ
(a) Q = 4σ π r02 (b) r0 = (a) 3 (b) 5
2πσ
(c) E1 (r0 / 2) = 2 E2 (r0 / 2) (d) E2 (r0 / 2) = 4 E3 (r0 / 2) (c) 2 (d) Both (a) and (b)
Chapter 18 : Electrostatics Compact Study Material Page 167

26. A charged ball B hangs from a silk thread S, which makes q

(a) 0 (b)
an angle θ with a large charged conducting sheet P, as 8πε 0 x 0 ln 2
shown in the figure. The surface charge density σ of the q ln 2
(c) ∞ (d)
sheet is proportional to [AIEEE 2005] 4πε 0 x 0
+ 32. Charges are placed on the vertices of a square as shown. Let
+
P E be the electric field and V the potential at the centre. If the
+
+ θ charges on A and B are interchanged with those on D and C
+ respectively, then [AIEEE 2007]
S
+
+ q q
B A B
(a) sin θ (b) tan θ
(c) cos θ (d) cot θ
27. Two large vertical and parallel metal plates having a
D C
separation of 1cm are connected to a DC voltage source of -q -q
potential difference X. A proton is released at rest midway →
between the two plates. It is found to move at 45º to the (a) E remains unchanged, V changes
vertical JUST after release. Then X is nearly [IIT JEE 2012] →
−5 −7 (b) Both E and V change
(a) 1× 10 V (b) 1× 10 V
→
−9 −10
(c) 1× 10 V (d) 1×10 V (c) E and V remains unchanged
28. A thin spherical conducting shell of radius R has a charge q. →
Another charge Q is placed at the centre of the shell. The (d) E changes, V remains unchanged
electrostatic potential at a point p a distance R/2 from the 33. A long, hollow conducting cylinder is kept coaxially inside
centre of the shell is [AIEEE 2003]
another long, hollow conducting cylinder of larger radius.
(q + Q) 2 2Q
(a) (b) Both the cylinders are initially electrically neutral
4πε 0 R 4πε 0 R
[IIT-JEE 2007]
2Q 2q 2Q q
(c) − (d) + (a) A potential difference appears between the two
4πε 0 R 4πε 0 R 4πε 0 R 4πε 0 R
cylinders when a charge density is given to the inner
29. Two thin wire rings each having a radius R are placed at a
cylinder
distance d apart with their axes coinciding. The charges on
the two rings are +q and –q. The potential difference (b) A potential difference appears between the two
between the centres of the two rings is [AIEEE 2005] cylinders when a charge density is given to the outer
q 1 1  cylinder
(a) Zero (b)  − 
4πε 0  R R + d2
2  (c) No potential difference appears between the two
cylinders when a uniform line charge is kept along the
q 1 1
(c) qR / 4πε 0 d 2 (d)  −  axis of the cylinders
2πε 0  R R + d 
2 2
(d) No potential difference appears between the two
30. If on the concentric hollow spheres of radii r and R(> r) the cylinders when same charge density is given to both the
charge Q is distributed such that their surface densities are cylinders
same then the potential at their common centre is [IIT 1981] 34. The electric potential V at any point O (x, y, z all in metres)
2
Q(R + r ) 2
QR in space is given by V=4x2volt. The electric field at the point
(a) (b) (1m, 0, 2m) in volt/metre is [IIT 1992]
4πε 0 (R + r) R+r
Q(R + r ) (a) 8 along negative X–axis (b) 8 along positive X–axis
(c) Zero (d)
4πε 0 ( R 2 + r 2 ) (c) 16 along negative X–axis (d) 16 along positive Z–axis
31. A charge +q is fixed at each of the points 35. A uniform electric field pointing in positive x-direction
x = x 0 , x = 3 x 0 , x = 5 x 0 ..... infinite, on the x − axis and a exists in a region. Let A be the origin, B be the point on
charge −q is fixed at each of the points the x-axis at x = +1 cm and C be the point on the y-axis
x = 2x 0 , x = 4 x 0 , x = 6 x 0 ,..... infinite. Here x0 is a at y = +1 cm. Then the potentials at the points A, B and
positive constant. Take the electric potential at a point due C satisfy [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001]
to a charge Q at a distance r from it to be Q /(4πε 0 r) . (a) V A < VB (b) V A > VB
Then, the potential at the origin due to the above system of
charges is [IIT 1998]
(c) V A < VC (d) V A > VC
Page 168 Compact Study Material Chapter 18 : Electrostatics

36. Two spherical conductors A and B of radii 1 mm and 2 mm q q 2q

42. Consider a system of three charges , and − placed
are separated by a distance of 5 cm and are uniformly 3 3 3
charged. If the spheres are connected by a conducting wire at points A, B and C, respectively, as shown in the figure.
then in equilibrium condition, the ratio of the magnitude of Take O to be the centre of the circle of radius R and angle
CAB = 60° [IIT-JEE 2008]
the electric fields at the surfaces of spheres A and B is
y
[AIEEE 2006]
B
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1
(c) 1 : 4 (d) 4 : 1
C
37. The potential at a point x (measured in µm) due to some x
O
charges situated on the x-axis is given by V(x)=20 / (x2–4)
60º
Volts. The electric field E at x=4µm is given by
[AIEEE 2007] A
(a) 5/3 Volt / µm and in the –ve x direction
q
(b) 5/3 Volt / µm and in the +ve x direction (a) The electric field at point O is directed along
8π ε 0 R 2
(c) 10/9 Volt / µm and in the –ve x direction the negative x-axis
(d) 10/9 Volt / µm and in the +ve x direction (b) The Potential energy of the system is zero
38. A non-conducting ring of radius 0.5 m carries a total charge (c) The magnitude of the force between the charges at C
q2
of 1.11× 10−10 C distributed
non-uniformly on its and B is
54 π ε 0 R 2

circumference producing an electric field E everywhere in q
l =0
(d) The potential at point O is
12 πε 0 R
space. The value of the line integral ∫l =∞
− E.dl (l = 0 being
43. Two equal point charges are fixed at x = − a and x = + a
centre of the ring) in volt is [IIT 1997 Cancelled] on the x-axis. Another point charge Q is placed at the origin.
(a) + 2 (b) – 1 The Change in the electrical potential energy of Q, when it is
displaced by a small distance x along the x-axis, is
(c) – 2 (d) Zero approximately proportional to [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002]
39. A metallic shell has a point charge ‘q’ kept inside its cavity. 2
(a) x (b) x
Which one of the following diagrams correctly represents the
electric lines of forces [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003] (c) x3 (d) 1 / x
44. A charged particle q is shot towards another charged particle
Q which is fixed, with a speed v. It approaches Q upto a
closest distance r and then returns. If q were given a speed 2v,
(a) (b) the closest distances of approach would be [AIEEE 2004]

v
q Q
r

(a) r (b) 2r
(c) r/2 (d) r/4
(c) (d) 45. Which of the following graphs shows the variation of electric
field E due to a hollow spherical conductor of radius R as a
function of distance from the centre of the sphere
[AIEEE 2008]

40. Two points P and Q are maintained at the potentials of 10 V E E

and –4V, respectively. The work done in moving 100 (a) (b)
electrons from P to Q is [AIEEE 2009]
(a) − 9.60 × 10 −17 J (b) 9.60 × 10 −17 J
R r R x
(c) − 2.24 × 10 −16 J (d) 2.24 × 10 −16 J
41. The dimension of (1/2) ε 0 E 2 (ε 0 : permittivity of free space; E E
E : electric field) is [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000] (c) (d)
−1 2 −2
(a) MLT (b) ML T
(c) ML−1T −2 2 −1
(d) ML T R r R r
Chapter 18 : Electrostatics Compact Study Material Page 169

46. Consider a thin spherical shell of radius R with its centre at 50. Two point charges q1 ( 10 µ C) and q2 (−25 µ C) are placed
the origin, carrying uniform positive surface charge density.
 on the x- axis at x = 1m and x = 4 m respectively. The
The variation of the magnitude of the electric field | E(r)|
electric field (in V/m) at a point y = 3m on y − axis is
and the electric potential V(r) with the distance r from the
 1 
centre, is best represented by which graph [IIT JEE 2012]  take = = 9 × 10 9 Nm 2 C − 2  [JEE (Main) 2019]
 4 π ε 0 
 
| E(r)| V(r) | E(r)| V(r) (a) (−81ˆi + 81 ˆj) × 10 2 (b) (81ˆi − 81 ˆj ) × 10 2

(c) (−63ˆi + 27ˆj ) × 10 2 (d) (63ˆi − 27ˆj ) × 10 2

(a) (b)
51. A charge Q is distributed over three concentric spherical
shells of radii a, b, c (a < b < c) such that their surface
O r O r charge densities are equal to one another. The total
R R
potential at a point at distance r from their common centre,
where r < a, would be [JEE (Main) 2019]
 
| E(r)| V(r) | E(r)| V(r) Q ab + bc + ca Q
(a) (b)
12πε 0 abc 4πε 0 (a + b + c )
(c) (d)
Q(a + b + c) Q (a 2 + b 2 + c 2 )
(c) (d)
4πε 0 (a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ) 4πε 0 (a 3 + b3 + c 3 )
52. Four equal point charge Q each are placed in the xy-plane
O R r O R r
at (0, 2), (4, 2), (4, –2) and (0, –2). The work required to
47. Point charge q moves from point P to point S along the path put a fifth charge Q at the origin of the coordinate system
PQRS (figure shown) in a uniform electric field E pointing will be [JEE (Main) 2019]
coparallel to the positive direction of the X–axis. The Q2  1  Q2  1 
coordinates of the points P, Q, R and S are (a, b,0) (2a, 0, (a) 1 +  (b) 1 + 
4πε 0  3  4πε 0  5 
0) (a, –b, 0) and (0,0,0) respectively. The work done by the  
field in the above process is given by the expression Q2 Q2
(c) (d)
[IIT 1989] 4πε 0 2 2πε 0

E 53. The given graph shows variation (with distance r from
P centre) of [JEE (Main) 2019]

X
S Q
r0
R
(a) qEa (b) −qEa
r0 r
(c) qEa 2 (d) qE [(2a) 2 + b 2 ]
(a) Electric field of a uniformly charged sphere
48. Three concentric metal shells A, B and C of respective radii (b) Potential of a uniformly charged spherical shell
a, b and c (a < b < c) have surface charge densities (c) Potential of a uniformly charged sphere
(d) Electric field of uniformly charged spherical shell
+σ ,−σ and +σ respectively. The potential of shell B is
54. Three charges Q, + q and + q are placed at the vertices of a
[JEE (Main) 2018]
right-angle isosceles triangle as shown below. The net
σ  a2 + b2  σ  a2 − c2  electrostatic energy of the configuration is zero, if the value
(a)  + c (b)  
ε0  b  ε0  b  of Q is
Q [JEE (Main) 2019]
σ b2 − a2  σ  a2 − b2 
(c)  + c (d)  + c
ε 0  b  ε 0  b 
49. For a uniformly charged ring of radius R, the electric field on
its axis has the largest magnitude at a distance h from its
+q +q
center. Then value of h is [JEE (Main) 2019]
R − 2q
(a) (b) R (a) + q (b)
2 2 +1
R (c) −2q (d)
−q
(c) (d) R 2
5 1+ 2
Page 170 Compact Study Material Chapter 18 : Electrostatics

55. There is a uniform spherically symmetric surface charge 59. The electric field in a region is given by E = ( Ax + B)ˆi ,
density at a distance R0 from the origin. The charge −1
where E is in NC and x is in metres. The values of
distribution is initially at rest and starts expanding because of
constants are A = 20 SI unit and B = 10 SI unit. If the
mutual repulsion. The figure that represents best the speed
potential at x = 1 is V1 and that at x = −5 is V 2 , then
V(R(t)) of the distribution as a function of its instantaneous
V1 − V2 is [JEE (Main) 2019]
radius R (t) is [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 180 V (b) 320 V
V(R(t)) V(R(t)) (c) −520 V (d) −48 V

(a) (b) 60. A system of three charges are placed as shown in the figure

R0 R(t) R0 R(t) D

+q –q Q
V(R(t)) V(R(t))
V0 d

(c) (d) If D >> d , the potential energy of the system is best given
by [JEE (Main) 2019]
R0 R(t) R0 R(t)
1  q 2 2q Q d  1  q2 q Q d 
(a) − +  (b) − − 
56. The bob of a simple pendulum has mass 2g and a charge 4 πε 0  d D 2  4πε 0  d D 2 

of 5.0µ C . If is at rest in a uniform horizontal electric field of 1  q2 q Q d  1  q2 q Q d 

(c) + +  (d) − − 
intensity 2000V / m . At equilibrium, the angle that the 4 πε 0  d D 2  4πε 0  d 2 D 2 

pendulum makes with the vertical is (take g = 10m / s 2 ) 61. Four point charges −q, +q, + q and − q are placed on y −

[JEE (Main) 2019] axis at y = −2d, y = −d, y = +d and y + 2d, respectively.

The magnitude of the electric field E at a point on the x −
(a) tan −1 (0.5) (b) tan −1 (2.0)
axis at x = D , with D >> d , will behave as
(c) tan −1 (5.0) (d) tan −1 (0.2) [JEE (Main) 2019]

Q, 1 1
57. A solid conducting sphere, having a charge is (a) E ∝ (b) E ∝
D D2
surrounded by an uncharged conducting hollow spherical
1 1
shell. Let the potential difference between the surface of the (c) E∝ (d) E ∝
D4 D3
solid sphere and that of the outer surface of the hollow shell
62. A uniformly charged ring of radius 3 a and total charge q is
be V . If the shell is now given a charge of −4Q , the new
placed in xy − plane centered at origin. A point charge q is
potential difference between the same two surfaces is
moving towards the ring along the z − axis and has speed v
[JEE (Main) 2019]
at z = 4 a . The minimum value of v such that it crosses the
(a) 4 V (b) 2 V
origin is [JEE (Main) 2019]
(c) −2 V (d) V 1/ 2 1/ 2
2  2 q 2  2  4 q 2 
(a) (b)
58. A positive point charge is released m  15 4πε 0 a  m  15 4πε 0 a 
from rest at a distance ro from a 1/ 2 1/ 2
2  1 q 2  2  1 q 2 
positive line charge with uniform (c) (d)
m  15 4πε 0 a  m  5 4πε 0 a 
density. The speed (v) of the point ro
63. In free space, a particle A of charge 1 µ C is held fixed at a
charge, as a function of
instantaneous distance r from line point P. Another particle B of the same charge and mass
4 µ g is kept at a distance of 1 mm from P. If B is released
charge, is proportional to [JEE (Main) 2019]
then its velocity at a distance of 9 mm from P is
r  r 
(a) v ∝  
 (b) v ∝ ln 
 1
 ro   ro  (Take = 9 × 10 9 Nm 2 C − 2 ) [JEE (Main) 2019]
4πε 0

r  +r / ro
(a) 1.5 × 10 2 m / s (b) 1.0 m / s
(c) v ∝ ln 
 (d) v ∝ e
 ro  (c) 3.0 × 10 4 m / s (d) 2.0 × 10 3 m / s
Chapter 18 : Electrostatics Compact Study Material Page 171

64. Shown in the figure is a shell made of a conductor. It has 68. Two electric dipoles, A, B with respective dipole moments
 
inner radius a and outer radius b and carries charge Q. At d A = −4qaˆi and dB = −2qaˆi placed on the x-axis with a

its centre is a dipole P as shown. In this case separation R, as shown in the figure
R
 X
P A B

The distance from A at which both of them produce the

[JEE (Main) 2019]
same potential is [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) Electric field outside the shell is the same as that of a
point charges at the centre of the shell R 2R
(a) (b)
(b) Surface charge density on the inner surface of the shell 2 −1 2 +1
is zero everywhere 2R R
(c) (d)
(c) Surface charge density on the inner surface is uniform 2 −1 2 +1
(Q / 2) 69. Charge − q and + q located at A and B , respectively,
and equal to
4π a 2
constitute an electric dipole. Distance AB = 2a , O is the
(d) Surface charge density on the outer surface depends on mid point of the dipole and OP is perpendicular to AB . A

P charge Q is placed at P where OP = y and y >> 2a . The
charge Q experiences an electrostatic force F . If Q is now
65. Two point charges + q and − q are held fixed at (−d, 0) and
y
moved along the equatorial line to P ′ such that OP ′ =  ,
(d, 0) respectively of a (X, Y) coordinate system. Then 3
[IIT 1995] y 
the force on Q will be close to  >> 2a 
3 
(a) E at all points on the Y − axis is along î
[JEE (Main) 2019]
P
(b) The electric field E at all points on the X − axis has the
same direction Q P'

Q
(c) Dipole moment is 2qd directed along î A B
–q +q
(d) Work has to be done in bringing a test charge from
(a) 3 F (b) 27 F
infinity to the origin
 F
66. An electric dipole has a fixed dipole moment p, which (c) 9 F (d)
3
makes angle θ with respect to x-axis. When subjected to an
  70. An electric field of 1000 V / m is applied to an electric dipole
electric field E1 = Eˆi , it experiences a torque T1 = τkˆ. When at angle of 45 ° . The value of electric dipole moment is

subjected to another electric field E2 = 3 E1ˆj it 10−29 C.m. What is the potential energy of the electric dipole
  [JEE (Main) 2019]
experiences a torque T2 = −T1. The angle θ is
−20
(a) − 9 × 10 J (b) − 7 × 10 −27 J
[JEE (Main) 2017]
(a) 90º (b) 30º (c) − 10 × 10−29 J −18
(d) − 20× 10 J
(c) 45º (d) 60º 71. Determine the electric dipole moment of the system of three
charges, placed on the vertices of an equilateral triangle, as
67. An electric dipole is formed by two equal and opposite
shown in the figure [JEE (Main) 2019]
charges q with separation d . The charges have same mass
m . It is kept in a uniform electric field E . If it is slightly
rotated from its equilibrium orientation, then its angular (a) − 3ql ˆj y – 2q
frequency ω is [JEE (Main) 2019] ˆi + ˆj
(b) (ql )
2q E qE 2
(a) (b) 2 l l
md md
(c) 2ql ˆj
qE qE ˆj − ˆi l +q
+q
(c) (d) (d) 3ql x
2md md
2
Page 172 Compact Study Material Chapter 18 : Electrostatics


72. A point dipole P = − p0 xˆ is kept at the origin. The potential 77. The electrostatic potential inside a charged spherical ball is
and electric field due to this dipole on the y-axis at a given by φ = ar 2 + b where r is the distance from the
distance d are, respectively centre; a, b are constants. Then the charge density inside the
(Take V = 0 at infinity) [JEE (Main) 2019]
  ball is [AIEEE 2011]
P −P
(a) 0, (b) 0, (a) −24πaε 0 r (b) −6aε 0r
4πε 0 d 3 4πε 0 d 3
    (c) −24πaε 0 (d) −6aε 0
P −P P −P
(c) , (d) , 78. Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct
4πε 0 d 2 4πε 0 d 3 4πε 0 d 2 4πε 0 d 3
[IIT-JEE 2011]
73. If the electric flux entering and leaving an enclosed surface
respectively is φ1 and φ 2 the electric charge inside the −2.5
(a) If the electric field due to a point charge varies as r
surface will be [AIEEE 2003] instead of r
−2
, then the Gauss law will still be valid
(a) (φ1 + φ2 )ε 0 (b) (φ 2 − φ1 )ε 0
(b) The Gauss law can be used to calculate the field
(c) (φ1 + φ 2 ) / ε 0 (d) (φ2 − φ1 ) / ε 0 distribution around an electric dipole
74. Consider the charge configuration and spherical Gaussian (c) If the electric field between two point charges is zero
surface as shown in the figure. When calculating the flux of somewhere, then the sign of the two charges is the
the electric field over the spherical surface the electric field same
will be due to [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004]
(d) The work done by the external force in moving a unit
(a) q2 positive charge from point A at potential V A to point B
+q1 q2
(b) Only the positive charges at potential V B is (V B − V A )
(c) All the charges –q1
Q
(d) + q1 and −q1 79. Let P (r ) = r be the charge density distribution for a
π R4

75. Consider an electric field E = E0 xˆ, where E 0 is a constant. solid sphere of radius R and total charge Q. For a point ‘p’
The flux through the shaded area (as shown in the figure) inside the sphere at distance r1 from the centre of the sphere,
due to this field is [IIT-JEE 2011] the magnitude of electric field is [AIEEE 2009]
z
(a) 2 E 0 a 2 (a, 0, a) (a, a, a) Q
(a) 0 (b)
4πε 0 r12
(b) 2 E0 a 2
(c) E0 a 2 Qr12 Qr12
(c) (d)
4πε 0 R 4 3πε 0 R 4
E0 a 2 y
(d) (0, 0, 0) (0, a, 0)
2 x 80. The region between two concentric spheres of radii ' a ' and
76. A disk of radius a/4 having a uniformly distributed charge 6C 'b' , respectively (see figure), has volume charge density
is placed in the x-y plane with its centre at (−a / 2, 0, 0). A A
ρ= , where A is a constant and r is the distance from
rod of length a carrying a uniformly distributed charge 8Cis r
placed on the x-axis from x = a / 4 to x = 5a / 4 . Two point the centre. At the centre of the spheres is a point charge Q.
charges −7 C and 3C are placed at (a / 4, − a / 4, 0) and The value of A such that the electric field in the region
(−3a / 4, 3a / 4, 0), respectively. Consider a cubical surface between the spheres will be constant, is [JEE (Main) 2016]

formed by six surfaces x = ± a / 2, y = ±a / 2, z = ±a / 2 . The

electric flux through this cubical surface is [IIT-JEE 2009]

y
a

Q
x b

−2C 2C Q 2Q
(a) (b) (a) (b)
ε0 ε0 2π (b 2 − a 2 ) π (a 2 − b 2 )
10C 12C 2Q Q
(c) (d) (c) (d)
ε0 ε0 πa 2 2πa 2
Chapter 18 : Electrostatics Compact Study Material Page 173

81. As shown in the figure, a very thin sheet of aluminium is 87. In an isolated parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C, the
placed in between the plates of the condenser. Then the four surface have charges Q1 , Q 2 , Q3 and Q4 as shown.
capacity [AIEEE 2003]
The potential difference between the plates is [IIT-JEE 1999]
(a) Will increase Q1 + Q 2 + Q3 + Q4
(a)
(b) Will decrease 2C
Al strip
Q1 Q3
Q 2 + Q3
(c) Remains unchanged (b)
2C
Q2 Q4
(d) May increase or decrease Q2 − Q3
(c)
82. A parallel plate condenser with a dielectric of dielectric 2C
constant k between the plates has a capacity C and is Q1 + Q 4
(d)
charged to a potential V volts. The dielectric stab is slowly 2C
removed from between the plates and then reinserted. The
88. Two identical charged spheres are suspended by strings of
net work done by the system in this process is [AIEEE 2007]
equal lengths. The strings make an angle of 30 ° with each
1
(a) (k − 1)CV 2 (b) CV 2 (k − 1) / k other. When suspended in a liquid of density 0.8 g cm −3 ,
2
the angle remains the same. If density of the material of the
(c) (k − 1)CV 2 (d) Zero
sphere is 1.6 g cm −3 , the dielectric constant of the liquid is
83. A parallel plate capacitor is made of two circular plates
[AIEEE 2010]
separated by a distance of 5 mm and with a dielectric of
dielectric constant 2.2 between them. When the electric field (a) 1 (b) 4
4
in the dielectric is 3 × 10 V / m, the charge density of the (c) 3 (d) 2
positive plate will be close to [JEE (Mains) 2014] 89. Consider the situation shown in the figure. The capacitor A
−7 2 −7 2 has a charge q on it whereas B is uncharged. The charge
(a) 6 × 10 C/m (b) 3 × 10 C / m
appearing on the capacitor B a long time after the switch is
(c) 3 × 104 C / m2 (d) 6 × 104 C / m2 closed is [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001]
84. A battery is used to charge a parallel plate capacitor till the
q
potential difference between the plates becomes equal to the
+ –
electromotive force of the battery. The ratio of the energy
+ –
stored in the capacitor and the work done by the battery will + s
–
be [AIEEE 2007] + –
(a) 1 (b) 2 + –
(c) 1/4 (d) 1/2 A B
85. If there are n capacitors in parallel connected to Vvolt
source, then the energy stored is equal to [AIEEE 2002] (a) Zero (b) q / 2
1 (c) q (d) 2q
(a) CV (b) nCV 2
2
90. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance 90 pF is connected
1
(c) CV 2 (d) CV 2 to a battery of emf 20V . If a dielectric material of dielectric
2n
5
86. In the given circuit, a charge of +80 µC is given to the constant K = is inserted between the plates, the
3
upper plate of the 4µF capacitor. Then in the steady state, magnitude of the induced charge will be [JEE (Main) 2018]
the charge on the upper plate of the 3µF capacitor is (a) 2.4 n C (b) 0.9 n C
[IIT-JEE 2012]
+ 80 µ C (c) 1.2 n C (d) 0.3 n C

4 µF 91. A parallel plate capacitor having capacitance 12 pF is

charged by a battery to a potential difference of 10V
between its plates. The charging battery is now disconnected
2 µF 3 µF
and a porcelain slab of dielectric constant 6.5 is slipped
between the plates. The work done by the capacitor on the
slab is [JEE (Main) 2019]

(a) +32 µC (b) +40 µC (a) 692 pJ (b) 600 pJ

(c) +48 µC (d) +80 µC (c) 508 pJ (d) 560 pJ

Page 174 Compact Study Material Chapter 18 : Electrostatics

92. A parallel plate capacitor with plates of area 1m 2 each, are 97. Two identical parallel plate capacitors of capacitance C
at a separation of 0.1m. If the electric field between the each, have plates of area A , separated by a distance d .
plates is 100 N / C , the magnitude of charge each plate is The space between the plates of the two capacitors, is filled
with three dielectrics, of equal thickness and dielectric
C2
(Take ε 0 = 8.85 × 10−12 ) [JEE (Main) 2019] constants K1 , K 2 and K 3 . The first capacitor is filled as
N − m2
shown in fig.(I) and second one is filled as shown in fig.(II)
(a) 6 . 85 × 10 − 10 C (b) 7.85 × 10 −10 C
If these two modified capacitors are charged by the same
(c) 9 . 85 × 10 − 10 C (d) 8 . 85 × 10 − 10 C
potential V , the ratio of the energy stored in the two, would
93. A parallel plate capacitor has 1 µ F capacitance. One of its
be [E1 refers to capacitor (I) and E 2 to capacitor (II)]
two plates is given +2µ C charge and the other plate,
+4µ C charge. The potential difference developed across
K1
the capacitor is [JEE (Main) 2019]
K2 K1 K2 K3
(a) 5 V (b) 2 V
K3
(c) 3V (d) 1 V
(I) (II)
94. A capacitor with capacitance 5µ F is charged to 5µ C . If
[JEE (Main) 2019]
the plates are pulled apart to reduce the capacitance to
2µ F , how much work is done [JEE (Main) 2019] E1 (K 1 + K 2 + K 3 )(K 2 K 3 + K 1 K 2 )
(a) −
E2 K1 K 2 K 3
(a) 2.55 × 10 −6 J (b) 6.25 × 10 −6 J
(c) 2.16 × 10 −6 J (d) 3.75 × 10 −6 J E1 9 K1 K 2 K 3
(b) −
E 2 (K 1 + K 2 + K 3 )( K 2 K 3 + K 3 K 1 + K 1 K 2 )
95. Determine the charge on the capacitor in the following
circuit
E1 K1 K 2 K 3
(c) −
6Ω 2Ω E 2 (K1 + K 2 + K 3 )(K 2 K 3 + K 3 K1 + K1 K 2 )

4Ω 10Ω 10µF E1 (K 1 + K 2 + K 3 )(K 2 K 3 + K 3 K 1 + K 1 K 2

(d) −
72V E2 9 K1 K 2 K 3

98. Seven capacitors each of capacity 2 µ F are to be so

[JEE (Main) 2019] 10
connected to have a equivalent capacity µF . Which will
(a) 10 µ C (b) 200 µ C 11
(c) 60 µ C (d) 2µ C be the necessary figure as shown [IIT-JEE 1990]

96. A simple pendulum of length L is placed between the plates

of a parallel plate capacitor having electric field E, as shown
in figure. Its bob has mass m and charge q. The time period (a)
of the pendulum is given by [JEE (Main) 2019]

+ –
+ L –
+ –
m (b)
+ –
q
+ –
+ –
E
(c)
L L
(a) (b) 2π
 qE   2  qE  2 
g −  g +   
 m  m  


L L
(c) 2π (d) 2π (d)
 qE  q2E2
g +  2
g +
 m  m2
Chapter 18 : Electrostatics Compact Study Material Page 175

99. In the following circuit, the resultant capacitance between A 102. In the figure below, what is the potential difference between
and B is 1µF. Then value of C is [IIT 1977] the points A and B and between B and C respectively in
steady state [IIT 1979]
C 1µF 3µF 1µF
A B

8µF 3µF 1µF

6µF 4µF
1µF
2µF 10Ω
2µF 12µF 100V
20Ω
B
A C
32 11
(a) µF (b) µF
11 32 (a) VAB = VBC = 100 V
23 32 (b) VAB = 75 V, VBC= 25 V
(c) µF (d) µF
32 23 (c) VAB = 25 V, VBC= 75 V
100. Five identical plates each of area A are joined as shown in (d) VAB = VBC = 50 V
the figure. The distance between the plates is d. The plates 103. Figure given below shows two identical parallel plate
are connected to a potential difference of V volts . The capacitors connected to a battery with switch S closed. The
charge on plates 1 and 4 will be [IIT 1984] switch is now opened and the free space between the plates
of capacitors is filled with a dielectric of dielectric constant 3.
What will be the ratio of total electrostatic energy stored in
–
both capacitors before and after the introduction of the
1 2 3 4 5 V dielectric [IIT 1983]
+

V A B
ε 0 AV 2ε 0 AV −ε 0 AV 2ε 0 AV
(a) , (b) ,
d d d d
ε 0 AV −2ε 0 AV −ε 0 AV −2ε 0 AV
(c) , (d) , (a) 3 : 1 (b) 5 : 1
d d d d
(c) 3 : 5 (d) 5 : 3
101. A parallel plate capacitor of area A, plate separation d and
104. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is connected to a
capacitance C is filled with three different dielectric materials
battery and is charged to a potential difference V. Another
having dielectric constants k1 ,k 2 and k 3 as shown. If a capacitor of capacitance 2C is connected to another battery
single dielectric material is to be used to have the same and is charged to potential difference 2V. The charging
capacitance C in this capacitor, then its dielectric constant k batteries are now disconnected and the capacitors are
is given by [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000] connected in parallel to each other in such a way that the
positive terminal of one is connected to the negative
A/2 A/2 terminal of the other. The final energy of the configuration is
[IIT 1995]
K1 K2 d/2 2
25 CV
d (a) Zero (b)
6
K3
3CV 2 9CV 2
(c) (d)
A 2 2
A = Area of plates 105. Two capacitors C1 and C2 are charged to 120 V and 200 V
respectively. It is found that by connecting them together the
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 potential on each one can be made zero. Then
(a) = + + (b) = +
k k 1 k 2 2k 3 k k 1 + k 2 2k 3 [JEE (Main) 2013]

k1k 2 (a) 5C1 = 3C2 (b) 3C1 = 5C2

(c) k = + 2k 3 (d) k = k1 + k 2 + 2k 3
k1 + k 2 (c) 3C1 + 5C2 = 0 (d) 9C1 = 4 C2
Page 176 Compact Study Material Chapter 18 : Electrostatics

106. A combination of capacitors is set up as shown in the figure. 109. For the circuit shown, which of the following statements is
The magnitude of the electric field, due to a point charge Q true [IIT-JEE 1999]
V1=30V V2=20V
(having a charge equal to the sum of the charges on the
S1 + – S3 + – S2
4 µ F and 9 µF capacitors), at a point distance 30 m from it,
would equal [JEE (Main) 2016]
C1=2pF C2=3pF

3µF
4µF
(a) With S1 closed, V1 = 15 V , V2 = 20 V
9µF
(b) With S3 closed V1 = V2 = 25V
(c) With S1 and S2 closed V1 = V2 = 0
2µF
(d) With S1 and S3 closed, V1 = 30 V , V2 = 20 V
110. Given,
+ – R1 = 1Ω C1 = 2µF
8V R2 = 2Ω C2 = 4µF
C1
(a) 360 N/C (b) 420 N/C C1 C2

(c) 480 N/C (d) 240 N/C R1 R2

C1
R1 R1 C2
V
107. A series combination of n1 capacitors each of value C1 , is C2
R2 R2
V V
charged by a source of potential difference 4V . When
another parallel combination of n2 capacitors, each of value
(I) (II) (III)
C 2 , is charged by a source of potential difference V , it has
The time constants (in µ s) for the circuits, I, II, III, are
the same (total) energy stored in it, as the first combination
respectively [IIT-JEE 2006]
has, The value of C 2 , in terms of C1 , is then
(a) 18,18/9,4 (b) 18,4,8/9
16 C1 2C1 (c) 4,8/9,18 (d) 8/9,18,4
(a) (b)
n1 n 2 n1n2 111. A 4 µF capacitor, a resistance of 2.5 MΩ is in series with 12
V battery. Find the time after which the potential difference
n2 n2 across the capacitor is 3 times the potential difference across
(c) 16 C1 (d) 2 C1
n1 n1 the resistor. [Given ln(2)= 0.693]
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2005]
108. The figure shows an experimental plot discharging of a
(a) 13.86 s (b) 6.93 s
capacitor in an RC circuit. The time constant τ of this circuit
(c) 7 s (d) 14 s
lies between [AIEEE 2012] 112. Let C be the capacitance of a capacitor discharging through
a resistor R. Suppose t1 is the time taken for the energy
Potential difference V in

25 stored in the capacitor to reduce to half its initial value and

t 2 is the time taken for the charge to reduce to one-fourth its
volts

20 initial value. Then the ratio t1 / t 2 will be [AIEEE 2010]

15 (a) 2 (b) 1
10 1 1
(c) (d)
5
2 4
113. A resistor 'R' and 2 µ F capacitor in series is connected
0
50 100 150 200 250 300 through a switch to 200 V direct supply. Across the capacitor
is a neon bulb that lights up at 120 V. Calculate the value of
Time in seconds
R to make the bulb light up 5s after the switch has been
closed. (log 10 2.5 = 0.4) [AIEEE 2011]
(a) 150 sec and 200 sec (b) 0 and 50 sec
(a) 1 . 3 × 10 4 Ω (b) 1.7 × 10 5 Ω
(c) 50 sec and 100 sec (d) 100 sec and 150 sec (c) 2.7 × 10 6 Ω (d) 3 . 3 × 10 7 Ω
Chapter 18 : Electrostatics Compact Study Material Page 177

114. A circuit is connected as shown in the figure with the switch 118. A capacitance of 2µ F is required in an electrical circuit
S open. When the switch is closed, the total amount of
charge that flows from Y to X is [IIT-JEE 2007] across a potential difference of 1.0 kV. A large number of
1 µ F capacitors are available which can withstand a
3µF 6µF
X potential difference of not more than 300 V. The minimum
number of capacitors required to achieve this is
S
3Ω 6Ω [JEE (Main) 2017]
Y
(a) 32 (b) 2
9V
(c) 16 (d) 24
(a) 0 (b) 54 µC
(c) 27 µC (d) 81 µC 119. A parallel-plate capacitor of area A, plate separation d and
115. A parallel plate capacitor C with plates of unit area and capacitance C is filled with four dielectric materials having
separation d is filled with a liquid of dielectric constant k = 2
d dielectric constants k1 , k 2 , k 3 and k4 as shown in the figure
. The level of liquid is initially. Suppose the liquid level
3 below. If a single dielectric material is to be used to have the
decreases at a constant speed V, the time constant as a
same capacitance C in this capacitor, then its dielectric
function of time t is [IIT-JEE 2008]
constant k is given by
6ε 0 R
(a)
5d + 3 Vt
A/3 A/3 A/3
(b)
(15d + 9 Vt )ε 0 R
C
2d 2 − 3dV t − 9 V 2 t 2
d d R k1 k2 k3 d/2
6ε 0 R
(c) 3
5d − 3Vt d

(15d − 9Vt )ε 0 R k4
(d) 2 2 2
2d + 3d Vt − 9 V t
A
116. In an RC circuit while charging, the graph of ln i versus time
is as shown by the dotted line in the diagram figure, where i 2 3 1
(a) = +
is the current. When the value of the resistance is doubled, k k1 + k 2 + k 3 k 4
which of the solid curve best represents the variation of ln i
versus time Y [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004] 1 1 1 1 3
(b) = + + +
(a) P S k k1 k 2 k 3 2k 4

(b) Q R
log i

(c) k = k1 + k2 + k3 + 3k4
(c) R Q
P 2
(d) S X (d) k = (k1 + k 2 + k 3 ) + 2k 4
t 3
117. In the given circuit diagram when the current reaches steady 120. Figure shows charge (q) versus voltage (V ) graph for series
state in the circuit, the charge on the capacitor of
capacitance C will be [JEE (Main) 2017]
and parallel combination of two given capacitors. The
capacitances are
E r
A
q(µC)

r1 500 B
80
C

r2 10V V (Volt)

r1 [JEE (Main) 2019]

(a) CE (b) CE
(r1 + r ) (a) 50µ F and 30µ F (b) 40µ F and 10µ F
r1 r2
(c) CE (d) CE
(r2 + r ) (r + r2 ) (c) 60µ F and 40µ F (d) 20µ F and 30µ F
Page 178 Compact Study Material Chapter 18 : Electrostatics

121. A parallel plate capacitor is made of two square plates of 124. In the figure shown below, the charge on the left plate of the
side ‘a’, separated by a distance d (d << a ) . The lower 10µ F capacitor is −30 µ C. The charge on the right plate
triangular portion is filled with a dielectric constant K, as of the 6 µF capacitor is [JEE (Main) 2019]
shown in the figure. Capacitance of this capacitor is
[JEE (Main) 2019]
6µF

10µF 2µF
d
K 4µF

(a) −12µ C

a (b) +12µ C

Kε 0 a 2 Kε 0 a 2 (c) −18 µ C
(a) (b) ln K
2d(K + 1) d
(d) +18 µ C
Kε 0 a 2 1 Kε 0 a 2
(c) ln K (d)
d ( K − 1) 2 d 125. Seven capacitors, each of capacitance 2µ F , are to be
122. A parallel plate capacitor with square plates is filled with four connected in a configuration to obtain an effective
dielectrics of dielectric constants K1 , K 2 , K 3 and K 4
 6 
arranged as shown in the figure. The effective dielectric capacitance of   µF . Which of the combinations, shown
 13 
constant K will be [JEE (Main) 2019]
in figures below, will achieve the desired value
[JEE (Main) 2019]
K1 K2 L/2

K3 K4 L/2

d/2 d/2 (a)

(K1 + K 4 )(K 2 + K 3 )
(a) K =
2(K1 + K 2 + K 3 + K 4 )

 K K K2K4 
(b) K =  1 3 + 
 K1 + K 3 K 2 + K 4 

(K1 + K 2 )(K 3 + K 4 )
(c) K=
2(K1 + K 2 + K 3 + K 4 ) (b)

(K1 + K 2 )(K 3 + K 4 )
(d) K =
( K1 + K 2 + K 3 + K 4 )

123. A parallel plate capacitor is of area 6 cm 2 and a separation

3mm . The gap is filled with three dielectric materials of
equal thickness (see figure) with dielectric constants
K1 , = 10, K 2 = 12 and K 3 = 14 . The dielectric constant of
(c)
a material which when fully inserted in above capacitor,
gives same capacitance would be

K1 K2 K3 3 mm

[JEE (Main) 2019]

(a) 4 (b) 14 (d)

(c) 36 (d) 12
Chapter 18 : Electrostatics Compact Study Material Page 179

126. In the circuit shown, find C if the effective capacitance of 130. In the circuit shown, charge on the 5 µF capacitor is
the whole circuit is to be 0.5 µF . All values in the circuit are
2µF 4µF
in µ F [JEE (Main) 2019]

C 2
5µF
A

2 2 1 O [JEE (Main) 2020]

6V 6V

2 (a) 18.00 µ C (b) 10.90 µ C

2 2
(c) 16.36 µ C (d) 5.45 µ C

B 131. Two identical electric point dipoles have dipole moments

7 p1 = pˆi and p2 = − p ˆi and are held on the x axis at
(a) µF (b) 4 µ F
11 distance 'a' from each other. When released, they move
7 6 along the x-axis with the direction of their dipole moments
(c) µF (d) µF remaining unchanged. If the mass of each dipole is 'm', their
10 5
speed when they are infinitely far apart is
127. Voltage rating of a parallel plate capacitor is 500 V . Its [JEE (Main) 2020]
dielectric can withstand a maximum electric field of p 1 p 1
(a) (b)
106 V / m . The plate area is 10 − 4 m 2 . What is the dielectric a π ε 0 ma a 2π ε 0 ma
constant if the capacitance is 15 pF
p 2 p 3
(c) (d)
(given ε 0 = 8.86 × 10 −12 C 2 / Nm 2 ) [JEE (Main) 2019] a π ε 0 ma a 2π ε 0 ma

(a) 3 .8 (b) 4.5 132. A two point charges 4 q and − q are fixed on the x-axis at

(c) 8.5 (d) 6.2 d d

x=− and x = , respectively. If a third point charge 'q'
2 2
128. The parallel combination of two air filled parallel plate
is taken from the origin to x = d along the semicircle as
capacitors of capacitance C and n C is connected to a shown in the figure, the energy of the charge will
battery of voltage, V . When the capacitors are fully
charged, the battery is removed and after that a dielectric
material of dielectric constant K is placed between the two 4q –q
plates of the first capacitor. The new potential difference of [JEE (Main) 2020]
the combined system is [JEE (Main) 2019] 2
3q 2q 2
V nV (a) Increase by (b) Increase by
(a) (b) 4πε 0 d 3πε 0 d
K +n K +n
q2 4q2
(n + 1)V (c) Decrease by (d) Decrease by
(c) (d) V 4πε 0 d 3πε 0 d
(K + n)
133. In finding the electric field using Gauss law the formula
129. In the given circuit, the charge on 4 µ F capacitor will be  q
E = enc is applicable. In the formula ε 0 is permittivity of
ε0 A
1µF
4µF
free space, A is the area of Gaussian surface and qenc is
5µF charge enclosed by the Gaussian surface. This equation can
be used in which of the following situation
[JEE (Main) 2020]

3µF (a) Only when then Gaussian surface is an equipotential

surface

10V (b) Only when E = is constant on the surface
[JEE (Main) 2019] (c) Only when then Gaussian surface is an equipotential

(a) 13.4 µ C (b) 9.6µ C surface and E = is constant on the surface

(c) 5.4 µ C (d) 24µ C (d) For any choice of Gaussian surface
Page 180 Compact Study Material Chapter 18 : Electrostatics

134. Concentric metallic hollow spheres of radii R and 4 R hold 140. If q f is the free charge on the capacitor plates and qb is the
charges Q1 and Q2 respectively. Given that surface charge bound charge on the dielectric slab of dielectric constant k
densities of the concentric spheres are equal, the potential placed between the capacitor plates, then bound charge qb
difference V ( R ) − V (4 R ) is [JEE (Main) 2020]
can be expressed as [JEE (Main) 2021]
3 Q1 3 Q2
(a) (b)  1  1
16πε 0 R 4πε 0 R (a) qb = q f  1 −  (b) qb = q f  1 + 
 k  k
Q2 3 Q1
(c) (d)  1   1 
4πε 0 R 4πε 0 R (c)qb = q f  1 − 
 (d) qb = q f  1 + 
 k  k 
135. A cube of side ' a' has point charges + Q located at each of
141. Two identical tennis balls each having mass ' m ' and charge
its vertices except at the origin where the charge is − Q . The
electric field at the centre of cube is ' q ' are suspended from a fixed point by threads of length
x ' l '. What is the equilibrium separation when each thread
makes a small angle ' θ ' with the vertical
+Q +Q
[JEE (Main) 2021]
+Q +Q 1 1

+Q  q 2l 2 3  q 2l  2
z (a) x=  (b) x =  

 2πε m 2 g 2 
+Q –Q  0   2πε 0 mg 
+Q
a [JEE (Main) 2021] 1 1
y
 q 2l 2  3  q 2l  3
2Q −Q (c) x =  2 
 (d) x =  

(a) ( xˆ + yˆ + ˆz ) (b) ( xˆ + yˆ + ˆz )  2πε 0 m g   2πε 0 mg 
3 3πε 0 a 2 3 3πε 0 a 2
142. What will be the magnitude of electric field at point O as
− 2Q Q shown in figure? Each side of the figure is l and
(c) ( xˆ + yˆ + ˆz ) (d) ( xˆ + yˆ + ˆz )
3 3 πε 0 a 2 3 3πε 0 a 2 perpendicular to each other
136. An electron with kinetic energy K1 enters between parallel A(–q) C l D
(+q)
plates of a capacitor at an angle ' α ' with the plates. It leaves (2q)
l l
the plates at angle ' β ' with kinetic energy K 2 . Then the
(+q) O
ratio of kinetic energies K1 : K2 will be B G (2q)
l l
[JEE (Main) 2021]
l l
sin 2 β cos β
(a) (b) (2q) l (q)
cos 2 α cos α (–q)
2 E F H [JEE (Main) 2021]
cos β cos β
(c) (d)
sin α cos 2 α (a)
q
(b)
1 q
(2 2 − 1)
137. If λ1 and λ2 are the wavelengths of the third member of 4πε 0 (2l )2 4πε 0 (2l 2 )
Lyman and first member of the Paschen series respectively, 1 q 1 2q
(c) (d) ( 2)
then the value of λ1 : λ2 is [JEE (Main) 2021] 4πε 0 l 2 4πε 0 2l 2
(a) 1 : 3 (b) 7 : 135 143. Match List I with List II
(c) 7 : 108 (d) 1 : 9 List – I List – II
138. Find out the surface charge density at the intersection of
(A) Capacitance, C (i) M 1 L1 T − 3 A − 1
point x = 3 m plane and x- axis, in the region of uniform
line charge of 8 nC/ m lying along the z-axis in free space. (B) Permittivity of free space, (ii) M − 1 L− 3 T 4 A 2
[JEE (Main) 2021] ε0
(a) 47.88 C / m (b) 0.424 nC m −2
(C) Permeability of free (iii) M − 1 L− 2 T 4 A 2
(c) 0.07 nC m −2 (d) 4.0 nCm−2 space, µ0
139. A certain charge Q is divided into two parts q and (Q − q ).
(D) Electric field, E (iv) M 1 L1 T − 2 A − 2
How should the charges Q and q be divided so that q
[JEE (Main) 2021]
and (Q − q ) placed at a certain distance apart experience
(a) (A) → (iv), (B) → (ii), (C) → (iii), (D) → (i)
maximum electrostatic repulsion [JEE (Main) 2021]
(b) (A) → (iii), (B) → (iv), (C) → (ii), (D) → (i)
q
(a) Q = 2q (b) Q = (c) (A) → (iii), (B) → (ii), (C) → (iv), (D) → (i)
2
(c) Q = 4q (d) Q = 3 q (d) (A) → (iv), (B) → (iii), (C) → (ii), (D) → (i)
Chapter 18 : Electrostatics Compact Study Material Page 181

144. Calculate the amount of charge on capacitor of 4 µF . The 147. Figure shows a rod AB, which is bent in a 120° circular arc
internal resistance of battery is 1 Ω of radius R. A charge (− Q ) is uniformly distributed over rod

2 µF AB. What is the electric field E at the centre of curvature O
4µF
6Ω y
A

5V 2 µF
O 60° 120° x
60°
4Ω
[JEE (Main) 2021] R
B
(a) 4 µC (b) 8 µC [JEE (Main) 2021]

(c) 16 µC (d) Zero 3 3Q ˆ 3 3Q

(a) (i ) (b) (−ˆi )
8π 2ε 0 R 2 8π 2ε 0 R 2
145. A uniformly charged disc of radius R having surface charge
density σ is placed in the xy-plane with its center at the 3 3 ˆ 3 3Q ˆ
(c) (i ) (d) (i )
origin. Find the electric field intensity along the z-axis at a 8πε 0 R 2 16 π 2ε 0 R 2
distance Z from origin [JEE (Main) 2021] 148. Choose the incorrect statement
(A) The electric lines of force entering into a Gaussian
2ε 0  1 
(a) E = + Z surface provide negative flux
 1
σ (Z 2 + R 2 ) 2 
  (B) A charge 'q' is placed at the centre of a cube. The flux
through all the faces will be the same
 Z  (C) In a uniform electric field net flux through a closed
(b) E =
σ 1 + 
2ε 0  2
1 
2 2 Gaussian surface containing no net charge, is zero
 (Z + R ) 
(D) When electric field is parallel to a Gaussian surface, it
  provides a finite non-zero flux
σ 1 − Z  Choose the most appropriate answer from the options given
(c) E=
2ε 0  2 2 
1
 ( Z 2
+ R )  below [JEE (Main) 2021]
(a) (B) and (D) only (b) (C) and (D) only
σ  1 1  (c) (A) and (C) only (d) (D) only
(d) E =  + 
2ε 0  (Z 2 + R 2 ) Z 2 

146. Three capacitors C1 = 2 µF, C2 = 6 µF and C3 = 12 µF are Numerical Questions :

connected as shown in figure. Find the ratio of the charges 149. A 60 pF capacitor is fully charged by a 20 V supply. It is
on capacitors C1 , C2 and C3 respectively then disconnected from the supply and is connected to
another uncharged 60 pF capacitor in parallel. The
D
electrostatic energy that is lost in this process by the time the
A C2 C3 B charge is redistributed between them is (in nJ )
[JEE (Main) 2020]

I 150. A 5µ F capacitor is charged fully by a 220 V supply. It is

C1
then disconnected from the supply and is connected in
series to another uncharged 2.5 µ F capacitor. If the energy
V [JEE (Main) 2021]
X
(a) 3 : 4 : 4 (b) 2 : 3 : 3 change during the charge redistribution is J then value
100
(c) 2 : 1 : 1 (d) 1 : 2 : 2 of X to the nearest integer is [JEE (Main) 2020]

CRITICAL QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 a 2 c 3 d 4 b 5 d 6 c 7 b 8 b 9 d 10 b

11 b 12 c 13 a 14 c 15 d 16 c 17 d 18 b 19 d 20 a

21 d 22 b 23 b 24 d 25 a 26 a 27 a 28 d 29 a 30 b

31 b 32 b 33 b 34 b 35 d 36 c 37 d 38 b 39 c 40 b
Page 182 Compact Study Material Chapter 18 : Electrostatics

41 b 42 b 43 d 44 c 45 b 46 a 47 c 48 a 49 a 50 d

51 a 52 b 53 b 54 d 55 c 56 bd 57 a 58 a 59 d 60 a

61 c 62 b 63 c 64 b 65 a 66 b 67 b 68 c 69 a 70 b

71 b 72 b 73 d 74 c 75 a 76 b 77 d 78 ba 79 a 80 c

81 b 82 d 83 c 84 d 85 b 86 b 87 d 88 a 89 b 90 b

91 b 92 b

PAST YEAR QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 d 2 b 3 a 4 d 5 a 6 a 7 c 8 b 9 a 10 a

11 d 12 b 13 c 14 c 15 d 16 d 17 c 18 c 19 a 20 b

21 c 22 c 23 b 24 d 25 c 26 b 27 c 28 d 29 d 30 d

31 d 32 d 33 a 34 a 35 b 36 b 37 d 38 a 39 c 40 d

41 c 42 c 43 b 44 d 45 a 46 d 47 b 48 d 49 a 50 d

51 c 52 b 53 b 54 b 55 d 56 a 57 d 58 c 59 a 60 b

61 c 62 a 63 d 64 a 65 a 66 d 67 a 68 b 69 b 70 b

71 a 72 b 73 b 74 c 75 c 76 a 77 d 78 c 79 c 80 d

81 c 82 d 83 a 84 d 85 b 86 c 87 c 88 d 89 a 90 c

91 c 92 d 93 d 94 d 95 b 96 d 97 b 98 a 99 d 100 c

101 b 102 c 103 c 104 c 105 c 106 b 107 a 108 d 109 d 110 d

111 a 112 d 113 c 114 c 115 a 116 b 117 d 118 a 119 a 120 b

121 c 122 b 123 d 124 d 125 c 126 a 127 c 128 c 129 d 130 c

131 b 132 d 133 c 134 a 135 c 136 d 137 b 138 b 139 a 140 a

141 d 142 b 143 c 144 b 145 c 146 d 147 a 148 d 149 6 150 4

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER
IMPORTANT POINTS
19 Current Electricity
 Macroscopic form of Ohm’s law is R =
V
i
, while it’s
NAx d
 Free electron density in a metal is given by n =
A microscopic form is J = σ E .
where NA = Avogadro’s number, x = number of free electrons
 After stretching if length increases by n times then resistance
per atom, d=density of metal and A= Atomic weight of metal.
will increase by n2 times i.e. R 2 = n 2 R1 . Similarly if radius be
 The drift velocity of electrons is small because of the
1 1
frequent collisions suffered by electrons. reduced to times then area of cross-section decreases 2
n n
 The small value of drift velocity produces a large amount of times so the resistance becomes n4 times i.e. R 2 = n 4 R1 .
electric current, due to the presence of extremely large number
of free electrons in a conductor.  After stretching if length of a conductor increases by x%
then resistance will increase by 2x % (valid only if x < 10%)
The propagation of current is almost at the speed of light
and involves electromagnetic process. It is due to this reason  Decoration of lights in festivals is an example of series
that the electric bulb glows immediately when switch is on. grouping whereas all household appliances are connected in
parallel grouping.
 Human body, though has a large resistance of the order of
kΩ (say 10 kΩ), is very sensitive to minute currents even as low as  Using n conductors of equal resistance, the number of
a few mA. Electrocution, excites and disorders the nervous system possible combinations is 2n – 1.
of the body and hence one fails to control the activity of the body.  If the resistances of n conductors are totally different, then the
number of possible combinations will be 2n.
 dc flows uniformly throughout the cross-section of
conductor while ac mainly flows through the outer surface area  If n identical resistances are first connected in series and
of the conductor. This is known as skin effect. then in parallel, the ratio of the equivalent resistance is given by
Rs n 2
 It is worth noting that electric field inside a charged = .
Rp 1
conductor is zero, but it is non zero inside a current carrying
V  If a wire of resistance R is cut in n equal parts and then
conductor and is given by E = where V = potential
l these parts are collected to form a bundle, then equivalent
difference across the conductor and l = length of the conductor. R
resistance of combination will be .
Electric field out side the current carrying conductor is zero. n2
+ + + + + + l  If equivalent resistance of R1 and R2 in series and parallel
+ – 1
Ein = 0 Ein = V/l be Rs and Rp respectively then R1 = Rs + Rs2 − 4 Rs Rp  and
2  
+ + + + + +
1
R2 = Rs − Rs2 − 4 Rs Rp  .
1 2  
 For a given conductor JA = i = constant so that J ∝
A
 If a skeleton cube is made with 12 equal resistances each
i.e., J1 A1 = J2 A2 ; this is called equation of continuity
having resistance R then the net resistance across
i H G
J1 J2
i E
F
A1 A2
D
 In the absence of electric field, the paths of electrons C
between successive collisions are straight lines while in presence A B
of electric field the paths are generally curved.
5
 In the absence of radiation loss, the time in which a fuse will melt The longest diagonal (EC or AG) = R
6
does not depends on it’s length but varies with radius as t ∝ r 4 .
3
 If length (l) and mass (m) of a conducting wire is given then The diagonal of face (e.g. AC, ED, ....) = R
4
l2 7
R∝ . A side (e.g. AB, BC.....) = R
m 12
Page 184 Compact Study Material Chapter 19 : Current Electricity

 Resistance of a conducting body is not unique but depends Actually current i = E /(R + r) is maximum (= E/r) when R
on it’s length and area of cross-section i.e. how the potential = min = 0 with PL = ( E / r)2 × 0 = 0 min . While power
difference is applied. See the following figures
consumed by the load E R/(R + r) is maximum (= E2/4r) when
2 2

R = r and i = ( E / 2r ) ≠ max(= E / r ).
c
c
 Emf is independent of the resistance of the circuit and
depends upon the nature of electrolyte of the cell while potential
ρ b
ρ b difference depends upon the resistance between the two points
of the circuit and current flowing through the circuit.
a
a
 Whenever a cell or battery is present in a branch there must
Length = a Length = b be some resistance (internal or external or both) present in that
Area of cross-section = b × c Area of cross-section = a × c branch. In practical situation it always happens because we can
never have an ideal cell or battery with zero resistance.
 a   b 
Resistance R = ρ   Resistance R = ρ    In series grouping of identical cells if one cell is wrongly
b×c a×c
connected then it will cancel out the effect of two cells e.g. If in
 Some standard results for equivalent resistance the combination of n identical cells (each having emf E and
R1 R2 internal resistance r) if x cells are wrongly connected then
equivalent emf Eeq = (n − 2 x ) E and equivalent internal
A B resistance req = nr .
R5
 Graphical view of open circuit and closed circuit of a cell.
V
R3 R4 Vmax =E; i = 0
R R (R + R4 ) + (R1 + R2 )R3 R4 + R5 (R1 + R2 ) (R3 + R4 )
RAB = 1 2 3
R5 (R1 + R2 + R3 + R4 ) + (R1 + R3 )(R2 + R4 )

R1 R2
imax =E/r ; V = 0 i

A B  If n identical cells are connected in a loop in order, then

R3 emf between any two points is zero.
E, r

R2 R1 E, r E, r

2 R1 R2 + R3 (R1 + R2 ) Close
RAB = l
2 R3 + R1 + R2
E, r o
R1 R1 R1 R1 E, r
A
n cells
R3 R3 R3 R3 →∞  In parallel grouping of two identical cells having no internal
resistance R R
B
R2 R2 R2 R2
E E
1 1 1/ 2
RAB =
2 2
[
(R1 + R2 ) + (R1 + R2 )2 + 4 R3 (R1 + R2 ) ]
E E
R1 R1 R1 R1
A E eq = E E eq = 0

 When two cells of different emf and no internal resistance

R2 R2 R2 →∞
are connected in parallel then equivalent emf is indeterminate,
B
note that connecting a wire with a cell with no resistance is
equivalent to short circuiting. Therefore the total current that will
1   R  be flowing will be infinity.
RAB = R1 1 + 1 + 4  2   R
2   R1  

 It is a common misconception that “current in the circuit E1
will be maximum when power consumed by the load is
maximum.” E2
Chapter 19 : Current Electricity Compact Study Material Page 185

 In the parallel combination of non-identical cells if they are  Different bulbs

connected with reversed polarity as shown then equivalent emf
25W 100W 1000W
i1 E1,r1 220V 220V 220V

i i2 E2, r2

⇒ Resistance R25 > R100 > R1000

R
⇒ Thickness of filament t1000 > t100 > t25
E1r2 − E2r1 ⇒ Brightness B1000 > B100 > B25
Eeq =
r1 + r2
 Time taken by heater to raise the temperature by ∆θ of m
 Wheatstone bridge is most sensitive if all the arms of bridge 4180 ( or 4200) m ∆θ
have equal resistances i.e. P = Q = R = S kg (or m litre) water is given by t =
p
 In Wheatstone bridge to avoid inductive effects the battery
 Necessary series resistance to glow a bulb, if VApplied > VRated
key should be pressed first and the galvanometer key
afterwards. V − VRated 
R =  Applied  × VR
 (PR = Rated power of bulb)
 PR 
 If the temperature of the conductor placed in the right gap
of metre bridge is increased, then the balancing length decreases  Efficiency of the source of emf : It is the ratio of the power
and the jockey moves towards left. dissipated in the external resistance of the circuit to the power
drawn out of the source of emf.
 The measurement of resistance by Wheatstone bridge is not
affected by the internal resistance of the cell. Output power P
η= = o
Input power P
 In case of zero deflection in the galvanometer current flows i
in the primary circuit of the potentiometer, not in the P
p
galvanometer circuit.  = n 2 , i.e., P = n 2 P
P p s
s
 A potentiometer can act as an ideal voltmeter.
i.e., power consumed by a n equal resistors is parallel is n2 times
 When some potential difference is applied across the that of power consumed in series if V remains same.
conductor then collision of free electrons with ions of the lattice
 If the source is ideal, i.e., r = 0, V ' = V = E and so P ' = P ,
result’s in conversion of electrical energy into heat energy
i.e., there will be no change in the brightness of the bulb if the
 If a heating coil of resistance R, (length l) consumes power source is ideal.
P, when voltage V is applied to it, then by keeping V constant if
it is cut in n equal parts then resistance of each part will be R/n  Heat required to raise the temperature of a body of mass m
1 and specific heat S by temperature ∆T is
and from Pconsumed ∝ ,
R H = ms ∆T
power consumed by each part P' = nP . Heat required to change the state of ‘m’ g of a substance at
its melting or boiling point is H = m L
 The maximum current that can pass through the fuse wire
without melting it is called safe current. Heat conducted per sec through an area A is given by :
dH dT
 The safe current i ∝ r 3 / 2 = kA
dt dx
where r = radius of the wire  In series a device of higher power rating consumes less
or i ∝ A 3/4
[∵ A ∝ r ]
2 power.

Safe current is independent of the length of the wire.  Consider that n bulbs are connected in series across V volt
supply. If one bulb gets fused and (n–1) bulbs are again
 If VApplied < VRated then % drop in output power of electrical connected in series across same supply, the illumination will be
(PR − Pconsumed ) more with (n–1) bulbs than n bulbs but risk of fusing of bulbs
device = × 100
PR will increases.
Page 186 Compact Study Material Chapter 19 : Current Electricity

 When a heavy current appliance such us motor, heater or 3. A cylindrical tube of length l has inner radius a while outer
geyser is switched on, it will draw a heavy current from the b. The ratio of resistance of tube between its ends and its
source so that terminal voltage of source decreases. Hence inner and outer surface is
power consumed by the bulb decreases, so the light of bulb L log e b /a
(a) (b)
becomes less. π (b − a 2 )
2
2π L

r 2L2 1 L
(c) (d)

Heater
2 2b π ab
(b − a )log e
a
~
K 4. Two identical cells with emf E and internal resistance r are
connected across a resistance R in (a) series (b) parallel. If
 If ρ is the density of the material deposited and A is the load R is adjusted in both cases so that power transfer is
area of deposition then the thickness (d) of the layer of the maximum in both cases, then ratio of power output of load
m Zi t will be
material deposited in electroplating process is d = = ;
ρA ρA (a) 1: 2 (b) 2:1
(c) 1: 3 (d) 1 : 1
where m = deposited mass, Z = electro chemical equivalent,
5. In the given circuit, the resistance between points P and Q is
i = electric current.
10 Ω 10 Ω
 Charging current for a secondary cell
10 Ω
e.m.f. of charger − e.m.f. of cell
=
Total resistance of the circuit P
5Ω 5Ω Q
 Efficiency of a cell is given by 10 Ω

R
η= 10 Ω
r+R 10 Ω

where R is external resistance and r is internal resistance. (a) 25 Ω (b) 10Ω

 The efficiency of cell is 50% when the power dissipated in (c) 30 Ω (d) 5 Ω
the external circuit is maximum. 6. At t = 0, switch S is closed. The charge on the capacitor is
varying with time is Q = Q0 (1 − e −α t ) . Then α is
 Thermo couple can be compared to a heat engine. It
absorbs heat at the junction (source), converts heat into electric R1 = 0.5 kΩ
energy (which appears as the circulating electric current) and
rejects the remaining heat to cold junction (sink).

+ R2 = 0.5 kΩ
V = 24 V − C = 4 µF

Critical Questions
1. In a copper wire at room temperature 27°C, the number
density of charge carriers is n = 8.5 × 10 2 m − 3 . Resistivity of
(a) 10 − 3 (b) 10 6
copper is ρ = 1.7 × 10 − 8 Ω -m and Boltzmann constant
(c) 10 9
(d) 10 3
k B = 1.38 × 10 − 23 J/K. Mean free path for electrons is
7. When two identical batteries of internal resistance 1Ω each,
(a) 25 Å (b) 30 Å are connected in series across a resistor R, the rate of heat
(c) 25 nm (d) 30 nm produced in R is P1 . When the same batteries are connected
2. A potential difference of 30V is applied between ends of a
P1
conductor of length 100m and resistance 0.5 Ω . the total in parallel across R, the rate of heat produced is .
2.25
drift linear momentum of electrons is Then, the value of R is
(a) 3.4 × 10 −10 kg m/s (b) 3.4 × 10 −8 kg m/s (a) 2Ω (b) 3Ω
(c) 3.4 × 10 −12 kg m/s (d) 3.4 × 10 −13 kg m/s (c) 4Ω (d) 5 Ω
Chapter 19 : Current Electricity Compact Study Material Page 187

8. If switch is closed at t = 0, then the time at which reading of 12. For the given potentiometer experiment, the deflection of
both voltmeters will be equal galvanometer increases as we move jockey from A to B and
no null point is obtained. Then, to obtain the null point
V1

t=0
C
A B
2R

V
(a) at t = 2 RC (b) At t = 3 RC (a) We connect a high resistance in series with
galvanometer
(c) at t = RC log 2 (d) At all times
(b) We connect a low resistance in parallel with
9. For the given figure, if current in R3 is i, then current in R4 galvanometer
(c) We increase the rheostat’s resistance
is
R2 = 3 Ω (d) We change (reverse) the polarity of potentiometer’s
i2
driver cell

R1 = Ω 13. In a potentiometer for determining emf ei of a cell of

negligible internal resistance, a high resistance R2 is
i3 R3 = 6 Ω
connected in series with cell as shown in the figure.
When R2 increases
R4 = 12 Ω

(a) 2i (b) i
(c) i/ 2 (d) Cannot be determined

10. Potential difference between points C and E is

(a) Balance point shifts towards B
4A C 4V B 2A
(b) Balance point shifts towards A
D 2Ω 3Ω A
10 V 2Ω (c) Balance point is obtained at same position C
(d) Balance point is not obtained at any point on wire AB
1Ω 5Ω
14. For the given circuits, galvanometer shows no deflection
when switches S1 and S2 are closed.
2V 3A
E R2
3Ω 9Ω
4Ω
+
(a) 1V (b) 2V G 3V −

(c) 5V (d) 0 V
R1 6Ω 8Ω 16 Ω
11. To avoid end correction in a meter bridge,
(a) Readings are taken such that null point is obtained S2
+ −
G
between 35 cm to 65 cm of wire length S1
9V
(b) All connections are made properly tight
(c) The
he value of unknown resistance is found by putting it If R2 = kR1 , then the value of k is
in left and right gaps and then average value is taken (a) 4 (b) 6
(d) Ends of resistance wire are clamped properly (c) 8 (d) 12
Page 188 Compact Study Material Chapter 19 : Current Electricity

15. For the given potentiometer circuit, potential gradient is 18. A battery of emf 1.4 V and internal resistance 2 Ω is
0.025 V/m and the ammeter reading is 0.1 A. connected to a 100 Ω resistor through an ammeter.
am The
Now,
ow, when terminals 1 and 2 are connected, balance point
resistance of the ammeter is 4/3 Ω. A voltmeter is also
is obtained at 40 cm also when terminals 1 and 3 are
connected to find the potential difference across the resistor.
connected, balance point is obtained at 100 cm. If
i. If voltmeter reads 1.10 V , then error in reading is
3 R = kX , then the value of will be
0.23 V
ii. Voltmeter reads 1.33 V
iii. If ammeter reads 0.02 A, then resistance of voltmeter is
200 Ω
iv. If voltmeter is of in finite resistance, then ammeter reads
0.05 A
Choose the correct option.
(a) i, ii (b) ii, iii
(c) iii, iv (d) i, iv
19. For the circuit, V1 and V2 are two voltmeters having
resistance 6000 Ω and 4000 Ω, respectively emf of battery is
(a) 1 (b) 2
250 V, having negligible resistance. Then,
(c) 3 (d) 4
4000 Ω 6000 Ω
16. Consider given network of resistances. If equivalent
resistance of circuit is nR then, then t value of n may be
R R/2 R/4 S

R/2
∞
A R R R/2 R/2 R/2 R/4 R/4 R/4 6000 Ω 4000 Ω

R R/2 R/4
1 E = 250 V
(a) 1 (b)
2
V1
(c) 2 (d) 3 (i) When switch S is open, =1
V2
17. A uniform wire of resistance R is bent in the form of a ring.
V1
Four points A, B, C and D exist on the ring as shown in (ii) When switch S is open, = 1.5
V2
figure.
A battery of emf E may be connected across the ring in two V1
(iii) When switch S is closed, =1
ways: V2
Case I: Battery is connected between B and D V1
(iv) When switch S is closed, = 1.5
Case II: Battery is connected between A and B V2
Then, choose the correct option.
Choose the correct option.
i. In each case same current flows through the battery.
(a) i, ii (b) ii, iii
ii. In case I more current is drawn from the battery.
(c) iii, iv (d) i, iv
iii. In case II more current is drawn from
om the battery.
iv. In case I resistance is more than in case II. 20. ea of cross-section
A copper wire having area cross 0.5 mm 2 and
C length 0.1m,, initially at 25°C and is insulated from the
surroundings.
i. Wire will melt after sometime.
ii. Wire will not melt or heat will be dissipated in
atmosphere.
B D
iii. If length of wire is increased,
increas it will require more time to
melt.
iv. If length of wire is increased, it melts in same time or
before.
A Choose the correct option.
(a) i, ii (b) ii, iii
(a) i, ii (b) ii, iii
(c) iii, iv (d) i, iv (c) iii, iv (d) i, iv
Chapter 19 : Current Electricity Compact Study Material Page 189

21. A wire of cross-section area A, length L1, resistivity ρ1 and 26. Two wires each of radius of cross section r but of different
materials are connected together end to end (in series). If
temperature coefficient of resistivity α1 is connected to a
the densities of charge carriers in the two wires are in the
second wire of length L2, resistivity ρ2 , temperature ratio 1 : 4 , the drift velocity of electrons in the two wires will
coefficient of resistivity α2 and the same area A, so that wire be in the ratio.
carries same current. Total resistance R is independent of (a) 1: 2 (b) 2 : 1
temperature for small temperature change if (Thermal (c) 4 :1 (d) 1 : 4
expansion effect is negligible)
27. In a wire of cross-section radius r, free electrons travel with
(a) α1 = −α 2 (b) ρ1 L1α1 + ρ 2 L2α 2 = 0 drift velocity v when a current I flow through the wire. What
(c) L1α1 + L2α 2 = 0 (d) None is the current in another wire of half the radius and of the
same material when the drift velocity is 2v?
22. In order to increase the resistance of a given wire of uniform
cross section to four times its value, a fraction of its length is (a) 2I (b) I
3 (c) I /2 (d) I /4
stretched uniformly till the full length of the wire becomes
2
28. Read the following statements carefully:
times the original length what is the value of this fraction
Y: The resistivity of a semiconductor decreases with
1 1
(a) (b) increases of temperature.
4 8
Z: In a conducting solid, the rate of collision between free
1 1 electrons and ions increases with increase of temperature.
(c) (d)
16 6
Select the correct statement from the following
23. A conductor with rectangular cross section has dimensions
(a) Y is true but Z is false
(a × 2 a × 4 a ) as shown in figure. Resistance across AB is x,
(b) Y is false but Z is true
across CD is y and across EF is z. Then
(c) Both Y and Z are true
C F
(d) Y is true and Z is the correct reason for Y
29. A piece of copper and another of germanium are cooled
from room temperature to 80K. The resistance of
2a
(a) Each of them increases
A
4a (b) Each of them decreases
B
a (c) Copper increases and germanium decreases
(d) Copper decrease and germanium increases
E 30. An insulating pipe of cross-section area ‘A’ contains an
D electrolyte which has two types of ions → their charges
(a) x=y=z (b) x>y>z being −e and +2e. A potential difference applied between
the ends of the pipe result in the drifting of the two types of
(c) y>z>x (d) x>z>y
ions, having drift speed = v − (− ve ion) and v / 4(+ ve ion) .
24. A brass disc and a carbon disc of same radius are assembled
Both ions have the same number per unit volume = n . The
alternatively to make a cylindrical conductor. The resistance
current flowing through the pipe is
of the cylinder is independent of the temperature. The ratio
of thickness of the brass disc to that of the carbon disc is [ α (a) nev A /2 (b) nev A/4
is temperature coefficient of resistance and Neglect linear (c) 5 nev A/2 (d) 3 nev A/2
expansion]
31. Current density in a cylindrical wire of radius R is given as
α C ρC αC ρB
(a) (b)  x  R
α B ρB α B ρC  J 0  − 1  for 0 ≤ x <
 R  2
J= .
α B ρC α B ρB  J x R
(c) (d)  0 for ≤x≤R
αC ρB α C ρC R 2

25. A current of (2.5 ± 0.05) A flows through a wire and The current flowing in the wire is

develops a potential difference of (10 ± 0.1) volts. Resistance 7 1

(a) π J0 R 2 (b) π J0 R 2
of the wire in ohm, is 24 6
(a) 4 ± 0.12 (b) 4 ± 0.04 7 5
(c) π J0 R2 (d) π J0 R2
(c) 4 ± 0.08 (d) 4 ± 0.02 12 12
Page 190 Compact Study Material Chapter 19 : Current Electricity

32. A current I flows through a uniform wire of diameter d when 37. A rectangular carbon block has dimensions
the mean electron drift velocity is V. The same current will 1.0 cm × 1.0 cm × 50 cm . Resistances are measured, first
flow through a wire of diameter d/2 made of the same across two square ends and then across two rectangular
material if the mean drift velocity of the electron is ends, respectively. If resistivity of carbon is 3.5 × 10 −5 Ω-m,
(a) v/4 (b) v /2
then values of measured resistances respectively are
(c) 2v (d) 4 v
33. The current in a metallic conductor is plotted against voltage
at two different temperatures T1 and T2 . Which is correct
Current

T1
50 cm
T2
10 cm

1 cm
Voltage
35 15
(a) × 10−2 Ω , 7 × 10−5 Ω (b) 7 × 10−5 Ω , × 10−2 Ω
2 2
(a) T1 > T2 (b) T1 < T2
35 15
(c) × 10−4 Ω , 7 × 10−7 Ω (d) Ω , 7 × 10−2 Ω
(c) T1 = T2 (d) None 2 2
34. A uniform copper wire carries a current i ampere and has p 38. A storage battery is connected to a charger for charging with
carriers per metre3. The length of the wire is ℓ metres and a voltage of 12.5 Volts. The internal resistance of the storage
its cross-section area is s metre2. If the charge on a carrier is battery is 1Ω .When the charging current is
q coulombs, the drift velocity in ms − 1 is given by 0.5 A, the emf of the storage battery is:
(a) i /ℓ sq (b) i /psq (a) 13 Volts (b) 1.25 Volts
(c) 12 Volts (d) 11.5 Volts
(c) psq /i (d) i/psℓ q
 39. The terminal voltage across a battery of emf E can be
35. In the presence of an applied electric field E in a metallic (a) 0 (b) > E
conductor. (c) < E (d) All of above

(a) The electrons move in the direction of E 40. In order to determine the e.m.f of a storage battery it was
 connected in series with a standard cell in a certain circuit
(b) The electrons move in a direction opposite to E
and a current I1 was obtained. When the battery is
(c) The electrons may move in any direction randomly,
 connected to the same circuit opposite to the standard cell a
but slowly drift in the direction of E current I 2 flow in the external circuit from the positive pole
(d) The electrons move randomly but slowly drift in a of the storage battery was obtained. What is the e.m.f E1 of

direction opposite to E the storage battery? The e.m.f of the standard cell is E2 .
36. A wire has a non-uniform cross-section as shown in figure. A
I1 + I 2 I1 + I 2
steady current flows through it. The drift speed of electrons (a) E1 = E2 (b) E1 = E2
I1 − I 2 I 2 − I1
at points P and Q is vP and vQ .
I1 − I 2 I 2 − I1
(c) E1 = E2 (d) E1 = E2
I1 + I 2 I1 + I 2
41. One end of a Nichrome wire of length 2 L and cross-
P Q sectional area A is attached to an end of another Nichrome
wire of length L and cross-sectional area 2 A. If the free end
of the longer wire is at an electric potential of 8.0 volts, and
(a) v P = vQ the free end of the shorter wire is at an electric potential of
1.0 volt, the potential at the junction of the two wires is
(b) v P < vQ
equal to
(c) v P > vQ (a) 2.4 V (b) 3.2V
(d) Data insufficient (c) 4.5 V (d) 5.6 V
Chapter 19 : Current Electricity Compact Study Material Page 191

42. In the figure shown, battery 1 has emf = 6 V and internal 45. The diagram besides shows a circuit used in an experiment
resistance = 1 Ω . Battery 2 has emf = 2 V and internal to determine the emf and internal resistance of the cell C.
resistance = 3 Ω . The wires have negligible resistance. A graph was plotted of the potential difference V between
What is the potential difference across the terminals of the terminals of the cell against the current I, which was
battery 2? varied by adjusting the rheostat. The graph is shown on the
right; x and y are the intercepts of the graph with the axes as
shown. What is the internal resistance of the cell

C V (V)

V y

(a) 4V (b) 1.5 V I (A)

A x
(c) 5V (d) 0.5 V
(a) x (b) y
43. In which of the below cells, the potential difference between
the terminals of a cell exceeds its emf. (c) x /y (d) y/x

r 46. A cell of emf E has an internal resistance r and is connected

to rheostat. When resistance R of rheostat is changed correct
E i graph of potential
ntial difference across it is
(a)

r V V

(a) (b)
i E (b)

r R R

E V V
(c)

r (c) (d)

E (d) R R

(a) a (b) b
47. A circuit is comprised of eight identical batteries and a
(c) c (d) d resistor R=0.8 Ω . Each battery has an emf of 1.0 V and
44. Under what condition current passing through the resistance
resis internal resistance of 0.2Ω
0.2 . The voltage difference across
R can be increased by short circuiting the battery of emf E2 . any of the battery is
The internal resistances of the two batteries are r1 and r2
respectively.
E1 r1 E2 r2

R= 0.8 Ω

(a) E2r1 > E1 (R + r2 ) (b) E1r2 > E2 (R + r1 ) (a) 0.5 V (b) 1.0 V
(c) E2r2 > E1(R + r2 ) (d) E1r1 > E2 (R + r1 ) (c) 0V (d) 2V
Page 192 Compact Study Material Chapter 19 : Current Electricity

48. In the circuit shown, what is the potential difference VPQ ? 52. The resistance of all the wires between any two adjacent
dots is R. Then equivalent resistance between A and B as
Q
shown in figure is:
2Ω A

2V 4V 3Ω

1Ω 2Ω 1V i2 6Ω
9Ω
P
(a) +3 V (b) +2V
12Ω
(c) −2V (d) None
i
49. In the circuit shown in figure reading of voltmeter is V1 when B
only S1 is closed, reading of voltmeter is V2 when only S2 is i1 5Ω
closed. The reading of voltmeter is V3 when both S1 and S2
(a) 7/3 R (b) 7/6 R
are closed then
3R
(c) 14/8 R (d) None of these
R S1
53. In the box shown current i enters at H and leaves at C. If
(a) V2 > V1 > V3
6R i 2i i i i
iAB = , iDC = , iHA = , iGF = , iHE = . Choose the
(b) V3 > V2 > V1 6 3 2 6 6
S2
(c) V3 > V1 > V2 branch in which current is zero.
V
E B C
(d) V1 > V2 > V3

50. A 5 V battery with internal resistance 2Ω and a 2 V battery

A
D
with internal resistance 1Ω are connected to a 10Ω resistor
as shown in the figure. G
F
P2
H
E
i

5V 10 Ω 2V
(a) BG (b) FC
(c) ED (d) None
2Ω 1Ω
54. A resistor of resistance R is connected to a cell of internal
resistance 5Ω . The value of R is varied from 1Ω to 5Ω .
P1 The power consumed by R:
(a) Increases continuously
(b) Decreases continuously
The current in the 10Ω resistor is: (c) First decreases then increases
(a) 0.03 A P1 to P2 (b) 0.03 A P2 to P1 (d) First increases then decreases
55. Power generated across a uniform wire connected across a
(c) 0.27 A P1 to P2 (d) 0.27 A P2 to P1
supply is H. If the wire is cut into n equal parts and all the
parts are connected in parallel across the same supply, the
51. In the following circuit, 5 Ω resistor develops 45 J/s due to
total power generated in the wire is
current flowing through it. The power developed per second
across 12 Ω resistor is H
(a) (b) n 2 H
i2 9Ω 6Ω n2
H
(c) nH (d)
12Ω n
56. A constant voltage is applied between the two ends of a
i uniform metallic wire. Some heat is developed in it. The
heat developed is doubled if
i1 5Ω (a) Both the length and the radius of the wire are halved
(b) Both the length and the radius of the wire are doubled
(a) 16 W (b) 192W (c) The radius of the wire is doubled
(c) 36W (d) 64W (d) The length of the wire is doubled
Chapter 19 : Current Electricity Compact Study Material Page 193

57. When electric bulbs of same power, but different marked 65. Three 60 W light bulbs are mistakenly wired in series and
voltage are connected in series across the power line, their connected to a 120 V power supply. Assume the light bulbs
brightness will be are rated 40 Ω for single connection to 120 V, with the
(a) Proportional to their marked voltage mistaken connection, the power dissipated by each bulb is
(b) Inversely proportional to their marked voltage
(a) 6.7W (b) 13.3W
(c) Proportional to the square of their marked voltage
(d) Inversely proportional to the square of their marked Voltage (c) 20W (d) 40W
(e) The same for all of them 66. The ratio of powers dissipated respectively in R and 3 R, as
58. A wire when connected to 220V mains supply has power shown is
dissipation P1. Now the wire is cut into two equal pieces R
which are connected in parallel to the same supply. Power
dissipation in this case is P2. Then P2 : P1 is:
(a) 1 (b) 4 3R

(c) 2 (d) 3
59. Two bulbs rated (25 W − 220 V) and (100 W − 220 V) are
connected in series to a 440 V line. Which one is likely to fuse
2R
(a) 25 W bulb (b) 25 W bulb
(a) 9 (b) 27/4
(c) Both bulbs (d) None
(c) 4/9 (d) 4/27
60. Rate of dissipation of Joule’s heat in resistance per unit
volume is (symbols have usual meaning) 67. If in the circuit, power dissipation is 150 W then R is
(a) σE (b) σ J
R
(c) JE (d) None
61. The charge flowing through a resistance R varies with time
as Q = 2t − 8 t 2 . The total heat produced in the resistance is
2Ω
1
(for 0 ≤ t ≤ )
8
R R
(a) joules (b) joules
6 3
R
(c) joules (d) R joules
2 15 V

62. If the length of the filament of a heater is reduced by 10%,

(a) 2Ω (b) 6Ω
the power of the heater will
(a) Increase by about 9% (c) 5Ω (d) 4Ω
(b) Increase by about 11%
68. In the circuit shown, the resistances are given in ohms and
(c) Increase by about 19%
the battery is assumed ideal with emf equal to 3.0 volts The
(d) Decrease by about 10% resistor that dissipates the most power is
63. A heater A gives out 300W of heat when connected to a 200
V d.c. supply. A second heater B gives out 600 W when 50 Ω
connected to a 200V d.c. supply. If a series combination of
R1
the two heaters is connected to a 200 V d.c. supply the heat
R3 60 Ω R4 30 Ω
output will be
(a) 100W (b) 450W
R2 50 Ω
(c) 300W (d) 200W 3V
64. Two bulbs one of 200 volts, 60 watts and the other of
200 volts, 100 watts are connected in series to a 200 volt
supply. The power consumed will be (a) R1 (b) R2
(a) 37.5 watt (b) 160 watt
(c) 62.5 watt (d) 110 watt (c) R3 (d) R4
Page 194 Compact Study Material Chapter 19 : Current Electricity

69. What amount of heat will be generated in a coil of 72. A battery consists of a variable number n of identical cells
resistance R due to a charge q passing through it. If the having internal resistance connected in series. The terminals
current in the coil decreases to zero uniformly during a time of the battery are short circuited and the current I measured.
interval ∆ t Which one of the graph below shows the relationship
between I and n
4 q2R q2 R
(a) (b) ln
3 ∆t 2∆ t I/A I/A
2
2q R (2 ∆ t )
(c) (d) ln
3∆ t q2R (a) (b)

70. The variation of current (I) and voltage (V) is as shown in

figure. The variation of power P with current I is best shown
O n O n
by which of the following graph

I/A I/A
V

(c) (d)

I n
O n O

P P
I/A

(a) (b) (e)

I I O n

P 73. In previous problem, if the cell had been connected in

P
parallel (instead of in series) which of the above graphs
would have shown the relationship between total current I
and n
(c) (d) I/A I/A

I I
(a) (b)
71. If X, Y and Z in figure are identical lamps, which of the
following changes to the brightness of the lamps occur when
switch S is closed O n O n

I/A I/A

(c) (d)

S Z

X
O n O n

I/A
Y
(e)

(a) X stays the same, Y decreases

(b) X increases, Y decreases
(c) X increases, Y stays the same
O n
(d) X decreases, Y increases
Chapter 19 : Current Electricity Compact Study Material Page 195

74. n identical cells are joined in series with its two cells A and B 79. Resistances R1 and R2 each 60 Ω are connected in series as
in the loop with reversed polarities. EMF of each shell is E shown in figure. The Potential difference between A and B is
and internal resistance r. Potential difference across cell kept 120 volt. Then what will be the reading of voltmeter
A or B is (here n > 4 ) connected between the point C and D if resistance of
2E  1 voltmeter is 120 Ω .
(a) (b) 2E 1 − 
n  n
A B
4E  2
(c) (d) 2 E  1 − 
n  n
75. A wire of length L and 3 identical cells of negligible internal R1 R2
C
resistances are connected is series. Due to the current, the
temperature of the wire is raised by ∆ T in time t .N
V
number of similar cells is now connected in series with a
wire of the same material and cross section but of length (a) 48 V (b) 24 V
2 L . The temperature of the wire is raised by the same
(c) 40 V (d) None
amount ∆ T in the same time t . The value of N is:
80. In a galvanometer, the deflection becomes one half when
(a) 4 (b) 6 the galvanometer is shunted by a 20 Ω resistor. The
(c) 8 (d) 9
galvanometer resistance is
76. In the figure shown the power generated in y is maximum
20 Ω
when y = 5 Ω . Then R is
y
i/2

R G
10 V i i/2 Rg

2Ω (a) 5Ω (b) 10Ω

(c) 40 Ω (d) 20 Ω
(a) 2Ω (b) 6Ω 81. A galvanometer has a resistance of 20 Ω and reads full-
(c) 5Ω (d) 3Ω scale when 0.2 V is applied across it. To convert it into a
10 A ammeter, the galvanometer coil should have a
77. If an ammeter is to be used in place of a voltmeter then we
must connect with the ammeter a (a) 0.01Ω resistor connected across
(a) Low resistance in parallel (b) 0.02 Ω resistor connected across it
(b) High resistance in parallel
(c) 200 Ω resistor connected in series with it
(c) High resistance in series
(d) Low resistance in series (d) 2000 Ω resistor connected in series with it
78. When an ammeter of negligible internal resistance is inserted 82. A milliammeter of range 10 mA and resistance 9Ω is joined
in series with circuit it reads 1A. When the voltmeter of very
in a circuit as shown. The metre gives full scale deflection for
large resistance is connected across X it reads 1V. When the
current I when A and B are used as its terminals, i.e., current
point A and B are shorted by a conducting wire, the
enters at A and leaves at B (C is left isolated). The value of I
voltmeter measures 10 V across the battery. The internal
is
resistance of the battery is equal to 9 Ω, 10 mA

x y

0.1 Ω 0.9 Ω

A B C
12 V
(a) Zero (b) 0.5 Ω (a) 100mA (b) 900 mA
(c) 0.2Ω (d) 0.1Ω (c) 1A (d) 1.1 A
Page 196 Compact Study Material Chapter 19 : Current Electricity

83. A galvanometer coil has a resistance 90 Ω and full scale 6. The length of a given cylindrical wire is increased by 100 %.
deflection current 10mA. A 910 Ω resistance is connected Due to the consequent decrease in diameter the change in
the resistance of the wire will be [AIEEE 2003]
in series with the galvanometer to make a voltmeter. If the
least count of the voltmeter is 0.1 V, the number of divisions (a) 300 % (b) 200 %
on its scale is (c) 100 % (d) 50 %
(a) 90 (b) 91 7. Consider a thin square sheet of side L and thickness t, made
(c) 100 (d) None of a material of resistivity ρ . The resistance between two
opposite faces, shown by the shaded areas in the figure is
[IIT-JEE 2010]
Past Year Questions

1. Express which of the following setups can be used to verify

Ohm’s law [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003]
t

A L

(a) V (b) V
A (a) Directly proportional to L
(b) Directly proportional to t
(c) Independent of L
A V
(d) Independent of t
(c) (d) 8. By increasing the temperature, the specific resistance of a
conductor and a semiconductor [AIEEE 2002]
V A (a) Increases for both (b) Decreases for both
(c) Increases, decreases (d) Decreases, increases
2. If the ratio of the concentration of electron to that of holes in
7 7 9. A strip of copper and another of germanium are cooled
a semiconductor is and the ratio of current is , then from room temperature to 80 K. The resistance of
5 4
what is the ratio of their drift velocities [AIEEE 2006] [AIEEE 2003]

(a) 4 / 5 (b) 5 / 4 (a) Each of these increases

(c) 4 /7 (d) 5 / 8 (b) Each of these decreases

3. When 5 V potential difference is applied across a wire of (c) Copper strip increases and that of germanium decreases
length 0.1 m, the drift speed of electrons is 2 . 5 × 10 −4 ms −1 . (d) Copper strip decreases and that of germanium increases

If the electron density in the wire is 8 × 10 28 m −3 , the 10. The resistance of a conductor is 5 ohm at 50oC and 6 ohm
at 100oC. Its resistance at 0oC is [AIEEE 2002, 07]
resistivity of the material is close to [JEE (Main) 2015]
(a) 1 ohm (b) 2 ohm
(a) 1 . 6 × 10 −8 Ω m (b) 1 . 6 × 10 −7 Ω m
(c) 3 ohm (d) 4 ohm
(c) 1 . 6 × 10 −6 Ω m (d) 1 . 6 × 10 −5 Ω m
11. Two conductors have the same resistance at 0°C but their
4. If a wire is stretched to make it 0.1% longer, its resistance
will [AIEEE 2011] temperature coefficients of resistance are α1 and α2 . The

(a) Increase by 0.05% (b) Increase by 0.2% respective temperature coefficients of their series and
parallel combinations are nearly [AIEEE 2010]
(c) Decrease by 0.2% (d) Decrease by 0.05%
5. A material 'B' has twice the specific resistance of 'A'. A
α1 + α 2 α1 + α 2
(a) ,
circular wire made of 'B' has twice the diameter of a wire 2 2
made of 'A'. Then for the two wires to have the same α1 + α 2
(b) , α1 + α 2
l 2
resistance, the ratio B of their respective lengths must be
lA α1 + α 2
(c) α1 + α 2 ,
[AIEEE 2006] 2
(a) 1 / 2 (b) 1 / 4 α 1α 2
(d) α1 + α 2 ,
(c) 2 (d) 1 α1 + α 2
Chapter 19 : Current Electricity Compact Study Material Page 197

12. An infinite line charge of uniform electric charge density λ 17. A 2W carbon resistor is colour coded with green, black, red
lies along the axis of an electrically conducting infinite and brown respectively. The maximum current which can
cylindrical shell of radius R. At time t = 0 , the space inside be passed through this resistor is [JEE (Main) 2019]

the cylinder is filled with a material of permittivity ε and (a) 20 mA (b) 63mA
electrical conductivity σ . The electrical conduction in the (c) 0.4 mA (d) 100mA
material follows Ohm's law. Which one of the following 18. The Wheatstone bridge shown in figure here, gets balanced
graphs best describes the subsequency variation of the when the carbon resistor used as R1 has the colour code
magnitude of current density f (t ) at any point in the
(Orange, Red, and Brown). The resistors R2 and R4 are
material [JEE 2016]
80Ω and 40Ω , respectively.
j (t) j (t) Assuming that the colour code for the carbon resistors gives
(a) (b) their accurate values, the colour code for the carbon resistor,
used as R3 , would be [JEE (Main) 2019]
t t
(0,0) (0,0) R1 R2

j (t) G
j (t)
R3 R4
(c) (d)
(0,0) t t B
(0,0)
+ –
13. Space between two concentric conducting spheres of radii a
(a) Red, Green, Brown (b) Grey, Black, Brown
and b (b > a ) is filled with a medium of resistivity ρ . The
(c) Brown, Blue, Brown (d) Brown, Blue, Black
resistance between the two spheres will be 19. The charge on a capacitor plate in a circuit, as a function of
[JEE (Main) 2019] time, is shown in the figure
ρ 1 1 ρ 1 1 What is the value of current at t = 4 s [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a)  +  (b)  − 
4π  a b  2π  a b 
6
ρ 1 1 ρ 1 1
(c)  +  (d)  −  5
2π a b 4π a b
q (µc) 4
14. A resistance is shown in the figure. Its value and tolerance
are given respectively by [JEE (Main) 2019] 3
2
Red Orange t 8(sec)
0
2 4 6 8
(a) 2 µ A (b) 3 µ A
Violet Silver (c) Zero (d) 1 . 5 µ A
20. A 200 Ω resistor has a certain colour code. If one replaces
(a) 270KΩ, 5% (b) 27KΩ, 20%
the red colour by green in the code, the new resistance will
(c) 270KΩ,10% (d) 27KΩ, 10% be [JEE (Main) 2019]
15. Drift speed of electrons, when 1.5 A of current flows in a (a) 500 Ω (b) 400 Ω
copper wire of cross section 5mm 2 , is v. If the electron (c) 300 Ω (d) 100 Ω
density is 9 × 10 28 3
/ m the value of v in mm/s is close to 21. In a conductor, if the number of conduction electrons per
−19 unit volume is 8 . 5 × 10 28 m −3 and mean free time is 25 fs
(Take charge of electron to be = 1.6 × 10 C)
(femto second), it's approximate resistivity is
[JEE (Main) 2019]
(me = 9.1 × 10 −31 kg ) [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 0.2 (b) 3
(c) 2 (d) 0.02 (a) 10 −8 Ω m (b) 10 −7 Ω m
16. A carbon resistance has a following colour code. What is the (c) 10 −6 Ω m (d) 10 −5 Ω m
value of the resistance [JEE (Main) 2019] 22. A current of 5A Passes through a copper conductor
(resistivity = 1.7 × 10 −8 Ω m) of radius of cross-section 5mm
Find the mobility of the charges if their drift velocity is
GOY Golden 1.1 × 10 −3 m/ s [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 5.3MΩ ± 5% (b) 530KΩ ± 5% (a) 1.5 m 2 / Vs (b) 1.3 m 2 / Vs
(c) 64kΩ ± 10% (d) 6.4 MΩ ± 5% (c) 1.0 m 2 / Vs (d) 1.8 m 2 / Vs
Page 198 Compact Study Material Chapter 19 : Current Electricity

23. In an experiment, the resistance of a material is plotted as a 28. In a Wheat stone's bridge, three resistance P, Q and R are
function of temperature (in some range). As shown in the connected in the three arms and the fourth arm is formed by
figure, it is a straight line. two resistances S1 and S2 connected in parallel. The
condition for the bridge to be balanced will be [AIEEE 2006]
ln R(T) P R(S1 + S 2 ) P R(S1 + S 2 )
(a) = (b) =
Q S1 S 2 Q 2S1 S 2
P R P 2R
1/T2 (c) = (d) =
Q S1 + S2 Q S1 + S2
One may conclude that [JEE (Main) 2019] 29. The effective resistance between points P and Q of the
T02 / T 2 T 2
/ T02
electrical circuit shown in the figure is
(a) R(T ) = R0 e (b) R(T ) = R0 e [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002]
2R 2R
− T02 / T 2 − T 2 / T02
(c) R(T ) = R0e (d) R(T ) = R0 e
24. Six equal resistances are connected between points P, Q r 2R
r
and R as shown in the figure. Then the net resistance will be
maximum between [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004] P Q
2R
P
(a) P and Q 2R 2R
(a) 2 Rr /( R + r ) (b) 8 R (R + r) /(3 R + r)
(b) Q and R (c) 2r + 4 R (d) 5 R / 2 + 2r
30. In the circuit shown in the figure, the current through
(c) P and R
[IIT 1998]
3Ω 2Ω 2Ω
(d) Any two points Q R

25. The resistance of the series combination of two resistances is

9V 8Ω 8Ω 4Ω
S. When they are joined in parallel the total resistance is P.
If S = nP, then the minimum possible value of n is
[AIEEE 2004] 2Ω 2Ω 2Ω
(a) 4 (b) 3
(a) The 3Ω resistor is 0.50 A
(c) 2 (d) 1
(b) The 3Ω resistor is 0.25 A
26. In the given circuit, it is observed that the current I is
independent of the value of the resistance R6. Then the (c) The 4Ω resistor is 0.50 A
resistance values must satisfy [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001] (d) The 4Ω resistor is 0.25 A

R5 31. The current from the battery in circuit diagram shown is

[IIT 1989]
I 2Ω A 7Ω
R1 R R3
6
15V
(a) 1 A
R2 R4 6Ω 1Ω
0.5Ω
(b) 2 A

(a) R1 R2 R5 = R3 R4 R6 (c) 1.5 A

8Ω B 10Ω
(d) 3 A
1 1 1 1
(b) + = +
R5 R6 R1 + R2 R3 + R4 32. An electric current is passed through a circuit containing two
wires of the same material, connected in parallel. If the
(c) R1 R4 = R2 R3 lengths and radii of the wires are in the ratio of 4/3 and 2/3,
(d) R1 R3 = R2 R4 = R5 R6 then the ratio of the currents passing through the wire will be
[AIEEE 2004]
27. The current I drawn from the 5 volt source will be
(a) 3 (b) 1/3
10Ω [AIEEE 2006] (c) 8/9 (d) 2
33. The total current supplied to the circuit by the battery is
5Ω 10Ω 20Ω [AIEEE 2004]
(a) 0.5 A
2Ω
(a) 1 A 6V
(b) 0.67 A 10Ω 6Ω
i (b) 2 A 3Ω
(c) 0.17 A (c) 4 A
+ – 1.5Ω
(d) 0.33 A (d) 6 A
5 volt
Chapter 19 : Current Electricity Compact Study Material Page 199

34. In the circuit shown, the current in the 1Ω resistor is 41. In the figure shown, what is the current (in Ampere) drawn
6V 2Ω [JEE (Main) 2015] from the battery, you are given
P
R1 = 15Ω, R2 = 10 Ω, R3 = 20 Ω, R4 = 5 Ω, R5 = 25 Ω,
R6 = 30 Ω, E = 15 V
1Ω 9V R3

R1
3Ω Q 3Ω +
E R2 R4
(a) 1.3 A, from P to Q (b) 0 A –
(c) 0.13 A, from Q to P (d) 0.13 A, from P to Q
35. The current I in the circuit shown is
R6 R5 [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 20/3 (b) 13/24
2V
2Ω 2Ω (c) 7/18 (d) 9/32
2Ω
2V 2V 42. A wire of resistance R is bent to form a square ABCD as
I shown in the figure. The effective resistance between E and
(a) 1.33 A (b) Zero C is (E is mid-point of arm CD ) [JEE (Main) 2019]

(c) 2.00 A (d) 1.00 A 3

(a) R A B
36. 2V 2V 2V 4
(b) R
1
(c) R
1Ω 1Ω 1Ω
16
7 D C
(d) R E
64
2V 2V 2V 43. A metal wire of resistance 3 Ω is elongated to make a
In the above circuit the current in each resistance is uniform wire of double its previous length. This new wire is
[JEE (Main) 2017] now bent and the ends joined to make a circle. If two points
(a) 0 A (b) 1 A on this circle make an angle 60 ° at the centre, the
(c) 0.25 A (d) 0.5 A equivalent resistance between these two points will be
37. A set of ' n' equal resistors, of value ' R ' each, are connected [JEE (Main) 2019]
in series to a battery of emf ' E ' and internal resistance ' R ' . 5 12
The current drawn is 1. Now, the ' n' resistors are connected (a) Ω (b) Ω
2 5
in parallel to the same battery. Then the current drawn from
5 7
battery becomes 10.1 . The value of ' n' is (c) Ω (d) Ω
3 2
(a) 10 (b) 11
44. In the given circuit, with steady current, the potential drop
(c) 20 (d) 9
across the capacitor must be [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001]
38. A carbon resistor (47 ± 4.7) kΩ is to be marked with rings of
V R
different colours for its identification. The colour code
sequence will be (a) V
(a) Violet – Yellow – Orange – Silver V C
(b) V / 2
(b) Yellow – Violet – Orange – Silver
(c) Yellow – Green – Violet – Gold (c) V / 3 2V 2R
(d) Green – Orange – Violet – Gold (d) 2V / 3
39. Two batteries with e.m.f. of 12V and 13 V are connected
in parallel across a load resistor of 10Ω. The internal 45. A wire of length L and 3 identical cells of negligible internal
resistance of the two batteries are 1Ω and 2Ω respectively. resistances are connected in series. Due to current, the
The voltage across the load lies between [JEE (Main) 2018] temperature of the wire is raised by ∆ T in time t. A
(a) 11.4 V and 11.5 V (b) 11.7 V and 11.8 V number N of similar cells is now connected in series with a
(c) 11.6 V and 11.7 V (d) 11.5 V and 11.6 V wire of the same material and cross–section but of length 2
L. The temperature of the wire is raised by the same
40. A uniform metallic wire has resistance of 18 Ω and is bent
into an equilateral triangle. Then, the resistance between amount ∆ T in the same time t. The value of N is
any two vertices of the triangle is [JEE (Main) 2019] [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001]
(a) 4 Ω (b) 12Ω (a) 4 (b) 6
(c) 2Ω (d) 8Ω (c) 8 (d) 9
Page 200 Compact Study Material Chapter 19 : Current Electricity

46. A 5 V battery with internal resistance 2 Ω and a 2 V battery 50. In the circuit shown, the potential difference between A
with internal resistance 1 Ω are connected to a 10 Ω resistor and B is [JEE (Main) 2019]
as shown in the figure 1V
M 1Ω
P2

1Ω 2V 10Ω
5V 2V
10Ω A D C B
2Ω 1Ω
1Ω 3V
N
P1
(a) 1 V (b) 3 V
The current in the 10 Ω resistor is [AIEEE 2008]
(c) 6V (d) 2 V
(a) 0.03 A P1 to P2 (b) 0.03 A P2 to P1
(c) 0.27 A P1 to P2 (d) 0.27 A P2 to P1 51. In the given circuit diagram, the currents, I1 = −0.3 A,

47. An energy source will supply a constant current into the load I 4 = 0.8 A and I 5 = 0.4 A , are flowing as shown. The
if its internal resistance is [AIEEE 2005] currents I 2 , I 3 and I 6 , respectively, are
(a) Zero I6 Q [JEE (Main) 2019]
(b) Non-zero but less than the resistance of the load P
(c) Equal to the resistance of the load I3
(d) Very large as compared to the load resistance
48. Figure shows three resistor configurations R1, R2 and R3 I5 I2 I1
connected to 3V battery. If the power dissipated by the S I4 R
configuration R1, R2 and R3 is P1 , P2 and P3, respectively, (a) 1 . 1 A , 0 . 4 A , 0.4 A (b) − 0 . 4 A, 0 . 4 A , 1.1 A
then [IIT-JEE 2008] (c) 0 .4 A, 1 . 1 A , 0 .4 A, (d) 1 . 1 A , − 0 . 4 A, 0 . 4 A ,
52. When the switch S, in the circuit shown, is closed, then the
value of current i will be [JEE (Main) 2019]
1Ω
1Ω i1 C i2
1Ω 1Ω 10V
3V 20V 2Ω 4Ω
1Ω 3V i
1Ω 1Ω
1Ω 1Ω 1Ω

R2
R1
S

1Ω 1Ω 3V
V=0
(a) 3 A (b) 5 A
(c) 4 A (d) 2 A
1Ω 1Ω
53. In the given circuit the internal resistance of the 18 V cell is
negligible. If R1 = 400 Ω, R3 = 100 Ω and R4 = 500 Ω and
1Ω
the reading of an ideal voltmeter across R4 is 5 V , then the
R3 value of R2 will be [JEE (Main) 2019]
R3 R5

(a) P1 > P2 > P3 (b) P1 > P3 > P2

(c) P2 > P1 > P3 (d) P3 > P2 > P1
R1
49. Which of the following statements is false [JEE (Main) 2017]
R2
(a) Kirchhoff's second law represents energy conservation
(b) Wheatstone bridge is the most sensitive when all the
four resistance are of the same order of magnitude
(c) In a balanced Wheatstone bridge if the cell and the 18V

galvanometer are exchanged, the null point is disturbed (a) 450 Ω (b) 550 Ω
(d) A rheostat can be used as a potential divider (c) 230 Ω (d) 300 Ω
Chapter 19 : Current Electricity Compact Study Material Page 201

54. In the given circuit the cells have zero internal resistance. 59. Shown in the figure below is a meter-bridge set up with null
The currents (in Amperes) passing through resistance R1 and deflection in the galvanometer.
R
R2 respectively are [JEE (Main) 2019] 55Ω

G
R1 20Ω R2 20Ω
20cm
– + + –
10V 10V
(a) 2, 2 (b) 0, 0 The value of the unknown resistor R is [AIEEE 2008]
(c) 1, 2 (d) 0.5, 0
(a) 220 Ω (b) 110 Ω
55. For the circuit shown, with R1 = 1.0 Ω , R2 = 2.0 Ω ,
(c) 55 Ω (d) 13.75 Ω
E1 = 2 V and E2 = E3 = 4 V , the potential difference 60. In a metre bridge experiment null point is obtained at 20 cm
between the points ' a ' and ' b' is approximately (in V) from one end of the wire when resistance X is balanced
against another resistance Y. If X < Y, then where will be
R1 R1
a the new position of the null point from the same end, if one
decides to balance a resistance of 4X against Y [AIEEE 2004]
R2 E3
(a) 50 cm (b) 80 cm
EE
11
E2 R1 (c) 40 cm (d) 70 cm
61. A meter bridge is set-up to determine an unknown resistance
R1 b ‘X’ using a standard 10 ohm resistor. The galvanometer
[JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 2.3 (b) 3.3 shows null point when tapping-key is at 52cm mark. The
(c) 2 .7 (d) 3.7 end-corrections are 1cm and 2cm respectively for the ends A
and B. The determined value of ‘X’ is [IIT-JEE 2011]
56. In the circuit shown P ≠ R , the reading of the galvanometer
is same with switch S open or closed. Then
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 1999] X 10 Ω

P Q
(a) I R = IG
S
(b) I P = IG
A B
(c) IQ = IG R G

(d) I Q = I R V (a) 10.2 ohm (b) 10.6 ohm

(c) 10.8 ohm (d) 11.1 ohm
57. For the post office box arrangement to determine the value
of unknown resistance the unknown resistance should be 62. A resistance of 2Ω is connected across one gap of a
connected between [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004] meter−bridge (the length of the wire is 100cm) and an
B C D unknown resistance, greater than 2Ω, is connected across
the other gap. When these resistances are interchanged, the
(a) B and C balance point shifts by 20cm. Neglecting any corrections, the
(b) C and D unknown resistance is [IIT-JEE 2007]
(a) 3 Ω (b) 4 Ω
(c) A and D A
(c) 5 Ω (d) 6 Ω
(d) B1 and C1 63. In the shown arrangement of the experiment of the meter
B1 C1
bridge if AC corresponding to null deflection of
58. A battery of internal resistance 4Ω is connected to the galvanometer is x, what would be its value if the radius of
network of resistances as shown. In order to give the the wire AB is doubled [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003]
maximum power to the network, the value of R (in Ω )
should be [IIT 1995] (a) x
(a) 4/9 R R R1 R2
(b) x/4
(b) 8/9 R 6R R
E (c) 4x G
(c) 2
(d) 18 R 4R (d) 2x A x C B
Page 202 Compact Study Material Chapter 19 : Current Electricity

64. During experiment with a metre bridge, the galvanometer 70. In a potentiometer experiment, it is found that no current
shows a null point when the jockey is pressed at 40.0 cm passes through the galvanometer when the terminals of the
using a standard resistance of 90 Ω , as shown in the figure. cell are connected across 52 cm of the potentiometer wire.
The least count of the scale used in the meter bridge is
If the cell is shunted by resistance of 5Ω , a balance is found
1mm. The unknown resistance is [JEE 2014]
when the cell is connected across 40 cm of the wire. Find
the internal resistance of the cell [JEE (Main) 2018]

(a) 2 Ω (b) 2. 5 Ω
(a) 60 ± 0.15Ω R 90 Ω
(c) 1Ω (d) 1.5Ω
(b) 135 ± 0.56 Ω
71. On interchanging the resistances, the balance point of a
(c) 60 ± 0.25Ω meter bridge shifts to the left by 10 cm. The resistance of
40.0 cm
(d) 135 ± 0.23 Ω their series combination is 1 KΩ. How much was the
65. A moving coil galvanometer of resistance 100 is used as an resistance on the left slot before interchanging the
ammeter using a resistance 0.1 The maximum resistances [JEE (Main) 2018]
deflection current in the galvanometer is 100 A. Find the (a) 550 Ω (b) 910 Ω
minimum current in the circuit so that the ammeter shows
maximum deflection [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2005] (c) 990 Ω (d) 505 Ω
(a) 100.1 mA (b) 1000.1 mA 72. A potentiometer wire AB having length L and resistance
(c) 10.01 mA (d) 1.01 mA 12 r is joined to a cell D of emf E and internal resistance r .
66. If an ammeter is to be used in place of a voltmeter then we A cell C having emf E / 2 and internal resistance 3r is
must connect with the ammeter a connected. The length AJ at which the galvanometer as
[AIEEE 2002] shown is figure shows no deflection is
(a) Low resistance in parallel D
(b) High resistance in parallel + –
(c) High resistance in series E, r

(d) Low resistance in series

67. The length of a wire of a potentiometer is 100 cm, and the J
A B
emf of its standard cell is E volt. It is employed to measure
the e.m.f. of a battery whose internal resistance is 0.5 Ω. If
the balance point is obtained at l = 30 cm from the positive + –
G [JEE (Main) 2019]
C
end, the e.m.f. of the battery is [AIEEE 2003]
5 11
30E 30E (a) L (b) L
(a) (b) 12 24
100 100.5
11 13
30 E 30(E − 0.5i) (c) L (d) L
(c) (d) 12 24
(100 − 0.5) 100
73. The actual value of resistance R, shown in the figure is
Where i is the current in the potentiometer
30Ω . This is measured in an experiment as shown using
68. A galvanometer having a coil resistance of 100 Ω gives a
V
full scale deflection, when a current of 1 mA is passed the standard formula R = , where V and I are the
I
through it. The value of the resistance, which can convert readings of the voltmeter and ammeter, respectively. If the
this galvanometer into ammeter giving a full scale deflection measured value of R is 5 % less, then the internal resistance
for a current of 10 A, is [JEE (Main) 2016]
of the voltmeter is [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 2 Ω (b) 0.1 Ω V

(c) 3 Ω (d) 0.01 Ω

69. When a current of 5mA is passed through a galvanometer A
R
having a coil of resistance 15 Ω , it shows full scale defection.
The value of the resistance to be put in series with the
galvanometer to convert it into a voltmeter of range 0.10 V
is [JEE (Main) 2017]
(a) 4 . 005 × 10 3 Ω (b) 1 . 985 × 10 3 Ω (a) 35Ω (b) 600Ω
(c) 2 . 045 × 10 3 Ω (d) 2 . 535 × 10 3 Ω (c) 570Ω (d) 350Ω
Chapter 19 : Current Electricity Compact Study Material Page 203

74. In a Wheatstone bridge (see fig.), Resistances P and Q are 77. A galvanometer having a resistance of 20Ω and 30
approximately equal. When R = 400 Ω , the bridge is divisions on both sides has figure of merit 0.005
ampere/division. The resistance that should be connected in
balanced. On inter-changing P and Q , the value of R , for
series such that it can be used as a voltmeter upto 15 volt, is
balance, is 405Ω . The value of X is close to [JEE (Main) 2019]

B
[JEE (Main) 2019] (a) 80 Ω (b) 100 Ω
(c) 120 Ω (d) 125 Ω
P Q
G 78. In a meter bridge, the wire of length 1m has a non-uniform
A C dR
cross-section such that, the variation of its resistance
dl
K2
R X dR 1
R with length l is ∝ . Two equal resistances are
dl l
D
connected as shown in the figure. The galvanometer has
zero deflection when the jockey is at point P . What is the
K1 length AP [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 404.5 ohm (b) 402.5 ohm

(c) 403.5 ohm (d) 401.5 ohm

(a) 0.2 m
R' R'
75. The resistance of the meter bridge AB is given figure is
(b) 0.3 m
4 Ω . With a cell of emf E = 0.5 V and rheostat resistance
G
Rh = 2Ω the null point is obtained at some point J. When (c) 0.25 m
P
the cell is replaced by another one of emf E = E2 the same (d) 0.35 m A B
l 1–l
null point J is found for Rh = 6Ω . The emf E2 is 79. An ideal battery of 4 V and resistance R are connected in
E [JEE (Main) 2019] series in the primary circuit of a potentiometer of length 1m
and resistance 5Ω .The value of R , to give a potential
difference of 5mV across 10 cm of potentiometer wire, is
[JEE (Main) 2019]
A B (a) 490 Ω (b) 495 Ω
J
(c) 480 Ω (d) 395 Ω
6V
80. The galvanometer deflection, when key K1 is closed but
Rh K 2 is open, equals θ 0 (see figure). On closing K 2 also and
adjusting R2 to 5Ω , the deflection in galvanometer
(a) 0.5 V (b) 0.3V θ0
becomes . The resistance of the galvanometer is, then,
(c) 0.4 V (d) 0.6 V 5
76. In the experimental set up of Meter Bridge shown in the given by [Neglect the internal resistance of battery]
R2 [JEE (Main) 2019]
figure, the null point is obtained at a distance of 40 cm from k2

A . If a 10 Ω resistor is connected in series with R1 , the null

220Ω
point shifts by 10 cm . The resistance that should be G

connected in parallel with (R1 + 10)Ω such that the null

point shifts back to its initial position is [JEE (Main) 2019]

R1 k1
R2
(a) 5 Ω (b) 12Ω
(c) 25 Ω (d) 22 Ω
G
81. A galvanometer, whose resistance is 50 ohm , has 25
A B
divisions in it. When a current of 4 × 10 − 4 A passes through
it, its needle (pointer) deflects by one division. To use this
galvanometer as a voltmeter of range 2 . 5 V , it should be
connected to a resistance of [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 60 Ω (b) 30 Ω
(a) 250 ohm (b) 200 ohm
(c) 20 Ω (d) 40 Ω (c) 6200 ohm (d) 6250 ohm
Page 204 Compact Study Material Chapter 19 : Current Electricity

82. In the circuit shown, a four- wire potentiometer is made of a S.N. R (Ω) l (cm)
400 cm long wire, which extends between A and B . The
1. 1000 60
resistance per unit length of the potentiometer wire is
r = 0.01Ω / cm . If an ideal voltmeter is connected as shown 2. 100 13
with jockey J at 50 cm from end A, the expected reading
3. 10 1.5
of the voltmeter will be
1.5V, 1.5V, 4. 1 1.0
V
0.5Ω, 0.5Ω
A Which of the readings is inconsistent [JEE (Main) 2019]
50 cm (a) 4 (b) 1
(c) 3 (d) 2
1Ω
87. A moving coil galvanometer allows a full scale current of
B 100 cm 10 − 4 A . A series resistance of 2 MΩ is required to convert
[JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 0.75 V (b) 0.25 V the above galvanometer into a voltmeter of range 0 − 5 V .

(c) 0.20 V (d) 0.50 V Therefore the value of shunt resistance required to convert
the above galvanometer into an ammeter of range
83. A moving coil galvanometer has resistance 50 Ω and it
indicates full deflection at 4 mA current. A voltmeter is
0 − 10 mA is [JEE (Main) 2019]
made using this galvanometer and a 5 k Ω resistance. The (a) 500 Ω (b) 10 Ω
maximum voltage, that can be measured using this
voltmeter, will be close to [JEE (Main) 2019] (c) 100 Ω (d) Negative
(a) 20 V (b) 40 V
88. A galvanometer of resistance 100 Ω has 50 divisions on its
(c) 10 V (d) 15 V
scale and has sensitivity of 20 µA / division. It is to be
84. The resistance of a galvanometer is 50ohm and the
maximum current which can be passed through it is converted to a voltmeter with three ranges, of 0-2V, 0-10 V
0.002 A . What resistance must be connected to it in order to and 0-20 V. The appropriate circuit to do so is
convert it into an ammeter of range 0  0.5 A [JEE (Main) 2019]
[JEE (Main) 2019]
R1 R2 R3
(a) 0.5 ohm (b) 0.02 ohm G
(c) 0.002 ohm (d) 0.2 ohm R1 = 2000Ω
R2 = 8000Ω
85. In the given circuit, an ideal voltmeter connected across the (a)
10 Ω resistance reads 2 V . The internal resistance r, of R3 = –10000Ω

each cell is 2V 10V 20V

15Ω
2Ω R1 R2 R3
G
R1 = 19900Ω
10Ω
R2 = 9900Ω
(b)
R3 = 1900Ω

[JEE (Main) 2019] 2V 10V 2V

1.5V, 1.5V
(a) 0 Ω (b) 0.5 Ω
R1 R2 R3
(c) 1 Ω (d) 1.5 Ω G
86. In a meter bridge experiment, the circuit diagram and the R1 = 1900Ω
corresponding observation table are shown in figure. (c) R2 = 9900Ω
R3 = 19900Ω
X
Resistance 2V 10V 2V
box
Unknown
G R1 R2 R3
resistance
G
l
R1 = 1900Ω
R2 = 8000Ω
(d)
R3 = 10000Ω
K
E 2V 10V 2V
Chapter 19 : Current Electricity Compact Study Material Page 205

89. To verify Ohm's law, a student connects the voltmeter across 92. If in the circuit, power dissipation is 150 W, then R is
the battery as, shown in the figure. The measured voltage is [AIEEE 2002]
R
plotted as a function of the current and the following graph
is obtained V 2Ω
V
1.5V

Internal 15 V
Resistance
Ammeter (a) 2 Ω (b) 6 Ω
V0 (c) 5 Ω (d) 4 Ω
I 1000 mA
R 93. Find the power of the circuit [AIEEE 2002]

4Ω 4Ω
[JEE (Main) 2019]
If V0 is almost zero, identify the correct statement
2Ω 2Ω
(a) The emf of the battery is 1.5 V and its internal
resistance is 1.5 Ω

(b) The emf of the battery is 1.5 V and the value of R is

2V
1. 5 Ω (a) 1.5 W (b) 2 W
(c) The potential difference across the battery is 1.5 V (c) 1 W (d) None of these
when it sends a current of 1000 mA 94. The three resistances of equal values are arranged in different
(d) The value of the resistance R is 1.5 Ω combinations shown below. Arrange them in increasing
order of power dissipation [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003]
90. A moving coil galvanometer having a resistance G ,
produces full scale deflection when a current I g flows
through it. This galvanometer can be converted into (i) an I. II.
i i
ammeter of range 0 to I 0 (I 0 > I g ) by connecting a shunt

resistance R A to it and (ii) into a voltmeter of range 0 to

V (V = GI0 ) by connecting a series resistance RV to it.
Then [JEE (Main) 2019]
III. IV. i
2 i
 I0 − I g   Ig 
(a) R A RV = G 2   and R A =  
 Ig  R  I0 − I g 
  V  

RA Ig
(b) R A R V = G 2 and =
RV (
I0 − I g )
(a) III < II < IV < I
2
R A  I g 
 (b) II < III < IV < I
(c) R A RV = G 2 and =
RV  I 0 − I g 

(c) I < IV < III < II
2
 Ig   I − Ig 
(d) R A RV = G 2   and R A =  0  (d) I < III < II < IV
 I0 − I g


 RV  I g 
 95. In a large building, there are 15 bulbs of 40W, 5 bulbs of
91. The resistance of hot tungsten filament is about 10 times the 100W, 5 fans of 80W and 1 heater of 1kW. The voltage of
cold resistance. What will be the resistance of 100 W and the electric mains is 220 V. The minimum capacity of the
200 V lamp when not in use [AIEEE 2005] main fuse of the building will be [JEE (Main) 2014]
(a) 400 Ω (b) 200 Ω (a) 8 A (b) 10 A
(c) 40 Ω (d) 20 Ω (c) 12 A (d) 14 A
Page 206 Compact Study Material Chapter 19 : Current Electricity

96. A 100 W bulb B1, and two 60-W bulbs B2 and B3, are 100. A current of 2mA was passed through an unknown resistor
connected to a 250 V source, as shown in the figure. Now W1, which dissipated a power of 4.4W . Dissipated power when
an ideal power supply of 11V is connected across it is
W2 and W3 are the output powers of the bulbs B1, B2 and B3,
[JEE (Main) 2019]
respectively. Then [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002]
(a) 11 × 10 W −4
(b) 11 × 10 5 W
(c) 11 × 10 W −3
(d) 11 × 10 − 5 W
B1 B2
101. Two equal resistances when connected in series to a battery,
consume electric power of 60W . If these resistances are
B3
now connected in parallel combination to the same battery,
the electric power consumed will be [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 120 W (b) 60 W

250V (c) 30 W (d) 240 W

(a) W1 > W2 = W3 (b) W1 > W2 > W3 102. Two electric bulbs, rated at (25W, 220V) and (100W, 220V)
are connected in series across a 220 V voltage source. If the
(c) W1 < W2 = W3 (d) W1 < W2 < W3 25W and 100W bulbs draw powers P1 and P2
respectively, then [JEE (Main) 2019]
97. Consider a cylindrical element as shown in the figure.
(a) P1 = 4W, P2 = 16W (b) P1 = 16W, P2 = 9W
Current flowing through element is I and resistivity of
material of the cylinder is ρ. choose the correct option out (c) P1 = 16W, P2 = 4W (d) P1 = 9W, P2 = 16W
the following [IIT-JEE 2006] 103. In the figure shown, after the switch ' S ' is turned position
' A' to position ' B ' , the energy dissipated in the circuit in
A B
C terms of capacitance ' C' and total charge ' Q ' is
I [JEE (Main) 2019]
2r A B
4r

E
l/2 l/2
C 3C

(a) Power loss in second half is four times the power loss in
first half 3 Q2 5 Q2
(a) (b)
(b) Voltage drop in first half is twice of voltage drop in 8 C 8 C
second half 1 Q2 3 Q2
(c) (d)
(c) Current density in both halves are equal 8 C 4 C
(d) Electric field in both halves is equal 104. The resistive network shown below is connected to a D.C.
source of 16 V . The power consumed by the network is
98. Incandescent bulbs are designed by keeping in mind that the
resistance of their filament increases with increase in 4 Watt . The value of R is
temperature. If at room temperature, 100 W, 60 W and 40 W 4R 6R
R
R
bulbs have filament resistances R100 , R 60 and R40 ,
respectively, the relation between these resistances is
4R 12R
[IIT-JEE 2010]

1 1 1
(a) = + (b) R100 = R40 + R60
R100 R 40 R60 E = 16 V
[JEE (Main) 2019]
1 1 1
(c) R100 > R60 > R40 (d) > > (a) 8 Ω (b) 6 Ω
R100 R60 R40
(c) 1 Ω (d) 16 Ω
99. Water of volume 2 litre in a container is heated with a coil of
1 kW at 27 oC. The lid of the container is open and energy 105. A cell of internal resistance drives current through an
dissipates at rate of 160 J/s. In how much time temperature external resistance R. The power delivered by the cell to the
will rise from 27oC to 77oC [Given specific heat of water is external resistance will be maximum when
4.2 kJ/kg] [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2005] [JEE (Main) 2019]

(a) 8 min 20 s (b) 6 min 2 s (a) R = 1000 r (b) R = r

(c) 7 min (d) 14 min (c) R = 2r (d) R = 0.001r

Chapter 19 : Current Electricity Compact Study Material Page 207

106. Which of the following will NOT be observed when a (a) 0.71 A from positive to negative terminal
multimeter (operating in resistance measuring mode) probes
connected across a component, are just reversed (b) 0.42 A from positive to negative terminal
[JEE (Main) 2020] (c) 0.21 A from positive to negative terminal
(a) Multimeter shows an equal deflection in both case i.e.
(d) 0.36 A from negative to positive terminal
before and after reversing the robes if the chosen
component is resistor 111. A cell E1 of emf 6 V and internal resistance 2Ω is
(b) Multimeter shows NO deflection in both cases i.e.
connected with another cell E 2 of emf 4 V and internal
before and after reversing the probes if the chosen
component is capacitor resistance 8Ω (as shown in the figure). The potential
(c) Multimeter shows a deflection, accompanied by a difference across points X and Y is [JEE (Main) 2021]
splash of light out of connected component in one E1 E2
P X Y
direction and NO deflection on reversing the probes if
the chosen component is LED 6V, 2Ω 4V, 8Ω
(d) Multimeter shows NO deflection in both cases i.e.
before and after reversing the probes if the chosen
component is metal wire
(a) 5.6 V (b) 3.6 V
107. The length of a potentiometer wire is 1200 cm and it carries
a current of 60 mA . For a cell of emf 5 V and internal (c) 2.0 V (d) 10.0 V
resistance of 20 Ω , the null point on it is found to be at 112. Five equal resistances are connected in a network as shown
1000 cm . The resistance of whole wire is [JEE (Main) 2020] in figure. The net resistance between the points A and B is

(a) 60 Ω (b) 120 Ω D

(c) 100 Ω (d) 80 Ω

R
108. The value of current i1 flowing from A to C in the circuit R R

diagram is R A
B
8V B E C [JEE (Main) 2021]
R
3R
i i (a) (b) R
2Ω 2Ω 2
5Ω
4Ω i1 4Ω R
(c) 2R (d)
A C 2
2Ω 5Ω 2Ω 113. A resistor develops 500J of thermal energy in 20s when a
current of 1.5 A is passed through it. If the current is
increased from 1.5 A to 3A, what will be the energy
D [JEE (Main) 2020] developed in 20 s. [JEE (Main) 2021]
(a) 2 A (b) 4 A (a) 1000 J (b) 500 J
(c) 1 A (d) 5 A (c) 1500 J (d) 2000 J
109. A battery of 3.0 V is connected to a resistor dissipating 114. The four arms of a Wheatstone bridge have resistances as
shown in the figure. A galvanometer of 15 Ω resistance is
0.5 W of power. If the terminal voltage of the battery is
connected across BD . Calculate the current through the
2.5 V , the power dissipated within the internal resistance is
galvanometer when a potential difference of 10 V is
[JEE (Main) 2020] maintained across AC
(a) 0.50 W (b) 0.072W B
(c) 0.10 W (d) 0.125 W 100Ω 10Ω

110. In the figure shown, the current in the 10 V battery is close A C

G
to
5Ω 60Ω 5Ω
D

10Ω 10 V 10V
20 V [JEE (Main) 2021]
2Ω 4Ω (a) 4.87 mA (b) 4.87 µA
[JEE (Main) 2020] (c) 2.44 mA (d) 2.44 µA
Page 208 Compact Study Material Chapter 19 : Current Electricity

115. In the given figure, there is a circuit of potentiometer of Numerical Questions :

length AB = 10m. The resistance per unit length is 119. In a meter bridge experiment S is a standard resistance. R
0.1Ω per cm. Across AB , a battery of emf E and internal is a resistance wire. It is found that balancing length is
resistance 'r' is connected. The maximum value of emf ℓ = 25 cm . If R is replaced by a wire of half length and half
measured by this potentiometer is diameter that of R of same material, then the balancing
E distance ℓ ′ (in cm) will now be
+ – r
R
S
G

J B G
A
550 cm ℓ
450 cm
V
+ –
20Ω K
6V
[JEE (Main) 2021]
[JEE (Main) 2020]
(a) 2.75 V (b) 2.25 V 120. A cylindrical wire of radius 0.5 mm and conductivity
(c) 6 V (d) 5 V 5 × 107 S / m is subjected to an electric field of 10mV / m .
116. The resistance of a conductor at 15°C is 16 Ω and at 100°C The expected value of current in the wire will be x 3π mA .

is 20 Ω. What will be the temperature coefficient of The value of x is [JEE (Main) 2021]
121. In the given figure switches S1 and S2 are in open
resistance of the conductor [JEE (Main) 2021]
condition. The resistance across ab when the switches S1
(a) 0 . 042 °C −1 (b) 0 . 003 °C −1
and S2 are closed is ________ Ω
(c) 0 . 033 °C −1 (d) 0 . 010 °C −1
12Ω 4Ω 6Ω
117. For full scale deflection of total 50 divisions, 50 mV voltage
is required in galvanometer. The resistance of galvanometer
if its current sensitivity is 2 div/mA will be [JEE (Main) 2021] a S1 S2 b

(a) 1 Ω (b) 2 Ω
6Ω 4Ω 12Ω
(c) 4Ω (d) 5 Ω

118. Due to cold weather a 1m water pipe of cross–sectional [JEE (Main) 2021]
122. The voltage drop across 15Ω resistance in the given figure
area 1 cm 2 is filled with ice at −10°C. Resistive heating is
will be ______ V
used to melt the ice. Current of 0.5 A is passed through
4Ω 15 Ω
4 kΩ resistance. Assuming that all the heat produced is 2Ω
4Ω 10 Ω
used for melting, what is the minimum time required
(Given latent heat of fusion for water/ice
8Ω 12 Ω
= 3.33 × 10 J kg , Specific heat of ice = 2 × 10 J kg −1 and
5 −1 3

8Ω 12 Ω
density of ice = 10 3 kg / m 3 ) [JEE (Main) 2021]
12 V 1Ω
(a) 3.53 s (b) 0.353 s

(c) 35.3 s (d) 70.6 s [JEE (Main) 2021]

CRITICAL QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 a 2 b 3 c 4 d 5 d 6 c 7 c 8 c 9 b 10 a

11 c 12 d 13 c 14 a 15 b 16 c 17 b 18 a 19 b 20 b

21 b 22 b 23 d 24 a 25 a 26 c 27 c 28 c 29 d 30 d

31 d 32 d 33 b 34 b 35 d 36 c 37 a 38 c 39 d 40 a
Chapter 19 : Current Electricity Compact Study Material Page 209

41 a 42 a 43 b 44 b 45 d 46 d 47 c 48 b 49 a 50 b

51 b 52 b 53 b 54 a 55 b 56 b 57 c 58 b 59 a 60 c

61 a 62 b 63 d 64 a 65 a 66 d 67 b 68 a 69 a 70 b

71 b 72 d 73 a 74 d 75 b 76 d 77 c 78 c 79 a 80 d

81 b 82 c 83 c

PAST YEAR QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 a 2 b 3 d 4 b 5 c 6 a 7 c 8 c 9 d 10 d

11 a 12 c 13 d 14 d 15 d 16 b 17 a 18 c 19 c 20 a

21 a 22 c 23 c 24 a 25 a 26 c 27 a 28 a 29 a 30 d

31 a 32 b 33 c 34 c 35 a 36 a 37 a 38 b 39 d 40 a

41 d 42 d 43 c 44 c 45 b 46 b 47 d 48 c 49 c 50 d

51 a 52 b 53 d 54 d 55 b 56 a 57 c 58 c 59 a 60 a

61 b 62 a 63 a 64 c 65 a 66 c 67 a 68 d 69 b 70 d

71 a 72 d 73 c 74 b 75 b 76 a 77 a 78 c 79 d 80 d

81 b 82 b 83 a 84 d 85 b 86 a 87 d 88 d 89 a 90 c

91 a 92 b 93 c 94 a 95 c 96 d 97 a 98 d 99 a 100 d

101 d 102 c 103 a 104 a 105 b 106 b 107 c 108 c 109 c 110 c

111 a 112 b 113 d 114 a 115 d 116 b 117 b 118 c 119 40 120 5

121 10 122 6

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
Important For mulae’s :
CHAPTER
IMPORTANT POINTS
20 Magnetic Effect of Current
 Deviation of charged particle in magnetic field : If a
 The value of magnetic field induction at a point on the charged particle (q, m) enters a uniform magnetic field B
centre of separation of two linear parallel conductors carrying (extends upto a length x) at right angles with speed v as shown
equal currents in the same direction is zero. in figure, the speed of the particle in magnetic field does not
 If a current carrying circular loop (n = 1) is turned into a change but gets deviated in the magnetic field.
coil having n identical turns then magnetic field at the centre of  Bq 
Deviation in terms of time t; θ = ω t =  t
the coil becomes n2 times the previous field i.e.  m
B (n turn) = n2 B(single turn)
Deviation in terms of length of the magnetic field;
 When a current carrying coil is suspended freely in earth's x
magnetic field, it's plane stays in East-West direction. θ = sin −1   . This relation can be used only when x ≤ r .
r
 Magnetic field ( B ) produced by a moving charge q is For x > r, the deviation will be 180o as shown in the
µ q(v × rˆ)
µ 0 q(v × r ) following figure
given by B = = 0 ;
r3
4π 4π r2
v
where v = velocity of charge and v << c (speed of light). × × × × v × × ×
θ× θ×
B × ×
× × × ×
× × × ×
→ r × × × ×
r × × × × B v
v q, m v × × ×
q
× × x × × x
 If an electron is revolving in a circular path of radius r with × × × ×

speed v then magnetic field produced at the centre of circular  The polarity of magnetic dipole due to current loop can be
µ ev v decided as follows :
path B = 0 . 2 ⇒ r ∝
4π r B On looking towards the face of the coil, if the direction of
current is anticlockwise then that face of coil will be north pole.
 The line integral of magnetising field (H ) for any closed In this position the magnetic field will be towards the observer. If
path is called magnetomotive force (MMF). It's S.I. unit is amp. the direction of current is clockwise, then that face has south
 Ratio of dimension of e.m.f. to MMF is equal to the polarity. In this position the magnetic field will be towards the
dimension of resistance. coil and away from the observer.
 The device whose working principle is based on Helmholtz
coils and in which uniform magnetic field is used is called as
i i i i
"Helmholtz galvanometer".
 Cyclotron frequency is also known as magnetic resonance
frequency.
 If no magnetic field is present, the loop will still open into a
 Cyclotron can not accelerate electrons because they have circle as in its adjacent parts current will be in opposite direction
very small mass.
and opposite currents repel each other. i
 The energy of a charged particle moving in a uniform
magnetic field does not change because it experiences a force in
a direction perpendicular to it's direction of motion. Due to
which the speed of charged particle remains unchanged and
hence it's K.E. remains same.
i
 Magnetic force does no work when the charged particle is  In the following case if wire XY is slightly displaced from its
displaced while electric force does work in displacing the equilibrium position, it executes SHM and it’s time period is
charged particle.
h l
given by T = 2π . Movable
 Magnetic force is velocity dependent, while electric force is g X i2 Y
independent of the state of rest or motion of the charged
h
particle.
 If a particle enters a magnetic field normally to the magnetic Fixed i1
field, then it starts moving in a circular orbit. The point at which
it enters the magnetic field lies on the circumference. (Most of us  In the previous case if direction of current in movable wire is
confuse it with the centre of the orbit) reversed then it’s instantaneous acceleration produced is 2g ↓.
 Chapter 20 : Magnetic Effect of Current Compact Study Material Page 211

 The nature of force between two parallel charge beams is 4. An electric current is flowing in a very long pin as shown in
decided by electric force, as it is dominator. The nature of force the figure. The value of magnetic flux density at point O will
be
between two parallel current carrying wires is decided by
magnetic force. R
+ +
O
i1 i2 + +
+ +
µ0i µ0i
+ + (a) [π + 2] (b) [π + 1]
4π R 4π R
Fnet = Fm only Fe → repulsion
µ0i µ0i
Fm → attraction (c) [π − 2] (d) [π − 1]
Fnet → repulsion (Due to this 4π R 4π R
force these beams diverge) 5. A current i is flowing in a conductor shaped as shown in the
 If a straight current carrying wire is placed along the axis of a figure. The radius of curved part is r and length of straight
current carrying coil then it will not experience magnetic force portions is very large. The value of magnetic field at the
because magnetic field produced by the coil is parallel to the wire. centre will be
 The force acting on a curved wire joining points a and b as µ0i  3π 
(a) + 1
shown in the figure is the same as that on a straight wire joining 4π r  2 
these points. It is given by the expression F = i L × B µ0i  3π  r i
(b) − 1
× × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
4π r  2 
× × × × × b ×→
× × × × × × × × × × × × × → × ×
×
× × × ×B× × × × × × F× × × B× ×
× r
× × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × µ0i π 
× × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
(c)  2 + 1
→ 4π r  
→ i L
L i
a µ0i π 
(d)  2 − 1
 If a current carrying conductor AB is placed transverse to a 4π r  
long current carrying conductor as shown, then force experienced 6. A circular arc of wire of radius of curvature r subtends an
by wire AB π
µ ii  x +l  angle of rad at its centre. If i current is flowing in it, then
F = 0 1 2 log e   4
2π  x  i1 the magnetic induction at its centre will be
i2
µ 0i µ 0i
A B (a) (b)
8r 4r
x l
µ0 i
(c) (d) 0
16 r
 Electric force is an absolute concept while magnetic force is
a relative concept for an observer. 7. A 6.28 m long wire is turned into a coil of diameter 0.2 m
and current of 1 A is passed in it. The magnetic induction at
its centre will be
Critical Questions (a) 6.28 × 10−5 T (b) 0
1. For the magnetic field due to a small element of a current (c) 6.28 T (d) 6.28 × 10−3 T
carrying conductor at a point to be maximum, the angle
8. A long straight wire is turned into a loop of radius 10cm (as
between the element and the line joining the element to
shown in figure). If a current of 8A is passed through the
point P must be loop, then the value of the magnetic field B at the centre C
(a) 0° (b) 90° of the loop will be ( Wb /m2 )
(c) 180° (d) 45°
2. A current of 30A is flowing in a vertical straight wire. If the
horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field is 2 × 10 −5 T ,
then the position of null-point will be
(a) 0.9 m (b) 0.3 mm
A C A’
(c) 0.3 cm (d) 0.3 m
3. A length L of wire carrying current I is bent into a circle of
one turn. The field at the centre of the coil is B1 . A similar
wire of length L carrying current I is bent into a square of (a) 3.424 × 10 − 5 , vertically upwards
one turn. The field at its centre is B2 . Then,
(b) 3.424 × 10 − 5 , vertically downwards
(a) B1 > B2 (b) B1 < B2 (c) 4.24 × 10 −5 , vertically upwards
(c) B1 = B2 (d) Nothing can be predicted (d) 4.24 × 10 −5 , vertically downwards
 Page 212 Compact Study Material Chapter 20 : Magnetic Effect of Current

9. The magnetic dipole moment of a coil is 5.4 × 10−6 J /T and + 600 V −

it is in stable equilibrium position in an external magnetic + −
+ −
field whose strength is 0.80 T. Then, the work done in V
+ −
rotating the coil by 180° is + −
+ −
(a) 4.32 µ J (b) 2.16 µ J
+ −
(c) 8.6 µ J (d) None of these + −
+ −
10. 4 A current is passing through a coil of radius 5 cm and + −
100 turns. The magnetic moment of the coil is
(a) 3.14 A-m2 (b) 3.14 A-cm2 (a) 0.1 vertically downward (b) 0.2 vertically downward
(c) 314 A-m 2
(d) 0.0314 A-cm 2 (c) 0.3 vertically upward (d) 0.4 vertically downward
16. An α -particle is moving in a magnetic field of (3ˆi + 2ˆj) T
11. You are given a closed circuit with radii a and b as shown in
with a velocity of 5 × 10 ˆi m/s. The magnetic force acting
5
figure carrying current i . The magnetic dipole moment of
the circuit is on the particle will be

(a) 2
π (a + b ) i2 (a) 3.2 × 10 −13 dyne (b) 3.2 × 1013 N
b
(c) 0 (d) 3.2 × 10−13 N
1
(b) π (a 2 + b 2 ) i 17. A beam of protons enters a uniform magnetic field of 0.3 T
2
with a velocity of 4 × 105 m/s at an angle of 60° to the field.
(c) π (a 2 − b 2 ) i a
The radius of the helical path taken by the beam and the
1 pitch of the helix (which is the distance travelled by a proton
(d) π (a 2 − b2 ) i
2 parallel to the magnetic field during one period of rotation)
will be respectively
12. A portion, a deuteron and an α - particle are accelerated
(Given, mass of the proton = 1.7 × 10−27 kg )
through same potential difference and then they enter a
normal uniform magnetic field. The ratio of their kinetic (a) 1.226 × 10−2 m, 4.45 × 10−3 m
energies will be (b) 1.226 × 10−2 m, 4.45 × 10−2 m
(a) 2:1: 3 (b) 1 : 1 : 2 (c) 1.226 × 10−3 m, 4.45 × 10−3 m
(c) 1:1:1 (d) 1 : 2 : 4 (d) 1.226 × 10−4 m, 4.45 × 10−4 m
13. A proton of energy 8 eV is moving in a circular path in a 18. A proton is to circulate the earth along the equator with a
uniform magnetic field. The energy of an α -particle speed of 1.0 × 107 m/s. The minimum magnetic field which
moving in the same magnetic field and along the same path should be created at the equator for this purpose. (Given,
will be the mass of proton = 1.7 × 10−27 kg and radius of earth
(a) 4 eV (b) 2eV = 6.37 × 106 m ), will be (in Wb /m2 )

(c) 8 eV (d) 6 eV (a) 1.6 × 10 −19 (b) 1.67 × 10 −8

(c) 1.0 × 10 −7 (d) 2 × 10 − 7
14. If an α -particle moving with velocity v enters a
19. An α -particle is describing a circle of radius 0.45 m in a
perpendicular to a magnetic field, then the magnetic force
acting on it will be field of magnetic induction 1.2 Wb /m2 . The potential
difference required to accelerate the particle, so as to give
(a) 1evB (b) 2evB
this much energy to it (Given, the mass of α -particle is
(c) 0 (d) 4 evB 6.8 × 10 −27 kg and its charge is C), will be
15. A potential difference of 600 V is applied across the plates of (a) 6 × 106 V (b) 2.3 × 10−12 V
a parallel plate condenser placed in a magnetic field. The (c) 7 × 106 V (d) 3.2 × 10−12 V
separation between the plates is 3 mm. An electron
20. A straight horizontal stretched of copper wire carries a
projected vertically upward parallel to the plates with a current i = 30 A. The linear mass density of the wire is
velocity of 2 × 106 m/s moves region between the condenser 45 g /m3 . What is the magnitude of the magnetic field
plates will be (in Wb /m2 ) needed to float the wire, that is to be balance its weight?
− 19 (a) 147 G (b) 441G
(Given, charge of electron = − 1.6 × 10 C)
(c) 14.7 G (d) 0 G
 Chapter 20 : Magnetic Effect of Current Compact Study Material Page 213

21. If an electron is moving with velocity v in an orbit of radius r 29. A current carrying wire is placed in the grooves of an
in a hydrogen atom, then the equivalent magnetic moment insulating semicircular disc of radius ‘R’ as shown. The
will be current enters at point A and leaves from point B. Determine
µ0 e ev the magnetic field at point D.
(a) (b)
2r r2 B

ev × 10−7 evr A
(c) (d)
r3 2 i
i
22. On account of the orbital motion of an electron, its magnetic
30°
moment will be (h = Planck constant, 30°
e = electronic charge and m = mass of an electron) C D
eh h R
(a) (b)
4π m 4π m µ0 i µ0 i
(a) (b)
eh eh 8π R 3 4π R 3
(c) (d)
2π 2π m 3 µ 0i
(c) (d) None of these
23. A 5 cm × 12 cm coil with number of turns 600 is placed in a 4π R
magnetic field of strength 0.10 T. The maximum magnetic 30. A pair of stationary and infinitely long bent wires is placed in
the X-Y plane as shown in figure. The wires carry currents of
torque acting on it when a current of 10 −5 A is passed 10 A each as shown. The segments L and M are along the
through it, will be x-axis. The segments P and Q are parallel to the y-axis such
that OS=OR=0.02m. Find the magnetic induction at the
(a) 3.6 × 10−6 N -m (b) 3.6 × 10−6 dyne-cm
origin O. ∞
(c) 3.6 × 106 N -m (d) 3.6 × 106 dyne-m y
i
24. The effective radius of a coil of 100 turns is 0.05m and a
current of 0.1A is flowing in it. The work required to turn
this coil in an external magnetic field of 1.5T through 180° L R Q M
∞
will be, if initially the plane of the coil is normal to the i P O S
magnetic field
(a) 0.236 J (b) 0.236 erg
(c) 236 J (d) 236 erg ∞
−4
25. A circular coil of 20 turns and radius 10 cm is placed in (a) 1 × 10 Wb/m 2 , towards the reader
uniform magnetic field of 0.10 T normal to the plane of the (b) 1 × 10−4 Wb/m 2 , opposite to the reader
coil. If the current in the coil is 5 A, then the torque acting
on the coil will be (c) 2 × 10−4 Wb/m 2 , towards the reader
(a) 31.4 N -m (b) 3.14 N -m (d) Zero
31. Determine the magnitude of magnetic field at the centre of
(c) 0.314 N -m (d) 0 the current carrying wire arrangement shown in the figure.
26. A beam of protons is moving horizontally towards you. As it The arrangement extends to infinity. (The wires joining the
approaches, it passes through a magnetic field directed successive square are along the line passing through the
downward. The beam deflects centre)
∞
(a) To your left side (b) To your right side
4a
(c) Does not deflect (d) Nothing can be said
3a
27. If a particle moves in a circular path in clockwise direction
after entering into a downward vertical magnetic field, then 2a
charge on the particle is a
(a) Positive (b) Negative O
(c) Nothing can be said (d) Neutral i i
∞
∞
28. A point charge is moving in a circle with constant speed.
Consider the magnetic field produced by the charge at a
fixed point P (not centre of the circle) on the axis of the
circle.
(a) It is constant in magnitude only
µ 0i ∞
(b) It is constant in direction only (a) (b) 0
2π a
(c) It is constant in direction and magnitude both
2 2µ0i
(d) It is not constant in magnitude and direction both (c) ln 2 (d) None
πa
 Page 214 Compact Study Material Chapter 20 : Magnetic Effect of Current

32. Four infinitely long ‘L’ shaped wires, each carrying a current 36. Two long parallel wires situated at a distance 2 a are
i have been arranged as shown in the figure. Obtain the carrying equal current ‘i’ in opposite direction as shown in
magnetic field intensity at the point ‘O’ equidistant from all figure. The value of magnetic field at a point P situated at
the four corners. equal distances from both the wires will be:
µ 0i a i
(a) ⊙
πr
i i r
a
(a) 1Wb/m2 µ0i a 2
(b)
a
πr θ
2a
(b) 0 Wb/m 2 µ0i a 2 θ
0° (c)
(c) 2 Wb/m 2 π r2
r
µ 0i a
(d) None of these (d) ⊗
π r2 i

33. Two parallel, long wires carry currents i1 and i2 with 37. A uniform beam of positively charged particles is moving
with a constant velocity parallel to another beam of
i1 > i2 . When the current are in the same direction, the negatively charged particles moving with the same velocity
magnetic field at a point midway between the wire is 10 µ T. in opposite direction separated by a distance d. The
variation of magnetic field B along a perpendicular line draw
If the direction of i2 is reversed, the field becomes 30 µ T . between the two beams is best represented by
The ratio i1 /i2 is B B

(a) 4 (b) 3
(c) 2 (d) 1
34. Two mutually perpendicular insulated long conducting wires (a) d/2 d (b)
d
d/2
carrying equal currents I, intersect at origin. Then the
resultant magnetic induction at point P(2 m, 3 m) will be

µ0 I B B
(a)
5a I P (2, 3)
5 µ0 I
(b) I
2π
O (c) (d)
µ0 I d d
(c) d/2 d/2
12 π
(d) 0
35. Figure shows a long wire bent at the middle to form a right 38. A charged particle is accelerated through a potential
angle. The magnitudes of the magnetic fields at the points difference of 12 kV and acquires a speed of 1.0 × 106 m/s. It
P, Q, R and S are B1, B2, B3, B4 respectively. The wire and is then injected perpendicularly into a magnetic field of
the circumference of circle are coplanar. Then strength 0.2 T. Find the radius of the circle described by it.
(a) 12 cm (b) 14 cm
(c) 10 cm (d) None of these

i
39. A neutron, a proton, an electron and an α -particle enters a
Q
uniform magnetic field with equal velocities. The field is
S d
directed along the inward normal to the plane of the paper.
Which of these tracks followed are by α -particle.
P
× × × × × × × × ×
i
C
× × B× × × × × ×

(a) B1 = B2 = B3 = B4 × × × × × × × ×
D
A
× × × × × × × ×
(b) B1 = 2B2
× × × × × × × ×
(c) B3 = 2B4
(a) A (b) B
(d) None of these (c) C (d) D
 Chapter 20 : Magnetic Effect of Current Compact Study Material Page 215

A proton of mass 1.67 × 10−27 kg and charge 1.6 × 10 −19 C A electron experiences a force (4.0ˆi + 3.0ˆj ) × 10 N in a
40. −13
46.
6
is projected with a speed of 2 × 10 m/s at an angle of 60° uniform magnetic field. When its velocity is
to the x-axis. If a uniform magnetic field of 0.104 T is 2.5kˆ × 10−7 ms−1. When the velocity is redirected and
applied along the y-axis, the path of the proton is:
becomes (1.5ˆi − 2.0ˆj ) × 10 ms , the magnetic force of the
−7 −1
−7
(a) A circle of radius 0.2 m and time period π × 10 s 
electron is zero. The magnetic field vector B is:
−7
(b) A circle of radius 0.1 m and time period 2π × 10 s
(a) −0.075ˆi + 0.1ˆj (b) 0.1ˆi + 0.075ˆj
−7
(c) A helix of radius 0.1 m and time period of 2π × 10 s
(c) 0.075ˆi − 0.1ˆj + kˆ (d) 0.075ˆi − 0.1ˆj
−7
(d) A helix of radius of 0.2 m and time period 4π × 10 s 47. A mass spectrometer is a device which select particle of
 equal mass. An ion with electric charge q > 0 starts at rest
41. A uniform magnetic field B = B0 ˆj exists in a space. A
from a source S and is accelerated through a potential
particle of mass m and charge q is projected towards difference V. It passes through a hole into a region of
negative x-axis with speed v from the a point (d, 0, 0). The 
constant magnetic field B perpendicular to the plane of the
maximum value v for which the particle does not hit
paper as shown in the figure. The particle is deflected by the
y-z plane is
magnetic field and emerges through the bottom hole at a
2Bq Bqd distance d from the top hole. The mass of the particle is
(a) (b)
dm m
Bq Bqd
(c) (d)
2 dm 2m
S B
42. A positive charge particle of mass m and charge q is
projected with velocity v as shown in the figure. If radius of
V
curvature of charge particle in magnetic field is
R(2d < R < 3 d ), then time lapse by charge particle in
magnetic field regions is
m
(a) × × × × × × qBd qB2d 2
2qB × × × × × ×
(a) (b)
V 4V
m  2d  × × × × × ×
(b) sin −1   × B× × B × qB2d 2 qBd
qB  R  (c) (d)
× × × × × × 8V 2V
m × × × × × ×
(c) × × ×
qB 90° × × ×
Past Years Questions
m d
(d) sin−1   d 1. A magnetic field can be produced by [AIEEE 2002]
qB R d d
(a) A moving charge (b) A changing electric field
43. Three ions H + , He + and O+2 having same kinetic energy
(c) None of these (d) Both of these
pass through a region in which there is a uniform magnetic
field perpendicular to their velocity, then: 2. A current I flows along the length of an infinitely long,
(a) H +
will be least deflected straight and thin-walled pipe. Then
(b) He + and O +2 will be deflected equally [IIT-JEE 1993; AIEEE 2007]
(c) O + 2 will be deflected most (a) The magnetic field at all points inside the pipe is the
(d) All will be deflected equally same but not zero
44. An electron having kinetic energy T is moving in a circular (b) The magnetic field at any point inside the pipe is zero
orbit of radius R perpendicular to a uniform magnetic
 (c) The magnetic field is zero only on the axis of the pipe
induction B. If kinetic energy is doubled and magnetic
induction tripled, the radius will become (d) The magnetic field is different at different points inside
3R 3 the pipe
(a) (b) R
2 2 3. A steady current I goes through a wire loop PQR having
2 4 shape of a right angle triangle with PQ = 3 x, PR = 4 x and
(c) R (d) R
9 3 QR = 5 x . If the magnitude of the magnetic field at P due to

45. A charged particle moves in a magnetic field B = 10ˆi with  µ I 
this loop is k  0  , find the value of k [IIT-JEE 2009]
  48 π x 
initial velocity u = 5ˆi + 4 ˆj . The path of the particle will be
(a) Straight line (b) Circle (a) 8 (b) 3
(c) Helical (d) None (c) 7 (d) None of these
 Page 216 Compact Study Material Chapter 20 : Magnetic Effect of Current

4. A horizontal overhead power line is at a height of 4 m from 8. The magnetic field due to a current carrying circular loop of
the ground and carries a current of 100 A from east to west. radius 3 cm at a point on the axis at a distance of 4 cm from
The magnetic field directly below it on the ground is the centre is 54 µT. What will be its value at the centre of the
(µ 0 = 4π × 10 TmA ) −7 −1
[AIEEE 2008] loop [AIEEE 2004]

(a) 250 µ T (b) 150 µ T

(a) 5 × 10 –6 T northward
(c) 125 µ T (d) 75 µ T
(b) 5 × 10 –6 T southward
9. A battery is connected between two points A and B on the
(c) 2.5 × 10 –7 T northward
circumference of a uniform conducting ring of radius r and
(d) 2.5 × 10 –7 T southward
resistance R. One of the arcs AB of the ring subtends an
5. An infinitely long conductor PQR is bent to form a right angle θ at the centre. The value of the magnetic induction
angle as shown. A current I flows through PQR. The at the centre due to the current in the ring is [IIT 1995]
magnetic field due to this current at the point M is H1. Now
(a) Proportional to 2 (180 ° − θ )
another infinitely long straight conductor QS is connected at
Q so that the current is I/2 in QR as well as in QS, the (b) Inversely proportional to r
current in PQ remaining unchanged. The magnetic field at (c) Zero, only if θ = 180°
M is now H 2. The ratio H 1 / H 2 is given by (d) Zero for all values of θ
+∞ [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000] 10. A long wire carries a steady current. It is bent into a circle of
M one turn and the magnetic field at the centre of the coil is B.
It is then bent into a circular loop of n turns. The magnetic
90 o field at the centre of the coil for same current will be
I
–∞ +∞ [AIEEE 2004]
P Q 90o S 2
(a) nB (b) n B
(c) 2nB (d) 2n2B
R
11. Two concentric coils each of radius equal to 2π cm are
–∞
placed at right angles to each other. 3 ampere and 4 ampere
1
(a) (b) 1 are the currents flowing in each coil respectively. The
2
magnetic induction in weber / m 2 at the centre of the coils
2
(c) (d) 2 will be (µ 0 = 4π × 10 −7 Wb / A.m) [AIEEE 2005]
3
6. A long straight wire along the z-axis carries a current I in the (a) 5 × 10 −5 (b) 7 × 10 −5
→
negative z direction. The magnetic vector field B at a point (c) 12 × 10 −5 (d) 10 −5
having coordinates (x, y) in the z =0 plane is 12. A coil having N turns is wound tightly in the form of a spiral
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002] with inner and outer radii a and b respectively. When a
µ 0 I (yˆi − xˆj ) µ 0 I ( xˆi + yˆj ) current I passes through the coil, the magnetic field at the
(a) (b)
2π (x 2 + y 2 ) 2π (x 2 + y 2 ) centre is [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001; IIT-JEE 2011]

µ 0 NI 2µ 0 NI
µ 0 I (xˆj − yˆi ) µ 0 I (xˆi − yˆj ) (a) (b)
(c) (d) b a
2π (x 2 + y 2 ) 2π (x 2 + y 2 )
µ 0 NI b µ0 I b
7. What will be the resultant magnetic field at origin due to four (c) ln (d) ln
2(b − a) a 2(b − a) a
infinite length wires if each wire produces magnetic field 'B'
at origin 13. A current I flows in an infinitely long wire with cross-section
Y in the form of a semicircular ring of radius R. The magnitude
(a) 4 B 1 of the magnetic induction along its axis is [AIEEE 2011]
i x
(b) 2B i 4 2 µ0 I µ0 I
(a) (b)
x X π 2R 2π 2 R
(c) 2 2B i
3 µ0 I µ0 I
(d) Zero i (c) (d)
2πR 4πR
 Chapter 20 : Magnetic Effect of Current Compact Study Material Page 217

14. A non-planar loop of conducting wire carrying a current I is z z

placed as shown in the figure. Each of the straight sections a 2a 3a
of the loop is of length 2a. The magnetic field due to this (c) x (d) x
a 2a 3a
loop at the point P (a,0,a) points in the direction
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001]
18. An infinitely long hollow conducting cylinder with inner
1
(a) (− ˆj + kˆ) y
radius R / 2 and outer radius R carries a uniform current
2 z
density along its length. The magnitude of the magnetic

1 field, B as a function of the radial distance r from the axis
(b) (−ˆj + kˆ + ˆi )
3 is best represented by [IIT-JEE 2012]
x
1 ˆ ˆ ˆ i
(c) (i + j + k)
3  
| B| | B|
2a
1 ˆ ˆ (a) (b)
(d) (i + k)
2
r r
15. The magnetic induction at the centre O in the figure shown R/2 R R/2 R
is [IIT 1988]  
| B| | B|
µ0 I  1 1 
(a)  − 
4  R1 R2 
 (c) (d)
R2 r
µ0 I  1 1  r
(b)  +  R/2 R R/2 R
4  R1 R2  19. A charge Q is uniformly distributed over the surface of non-
R1
µ0 I conducting disc of radius R. The disc rotates about an axis
(c) (R1 − R2 ) perpendicular to its plane and passing through its centre
4 O
with an angular velocity ω . As a result of this rotation a
µ0 I
(d) (R1 + R2 ) magnetic field of induction B is obtained at the centre of the
4 disc. If we keep both the amount of charge placed on the
16. Two identical wires A and B, each of length l, carry the disc and its angular velocity to be constant and vary the
same current l . Wire A is bent into a circle of radius R radius of the disc then the variation of the magnetic
and wire B is bent to form a square of side ' a'. If B A and induction at the centre of the disc will be represented by the
figure [AIEEE 2012]
BB are the values of magnetic field at the centres of the
BA
circle and square respectively, then the ratio is
BB (a) (b)
B B
[JEE (Main) 2016]
π2 π2 R R
(a) (b)
16 2 16
π2 π2
(c) (d)
8 2 8
 (c) B (d) B
17. A magnetic field B = B0 ˆj exists in the region a < x < 2a
 R
and B = − B0ˆj , in the region 2a < x < 3a, where B0 is a R
positive constant. A positive point charge moving with a 20. A symmetric star shaped conducting wire loop is carrying a
 steady state current I as shown in the figure. The distance
velocity V = V ˆi , where V is a positive constant, enters the
0 0
between the diametrically opposite vertices of the star is 4a.
magnetic field at x = a. The trajectory of the charge in this
The magnitude of the magnetic field at the center of the
region can be like [IIT-JEE 2007]
B0 loop is [JEE 2017]
µ0 I
0 x (a) 6[ 3 − 1]
a 2a 3a 4π a
µ0 I I
(b) 6[ 3 + 1]
4π a
z z 4a
µ0 I
(c) 3[2 − 3 ]
a 2a 3a 4π a
(a) x (b) x
a 2a 3a µ0 I
(d) 3[ 3 − 1]
4π a
 Page 218 Compact Study Material Chapter 20 : Magnetic Effect of Current

21. A bar magnet is hung by a thin cotton thread in a uniform 25. Two very long, straight and insulated wires are kept at 90°
horizontal magnetic field and is in equilibrium state. The angle from each other in xy − plane as shown in the figure.
energy required to rotate it by 60º is W. Now the torque y
required to keep the magnet in this new position is
I d
3W 2W P x
(a) (b) d
2 3
I
W
(c) (d) 3W
3
22. A current loop, having two circular arcs joined by two radial
lines is shown in the figure. It carries a current of 10A. The
These wires carry currents of equal magnitude I, whose
magnetic field at point O will be close to [JEE (Main) 2019]
directions are shown in the figure. The net magnetic field at
O
(a) 1.0 × 10−5 T point P will be [JEE (Main) 2019]

3cm µ0 I
(b) 1.0 × 10−7 T
θ=45 (a) (xˆ + yˆ) (b) Zero
2π d
Q R µ0 I +µ0 I
(c) 1.5 × 10−5 T 2cm (c) − (xˆ + yˆ) (d) (ˆz )
2π d πd
(d) 1.5 × 10−7 T P S 26. The magnitude of the magnetic filed at the center of an
l=10 cm
equilateral triangular loop of side 1 m which is carrying a
23. One of the two identical conducting wires of length L in bent
current of 10 A is
in the form of a circular loop and the other one into a
circular coil of N identical turns. If the same current is passed (Take µ0 = 4π × 10−7 NA−2 ) [JEE (Main) 2019]
in both, the ratio of the magnetic field at the central of the (a) 18µT (b) 1µT
BL (c) 9µT (d) 3µT
loop (BL ) to that at the centre of the coil (BC ) , i.e. will
BC
27. Find the magnetic filed at point P due to a straight line
be [JEE (Main) 2019] segment AB of length 6 cm carrying a current of 5 A . (See
1 1 figure) (µ0 = 4π × 10−7 N − A−2 ) [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) (b) 2
N N
P
(a) 3.0 × 10−5 T
(c) N2 (d) N
24. As shown in the figure, two infinitely long, identical wires are (b) 1.5 × 10−5 T
5cm 5cm
bent by 90° and placed in such a way that the segments
LP and QM are along the x − axis, while segments PS
(c) 2.0 × 10−5 T

and QN are parallel to the y − axis. If OP = OQ = 4cm (d) 2.5 × 10−5 T A B

6cm
−4
and the magnitude of the magnetic field at O is 10 T
28. A particle of charge − 16 × 10 −18 coulomb moving with
and the two wires carry equal currents (see figure), the
magnitude of the current in each wire and the direction of velocity 10 ms −1 along the x-axis enters a region where a
the magnetic field at O will be magnetic field of induction B is along the y-axis, and an
electric field of magnitude 10 4 V/m is along the negative
(µ0 = 4π × 10 −7 NA−2 ) [JEE (Main) 2019]
z-axis. If the charged particle continues moving along the
S y x-axis, the magnitude of B is [AIEEE 2003]
(a) 10 −3 wb / m 2 (b) 10 3 wb / m 2
5 2
O (c) 10 wb / m (d) 1016 wb / m 2
L P x 29. A charged particle with charge q enters a region of constant,
M
→ →
uniform and mutually orthogonal fields E and B with a
→ → →
N velocity v perpendicular to both E and B , and comes out
→
(a) 40 A , perpendicular out of the page without any change in magnitude or direction of v . Then
[AIEEE 2007]
(b) 40 A , perpendicular into the page
→ → → → → →
(c) 20 A , perpendicular out of the page (a) v = E × B/ B 2 (b) v = B × E/ B 2
→ → → → → →
(d) 20 A , perpendicular into the page (c) v = E × B/ E 2 (d) v = B × E/ E 2
 Chapter 20 : Magnetic Effect of Current Compact Study Material Page 219

30. For a positively charged particle moving in a x-y plane 35. A particle of mass m and charge q moves with a constant
initially along the x-axis, there is a sudden change in its path velocity v along the positive x direction. It enters a region
due to the presence of electric and/or magnetic fields containing a uniform magnetic field B directed along the
negative z direction, extending from x = a to x = b. The
beyond P. The curved path is shown in the x-y plane and is minimum value of v required so that the particle can just
found to be non-circular. Which one of the following enter the region x > b is [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002]
combinations is possible [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003] (a) qb B / m (b) q(b − a)B / m
(a) E = 0; B = bˆi + ckˆ y (c) qa B / m (d) q(b + a)B / 2m
36. A proton, a deuteron and an α − particle having the same
(b) E = aˆi ; B = ckˆ + aˆi
P kinetic energy are moving in circular trajectories in a
x constant magnetic field. If rp , rd and rα denote respectively
(c) E = 0; B = cˆj + bkˆ
the radii of the trajectories of these particles, then
(d) E = aˆi ; B = ckˆ + bˆj [IIT 1997 Re-Exam; AIEEE 2012]
(a) rα = rp < rd (b) rα > rd > rp
31. A charge moves in a circle perpendicular to a magnetic field.
The time period of revolution is independent of (c) rα = rd > rp (d) rp = rd = rα

[AIEEE 2002] 37. An electron moving with a speed u along the positive x-axis
(a) Magnetic field (b) Charge at y = 0 enters a region of uniform magnetic field B = − B kˆ 0

(c) Mass of the particle (d) Velocity of the particle which exists to the right of y-axis. The electron exits from the
region after some time with the speed v at co-ordinate y,
32. An electron and a proton with equal momentum enter then [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004]
perpendicularly into a uniform magnetic field, then
y
[AIEEE 2002]
× × × × ×
(a) The path of proton shall be more curved than that of
× × × × ×
electron
× × × × ×
(b) The path of proton shall be less curved than that of u × × × × ×
electron e–
x
× × × × ×
(c) Both are equally curved
(d) Path of both will be straight line (a) v > u, y < 0 (b) v = u, y > 0
(c) v > u, y > 0 (d) v = u, y < 0
33. Two particles A and B of masses m A and m B respectively 
38. A particle of mass M and charge Q moving with velocity v
and having the same charge are moving in a plane. A describes a circular path of radius R when subjected to a
uniform magnetic field exists perpendicular to this plane. uniform transverse magnetic field of induction B. The work
The speeds of the particles are v A and v B respectively, and done by the field when the particle completes one full circle
is [AIEEE 2003]
the trajectories are as shown in the figure. Then
 Mv 2 
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001] (a) B Qv 2π R (b)   2π R

 R 
• • • •
• • • •
(c) Zero (d) BQ 2π R
• • A• • • • • •
39. A particle having the same charge as of electron moves in a
• • • • • • • • circular path of radius 0.5 cm under the influence of a
B
• • • •
• • • •
magnetic field of 0.5T . If an electric field of 100 V / m
• • • • • • • •
makes it to move in a straight path, then the mass of the
particle is (Given charge of electron = 1.6 × 10 −19 C)
(a) m A v A < m B v B (b) m A v A > m B v B [JEE (Main) 2019]
(c) m A < m B and v A < v B (d) m A = m B and v A = v B (a) 2.0 × 10 −24 kg (b) 1.6 × 10 −27 kg

34. A charged particle of mass m and charge q travels in a (c) 9.1 × 10 −31 kg (d) 1.6 × 10 −19 kg
circular path of radius r that is perpendicular to a magnetic 40. In an experiment, electrons are accelerated, from rest, by
field B. The time taken by the particle to complete one applying a voltage of 500V . Calculate the radius of the
path if a magnetic field 100 mT is then applied.
revolution is [AIEEE 2005]
2πqB 2π m [Charge of the electron = 1.6 × 10−19 C
(a) (b)
m qB Mass of the electron = 9.1 × 10 −31 kg] [JEE (Main) 2019]
−2
(a) 7.5 × 10 m (b) 7.5m
2π m q 2π q 2 B
(c) (d) (c) 7.5 × 10 −4 m (d) 7.5 × 10 −3 m
B m
 Page 220 Compact Study Material Chapter 20 : Magnetic Effect of Current

41. A particle of mass m and charge q is in an electric and 46. Wires 1 and 2 carrying currents i1 and i2 respectively are
  inclined at an angle θ to each other. What is the force on a
magnetic field given by E = 2ˆi + 3ˆj ; Β = 4 ˆj + 6kˆ .
small element dl of wire 2 at a distance of r from wire 1 (as
The charged particle is shifted from the origin to the point
shown in figure) due to the magnetic field of wire 1
P(x = 1; y = 1) along a straight path. The magnitude of the
[AIEEE 2002]
total work done is [JEE (Main) 2019]
µ0
(a) 5q (b) (2.5)q (a) i1 i 2 dl tanθ
2π r  
(c) (0.35)q (d) (0.15)q
µ0
42. The region between y = 0 and y = d contains a magnetic (b) i1 i 2 dl sin θ
2π r i1 i2

field B = Bˆz . A particle of mass m and charge q enters the r
µ0
(c) i1 i 2 dl cos θ dl
 mv 2π r
region with a velocity ν = vˆi . if d = , the acceleration θ
2qB µ0
of the charged particle at the point of its emergence at the (d) i1 i 2 dl sin θ
4π r
other side is [JEE (Main) 2019]
47. Three long straight wires are connected parallel to each
qvΒ  1 ˆ 3 
ˆj  qvΒ  3 ˆ 1 ˆ other across a battery of negligible internal resistance. The
(a) i− (b) i+ j
m 2 2 
 m  2 2  ratio of their resistances are 3 : 4 : 5. What is the ratio of
distances of middle wire from the others if the net force
qvΒ  ˆi + ˆj  qVB  − ˆj + ˆi 
(c) (d)   experienced by it is zero
m  2  m  2 
(a) 4 : 3 (b) 3 : 1
43. A proton, an electron and a helium nucleus, have the same (c) 5 : 3 (d) 2 : 3
energy. They are in circular orbits in a plane due to 48. A conducting loop carrying a current I is placed in a uniform
magnetic field perpendicular to the plane. Let rp , re and rHe
magnetic field pointing into the plane of the paper as shown.
be their respective radii, then, [JEE (Main) 2019] The loop will have a tendency to [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003]
(a) re > rp = rHe (b) re > rp > rHe B
(a) Contract Y
⊗
(c) re < rp < rHe (d) re < rp = rHe
(b) Expand
44. An electron moving along the x-axis with an initial energy of X
(c) Move towards +ve x -axis
100 eV , enters a region of magnetic field
(d) Move towards –ve x-axis i
B = (1.5 × 10−3 T)kˆ at S (See figure). The field extends
between x = 0 and x = 2 cm . The electron is detected at 49. Two coaxial solenoids of different radii carry current I in
the point Q on a screen placed 8 cm away from the point the same direction. Let F1 be the magnetic force on the
S . The distance d between P and Q (on the screen) is
inner solenoid due to the outer one and F2 be the magnetic
(electron’s charge = 1.6 × 10−19 C , mass of electron
force on the outer solenoid due to the inner one. Then
= 9.1 × 10 −31 kg) [JEE (Main) 2019] [JEE (Main) 2015]
Q
(a) F1 = F2 = 0
d (b) F1 is radially inwards and F2 is radially outwards

S (c) F1 is radially inwards and F2 = 0

P
2cm (d) F1 is radially outwards and F2 = 0
8cm 50. A thin flexible wire of length L is connected to two adjacent
(a) 12.87 cm (b) 1.22 cm fixed points carries a current I in the clockwise direction, as
(c) 2.25 cm (d) 11.65 cm shown in the figure. When system is put in a uniform
45. Two very long, straight and parallel wires carry steady magnetic field of strength B going into the plane of paper,
currents I and − I respectively. The distance between the the wire takes the shape of a circle. The tension in the wire is
wires is d. At a certain instant of time, a point charge q is at [IIT-JEE 2010]
a point equidistant from the two wires in the plane of the
wires. Its instantaneous velocity v is perpendicular to this
plane. The magnitude of the force due to the magnetic field
acting on the charge at this instant is [IIT 1998]
µ 0 Iqv µ 0 Iqv IBL
(a) (b) (a) IBL (b)
2π d πd π
2µ 0 Iqv IBL IBL
(c) (d) 0 (c) (d)
πd 2π 4π
 Chapter 20 : Magnetic Effect of Current Compact Study Material Page 221

51. A rectangular loop of sides 10 cm and 5 cm carrying a 54. An ionized gas contains both positive and negative ions. If it
current I of 12 A is placed in different orientations as shown is subjected simultaneously to an electric field along the +x
in the figures below z direction and a magnetic field along the +z direction, then
z [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000]
(a) Positive ions deflect towards +y direction and negative
I B
ions towards –y direction
(1) B (2) (b) All ions deflect towards +y direction
I I I
y (c) All ions deflect towards –y direction
y I
I I (d) Positive ions deflect towards –y direction and negative
I ions towards +y direction
x
x 55. A particle of charge q and mass m moves in a circular orbit
z of radius r with angular speed ω . The ratio of the
z
magnitude of its magnetic moment to that of its angular
B momentum depends on [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000]
(3) I (4) B (a) ω and q (b) ω , q and m
I
I
y (c) q and m (d) ω and m
y
I I I 56. Two particles each of mass m and charge q are attached to
I
I the two ends of a light rigid rod of length 2R. The rod is
x x
rotated at constant angular speed about a perpendicular axis
If there is a uniform magnetic field of 0.3 T in the positive z passing through its centre. The ratio of the magnitudes of
direction, in which orientations the loop would be in the magnetic moment of the system and its angular
(i) Stable equilibrium and (ii) Unstable equilibrium momentum about the centre of the rod is [IIT 1998]
[JEE (Main) 2015] (a) q / 2m (b) q / m
(a) (1) and (2), respectively (b) (1) and (3), respectively (c) 2q / m (d) q / πm
(c) (2) and (4), respectively (d) (2) and (3), respectively 57. A current carrying loop is placed in a uniform magnetic field
52. A steady current i flows in a small square loop of wire of side in four different orientations, I, II, III & IV. Arrange them in
the decreasing order of potential energy
L in a horizontal plane. The loop is now folded about its
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003]
middle such that half of it lies in a vertical plane. Let µ1 and

µ 2 respectively denote the magnetic moments due to the n̂

B B
current loop before and after folding. Then [IIT-JEE 1993] I. II.
n̂
(a) µ 2 = 0
n̂
(b) µ1 and µ 2 are in the same direction
B B
| µ1 | III. IV.
(c) = 2 n̂
| µ2 |
(a) I > III > II > IV (b) I > II >III > IV
| µ 1| 1  (c) I > IV > II > III (d) III > IV > I > II
(d) =  

| µ2 |  2  58. Two long parallel wires are at a distance 2d apart. They
53. A loop carrying current I lies in the x-y plane as shown in the carry steady equal currents flowing out of the plane of the
paper, as shown. The variation of the magnetic field B along
figure. The unit vector k̂ is coming out of the plane of the the line XX’ is given by
paper. The magnetic moment of the current loop is [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000; AIEEE 2010]
[IIT JEE 2012]
y B B
(a) (b)
X' X X'
X
I
a
x
d d d d
a
B B
(c) (d)
π 
(a) a 2 Ikˆ (b)  + 1a 2 Ikˆ X X' X X'
 2 
π 
(c) −  + 1a 2 Ikˆ (d) (2π + 1)a 2 Ikˆ
2  d d d d
 Page 222 Compact Study Material Chapter 20 : Magnetic Effect of Current

59. An infinitely long current carrying wire and a small current 63. A moving coil galvanometer has a coil with 175 turns and
carrying loop are in the plane of the paper as shown. The area 1cm2 . If uses a torsion band of torsion constant
radius of the loop is a and distance of its centre from the
wire is d (d>>a). If the loop applies a force F on the wire 10 −6 N − m / rad . The coil is placed in a magnetic field B
then [JEE (Main) 2019] parallel to its plane. The coil deflects by 1° for a current of
1 m A . The value of B (in Tesla) is approximately
[JEE (Main) 2019]
−2 −1
(a) 10 (b) 10
(c) 10−3 (d) 10−4
64. Two wires A and B are carrying currents I 1 and I 2 as
2 shown in the figure. The separation between them is d . A
a third wire C carrying a current I is to be kept parallel to
(a) F = 0 (b) F ∝  
d them at a distance x from A such that the net force acting
on it is zero. The possible values of x are
 a2  a
(c) F ∝  3 
 (d) F ∝   C
d  d A B

60. A circular coil having N turns and radius r carries a I2

I1
current I. It is held in the XZ plane in a magnetic field B ˆi . x

The torque on the coil due to the magnetic field is d

[JEE (Main) 2019]
[JEE (Main) 2019]
 I1  I2
(a) x =  d and x =
 d
Br 2 I  I1 − I 2  (I 1 − I 2 )
(a) (b) Zero
πN
 I   I2 
(b) x =  2  d and x =  d
 I −I 
 I1 + I 2
2
Bπ r I   1 2 
(c) (d) Bπ r 2 I N
N  I   I2 
(c) x =  2  d and x = 
 I +I
d

61. A rectangular coil (Dimension 5 cm × 2.5 cm) with 100  I1 − I 2   1 2 
turns, carrying a current of 3 A in the clock-wise direction, I1d
(d) x = ±
is kept centered at the origin and in the X − Z plane . A (I 1 − I 2 )
magnetic field of 1 T is applied along X − axis. If the coil is 65. A square loop is carrying a steady current I and the
magnitude of its magnetic dipole moment is m . If this
tilted through 45° about Z − axis, then the torque on the square loop is changed to a circular loop and it carries the
coil is [JEE (Main) 2019] same current, the magnitude of the magnetic dipole moment
(a) 0.27 Nm (b) 0.55 Nm of circular loop will be [JEE (Main) 2019]
4m m
(c) 0.38 Nm (d) 0.42 Nm (a) (b)
π π
62. A rigid square loop of side ' a ' and carrying current I 2 is 2m 3m
(c) (d)
lying on a horizontal surface near a long current I1 carrying π π
66. A very long wire ABDMNDC is shown in figure carrying
wire in the same plane as shown in figure. The net force on current I. AB and BC parts are straight, long and at right
the loop due to the wire will be angle. At D wire forms a circular turn DMND of radius R.
i1 i2 AB, BC parts are tangential to circular turn at N and D .
Magnetic field at the centre of circle is
a M
N
a B
[JEE (Main) 2019] D C
(a) Zero
µ 0 I1 I 2 A
(b) Repulsive and equal to
4π [JEE (Main) 2020]
µ 0 I1 I 2 µ0 I  1  µ0 I
(c) Attractive and equal to (a) π +  (b)
3π 2π R  2  2R

µ 0 I1 I 2 µ0 I  1  µ0 I
(d) Repulsive and equal to (c) π −  (d) (π + 1)
2π 2π R  2  2π R
 Chapter 20 : Magnetic Effect of Current Compact Study Material Page 223

67. A square loop of side 2a, and carrying current I, is kept in 71. The fractional change in the magnetic field intensity at a
XZ plane with its centre at origin. A long wire carrying the distance 'r' from centre on the axis of current carrying coil of
same current I is placed parallel to the z-axis and passing radius 'a' to the magnetic field intensity at the centre of the
through the point (0, b, 0), (b >> a). The magnitude of the same coil is (Take r < a) [JEE (Main) 2021]

torque on the loop about z-axis is given by 2a 2

3a 2
(a) (b)
[JEE (Main) 2020] 3 r2 2 r2
µ 0 I 2a 2 µ 0 I 2a 3 3 r2 2 r2
(a) (b) (c) 2
(d)
2π b 2π b2 2a 3 a2
72. A small square loop of side 'a' and one turn is placed inside
2 µ 0 I 2a 2 2 µ 0 I 2a 3 a larger square loop of side b and one turn (b >> a). The
(c) (d)
πb π b2 two loops are coplanar with their centres coinciding. If a
current I is passed in the square loop of side 'b', then the
68. A charged particle carrying charge 1 µ C is moving with
coefficient of mutual inductance between the two loops is
velocity (2 ˆi + 3 ˆj + 4 kˆ) ms −1 . If an external magnetic field of [JEE (Main) 2021]
µ0 a2 µ0 b2
(5 ˆi + 3 ˆj − 6 kˆ) × 10 −3 T exists in the region where the (a) 8 2 (b) 8 2
4π b 4π a
particle is moving then the force on the particle is
  µ0 8 2 µ0 8 2
F × 10 −9 N . The vector F is [JEE (Main) 2020] (c) (d)
4π b 4π a
(a) − 0.30 ˆi + 0.32 ˆj − 0.09 kˆ 73. A square loop of side 20 cm and resistance 1 Ω is moved
towards right with a constant speed v0 . The right arm of the
(b) − 30 ˆi + 32 ˆj − 9 kˆ
loop is in a uniform magnetic field of 5 T . The field is
(c) − 300 ˆi + 320 ˆj − 90 kˆ perpendicular to the plane of the loop and is going into it.
The loop is connected to a network of resistors each of value
(d) − 3.0 ˆi + 3.2 ˆj − 0.9 kˆ 4 Ω. What should be the value of v 0 so that a steady
current of 2 mA flows in the loop
69. An electron gun is placed inside a long solenoid of radius R
on its axis. The solenoid has n turns/length and carries a
current I . The electron gun shoots an electron along the
radius of the solenoid with speed v . If the electron does not
hit the surface of the solenoid, maximum possible value of
4Ω 4Ω
v is (all symbols have their standard meaning)
P
R
4Ω Q 4Ω
z

y [JEE (Main) 2021]

v0
x (a) 10 −2 cm / s (b) 1 cm / s

[JEE (Main) 2020] (c) 1 m / s (d) 10 2 m / s

eµ 0 nIR eµ 0 nIR
(a) (b)
2m m
2eµ 0 nIR eµ 0 nIR Numerical Questions :
(c) (d)
m 4m 74. A circular conducting coil of radius 1 m is being heated by
70. A hairpin like shape as shown in figure is made by bending 
the change of magnetic field B passing perpendicular to the
a long current carrying wire. What is the magnitude of a
plane in which the coil is laid. The resistance of the coil is
magnetic field at point P which lies on the centre of the
semicircle [JEE (Main) 2021] 2 µ Ω . The magnetic field is slowly switched off such that its
I
magnitude changes in time as
r
P I
4  t 
B= × 10 −3 T 1 − 
Ie π  100 
µ0 I µ0 I
(a) (2 − π ) (b) (2 − π ) The energy dissipated by the coil before the magnetic field is
2π r 4π r
switched off completely is E = ________ mJ
µ0 I µ0 I
(c) (2 + π ) (d) (2 + π )
2π r 4π r [JEE (Main) 2021]
 Page 224 Compact Study Material Chapter 20 : Magnetic Effect of Current

CRITICAL QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 b 2 d 3 b 4 a 5 a 6 c 7 a 8 a 9 c 10 a

11 b 12 b 13 c 14 b 15 a 16 d 17 b 18 b 19 c 20 a

21 d 22 a 23 a 24 a 25 d 26 b 27 b 28 a 29 b 30 a

31 c 32 b 33 c 34 c 35 a 36 d 37 d 38 a 39 b 40 c

41 b 42 b 43 b 44 c 45 c 46 b 47 c

PAST YEAR QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 d 2 b 3 c 4 b 5 c 6 a 7 c 8 a 9 d 10 b

11 a 12 c 13 a 14 d 15 a 16 c 17 a 18 d 19 a 20 a

21 d 22 c 23 b 24 d 25 b 26 a 27 b 28 b 29 a 30 b

31 d 32 c 33 b 34 b 35 b 36 a 37 d 38 c 39 a 40 c

41 a 42 b 43 c 44 b 45 d 46 c 47 c 48 b 49 a 50 c

51 c 52 c 53 b 54 c 55 c 56 a 57 c 58 b 59 b 60 d

61 a 62 b 63 c 64 d 65 a 66 a 67 c 68 b 69 a 70 d

71 c 72 a 73 b 74 80

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER
IMPORTANT POINTS
21 Magnetism
 If at any place the angle of dip is θ and magnetic latitude is
 Magnetic moment of straight current carrying wire is zero. λ then tan θ = 2tanλ

 Magnetic moment of toroid is zero  At the poles and equator of earth the values of total
intensity are 0.66 and 0.33 oersted respectively.
 When a magnetic dipole of moment M moves from
 Remember time period of oscillation in difference position
unstable equilibrium to stable equilibrium position in a magnetic
is greater than that in sum position Td > Ts .
field B, the kinetic energy will decrease by 2 MB.
 If a rectangular bar magnet is cut in n equal parts then time
 Intensity of magnetisation (I) is produced in materials due
1
to spin motion of electrons. period of each part will be times that of complete magnet
n
 Atoms which have paired electrons have the magnetic T T
moment zero. (i.e. T ' = ) while for short magnet T ' = . If nothing is said
n n
 Magnetostriction : The length of an iron bar changes when then bar magnet is treated as short magnet.
it is magnetised. When an iron bar is magnetised its length
 Suppose a magnetic needle is vibrating in earth’s magnetic
increases due to alignment of spins parallel to the field. This
field. With temperature rise M decreases hence time period (T)
increase is in the direction of magnetisation. This effect is known
increases but at 770oC (Curie temperature) it stops vibrating.
as magnetostriction.
 An iron cored coil and a bulb are connected in series with
 A current carrying solenoid can be treated as the
an ac generator. If an iron rod is introduced inside a coil, then
arrangement of small magnetic dipoles placed in line with each
the intensity of bulb will decrease, because some energy lost in
other as shown. The number of such small magnetic dipoles is
magnetising the rod.
equal to the number of turns in the solenoid.
 Hysteresis energy loss = Area bound by the hysteresis loop
= VAnt Joule; where , V = Volume of ferromagnetic sample,
A = Area of B – H loop, n = Frequency of alternating magnetic
field and t = Time
≡ ≡ S N
eh
 Bohr magneton µ B = = 9.27×10–24 A/m2 . It serves as
 For protecting a sensitive equipment from the external 4πm
magnetic field it should be placed inside a soft iron case. This natural unit of magnetic moment. Bohr magneton can be defined
phenomenon is called magnetic screening or shielding. as the orbital magnetic moment of an electron circulating in inner
most orbit.

B=0
Critical Questions
1. The hysteresis loss for a specimen of iron weighing 12 kg is
equivalent of 300 Jm−3 cycle−1. Find the loss of energy per
 Apparent dip : In a vertical plane inclined at an angle β to
the magnetic meridian, vertical component of earth's magnetic hour at 50cycle s −1. (Given, density of iron is 7500 kg /m3 )
field remains unchanged while in the new inclined plane
(a) 86000 J (b) 86400 J
horizontal component B' H = B H cos β
(c) 95000 J (d) 50000 J
φ ' = apparent angle of dip BH Magnetic meridian

2. In a permanent magnet at room temperature,

BV BV β
BH cosβ
and tan φ ' = = φ′ (a) Magnetic moment of each molecule is zero
BH' BH cos β
(b) The individual molecules have non-zero magnetic
tan φ B′
⇒ tan φ ' = BV moments which are all perfectly aligned
cos β
(c) Domains are partially aligned
Inclined plane
(d) Domains are all perfectly aligned
Page 226 Compact Study Material Chapter 21 : Magnetism

3. A paramagnetic sample shows a net magnetisation of 9. Dimensions of BH are

8 Am−1 when placed in an external magnetic field of (a) [M 1 L−1T −2 A0 ] (b) [ M 0 L−1T 0 A]
0.6T at a temperature of 4 K. When the same sample is
(c) [M 0 L−1T −2 A] (d) [ M 0 L2T 0 A]
placed in an external magnetic field of 0.2 T at temperature
of 16 K, the magnesisation of sample will be 10. The current I -H curve for a paramagnetic material is best
32 2 represented by which figure
(a) Am−1 (b) Am−1
3 3 Y Y
−1 −1 I
(c) 6 Am (d) 2.4 Am I
4. The variation of magnetic susceptibility ( χ ) with (a) (b)
temperature for a diamagnetic substance is best represented
by which figure X X
O H O H
Y Y
χ χ
IX I

(c) (d)
(a) (b)
X X
O T O T O H O H

χ χ 11. A sample of paramagnetic salt contains 2 × 10 24 atomic

dipoles, each of dipole moment 1.5 × 10−23 J /T. The
(c) (d) sample is placed under a homogeneous magnetic field of
O T O T
0.84 T and cooled a temperature of 4.2 K. The degree of
magnetic saturation achieved is equal to temperature of 2.8
5. A short bar magnet with the North pole facing North forms a K is
neutral point at P in the horizontal plane. If the magnet is (a) 3 × 10−3 J /T (b) 4π × 10−6 J /T
rotated by 90° in the horizontal plane, the net magnetic
induction at P is (horizontal component of the earth’s (c) 7.9 J /T (d) 7 × 104 J /T
magnetic field = BH ) 12. Consider the given statement with respect to the figure
(a) Zero (b) 2 BH showing a bar of diamagnetic material placed in an external
magnetic field and choose the correct statement.
5
(c) BH (d) 5 BH
2
6. A magnetic material of volume 30 cm3 is placed in a
magnetic field of intensity 5 oersted. The magnetic moment
produced due to its 6 A/m2. The value of magnetic
induction will be
I. The field lines are repelled or expelled and the field
(a) 0.2517T (b) 0.025T
inside the material is reduced.
(c) 0.0025T (d) 25T II. When placed in a non-uniform magnetic field, the bar
7. The total magnetic flux in a material, which produces a pole will tends to move from high to low field.
III. Reduction in the field inside the material is slight being
of strength mp when a magnetic material of cross-sectional
one part in 10 5 .
area A is placed in a magnetic field of strength H, will be Correct option is
(a) µ0 ( AH + mp ) (b) µ 0 AH (a) Only I (b) Both II and III
µ0 mp (c) Both I and III (d) I, II and III
(c) (d) µ0 (mp AH + A)
13. A rod of ferromagnetic material with dimensions
8. Two bar magnets having same geometry with magnetic 10 cm × 0.5 cm × 0.2 cm is placed in a magnetic field of
moments m and 2 m are firstly placed in such a way that
their similar poles are on the same side and its period of strength 0.5 × 104 Am−1 .As result of which a magnetic
oscillation is T1. Now, the polarity one of the magnets is moment of 5 A-m2 is produced in the rod. The value of
reversed and its time period becomes T2 . Then, magnetic induction will be
(a) T1 < T2 (b) T1 > T2 (a) 0.54 T (b) 0.358T

(c) T1 = T2 (d) T2 = ∞ (c) 2.519 T (d) 6.28 T

Chapter 21 : Magnetism Compact Study Material Page 227

14. A Rowland ring of mean radius 15cm has 3500 turns 3. A magnetic needle is kept in a non-uniform magnetic field. It
of wire wound on a ferromagnetic core of relative experiences [AIEEE 2005]
permeability 800. The magnetic field (B) in the core for a (a) A force and a torque
magnetising current of 1.2 A is (b) A force but not a torque
(a) 4 T (b) 4.48 T (c) A torque but not a force
(d) Neither a torque nor a force
(c) 7.9T (d) 3 T
4. The dipole moment of a circular loop carrying a current I ,
15. A domain in ferromagnetic iron is in the form of a cube of is m and the magnetic field at the centre of the loop is B1 .
side length 1 µ m. Estimate the number of iron atoms in the
When the dipole moment is double by keeping the current
domain. The molecular mass of iron is 55 g /mol and its constant, the magnetic field at the centre of loop is B 2 . The
density is 7.8 g /cm3. B1
ratio is [JEE (Main) 2018]
B2
(a) 8.65 × 10 − 10 atoms (b) 8 × 10 −13 atoms
5
(c) 8 × 10 atoms (d) 8.65 × 1010 atoms 1
(a) 2 (b)
16. A solenoid has core of a material with relative permeability 2
400. The windings of the solenoid are insulated from the
(c) 2 (d) 3
core and carry a current of 2 A. If the number of turns is
1000 per metre, calculate H and M. 5. An insulating thin rod of length l has a linear charge density
x
(a) 2 × 103 Am−1, 8 × 105 Am−1 ρ (x) = ρ0 on it. The rod is rotated about an axis passing
l
(b) 1 Am−1, 1.5 × 105 Am−1 through the origin ( x = 0) and perpendicular to the rod. If
(c) 6.8 × 10−5 Am−1, 1.2 × 10−5 Am−1 the rod makes n rotations per seconds, then the time
averaged magnetic moment of the rod is [JEE (Main) 2019]
(d) 2.1 × 10−4 Am−1, − 2.6 × 10−5 Am−1 π
(a) nρ l 3 (b) π nρ l 3
2
E µ 0ε 0 4
17. The dimensional formula for the physical quantity
B2 (c)
π
nρ l 3 (d) nρ l 3
is (E = electric field and B = magnetic field) 3
(a) L0 M 0 T 0 (b) L1 M 0 T − 1 6. Two magnetic dipoles X and Y are placed at a separation
(c) L− 1 M 0 T 1 (d) L1/ 2 M 0 T −1/ 2 d , with their axes perpendicular to each other. The dipole
18. A conductor of length l and mass m is placed along the east- moment of Y is twice that of X . A particle of charge q is
west line on a table. Suddenly a certain amount of charge is passing through their mid-point P , at angle θ = 45° with
passed through it and it is found to jump to a height h. The
the horizontal line, as shown in figure. What would be the
earth’s magnetic induction is B. The charge passed through
magnitude of force on the particle at that instant ( d is much
the conductor is
larger than the dimensions of the dipole)
1 2gh
(a) (b) d
Bmgh Blm
gh m 2 gh S
(c) (d) θ
Blm Bl S N
P
X N
Past Year Questions (M) Y
(2 M)
1. The magnetic lines of force inside a bar magnet
[JEE (Main) 2019]
[AIEEE 2003]
(a) Are from south-pole to north-pole of the magnet µ  M  µ  2M
(a) 2 0  3
× qv (b)  0  3
× qv
(b) Are from north-pole to south-pole of the magnet  4π  (d / 2)  4π  (d / 2 )
(c) Do not exist µ  M
(c)  0  × qv (d) 0
(d) Depend upon the area of cross-section of the bar magnet  π  (d / 2 )
3

2. Two identical short bar magnets, each having magnetic

moment M, are placed a distance of 2d apart with axes 7. A magnet of total magnetic moment 10−2ˆi A − m2 is placed
perpendicular to each other in a horizontal plane. The
magnetic induction at a point midway between them is in a time varying magnetic field Bˆi (cos tω t) where B = 1
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000] Tesla and ω = 0 .125 rad / s . The work done for reversing
µ0 M µ0 M the direction of the magnetic moment at t = 1 second is
(a) ( 2) 3 (b) ( 3) 3
4π d 4π d [JEE (Main) 2019]
 2µ  M µ0 M (a) 0 .0198 J (b) 0.007 J
(c)  0  3 (d) ( 5) 3
 π d 4π d (c) 0 .014 J (d) 0.01 J
Page 228 Compact Study Material Chapter 21 : Magnetism

8. Two short bar magnet of length 1 cm each have magnetic 14. A magnetic compass needle oscillates 30 times per minute at
moments 1.20 Am2 and 1.00 Am2 respectively. They are a place where the dip is 45 ° and 40 times per minute
placed on a horizontal table parallel to each other with their where the dip is 30 ° . If B1 and B2 are respectively the
N poles pointing towards the South. They have a common total magnetic field due to the earth at the two places, then
magnetic equator and are separated by a distance of 20.0cm. the ratio B1 / B 2 is best given by [JEE (Main) 2019]
The value of the resultant horizontal magnetic induction at (a) 0.7 (b) 3.6
the mid – point O of the line joining their centres is close to (c) 1.8 (d) 2.2
(Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic induction is 15. A hoop and a solid cylinder of same mass and radius are
−5
3.6 × 10 Wb / m ) 2
[JEE (Main) 2013] made of a permanent magnetic material with their magnetic
moment parallel to their respective axes. But the magnetic
−5 2
(a) 3 .6 × 10 Wb / m (b) 2 .56 × 10 −4 Wb / m 2 moment of hoop is twice of solid cylinder. They are placed
(c) 3 .50 × 10 −4 Wb / m 2 (d) 5 . 80 × 10 −4 Wb / m 2 in a uniform magnetic field in such a manner that their
magnetic moments make a small angle with the field. If the
9. The true value of angle of dip at a place is 60o, the apparent
oscillation periods of hoop and cylinder are Th and Tc
dip in a plane inclined at an angle of 30o with magnetic
meridian is [AIEEE 2002] respectively, then [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) Th = Tc (b) Th = 0 .5 Tc
1
(a) tan −1 (b) tan −1 (2) (c) Th = 2Tc (d) Th = 1 .5 Tc
2
16. Relative permittivity and permeability of a material are ε r
 2
(c) tan −1   (d) None of these and µ r , respectively. Which of the following values of these
3
quantities are allowed for a diamagnetic material [AIEEE 2008]
10. At some location on earth the horizontal component of
(a) ε r = 1 .5, µ r = 0 .5 (b) ε r = 0 .5, µ r = 0 .5
earth’s magnetic field is 18 × 10 −6 T . At this location,
(c) ε r = 1 .5, µ r = 1 .5 (d) ε r = 0 .5, µ r = 1 .5
magnetic needle of length 0.12m and pole strength 1.8 Am
is suspended from its mid-point using a thread, it makes 17. The magnetic moment of a diamagnetic atom is
45 ° angle with horizontal in equilibrium. To keep this (a) Much greater than one (b) 1
needle horizontal, the vertical force that should be applied at (c) Between zero and one (d) Equal to zero
one of its ends is [JEE (Main) 2019] 18. Needles N 1 , N 2 and N 3 are made of a ferromagnetic, a
paramagnetic and a diamagnetic substance respectively.
(a) 6 .5 × 10 −5 N (b) 3.6 × 10 −5 N
A magnet when brought close to them will [AIEEE 2006]
−5 −5
(c) 1 .3 × 10 N (d) 1 .8 × 10 N (a) Attract N 1 strongly, N 2 weakly and repel N 3 weakly
11. The length of a magnet is large compared to its width and
(b) Attract N 1 strongly, but repel N 2 and N 3 weakly
breadth. The time period of its oscillation in a vibration
magnetometer is 2 s. The magnet is cut along its length into (c) Attract all three of them
three equal parts and three parts are then placed on each (d) Attract N 1 and N 2 strongly but repel N 3
other with their like poles together. The time period of this 19. Hysteresis loops for two magnetic materials A and B are
combination will be [AIEEE 2004] given below B B
(a) 2 s (b) 2/3 s
(c) 2 3s (d) 2 / 3 s
H H
12. A thin rectangular magnet suspended freely has a period of
oscillation equal to T. Now it is broken into two equal halves
(each having half of the original length) and one piece is
(A) (B)
made to oscillate freely in the same field. If its period of
These materials are used to make magnets for electric
oscillation is T ′, then ratio T ′ / T is [AIEEE 2003]
generators, transformer core and electromagnet core. Then
1 1 it is proper to use [JEE (Main) 2016]
(a) (b)
4 2 2 (a) A for electromagnets and B for electric generators
1 (b) A for transformers and B for electric generators
(c) (d) 2
2 (c) B for electromagnets and transformers
13. A magnetic needle of magnetic moment 6 .7 × 10 − 2 Am 2 (d) A for electric generators and transformers
20. A paramagnetic substance in the form of a cube with sides
and moment of inertia 7.5 × 10 −6 kgm 2 is performing simple
1cm has a magnetic dipole moment of 20 × 10 − 6 J / T
harmonic oscillations in a magnetic field of 0 .01 T . Time
when a magnetic intensity of 60 × 10 3 A / m is applied. Its
taken for 10 complete oscillations is [JEE (Main) 2017] magnetic susceptibility is [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 8.76 s (b) 6.65 s (a) 4 .3 × 10 − 2 (b) 2 .3 × 10 − 2
(c) 8.89 s (d) 6.98 s (c) 3 . 3 × 10 − 4 (d) 3 .3 × 10 − 2
Chapter 21 : Magnetism Compact Study Material Page 229

21. A paramagnetic material has 10 28 atoms / m 3 . Its magnetic 25. A soft ferromagnetic material is placed in an external
−4 magnetic field. The magnetic domains [JEE (Main) 2021]
susceptibility at temperature 350 K is 2 .8 × 10 . Its
(a) Decrease in size and changes orientation
susceptibility at 300 K is [JEE (Main) 2019]
(b) Increase in size but no change in orientation
(a) 3 .726 × 10 − 4 (b) 3 .672 × 10 − 4 (c) Have no relation with external magnetic field
(c) 3 .267 × 10 − 4 (d) 2.672 × 10 −4 (d) May increase or decrease in size and change its
22. A bar magnet is demagnetized by inserting it inside a orientation
solenoid of length 0.2m, 100 turns and carrying a current of 26. A bar magnet of length 14 cm is placed in the magnetic
meridian with its north pole pointing towards the geographic
5.2 A. The coercivity of the bar magnet is [JEE (Main) 2019]
north pole. A neutral point is obtained at a distance of
(a) 285 A/m (b) 520 A/m 18 cm from the center of the magnet. If BH = 0 .4 G , the
(c) 1200 A/m (d) 2600 A/m
magnetic moment of the magnet is (1G = 10−4 T)
23. A paramagnetic sample shows a net magnetisation of [JEE (Main) 2021]
6 A / m when it is placed in an external magnetic field of
(a) 28 .80 JT −1
(b) 2.880J T −1
0 . 4 T at a temperature of 4 K . When the sample is placed
(c) 2 .880 × 10 3 JT −1 (d) 2 .880 × 10 2 JT −1
in an external magnetic field of 0.3 T at a temperature of
27. Statement I : The ferromagnetic property depends on
24 K , then the magnetisation will be [JEE (Mains) 2020] temperature. At high temperature,
ferromagnet becomes paramagnet
(a) 1 A / m (b) 4 A / m
Statement II : At high temperature, the domain wall
(c) 2.25 A / m (d) 0 . 75 A / m area of a ferromagnetic substance
24. The figure gives experimentally measured B vs. H increases
variation in a ferromagnetic material. The retentivity, In the light of the above statements, choose the most
appropriate answer from the options given below
coercivity and saturation, respectively, of the material are
[JEE (Main) 2021]
(a) Both Statement I and Statement II are true
(T) B
(b) Both Statement I and Statement II are false
2.0 (c) Statement I is true but Statement II is false
1.0 (d) Statement I is false but Statement II is true
–150 –50 Numerical Questions :
H
50 150 A/m 28. Two short magnetic dipoles m1 and m2 each having
– 1.0
magnetic moment of 1 Am2 are placed at point O and P
– 2.0
respectively. The distance between OP is 1 meter . The
[JEE (Main) 2020] torque experienced by the magnetic dipole m2 due to the
(a) 1 .0 T , 50 A / m and 1.5 T presence of m1 is________ × 10−7 Nm [JEE (Main) 2021]
(b) 150 A / m, 1 . 0 T and 1.5 T
m2
m1
(c) 1.5 T , 1 50 A / m and 1.0 T
P
(d) 1 . 5 T , 50 A / m and 1.0 T
O

CRITICAL QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 b 2 c 3 b 4 d 5 d 6 a 7 a 8 a 9 b 10 c

11 c 12 d 13 d 14 b 15 d 16 a 17 a 18 d

PAST YEAR QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 a 2 d 3 a 4 a 5 a 6 d 7 a 8 b 9 b 10 a

11 b 12 c 13 b 14 a 15 a 16 a 17 d 18 a 19 c 20 c

21 c 22 d 23 d 24 a 25 d 26 b 27 c 28 1

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER
IMPORTANT POINTS
22 Electromagnetic Induction
 When a conducting rod falling freely in earth's magnetic
field such that it's length lies along east - west direction then
 Transformer has highest possible efficiency out of all the induced emf continuously increases w.r.t. time and induced
electrical machines.
current flows from west - east.
 dc motor is a highly versatile energy conversion device. It can
 1 henry = 109 emu of inductance or 109 ab-henry.
meet the demand of loads requiring high starting torque, high
accelerating and decelerating torque.  Inductance at the ends of a solenoid is half of it's the
 When a source of emf is connected across the two ends of  1 
inductance at the centre.  Lend = Lcentre  .
the primary winding alone or across the two ends of secondary  2 
winding alone, ohm’s law can be applied. But in the transformer
as a whole, ohm’s law should not be applied because primary
 A thin long wire made up of material of high resistivity
winding and secondary winding are not connected electrically. behaves predominantly as a resistance. But it has some amount
of inductance as well as capacitance in it. It is thus difficult to
 Even when secondary circuit of the transformer is open it
obtain pure resistor. Similarly it is difficult to obtain pure
draws some current called no load, primary current for
capacitor as well as pure inductor.
supplying no load, Cu and iron losses.
 If a bar magnet moves towards a fixed conducting coil, then  Due to inherent presence of self inductance in all electrical
circuits, a resistive circuit with no capacitive or inductive element
due to the flux change emf, current and charge are induce in the
in it, also has some inductance associated with it.
coil. If speed of magnet increases then induced emf and induced
The effect of self-inductance can be eliminated
current increases but induced charge remains same.
as in the coils of a resistance box by doubling
v1 i1 v2 (> v1) i2
back the coil on itself.
S N S N  It is not possible to have mutual inductance without self
inductance but it may or may not be possible self inductance
without mutual inductance.
Induced parameter : e1, i1, q1 e2 (> e1), i2( > i1), q2 (= q1) di
 If main current through a coil increases (i↑) so will be
 Can ever electric lines of force be closed curve ? Yes, when dt
produced by a changing magnetic field. positive (+ve), hence induced emf e will be negative (i.e.
 No flux cutting No EMI opposite emf) ⇒ Enet = E − e
  
 Vector form of motional emf : e = (v × B).l E K E
  
 In motional emf B, v and l are three vectors. If any two
vector are parallel – No flux cutting. Circuit is made on ⇒ e = −L
di
or i increasing dt
 
× × × × ×
B B
e i i
× × × × v
×
v  Sometimes at sudden opening of key, because of high
l v
× ×
l
× × × l inductance of circuit a high momentarily induced emf produced
and a sparking occurs at key position. To avoid sparking a
× × × × ×
   capacitor is connected across the key.
 B || l so e = 0 
 v || B so e = 0  One can have resistance with or without inductance but
v || l so e = 0
one can’t have inductance without having resistance.
 A piece of metal and a piece of non-metal are dropped
 The circuit behaviour of an inductor is quite different from
from the same height near the surface of the earth. The non-
metallic piece will reach the ground first because there will be no that of a resistor while a resistor opposes the current i, an
induced current in it. di
inductor opposes the change in the circuit.
 If an aeroplane is landing down or taking off and its wings dt
i i
are in the east-west direction, then the potential difference or a b
a b
emf will be induced across the wings. If an aeroplane is landing L
R
down or taking off and its wings are in the north-south direction, di
then no potential difference or emf will be induced. Vab = iR V ab = L
dt
 When a conducting rod moving horizontally on equator of  In RL-circuit with dc source the time taken by the current to
earth no emf induces because there is no vertical component of reach half of the maximum value is called half life time and it is
earth's magnetic field. But at poles BV is maximum so maximum L
given by T = 0.693 .
flux cutting hence emf induces. R
Chapter 22 : Electromagnetic Induction Compact Study Material Page 231

Critical Questions 7. When a small piece of wire passes between the magnetic
poles of a horse-shoe magnet in 0.1 s, emf of 4 × 10 −3 V is
1. A rectangular coil of size 10 cm × 20 cm has 60 turns. It is
induced in it. The magnetic flux between the poles is
rotating in magnetic field of 0.5 Wb /m2 at a rate of
(a) 4 × 10 −2 Wb (b) 4 × 10 −3 Wb
1800 rev/min. The maximum induced emf across the ends
(c) 4 × 10−4 Wb (d) 4 × 10−6 Wb
of the coil is
111V 8. The normal magnetic flux passing through a coil changes
(a) (b) 112V
with time according to following equation φ = 10 t 2 + 5 t + 1 ,
(c) 113V (d) 114 V
where φ is in milli Wb and t is in seconds. The value of
2. A closed coil of copper of 1 m × 1 m and of resistance of
induced emf produced in the coil at t = 5 s will be
2Ω is placed perpendicular to a magnetic field of
(a) Zero (b) 1V
0.10Wb/m2 . It is rotated through 180° in 0.01 s. The 2V
(c) (d) 0.105V
induced emf and induced current in the coil will respectively
9. A bicycle wheel of radius 0.5 m has 32 spokes. It is rotating
be
at the rate of 120 rev/min perpendicular to the horizontal
(a) 20 V ,10 A (b) 10 V ,20 A
component of earth’s magnetic field BH = 4 × 10 −5 T. The
(c) 10 V,10 A (d) 20 V, 20 A emf induced between the rim and the centre of the wheel
3. A coil having 100 turns and area of 0.001m2 is free to will be
rotate about an axis. The coil is placed perpendicular to a (a) 6.28 × 10 −5 V (b) 4.8 × 10−5 V
2
magnetic field of 1 Wb /m . If the coil rotates rapidly (c) 6.0 × 10−5 V (d) 1.6 × 10−5 V
through an angle of 180°, then charge flown through coil 10. A thick wire in the form of a semicircle of radius r is rotated
will be (the resistance of the coil is 10Ω ). with a frequency f in a magnetic field. What will be the peak
(a) 0.01C (b) 0.02C value of emf induced

(c) 0.03C (d) 0.04 C (a) Bπ r 2 f (b) Bπ 2r 2 f

4. A current carrying solenoid is approaching a conducting (c) 2Br 2 f (d) 2Bπ 2r 2 f

loop as shown in the figure. The direction of induced current 11. An aeroplane having a distance of 50m between the edges
as observed by an observer on the other side of the loop will of its wings is flying horizontally with a speed of 360 km/h.
be
If the vertical component of earth’s magnetic field is
(a) Anti-clockwise 4 × 10 −4 Wb /m2 , then the induced emf between the edges
(b) Clockwise v of its wings will be
(c) East Observer (a) 2mV (b) 2V
(d) West (c) 0.2V (d) 20V
5. Consider the arrangement shown in figure in which the 12. An angular conductor is moving with velocity v along its
North pole of a magnet is moved away from a thick angular bisector in a perpendicular magnetic field (B) as
conducting loop containing capacitor. Then excess positive shown in the figure. The induced potential difference
charge will arrive on between its free ends will be

× × × × × × × ×
N S × × ×B × × × × ×
× × × ×P × × ×
S ×
× × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × ×
b C a × q
× × × × × × ×
× × × × × × ×
(a) Plate a (b) Plate b × × × × × × × ×
(c) Both plates a and b (d) Neither a nor b plates × × Q
× × × R
× ×
6. The current changes in an inductance coil of 100mH from × × × × × × × ×

100mA to zero in 2 ms. The emf induced in the coil will be

θ
(a) 2 Bvl sin (b) 2 Bvl
(a) −5V (b) 5 V 2
(c) −50 V (d) 50V (c) 2 Bvl sinθ (d) 0
Page 232 Compact Study Material Chapter 22 : Electromagnetic Induction

13. A triangular loop lie near a straight long current carrying 16. In the circuit shown in figure, E = 10 V , R1 = 1 Ω , R2 = 2 Ω ,
wire as shown in the figure.
R3 = 3 Ω and L = 2 H. Calculate the value of current
i1, i2 and i3 immediately after key S is

S R1 R3
I

i1 i3
a = 10 cm b = 20 cm

E R2 L

i2
h = 10 cm

Coefficient of mutual induction of coil with respect to the

wire is
(a) 3.3 A ,3.3 A ,3.3 A (b) 3.3 A ,3.3 A ,0
(a) 1.22 × 10 −8 H (b) 2.55 × 10 −8 H
(c) 3.3 A ,0,0 (d) 3.3 A ,3.3 A ,1.1 A
(c) 3.77 × 10 −8 H (d) 5.66 × 10 −8 H
17. A square loop with a capacitor connected in one of its side is
14. A conducting rod is in form of parabola y = kx 2 . It is placed placed near a current carrying wire. If current in wire varies
in a region of uniform and perpendicular magnetic field of I = I 0 sin ω t, then variation of charge on a plate of capacitor
strength B. At t = 0, a conducting straight
ght rod starts sliding is shown by
up on parabola from (x = 0, y = 0) with a constant
acceleration a and the parabolic frame starts rotating with
angular speed with the frame after t seconds is
B 5 3/ 2 2 (a) (b)
(a) .a .t cos θ
4 k

B 2 3
(b) .a.t
3 k

B 2 3/ 2 3
(c) . .a .t sin θ
3 k
(c) (d)
B 2 3/ 2 3
(d) . .a .t cos θ
3 k
15. In the circuit given below,
L1 R3
18. Figure shows a square loop of side 5 cm being moved
towards right at a constant speed of 1 cm/s. The front edge
just enters the 20 cm wide magnetic field at t = 0. Find the
G
induced emf in the loop at t = 2 s and t = 10 s.
L2 R4
V
× × × × × ×
× × × × × ×
5 cm × × × × × ×
+ − B=0.6 T
Key × × × × × ×
V
× × × × × ×
Indictors L1 and L2 have resistances of R1 and R2 are × × × × × ×
5 cm × × × × × ×
connected with R3 and R4 . At t = 0 key is closed, the
× × × × × ×
galvanometer always shows a zero deflection when 20 cm
R1 R3 R3 L (a) 3 × 10 −2 , zero
(a) L1 = L2 and = (b) R1 = R2 and = 1
R2 R4 R4 L2 (b) 3 × 10−2 , 3 × 10−4
L1 R1 R3 L1 R2 R3 (c) 3 × 10−4 , 3 × 10 −4
(c) = = (d) = =
L2 R2 R4 L2 R1 R4 (d) 3 × 10 −4 , zero
Chapter 22 : Electromagnetic Induction Compact Study Material Page 233

19. A rectangular loop sides 10 cm and 3 cm moving out of a

region of uniform magnetic field of 0.5 T directed normal to Current Current
the loop. If we want to move loop with a constant velocity I (t) I (t)
1 cms −1, then required mechanical force is (resistance of (c) (d)
loop = 1 Ω )

× × × × × I=0 t (time)
t (time)
× × × ×
× × × × 23. The figure shows an isosceles triangle wire frame with apex
angle equal to π /2. The frame starts entering into the
3×cm × × ×
u = 1cms−1
× × × region of uniform magnetic field B with constant velocity v
× × × × at t = 0. The longest side of the frame is perpendicular to
× × × × the direction of velocity. If i is the instantaneous current
× × × × 10 cm
through the frame then choose the alternative showing the
−8 correct variation of i with time.
(a) 2.25 × 10 N (b) 4.5 × 10 −3 N
(c) 9 × 10 −3 N (d) 1.25 × 10 −3 N ×B × ×
× × ×
20. A loop of wire is placed in a magnetic field B = 0.02ˆi T .
× × ×
Then, the flux through the loop is, if its area vector is 90° × × ×v
A = 30ˆi + 16ˆj + 23kˆ cm 2 . × × ×
(a) 60 µWb (b) 32 µWb × × ×
(c) 46 µWb (d) 138 µWb t=0
21. A rectangular loop with a sliding connector of length
i i
10 cm is situated in uniform magnetic field perpendicular to
plane of loop. The magnetic induction is 0.1 tesla and
resistance of connector (R) is 1 ohm. The sides AB and CD
have resistances 2 ohm and 3 ohm respectively. Find the (a) (b)
current in the connector during its motion with constant
velocity one meter/sec. t t
1
(a) A A D i i
110
1
(b) A
220
1 2Ω 3Ω
(c) A (c) (d)
55 R
1 B
(d) A C t t
440
22. Two infinitely long conducting parallel rails are connected 24. A thin wire of length 2m is perpendicular to the xy-plane. It

through a capacitor C as shown in the figure. A conductor of is moved with velocity v = (2ˆi + 3ˆj + kˆ) m /s through a region
length l is moved with constant speed v0 . Which of the 
of magnetic induction B = (ˆi + 2ˆj ) Wb /m2 . Then potential
following graph truly depicts the variation of current through difference induced between the ends of the wire
the conductor with time (a) 2 volts (b) 4 volts
⊗ ⊗ B ⊗ (c) 0 volts (d) None of these
⊗ ⊗ 25. A long metal bar of 30 cm length is aligned along a north
l V0 south line and moves eastward at a speed of 10 ms −1 . A
⊗ ⊗ uniform magnetic field of 4.0 T points vertically downwards.
⊗ If the south end of the bar has a potential of 0 V, the
Current Current induced potential at the north end of the bar is
I (t) I (t) (a) +12V
(a) (b) (b) −12V
(c) 0V
t (time) t (time)
(d) Cannot be determined since there is not closed circuit
Page 234 Compact Study Material Chapter 22 : Electromagnetic Induction

26. A square metal loop of side 10cm and resistance 1Ω is 5. A circular loop of radius R carrying current I lies in x-y plane
moved with a constant velocity partly inside a magnetic field with its centre at origin. The total magnetic flux through x-y
of 2 Wbm−2 , directed into the paper, as shown in the figure. plane is [IIT-JEE 1999]

This loop is connected to a network of five resistors each of (a) Directly proportional to I
value 3Ω . If a steady current of 1mA flows in the loop, (b) Directly proportional to R
then the speed of the loop is (c) Directly proportional to R2
(d) Zero
× × × × × v
× × × × ×
6. Two identical circular loops of metal wire are lying on a
× × × × × table without touching each other. Loop-A carries a current
× × × × × which increases with time. In response, the loop-B
× × × × ×
[IIT-JEE 1999]
× × × × ×
(a) Remains stationary
(a) 0.5 cms −1 (b) 1cms −1
(b) Is attracted by the loop-A
(c) 2 cms −1 (d) 4 cms −1
(c) Is repelled by the loop-A
Past Year Questions (d) Rotates about its CM, with CM fixed
1. The figure shows certain wire segments joined together to (CM is the centre of mass)
form a coplanar loop. The loop is placed in a perpendicular 7. As shown in the figure, P and Q are two coaxial conducting
magnetic field in the direction going into the plane of the loops separated by some distance. When the switch S is
figure. The magnitude of the field increases with time. I1 and closed, a clockwise current I P flows in P (as seen by E) and
I2 are the currents in the segments ab and cd. Then,
an induced current I Q1 flows in Q. The switch remains
[IIT-JEE 2009]
c d closed for a long time. When S is opened, a current I Q2
a b flows in Q. Then the directions of I Q1 and I Q2 (as seen by
E) are [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002]
(a) I1 > I 2 Q
P
(b) I1 < I 2

(c) I1 is in the direction ba and I 2 is in the direction cd

E
(d) I1 is in the direction ab and I 2 is in the direction dc
2. The magnetic flux linked with a coil, in webers, is given by s
the equations φ = 3t 2 + 4 t + 9 . Then the magnitude of Battery

induced e.m.f. at t = 2 second will be [AIEEE 2006] (a) Respectively clockwise and anticlockwise
(a) 2 volt (b) 4 volt
(b) Both clockwise
(c) 8 volt (d) 16 volt
(c) Both anticlockwise
3. A coil having n turns and resistance R Ω is connected with a
galvanometer of resistance 4 RΩ . This combination is (d) Respectively anticlockwise and clockwise
moved in time t seconds from a magnetic field W1 weber to 8. In a coil resistance 100Ω, a current is induced by changing
W2 weber. The induced current in the circuit is the magnetic flux through it as shown in the figure. The
[AIEEE 2004]
magnitude of change in flux through the coil is
W2 − W1 n(W2 − W1 )
(a) − (b) − [JEE (Main) 2017]
5 Rnt 5 Rt
(W2 − W1 ) n(W2 − W1 ) 10
(c) − (d) −
Rnt Rt
4. An infinitely long cylinder is kept parallel to a uniform
Current
magnetic field B directed along positive z-axis. The direction (amp.)
of induced current as seen from the z axis will be
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2005]
(a) Clockwise of the +ve z axis Time 0.5 sec
(b) Anticlockwise of the +ve z axis
(c) Zero (a) 275 Wb (b) 200 Wb
(d) Along the magnetic field (c) 225 Wb (d) 250 Wb
Chapter 22 : Electromagnetic Induction Compact Study Material Page 235

9. A conducting circular loop made of a thin wire, has area 14. A boat is moving due east in a region where the earth's
3.5 × 10 −3 m 2 and resistance 10 Ω . If is placed magnetic field is 5.0 × 10 −5 NA −1m −1 due north and
perpendicular to a time dependent magnetic field horizontal. The boat carries a vertical aerial 2m long. If the
Β(t) = (0.4T) sin(50π t) . The field is uniform in space. Then
speed of the boat is 1.50ms −1 , the magnitude of the
the net charge flowing through the loop during t = 0 s and induced emf in the wire of aerial is [AIEEE 2011]
t = 10ms is close to [JEE (Main) 2019] (a) 1 mV (b) 0.75 mV
(a) 7 µ C (b) 140 µ C (c) 0.50 mV (d) 0.15 mV
(c) 21 µ C (d) 6 µ C 15. A conducting square loop of side l and resistance R moves
10. A very long solenoid of radius R is carrying current in its plane with a uniform velocity v perpendicular to one
I (t) = kte − at (k > 0), as a function of time (t ≥ 0) . Counter of its sides. A magnetic induction B constant in time and
clockwise current is taken to be positive. A circular space, pointing perpendicular and into the plane at the loop
conducting coil of radius 2R is placed in the equatorial exists everywhere with half the loop outside the field, as
plane of the solenoid and concentric with the solenoid. The shown in figure. The induced e.m.f. is [AIEEE 2002]
current induced in the outer coil is correctly depicted, as a
function of time, by [JEE (Main) 2019] × × B × × C
× × × ×
I I v
× × × ×
l
(a) t=0 (b) t=0 × × × ×
t t
× × × ×
× × A × × D
I
I
(c) (d) t (a) Zero (b) RvB
t=0 t=0
t (c) vBl / R (d) vBl
16. One conducting U tube can slide inside another as shown in
11. A conducting square loop of side L and resistance R moves figure, maintaining electrical contacts between the tubes.
in its plane with a uniform velocity v perpendicular to one of The magnetic field B is perpendicular to the plane of the
its sides. A magnetic induction B constant in time and space, figure. If each tube moves towards the other at a constant
pointing perpendicular and into the plane of the loop exists
speed v then the emf induced in the circuit in terms of B, l
everywhere. The current induced in the loop is [IIT 1989]
and v where l is the width of each tube, will be
Blv
(a) clockwise [AIEEE 2005]
R × B × × C × →
B
Blv × × × →× ×
A
× × × B
(b) anticlockwise v
×
R × × × × × ×
2 Blv × × × × (a) Zero v v
(c) anticlockwise × ×
R × × × ×
(b) 2 Blv
×
×
×
(d) Zero × A × × D ×
× ×
12. A metal rod moves at a constant velocity in a direction
(c) Blv
×D C ×
× × ×
perpendicular to its length. A constant uniform magnetic (d) − Blv
field exists in space in a direction perpendicular to the rod as 17. A rectangular loop has a sliding connector PQ of length l
well as its velocity. Select the correct statement(s) from the
following [IIT-JEE 1998] and resistance R Ω and it is moving with a speed v as
(a) The entire rod is at the same electric potential shown. The set-up is placed in a uniform magnetic field
(b) There is an electric field in the rod going into the plane of the paper. The three currents I1 ,I 2
(c) The electric potential is highest at the centre of the rod
and decreases towards its ends and I are [AIEEE 2010]
(d) The electric potential is lowest at the centre of the rod Blυ Blυ
and increases towards its ends (a) I 1 = I 2 = , I=
6R 3R
13. Two rails of a railway track insulated from each other and the P l
ground are connected to a milli voltmeter. What is the Blυ 2 Blυ
(b) I 1 = − I 2 = , I=
reading of voltmeter, when a train travels with a speed of R R
υ
180 km/hr along the track. Given that the vertical component RΩ RΩ RΩ
Blυ 2 Blυ
of earth's magnetic field is 0.2×10–4 weber/m2 and the rails (c) I1 = I 2 = , I= I
3R 3R I1 I2
are separated by 1 metre [IIT 1981]
Q
(a) 10–2 volt (b) 10–4 volt Blυ
(d) I 1 = I 2 = I =
(c) 10–3 volt (d) 1 volt R
Page 236 Compact Study Material Chapter 22 : Electromagnetic Induction

18. A thin semicircular conducting ring of radius R is falling with 23. A solid metal cube of edge length 2 cm is moving in a
its plane vertical in a horizontal magnetic induction B. At the
positive y direction at a constant speed of 6 m / s . There is
position MNQ, the speed of the ring is V and the potential
difference developed across the ring is [IIT-JEE 1996] a uniform magnetic field of 0.1T in the positive z −
direction. The potential difference between the two faces of
 the cube perpendicular to the x - axis, is [JEE (Main) 2019]
×
B × ×
N
× ×
(a) 6 mV (b) 2 mV
× × × ×
(c) 12mV (d) 1 mV
× × × V × ×
24. A 10m long horizontal wire extends from North East to
× × × × × South West. It is falling with a speed of 5.0 ms −1 , at right
M Q
(a) Zero angles to the horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic
−4 2
(b) Bνπ R2/2 and M is at higher potential field, of 0.3 × 10 Wb / m . The value of the induced emf in
wire is [JEE (Main) 2019]
(c) π RBV and Q is at higher potential
(d) 2RBV and Q is at higher potential (a) 1.1 × 10 −3 V (b) 2.5 × 10 −3 V
−3
19. A short-circuited coil is placed in a time-varying magnetic (c) 0.3 × 10 V (d) 1.5 × 10 −3 V
field. Electrical power is dissipated due to the current 25. The figure shows a square loop L of side 5 cm which is
induced in the coil. If the number of turns were to be connected to a network of resistances. The whole setup is
quadrupled and the wire radius halved, the electrical power
moving towards right with a constant speed of 1 cm s −1 . At
dissipated would be [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002]
some instant, a part of L is in a uniform magnetic field of
(a) Halved (b) The same
1 T, perpendicular to the plane of the loop. If the resistance
(c) Doubled (d) Quadrupled
20. A uniform but time-varying magnetic field B(t) exists in a of L is 1.7 Ω , the current in the loop at that instant will be
circular region of radius a and is directed into the plane of close to
the paper, as shown. The magnitude of the induced electric v = 1 cm/sec
field at point P at a distance r from the centre of the circular 1
B
region [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000] 1Ω 2Ω
B A C
× ×
×
×
B(t) × P
× ×
× × r 1Ω 2Ω
× ×
×
× × D
× × × ×
×
× × × 5cm [JEE (Main) 2019]
a ×
× ×
×
(a) 170µ A (b) 150µ A
×
1
(a) Is zero (b) Decreases as
r (c) 115µ A (d) 60 µ A
1 26. Pure inductance of 3.0 H is connected as shown below. The
(c) Increases as r (d) Decreases as 2
r equivalent inductance of the circuit is [AIEEE 2002]
21. A conducting rod AC of length 4l is rotated about a point O in

a uniform magnetic field B directed into the paper. AO = l
and OC = 3l. Then [Similar JEE (Mains) 2013]

× × × × × →×
× × O × × B × (a) 1 H (b) 2 H
A C
× × × × × × (c) 3 H (d) 9 H
× × × × × × 27. When the current changes from + 2A to – 2A in 0.05
second, an e.m.f. of 8 V is induced in a coil. The coefficient
Bω l 2 7 of self-induction of the coil is [AIEEE 2003]
(a) VA − VO = Bω l 2 (b) VO − VC =
2 2
(a) 0.1 H (b) 0.2 H
9
(c) VA − VC = 4 Bω l 2 (d) VC − VO = Bω l 2 (c) 0.4 H (d) 0.8 H
2
22. In an AC generator, a coil with N turns, all of the same area 28. Two coils are placed close to each other. The mutual
A and total resistance R, rotates with frequency ω in a inductance of the pair of coils depends upon [AIEEE 2003]
magnetic field B. The maximum value of emf generated in (a) The rates at which currents are changing in the two coils
the coil is [AIEEE 2006] (b) Relative position and orientation of the two coils
(a) N.A.B (b) N.A.B.R (c) The material of the wires of the coils
(c) N.A.B.ω (d) N.A.B.R.ω (d) The currents in the two coils
Chapter 22 : Electromagnetic Induction Compact Study Material Page 237

29. Two circular coils can be arranged in any of the three 34. A coil of inductance 300 mH and resistance 2Ω is connected
situations shown in the figure. Their mutual inductance will be to a source of voltage 2V. The current reaches half of its
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001] steady state value in [AIEEE 2005]
(a) 0.15 s (b) 0.3 s
(c) 0.05 s (d) 0.1 s
35. A coil of inductance 8.4 mH and resistance 6 Ω is connected
to a 12 V battery. The current in the coil is 1.0 A in the time
(A) (B) (C) (approx.) [IIT-JEE (Screening) 1999]
(a) Maximum in situation (A) (a) 500 sec (b) 20 sec
(b) Maximum in situation (B) (c) 35 milli sec (d) 1 milli sec
(c) Maximum in situation (C) 36. In the circuit shown below, the key K is closed at t = 0. The
(d) The same in all situations current through the battery is [AIEEE 2010]
30. A small square loop of wire of side l is placed inside a large V K
square loop of wire of side L (L > l). The loops are coplanar
and their centres coincide. The mutual inductance of the
system is proportional to [IIT-JEE 1998] L R1
2
(a) l / L (b) l / L
(c) L / l (d) L2 / l
31. Two coaxial solenoids are made by winding thin insulated R2

wire over a pipe of cross-sectional area A = 10 cm2 and

V (R1 + R 2 ) V
length = 20cm. If one of the solenoids has 300 turns and (a) at t = 0 and at t = ∞
R1 R 2 R2
the other 400 turns, their mutual inductance is
V (R1 + R 2 ) V
(µ 0 = 4π × 10 −7 TmA −1 ) [AIEEE 2008] (b) at t = 0 and at t = ∞
R12 + R 22 R2
−4 −5
(a) 4.8π × 10 H (b) 4.8π × 10 H
V V (R1 + R 2 )
(c) 2.4π × 10 H
−3
(d) 4.8π × 10 H
4 (c) at t = 0 and at t = ∞
R2 R1 R 2
32. A circular loop of radius 0.3 cm lies parallel to a much
bigger circular loop of radius 20 cm. The centre of the small V V (R1 + R 2 )
(d) at t = 0 and at t = ∞
loop is on the axis of the bigger loop. The distance between R2 R12 + R 22
their centres is 15 cm. If a current of 2.0 A flows through the
37. A coil of wire having finite inductance and resistance has a
smaller loop, then the flux linked with bigger loop is
conducting ring placed coaxially within it. The coil is
[JEE (Main) 2013]
−11 −11
connected to a battery at time t=0, so that a time-dependent
(a) 9.1 × 10 weber (b) 6 × 10 weber current I1(t) starts flowing through the coil. If I2(t) is the
(c) 3.3 × 10 −11
weber (d) 6.6 × 10 −9
weber current induced in the ring and B(t) is the magnetic field at
the axis of the coil due to I1(t), then as a function of time
33. An inductor of inductance L = 400 mH and resistors of (t>0), the product I2 (t) B(t) [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000]
resistances R1 = 2Ω and R2 = 2Ω are connected to a (a) Increases with time
battery of emf 12V as shown in the figure. The internal (b) Decreases with time
resistance of the battery is negligible. The switch S is closed (c) Does not vary with time
at t = 0 . The potential drop across L as a function of time is
(d) Passes through a maximum
[AIEEE 2009]
E
38. An inductor (L=100 mH), a resistor (R = 100Ω) and a

L
battery (E = 100V ) are initially connected in series as
shown in the figure. After a long time the battery is
R1
disconnected after short circuiting the points A and B. The
current in the circuit 1 ms after the short circuit is
L [AIEEE 2006]
R2

R
12 − 3 t
(a) 6 e −5 t V (b) e V A B
t
 −t  E
(c) 6  1 − e 0.2  V (d) 12 e −5 t V (a) e A (b) 0.1 A
 
  (c) 1 A (d) 1/e A
Page 238 Compact Study Material Chapter 22 : Electromagnetic Induction

39. The self induced emf of a coil is 25volts . When the current 45. A power transmission line feeds input power at 2300V to a
step down transformer with its primary windings having
in it is changed at uniform rate from 10 A to 25 A in 1s ,
4000 turns. The output power is delivered at 230V by the
the change in the energy of the inductance is
transformer. if the current in the primary of the transformer
[JEE (Main) 2019] is 5 A and its efficiency is 90% ,the output current would be
(a) 540 J (b) 740 J
[JEE (Main) 2019]
(c) 637.5 J (d) 437.5 J (a) 45 A (b) 25 A
40. There are two long co-axial solenoids of same length l . The (c) 35 A (d) 50 A
inner and outer coils have radii r1 and r2 and number of 46. A transformer consisting of 300 turns in the primary and
turns per unit length n1 and n2 respectively. The ratio of 150 turns in the secondary gives output power of 2.2 kW . If
mutual inductance to the self- inductance of the inner-coil is the current in the secondary coil is 10 A then the voltage
[JEE (Main) 2019]
and current in the primary coil are [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 220V and 5 A (b) 220V and 20 A
n2 r22 n2
(a) . (b) (c) 440V and 20 A (d) 440V and 5 A
n1 r12 n1
n1 n2 r1 47. An elliptical loop having resistance R, of semi major axis a,
(c) (d) . and semi minor axis b is placed in a magnetic field as
n2 n1 r2
shown in the figure. If the loop is rotated about the x-axis
41. A copper wire is wound on a wooden frame, whose shape is with angular frequency ω, the average power loss in the
that of an equilateral triangle. If the linear dimension of each loop due to Joule heating is [JEE (Main) 2020]
side of the frame is increased by a factor of 3 , keeping the
z
number of turns of the coil per unit length of the frame the
same, then the self inductance of the coil [JEE (Main) 2019] B
(a) Increases by a factor of 3
b x
(b) Decreases by a factor of 9 3 x
(c) Increases by a factor of 27 a
(d) Decreases by a factor of 9 y
y
42. The total number of turns and cross-section area in a
solenoid is fixed. However, its length L is varied by
adjusting the separation between windings. The inductance π 2 a 2b 2 B 2ω 2
(a) (b) Zero
of solenoid will be proportional to [JEE (Main) 2019] 2R
(a) 1 / L (b) L2 π a bB ω π 2a 2b 2 B 2ω 2
2
(c) (d)
(c) L (d) 1 / L R R
43. Two coils P and Q are separated by some distance. When 48. A charged particle (mass m and charge q) moves along X
a current of 3 A flows through coil P , a magnetic flux of axis with velocity v0 . When it passes through the origin it

10 −3 Wb passes through Q . No current is passed through enters a region having uniform electric field E = − Eˆj which
Q . When no current passes through P and a current of extends upto x = d . Equation of path of electron in the
region x > d is [JEE (Main) 2020]
2 A passes through Q , the flux through P is
[JEE (Main) 2019] Y
−3 −3 E
(a) 6.67 × 10 Wb (b) 3.67 × 10 Wb
(c) 3.67 × 10− 4 Wb −4
(d) 6.67 × 10 Wb
44. A coil is suspended in a uniform magnetic field, with the O X
plane of the coil parallel to the magnetic lines of force. When v0
a current is passed through the coil it starts oscillating; it is
d
very difficult to stop. But if an aluminium plate is placed
near to the coil, it stops. This is due to [AIEEE 2012]
(a) Development of air current when the plate is placed
(b) Induction of electrical charge on the plate
qEd qEd  d 
(c) Shielding of magnetic lines of force as aluminium is a (a) y = ( x − d) (b) y =  − x
mv02 mv02  2 
paramagnetic material
(d) Electromagnetic induction in the aluminium plate giving qEd qEd 2
(c) y= x (d) y = x
rise to electromagnetic damping mv02 mv02
Chapter 22 : Electromagnetic Induction Compact Study Material Page 239

49. At time t = 0 magnetic field of 1000 gauss is passing 52. A bar magnet is passing through a conducting loop of radius
perpendicularly through the area defined by the closed loop R with velocity v. The radius of the bar magnet is such that
shown in the figure. If the magnetic field reduces linearly to it just passes through the loop. The induced e.m.f. in the
500 gauss, in the next 5 s , then induced EMF in the loop loop can be represented by the approximate curve
is 16 cm
l

4 cm 2cm R

N S
[JEE (Mains) 2020]
loop v
(a) 28 µ V (b) 36 µ V
[JEE (Main) 2021]
(c) 48 µ V (d) 56 µ V
50. An aeroplane, with its wings spread 10m, is flying at a
speed of 180km/ h in a horizontal direction. The total emf emf
−4 2 l/v
intensity of earth's field at that part is 2.5 × 10 Wb / m and t t
(a) (b) l/v
the angle of dip is 60°. The emf induced between the tips of
the plane wings will be [JEE (Main) 2021]
(a) 108.25 mV (b) 54.125mV
(c) 88.37 mV (d) 62.50 mV
51. An inductor coil stores 64 J of magnetic field energy and
emf emf
dissipates energy at the rate of 640W when a current of l/v
t t
8 A is passed through it. If this coil is joined across an ideal (c) (d) l/v
battery, find the time constant of the circuit in seconds
[JEE (Main) 2021]
(a) 0.4 (b) 0.2
(c) 0.125 (d) 0.8

CRITICAL QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 c 2 a 3 b 4 a 5 b 6 b 7 c 8 d 9 a 10 b

11 b 12 a 13 a 14 d 15 c 16 b 17 d 18 d 19 a 20 a

21 b 22 c 23 d 24 a 25 a 26 c

PAST YEAR QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 d 2 d 3 b 4 c 5 d 6 c 7 d 8 d 9 b 10 b

11 d 12 b 13 c 14 d 15 d 16 b 17 c 18 d 19 b 20 b

21 c 22 c 23 c 24 a 25 a 26 a 27 a 28 b 29 a 30 b

31 c 32 a 33 d 34 d 35 d 36 c 37 d 38 d 39 d 40 b

41 a 42 a 43 d 44 d 45 a 46 d 47 a 48 b 49 d 50 a

51 b 52 c

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER
IMPORTANT POINTS
23 2.
Alternating Current
The phase difference between current and voltage in an AC
circuit is π /4 rad. If the frequency of AC is 50 Hz, then the
 Alternating current in electric wires, bulbs etc. flows 50
phase difference is equivalent to the time difference
times in one direction and 50 times in the opposite direction in
(a) 0.78 s (b) 15.7ms
1 second. Since in one cycle the current becomes zero twice,
hence a bulb lights up 100 times and is off 100 times in one (c) 0.25 s (d) 2.5ms
second (50 cycles). But due to persistence of vision, it appears 3. The number of poles in an AC generator is 10 and the coil is
lighted continuously. rotating at the rate of 600 revolutions per minute. Then, the
frequency of AC current produced by the generator is (in
 ac is more dangerous than dc. Hz).
 If ac is produced by a generator having a large number of (a) 10 (b) 50
poles then it's frequency (c) 1000 (d) 600

Number of poles × rotation per second P ×n 4. A long solenoid connected to a 12 V DC source passes a
ν = = steady current of 2 A. When the solenoid is connected to a
2 2
source of 12 V rms at 50 Hz, the current flowing is 1 A rms.
Where P is the number of poles; n is the rotational frequency of Then, the inductance of the solenoid is
the coil. (a) 11mH (b) 22mH
 The rate of change of ac is minimum at that instant when (c) 33mH (d) None of these
they are near their peak values.
5. A 110 V, 60 W lamp is run from a 220 V AC mains using a
 ac equipments such as electric motors, are more durable capacitor in series with the lamp instead of a resistor, then
and convenient compared to dc equipments. the voltage across the capacitor is about
(a) 110 V (b) 190 V
 Skin Effect
(c) 220 V (d) 311V
A direct current flows uniformly throughout the cross-section of
the conductor. An alternating current, on the other hand, flows 6. A 100 V AC source of frequency 500 Hz is connected to a
L-C-R circuit with L = 8.1mH , C = 1.25 µ F and R = 10 Ω
mainly along the surface of the conductor.
all connected in series. The potential difference across the
This effect is known as skin effect. The
δ resistance will be
reason is that when alternating current
(a) 10 V (b) 100V
flows through a conductor, the flux change Iac = 0
in the inner part of the conductor is higher. (c) 50 V (d) 500V
Therefore the inductance of the inner part 7. An AC circuit draws 5 A at 160V and the power
is higher than that of the outer part. Higher
consumption is 600 W. Then, the power factor is
the frequency of alternating current, more is
(a) 1 (b) 0.75
the skin effect.
(c) 0.50 (d) 0
The depth upto which ac current flows through a wire is 8. A step-down transformer operates on a 2.5 kV line and
called skin depth (δ). supplies 80 A to a load. The ratio of the primary winding to
the secondary winding is 20 : 1 . Assuming 100% efficiency,
the output power is
Critical Questions
(a) 200 kW (b) 100 kW
1. The instantaneous emf in an AC circuit is given by (c) 10kW (d) None of these
E = 50 sin(314 t) V, where t is in seconds. In how much
9. An AC source of emf E = 200 sin(100 t) is connected to a
time the emf will become 25 V starting from zero
choke coil of inductance 1 H and resistance 100Ω . The
1 1
(a) s (b) s average power consumed is
50 200
(a) Zero (b) 200W
1 1
(c) s (d) s
314 600 (c) 141W (d) None of these
Chapter 23 : Alternating Current Compact Study Material Page 241

10. A 2.5/π µ F capacitor and a 3000Ω resistance are joined 17. In an oscillatory circuit the value of self-inductance of the
connected coil is 10 mH . If the oscillatory frequency of the
in series to an AC source of 200 V and frequency. The
power factor of the circuit and the power dissipated in it will circuit is 1.0 megacycle/s, then the capacity of the condenser
respectively be connected in the circuit will be
(a) 2.5 pF (b) 2.5 µ F
(a) 0.6,0.06W (b) 0.06,0.6W
(c) 0.25 pF (d) 0.25 µ F
(c) 0.6,4.8W (d) 4.8,0.6W
18. In a torsion type AC ammeter, a current of 25 A gives a
11. A circuit drawn a power of 550 W from a source of 220 V, deflection of 90°. For a deflection of 180°, the current will be
50Hz. The power factor of the circuit is 0.8 and the current (a) 50 A (b) 20 A
lags in phase behind the potential difference. To make the
(c) 25 2 A (d) 30 A
power factor of circuit is 1.0, the capacitance required to be
connected with it, will be
(a) 70.4 µ F (b) 75 µ F
Past Years Questions
1. Alternating current can not be measured by dc ammeter
(c) 7.5 µ F (d) 750 µ F because [AIEEE 2004]

12. An L-C-R circuit has L = 10 mH, R = 3 Ω and C = 1 µ F (a) ac cannot pass through dc ammeter
(b) Average value of complete cycle is zero
connected in series to a source of 15cos ωt V . The current-
(c) ac is virtual
amplitude and the average power dissipated per cycle at a
(d) ac changes its direction
frequency 10% lower than the resonant frequency will be
respectively 2. Two electric bulbs marked 25W − 220 V and 100W − 220 V
are connected in series to a 440 V supply. Which of the
(a) 0.704 A ,0.744 W (b) 0.704 A ,0.704 W
bulbs will fuse [AIEEE 2012]
(c) 7.04 A ,7.44 W (d) 70.4 A ,74.4 W (a) Both (b) 100 W
13. A 750 Hz, 20 V source is connected to a resistance of 100Ω , (c) 25 W (d) Neither
an inductance of 0.1803 H and a capacitance of 10 µ F all 3. In an a circuit, the instantaneous e.m.f and current are given
by
in series. The time in which the resistance (thermal capacity
= 2 J /°C ) will get heated by 10° C will be  π
e = 100 sin 30 t , i = 20 sin 30 t − 
 4
(a) 20 s (b) 200 s
In one cycle of a.c the average power consumed by the
(c) 348 s (d) 448 s circuit and the wattles current are, respectively :
14. Kanha wants to calculate the current and power dissipated [JEE (Main) 2018]
in L-C-R series circuit. He connected 100Ω resistance to an 50
(a) ,0 (b) 50,0
AC source of peak value 200 V and angular frequency 2
300 rad/s. When he removed only the capacitance, the 1000
current was found to be lagging behind the voltage by 60°. (c) 50,10 (d) ,10
2
The value of peak current and the power dissipated
obtained by him will be 4. An alternating voltage v(t ) = 220 sin 100π t volt is applied to
(a) 2 A , 200 W (b) 4 A ,100 W a purely resistive load of 50 Ω . The time taken for the
(c) 3 A ,120 W (d) None of these current to rise from half of the peak value to the peak value
is [JEE (Main) 2019]
15. For an L-C-R circuit, the capacitance is changed from C to
4 C. For the same resonant frequency, the inductance (a) 3.3 ms (b) 5 ms

should be changed from L to (c) 7.2 ms (d) 2.2 ms

(a) 2L (b) 4 L 5. An AC voltage source of variable angular frequency ω and
L L fixed amplitude V connected in series with a capacitance
(c) (d)
2 4 C and an electric bulb of resistance R (inductance zero).
16. A coil of self-inductance 0.16 H is connected to a condenser When ω is increased [IIT-JEE 2010]
of capacity 0.81 µ F. The frequency of AC (in cps) that (a) The bulb glows dimmer
should be applied so that there is a resonance in the circuit
(b) The bulb glows brighter
(the resistance of the circuit is negligible) should be
(a) 50 (b) 60 (c) Total impedance of the circuit is unchanged
(c) 442 (d) 342 (d) Total impedance of the circuit increases
Page 242 Compact Study Material Chapter 23 : Alternating Current

6. The power factor of an ac circuit having resistance (R) and 12. In an LCR series ac circuit, the voltage across each of the
inductance (L) connected in series and an angular velocity components, L, C and R is 50V. The voltage across the LC
ω is [AIEEE 2002]
combination will be [AIEEE 2004]
(a) R / ω L (b) R /(R 2 + ω 2 L2 )1 / 2
(a) 50V (b) 50 2 V
(c) ω L / R (d) R /(R 2 − ω 2 L2 )1 / 2
(c) 100V (d) 0 V (zero)
7. The phase difference between the ac and emf is π/2. Which
13. In a series resonant LCR circuit, the voltage across R is 100
of the following cannot be the constituent of the circuit
volts and R = 1 kΩ with C = 2µF . The resonant frequency
[AIEEE 2005]
(a) LC (b) L alone ω is 200 rad/s. At resonance the voltage across L is
(c) C alone (d) R, L [AIEEE 2006]
8. In the circuit shown here, the point ‘C’ is kept connected to (a) 40 V (b) 250 V
point ‘A’ till the current flowing through the circuit becomes –3
(c) 4 × 10 V (d) 2.5 × 10–2 V
constant. Afterward, suddenly point ‘C’ is disconnected from
point ‘A’ and connected to point ‘B’ at time t = 0. Ratio of 14. In a series LCR circuit R = 200 Ω and the voltage and the
the voltage across resistance and the inductor at t = L / R frequency of the main supply is 220 V and 50 Hz
will be equal to [JEE (Main) 2014] respectively. On taking out the capacitance from the circuit
the current lags behind the voltage by 30° . On taking out
the inductor from the circuit the current leads the voltage by
30° . The power dissipated in the LCR circuit is
[AIEEE 2010]

(a) 242 W (b) 305 W

e
(a) (b) 1
1−e (c) 210 W (d) Zero W
1−e 15. A LC circuit is in the state of resonance. If C=0.1µF and
(c) −1 (d)
e
L=0.25 henry, neglecting ohmic resistance of circuit what is
9. An arc lamp requires a direct current of 10 A at 80 V to
the frequency of oscillations
function. If it is connected to a 220 V(rms), 50 Hz AC
supply, the series inductor needed for it to work is close to (a) 1007 Hz (b) 31.8 Hz
[JEE (Main) 2016] (c) 109 Hz (d) 500 Hz
(a) 0.08 H (b) 0.044 H 16. For an RLC circuit driven with voltage of amplitude vm
(c) 0.065 H (d) 80 H
1
10. If the total charge stored in the LC circuit is Q0, then for and frequency ω0 = the current exhibits resonance.
LC
t≥0 [IIT-JEE 2006]
π  The quality factor, Q is given by [JEE (Main) 2018]
t
(a) The charge on the capacitor is Q = Q0 cos + 
2 LC  R CR
(a) (b)
π  (ω 0 C) ω0
t
(b) The charge on the capacitor is Q = Q0 cos − 
2 LC  ω0 L ω0 R
(c) (d)
d Q2 R L
(c) The charge on the capacitor is Q = − LC 2
dt 17. A series AC circuit containing an inductor (20mH), a
2
1 d Q capacitor (120 µ F ) and a resistor (60Ω) is driven by an
(d) The charge on the capacitor is Q = 2
LC dt AC source of 24 V / 50 Hz . The energy dissipated in the
11. An inductor of inductance L and resistor of resistance R are circuit in 60 s is [JEE (Main) 2019]
joined in series and connected by a source of frequency ω .
Power dissipated in the circuit is [AIEEE 2002] (a) 3.39 × 103 J
(R 2 + ω 2 L2 ) V 2R (b) 5.65 × 102 J
(a) (b)
V (R + ω 2 L2 )
2

(c) 5.17 × 10 2 J
2 2 2
V R +ω L
(c) (d) (d) 2.26 × 103 J
(R 2 + ω 2 L2 ) V2
Chapter 23 : Alternating Current Compact Study Material Page 243

18. In the circuit shown the switch S1 is closed at time t = 0 21. A 20 Henry inductor coil is connected to a 10 ohm
and the switch S 2 is kept open. At some later time (t 0 ) , the resistance in series as shown in figure. The time at which
rate of dissipation of energy (joule’s heat) across resistance is
switch S1 is opened and S 2 is closed. The behaviour of the equal to the rate at which magnetic energy is stored in the
current I as a function of time ‘t’ is given by inductor, is
i 10Ω
R L

E 20H
S2
[JEE (Main) 2019]

S1 2
(a) (b) ln 2
ln 2
E
1
[JEE (Main) 2019] (c) ln 2 (d) 2 ln 2
2
I I
22. A circuit connected to an ac source of emf e = e 0 sin(100 t )
(a) (b) with t in seconds, gives a phase difference of
π
between
4
t t the emf e and current i . Which of the following circuits will
t0 t0
exhibit this [JEE (Main) 2019]
I I (a) R C circuit with R = 1 k Ω and C = 10 µ F
(b) RL circuit with R = 1 k Ω and L = 10 m H
(c) (d)
(c) R C circuit with R = 1 k Ω and C = 1 µ F
t t (d) R L circuit with R = 1 k Ω and L = 1m H
t0 t0
23. Consider the LR circuit shown in the figure. If the switch S
19. In the figure shown, a circuit contains two identical resistors is closed at t = 0 then the amount of charge that passes
with resistance R = 5 Ω and an inductance with L = 2mH . L
through the battery between t = 0 and t = is
An ideal battery of 15 V is connected in the circuit. What R
L R
will be the current through the battery long after the switch is
closed [JEE (Main) 2019]

i
L
R E S [JEE (Main) 2019]
2.7 EL 7.3 EL
15V (a) (b)
R R2 R2
EL EL
(c) (d)
2.7 R 2 7.3 R 2
(a) 6 A (b) 7 . 5 A 24. A coil of self inductance 10 mH and resistance 0.1 Ω is
(c) 5. 5 A (d) 3 A connected through a switch to a battery of internal
resistance 0.9 Ω . After the switch is closed, the time taken
3 3
20. In the above circuit, C = µ F , R 2 = 20 Ω , L = H for the current to attain 80% of the saturation value is
2 10
(take ln 5 = 1.6) [JEE (Main) 2019]
and R1 = 10 Ω . Current in L − R1 path is I1 and in C − R 2
(a) 0.016 s (b) 0.002 s
path it is I 2 . The voltage of A.C. source is given by
(c) 0.324 s (d) 0.103 s
V = 200 2 sin(100 t ) volts. The phase difference between
25. A series L-R circuit is connected to a battery of emf V . If the
I1 and I 2 is [JEE (Main) 2019]
circuit is switched on at t = 0, then the time at which the
I2
1
R2
energy stored in the inductor reaches   times of its
C n
L R1 I1 maximum value, is [JEE (Main) 2020]

L  n  L  n + 1 
(a) ln (b) ln
~ R  n − 1 
 R  n − 1 

L  n  L  n − 1 
(a) 60° (b) 150 ° (c) ln (d) ln
(c) 30° (d) 90° R  n + 1 
 R  n 
Page 244 Compact Study Material Chapter 23 : Alternating Current

26. For the given input voltage waveform Vin (t ), the output 28. An LCR circuit contains resistance of 110 Ω and a supply of
voltage waveform V0 (t ), across the capacitor is correctly 220 V at 300 rad/s angular frequency. If only capacitance is
depicted by removed from the circuit, current lags behind the voltage by
45°. If on the other hand, only inductor is removed the
1 kΩ
current leads by 45° with the applied voltage. The rms
+5V current flowing in the circuit will be [JEE (Main) 2021]
5 µs (a) 1 .5 A (b) 2 A
10 nF V0(t)
(c) 2 .5 A (d) 1 A
0V t
5µs 29. An alternating current is given by the equation
0 i = i1 sin ω t + i 2 cos ω t . The rms current will be
[JEE (Main) 2020]
[JEE (Main) 2021]
1
V0(t) 1 1
(a) (i1 + i2 ) (b) (i12 + i22 ) 2
3V
2 2
(a) 1
1 1 2 2 2
2V (c) (i1 + i2 )2 (d) (i1 + i2 )
2 2
5 µs 10 µs 15 µs t 30. An AC current is given by I = I1 sin ωt + I 2 cos ωt . A hot wire
ammeter will give a reading. [JEE (Main) 2021]
V0(t) I1 + I 2 I12 + I 22
(a) (b)
2V 2 2 2
(b)
I12 − I 22 I1 + I 2
(c) (d)
2 2
5 µs 10 µs 15 µs t
31. In a series LCR circuit, the inductive reactance ( X L ) is 10 Ω
and the capacitive reactance ( X C ) is 4 Ω . The resistance
V0(t)
(R) in the circuit is 6 Ω
(c)
The power factor of the circuit is [JEE (Main) 2021]
2V 1 3
(a) (b)
2 2
5 µs 10 µs 15 µs t
1 1
(c) (d)
V0(t) 2 2 2
2V 32. In a circuit consisting of a capacitance and a generator with
(d) alternating emf E g = E g 0 sin ω t, VC and I C are the voltage
and current. Correct phasor diagram for such circuit is
5 µs 10 µs 15 µs t
Eg ~ VC
IC C
27. The angular frequency of alternating current in a L-C-R
circuit is 100 rad / s . The components connected are shown
[JEE (Main) 2021]
in the figure. Find the value of inductance of the coil and
capacity of condenser VC
IC VC
R = 60 Ω (a) (b)
ωt
ωt
15 V
R' = 40 Ω
C 10 V L 20 V
IC

VC
IC
VC ωt
[JEE (Main) 2021] (c) (d)
ωt
(a) 1.33 H and 250 µ F (b) 0.8 H and 250 µ F
(c) 0.8 H and 150 µ F (d) 1.33 H and 150 µ F IC
Chapter 23 : Alternating Current Compact Study Material Page 245

33. A series LCR circuit driven by 300 V at a frequency of 36. A resonance circuit having inductance and resistance
50 Hz contains a resistance R = 3 kΩ, an inductor of 2 × 10− 4 H and 6.28 Ω respectively oscillates at 10 MHz
inductive reactance X L = 250π Ω and an unknown frequency. The value of quality factor of this resonator is
capacitor. The value of capacitance to maximize the average [π = 3.14] [JEE (Main) 2021]
2
power should be (Take π = 10) [JEE (Main) 2021]
37. A coil of inductance 2H having negligible resistance is
(a) 400 µF (b) 4 µF connected to a source of supply whose voltage is given by
(c) 40 µF (d) 25 µF V = 3t volt. (where t is in second). If the voltage is applied

34. In an ac circuit, an inductor, a capacitor and a resistor are when t = 0, then the energy stored in the coil after 4s is
connected in series with X L = R = X C . Impedance of this _____ J [JEE (Main) 2021]

circuit is [JEE (Main) 2021] 38. Two circuits are shown in the figure (A) & (B). At a
(a) Zero (b) R frequency of ________rad/s the average power dissipated in
one cycle will be same in both the circuits
(c) R 2 (d) 2R 2

40µF 0.1H
Numerical Questions : 5Ω 5Ω
35. In a series LR circuit, power of 400 W is dissipated from a R R L
C
source of 250 V , 50 Hz. The power factor of the circuit is
0.8. In order to bring the power factor to unity, a capacitor ~ ~
of value C is added in series to the L and R. Taking the 220 V 220 V
 n  figure (A) figure (B)
value of C as   µF , then value of n is
 3π 
[JEE (Main) 2020] [JEE (Main) 2021]

CRITICAL QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 d 2 d 3 b 4 c 5 b 6 b 7 b 8 c 9 d 10 c

11 b 12 a 13 c 14 a 15 d 16 c 17 a 18 c

PAST YEAR QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 b 2 c 3 d 4 a 5 b 6 b 7 d 8 b 9 c 10 c

11 b 12 d 13 b 14 a 15 a 16 c 17 c 18 a 19 a 20 b

21 d 22 a 23 c 24 a 25 a 26 a 27 b 28 b 29 b 30 b

31 d 32 b 33 b 34 b 35 400 36 2000 37 144 38 500

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 Electron, Photon, Photo-
CHAPTER
IMPORTANT POINTS
24 electric Effect and X-Rays
 Oxide coated filament in vacuum tubes is used to emit
electrons at relatively lower temperature.
 The de-Broglie wavelength of electrons in first Bohr orbit of
an atom is equal to circumference of orbit.  Conduction of electricity in gases at low pressure takes
because colliding electrons acquire higher kinetic energy due to
 A photon is not a material particle. It is a quanta of energy.
increase in mean free path.
 Photoelectric effect is due to the particle nature of light.
 Kinetic energy of cathode rays depends on both voltage
 Discovery of positive rays helps in discovering isotopes. and work function of cathode.
 A particle having zero rest mass and non zero energy and  Hydrogen atom does not emit X-rays because it's energy
momentum must travels with a speed equal to speed of light. levels are too close to each other.
 de-Broglie wavelength associatesd with gas molecules is  The essential difference between X-rays and of γ-rays is
h h that, γ-rays emits from nucleus while X-rays from outer part of
given as λ = = (Energy of gas molecules at
mvrms 3 mkT atom.
3  There is no time delay between emission of electron and
temperature T is E = kT )
2 incidence of photon, i.e., the electrons are emitted out as soon
 When a particle exhibits wave nature, it is associated with a as the light falls on metal surface.
wave packet, rather than a wave.  If light were wave (not photons) it would take about an
 By coating the metal surface with a layer of barium oxide or year to eject a photoelectron out of the metal surface.
strontium oxide it's work function is lowered.  Doze of X-ray are measured in terms of produced ions or
 We must remember that intensity of incident light radiation free energy via ionisaiton.
is inversely proportional to the square of distance between  Safe doze for human body per week is one Roentgen
source of light and photosensitive plate P, (One Roentgen is the amount of X-rays which emits 2.5 × 104 J
1 1 (free energy through ionization of 1 gm air at NTP)
i.e., I ∝ 2 so I ∝ i ∝ 2 )
d d
 The photoelectrons emitted from the metallic surface have
 The photoelectric current can be increased by filling some different kinetic energies even when the incident photons have
inert gas like Argon into the bulb. The photoelectrons emitted by same energy. This happens because all the electrons do not
cathode ionise the gas by collision and hence the current is exist in the surface layer. Those coming from below the surface
increased. loose more energy in getting themselves free.
 Compton effect shows that photon has momentum.  Einstein was awarded Nobel prize for explaining the
 Production of X-rays is the reverse phenomenon of photoelectric effect.
photoelectric effect.  Uncertainty in the measurement of momentum of proton
 The thickness of medium at which intensity of emergent h
within the nucleus is ∆p =
I 2πd
X-rays becomes half, i.e., I ' = 0 is called half value thickness
2 where d = diameter of the nucleus and ∆x = d = uncertainty in
0.693 the measurement of position of proton.
(x1/2) and it is given as x1 / 2 = .
µ
 Continuous X-rays are produced due to the phenomenon Critical Questions
called "Bremsstrahlung". It means slowing down or braking
1. An electromagnetic radiation has photons of energy of
radiation.
14.4 keV . Part of electromagnetic spectrum it belongs is
 The wavelength of characteristic X-ray doesn't depend on
accelerating voltage. It depends on the atomic number (Z) of the called
target material. (a) Infrared region (b) Visible region

 In characteristic X-ray spectrum λKα < λLα < λMα and (c) X-ray region (d) Gamma ray region
2. A point source is radiating at rate of 800 W. The maximum
ν Kα > ν Lα > ν Mα also λ Kα > λ Kβ > λ Kγ
value of electric field at a distance of 3.5 m from the source
 Nearly all metals emit photoelectrons when exposed to UV will be
light. But alkali metals like lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium (a) 56.7 Vm−1 (b) 62.6 Vm−1
and cesium emit photoelectrons even when exposed to visible
light. (c) 39.3 Vm−1 (d) 44.2 Vm −1
Chapter 24 : Electron, Photon, Photo-electric Effect and X-Rays Compact Study Material Page 247

3. Energy of a light photon is equal to the kinetic energy of 8. A particle of mass 3 m at rest, decays into two particles of
photon. Energy of photon is E, let λ1 be the de-Broglie masses m and 2 m having non-zero speeds. What is the
wavelength of photon and λ 2 be the wavelength of the ratio of de-Broglie wavelengths of the particles
(a) 1:1 (b) 1 : 2
photon. The ratio λ1 : λ2 is proportional to
(c) 2:1 (d) 2: 3
(a) E0 (b) E1/ 2
9. A surface of size 10 cm × 10 cm is placed in the path of violet
(c) E −1 (d) E −2
4. In the given graph, let I a , Ib and I c be intensities and light (λ = 4000 Å) of intensity 4 Wm −2 . Initially surface is
perpendicular to the path of beam, then surface is tilted at an
fa , fb and fc be the frequencies for the curves a, b and c,
angle of 30° with the light beam. The ratio of number of
respectively. Photocurrent photons falling per second over the surface in two cases will be
1 2
(a) (b)
2 3
c
b 3
a (c) (d) 1
4
Anode potential 10. Light from a discharge tube containing hydrogen falls over
Then, which of these are correct sodium surface. Work function of sodium metal is 1.82 eV
(a) fa = fb and I a ≠ I b (b) fa = fc and I a = I c and kinetic energy of fastest photoelectron emitted from
(c) fa = fb and I a = I b (d) fb = fc and I b = I c sodium surface is 0.73 eV . . Recoil speed of photon emitting
5. For thermionic emission, a cathode or emitter is heated in hydrogen atom (assuming initially at rest) will be
evacuated space to emit electrons. Choose the incorrect (a) 5.2 ms − 1 (b) 0.5 ms −1
option regarding thermionic emission.
(a) Tungsten is preferred as a suitable material as it has (c) 0.814 ms −1 (d) 8.14 ms −1
low work function 11. An electromagnetic radiation represented by
(b) Metal alloys (a mixture of two metals) is preferred as
E = a(1 + cos ω t )cos ω0 t falls over a lithium surface with
they have low work function
(c) Oxide coated cathodes are preferred as they have low work function of 2.39 eV . Maximum kinetic energy of
operating temperatures and low work function emitted photoelectrons will be
(d) Oxide coated cathode are used for low voltage values (Give a = 4 N /C, ω = 6 × 1014 rads −1 , ω0 = 3.6 × 1015 rads −1 )
6. Light of wavelength 2475 Å is incident on Barium surface.
Photoelectrons emitted describe a circle of radius 100 cm in (a) 0
1 (b) 0.37 eV
a perpendicular magnetic field of intensity × 10−5 tesla.
17 (c) 0.70 eV
Work function of the Barium is
(d) No photoemission occurs
 e 11 C 
 Take, = 1.7 × 10  ⊗B
12. A beam of light falls over cathode of a photocell after
 m kg 
passing through two polaroid. Now, one the polaroids is
rotated keeping other fixed. Variation of square of
e−
maximum velocity of emitted electrons with angle θ of
Incident rotation of polaroid is
ray
V2max V2max

Barium plate
(a) (b)
(a) 1.8 eV (b) 2.1eV
θ θ
(c) 4.5eV (d) 3.3eV θ = π/2 θ = π/2

7. If momentum of an electron is changed by ∆ p , then the

V2max V2max
de-Broglie wavelength associated with it changes by 0.50%.
The initial momentum of the electron will be
(c) (d)
∆p ∆p
(a) (b)
200 199
θ θ
θ = π/2 θ = π/2
(c) 199 ∆ p (d) 400 ∆ p
Page 248 Compact Study Material Chapter 24 : Electron, Photon, Photo-electric Effect and X-Rays

13. Estimate the value of work function of cesium, form the 18. Consider the following photoelectric emission experiment.
experimental results plotted on the graph given below.
Evacuated Light f>f0
glass tube
Stopping Potential (volt)

C O A
µA
− +

Distance of lens and centre of cathode (OC) is initially less

than focal length of lens. Diameter of photosensitive cathode
Frequency is more than diameter of lens. Lens is moved away from
0.49 f × 1015 (Hz)
cathode slowly at a constant speed. Which of the following
graphs is correct? Assume that light falls over cathode only
(a) 3.2eV (b) 1.75 eV after passing through lens.

(c) 2eV (d) 2.5eV

V (Volts) I (A)

Stopping potential
14. For a particle having kinetic energy K, an accurate value of

Photocurrent
de-Broglie wavelength associated with the particle is (a) (b)
hc
(a) λ=
K2
d(cm) d(cm)
Distance OC Distance OC
hc
(b) λ=
2mc 2 K
hc
Max KE of emitted electron

(c) λ=
K + 2mc 2 K
2
Kmax(J) I(A)

Photocurrent
h
(d) λ= 2 (c) (d)
p

15. Taking rest mass of an electron as 0.511 MeV /c 2

d(cm) d(cm)
E Distance OC Distance OC
( E = mc 2 , m = ), for 1% accuracy, an electron need to be
c2
treated relativistically, when its kinetic energy exceeds 19. A student calculated de-Broglie wavelength associated with
(a) 10eV (b) 10 eV3 electron in ground state of hydrogen atoms as λ1 . He takes
zero of potential energy at infinity. Another student take zero
(c) 10 5 eV (d) None of these
of potential energy at 1.06 Å distance and his calculated
16. An electron in a hydrogen-like atom is in an excited state. It value of de-Broglie wavelength is λ 2 . Then, λ1 /λ2 is
has a total energy of −3.4 eV . The de-Broglie wavelength
(a) 1: 2 (b) 2:1
associated with electron is
(c) 1:1 (d) 2: 3
(a) 6.63 Å (b) 10.25 Å
20. Which of these are incorrect regarding work function of a
(c) 7.96 Å (d) 2.8 Å photosensitive surface
17. Assume that the de-Broglie wave associated with an electron I. Work function of a metal is not a constant quantity.
form an standing wave between the atoms, arranged in a II. Work function of metal surface increases with
one-dimensional array with nodes on each of the atomic photoemission.
sites. If a standing wave is formed, then distance d between III. Work function of a metal surface decreases, when the
atoms in array is 2 Å and again at 2.5 Å, but not at any surface is heated or coated with a suitable material.
intermediate value of d. Kinetic energy of this electron is IV. Work function of a metal surface is same as the energy
around of photon, when an electron is emitted with a non-zero
15eV speed.
(a) (b) 150eV
(a) Both I and III (b) Both II and III
(c) 1500 eV (d) 1.5 × 10 4 eV
(c) II, III and IV (d) Only IV
Chapter 24 : Electron, Photon, Photo-electric Effect and X-Rays Compact Study Material Page 249

21. In a photoelectric experiment, electrons are ejected from 26. The ″Kα″ X-rays emission line of tungsten occurs at
metals X and Y by light of intensity I and frequency f. The λ = 0.021 nm. The energy difference between K and L
potential difference V required to stop the electrons is levels in this atom is about
measured for various frequencies. If Y has a greater work (a) 0.51 MeV (b) 1.2 MeV
function than X; which one of the following graphs best
(c) 59 MeV (d) 13.6 MeV
illustrates the expected results
v 27. Which of the following wavelength falls in a X-rays region
v
(a) 10,000 Å (b) 1000 Å
X X (c) 1Å (d) 10 −2 Å
(a) (b) 28. The penetrating power of X-ray increases with the
Y Y
(a) Increases of its velocity (b) Increase in its intensity
o f f
o (c) Decrease in its velocity (d) Increases in its frequency
v v 29. The wavelength of the Kα line for an element of atomic
number 57 is α . What is the wavelength of the Kα line for
X Y the element of atomic number 29
(c) Y (d) (a) α (b) 2α
X
(c) 4α (d) 8 α
o f o f
30. If the frequency of Kα , K β and Lα X-rays for a material
22. A proton and an electron are accelerated by same potential
difference have de-Broglie wavelength λ p and λe . The vKα , vKβ , vLα respectively, then

relation between λ p and λe is, (a) vKα = vKβ + vLα (b) vLα = vKα + vKβ
(a) λe = λp (b) λe < λp (c) vKβ = vKα + vLα (d) None of these
(c) λe > λp (d) None of these 31. In X-ray tube, when the accelerating voltage V is doubled,
23. An electron with initial kinetic energy of 100eV is the different between the wavelength of Kα line and the
acceleration through a potential difference of 50V. Now the minimum cutoff of continuous X-ray spectrum:
de-Broglie wavelength of electron becomes. (a) Remains constant
(b) Becomes more than two times
(a) 1Å (b) 1.5 Å
(c) Becomes half
(c) 3Å (d) 12.27 Å (d) Becomes less than 2 times
24. If h is Planck’s constant is SI system, the momentum of a
photon of wavelength 0.01 Å is: Past Year Questions
(a) 10 −2 h (b) h 1. If g E and g m are the accelerations due to gravity on the
(c) 2
10 h (d) 10 h 12 surfaces of the earth and the moon respectively and if
Millikan’s oil drop experiment could be performed on the
25. In a characteristic X-ray spectra of some atom superimposed
two surfaces, one will find the ratio
on continuous X-ray spectra
electronic charge on the moon
to be [AIEEE 2007]
Q electronic charge on the earth
P
(a) 1 (b) 0
Relative intensity

(c) g E / gm (d) gm / g E
2. A tiny spherical oil drop carrying a net charge q is balanced
in still air with a vertical uniform electric field of strength
81π
× 10 5 Vm −1 . When the field is switched off, the drop is
7
observed to fall with terminal velocity 2 × 10 −3 ms −1 . Given
(a) P represents Kα line
g = 9.8 ms −2 , viscosity of the air = 1.8 × 10 −5 Ns m −2 and
(b) Q represents K β line
the density of oil = 900 kg m–3, the magnitude of q is
(c) Q and P represents Kα and K β lines respectively [IIT-JEE 2010]
−19 −19
(d) Relative position of Kα and K β depend on the (a) 1.6 × 10 C (b) 3.2 × 10 C

particular atom (c) 4.8 × 10 −19 C (d) 8.0 × 10 −19 C

Page 250 Compact Study Material Chapter 24 : Electron, Photon, Photo-electric Effect and X-Rays

3. As an electron makes a transition from an excited state to 8. A photoelectric material having work-function φ0 is
the ground state of a hydrogen – like atom/ion
 hc 
[JEE (Main) 2015] illuminated with light of wavelength λ  λ < . The fastest

 φ 0 
(a) Its kinetic energy increases but potential energy and
total energy decrease photoelectron has a de Broglie wavelength λd . A change in
(b) Kinetic energy, potential energy and total energy wavelength of the incident light by ∆λ results in a change
decrease ∆λd
(c) Kinetic energy decreases, potential energy increases but ∆λd in λd . Then the ratio is proportional to
∆λ
total energy remains same
[JEE 2017]
(d) Kinetic energy and total energy decreases but potential
energy increases λ3d λ3d
(a) (b)
4. If the kinetic energy of a free electron doubles, its de-Broglie λ2 λ
wavelength changes by the factor [AIEEE 2005]
λd2 λd
(c) (d)
(a) 1/ 2 (b) 2 λ2 λ
(c) 1/2 (d) 2 9. An electron from various excited states of hydrogen atom
5. A photon and an electron have equal energy E. emits radiation to come to the ground state. Let λn , λ g be
λphoton / λelectron is proportional to
the de Broglie wavelength of the electron in the n th state
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004]
and the ground state respectively. Let Λn be the
(a) E (b) 1 / E
wavelength of the emitted photon in transition from the n th
(c) 1 / E (d) Does not depend upon E
state to the ground state. For large n, ( A, B are constants)
6. Light of wavelength λ ph falls on a cathode plate inside a
[JEE (Main) 2018]
vacuum tube as shown in the figure. The work function of
the cathode surface is φ and the anode is a wire mesh of (a) Λ2n ≈ A+ B λn2 (b) Λ2n ≈λ

conducting material kept at a distance d from the cathode. B

(c) Λn ≈ A + (d) Λ n ≈ A + Bλn
A potential difference V is maintained between the λn2
electrodes. If the minimum de Broglie wavelength of the
10. In an electron microscope, the resolution that can be
electrons passing through the anode is λe , which of the
achieved is of the order of the wavelength of electrons used.
following statement(s) is(are) true −12
To resolve a width of 7.5 × 10 m , the minimum electron
energy required is close to [JEE (Main) 2019]
Light (a) 500 Ke V (b) 25 Ke V
(c) 1 Ke V (d) 100 Ke V

Electrons 11. If the de-Broglie wavelength of an electron is equal to 10 −3

times the wavelength of a photon of frequency 6 × 1014 Hz ,
then the speed of electron is equal to
(Speed of light = 3 × 108 m / s
– V+ Planck’s constant = 6.63 × 10 −34 J .s
[JEE 2016]
Mass of electron = 9.1 × 10 −31 kg) [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) For large potential difference (V >> φ / e), λe is
6
approximately halved if V is made four times (a) 1.7 × 10 m / s (b) 1.45 × 106 m / s
(b) λe increases at the same rate as λ ph for λ ph < hc / φ (c) 1.8 × 106 m / s (d) 1.1 × 106 m / s

(c) λe is approximately halved, if d is doubled 12. A particle A of mass ' m' and charge ' q' is accelerated by a

(d) λe decreases with increase in φ and λ ph potential difference of 50V . Another particle B of mass
4m and charge ' q' is accelerated by a potential difference
7. A particle of mass M at rest decays into two particles of
masses m1 and m2, having non-zero velocities. The ratio of λA
of 2500V . The ratio of de-Broglie wavelengths is close
the de-Broglie wavelengths of the particles, λ1 / λ 2 is λB
[IIT-JEE 1999] to [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) m1 / m2 (b) m2 / m1 (a) 14.14 (b) 10.00
(c) 1.0 (d) m 2 / m1 (c) 0.07 (d) 4.47
Chapter 24 : Electron, Photon, Photo-electric Effect and X-Rays Compact Study Material Page 251

13. A nucleus A , with a finite de-Broglie wavelength λ A' 20. If a photon has velocity c and frequency ν, then which of
undergoes spontaneous fission into two nuclei B and C of following represents its wavelength [AIEEE 2002]

equal mass. B flies in the same direction as that of A, while hc hν

(a) (b)
C flies in the opposite direction with a velocity equal to half E c
of that of B. The de-Broglie wavelengths λB and λC of B hν
(c) (d) hν
and C are respectively [JEE (Main) 2019] c2
λA 21. The work function of a substance is 4.0 eV. The longest
(a) λ A' 2λ A (b) , λA
2 wavelength of light that can cause photoelectron emission
λA from this substance is approximately [IIT JEE 1998;
(c) λ A' (d) 2λ A' λ A
2 AIEEE 2004]
14. A particle P is formed due to a completely inelastic collision
(a) 540 nm (b) 400 nm
of particles x and y having de-Broglie wavelengths λx
(c) 310 nm (d) 220 nm
and λy respectively. If x and y were moving in opposite
22. The maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted
directions, then the de-Broglie wavelength of P is from a surface when photons of energy 6eV fall on it is 4 eV.
[JEE (Main) 2019]
The stopping potential in volts is [IIT JEE 1997 Re-Exam]
λ x λy
(a) λ x − λy (b) (a) 2 (b) 4
λ x − λy
(c) 6 (d) 10
λ x λy
(c) λ x + λy (d) 23. Sodium and copper have work functions 2.3 eV and 4.5 eV
λ x + λy
respectively. Then the ratio of their threshold wavelengths is
15. Consider an electron in a hydrogen atom, revolving in its nearest to [AIEEE 2002]
second excited state (having radius 4.65 Å). The de-Broglie
(a) 1: 2 (b) 4 : 1
wavelength of this electron is [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 12.9 Å (b) 3.5 Å (c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 4
(c) 9.7 Å (d) 6.6 Å 24. Two identical photo-cathodes receive light of frequencies f1
16. Two particles move at right angle to each other. Their de and f2 . If the velocities of the photo electrons (of mass m )
Broglie wavelengths are λ1 and λ2 respectively. The
coming out are respectively v1 and v2 , then [AIEEE 2003]
particles suffer perfectly inelastic collision. The de Broglie
1/ 2
wavelength λ , of the final particle, is given by  2h  2h
(a) v1 − v2 =  ( f1 − f2 ) (b) v12 − v22 = ( f1 − f2 )
[JEE (Main) 2019]  m  m
1 1 1
(a) 2
= + (b) λ = λ1 λ 2  2h 
1/ 2
2h
λ λ12 λ22 (c) v1 + v2 =  ( f1 + f2 ) (d) v12 + v22 = ( f1 + f2 )
m  m
2 1 1 λ1 + λ2
(c) = + (d) λ =
λ λ1 λ2 2 25. The threshold wavelength for photoelectric emission from a
material is 5200 Å. Photo-electrons will be emitted when
17. A pulse of light of duration 100 ns is absorbed completely
this material is illuminated with monochromatic radiation
by a small object initially at rest. Power of the pulse is 30mW
from a [IIT JEE 1982]
and the speed of light is 3 × 108 ms −1 . The final momentum
of the object is [JEE 2013]
(a) 50 watt infrared lamp

(a) 0.3 × 10 −17 kg ms −1 (b) 1.0 × 10 −17 kg ms −1 (b) 1 watt infrared lamp
(c) 50 watt ultraviolet lamp
(c) 3.0 × 10 −17 kg ms −1 (d) 9.0 × 10 −17 kg ms −1
(d) 1 watt ultraviolet lamp
18. If a source of power 4kW produces 10 20 photons/second,
(e) Both (c) and (d)
the radiation belongs to a part of the spectrum called
[AIEEE 2010] 26. The radiation corresponding to 3→2 transition of
(a) γ -rays (b) X-rays hydrogen atom falls on a metal surface to produce
(c) Ultraviolet rays (d) Microwaves photoelectrons. These electrons are made to enter a
19. The surface of a metal is illuminated with the light of 400 magnetic field of 3 × 10 −4 T . If the radius of the largest
nm. The kinetic energy of the ejected photoelectrons was circular path followed by these electrons is 10.0 mm, the
found to be 1.68 eV. The work function of the metal is work function of the metal is close to [JEE (Main) 2014]
(hc = 1240 eV. nm) [AIEEE 2009]
(a) 1.8 eV (b) 1.1 eV
(a) 3.09 eV (b) 1.41 eV
(c) 1.51 eV (d) 1.68 eV (c) 0.8 eV (d) 1.6 eV
Page 252 Compact Study Material Chapter 24 : Electron, Photon, Photo-electric Effect and X-Rays

27. A metal surface is illuminated by light of two different 32. The anode voltage of a photocell is kept fixed. The
wavelengths 248 nm and 310 nm. The maximum speeds of wavelength λ of the light falling on the cathode is gradually
the photoelectrons corresponding to these wavelengths are
changed. The plate current I of the photocell varies as
u1 and u2 respectively. If the ratio u1 : u2 = 2 : 1 and
follows [AIEEE 2006; JEE (Mains) 2013]
hc=1240 eV nm, the work function of the metal is nearly
[JEE 2014] I
I
(a) 3.7 eV (b) 3.2 eV
(c) 2.8 eV (d) 2.5 eV
28. In a historical experiment to determine Planck's constant, a (a) (b)
metal surface was irradiated with light of different
wavelengths. The emitted photoelectron energies were O λ O λ
measured by applying a stopping potential. The relevant
data for the wavelength (λ ) of incident light and the I I
corresponding stopping potential (v0 ) are given below
(c) (d)
λ (µm) v0 (Volt)
0.3 2.0 λ λ
O O
0.4 1.0
0.5 0.4 33. Photoelectric effect experiments are performed using three
8 −1 −19 different metal plates p, q and r having work functions
Given that c = 3 × 10 ms and e = 1.6 × 10 C, Planck's
constant (in units of J s) found from such an experiment is
φ p = 2.0 eV , φ q = 2.5 eV and φ r = 3.0 eV , respectively. A
[JEE 2016] light beam containing wavelengths of 550 nm, 450 nm and
(a) 6.0 × 10 −34 (b) 6.4 × 10 −34 350 nm with equal intensities illuminates each of the plates.
(c) 6.6 × 10 −34 (d) 6.8 × 10 −34 The correct I-V graph for the experiment is. [IIT-JEE 2009]
29. The potential energy of a particle of mass m is given by (Take hc = 1240 eV nm ]
E ; 0 ≤ x ≤ 1
U(x) =  0 I
I
0; x >1
p
λ1 and λ2 are the de-Broglie wavelengths of the particle, q
when 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 and x > 1 respectively. If the total energy of (a) r (b) p
λ q
r
particle is 2E0, the ratio 1 will be
λ2 V V
I I
[Based on IIT-JEE (Mains) 2005]
(a) 2 (b) 1 r
1 q
(c) 2 (d)
2 p r
(c) (d) q p
30. A photon collides with a stationary hydrogen atom in V V
ground state inelastically. Energy of the colliding photon is
10.2 eV. After a time interval of the order of micro second 34. A 2mW laser operates at a wavelength of 500nm . The
another photon collides with same hydrogen atom number of photons that will be emitted per second is
inelastically with an energy of 15 eV. What will be observed
(Given Plank’s constant h = 6.6 × 10 −34 Js, speed of light
by the detector [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2005]
(a) 2 photons of energy 10.2 eV c = 3.0 × 10 8 m / s) [JEE (Main) 2019]
(b) 2 photons of energy of 1.4 eV
(c) One photon of energy 10.2 eV and an electron of (a) 5 × 1015 (b) 1 × 1016
16
energy 1.4 eV (c) 1.5 × 10 (d) 2 × 1016
(d) One photon of energy 10.2 eV and another photon of 35. Surface of certain metal is first illuminated with light of
1.4 eV
wavelength λ1 = 350 nm and then, by light of wavelength
31. According to Einstein’s photoelectric equation, the plot of
the kinetic energy of the emitted photo electrons from a λ = 540 nm . If it is found that the maximum speed of the
metal versus the frequency, of the incident radiation gives a
straight line whose slope [AIEEE 2004]
photo electrons in the two cases differ by a factor of 2 . The
(a) Is the same for all metals and independent of the work function of the metal (in eV) is close to
intensity of the radiation 1240
(b) Depends on the intensity of the radiation (Energy of photon = eV ) [JEE (Main) 2019]
λ (in nm)
(c) Depends both on the intensity of the radiation and the
metal used (a) 2.5 (b) 5.6
(d) Depends on the nature of the metals used (c) 1.4 (d) 1.8
Chapter 24 : Electron, Photon, Photo-electric Effect and X-Rays Compact Study Material Page 253

36. The magnetic field associated with a light wave is given, at 42. In a photoelectric effect experiment the threshold
the origin, by B = B0 [sin( 3.14 × 10 7 )ct + sin(6.28 × 10 7 )ct ] . wavelength of light is 380 nm . If the wavelength of incident
If this light falls on a silver plate having a work function of light is 260 nm , the maximum kinetic energy of emitted
4.7eV , what will be the maximum kinetic energy of the electrons will be
photo electrons (c = 3 × 10 8 ms −1 , h = 6.6 × 10 −34 J − s) 1237
Given E (in eV ) = [JEE (Main) 2019]
[JEE (Main) 2019] λ (in nm)
(a) 6.82 eV (b) 12.5 eV (a) 3.0 eV (b) 4.5 eV

(c) 7.72 eV (d) 8.52 eV (c) 1.5 eV (d) 15.1 eV

43. The stopping potential V0 (in volt) as a function of
37. A metal plate of area 1 × 10 −4 m 2 is illuminated by a
frequency (v) for a sodium emitter, is shown in the figure.
radiation of intensity 16mW / m2 .The work function of the
The work function of sodium, from the data plotted in the
metal is 5eV . The energy of the incident photons is 10eV figure, will be
and only 10% of its produces photo electrons. The number
(Given : Planck's constant (h) = 6.63 × 10 −34 Js , electron
of emitted photo electrons per seconds and their maximum
energy, respectively, will be [1eV = 1.6 × 10 −19 J ] charge e = 1.6 × 10 −19 C)
[JEE (Main) 2019] 3.0

(a) 1010 and 5eV (b) 1011 and 5 eV 2.0

12 14 V0
(c) 10 and 5eV (d) 10 and 10eV 1.0
38. In a photoelectric experiment, the wavelength of the light
incident on a metal is changed from 300 nm to 400 nm . 2 4 6 8 10
The decrease in the stopping potential is close to [JEE (Main) 2019]
 hc  (a) 1.95 eV (b) 1.66 eV
 = 1240 nm − V  [JEE (Main) 2019]
 e 
(c) 2.12 eV (d) 1.82 eV
(a) 2.0 V (b) 0.5 V
44. The X–ray beam coming from an X-ray tube will be
(c) 1.0 V (d) 1.5 V [IIT 1985]

39. When a certain photosensitive surface is illuminated with (a) Monochromatic

monochromatic light of frequency ν , the stopping potential (b) Having all wavelengths smaller than a certain maximum
for the photo current is −V0 / 2 . When the surface is wavelength
illuminated by monochromatic light of frequency ν / 2 , the (c) Having all wavelengths larger than a certain minimum
stopping potential is −V0 . The threshold frequency for wavelength
photoelectric emission is [JEE (Main) 2019]
(d) Having all wavelengths lying between a minimum and a
maximum wavelength
4
(a) ν (b) 2ν 45. The binding energy of the innermost electron in tungsten is
3
40 keV. To produce characteristic X-rays using a tungsten
3ν 5ν target in an X-rays tube the potential difference V between
(c) (d)
2 3 the cathode and the anti-cathode should be [IIT 1985]
40. In a Frank- Hertz experiment, an electron of energy 5.6 eV (a) V< 40 kV (b) V ≤ 40 kV
passes through mercury vapour and emerges with an energy (c) V > 40 kV (d) V >/< 40 kV
0.7eV. The minimum wavelength of photons emitted by 46. The potential difference applied to an X-ray tube is 5kV and
mercury atoms is close to [JEE (Main) 2019] the current through it is 3.2 mA. Then the number of
(a) 1700 nm (b) 220 nm electrons striking the target per second is
(c) 2020 nm (d) 250 nm [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002]
41. The electric field of light wave is given as (a) 2×1016 (b) 5×1016
  2π x  N (c) 1×1017 (d) 4×1015
E = 10 − 3 cos −7
− 2π × 6 × 1014 t  xˆ .This light falls
 5 × 10  C 47. Arrange the following electromagnetic radiations per
on a metal plate of work function 2eV . The stopping quantum in the order of increasing energy
potential of the photo-electrons is A : Blue light B : Yellow light
 12375  C : X-ray D : Radiowave
Given, E (in eV ) =  [JEE (Main) 2019]
 λ (in Å)  [JEE (Main) 2016]
(a) 2.48 V (b) 2.0 V (a) A, B, D, C (b) C, A, B, D
(c) 0.48 V (d) 0.72 V (c) B, A, D, C (d) D, B, A, C
Page 254 Compact Study Material Chapter 24 : Electron, Photon, Photo-electric Effect and X-Rays

48. If the potential difference between the anode and cathode of 54. Kα wavelength emitted by an atom of atomic number Z=11
the X-ray tube is increase is λ. Find the atomic number for an atom that emits
I S Kα radiation with wavelength 4λ [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2005]
R
(a) Z = 6 (b) Z = 4
Q
(c) Z = 11 (d) Z = 44
55. An electron of mass m and magnitude of charge |e |
initially at rest gets accelerated by a constant electric field E.
The rate of change of de-Broglie wavelength of this electron
P λ at time t ignoring relativistic effects is [JEE (Main) 2020]
(a) The peaks at R and S would move to shorter
wavelength h h
(a) − (b) −
(b) The peaks at R and S would remain at the same | e | Et |e | E t
wavelength
(c) The cut off wavelength at P would decrease −h | e| Et
(c) (d)
(d) (b) and (c) both are correct | e | Et 2 h
49. X-rays are produced in X-ray tube operating at a given 56. Given figure shows few data points in a photoelectric effect
accelerating voltage. The wavelength of the continuous X-
experiment for a certain metal. The minimum energy for
rays has values from [IIT 1998]
(a) 0 to ∞ ejection of electron from its surface is (Planck’s constant
(b) λmin to ∞, where λmin > 0 h = 6.62 × 10 −34 J . s) Y [JEE (Main) 2020]

(c) 0 to λmax , where λmax < ∞

(a) 2.27 eV

VStop(V)
(d) λmin to λmax , where 0 < λmin < λmax < ∞ C
(6, V)
50. The wavelength of Kα X-rays produced by an X-ray tube is (b) 2.59 eV
0.76 Å. The atomic number of the anode material of the B (5.5, 0)
tube is [IIT 1996] (c) 1.93 eV
A
(a) 20 (b) 60 X
5 f (1014 Hz)
(c) 40 (d) 80 (d) 2.10 eV
51. Electrons with energy 80 keV are incident on the tungsten
target of an X-ray tube. K shell electrons of tungsten have 57. If a semiconductor photodiode can detect a photon with a
ionization energy 72.5 keV. X-rays emitted by the tube maximum wavelength of 400nm, the its band gap energy is
contain only [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000]
(a) A continuous X-ray spectrum (Bremsstrahlung) with a (Planck's constant h = 6.63 × 10 −34 J .s. ;
minimum wavelength of ~ 0.155Å
(b) A continuous X-ray spectrum (Bremsstrahlung] with all Speed of light c = 3 × 108 m / s ) [JEE (Main) 2020]
wavelengths (a) 1.1 eV (b) 2.0 eV
(c) The characteristic X-rays spectrum of tungsten
(d) A continuous X-ray spectrum (Bremsstrahlung) with a (c) 1.5 eV (d) 3.1 eV
minimum wavelength of ~0.155Å and the
characteristic X-ray spectrum of tungsten 58. Two sources of light emit X-rays of wavelength 1 nm and
52. The intensity of X-rays from a Coolidge tube is plotted visible light of wavelength 500nm, respectively. Both the
against wavelength as shown in the figure. The minimum sources emit light of the same power 200W. The ratio of
wavelength found is λc and the wavelength of the Kα line
the number density of photons of X-rays to the number
is λk . As the accelerating voltage is increased density of photons of the visible light of the given
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001] wavelengths is [JEE (Main) 2020]
(a) (λK − λC ) increases 1
I
(a) (b) 250
500
(b) (λ K − λ C ) decreases 1
(c) (d) 500
(c) λ K increases 250
59. An α particle and a proton are accelerated from rest by a
(d) λ K decreases potential difference of 200 V. After this, their de Broglie
λC λK λ
53. The Kα X-ray emission line of tungsten occurs at λp
wavelengths are λα and λ p respectively. The ratio is
λ=0.021nm. The energy difference between K and L levels λα
in this atom is about [IIT 1997 Cancelled] [JEE (Main) 2021]
(a) 0.51 MeV (b) 1.2 MeV (a) 7.8 (b) 3.8
(c) 59 KeV (d) 13.6 eV (c) 2.8 (d) 8
Chapter 24 : Electron, Photon, Photo-electric Effect and X-Rays Compact Study Material Page 255

60. The stopping potential for electrons emitted from a 64. An electron moving with speed v and a photon moving with
photosensitive surface illuminated by light of wavelength speed c, have same d-Broglie wavelength. The ratio of kinetic
491 nm is 0.710 V. When the incident wavelength is energy of electron to that photon is [JEE (Main) 2021]
v 3c
changed to a new value, the stopping potential is 1.43 V. (a) (b)
3c v
The new wavelength is [JEE (Main) 2021]
(a) 382nm (b) 309 nm 2c v
(c) (d)
v 2c
(c) 329 nm (d) 400 nm
65. Two ions of masses 4 amu and 16 amu have charges + 2e
61. The de-Broglie wavelength associated with an electron and and + 3e respectively. These ions pass through the region
a proton were calculated by accelerating them through same
of constant perpendicular magnetic field. The kinetic energy
potential of 100 V. What should nearly be the ratio of their of both ions is same. Then [JEE (Main) 2021]
wavelengths ( m p = 1.00727u, me = 0.00055u) (a) Lighter ion will be deflected less than heavier ion
(b) Lighter ion will be deflected more than heavier ion
[JEE (Main) 2021]
(c) Both ions will be deflected equally
(a) 11860 : 1 (b) 41.4 : 1
(d) No ion will be deflected
(c) 43 : 1 (d) (1860)2 : 1
62. Two identical photocathodes receive the light of frequencies Numerical Questions :
f1 and f2 respectively. If the velocities of the photo- 66. When radiation of wavelength λ is used to illuminate a
metallic surface, the stopping potential is V. When the same
electrons coming out are v1 and v2 respectively, then
surface is illuminated with radiation of wavelength 3λ, the
[JEE (Main) 2021] V
1 stopping potential is . If the threshold wavelength for the
4
 2h 2 2h
(a) v1 − v 2 =  ( f1 − f2 ) (b) v12 − v22 = [ f1 − f2 ] metallic surface is n λ then value of n will be
m  m
[JEE (Main) 2020]
1
 2h 2 2h 67. The wavelength of an X-ray beam is 10 Å . The mass of a
(c) v1 + v 2 =  ( f1 + f2 ) (d) v12 + v22 = [ f1 + f2 ] fictitious particle having the same energy as that of the X-ray
m  m
x
63. An electron having de-Broglie wavelength λ is incident on photons is h kg The value of x is_________
3
a target in a X-ray tube. Cut-off wavelength of emitted X-ray (h = Planck's constant) [JEE (Main) 2021]
is [JEE (Main) 2021] 68. Two stream of photons, possessing energies equal to twice
hc and ten times the work function of metal are incident on the
(a) 0 (b) metal surface successively. The value of ratio of maximum
mc
velocities of the photoelectrons emitted in the two respective
2m 2 c 2 λ2 2mcλ2 cases is x : y . The value of x is ............
(c) (d)
h2 h [JEE (Main) 2021]

CRITICAL QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 c 2 d 3 a 4 a 5 a 6 c 7 c 8 a 9 a 10 c
11 b 12 d 13 c 14 c 15 d 16 a 17 b 18 b 19 c 20 d
21 a 22 c 23 a 24 d 25 c 26 c 27 c 28 d 29 c 30 c
31 b

PAST YEAR QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 a 2 d 3 a 4 a 5 b 6 a 7 c 8 a 9 c 10 b
11 b 12 a 13 b 14 b 15 c 16 a 17 b 18 b 19 b 20 a
21 c 22 b 23 c 24 b 25 e 26 b 27 a 28 b 29 c 30 c
31 a 32 a 33 a 34 a 35 d 36 c 37 b 38 c 39 c 40 d
41 c 42 c 43 b 44 c 45 c 46 a 47 d 48 d 49 b 50 c
51 d 52 a 53 c 54 a 55 c 56 a 57 d 58 a 59 c 60 a
61 c 62 b 63 d 64 d 65 b 66 9 67 10 68 1

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 25
1248 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

CHAPTER Atomic and Nuclear Physics

IMPORTANT POINTS  Atomic spectrum is a line spectrum
 No radioactive substance emits both α and β particles Each atom has it's own characteristic allowed orbits
depending upon the electronic configuration. Therefore photons
simultaneously. Also γ-rays are emitted after the emission of α
emitted during transition of electrons from one allowed orbit to
or β-particles.
inner allowed orbit are of some definite energy only. They do
 β-particles are not orbital electrons they come from nucleus. not have a continuous graduation of energy. Therefore the
The neutron in the nucleus decays into proton and an electron. spectrum of the emitted light has only some definite lines and
This electron is emitted out of the nucleus in the form of β-rays. therefore atomic spectrum is line spectrum.
 Activity per g of a substance is known as specific activity.  Just as dots of light of only three colours combine to form
The specific activity of 1 g of radium – 226 is 1 curie. almost every conceivable colour on T.V. screen, only about 100
 1 millicurie = 37 Rutherford distinct kinds of atoms combine to form all the materials in the
universe.
 According to Bohr theory the momentum of an e −
 Density of a nucleus is maximum at it's centre and
h
revolving in second orbit of H2 atom will be . decreases as we move outwards from the nucleus.
π
 When two very light nuclei combine to form a relatively
 For an electron in the nth orbit of hydrogen atom in Bohr heavy nucleus, then binding energy per nucleon increases.
model, circumference of orbit = nλ ; where λ = de-Broglie Thus, energy is released in this process (nuclear fusion).
wavelength.
B. E.
 Rch = Rydberg's energy ~
– 2.17 × 10 −18 J ~
– 13.6 eV . A
+

 For hydrogen atom principal quantum number Fusion Fission

+

13.6
n= .
(B.E.) A
 It may be noted that Plutonium is the best fuel as compared
 In a H atom when e − makes a transition from an excited to other fissionable material. It is because fission in Plutonium
state to the ground state it’s kinetic energy increases while can be initiated by both slow and fast neutrons. Moreover it can
potential and total energy decreases. be obtained from U 238 .
 The maximum number of electrons in a sub-shell with  Nuclear reactor is firstly devised by fermi.
orbital quantum number l is 2(2l + 1).  A type of reactor that can produce more fissile fuel than it
 With the increase in principal quantum number the energy consumes is the breeder reactor.
difference between the two successive energy levels decreases,  Apsara was the first Indian nuclear reactor.
while wavelength of spectral line increases.  To achieve fusion in laboratory a device is used to confine
n=4 the plasma, called Tokamak.
E ' > E' ' > E ' ' ' E′′′, λ′′′
n=3  A test tube full of base nuclei will weigh heavier than the
λ' < λ' ' < λ' ' '
E, λ E′′, λ′′ earth.
E = E '+ E' '+ E' ' ' n=2  If the relative abundance of isotopes in an element has a
1 1 1 1 E′, λ′ ratio n1 : n2 whose atomic masses are m1 and m2 then atomic
= + +
λ λ' λ' ' λ' ' ' n=1 n m + n2m2
mass of the element is M = 1 1
n1 + n2
 Rydberg constant is different for different elements
R(=1.09 × 107 m–1) is the value of Rydberg constant when  The nucleus of hydrogen contains only one proton.
the nucleus is considered to be infinitely massive as compared Therefore we may say that the proton is the nucleus of
hydrogen atom.
to the revolving electron. In other words, the nucleus is
considered to be stationary.  The activity of a radioactive substance decreases as the
number of undecayed nuclei decreases with time.
In case, the nucleus is not infinitely massive or stationary,
1
R  Activity ∝
then the value of Rydberg constant is given as R' = Half life
m
1+
M  Half life and mean life of a substance doesn't change with
where m is the mass of electron and M is the mass of nucleus. time or with pressure, temperature etc.
Chapter 25 : Atomic and Nuclear Physics Compact Study Material Page 257

 If a nuclide can decay simultaneously by two different 4. 1.0 kg of water is heated to raise its temperature by 1 K.
Then,
process which have decay constant λ1 and λ2, half life T1 and T2
(a) Its mass decreases due to increase of volume
and mean lives τ1 and τ2 respectively then (b) Its mass decreases due to decrease of density
(c) Its mass may increases by 4.7 × 10 −14 kg
1 λ1, T1, τ1 (d) Its mass increases due to conversion of protons into
λ neutrons
T 14
5. Consider the reaction, N + α → 17 O + p
τ
2 λ2, T2, τ2 The masses involved are
14 4
N = 14.00307 u, He = 4.00260 u
TT 1 17
⇒ λ = λ1 + λ2 ⇒ T= 1 2 H = 1.00783 u, O = 16.99913 u
T1 + T2
Then,
 There are at least three varieties of neutrinos, each with it's (a) Reaction is spontaneous
corresponding antineutrino; one is associated with beta decay (b) Reaction is possible when α-particle has a KE of
and the other two are associated with the decay of two unstable 1.54 MeV
particles, the muon and the tau particles. (c) Reaction is possible when α-particle has a KE of
 Are all fusion reaction exoergic ? 0.54 MeV
Fusion reaction between sufficiently light nuclei are exoergic (d) Q-value of reaction is 1.54 MeV
B.E.
because the increases. If the nuclei are too massive, 6. A proton is bombarded over a lithium nucleus. Due to
A collision two α-particles are produced.
B.E.
however decreases and fusion is endoergic (i.e., it takes in
A α 1
energy rather than releasing it). θ = cos −1 
4
 The Zeeman effect is the spliting of atomic energy levels 7
Li ⇒
and the associated spectrum lines when the atoms are placed in
P θ
a magnetic field. This effect confirms experimentally the
α
quantization of angular momentum.
 Geiger Muller counter is used for detecting α and β
If direction of motion of the α-particles with the direction of
particles.
bombarding proton is at an angle of cos −1 (1 / 4), then the
 Cloud chamber is used for detecting radioactive radiation
and for determining their paths, range and energy. correct relation between KE of proton ( K p ) and KE of α-
 Geiger Nuttal Law : log e λ = A + B log e R A and B are particle ( Kα ) is
constant and R
is the range. A graph between
1
log e λ and log e R is a straight line. (a) K p = 2 Kα (b) Kp = Kα
2
(c) 2 K p = 3 Kα (d) K p = Kα
Critical Questions
7. Mean lives of a radioactive substance are 1620 year and
1. Most abundant element in our universe is
405 year for α-emission and β-emission respectively.
(a) Hydrogen (b) Helium
(c) Isotones (d) Silicon If a sample of this substance decays by emitting both
2. A very stable nucleus has a surface are α and β emissions simultaneously, then time in which
A1 = 466.56π × 10 −30 m 2 . Another nucleus X has an area 3
th of sample will decay is ( log e 2 = 0.693 )
4
four times the area of A1. The mass number of X has a
value (a) 1653 year (b) 324 year
(a) 108 (b) 16 (c) 449 year (d) 1468 year
(c) 216 (d) 238
8. For two different radioactive substances, A and B let, half-
dN
3. A radioactive substance for which rate of decay ∝ − N, life of A = mean life of B. If initially samples of both have
dt
same number of atoms, then
the mean life time is
(a) A and B both are decaying at same rate initially
(a) About 69% more than half-life time
(b) About 69% less than half-life time (b) A and B both have same decay rate at all time
(c) About 44% more than half-life time (c) A decays faster than B
(d) About 44% less than half-life time (d) B decays faster than A
Page 258 Compact Study Material Chapter 25 : Atomic and Nuclear Physics

9. Let two radioactive materials A and B have decay constants 18. Consider the nuclear reaction X 200 → A110 + B90 .If the
10 λ and λ respectively. Initially their samples have same binding energy per nucleon for X, A and B is
number of atoms. The ratio of number of nuclei of A to that 7.4 MeV ,8.2 MeV and 8.2 MeV respectively, what is the
of B, after a time (λ /9) seconds will be energy released
(a) 1 : 10 (b) 10 : 1 (a) 200 MeV (b) 160 MeV
(c) e (d) e −1 (c) 110 MeV (d) 90 MeV
10. A more accurate value of nuclear binding energy is
19. The binding energy per nucleon for C12 is 7.68 MeV and
(Use, m p = mass of a proton, mn = mass of a neutron,
that for C13 is 7.5 MeV. The energy required to remove a
M = mass of neutral atom and mass of an electron)
neutron from C13 is
(a) ( Zmp + Nmn − M ).c 2 5.34 MeV
(a) (b) 5.5 MeV
2
(b) ( Z (me + mp ) + Nmn − M ).c (c) 9.5 MeV (d) 9.34 MeV
2
(c) ( Zm p + Nmn − M + Z . me ).c 20. The binding energies of nuclei X and Y are E1 and E2
(d) ( Zmp + Nmn − M − Z e ).c 2 respectively. Two atoms of X fuse to give one atom of Y and
an energy Q is released. Then
11. α-decay arises only for nuclides with mass numbers
(a) Q = 2 E1 − E2 (b) Q = E2 − 2 E1
(a) A > 150 (b) A > 83
(c) A > 200 (d) A > 216 (c) Q = 2 E1 + E2 (d) Q = 2 E2 + E1
12. Which of the following is not a requirement for a fusion 21. If each fission in a U 235
nucleus releases 200 MeV , how
reaction
many fissions must occurs per second to produce a power of
(a) High temperature (b) High density
1KW
(c) High time (d) High mass number
13. Half-life of a neutron is about 693 s and mass of neutron is (a) 1.325 × 1013 (b) 3.125 × 1013
1.6 × 10 −27 kg . A beam of 10000 high speed neutrons with (c) 1.235 × 1013 (d) 2.135 × 1013
kinetic energy 0.08 eV is fired in space. Number of 22. A star initially has 10 40 neutrons. It produces energy via,
neutrons that possibly decay in travelling through a distance the processes
2
of 4 km will be 1H + 1 H 2 → 1 H 3 + p and
2
(a) 10 (b) 100 1H + 1 H 3 → 2 He 4 + n. If the average power radiated
(c) 1000 (d) 10000 by the star is 1016 W , the deuteron supply of the star is
1
14. Only th of total initial number of active radioactive nuclei exhausted in a time of the order of:
8
of a sample is left after 6 days. Then, in 10 days fraction that (a) 10 6 sec (b) 10 8 sec
decays is (c) 1012 sec (d) 1016 sec
15 31
(a) (b) 23. The binding energies of the atom of elements A and B are
16 32
Ea and Eb respectively. Three atoms of the element B fuse
77 71
(c) (d) to give one atom of element A. This fusion process is
80 80
15. You have a sample of deuteron gas. Minimum temperature accompanied by release of energy e. Then Ea , Eb are
upto which you have to heat the gas to produce fusion will related to each other as
be (a) Ea + e = 3 Eb (b) Ea = 3 Eb
(a) 2.8 × 10 5 K (b) 2.8 × 1012 K (c) Ea − e = 3 Eb (d) Ea + 3 Eb + e = 0
9 2
(c) 2.8 × 10 K (d) 2.8 × 10 K 24. The binding energies of the nuclei of 4 7 12 14
2 He, 3 Li, 6 C and 7 N
16. Let u be denote one atomic mass unit. One atom of an are 28 MeV ,52MeV ,90MeV ,98 MeV . respectively. Which of
element of mass number A has mass exactly equal to Au.
these is most stable.
(a) For any value of A 4 7
(a) 2 He (b) 3 Li
(b) Only for A = 1
12 14
(c) Only for A = 12 (c) 6 C (d) 7 N
(d) For any value of A provided the atom is stable 25. The following nuclear reaction is an example of
17. The surface area of a nucleus varies with mass number A as 12
6 C + 24 H → 16
8 O + energy

(a) A 2/ 3 (b) A1/ 3 (a) Fission (b) Fusion

(c) A (d) None (c) Alpha decay (d) Beta decay
Chapter 25 : Atomic and Nuclear Physics Compact Study Material Page 259

2
26. The rest mass of the deuteron, 1 H, is equivalent to an energy 32. Two radioactive material A1 and A2 have decay constants
of 1876 MeV, the rest mass of a proton is equivalent to 939 of 10 λ0 and λ0 . If initially they have same number of
MeV and that of a neutron to 940 MeV. A deuteron may nuclei, the ratio of number of their undecayed nuclei will be
disintegrate to a proton and a neutron if it:
1 1
(a) Emits a γ-ray photon of energy 2 MeV (a) (b)
λ0 9 λ0
(b) Captures a γ-ray photon of energy 2 MeV 1
(c) (d) 1
(c) Emits a γ-ray photon of energy 3 MeV 10λ0
33. The radioactive sources A and B of half lives of 2 hr and
(d) Captures a γ-ray photon of energy 3 MeV
4hr respectively, initially contain the same number of
27. In an α-decay the Kinetic energy of α-particle is 48 MeV and radioactive atoms. At the end of 2 hours, their rates of
Q-value of the reaction is 50 MeV. The mass number of the disintegration are in the ratio:
mother nucleus is: (Assume that daughter nucleus is in
(a) 4 :1 (b) 2:1
ground state)
(c) 2 :1 (d) 1 : 1
(a) 96 (b) 100
(c) 104 (d) None of these 34. In a RA element the fraction of initiated amount remaining
after its mean lifetime is:
28. In the uranium radioactive series the initial nucleus is
1 1
92 U
238
, and the final nucleus is 82 Pb
206
. When the (a) 1− (b)
e e2
uranium nucleus decays to lead, the number of α-particles
1 1
emitted and the number of β-particles emitted (c) (d) 1 −
e e2
(a) 6,8 (b) 8, 6
35. 90% of a radioactive sample is left undecayed after time t
(c) 16,6 (d) 32,12 has elapsed. What percentage of the initial sample will decay
29. A certain radioactive nuclide of mass number mx in a total time 2t :
disintegrates, with the emission of an electron and γ (a) 20% (b) 19%
radiation only, to give second nuclide of mass number my. (c) 40% (d) 38%
Which one of the following equation correctly relates m x 36. A radioactive material of half-life T was produced in a
nuclear reactor at different instants, the quantity produced
and m y
second time was twice of that produced first time. If now
(a) my = mx + 1 (b) my = mx − 2 their present activities are A1 and A2 respectively then
(c) my = mx − 1 (d) m y = m x their age difference equals:

30. The number of α and β − emitted during the radioactive decay T A A1

(a) ln 1 (b) T ln
226 206
ln 2 A2 A2
chain starting from 88 Ra and ending at 82 Pb us
T A A2
(a) 3α and 6 β − (b) 4α and 5β − (c) ln 2 (d) T ln
l n 2 2 A1 2 A1
(c) 5α and 4β − (d) 6α and 6β −
37. Activity of a radioactive substance is R1 at time t1 and R2
31. Binding energy per nucleon vs. mass number curve for
R2
nuclei is shown in the figure. W, X, Y and Z are four nuclei at time t 2 (t 2 > t1 ). Then the ratio is:
indicated on the curve. The process that would release R1
energy is t2
(a) (b) e − λ (t1 + t 2 )
t1
B.E./nucleon in MeV

Y
8.5 X
8.0  t −t 
W (c) e 1 2  (d) e λ (t1 − t2 )
7.5  λ 
38. There are two radio nuclei A and B. A is an alpha emitter
5.0 Z
and B is a beta emitter. Their disintegration constants are in
the ratio of 1: 2. What should be the ratio of number of
30 60 90 120
atoms of two at time t = 0 so that probabilities of getting
Mass number of nuclei
α and β particles are same at time t = 0
(a) Y → 2 Z (b) W →X + Z
(a) 2:1 (b) 1 : 2
(c) W → 2 Y (d) X → Y + Z (c) e (d) e −1
Page 260 Compact Study Material Chapter 25 : Atomic and Nuclear Physics

39. The activity of a sample reduces from A0 to A0 / 3 in 46. Light from a discharge tube containing hydrogen gas falls
one hour. The activity after 3 hours more will be over a sodium piece (work function of sodium = 1.82eV ). As

A0 A0 a result, electrons with KE upto 0.73eV are emitted from the

(a) (b)
3 3 9 sodium. Change in angular momentum of electron of H-
A0 atom in the emission of light will be
A0
(c) (d) −h h
9 3 27 (a) (b)
2π 2π
40. Half-life of radium is 1620 years. How many radium nuclei
h −h
decay in 5 hours in 5 gm radium? (Atomic weight of radium (c) (d)
π π
= 223 )
47. A fast-moving electron enters a region containing
(a) 9.1 × 1012 (b) 3.23 × 1015
α-particles. Electron combines with an α-particle to form a
(c) 1.72 × 1020 (d) 3.3 × 1017 helium ion ( He + ), emitting a single photon in this process.
41. The activity of a sample of radioactive material is A1 at time He + Ion formed is in its 4th excited state.
t1 and A2 at time t 2 (t 2 > t1 ). Its mean life is T . A detector detects photons of energy 3.4 eV ,3.84 eV ,
A1 − A2 7.56 eV,48.36 eV ,40.80 eV ,1.2 eV,51 eV,52.2 eV ,
(a) A1 t1 = A2 t 2 (b) = constant
t 2 − t1 11.4 eV , 2.64 eV and 10.2eV in the light emitted from the
(c) A2 = A1e ( t1 − t 2 )/ T
(d) A2 = A1e (t1 / Tt 2 ) region of experimentation. Kinetic energy of electron before
132
entering the region of α-particles must be
42. The radius of last orbit of 92 U atom (assume Bohr’s atomic
(a) 1.2eV (b) 3.4 eV
model and the radius of last orbit of a multielectron atom is
n times that of Bohr’s radius) is (c) 10.2eV (d) 4eV

(a) 0.53 Å (b) 3.047 Å 48. For a hypothetical hydrogen like atom, wavelength λ in Å
of photon emitted in a transition shown is
(c) 0.092 Å (d) 48.05 Å
1500 n2
43. A beam of photons with wavelengths 100 nm and 80 nm λ= , n = 2, 3, 4,...
n2 − 1
respectively, is made to pass through a sample of hydrogen
gas at room temperature. n
Detector

1
Hydrogen
The ratio of momenta of least energetic and the most
energetic photons will be
3 4
At the detector which of the followings is observed (a) (b)
4 3
(a) Light with 3-different wavelengths
2 1
(b) Few photons and few fast-moving electrons (c) (d)
1 2
(c) White light 49. Ionisation energy of a hydrogen like Bohr atom is
(d) Light with 5-different wavelengths 4 Rydberg. Radius of ground state orbit of electron in this
44. A doubly ionized lithium ion at room temperature is excited atom is
by a photon of wavelength 10.2 eV . Number of emission (a) 0.53 Å (b) 0.265 Å
lines observed in emission spectrum of this ion is
(c) 0.1325 Å (d) 1.06 Å
(a) 1 (b) 4
50. A neutron moving with a speed v strikes a hydrogen atom
(c) 6 (d) 0
which is in ground state and moving towards neutron in
45. If a0 = Bohr’s radius, then the radius of the n = 2 same line and with same speed. The minimum speed of the
electronic orbit in triply ionized beryllium is neutron for which inelastic collision (complete or partial)
(a) 4 a0 (b) a0 may takes place is
(a) 4 × 10 4 ms −1 (b) 3 × 10 8 ms −1
a0 a0
(c) (d)
4 16 (c) 4 × 10 8 ms −1 (d) 3 × 10 6 ms −1
Chapter 25 : Atomic and Nuclear Physics Compact Study Material Page 261

51. Consider the following statements: 2. The electric potential between a proton and an electron is
I. Sun’s spectrum contains few dark lines. r
given by V = V0 ln , where r0 is a constant. Assuming
II. Sun’s spectrum is line emission spectrum. r0
Choose the correct options. Bohr’s model to be applicable, write variation of rn with n, n
(a) Both I and II (b) Only I being the principal quantum number
(c) Only II (d) None of the above [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003]
52. Let frequency of revolution of an e −
of H-atom in ground is (a) rn ∝ n (b) rn ∝ 1/n
f1 . Then, number of revolutions made by electron in an (c) rn ∝ n 2
(d) rn ∝ 1/n 2
n = 2 Bohr orbit in 8s is
3. The electron in a hydrogen atom makes a transition from an
f1 excited state to the ground state. Which of the following
(a) 8 f1 (b)
64 statements is true [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000]
(c) 64 f1 (d) f1 (a) Its kinetic energy increases and its potential and total
53. Bohr’s atomic theory is first successful theory which explains energies decrease
line emission spectrum is put forward in 1913. Bohr’s work (b) Its kinetic energy decreases, potential energy increases
is creditable because when in 1924 and its total energy remain the same
de-Broglie’s hypothesis comes into light, the results are (c) Its kinetic and total energies decrease and its potential
found exactly the same. energy increases
In H-atom in n = 4 state, the de-Broglie’s wavelength λ (d) Its kinetic, potential and total energies decrease
associated with electron is 4. Suppose an electron is attracted towards the origin by a
(a) λ = circumference of Bohr’s orbit k
force where 'k' is a constant and 'r' is the distance of the
r
(b) λ = 4 × circumference of Bohr’s orbit
electron from the origin. By applying Bohr model to this
1
(c) λ= × circumference of Bohr’s orbit system, the radius of the nth orbital of the electron is found to
4
be 'rn' and the kinetic energy of the electron to be 'Tn'. Then
(d) No relation exists which of the following is true [AIEEE 2008]
54. Ratio of maximum wavelengths of Brackett and Pfund series 1
for hydrogen atom is (a) Tn independent of n, rn ∝ n (b) Tn ∝ , rn ∝ n
n
5 9
(a) (b) 1 1
9 16 (c) Tn ∝ , rn ∝ n2 (d) Tn ∝ , rn ∝ n2
n n2
16 44
(c) (d) 5. In the nuclear fusion reaction 2
1H + 13 H → 42 He + n, given
25 81
that the repulsive potential energy between the two nuclei is
55. Consider the following statements:
I. Lymen series lies in ultraviolet region. − 7.7 × 10−14 J , the temperature at which the gases must be
II. Balmer series lies in visible region. heated to initiate the reaction is nearly
III. Paschen, Brackett and Pfund serieses lies in infrared [Boltzmann’s constant k = 1.38 × 10 −23 J / K ] [AIEEE 2003]
region.
(a) 109 K (b) 107 K
Choose the correct options.
(c) 105 K (d) 103 K
(a) Both I and III (b) Both II and III
(c) Both I and II (d) All of these 6. An α-particle of 5 MeV energy strikes with a nucleus of
uranium at stationary at an scattering angle of 180o. The
nearest distance upto which α-particle reaches the nucleus
will be of the order of [IIT 1981; AIEEE 2004]
Past Year Questions
(a) 1 Å (b) 10 −10 cm
1. A Hydrogen atom and a Li + + ion are both in the second (c) 10 −12 cm (d) 10 −15 cm
excited state. If l H and l Li are their respective electronic 7. If the atom Fm 257 follows the Bohr model and the radius
100
angular momenta, and EH and E Li their respective of Fm 257 is n times the Bohr radius, then find n
100
energies, then [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002]
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003]
(a) l H > l Li and| EH |>| ELi | (b) l H = l Li and| EH |<| ELi | (a) 100 (b) 200
(c) l H = l Li and| EH |>| ELi | (d) l H < l Li and| EH |<| ELi | (c) 4 (d) 1/4
Page 262 Compact Study Material Chapter 25 : Atomic and Nuclear Physics

8. As per Bohr model, the minimum energy (in eV) required to 17. Hydrogen (1 H 1 ), Deuterium (1 H 2 ), singly ionised Helium
remove an electron from the ground state of doubly ionized
( 2 He 4 )+ and doubly ionised lithium (3 Li 6 )+ + all have one
Li atom (Z = 3) is [IIT 1997 Re-Exam]
electron around the nucleus. Consider an electron transition
(a) 1.51 (b) 13.6
from n = 2 to n = 1. If the wave lengths of emitted
(c) 40.8 (d) 122.4
radiation are λ1 , λ2 , λ3 and λ4 respectively then
9. In hydrogen atom, when electron jumps from second to first
orbit, then energy emitted is approximately which one of the following is correct

[AIEEE 2002] [JEE (Main) 2014]

(a) – 13.6 eV (b) – 27.2 eV (a) 4λ1 = 2λ2 = 2λ3 = λ4 (b) λ1 = 2λ2 = 2λ3 = λ4
(c) – 6.8 eV (d) None of these (c) λ1 = λ2 = 4λ3 = 9λ4 (d) λ1 = 2λ2 = 3λ3 = 4λ4
10. If the binding energy of the electron in a hydrogen atom is
18. Imagine an atom made up of a proton and a hypothetical
13.6 eV, the energy required to remove the electron from
particle of double the mass of the electron but having the
the first excited state of Li + + is [AIEEE 2003]
same charge as the electron. Apply the Bohr’s atom model
(a) 122.4 eV (b) 30.6 eV and consider all possible transitions of this hypothetical
(c) 13.6 eV (d) 3.4 eV particle to the first excited level. The longest wavelength
11. Which of the following atoms has the lowest ionization photon that will be emitted has wavelength λ (given in terms
potential [AIEEE 2003] of the Rydberg constant R for the hydrogen atom) is equal
16 14 to [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000]
(a) 8 O (b) 7 N
(a) 9/(5R) (b) 36/(5R)
133 40
(c) 55 Cs (d) 18 Ar
(c) 18/(5R) (d) 4/R
12. Energy required for the electron excitation in Li + + from the 19. In a hydrogen like atom electron make transition from an
first to the third Bohr orbit is [AIEEE 2011] energy level with quantum number n to another with
(a) 12.1 eV (b) 36.3 eV quantum number (n–1). If n>>1, the frequency of radiation
(c) 108.8 eV (d) 122.4 eV emitted is proportional to [JEE (Main) 2013]
13. An energy of 24.6 eV is required to remove one of the 1 1
(a) (b)
electrons from a neutral helium atom. The energy (in eV) n n2
required to remove both the electrons from a neutral helium 1 1
atom is [IIT 1995] (c) 3
(d)
n /2 n3
(a) 79.0 (b) 51.8
20. Which of the transitions in hydrogen atom emits a photon of
(c) 49.2 (d) 38.2
lowest frequency (n = quantum number)
14. A hydrogen like atom of atomic number Z is in an excited
[Similar AIEEE 2007]
state of quantum number 2n . It can emit a maximum
(a) n = 2 to n = 1 (b) n = 4 to n = 3
energy photon of 204 eV . If it makes a transition to
(c) n = 3 to n = 1 (d) n = 4 to n = 2
quantum state n , a photon of energy 40.8 eV is emitted.
21. The wavelengths involved in the spectrum of deuterium
The value of n will be [Based on IIT-JEE (Main) 2000]
(12 D) are slightly different from that of hydrogen spectrum,
(a) 1 (b) 2
because [AIEEE 2003]
(c) 3 (d) 4
(a) The attraction between the electron and the nucleus is
15. The largest wavelength in the ultraviolet region of the
different in the two cases
hydrogen spectrum is 122 nm. The smallest wavelength in
the infrared region of the hydrogen spectrum (to the nearest (b) The size of the two nuclei is different
integer) is [IIT-JEE 2007] (c) The nuclear forces are different in the two cases
(a) 802 nm (b) 823 nm (d) The masses of the two nuclei are different
(c) 1882 nm (d) 1648 mn 22. If λcu is the wavelength of Kα X-ray line of copper (atomic
16. The wavelength of the first spectral line in the Balmer series
number 29) and λ Mo is the wavelength of the Kα X-ray line
of hydrogen atom is 6561 Å. The wavelength of the second
of molybdenum (atomic number 42), then the ratio
spectral line in the Balmer series of singly ionized helium
λCu / λMo is close to [JEE 2014]
atom is [IIT-JEE 2011]
(a) 1215 Å (b) 1640 Å (a) 1.99 (b) 2.14
(c) 2430 Å (d) 4687 Å (c) 0.50 (d) 0.48
Chapter 25 : Atomic and Nuclear Physics Compact Study Material Page 263

23. A diatomic molecule is made of two masses m1 and m2 28. A particle of mass m moves in a circular orbit in a central
which are separated by a distance r. If we calculate its 1
potential field U(r) = kr 2 . If Bohr’s quantization
rotational energy by applying Bohr’s rule of angular 2
conditions are applied, radii of possible orbitals and energy
momentum quantization, its energy will be given by (n is an
levels vary with quantum number n as [JEE (Main) 2019]
integer) [AIEEE 2012]
1
(a) rn ∝ n, En ∝ (b) rn ∝ n , En ∝ n
(m1 + m2 )2 n2ℏ 2 n 2ℏ 2 n
(a) (b)
2m12m22r 2 2(m1 + m2 )r 2 1
(c) rn ∝ n 2 , En ∝ (d) rn ∝ n, En ∝ n
n2
2n2ℏ 2 (m1 + m2 )n2ℏ 2
(c) (d) 29. The ratio of mass densities of nuclei of 40 Ca and 16 O is
(m1 + m2 )r 2 2m1m2r 2
close to [JEE (Main) 2019]
24. Some energy levels of a molecule are shown in the figure.
(a) 1 (b) 2
The ratio of the wavelengths r = λ1 / λ2 , is given by
(c) 0.1 (d) 5
[JEE (Main) 2017] 30. Taking the wavelength of first Balmer line in hydrogen
–E spectrum (n = 3 to n = 2) as 660nm, the wavelength of
λ2 the 2nd Balmer line (n=4 to n=2) will be
4
− E [JEE (Main) 2019]
3
(a) 488.9 nm (b) 388.9 nm
λ1
(c) 889.2 nm (d) 642.7 nm
–2E
31. A He + ion is in its first excited state. Its ionization energy is
–3E [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 13.60 eV (b) 54.40 eV
1 4
(a) r = (b) r =
3 3 (c) 48.36 eV (d) 6.04 eV
2 3 32. In Li + + , electron in first Bohr orbit is excited to a level by a
(c) r = (d) r =
3 4 radiation of wavelength λ . When the ion gets de-excited to
25. If the series limit frequency of the Lyman series is vL , then the ground stated in all possible ways (including
intermediate emissions), a total of six spectral lines are
the series limit frequency of the Pfund series is
observed. What is the value of λ
[JEE (Main) 2018]
(Given h = 6.63 × 10 −34 Js , c = 3 × 10 8 ms −1 )
(a) vL / 16 (b) v L / 25
[JEE (Main) 2019]
(c) 25v L (d) 16v L (a) 11.4 nm (b) 9.4 nm
26. A hydrogen atom, initially in the ground state in excited by (c) 10.8 nm (d) 12.3 nm
absorbing a photon of wavelength 980 Å . The radius of the 33. An excited He + ion emits two photons in succession with
atom in the excited state, in terms of Bohr radius a0 , will be wavelengths 108.5 nm and 30.4 nm , in making a transition
(hc = 12500 eV − Å) [JEE (Main) 2019] to ground state. The quantum number n, corresponding to
its initial excited state is (for photon of wavelength λ ,
(a) 16a 0 (b) 25a0
1240 eV
(c) 9a0 (d) 4a0 energy E = ) [JEE (Main) 2019]
λ(in nm)
27. In a hydrogen like atom, when an electron jumps from the (a) n = 4 (b) n = 5
M - shell to the L - shell, the wavelength of emitted (c) n = 6 (d) n = 7
radiation is λ . If an electron jumps from N - shell to the 34. The electron in a hydrogen atom first jumps from the third
L - shell, the wavelength of emitted radiation will be excited state to the second excited state and subsequently to
[JEE (Main) 2019] the first excited state. The ratio of the respective wavelength
16 25 λ1 / λ2 , of the photons emitted in this process is
(a) λ (b) λ
25 16 [JEE (Main) 2019]

20 27 (a) 20/7 (b) 7/5

(c) λ (d) λ
27 20 (c) 9/7 (d) 27/5
Page 264 Compact Study Material Chapter 25 : Atomic and Nuclear Physics

35. 39. The binding energy per nucleon of O 16 is 7.97 MeV and
that of O 17 is 7.75 MeV. The energy (in MeV) required to
C D E remove a neutron from O 17 is [IIT 1995]
B
Eb (a) 3.52 (b) 3.64
A F
(c) 4.23 (d) 7.86
40
M 40. A star initially has 10 deuterons. It produces energy via
the processes
The above is a plot of binding energy per nucleon Eb ,
2
1H + 1 H 2 →1 H 3 + p
against the nuclear mass M; A, B, C, D, E, F correspond to
different nuclei. Consider four reactions 1H
2
+ 1 H 3 → 2 He 4 + n
(i) A + B → C + ε
The masses of the nuclei are as follows :
(ii) C → A + B + ε
M (H 2 ) = 2.014 amu ; M ( p) = 1.007 amu ;
(iii) D + E → F + ε
(iv) F → D + E + ε M (n) = 1.008 amu; M (He 4 ) = 4.001 amu
where ε is the energy released ? In which reactions is ε If the average power radiated by the star is 10 16 W ,the
positive [AIEEE 2009] deuteron supply of the star is exhausted in a time of the
(a) (i) and (iv) (b) (i) and (iii) order of [IIT 1993]
(c) (ii) and (iv) (d) (ii) and (iii) (a) 10 6 s (b) 10 8 s
36. Binding energy per nucleon verses mass number curve for
(c) 10 12 s (d) 10 16 s
nuclei is shown in the figure. W, X, Y and Z are four nuclei
indicated on the curve. The process that would release 41. Fast neutrons can easily be slowed down by [IIT 1994]
energy is [IIT-JEE 1999] (a) The use of lead shielding
(b) Passing them through water
Y
B.E./nucleon in MeV

8.5 X (c) Elastic collisions with heavy nuclei

8.0
W (d) Applying a strong electric field
7.5
42. The energy released in a typical nuclear fusion reaction is
5.0 Z approximately [IIT 1992]
(a) 25 MeV (b) 200 MeV
(c) 800 MeV (d) 1050 MeV
30 60 90 120
236
43. A fission reaction is given by 92 U →140 94
54 Xe + 39 Sr + x + y,
Mass number of nuclei
where x and y are two particles. Considering 236
92 U to be
(a) Y → 2 Z (b) W → X + Z
at rest, the kinetic energies of the products are denoted by
(c) W → 2Y (d) X → Y + Z K Xe , KSr , K x (2MeV) and K y (2MeV ), respectively. Let the
37. In the options given below, let E denote the rest mass 236 140 94
binding energies per nucleon of 92 U , 54 Xe and 38 Sr be
energy of a nucleus and n a neutron. The correct option is
7.5 MeV, 8.5 MeV and 8.5 MeV, respectively. Considering
[IIT-JEE 2007]
different conservation laws, the correct option(s) is (are)
(a) E ( 236
92 U )> E ( I ) + E ( Y ) + 2 E (n)
137
53
97
39
[JEE 2015]
(b) E( 236
92 U)< E ( I ) + E ( Y ) + 2 E (n)
137
53
97
39 (a) x = n, y = n, K Sr = 129 MeV, K Xe = 86 MeV
(c) E( 236
92 U)< E ( Ba ) + E ( Kr ) + 2 E (n)
140
56
94
36 (b) x = p, y = e − , K Sr = 129 MeV , K Xe = 86 MeV
(d) E( 236
92 U)= E ( Ba ) + E ( Kr ) + 2 E (n)
140
56
94
36 (c) x = p, y = n, KSr = 129 MeV, K Xe = 86 MeV
38. Assume that a neutron breaks into a proton and an electron. (d) x = n, y = n, K Sr = 86 MeV, K Xe = 129 MeV
The energy released during this process is (mass of neutron
27
= 1.6725 × 10 −27 kg , mass of proton = 1.6725× 10−27kg, 44. If radius of the 13 Al nucleus is estimated to be 3.6 fermi
125
mass of electron = 9 × 10 −31 kg ) [AIEEE 2012] then the radius of 52 Te nucleus be nearly [AIEEE 2005]

(a) 0.73 MeV (b) 7.10 MeV (a) 4 Fermi (b) 5 Fermi
(c) 6.30 MeV (d) 0.52 MeV (c) 6 Fermi (d) 8 Fermi
Chapter 25 : Atomic and Nuclear Physics Compact Study Material Page 265

45. For uranium nucleus how does its mass vary with volume 51. The half life of 131 I is 8 days. Given a sample of 131 I at time
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003] t = 0, we can assert that [IIT 1998]
(a) m ∝ V (b) m ∝ 1/V (a) No nucleus will decay before t = 4 days
(b) No nucleus will decay before t = 8 days
(c) m ∝ V (d) m ∝ V 2
(c) All nuclei will decay before t = 16 days
46. The electrostatic energy of Z protons uniformly distributed
(d) A given nucleus may decay at any time after t = 0
throughout a spherical nucleus of radius R is given by
52. Half-life of a substance is 10 years. In what time, it becomes
3 Z(Z − 1)e 2 1
E= th part of the initial amount [AIEEE 2002]
5 4πε 0 R 4
The measured masses of the neutron, 1 15
1 H, 7 N and 15
8 O
(a) 5 years (b) 10 years
are 1.008665 u, 1.007825 u, 15.000109 u and 15.003065 (c) 20 years (d) None of these
u, respectively. Given that the radii of both the 15
7 N and 53. If N 0 is the original mass of the substance of half life period
15
8 O nuclei are same, 1u = 931 .5 MeV / c 2 (c is the speed T1 / 2 = 5 years, then the amount of substance left after 15

of light) and e 2 /(4πε 0 ) = 1.44 MeV fm. Assuming that the years is [AIEEE 2002]

15 15 (a) N 0 / 8 (b) N 0 /16

difference between the binding energies of 7 N and 8 O is
purely due to the electrostatic energy, the radius of either of (c) N 0 /2 (d) N 0 /4
the nuclei is 54. The half-life of 215
At is 100 µs . The time taken for the
−15
(1 fm = 10 m) [JEE 2016] 215
radioactivity of a sample of At to decay to 1/16th of its
(a) 2.85 fm (b) 3.03 fm initial value is [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002]
(c) 3.42 fm (d) 3.80 fm (a) 400 µs (b) 6.3 µs
47. Consider the nuclear fission Ne 20 → 2He4 + C12
(c) 40 µs (d) 300 µs
Given that the binding energy/nucleon of Ne 20 , He 4 and 55. After 280 days, the activity of a radioactive sample is 6000
C 12 are, respectively, 8.03 MeV , 7.07 MeV and dps. The activity reduces to 3000 dps after another 140
7.86 MeV, identify the correct statement [JEE (Main) 2019] days. The initial activity of the sample in dps is
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004]
(a) Energy of 11.9 MeV has to be supplied
(a) 6000 (b) 9000
(b) 8.3 MeV energy will be released (c) 3000 (d) 24000
(c) Energy of 9.72 MeV will be supplied 56. A radioactive sample consists of two distinct species having
equal number of atoms initially. The mean life time of one
(d) Energy of 3.6 MeV will be released
species is τ and that of the other is 5τ. The decay products
48. Radiation coming from transitions n = 2 to n = 1 of in both cases are stable. A plot is made of the total number
hydrogen atoms fall on He + ions in n = 1 and n = 2 states. of radioactive nuclei as a function of time. Which of the
The possible transition of helium ions as they absorb energy following figures best represents the form of this plot
from the radiation is [JEE (Main) 2019] [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001]
(a) n = 2 → n = 3 (b) n = 1 → n = 4 N
N
(c) n = 2 → n = 5 (d) n = 2 → n = 4 (a) (b)
49. Radioactive substances do not emit
[AIEEE 2003] τ t τ t
(a) Electron (b) Helium nucleus N N
(c) Positron (d) Proton (c) (d)
50. The 'rad' is the correct unit used to report the measurement
of [AIEEE 2006] t t
τ τ
(a) The energy delivered by radiation to a target
57. Given a sample of Radium-226 having half- life of 4 days.
(b) The biological effect of radiation
Find the probability, a nucleus disintegrates after 2 half lives
(c) The rate of decay of a radioactive source [IIT-JEE 2006]
(d) The ability of a beam of gamma ray photons to (a) 1 (b) 1/2
produce ions in a target (c) 1.5 (d) 3/4
Page 266 Compact Study Material Chapter 25 : Atomic and Nuclear Physics

58. Half-lives of two radioactive elements A and B are 20 65. A nucleus with mass number 220 initially at rest emits an α-
minutes and 40 minutes, respectively, initially, the samples particle. If the Q value of the reaction is 5.5 MeV, calculate
have equal number of nuclei. After 80 minutes, the ratio of the kinetic energy of the α-particle
decayed numbers of A and B nuclei will be [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003]
[JEE (Main) 2016] (a) 4.4 MeV (b) 5.4 MeV
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 1 : 4 (c) 5.6 MeV (d) 6.5 MeV
(c) 5 : 4 (d) 1 : 16 66. Beta rays emitted by a radioactive material are
59. A radioactive sample of U 238 decays to Pb through a [IIT 1983; AIEEE 2002]
9
process for which half life is 4. 5 × 10 years. The ratio of (a) Electromagnetic radiation
number of nuclei of Pb to U 238 after a time of 1. 5 × 10 9 (b) The electrons orbiting around the nucleus
years (given 21 / 3 = 1.26) (c) Charged particles emitted by nucleus
[Similar IIT-JEE (Mains) 2004] (d) Neutral particles
(a) 0.12 (b) 0.26 67. The electron emitted in beta radiation originates from
(c) 1.2 (d) 0.37 [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001]
60. A radioactive sample at any instant has its disintegration rate (a) Inner orbits of atoms
5000 disintegrations per minute. After 5 minutes, the rate is (b) Free electrons existing in nuclei
1250 disintegrations per minute. Then, the decay constant (c) Decay of a neutron in a nucleus
(per minute) is [AIEEE 2003] (d) Photon escaping from the nucleus
(a) 0.8 ln 2 (b) 0.4 ln 2
68. When 3 Li 7 nuclei are bombarded by protons, and the
(c) 0.2 ln 2 (d) 0.1 ln 2
resultant nuclei are 4 Be 8 , the emitted particles will be
61. An accident in a nuclear laboratory resulted in deposition of
a certain amount of radioactive material of half-life 18 days [AIEEE 2006]
inside the laboratory. Tests revealed that the radiation was (a) Beta particles (b) Gamma photons
64 times more than the permissible level required for safe (c) Neutrons (d) Alpha particles
operation of the laboratory. What is the minimum number 69. Which of the following processes represent a gamma-decay
of days after which the laboratory can be considered safe for [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002; Similar AIEEE 2007]
use [JEE 2016] A
(a) X Z + γ → A X Z −1 + a + b
(a) 64 (b) 90
A
(c) 108 (d) 120 (b) X Z + 1 n0 → A−3
XZ−2 + c
62. A radioactive sample S1 having an activity of 5 µCi has (c) A
XZ → AXZ + f
twice the number of nuclei as another sample S2 which has A
(d) X Z + e −1 → A X Z −1 + g
an activity of 10 µCi . The half lives of S1 and S2 can be
70. Which of the following is a correct statement
[IIT-JEE 2008]
[IIT 1999]
(a) 20 years and 5 years, respectively
(a) Beta rays are same as cathode rays
(b) 20 years and 10 years, respectively
(b) Gamma rays are high energy neutrons
(c) 10 years each
(c) Alpha particles are singly ionized helium atoms
(d) 5 years each
(d) Protons and neutrons have exactly the same mass
63. From a newly formed radioactive substance (Half life 2
71. A radioactive nucleus (initial mass number A and atomic
hours), the intensity of radiation is 64 times the permissible
number Z) emits 3 α -particles and 2 positrons. The ratio of
safe level. The minimum time after which work can be done
safely from this source is [IIT 1983] number of neutrons to that of protons in the final nucleus
(a) 6 hours (b) 12 hours will be [AIEEE 2010]

(c) 24 hours (d) 128 hours A−Z−4 A− Z −8

(a) (b)
Z−2 Z−4
64. The half life period of a radioactive element X is same as the
mean life time of another radioactive element Y. Initially A−Z−4 A − Z − 12
(c) (d)
both of them have the same number of atoms. Then Z −8 Z−4
[IIT 1999; AIEEE 2007] 72. A nucleus with Z = 92 emits the following in a sequence:
(a) X and Y have the same decay rate initially α , β − , β − ,α ,α ,α ,α ,α , β − , β − ,α , β + , β + ,α . The Z of the
(b) X and Y decay at the same rate always resulting nucleus is [AIEEE 2003]
(c) Y will decay at a faster rate than X (a) 74 (b) 76
(d) X will decay at a faster rate than Y (c) 78 (d) 82
Chapter 25 : Atomic and Nuclear Physics Compact Study Material Page 267

73. Which of the following radiations has the least wavelength 80. Two radioactive substances A and B have decay constants
[AIEEE 2003] 5 λ and λ respectively. At t = 0 , a sample has the same
(a) X-rays (b) γ-rays number of the two nuclei. The time taken for the ratio of the
2
(c) β-rays (d) α-rays 1
number of nuclei to become   will be [JEE (Main) 2019]
74. A radioactive nucleus A with a half life T , decays into a e
nucleus B. At t = 0, there is no nucleus B. At sometime t, 1 1
(a) (b)
the ratio of the number of B to that of A is 0.3. Then, t is λ 2λ
given by [JEE (Main) 2017] 1 2
(c) (d)
T T log 2 4λ λ
(a) t = (b) t =
log(1.3) 2 log 1.3 81. Half lives of two radioactive nuclei A and B are 10
log 1.3 minutes and 20 minutes respectively. If initially a sample
(c) t = T (d) t = T log(1.3)
log 2 has equal number of nuclei then after 60 minutes, the ratio
75. A sample of radioactive material A, that has an activity of of decayed numbers of nuclei A and B will be
10 mCi ( (1 Ci = 3.7 × 10 10 decays/s), has twice the number [JEE (Main) 2019]

of nuclei as another sample of a different radioactive (a) 1 : 8 (b) 3 : 8

maternal B which has an activity of 20 mCi . The correct (c) 9:8 (d) 8 : 1
choices for hall-lives of A and B would then be respectively
82. The graph which depicts the results of Rutherford gold foil
[JEE (Main) 2019]
experiment with α  particles is
(a) 10 days and 40 days (b) 20 days and 5 days
θ = Scattering angle, Y = Number of scattered α  particles
(c) 5 days and 10 days (d) 20 days and 10 days
detected
76. At a given instant, say t = 0, two radioactive substances A
(Plots are schematic and not to scale)
RB
and B have equal activities. The ratio of their activities [JEE (Main) 2020]
RA
after time t itself decays with time t as e −3 t . If the half-life Y Y
of A is ln 2 , the half - life of B is [JEE (Main) 2019]
ln 2 (a) (b)
(a) (b) 2 ln 2
4
ln 2
(c) 4 ln 2 (d)
2 0 θ→π 0 θ →π
77. Using a nuclear counter the count rate of emitted particles
from a radioactive source is measured. At t = 0 it was Y Y
1600 counts per second and t = 8 seconds it was 100
counts per seconds. The count rate observed, as counts per (c) (d)
second, at t = 6 seconds is close to [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 150 (b) 400
(c) 360 (d) 200 0 θ →π 0 θ →π
232
78. In a radioactive decay chain, the initial nucleus is 90 Th . At 83. Find the Binding energy per neucleon for 120
Mass of
50 Sn.
the end there are 6 α − particles and 4 β − particles which proton m p = 1.00783 U, mass of neutron mn = 1.00867U
A
are emitted. If the end nucleus is Z X , A and Z are given by and mass of the nucleus mSn = 119.902199U. (take
[JEE (Main) 2019] 1 U = 931 MeV ) [JEE (Main) 2020]
(a) A = 202 ; Z = 80 (b) A = 208 ; Z = 80
(a) 7.5 MeV (b) 9.0 MeV
(c) A = 200 ; Z = 81 (d) A = 208 ; Z = 82
(c) 8.0 MeV (d) 8.5 MeV
79. Two radioactive materials A and B have decay constants
10λ and λ respectively. If initially they have the same 84. In a radioactive material, fraction of active material
number of nuclei then the ratio of the number of nuclei of remaining after time t is 9 / 16. The fraction that was
A to that of B will be 1 / e after a time [JEE (Main) 2019] remaining after t / 2 is [JEE (Main) 2020]
1 1 4 3
(a) (b) (a) (b)
10 λ 11λ 5 5
1 11 3 7
(c) (d) (c) (d)
9λ 10 λ 4 8
Page 268 Compact Study Material Chapter 25 : Atomic and Nuclear Physics

85. Two radioactive substances X and Y originally have N1 and 88. The half-life of 198
Au is 3 days. If atomic weight of 198
Au
N2 nuclei respectively. Half life of X is half of the half life of 198
is 198 g / mol then the activity of 2 mg of Au is [in
Y. After three half lives of Y, numbers of nuclei of both are
N disintegration/second] [JEE (Main) 2021]
equal. The ratio 1 will be equal to [JEE (Main) 2021]
N2 (a) 6.06 × 10 8 (b) 16.18 × 10 12
8 3 (c) 2.67 × 1012 (d) 32.36 × 10 12
(a) (b)
1 1
89. A particular hydrogen like ion emits radiation of frequency
1 1
(c) (d)
3 8 292 × 10 15 Hz when it makes transition from n = 3 to

86. The recoil speed of a hydrogen atom after it emits a photon n = 1. The frequency in Hz of radiation emitted in transition
in going from n = 5 state to n = 1 state will be from n = 2 to n = 1 will be [JEE (Main) 2021]
[JEE (Main) 2021] 15
(a) 6.57 × 10 (b) 2.46 × 10 15
(a) 3.25 m/s (b) 2.19 m/s
(c) 0.44 × 10 15 (d) 4.38 × 10 15
(c) 4.34 m/s (d) 4.17 m/s
87. At time t = 0, a material is composed of two radioactive 90. A free electron of 2.6 eV energy collides with a H + ion.
atoms A and B, where NA(0) = 2NB(0). The decay constant This results in the formation of a hydrogen atom in the first
of both kind of radioactive atoms is λ . However, A excited state and a photon is released. Find the frequency of
disintegrates to B and B disintegrates to C. Which of the
the emitted photon (h = 6.6 × 10 −34 J s) [JEE (Main) 2021]
following figures represents the evolution of NB(t) / NB(0)
with respect to time t [JEE (Main) 2021] (a) 9.0 × 10 27 MHz
 N A (0) = No. of A atoms at t = 0 
  (b) 1.45 × 10 9 MHz
 N B (0) = No. of B atoms at t = 0 
(c) 0.19 × 10 15 MHz

(d) 1.45 × 10 16 MHz

1
N B (t )
(a) N B (0) Numerical Questions :
t
1/λ 91. In the line spectra of hydrogen atom, difference between the
largest and the shortest wavelengths of the Lyman series is
304 Å. The corresponding difference for the Paschan series
1
in Å is [JEE (Main) 2020]
(b) N B (t )
N B (0) 92. A particle of mass m moves in a circular orbit in a central
t potential field U (r ) = U 0 r 4 . If Bohr's quantization conditions
1
1
2λ
are applied, radii of possible orbital rn vary with nα , where
α is [JEE (Main) 2021]

(c) 1 93. From the given data, the amount of energy required to
N B (t ) 27
break the nucleus of aluminium 13 Al is ________
N B (0)
x × 10 −3 J
t
1
Mass of neutron = 1.00866u
2λ

Mass of proton = 1.00726u

1
Mass of Aluminium nucleus = 27.18846u
(d) N B (t )
N B (0) (Assume 1u corresponds to x J of energy)
t
1 (Round off to the nearest integer) [JEE (Main) 2021]
2λ
Chapter 25 : Atomic and Nuclear Physics Compact Study Material Page 269

CRITICAL QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 a 2 c 3 c 4 c 5 b 6 d 7 c 8 d 9 d 10 c

11 c 12 d 13 a 14 b 15 c 16 c 17 a 18 b 19 a 20 b

21 b 22 c 23 c 24 c 25 b 26 d 27 b 28 b 29 d 30 c

31 c 32 b 33 c 34 c 35 b 36 c 37 d 38 a 39 b 40 b

41 c 42 c 43 b 44 d 45 b 46 d 47 a 48 a 49 b 50 a

51 c 52 d 53 c 54 d 55 d

PAST YEAR QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 b 2 a 3 a 4 a 5 a 6 c 7 d 8 d 9 d 10 b

11 c 12 c 13 a 14 b 15 b 16 a 17 c 18 c 19 d 20 b

21 d 22 b 23 d 24 a 25 b 26 a 27 c 28 b 29 a 30 a

31 a 32 c 33 b 34 a 35 a 36 c 37 a 38 d 39 c 40 c

41 b 42 a 43 a 44 c 45 a 46 c 47 c 48 d 49 d 50 b

51 d 52 c 53 a 54 a 55 d 56 d 57 d 58 c 59 b 60 b

61 c 62 a 63 b 64 c 65 b 66 c 67 c 68 b 69 c 70 a

71 c 72 c 73 b 74 c 75 b 76 a 77 d 78 d 79 c 80 b

81 c 82 a 83 d 84 c 85 a 86 d 87 c 88 b 89 b 90 b

91 10553.14 92 3 93 27

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER
IMPORTANT POINTS
26 Electronics
 When a PN junction is forward biased, it can emit light,
hence can serve as a light-emitting diode (LED). The
 In a transistor circuit the reverse bias is high as compared to c hc
the forward bias. So that it may exert a large attractive force on wavelength of the emitted light is λ = = .
f Eg
the charge carriers to enter the collector region.
 Ge is more sensitive to heat since it's forbidden energy gap is  The fermi energy of a given material is the energy of a
smaller than that of silicon. Electrons from the valence band of Ge quantum state that has the probability 0.5 of being occupied by
requires less energy to move from the valence band to an electron.
conduction band.  Number of conduction electrons per unit volume
 Semiconductor devices are current control devices. (Material' s density)
=
 The semiconductor devices are temperature sensitive (Molar mass M)/N A
devices.
(NA = Avogadro's number = 6.02 × 1023 /mol)
 The electric field setup across the potential barrier is of the
 The occupancy probability P(E) : Electrical conduction of a
order of 3 × 105 V/m for Ge and 7 × 105 V/m for Si.
metal depends on the probability that if an energy level is
 An ideal junction diode when forward biased offers zero available at energy E, is it actually occupied by an electron.
resistance. Voltage drop across such a junction diode is zero. In The expression for occupancy probability P(E) is given by
reverse bias diode offers infinite resistance and voltage drop
1
across it is equal to voltage applied. Fermi-Dirac statistics P( E) = ; EF=Fermi energy
 E − EF 
 The mobility of electron is two-three times the mobility of exp  +1
holes. Therefore NPN devices are fast and hence preferred.  kT 
 If Eg ~ – 0 eV , the material is good conductor or metal and if  A good emitter should have low work function, high
melting point, high working temperature, high electrical and
Eg ~
– 1 eV , the material is a semiconductor. If Eg ~ – 6 eV then
mechanical strength.
the material is an insulator.
 When triode amplifier are in series, total voltage gain
 A P-N junction or diode acts like a valve or voltage A = A1 A2 A3 ..........
controlled switch. When forward biased, it acts like ON switch.
When reverse biased, it acts like an OFF switch.
 When two triode valves (for cascaded amplifiers) are in
parallel
 The most efficient packing of atoms in cubic lattice structure
1 1 1 T.V.-1
occurs for fcc. Total plate resistance = +
 The lattice for NaCl crystal is fcc. rp rp rp
1 2
T.V.-2
 The space lattice of diamond is fcc. (The diamond structure Total mutual conductance Gm = gm1 + g m2
may be viewed as two fcc structures displaced from each other
Total amplification factor µ = GmRp
by one quarter of a body diagonal).
 Carbon, silicon, germanium, tin can crystallize in the µRL
Voltage amplification A =
diamond structure. rp + RL
 At room temperature σ Ge > σ Si  NOR and NAND gates is a universal gates because. They can
 The current due to minority carriers in the junction diode is be used to perform the basic logic functions, AND, OR and NOT.
independent of the applied voltage. It only depends upon the  Output in Ex-OR gate is '1' only when inputs are different.
temperature of the diode.  If both inputs of NAND gate are shorted then it will become
 Voltage obtained from a diode rectifier is a mixture of 'NOT gate.
alternating and direct voltage. –
A A
 The base is much thinner than the emitter while collector is
wider than both emitter and base. NOT gate

 C.C. (common collector) amplifier is called power amplifier

or current booster or emitter follower. Critical Questions
 Devices like tunnel diode, tetrode and thyristers have
negative resistance. 1. In pure silicon sample of 5 × 10 22 atoms at 300 K , electron
 Transistor provides good power amplification when they hole concentration is 7 × 1015 m−3 . Antimony is doped into
are used in CE configuration.
silicon in a proportion of 1 atom for every 107 atoms of
 MOSFETS : In a MOSFET, a type of three-terminal silicon. Half of impurity atoms contribute band.
transistor, a potential applied to the gate terminal G controls the
internal flow of electrons from the source terminal S to the drain Number of electrons in the conduction band increases by a
terminal D. Commonly, a MOSFET is operated only in its ON factor of
(conducting) or OFF (not conducting condition). Installed by the
(a) 3.6 (b) 2.0
thousands and millions on silicon wafers (chips) to form integrated
circuits, MOSFETs form the basis for computer hardware. (c) 1.8 (d) 0.5
Chapter 26 : Electronics Compact Study Material Page 271

2. Let we have a half-wave rectifier using one p-n junction and 6. Which of the following statements is incorrect
a full wave rectifier using two p-n junctions and a centre tap (a) Resistance of intrinsic semiconductor decreases with
transformer. All of p-n junctions used are identical and ideal.
rise of temperature
Ratio of rectifier efficiencies in half wave and full wave
rectification is (b) Resistance of extrinsic semiconductor decreases with
(a) 1: 2 (b) 2 :1 rise of temperature

(c) 1: 2 (d) 2 : 1 (c) Doping pure Si with aluminium gives p-type

semiconductor
3. Change in resistivity of semiconductor piece with
(d) Doping pure Si with antimony gives p-type
wavelength of incident light is as shown in the figure.
semiconductor
Intensity of light is kept constant while experiment. The
band gap (in eV) for the semiconductor is 7. Correct order of conductivity of Si, Ge and C is
p (Ω-m) (a) Ge > Si > C (b) Si > Ge > C
(c) C > Si > Ge (d) Si > C > Ge
8. In given circuit resistance of resistor is 1kΩ and threshold
(knee) voltage for diode is 0.7 V .

Vin Vout

λ(nm)
2480
Correct variation of Vout with respect to Vin is
(a) 0.9 (b) 0.7
(c) 0.5 (d) 1.1 Vo Vo

4. Consider the given circuit,

(a) (b)
R = 1 kΩ

Vz = 10 V
RL
0.7 Vi 0.7 Vi
Iz(max)= 32 mA

Vo Vo

If voltage across load resistance RL is to be maintained at

(c) (d)
10 V, range of values of RL will be
(a) 50 Ω to 1k Ω (b) 100 Ω to 250Ω
(c) 250 Ω to 1.25 k Ω (d) 500 Ω to 1.25 k Ω
0.7 Vi 0.7 Vi
5. Consider the given circuit,
150 Ω
9. Consider the given circuit,

LED
50 Ω

n-p-n transistor
+ − S 10 kΩ
V=6V 100 Ω

If forward resistance of each diode is 50 Ω , then current 9V

through 100 Ω resistor is
When switch is turned ON
(a) 0A (b) 0.02 A (a) LED changes its colour (b) LED becomes OFF
(c) 0.03 A (d) 0.036 A (c) LED becomes ON (d) LED is short circuited
Page 272 Compact Study Material Chapter 26 : Electronics

10. In a Zener regulator, 14. For an unbiased n-p-n transistor,

RS
n p n
Emitter Base Collector
Vi RL

Which of the following is a correct figure -

(a) Conduction band
Let Zener breakdowns at 6 V , permissible load current
Fermi level
= 4 mA. Assume that current through Zener diode at
Valance band
breakdown is about 5 times of load current. Let input
unregulated voltage can reaches upto 10 V . Value of series
(b) Conduction band
resistance Rs used with Zener is
(a) 166.67 Ω (b) 1000 Ω Fermi level

(c) 3.33 Ω (d) 57.79 Ω Valance band

11. For a transistor,

IB
RC = 1 kΩ ∆V = 1 V (c) Conduction band
Fermi level

Valance band

Current amplification factor is 45 and potential drop across (d)

Conduction band
1kΩ resistor connected in the collector circuit is
Fermi level
1 V. Base current I B is
(a) 0.044 mA (b) 0.033 mA
Valance band
(c) 0.022 mA (d) 0.011 mA
15. Consider the given circuit,
12. In the given transistor circuit, VBE = 0.7 V . C
Point C is maintained VCC = + 5 V
C
B RC = 100 Ω at + 5 V and point D is
B
earthed. If the
E following input is given A
RB = 10 kΩ +
10 V
at point A,
– VA D
+
5V
–

If β = 150, then VCB is

t (s)
(a) −2.85 V (b) +2.85 V 2 5

(c) +3.55 V (d) −3.55 V Then, output at point B is

VB VB
13. For the circuit shown,
VCC= + 5 V
1 kΩ
(a) (b)
β = 200
VBB= + 5 V
t t
2 5
2 5
VBE= 0.7 V VB VB

Power dissipation in the transistor will be (c) (d)

(a) 4.3 W (b) 5.2 W
t t
(c) 7.2 W (d) 9.7 W 2 5
2 5
Chapter 26 : Electronics Compact Study Material Page 273

16. For the given logic circuit, 19. A typical diode characteristics curve A is drawn at
temperature T2 (K).
X1 ID T1 T2
T3
OR
X2
AND NOT y

NOT
X3 VD

Which of these is correct

(a) y = 0 for x1 = x 3 = 0 and x 2 = 1 B

C A
(b) y = 0 for x1 = x 2 = x 3 = 0

(c) y = 1 for x1 = x 2 = x3 = 1 Let curves B and C are drawn at temperatures T3 and T1

respectively (under same set up and for same diode). What
(d) y = 1 for x1 = x 2 = 1 and x 3 = 0 will be the possible relation between temperatures
T1 , T2 and T3
17. Consider the circuit,
(a) T1 > T2 > T3 (b) T1 < T2 < T3
X1
NOT T1 + T3
(c) T2 = (d) T1 = T2 = T3
2
AND 20. Your school lab’s diode characteristics equipment gives
X2 following graph
NOT
OR
y ID(mA)

AND

Logical operation performed by the circuit is 4

(a) ( x1.x 2 ) + (x1. x 2 ) (b) ( x1. x2 ) 2

VD(volts)
(c) ( x1.x 2 ) + (x1. x 2 ) (d) ( x1 + x 2 ).( x1.x 2 )
0.65 0.76
18. Match the Column I with Column II and mark the correct 0.7
option from the codes given below.
Then, choose the correct ratio of DC resistance to the AC
resistance of diode at 2 mA diode current.
Column I Column II (a) 12.73 (b) 0.078
(c) 120 (d) 0.01
i. Energy gap for Si (in eV) p. 1.1
21. A diode has a given characteristics.
ii. Energy gap for Ge (in eV) q. 0.67
I
iii. Threshold voltage for Si diode (in V) r. 0.7
iv Threshold voltage for Ge (in V) s. 0.3

Codes:
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 21 V
V
(a) p q r s 0.7 V
(b) s r q p
(c) p r q s
(d) p s q r
Page 274 Compact Study Material Chapter 26 : Electronics

This diode is connected in a circuit as 24. An AC input is made to an ideal diode. Both input and
p characteristics of diode are shown below.
n
Vi I

V1
V = Vmsinω t
+ Vm
8V T
− 2.0 kΩ V
t O

Input Characteristics
and then as waveform curve
p n
Vi V
V2
Diode
R
+
8V
− 2.2 kΩ

The average value of output voltage V0 over one complete

Ratio of potential drops V1 : V2 (in given circuits) will be time period of input cycle is
80 Vm
(a) 0 (b) (a) Vm (b)
70 2
80 79 2Vm Vm
(c) (d) (c) (d)
7 1 π π
22. A silicon diode has a “knee voltage” or “threshold voltage” 25. In an n-p-n
n transistor, collector current is 10 mA. If 90% of
value of 0.7 V.. This SI diode is connected in a circuit as charge carriers reach the collector, then emitter current I E
shown in the figure.
and base current I B are
E1 = 10 V
P (a) I E = 1 mA , I B = 10 mA (b) I E = 10 mA , I B = 1 mA
V0
4.7 kΩ (c) I E = 9 mA , I B = 1 mA (d) I E = 11 mA , I B = 1 mA

2.2 kΩ 26. Consider the given circuits,

E2 = −5 V

Potential V0 of point P in the circuit will be

(a) −0.44 V (b) 0.44 V
(c) 4.4 V (d) −4.4 V

23. Knee voltage or threshold voltage values for Si and Ge

diodes are 0.7 V and 0.3 V respectively. Let a Si and a Ge
diode are connected in a circuit as shown in the figure.
Then, output voltage is 12 V

(a) 12 V
Si Ge
(b) 11.3 V
L is a lamp and R is a resistance. Choose the correct option.
(c) 11.7 V (a) As there is only one biasing battery in all 3 circuits, so
V0 lamp does not glow in any of the three
(d) 11 V 2 kΩ
(b) Lamp will glow in case A
(c) Lamp will glow in case B
(d) Lamp will glow in case C
Chapter 26 : Electronics Compact Study Material Page 275

27. Emitter and base regions of a n-p-n transistor have same 33. A circuit is prepared by using two p-n junctions and a
doping concentrations. Then, which of the following is resistor as
correct
(a) I E = I B + IC (b) I E = IC Supply
A
(c) IE = IB (d) I B = I E + IC Y
B
28. For a common emitter transistor current gain is 50. When + R
same transistor is used in common base configuration, 105 V −
current gain will be
(a) 50 (b) 102
1
(c) (d) 0.98
50 Logical operation performed by the circuit is
29. An n-p-n CE amplifier has a current gain of 50. If output (a) Y = A.B (b) Y = A + B
and input resistances are 1 k Ω and 5 k Ω respectively, then
(c) Y = ( A.B)′ (d) Y = ( A + B)′
output voltage for an input of 0.01 V will be
(a) 0.25 V (b) 2.5 V
(c) 25 V (d) 250 V Past Year Questions
30. Two n-p-n CE amplifiers are connected in series, output of
1. To obtain P-type Si semiconductor, we need to dope pure
first is fed to input of second. First amplifier has a voltage
Si with [IIT-JEE 1988]
gain of 10 and second has a voltage gain of 20. For an input
signal of 0.01 V, output signal is of (a) Aluminium (b) Phosphorous
(a) 200 amplification (b) 2 amplification (c) Oxygen (d) Germanium
(c) 30 amplification (d) 0.5 amplification 2. Carbon, silicon and germanium have four valence electrons
31. Two logical circuits are equivalent when they produces same each. At room temperature which one of the following
outputs for same inputs. Now you have given following statements is most appropriate [AIEEE 2007]
circuit, (a) The number of free conduction electrons is significant in
A C but small in Si and Ge
(b) The number of free conduction electrons is negligible
NOR small in all the three
B NOT (c) The number of free electrons for conduction is
OR NOR significant in all the three
(d) The number of free electrons for conduction is
significant only in Si and Ge but small in C
NOR
3. Which of the following statements is not true
[IIT-JEE 1997 Re-Exam]

This is equivalent to (a) The resistance of intrinsic semiconductors decrease with

increase of temperature
(b) Doping pure Si with trivalent impurities gives P-type
(a) AND (b) OR semiconductors
(c) The majority carriers in N-type semiconductors are holes
(c) AND (d) AND
(d) A PN-junction can act as a semiconductor diode
4. The typical ionisation energy of a donor in silicon is
[IIT-JEE 1992]
32. Identify the logical function performed by given circuit,
(a) 10.0 eV (b) 1.0 eV
(c) 0.1 eV (d) 0.001 eV

NOT OR
AND 5. The forbidden energy band gap in conductors,
semiconductors and insulators are EG1 , EG2 and EG3
respectively. The relation among them is [AIEEE 2002]

(a) Y = A.( A + B) (b) Y = A.( A.B) (a) EG1 = EG2 = EG3 (b) EG1 < EG2 < EG3
(c) Y = A + ( A + B) (d) Y = A.( A + B) (c) EG1 > EG2 > EG3 (d) EG1 < EG2 > EG3
Page 276 Compact Study Material Chapter 26 : Electronics

6. Energy bands in solids are a consequence of [AIEEE 2004] 13. In a PN-junction diode not connected to any circuit
(a) Ohm’s Law [IIT-JEE 1998]
(b) Pauli’s exclusion principle (a) The potential is the same everywhere
(c) Bohr’s theory (b) The P-type is a higher potential than the N-type side
(d) Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle
(c) There is an electric field at the junction directed from
7. The energy band gap is maximum in [AIEEE 2002]
the N- type side to the P- type side
(a) Metals (b) Superconductors
(d) There is an electric field at the junction directed from
(c) Insulators (d) Semiconductors
the P-type side to the N-type side
8. The probability of electrons to be found in the conduction
band of an intrinsic semiconductor at a finite temperature 14. When forward bias is applied to a P-N junction, then what
[IIT-JEE 1995] happens to the potential barrier VB , and the width of charge
(a) Decreases exponentially with increasing band gap depleted region x [AIEEE 2004]
(b) Increases exponentially with increasing band gap (a) VB increases, x decreases
(c) Decreases with increasing temperature
(b) VB decreases, x increases
(d) Is independent of the temperature and the band gap
9. The difference in the variation of resistance with (c) VB increases, x increases
temperature in a metal and a semiconductor arises
(d) VB decreases, x decreases
essentially due to the difference in the [AIEEE 2003]
(a) Variation of scattering mechanism with temperature 15. In the middle of the depletion layer of a reverse-biased PN
(b) Crystal structure junction, the [AIEEE 2003]
(c) Variation of the number of charge carriers with (a) Potential is zero (b) Electric field is zero
temperature (c) Potential is maximum (d) Electric field is maximum
(d) Type of bond
16. A p–n junction (D) shown in the figure can act as a rectifier.
10. The temperature dependence of resistances of Cu and
An alternating current source (V) is connected in the circuit.
undoped Si in the temperature range 300 – 400 K, is best
described by [JEE (Main) 2016]
D
(a) Linear increase for Cu, exponential increase for Si
(b) Linear increase for Cu, exponential decrease for Si R

V
(c) Linear decrease for Cu, linear decrease for Si ~
(d) Linear increase for Cu, linear increase for Si
11. Mobility of electrons in a semiconductor is defined as the The current (I) in the resistor (R) can be shown by
ratio of their drift velocity to the applied electric field. If for [AIEEE 2009]
an n-type semiconductor, the density of electrons is I I
1019 m −3 and their mobility is 1.6m2/(V.s) then the resistivity (a) (b)
of the semiconductor (since it is an n-type semiconductor
contribution of holes is ignored) is close to
t t
[JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 4 Ωm (b) 0.4 Ωm I I
(c) 0.2 Ωm (d) 2 Ωm
(c) (d)
12. Two PN-junctions can be connected in series by three
different methods as shown in the figure. If the potential t t
difference in the junctions is the same, then the correct
connections will be [IIT-JEE 1989]
17. To make a PN junction conducting [IIT-JEE 1994]
(a) The value of forward bias should be more than the
P N N P P N P N N P N P barrier potential
(b) The value of forward bias should be less than the
barrier potential
+ – + – + – (c) The value of reverse bias should be more than the
1 2 3 barrier potential
(a) In the circuit (1) and (2) (b) In the circuit (2) and (3) (d) The value of reverse bias should be less than the barrier
(c) In the circuit (1) and (3) (d) Only in the circuit (1) potential
Chapter 26 : Electronics Compact Study Material Page 277

18. The circuit shown in following figure contains two diodes D1 (a) Zener diode, Simple diode, Light dependent resistance,
and D2 each with a forward resistance of 50 ohms and with Solar cell
infinite backward resistance. If the battery voltage is 6 V, the (b) Solar cell, Light dependent resistance, Zener diode,
current through the 100 ohm resistance (in amperes) is Simple diode
[IIT-JEE 1997; Similar AIEEE 2006] (c) Zener diode, Solar cell, Simple diode, Light dependent
150Ω resistance
(d) Simple diode, Zener diode, Solar cell, Light dependent
D1
50Ω resistance
22. A red LED emits light at 0.1 watt uniformly around it. The
D2
100Ω amplitude of the electric field of the light at a distance of
1 m from the diode is [JEE (Main) 2015]
6V
(a) 1.73 V/m (b) 2.45 V/m
(a) Zero (b) 0.02
(c) 5.48 V/m (d) 7.75 V/m
(c) 0.03 (d) 0.036
23. In the given circuit the current through Zener Diode is close
19. The forward biased diode connection is [JEE (Main) 2014] to [JEE (Main) 2019]

(a) (b) R1 500Ω

(c) (d) 12V

R2 500Ω R2
20. In the circuit given below, V(t) is the sinusoidal voltage V2=10V
source, voltage drop VAB(t) across the resistance R is
D1 D2 [IIT 1993]
(a) 0.0 mA (b) 6.7 mA

VAB
(c) 6.0 mA (d) 4.0 mA
R
R1=100 Ω R2=150 Ω 24. Ge and Si diodes start conducting at 0 .3 V and 0.7V
V(t) respectively. In the following figure if Ge diode connection
are reversed, the value of V0 changes by (assume that the
(a) Is half wave rectified Ge diode has large breakdown voltage)
(b) Is full wave rectified [JEE (Main) 2019]
Ge
(c) Has the same peak value in the positive and negative
half cycles Vo
(d) Has different peak values during positive and negative
half cycle Si
12V
21. Identify the semiconductor devices whose characteristics are
given below, in the order (A), (B), (C), (D) [JEE (Main) 2016]
I I

(a) 0 .6 V (b) 0 .2 V
V V
(c) 0 .4 V (d) 0 .8 V
25. For the circuit shown below, the current through the Zener
diode is [JEE (Main) 2019]
5kΩ
(A) (B)
Resistance
I
Dark
50V 10kΩ
120V
V V
Illuminated Intensity of
light (a) 14 mA (b) 9 mA
(C) (D) (c) Zero (d) 5 mA
Page 278 Compact Study Material Chapter 26 : Electronics

26. The circuit shown below contains two ideal diodes, each 30. When NPN transistor is used as an amplifier [AIEEE 2004]
with a forward resistance of 50 Ω . If the battery voltage is (a) Electrons move from base to collector
6V , the current through the 100 Ω resistance (in Amperes)
(b) Holes move from emitter to base
is D1 [JEE (Main) 2019]
150Ω (c) Electrons move from collector to base
75Ω (d) Holes move from base to emitter
31. A working transistor with its three legs marked P, Q and R is
D2
tested using a multimeter. No conduction is found between
100Ω
P and Q. By connecting the common (negative) terminal of
6V the multimeter to R and the other (positive) terminal to P or
(a) 0.020 (b) 0.030 Q, some resistance is seen on the multimeter. Which of the
(c) 0.027 (d) 0.036 following is true for the transistor [AIEEE 2008]
27. The reverse breakdown voltage of a Zener diode is 5.6 V in (a) It is a pnp transistor with R as collector
the given circuit. (b) It is a pnp transistor with R as emitter
200 Ω (c) It is an npn transistor with R as collector

IZ
(d) It is an npn transistor with R as base
32. In a common base mode of a transistor, the collector current
9V 800 Ω
is 5.488 mA for an emitter current of 5.60 mA. The value of
the base current amplification factor (β) will be [AIEEE 2006]
(a) 50 (b) 51
The current I Z through the Zener is [JEE (Main) 2019]
(c) 48 (d) 49
(a) 17m A (b) 15m A
33. The phase difference between input and output voltages of
(c) 10 m A (d) 7m A a CE circuit is [JEE Main 2017]
28. The figure represents a voltage regulator circuit using a (a) 0o (b) 90o
Zener diode. The breakdown voltage of the Zener diode is
(c) 180o (d) 270o
6 V and the load resistance is RL = 4 kΩ . The series
34. In a common emitter amplifier circuit using an n − p − n
resistance of the circuit is Ri = 1 kΩ . If the battery voltage
transistor, the phase difference between the input and the
VB varies from 8 V to 16 V what are the minimum and
output voltages will be [JEE (Main) 2017]
maximum values of the current through Zener diode
Ri (a) 180º (b) 45º
(c) 90º (d) 135º
35. In the figure, given that VBB supply can vary from 0 to
RL
VB 5.0 V, VCC = 5V , β dc = 200, RB = 100 kΩ, RC = 1 k Ω
and VBE = 1.0V . The minimum base current and the input

[JEE (Main) 2019] voltage at which the transistor will go to saturation, will be,
(a) 0.5 mA, 6 mA (b) 0.5 mA, 8.5 mA respectively [JEE (Main) 2019]

(c) 1.5 mA, 8.5 mA (d) 1 mA, 8.5 mA IC

29. Figure shows a DC voltage regulator circuit with a Zener C

RB
diode of breakdown voltage = 6 V . If the unregulated input RC
E
voltage varies between 10 V to 16 V then what is the
maximum Zener current [JEE (Main) 2019]
IE ~ V0
Is VBB VCC
Vi ~

(a) 1.5 mA RS = 2kΩ

(b) 7.5 mA
IZ
(c) 3.5 mA (a) 25µA and 2.8 V (b) 20µA and 3.5 V
RL = 4kΩ

(d) 2.5 mA (c) 20µA and 2.8 V (d) 25µA and 3.5 V
Chapter 26 : Electronics Compact Study Material Page 279

36. A common emitter amplifier circuit, built using an npn 41. If a, b, c, d are inputs to a gate and x is its output, then as
transistor, is shown in the figure. Its dc current gain is per the following time graph, the gate is [JEE (Main) 2016]
250, RC = 1 k Ω and VCC = 10 V . What is the minimum
base current for VCE to reach saturation [JEE (Main) 2019] d

RC c
RB

(a) 100 µ A b

(b) 7µ A VB VCC
a
(c) 40 µ A
x
(d) 10µ A
(a) AND (b) OR
37. An NPN transistor is used in common emitter configuration
(c) NAND (d) NOT
as an amplifier with 1 k Ω load resistance. Signal voltage of
42. The combination of ‘NAND’ gates shown here under
10 mV is applied across the base-emitter. This produces a (figure) are equivalent to [ AIEEE 2010]
3mA change in the collector current and 15µ A change in
the base current of the amplifier. The input resistance and A
voltage gain are [JEE (Main) 2019] C

(a) 0.33 kΩ, 300 (b) 0.67 kΩ, 300

B
(c) 0.33 kΩ, 1.5 (d) 0.67 kΩ, 200

38. An npn transistor operates as a common emitter amplifier,

with a power gain of 60 dB . The input circuit resistance is A C
B
100 Ω and the output load resistance is 10 Ω . The
common emitter current gain β is [JEE (Main) 2019]
2 4
(a) An OR gate and an AND gate respectively
(a) 10 (b) 10
(b) An AND gate and a NOT gate respectively
(c) 6 × 10 2 (d) 60 (c) An AND gate and an OR gate respectively
39. The transfer characteristic curve of a transistor, having input
(d) An OR gate and a NOT gate respectively
and output resistance 100 Ω and 100 kΩ respectively, is
43. Truth table for system of four NAND gates as shown in
shown in the figure. The Voltage and Power gain, are figure is [AIEEE 2012]
respectively [JEE (Main) 2019]
A
(a) 5 × 104 , 5 × 105
(400, 20)
4 6 Y
(b) 5 × 10 , 2.5 × 10 IC
(300, 15)
(mA) (200, 10) B
(c) 5 × 104 , 5 × 106
(100, 5)
A B Y A B C
(d) 2.5 × 104 , 2.5 × 106 I b (µ A) 0 0 0 0 0 0
40. In the circuit below, A and B represent two inputs and C (a) 0 1 1 (b) 0 1 0
represents the output [AIEEE 2008] 1 0 1 1 0 1
A 1 1 0 1 1 1

C A B Y A B Y

B 0 0 1 0 0 1
(c) 0 1 1 (d) 0 1 0
The circuit represents 1 0 0 1 0 0
(a) AND gate (b) NAND gate 1 1 0 1 1 1
(c) OR gate (d) NOR gate
Page 280 Compact Study Material Chapter 26 : Electronics

44. To get output ‘1’ at R, for the given logic gate circuit the (a) Toggles between 0 and 1
input values must be (b) 0
X (c) Will not execute
(d) 1
P
R 49. If an emitter current is changed by 4 mA, the collector
Q
current changes by 3.5 mA. The value of β will be
Y
[JEE (Main) 2021]
[JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 0.5 (b) 3.5
(a) X = 1, Y = 1 (b) X = 0, Y = 0
(c) 7 (d) 0.875
(c) X = 0, Y = 1 (d) X = 1, Y = 0
50.
45. The output of the given logic circuit is [JEE (Main) 2019] A
C
B
A

Y The logic circuit shown above is equivalent to

B [JEE (Main) 2021]

(a) AB + A B (b) A B (a) A (b) A C

C
B B
(c) AB (d) AB + AB
46. The logic gate equivalent to the given logic circuit is
(c) A C (d) A C
A B B
Y

B 51. Identify the correct output signal Y in the given

[JEE (Main) 2019] combination of gates (as shown) for the given inputs A and
B
(a) NOR (b) OR
(c) AND (d) NAND B
47. The truth table for the circuit given in the figure is
Y
A

A Y
B A
[JEE (Main) 2019]

A B Y A B Y
B
0 0 1 0 0 1
5 10 15 20 t
(a) 0 1 0 (b) 0 1 1 [JEE (Main) 2020]
1 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 1 1 0
(a)
A B Y A B Y t
0 0 0 0 0 1 5 10 15 20

(c) 0 1 0 (d) 0 1 1
1 0 1 1 0 1 (b)
1 1 1 1 1 1
t
48. In the given circuit, value of Y is 5 10 15 20

1 (c)
t
5 10 15 20
Y

0 (d)
t
[JEE (Main) 2020] 5 10 15 20
Chapter 26 : Electronics Compact Study Material Page 281

52. Two Zener diodes (A and B) having breakdown voltages of (c)

6 V and 4 V respectively, are connected as shown A B Y
in the circuit below. The output voltage V0 variation 0 0 1
with input voltage linearly increasing with time, is given by 0 1 0
(Vinput = 0 V at t = 0) (figures are qualitative) 1 0 1
1 1 0
B
RL = 400Ω (d)
A 6V
Vin 4V V0 A B Y
0 0 1
100Ω
0 1 0
1 0 0
[JEE (Main) 2020]
1 1 1
V0
54. LED is constructed from Ga-As-P semiconducting material.
(a) 4V The energy gap of this LED is 1.9 eV. Calculate the
wavelength of light emitted and its colour
[h = 6.63 × 10–34Js and c = 3 × 108 ms–1]
time → [JEE (Main) 2021]
V0 6V (a) 1046 nm and blue colour

(b) (b) 654 nm and orange colour

4V
(c) 654 nm and red colour
(d) 1046 nm and red colour
time →
V0 55. Four NOR gates are connected as shown in figure. The truth
6V
table for the given figure is
(c) 4V

Y
time →
V0 6V
[JEE (Main) 2021]
(d)
(a)
A B Y
time → 0 0 1
0 1 0
53. The truth table for the following logic circuit is
1 0 1
[JEE (Main) 2021] 1 1 0
A
(b)
Y A B Y
0 0 0
B
0 1 1
(a) 1 0 1
1 1 0
A B Y
(c)
0 0 0
A B Y
0 1 1
0 0 1
1 0 0 0 1 0
1 1 1 1 0 0
(b) 1 1 1
A B Y (d)
0 0 0 A B Y
0 1 1 0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 0 0
1 1 0 1 1 1
Page 282 Compact Study Material Chapter 26 : Electronics

Numerical Questions :

ID(mA)
56. Both the diodes used in the circuit shown are assumed to be
ideal and have negligible resistance when these are forward
8
biased. Built in potential in each diode is 0.7 V . For the 7
input voltages shown in the figure, the voltage (in volts) at 6
5
point A is
4
A 3
2
1
Vin=12.7V Vin=4V
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 VD(V)

[JEE (Mains) 2020] [JEE (Main) 2021]

57. The value of power dissipated across the zener diode 60. In a semiconductor, the number density of intrinsic charge
(Vz = 15V ) connected in the circuit as shown in the figure is carriers at 27°C is 1.5 × 1016 / m 3 . If the semiconductor is
doped with impurity atom, the hole density increases to
x × 10−1 watt.
RS=35Ω 4.5 × 10 22 / m 3 . The electron density in the doped
semiconductor is________ × 109 / m3 [JEE (Main) 2021]
RL=90Ω
22 V VZ = 15V 61. A zener diode of power rating 2 W is to be used as a
voltage regulator. If the zener diode has a breakdown of
10 V and it has to regulate voltage fluctuated between 6 V
The value of x, to the nearest integer, is ______.
and 14V , the value of RS for safe operation should
[JEE (Main) 2021]
be________ Ω
58. An NPN transistor operates as a common emitter amplifier
with a power gain of 10 6 . The input circuit resistance is RS
100 Ω and the output load resistance is 10 kΩ . The
common emitter current gain ' β ' will be _______. (Round Unregulated Regulated
off to the Nearest Integer) [JEE (Main) 2021] voltage voltage

59. For the forward biased diode characteristics shown in the

figure, the dynamic resistance at I D = 3 mA will be
[JEE (Main) 2021]
_______ Ω

CRITICAL QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 b 2 c 3 c 4 c 5 b 6 d 7 a 8 a 9 c 10 a

11 c 12 b 13 a 14 c 15 d 16 a 17 c 18 a 19 a 20 a

21 c 22 a 23 a 24 d 25 d 26 c 27 c 28 d 29 b 30 a

31 a 32 d 33 b

PAST YEAR QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 a 2 d 3 c 4 c 5 b 6 b 7 c 8 a 9 c 10 b

11 b 12 b 13 c 14 d 15 d 16 c 17 a 18 b 19 a 20 d

21 d 22 b 23 a 24 c 25 b 26 a 27 c 28 b 29 c 30 a

31 d 32 d 33 c 34 a 35 d 36 c 37 b 38 a 39 b 40 c

41 b 42 a 43 a 44 d 45 c 46 b 47 b 48 b 49 c 50 a

51 a 52 c 53 d 54 c 55 c 56 12 57 5 58 100 59 25 60 5

61 20

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
Chapter 27 : Communication Compact Study Material Page 283

CHAPTER
IMPORTANT POINTS
27 Communication
 The dish type antenna's used for satellite communication
are generally of cassegrain type
 Parallel wire lines are never used for transmission of
microwaves. This is because at the frequency of microwaves,  Ground waves propagate along the surface of the earth.
separation between the two wires approaches half a wavelength These are vertically polarised to prevent short circuiting of the
(λ/2). Therefore radiation loss of energy becomes maximum. 120 πht l
electric field at a distance d is given by E = and signal
λd
 Number of channel accommodated for
received by an antenna of height hr is given by V (volts)
Total band width of channel 120πht hr I
transmission = = .
Band width needed per channel λd

 Bit rate = Sampling rate × no. of bits per sample.  Receivers may be of two types, tuned radio frequency
(TRF) receivers and superheterodyne receivers. Super
 Modulation factor determines the strength and quality of
heterodyne receivers use local oscillators and intermediate
the transmitted signal.
frequency amplifiers before the signal is detected. In this way the
 A Hertz antenna is a straight conductor of length equal to reception becomes free of signal frequency but depends only on
half the wavelength of radio signals to be transmitted or intermediate frequency which is fixed.
received. A Marconi antenna is a straight conductor of length l
 A rectifier with peak detection is used in the AM wave
= λ/4
detection and FM detection is achieved by an LC circuit tuned
 In a digital signal, information is carried by the pattern of at off resonant frequency.
pulses and not by the shape of pulses.
 APDs (Avalanche photodiodes) are best suited for detection
 Sampling converts an analog signal into digital. For in fiber optic communication.
example when an analog signal is sampled at interval of 125 µ-s  MASER is microwave amplification by stimulated emission
1 of radiation. It is used as a microwave amplifier or oscillator.
the number of samples taken per second = = 8000 .
125 × 10 − 6
The principle of MASER is identical to that of LASER. Only
 AGC stands for automatic gain control. frequency range is ≤ 1011 Hz in masers.

 Sputnik-I launched by Russia in 1957 was the first active  In frequency modulation mf (frequency modulation index)
satellite. is inversely proportional to modulating frequency fm. While in
PM it does not vary with modulating frequency. Moreover, FM
 First communication satellite was put in an orbit by USA in is more noise immune.
1958.
 AM with single side band suppressed carrier is better as it
 The first Indian experimental satellite, i.e., Apple was contains maximum modulating power.
launched on June 19, 1981.

 The national information cenre at Delhi has linked

computers at all head quarters through INSAT 2B.
Critical Questions
1. A digital signal
Z I. Do not provide a continuous set of values.
 Just as represents characteristic impedance (Z0) of a
Y II. Represents values as discrete steps.
transmission line, ZY represents propagation constant of the III. Can utilize binary system.
IV. Can utilize decimal as well as binary systems.
line.
Then, mark the correct option
 Glass-core and glass cladding (often called SCS fibre, i.e., (a) Both I and II (b) Both I and III
silica clad silica fibre) have the best propagation characteristics. (c) I, II and III (d) All of the above
Page 284 Compact Study Material Chapter 27 : Communication

2. In which of the following cases, there is a successful 4. Consider the following statements about amplitude
transmission of a TV signal modulation.
I. When modulation index x = 1, then there are multiple
side bands causing distortion.
R
II. When modulation index x = 1, power in each side band
I.
is one fourth of carrier power.
T III. Carrier power is wasted power as carrier itself conveys
no information.
IV. Received signal gets weak, if modulation index drops to
0.7 from initial value of 0.8.
T R In your opinion correct choices are:
(a) Only I (b) I, II and III
II.
(c) II, III and IV (d) Both III and IV
5. An antenna has an impedance of 40 Ω. . An unmodulated
AM signal produces a current of 4.8 A. Let the modulation is
90%. The power contained in each side band will be
T
III. (a) 921.6W (b) 460.8W

(c) 647.5W (d) 186.7W

R
6. A standard AM broadcast station uses upto 5kHz frequency
for modulating a carrier of frequency 980 kHz. The total
bandwidth of AM station is
IV.
(a) 10kHz (b) 1960kHz
T R
(c) 985kHz (d) 975kHz
Your choice is 7. Your local radio station relays news signal as
(a) Only II (b) I, II and III
V (t ) = (2.0 + 4 sin 500π t ).cos(2π × 105 t ) volts.
(c) Only III (d) All of these
The modulation index of the signal is
3. In a particular case of amplitude modulation, carrier signal
(a) 20 (b) 2
used is
V (c) 0.2 (d) 0.02
8. A spy has to relay three coded massages using frequencies
+12 V
of 1600 kHz ,5 MHz and 60 MHz to his headquarter. Then,
mark the correct option
−12 V t
(a) A is transmitted via space wave while B and C are
transmitted via sky wave
(b) A is transmitted via ground wave, B via sky wave and
C via space wave
and the modulating signal is (c) B and C are transmitted via ground wave while A is
V transmitted via sky wave
(d) B is transmitted via ground wave while A and C are
+9 V
transmitted via space wave
9. A transmitter puts out a total power of 25W of 30%
−9 V t
modulated AM signal. Percentage of total power carried by
carrier wave is
(a) 50%
The modulation index will be (b) 80%
(a) 0.5 (b) 0.25 (c) Less than 35%
(c) 0.75 (d) 1.00 (d) More than 95%
Chapter 27 : Communication Compact Study Material Page 285

10. Consider the carrier wave and modulating signal given 13. An amplitude modulated wave is as shown in the figure.

V ∆V = 20 V

t ∆V = 6 V

V=0
−A

V
A
Modulation for this amplitude modulation will be
(a) Around 100% (b) Around 20%
t
(c) Around 50% (d) Around 80%
14. Minimum number of transducers required to assemble an
−A optical communication link for transmitting voice signals is

Then, mark the correct options (a) 1 (b) 2

(a) Modulated signal is of constant amplitude A (c) 3 (d) 4
(b) Modulated signal is of constant amplitude 2 A 15. To the given circuit, a time varying electrical signal is fed.
(c) Amplitude of modulated signal varies from A to 2 A
(d) Amplitude of modulated signal varies from 0 to 2 A
11. The new 4 G technology service provider is allotted a
bandwidth of 2 × 75 MHz for mobile phone communication.
Let one GSM channel has a bandwidth of 200 kHz. The
total number of GSM users which can be accommodated by
this service provider is nearly The output across resistor R , when f (wave) << RC, is
(a) 750 users if we assume that gap between two users is
included in 200 kHz bandwidth
(b) 7500 users
(c) 750 users if we assume that gap between two users
us is (a) (b)
included in 2 × 75 MHz band width
(d) 75000 users
12. A signal consisting of only two wavelengths are reflected off
the (λ A and λB ) layer of ionosphere
nosphere as shown in the figure.
(c) (d)

F2
16. Except for the upper layer of atmosphere called ionosphere,
rest of the atmosphere is composed mainly of neutral
molecules. This is because
(a) Change in lower layers is conducted to ground

A (b) Lower layers consists of gases with higher work

B function/ ionisation potentials
Earth
(c) Most of the ionising radiation is already reflected off
Then, the relation between λA and λB will be upper layers and does not reach lower layers
(a) λA = λB (b) λA > λB (d) Atmospheric pressure
ure decreases with height above
(c) λA < λB (d) Data insufficient Earth’s surface
Page 286 Compact Study Material Chapter 27 : Communication

17. Consider the following circuit. 20. An amplitude modulated wave is as shown in the figure.

4 V 12 V

Input voltages at A and B are, and VA = 2 sin(8π t ) V ,

Modulation index for given wave is
(a) 1 (b) 0.5
VB (volts) (c) 0.75 (d) 0.25
1 21. A 400 Hz tone modulates a 300kHz carrier. Amplitude of
carrier is 2V and modulation index is 1.
1.Then, the
1.5
t(s) modulated signal is given by
0.5 1
(a) 2sin(6 × 105 π t) + 2cos(600.8 × 103 π t) + cos(599.2 × 103 π t )
−1
(b) 2 sin(6 × 105 π t) + 2 sin(600.8 × 103 π t) + 2 sin(599.2 × 103 π t )

Then, output V0 is (c) 2 sin(6 × 105 π t) + 2 sin(600.8 × 103 π t) + 2cos(599.2 × 103 π t)

3 sin 8π t, t = 0 to t = 0.5 s (d) 2sin(6 × 105 π t) + cos(600.8 × 103 π t) − cos(599.2 × 103 π t)

(a) V0 = 
 2 sin 8π t, t = 0.5 to t = 1 s 22. Let in an amplitude modulation, carrier frequency is

(b) V0 = 2 sin 8π t ± 1 V 300 kHz, message frequency is 400 Hz, , carrier amplitude
is 9 V and modulation index is 0.75. Then, the frequency
3 sin 8π t, t = 0 to t = 0.5 s
(c) V0 =  domain display for AM signal (voltage) is
 0, t = 0.5 to t = 1 s

3 sin 8π t, t = 0 to t = 0.5 s V(volts) V(volts)

(d) V0 = 
 sin 8π t, t = 0.5 to t = 1 s
9V 9V
18. A sine carrier with amplitude Vc and frequency fc is
(a) (b)
3V
modulated with a modulating sinusoidal signal of amplitude
f
f(Hz) f(Hz)
Vm and frequency fm . The result will be 299.6 300 300.4 299.6 300 300.4

(a) V = [(Vc + Vm )sin 2π fm t] sin 2π fc t

V(volts) V(volts)
(b) V = [Vc sin 2π fm t + Vm ]sin 2π fc t
(c) 9V (d) 9 V
(c) V = Vm sin 2π fmt + Vc sin 2π fc t
6.75 V 6.75 V
(d) V = Vm sin 2π fm t + (Vm sin 2π fmt )sin 2π fc t
f(Hz) f(Hz)
299.6 300 300.4 299.6 300 300.4
19. Let a sinusoidal carrier with a periodic time of 0.25 s is
modulated by using an intelligent signal given by
23. An AM signal is represent as
m(t) = 2 sin 2π t(V ) Vm
VAM = Vc . sin 2π fc t +[cos 2π t( fc − fm ) − cos 2π t( fc + fm )]
Assuming ideal condition for modulation, the modulated 2
signal will be And R = resistance of load impedance (antenna)

(a) V (t ) = 2 sin 8π t + (2 sin 2π t )sin 8π t Then, total power carried by the signal is

(b) V (t ) = 4 sin 8π t + (2 sin 2π t )sin 8π t V02 + Vm2

(a) (b) Vc2 + 2 Vm2
R
(c) V (t) = 4 sin 8π t + 2 sin 2π t
Vc2 Vm2 Vc2 Vm2
(d) Cannot be found or modulation index is not given (c) × ×2 (d) ×
R R 2R 4 R
Chapter 27 : Communication Compact Study Material Page 287

24. For a 100% modulation, ratio of total side band power with 5. Choose the correct statement [JEE (Main) 2016]
the carrier power is (a) In amplitude modulation the frequency of high
frequency carrier wave is made to vary in proportion to
(a) 1: 4 (b) 4 :1
the amplitude of the audio signal
(c) 1: 2 (d) 2 :1 (b) In frequency modulation the amplitude of the high
25. For an AM signal, if modulation index is reduced (from 1) frequency carrier wave is made to vary in proportion to
then the amplitude of the audio signal
(c) In frequency modulation the amplitude of the high
(a) Power of side bands increases
frequency carrier wave is made to vary in proportion to
(b) Power of side bands decreases the frequency of the audio signal
(c) Power of side bands remains same (d) In amplitude modulation the amplitude of the high
(d) Power of carrier increases frequency carrier wave is made to vary in proportion to
the amplitude of the audio signal
6. In amplitude modulation, sinusoidal carrier frequency used
Past Year Questions is denoted by ωc and the signal frequency is denoted ωm.
The bandwidth (∆ωm) of the signal is such that ∆ωm << ωc .
1. A signal of 5 kHz frequency is amplitude modulated on a
Which of the following frequency is not contained in the
carrier wave of frequency 2MHz. The frequencies of the modulated wave [JEE (Main) 2017]
resultant signal is/are [JEE (Main) 2015] (a) ωc − ωm (b) ωm
(a) 2 MHz only (c) ωc (d) ωm + ωc
(b) 2005 kHz and 1995 kHz 7. A telephonic communication service is working at carrier
(c) 2005 kHz, 2000 kHz and 1995 kHz frequency of 10GHz. Only 10% of it is utilized for
(d) 2000 kHz and 1995 kHz transmission. How many telephonic channels can be
transmitted simultaneously if each channel requires a
2. A radar has a power of 1 kW and is operating at a frequency
bandwidth of 5 kHz [JEE (Main) 2018]
of 10 GHz. It is located on a mountain top of height 500m.
The maximum distance upto which it can detect object (a) 2 × 105 (b) 2 × 106
located on the surface of the earth (Radius of earth (c) 2 × 10 3 (d) 2 × 10 4
6
= 6.4 × 10 m ) is [AIEEE 2012] 8. The magnifying power of a telescope with tube length 60cm
(a) 80 km (b) 16 km is 5 . What is the focal length of its eye-piece
[JEE (Main) 2020]
(c) 40 km (d) 64 km
(a) 30cm (b) 10cm
3. A diode detector is used to detect an amplitude modulated
wave of 60% modulation by using a condenser of capacity (c) 40cm (d) 20cm
250 pico farad in parallel with a load resistance 100 kilo 9. An object is gradually moving away from the focal point of a
ohm. Find the maximum modulated frequency which could concave mirror along the axis of the mirror. The graphical
be detected by it [JEE (Main) 2013]
representation of the magnitude of linear magnification (m)
versus distance of the object from the mirror (x) is correctly
(a) 10.62 MHz given by (Graphs are drawn schematically and are not to
(b) 10.62 kHz scale) [JEE (Main) 2020]
m m
(c) 5.31 MHz
(d) 5.31 kHz
1 1
(a) (b)
4. Consider telecommunication through optical fibres. Which x x
f 2f f 2f
of the following statements is not true [AIEEE 2003]

(a) Optical fibres may have homogeneous core with a

suitable cladding m m
(b) Optical fibres can be of graded refractive index
(c) Optical fibres are subject to electromagnetic interference (c) 1 (d) 1
from outside x x
f 2f f 2f
(d) Optical fibres have extremely low transmission loss
Page 288 Compact Study Material Chapter 27 : Communication

10. What should be the height of transmitting antenna and the

Numerical Questions :
population covered if the television telecast is to cover a
12. An audio signal vm = 20 sin 2π (1500t) amplitude modulates
radius 150km ? The average population density around the
2 a carrier vC = 80 sin 2π (100,000 t) . The value of percent
tower is 2000/ km and the value of R e = 6 .5 × 10 6 m
modulation is [JEE (Main) 2021]
[JEE (Main) 2021]
(a) Height = 1800m 13. A signal of 0.1 kW is transmitted in a cable. The attenuation

Population Covered = 1413 × 10 8 of cable is −5 dB per km and cable length is 20 km . The

(b) Height = 1600m power received at receiver is 10 − x W . The value of x is __

Population covered = 2 × 105  P 

(c) Height = 1731m Gain in dB = 10 log 10  0 
 [JEE (Main) 2021]
  Pi  
Population covered = 1413 × 10 5
14. A TV transmission tower antenna is at a height of 20 m .
(d) Height = 1241m
Suppose that the receiving antenna is at
5
Population covered = 7 × 10 (i) Ground level
11. A transmitting antenna at top of a tower has a height of
(ii) A height of 5 m
50 m and the height of receiving antenna is 80m. What is
range of communication for Line of Sight (LoS) mode The increase in antenna range in case (ii) relative to case (i)
[use radius of earth = 6400km] [JEE (Main) 2021] is n % . The value of n, to the nearest integer, is______
(a) 80.2 km (b) 144.1 km [JEE (Main) 2021]
(c) 57.28 km (d) 45.5 km

CRITICAL QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 c 2 b 3 c 4 c 5 d 6 a 7 c 8 b 9 d 10 d

11 a 12 b 13 c 14 d 15 d 16 d 17 d 18 d 19 a 20 b

21 d 22 d 23 d 24 c 25 b

PAST YEAR QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 c 2 a 3 b 4 c 5 d 6 b 7 a 8 b 9 a 10 c

11 c 12 25 13 8 14 50

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 CHAPTER
IMPORTANT POINTS
28 Ray Optics
 When object is moved from focus to infinity at constant
speed, the image will move faster in the beginning till object
 In concave mirror, minimum distance between a real object moves from f to 2f, and slower later on, towards the mirror.
and it's real image is zero (i.e., when u = v = 2f)
 As every part of mirror forms a complete image, if a part of
 If a spherical mirror produces an image ‘m’ times the size of the mirror is obstructed, full image will be formed but intensity
the object (m = magnification) then u, v and f are given by the will be reduced.
 m −1  m 
followings u =   f , v = − (m − 1) f and f =  u O
 m   m −1 C P
∞
 Focal length of a mirror is independent of material of mirror F
and medium in which it is placed and wavelength of incident Obstruction
light I

 Divergence or convergence power of a mirror does not  In case of refraction of light frequency (and hence colour)
change with the change in medium. and phase do not change (while wavelength and velocity will
 After reflection velocity, wavelength and frequency of light change).
remains same but intensity decreases.
 In the refraction intensity of incident light decreases as it
 If light ray incidents normally on a surface, after reflection it
retraces the path. goes from one medium to another medium.
 A transparent solid is invisible in a liquid of same refractive
index (Because of no refraction).
C C
 When a glass slab is kept over various coloured letters and
 If two plane mirrors are inclined to each other at 90 , the o seen from the top, the violet colour letters appears closer
emergent ray is anti-parallel to incident ray, if it suffers one h
(Because λv < λR so µ V > µ R and from µ = if µ increases
reflection from each whatever be the angle to incidence. h'
then h' decreases, i.e., Letter appears to be closer)

 Minimum distance between an object and it’s real image

formed by a convex lens is 4f.
 We observe number of images in a thick plane mirror, out  Component lenses of an achromatic doublet cemented by
of them only second is brightest.
canada blasam because it is transparent and has a refractive
Incident light (100%)
index almost equal to the refractive index of the glass.
10%  Parabolic mirrors are free from spherical aberration.
80% Brightest image  If a sphere of radius R made of material of refractive index
µ 2 is placed in a medium of refractive index µ1 , then if the
9%
 µ1 
object is placed at a distance   R from the pole, the

0.9%  µ 2 − µ1 
 To find the location of an object from an inclined plane real image formed is equidistant from the sphere
mirror, you have to see the perpendicular distance of the object
from the mirror.
I µ1 µ1

O I
M O P1 P2 I
M
µ2
Correct Wrong
O
OM = MI OM = MI x x
2x
 Images formed by mirrors do not show chromatic aberration.
 The lens doublets used in telescope are achromatic for blue
 If an object is moving at a speed vo towards a spherical and red colours, while these used in camera are achromatic for
mirror along it’s axis then speed of image away from mirror is violet and green colours. The reason for this is that our eye is
2 most sensitive between blue and red colours, while the
 f 
vi = −  .vo photographic plates are most sensitive between violet and green
u− f  colours.
Page 290 Compact Study Material Chapter 28 : Ray Optics

 Composite lens : If a lens is made of several materials  As magnifying power astronomical telescope is negative,
then the image seen in astronomical telescope is truly inverted, i.e.,
Number of images formed = Number of materials used left is turned right with upside down simultaneously. However,
Here no. of images = 5 as most of the astronomical objects are symmetrical this
µ1 inversion does not affect the observations.
µ2  If objective and eye lens of a telescope are interchanged, it
µ3 will not behave as a microscope but object appears very small.
µ4
 In a telescope, if field and eye lenses are interchanged
µ5
magnification will change from (fo / fe) to (fe / fo), i.e., it will
change from m to (1/m), i.e., will become (1/m2) times of its
 For the condition of grazing emergence through a prism initial value.
minimum angle of incidence imin = sin−1  µ 2 − 1 sinA − cosA .  As magnification produced by telescope for normal setting
 
is (fo / fe), so to have large magnification, fo must be as large as
 If a substance emits spectral lines at high temperature then practically possible and fe small. This is why in a telescope,
it absorbs the same lines at low temperature. This is kirchhoff’s
law. objective is of large focal length while eye piece of small.

 For a hollow prism A ≠ 0 but δ = 0  In a telescope, aperture of the field lens is made as large as
practically possible to increase its resolving power as resolving
power of a telescope ∝ (D/λ)*. Large aperture of objective also
helps in improving the brightness of image by gathering more
light from distant object. However, it increases aberrations
particularly spherical.
 If an opaque coloured object or crystal is crushed to fine  For a telescope with increase in length of the tube,
powder it will appear white (in sun light) as it will lose it's magnification decreases.
property of selective reflection.
 In case of a telescope if object and final image are at infinity
 Our eye is most sensitive to that part of the spectrum which fo D
then : m = =
lies between the F line (sky green) and the C-line (red) of fe d
hydrogen, and the mean refractive index of this part is nearly
equal to the refractive index for the D line (yellow) of sodium. D d
Hence for the dispersive power, the following formula is
internationally accepted
fo fe
µ F − µC
ω=
µD − 1
 If we are given four convex lenses having focal lengths
f1 > f2 > f3 > f4 . For making a good telescope and microscope
 Sometimes a part of prism is given and we keep on we choose the following lenses respectively:
thinking whether how should we proceed ? To solve such
Telescope f1(o), f4 (e)
problems first complete the prism then solve as the problems of
prism are solved Microscope f4 (o), f3 (e)
A
 If a parrot is sitting on the objective of a large telescope and
50o
we look towards (or take a photograph)of distant astronomical
object (say moon) through it, the parrot will not be seen but the
intensity of the image will be slightly reduced as the parrot will
⇒
act as obstruction to light and will reduce the aperture of the
60o 70o 60o 70o
C
objective.
B
 The luminous flux of a source of (1/685) watt emitting
 When we look distant objects, the eye is relaxed and it's monochromatic light of wavelength 5500 Å is called 1 lumen.
focal length is largest.
 While solving the problems of photometry keep in mind.
 Minimum separation (d) between objects, so they can just
R ∝ φ ∝ L (As φ = ηR = 4πL)
r
resolved by a telescope is : d =
R.P. R1 φ1 L
⇒ = = 1
Where r = distance of objects from telescope. R 2 φ 2 L2
Chapter 28 : Ray Optics Compact Study Material Page 291

Critical Questions 8. An object is placed at a distance u from a concave mirror

and its real image is received on a screen placed at a
1. When a plane mirror AB is placed horizontally on level distance of v from the mirror. If f is the focal length of the
ground at a distance of 60metres from the foot of a tower, mirror, then the graph between 1/v versus 1/u is
the top of the tower and its image in the mirror subtends, an
1 1
angle of 90° at B. The height of the tower is:
v v

(a) (b)

1 1
u u
1 1
A v v
B

(a) 30 metre (b) 60 metre

(c) (d)
(c) 90 metre (d) 120 metre
2. A point object is kept in front of a plane mirror. The plane
mirror is doing SHM of amplitude 2cm. The plane mirror 1 1
u u
moves along the x-axis and x-axis is normal to the mirror.
The amplitude of the mirror is such that the object is always 9. An infinitely long rod lies along the axis of a concave mirror
of focal length f. The near end of the rod is at a distance
infront of the mirror. The amplitude of SHM of the image is
u > f from the mirror. Its image will have a length
(a) Zero (b) 2 cm
(a) f 2 /(u − f ) (b) uf /(u − f )
(c) 4 cm (d) 1cm
2
(c) f /(u + f ) (d) uf /(u + f )
3. A watch shows the time as 3 : 25 . What will be the time that
10. A candle is kept at a distance equal to double the focal
appears when seen through a plane mirror
length from the pole of a convex mirror. Its magnification
(a) 8 : 35 (b) 9 : 35
will be:
(c) 7 : 35 (d) 8 : 25 (a) −1/3 (b) 1/3
4. A unnumbered wall clock shows time 04 : 25 : 37, where (c) 2/3 (d) −2/3
1st term represents hours, 2nd represents minutes & the last 11. A boy 2 m tall stands 40 cm in front of a mirror. He sees an
term represents seconds, What time will its image in a plane erect image, 1 m high. The mirror is:
mirror show (a) Concave, f = 40 cm (b) Convex, f = 40 cm
(a) 08 : 35 : 23 (b) 07 : 35 : 23
(c) Plane (d) Either convex or concave
(c) 07 : 34 : 23 (d) None of these 12. A concave mirror gives an image three times as large as the
5. A convex mirror has a focal length f. A real object, placed at object placed at a distance of 20cm from it. For the image to
a distance f in front of it from the pole, produces an image be real, the focal length should be:
at (a) 10cm (b) 15cm
(a) 2 f (b) f /2 (c) 20cm (d) 30cm
(c) f (d) ∞ 13. If an object is 30 cm away from a concave mirror of focal
6. A convex mirror has a focal length = 20cm. A convergent length 15 cm, the image will be
beam tending to converge to a point 20cm behind convex (a) Erect (b) Virtual
(c) Diminished (d) Of same size
mirror on principal axis falls on it. The image if formed at
14. What is the distance of a needle from a concave mirror of
(a) Infinity (b) 40cm
focal length 10 cm for which a virtual image of twice its
(c) 20cm (d) 10cm height is formed
7. The distance of an object from the focus of a convex mirror (a) 2.5 cm (b) 5 cm
of radius of curvature 'a' is 'b'. Then the distance of the (c) 8 cm (d) 9.1cm
image from the focus is:
15. A convex mirror has a focal length f . An object of height h
b2 a is placed in front of it. If an erect image of height h/n is
(a) (b)
4a b2 formed. The distance of the object from the mirror is:
a2 (a) n f (b) f /n
(c) (d) None
4b (c) (n + 1) f (d) (n − 1) f
Page 292 Compact Study Material Chapter 28 : Ray Optics

16. A concave mirror cannot form: 22. A point object at 15 cm from a concave mirror of radius of
(a) Virtual image of virtual object curvature 20 cm is made to oscillate along the principal axis
(b) Virtual image of a real object with amplitude 2 mm. The amplitude of its image will be
(c) Real image of a real object (a) 2mm (b) 4mm
(d) Real image of a virtual object
(c) 8mm (d) None
17. A real inverted image in a concave mirror is represented by
(u, v, f are coordinates) 23. A luminous point object is moving along the principal axis of
a concave mirror of focal length 12 cm towards it. When its
v/f v/f
distance from the mirror is 20 cm its velocity is
4cm/s. The velocity of the image in cm/s at that instant is
(a) 6, towards the mirror (b) 6, away from the mirror
+1 +1
(a) (b) (c) 9, away from the mirror (d) 9, towards the mirror
+1 u/f +1 u/f
24. A particle is moving towards a fixed spherical mirror. The
image
v/f v/f (a) Must move away from the mirror
(b) Must move towards the mirror
+1 (c) May move towards the mirror
(d) Will move towards the mirror, only if the mirror is
+1
(c) u/f (d) u/f convex
25. The x-z plane separates two media A and B with refractive
indices µ1 and µ 2 respectively. A ray of light travels from A
18. Which one of the following statements are incorrect for and B. Its directions in the two media are given by the unit
spherical mirrors  
vectors, rA = aiˆ + bjˆ and rB = α ˆi + β ˆj respectively where
(a) A concave mirror forms only virtual images for any
ˆi and ˆj are unit vectors in the x and y direction. Then
position of real object
(b) A convex mirror forms only virtual images for any (a) µ1a = µ 2α (b) µ1α = µ 2a
position of a real object
(c) µ1b = µ 2β (d) µ1 B = µ 2b
(c) A convex mirror forms only a virtual diminished image
of an object placed between its pole and the focus 26. A ray of light passes through a plane glass slab of thickness t
(d) A concave mirror forms a virtual magnified image of an and refractive index µ = 1.5. The angle between incident ray
object placed between its pole and the focus and emergent ray will be
19. The distance of an object from a spherical mirror is equal to (a) 0° (b) 30°
focal length of the mirror. Then the image: (c) 45° (d) 60°
(a) Must be at infinity (b) May be at infinity 27. A ray of light moving along the unit vector (−i − 2 j)
(c) May be at the focus (d) None undergoes refraction at an interface of two media, which is
20. The largest distance of the image of a real object from a the x-z plane. The refractive index for y > 0 is 2 while for
convex mirror of focal length 20 cm can be:
y < 0, it is 5 /2. . The unit vector along which the refracted
(a) 20cm
ray moves is:
(b) Infinite
(−3ˆi − 5 ˆj ) (−4ˆi − 3ˆj )
(c) 10cm (a) (b)
34 5
(d) Depends on the position of the object
21. In the figure shown, the image of a real object is formed at (−3ˆi − 4 ˆj )
(c) (d) None of these
point I. AB is the principal axis of the mirror. The mirror 5
must be: 28. How much water should be filled in a container of 21 cm in
O
height, so that it appears half filled (of total height of the
d1 container) when viewed from the top of the container?
A
(Assume near normal incidence and µ w = 4 / 3 )
B
(a) 8.0 cm (b) 10.5cm
d2> d1
(c) 12.0cm (d) 14.0cm
I 29. A mark at the bottom of a beaker containing liquid appears
(a) Concave and placed towards right I to rise by 0.1m. The depth of the liquid is 1m. the
(b) Concave and placed towards left of I refractive index of liquid is:
(c) Convex and placed towards right of I (a) 1.33 (b) 9/10
(d) Convex and placed towards left of I (c) 10/9 (d) 1.5
Chapter 28 : Ray Optics Compact Study Material Page 293

30. A parallel sided block of glass of refractive index 1.5 which is 35. A fish looking up through the water sees the outside world
36 mm thick rests on the floor of a tank which is filled with contained in a circular horizon. If the refractive index of
water (refractive index = 4/3.) The difference between water is 4/3 and fish is 12 cm below the surface, the radius
apparent depth of floor at A and B when seen from of the circle in cm is
vertically above is equal to (a) 12 × 3 × 5 (b) 4 × 5
(c) 12 × 3 × 7 (d) 12 × 3/ 7
36. A ray of monochromatic light is incident on one refracting
face of a prism of angle 75°. It passes through the prism and
is incident on the other face at the critical angle. If the
refractive index of the material of the prism is 2, the angle
of incidence on the first face of the prism is
(a) 30° (b) 45°
A B
(c) 60° (d) 0°
(a) 2mm (b) 3mm 37. A prism having refractive index 2 and refracting
(c) 4mm (d) None angle 30°, has one of the refracting surface polished.
A beam of light incident on the other refracting surface will
31. An underwater swimmer is at a depth of 12 m below the
retrace its path if the angle of incidence is:
surface of water. A bird is at a height of 18 m from the
(a) 0° (b) 30°
surface of water, directly above his eyes. For the swimmer,
(c) 45° (d) 60°
the bird appears to be at a distance X from the surface of
38. A ray of light is incident at angle i on a surface of a prism
water. (Refractive index of water is 4/3.) The value of X is
of small angle A and emerges normally from the opposite
(a) 24 m (b) 12m
surface. If the refractive index of the material of the prism
(c) 18 m (d) 9m is µ , the angle of incidence i is nearly equal to:
32. A concave mirror is placed on a horizontal table, with its axis A A
(a) (b)
directed vertically upwards. Let O be the pole of the mirror µ (2 µ )
and C its centre of curvature. A point object is placed at C. A
(c) µA (d) µ
Its has a real image, also located at C (a condition called 2
auto-collimation). If the mirror is now filled with water, the 39. A triangular prism of glass is shown in figure. A ray incident
image will be: normally on one face is totally reflected. If θ is 45°, the
(a) Real, and will remain at C index of refraction of glass is:
(b) Real, and located at a point between C and ∞
(c) Virtual, and located at a point between C and O I
(d) Real, and located at a point between C and O A B
33. A bird is flying 3 m above the surface of water. If the bird is
diving vertically down with speed = 6 m/s, his apparent
θ
velocity as seen by a stationary fish underwater is O

(a) 8 m/s (b) 6 m/s

(c) 12 m/s (d) 4 m/s C
34. A beam of light is converging towards a point. A plane
(a) Less than 2 (b) Equal to 2
parallel plate of glass of thickness t refractive index µ is
introduced in the path of the beam. The convergent point is (c) Greater than 2 (d) None of the above
shifted by (assume near normal incidence): 40. The image for the converging beam after refraction through
the curved surface is formed at:
 1 µ
(a) t  1 −  away n=1
 µ
(a) x = 40 cm
 1 40 n = 3/2
(b) t  1 +  away (b) x = cm
 µ 3
O
 1 40
(c) t  1 −  nearer (c) x=− cm O P x
3
 µ
180
 1 (d) x = cm 30
(d) t  1 +  nearer 7
R = 20 cm
 µ
t
Page 294 Compact Study Material Chapter 28 : Ray Optics

41. A planoconcave lens is placed on a paper on which a flower 46. For the situation as shown in the figure, find the velocity of
is drawn. How far above its actual position does the flower image formed by the mirror
appear to be
Radius of curvature = 20 cm 2 cms−1 R = 20 cm
f = 20 cm

air

3 P 6 cms−1 4 cms−1
µ=
t = 20 cm 2

Paper 30 cm 80 cm

(a) 10cm (b) 15cm

(a) 10 cms −1 in the direction of velocity of lens
(c) 50cm (d) None
42. A concave spherical surface of radius of curvature 10 cm (b) 10 cms −1 in the opposite direction of velocity of lens
separates two medium x and y of refractive index 4/3 (c) Zero
and 3/2 respectively. If the object is placed along principal
axis in medium X, then (d) 20 cms −1 in the direction of velocity of object
47. In the situation as shown in the figure, the focal length of the
thin plane concave lens is 20 cm. A point object P is at
X Y
distance of 20 cm from the lens. Find the velocity of image
formed by plane mirror at the instant as shown in the figure.

(a) Image is always real 10 cms−1

Y
(b) Image is real if the object distance is greater than 90 cm
(c) Image is always virtual
(d) Image is virtual if the object distance is less than 90 cm 37° X’ X
43. A spherical surface of radius of curvature 10 cm separates P
two media X and Y of refractive indices 3/2 and 4/3 1 cms−1 Y’
respectively. Centre of the spherical surface lies in denser
medium. An object is placed in medium X. For image to be
real, the object distance must be (a) (−2ˆi − 3ˆj ) cms −1 (b) (−3ˆj ) cms −1
(a) Greater than 90 cm (b) Less than 90 cm
(c) Greater than 80 cm (d) Less than 80 cm (c) (−2ˆi + 3ˆj ) cms −1 (d) 3 ˆj cms −1
44. When an object is at distance 10 cm and 30 cm from a thin
48. The converging point of incident beam is at the 20 cm from
converging lens, virtual and real image of same size are
concave lens as shown in the figure are. The concave lens
formed. The power of lens is
(a) 2D (b) 4 D then moved away from convex lens with speed 1 cms −1. The

(c) 5 D (d) 10 D emergent ray from convex lens is (……)

45. At the mouth of a cylindrical vessel, a plane convex lens of
refractive index 1.5 and radius of curvature of curved f1 =−20 cm
surface 30 cm is filled. A point source S is at the bottom of
vessel. The height of vessel is 40 cm and filled with liquid of
refractive index 1.2. Find the position of image.

f2 =20 cm
1 cms−1
10 cm

S
(a) The image is 37.5 cm below the lens (a) Always converging at a single point
(b) The image is 56.25 cm below the lens (b) Always diverging in nature
(c) The image is real (c) First converging then diverging
(d) The image is 30 cm below the lens (d) First diverging then converging
Chapter 28 : Ray Optics Compact Study Material Page 295

49. Four identical thin prisms are combined as shown in figure. 53. The critical angle for glass-water interface is
A beam of white light incident on first prism. (a) Same on air-water interface
 4 3
(b) Lesser than air-glass interface  µw = , µ g = 
θ  3 2
(c) Greater than air glass interface
Mark the correct option (d) Same for red and blue colour
(a) The net deviation is zero
(b) Angular dispersion may be non-zero 54. Secondary rainbow is formed when light rays coming from
(c) The net deviation may be non-zero the sun undergo
(d) All of these (a) Refraction, internal reflection and then refraction
50. Two thin prims each of angle of prism 5° and refractive
(b) Only refraction
index 1.5 are combined base to base as shown in the figure.
Find separation between images formed due to refraction (c) Refraction, two internal reflections and then refraction
through prisms. (d) Only internal reflections
o
 14 
55. The refracting angle of prims is   and refractive index
5°  11 
is 1.5. A thin convex lens of focal length 20 cm is placed at
S distance 30 cm from the point source S as shown in figure.
5° The position of image of point source S is

30cm
50.4 cm f = 20cm
(a) 2.2cm (b) 4.4 cm A
(c) 6.6 cm (d) 8.2cm
51. A thin equiconvex lens of refractive index 1.5 and radius of X’ X
µ = 1.5
curvature of each surface 20 cm is fitted in a vessel whose
bottom is spherical of radius 20 cm. Find the distance of 15cm
image of point object P from bottom.

20 cm R2 = 20 cm
1
(a) cm above the X-axis
3
µ=2 R = 20 cm
1.5 1
P (b) cm below the X-axis
3
2
(c) cm below the X-axis
3
12 cm
R1 = 20 cm 2
(d) cm above the X-axis
(a) 12cm (b) 30cm 3
(c) 24 cm (d) 40cm 56. The radius of concave surface is 20 cm and radius of convex
52. The two halves of a thin lens of focal length 20 cm are surface is 10 cm. The refractive index of material of lens is
symmetrically separated by 6 mm. Find the separation 1.5. If image of point object P coincides with it. Find the
between images formed by two halves.
distance between object and lens.

3 mm

S P
3 mm

30 cm

(a) 12mm (b) 18 mm (a) 4 cm (b) 8 cm

(c) 21mm (d) 10mm (c) 12cm (d) 16cm

Page 296 Compact Study Material Chapter 28 : Ray Optics

57. A point object P is approaching towards a thin and silvered Past Year Questions
equiconvex lens of focal length 20 cm and refractive index
1. To get three images of a single object, one should have two
1.5 with a speed of 2cms −1 as shown in figure. plane mirrors at an angle of [AIEEE 2003]
(a) 30° (b) 60°
(c) 90° (d) 150°
2. Two plane mirrors A and B are aligned parallel to each
P other, as shown in the figure. A light ray is incident at an
angle of 30° at a point just inside one end of A. The plane
of incidence coincides with the plane of the figure. The
maximum number of times the ray undergoes reflections
Find the speed of image when object is either away or (including the first one) before it emerges out is
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002]
towards the lens.
(a) 28 2 3m
(a) 1cms −1 away from lens
(b) 30 B
(b) 2cms −1 towards the lens (c) 32 0.2m
30o
−1
(c) 1cms towards the lens (d) 34
A
(d) 4 cms −1 away from lens 3. Two plane mirrors are inclined to each other such that a ray
58. A beam of light incident on face AB of a equilateral prism of of light incident on the first mirror (M 1 ) and parallel to the
refractive index 1.5 as shown in the figure. second mirror (M 2 ) is finally reflected from the second
mirror (M 2 ) parallel to the first mirror (M 1 ) . The angle
C
between the two mirrors will be [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 75° (b) 90°
(c) 45° (d) 60°
4. A point source of light S is placed at a distance L in front of
the centre of plane mirror of width d which is hanging
vertically on a wall. A man walks in front of the mirror along
a line parallel to the mirror, at a distance 2 L as shown
B below. The distance over which the man can see the image
A
of the light source in the mirror is [JEE (Main) 2019]

(a) d
(b) 3d d
(a) The beam will emerge from face AB d
(c)
2 L
(b) The beam will emerge from side BC
(d) 2d 2L
(c) The beam will emerge from face AC
5. In an experiment to determine the focal length (f ) of a
(d) The beam will not emerge
concave mirror by the u − v method, a student places the
59. A point object P is placed at 180 cm from a thin converging
object pin A on the principal axis at a distance x from the
lens of focal length 90 cm. The lens then starts rotating pole P. The student looks at the pin and its inverted image
1 from a distance keeping his/her eye in line with PA . When
about optical centre with constant angular velocity rads −1
π the student shifts his/her eye towards left, the image appears
in anti-clockwise direction. The speed of the image of point to the right of the object pin. Then [IIT-JEE 2007]
object P if the lens is rotate through 1°. (a) x < f (b) f < x < 2f
(c) x = 2f (d) x > 2f
6. A car is fitted with a convex side-view mirror of focal length
20cm. A second car 2.8m behind the first car is overtaking
P the first car at a relative speed of 15m/s. The speed of the
O
image of the second car as seen in the mirror of the first one
is [AIEEE 2011]
1 1
(a) 1cms −1 (b) 2cms −1 (a) m/s (b) m/s
10 15
(c) 3 cms −1 (d) 4 cms −1 (c) 10 m / s (d) 15 m / s
Chapter 28 : Ray Optics Compact Study Material Page 297

7. A concave mirror for face viewing has focal length of 0.4 m. 12. A container is filled with water (µ = 1.33) upto a height of
33.25 cm. A concave mirror is placed 15 cm above the
The distance at which you hold the mirror from your face in
water level and the image of an object placed at the bottom
order to see your image upright with a magnification of 5 is
is formed 25 cm below the water level. The focal length of
[JEE (Main) 2019] the mirror is [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2005]
(a) 0.24 m (b) 0.16 m (a) 10
(c) 0.32 m (d) 1.60 m 15 cm
(b) 15
8. When light is refracted from air into glass
(c) 20 25 cm
[IIT 1980] 33.25 cm =1.33
(a) Its wavelength and frequency both increase (d) −18.31
(b) Its wavelength increases but frequency remains
13. A ray of light passes through four transparent media with
unchanged
refractive indices µ1 , µ 2 , µ 3 and µ 4 as shown in the figure.
(c) Its wavelength decreases but frequency remains
The surfaces of all media are parallel. If the emergent ray
unchanged CD is parallel to the incident ray AB, we must have
(d) Its wavelength and frequency both decrease [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001]
(a) µ1 = µ 2
9. Let the x-z plane be the boundary between two transparent D
(b) µ 2 = µ3 µ1 µ2 µ3
media. Medium 1 in z ≥ 0 has refractive index of 2 and µ4
(c) µ 3 = µ4 B C
medium 2 with z < 0 has a refractive index of 3 . A ray of
light in medium 1 given by the vector (d) µ 4 = µ1 A

ˆ ˆ ˆ
A = 6 3i + 8 3 j − 10k incident on the plane of 14. A diverging beam of light from a point source S having
divergence angle α, falls symmetrically on a glass slab as
separation. The angle of refraction in medium 2 is
shown. The angles of incidence of the two extreme rays are
[AIEEE 2011] equal. If the thickness of the glass slab is t and the refractive
(a) 30º (b) 45º index n, then the divergence angle of the emergent beam is
S [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000]
(c) 60º (d) 75º
10. A ray of light is incident at the glass–water interface at an α
angle i, it emerges finally parallel to the surface of water,
i i
then the value of ng would be [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003]

n t

Water r nw = 4/3
(a) Zero (b) α
r (c) −1
sin (1 / n) (d) 2 sin −1 (1 / n)
15. Consider a tank made of glass (refractive index 1.5) with a
Glass
i thick bottom. It is filled with a liquid of refractive index µ . A
student finds that, irrespective of what the incident angle i
(see figure) is for a beam of light entering the liquid, the light
reflected from the liquid glass interface is never completely
(a) (4/3) sin i (b) 1/sin i
polarized. For this to happen, the minimum value of µ is
(c) 4/3 (d) 1
[JEE (Main) 2019]
11. A ball is dropped from a height of 20 m above the surface of
water in a lake. The refractive index of water is 4/3. A fish
inside the lake, in the line of fall of the ball, is looking at the
ball. At an instant, when the ball is 12.8 m above the water n = 1.5
2
surface, the fish sees the speed of ball as [ g = 10m/s ]
5 4
(a) (b)
[IIT-JEE 2009] 3 3
(a) 9 m/s (b) 12 m/s 3 5
(c) (d)
(c) 16 m/s (d) 21.33 m/s 5 3
Page 298 Compact Study Material Chapter 28 : Ray Optics

16. A ray of light AO in vacuum is incident on a glass slab at 20. A light ray travelling in glass medium is incident on glass-air
angle 60° and refracted at angle 30° along OB as shown interface at an angle of incidence θ. The reflected (R) and
in the figure. The optical path length of light ray from A to transmitted (T) intensities, both as function of θ, are plotted.
B is The correct sketch is [IIT-JEE 2011]

A 100% 100%
T
T

Intensity

Intensity
a 60° (a) (b)
O Vacuum
R R
Glass
b 30° 0 θ 90º 0 θ 90º
B
100% 100%
[JEE (Main) 2019] T T

Intensity
Intensity
(c) (d)
2b 2 3
(a) 2a + (b) + 2b R R
3 a
2b 0 θ 90º 0 θ 90º
(c) 2a + 2b (d) 2a +
3 21. A transparent solid cylindrical rod has a refractive index of
2
17. A concave mirror has radius of curvature of 40 cm . It is at . It is surrounded by air. A light ray is incident at the
3
the bottom of a glass that has water filled up to 5 cm (see
mid-point of one end of the rod as shown in the figure
figure). If a small particle is floating on the surface of water,
its image as seen, from directly above the glass, is at a
θ
distance d from the surface of water. The value of d is close
to (Refractive index of water = 1.33)
The incident angle θ for which the light ray grazes along the
particle wall of the rod is [AIEEE 2009]

(a) sin −1 (1 / 2) (b) sin−1 ( 3 / 2)

5 cm
(c) sin−1 (2 / 3 ) (d) sin −1(1 / 3 )
22. A light beam is travelling from Region I to Region IV (Refer
Figure). The refractive index in Regions I, II, III and IV are
[JEE (Main) 2019] n n n
n0 , 0 , 0 and 0 , respectively. The angle of incidence θ
(a) 11.7 cm (b) 6.7 cm 2 6 8
for which the beam just misses entering Region IV is
(c) 8.8 cm (d) 13.4 cm
[IIT-JEE 2008]
Region I Region II Region III Region IV
18. Consider telecommunication through optical fibres. Which
of the following statements is not true [AIEEE 2003]
θ n0 n0 n0
(a) Optical fibres may have homogeneous core with a 2 6 8
n0
suitable cladding
θ 0.2m 0.6m
(b) Optical fibres can be of graded refractive index
(c) Optical fibres are subject to electromagnetic interference 3 1
(a) sin −1   (b) sin −1  
from outside 4 8
(d) Optical fibres have extremely low transmission loss 1 1
(c) sin −1   (d) sin −1  
19. White light is incident on the interface of glass and air as 4  3
shown in the figure. If green light is just totally internally 23. A ray of light travelling in water is incident on its surface
reflected then the emerging ray in air contains open to air. The angle of incidence is θ, which is less than
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004] the critical angle. Then there will be [IIT-JEE 2007]
(a) Only a reflected ray and no refracted ray
(a) Yellow, orange, red
(b) Only a refracted ray and no reflected ray
(b) Violet, indigo, blue Air Green (c) A reflected ray and a refracted ray and the angle
(c) All colours Glass between them would be less than 180o − 2θ
(d) All colours except green White
(d) A reflected ray and a refracted ray and the angle
between them would be greater than 180°− 2θ
Chapter 28 : Ray Optics Compact Study Material Page 299

24. A green light is incident from the water to the air – water 28. In figure, the optical fiber is l = 2 m long and has a diameter
interface at the critical angle (θ ). Select the correct of d = 20 µ m. If a ray of light is incident on one end of the
statement [JEE (Main) 2014]
fiber at angle θ1 = 40° , the number of reflections it makes
(a) The entire spectrum of visible light will come out of the
water at an angle of 90º to the normal before emerging from the other end is close to

(b) The spectrum of visible light whose frequency is less (refractive index of fiber is 1.31 and sin 40° = 0.64)
than that of green light will come out of the air medium
(c) The spectrum of visible light whose frequency is more
than that of green light will come out to the air medium
(d) The entire spectrum of visible light will come out of the d
θ2
water at various angles to the normal
40°
25. On a hot summer night, the refractive index of air is smallest
near the ground and increases with height from the ground.
When a light beam is directed horizontally, the Huygens’
[JEE (Main) 2019]
principle leads us to conclude that as it travels, the light
(a) 66000 (b) 45000
beam [JEE (Main) 2015]
(c) 57000 (d) 55000
(a) Becomes narrower
(b) Goes horizontally without any deflection 29. A transparent cube of side d made of a material of
refractive index µ 2 is immersed in a liquid of refractive
(c) Bends downward
(d) Bends upward index µ1 (µ1 < µ 2 ) . A ray is incident on the face AB at an
26. A point source S is placed at the bottom of a transparent angle θ (shown in the figure). Total internal reflection takes
block of height 10 mm and refractive index 2.72. It is place E on the face BC .
immersed in a lower refractive index liquid as shown in the
E
figure. It is found that the light emerging from the block to B C
the liquid forms a circular bright spot of diameter 11.54 mm
on the top of the block. The refractive index of the liquid is θ
µ2
[JEE 2014] µ1
Liquid
A D
[JEE (Main) 2019]

Block Then θ must satisfy

S µ 22 µ 22
(a) 1.21 (b) 1.30 (a) θ < sin −1 −1 (b) θ > sin −1 −1
µ12 µ12
(c) 1.36 (d) 1.42
27. A rectangular glass slab ABCD, of refractive index n1, is
µ1 µ1
(c) θ < sin −1 (d) θ > sin −1
immersed in water of refractive index n2 (n1>n2). A ray of µ2 µ2
light is incident at the surface AB of the slab as shown. The 30. The image of an object, formed by a plano-convex lens at a
maximum value of the angle of incidence αmax, such that the distance of 8 m behind the lens, is real and is one-third the
ray comes out only from the other surface CD is given by size of the object. The wavelength of light inside the lens is
[IIT-JEE 2000]
A D 2
times the wavelength in free space. The radius of the
3
αmax n1 n2
curved surface of the lens is [JEE 2013]
B C (a) 1 m (b) 2 m

n (c) 3 m (d) 6 m
 n 
(a) sin −1  1 cos  sin −1 2  
n n1   31. A concave lens of glass, refractive index 1.5, has both
 2 
surfaces of same radius of curvature R. On immersion in a
  1 
(b) sin −1 n1 cos sin −1  medium of refractive index 1.75, it will behave as a
n 
  2  [IIT-JEE 1999]
n  (a) Convergent lens of focal length 3.5 R
(c) sin −1  1 

 n2  (b) Convergent lens of focal length 3.0 R
n  (c) Divergent lens of focal length 3.5 R
(d) sin −1  2 

 n1  (d) Divergent lens of focal length 3.0 R
Page 300 Compact Study Material Chapter 28 : Ray Optics

 3 37. An object 2.4 m in front of a lens forms a sharp image on a

32. A thin convex lens made from crown glass  µ =  has
 2 film 12 cm behind the lens. A glass plate 1cm thick, of
focal length f. When it is measured in two different liquids refractive index 1.50 is interposed between lens and film
4 5 with its plane faces parallel to film. At what distance (from
having refractive indices and , it has the focal length lens) should object shifted to be in sharp focus on film
3 3
f1 and f2 respectively. The correct relation between the [AIEEE 2012]
(a) 7.2m (b) 2.4m
focal length is [JEE (Mains) 2014]
(c) 3.2m (d) 5.6m
(a) f1 = f2 < f
38. A point object is placed at the center of a glass sphere of
(b) f1 > f and f2 becomes negative radius 6 cm and refractive index 1.5. The distance of the
(c) f2 > f and f1 becomes negative virtual image from the surface of the sphere is
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004]
(d) f1 and f2 both become negative
(a) 2 cm (b) 4 cm
33. A hollow double concave lens is made of very thin
(c) 6 cm (d) 12 cm
transparent material. It can be filled with air or either of two
39. A bi-convex lens of focal length f forms a circular image of
liquids L1 and L2 having refractive indices n1 and n2
respectively (n2>n1>1). The lens will diverge a parallel sun of radius r in focal plane. Then [IIT-JEE 2006]
2
beam of light if it is filled with [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000] (a) π r ∝ f
(a) Air and placed in air (b) Air and immersed in L1
(b) π r 2 ∝ f 2
(c) L1 and immersed in L2 (d) L2 and immersed in L1
(c) If lower half part is covered by black sheet, then area of
34. Diameter of a plano–convex lens is 6 cm and thickness at
the centre is 3 mm. If the speed of light in the material of the π r2
the image is equal to
lens is 2 × 108 m/s, the focal length of the lens is 2
[CPMT 1989; JEE (Main) 2013] (d) If f is doubled, intensity will increase
(a) 15 cm (b) 20 cm 40. Graph of position of image vs. position of point object from
(c) 30 cm (d) 10 cm a convex lens is shown. Then, focal length of the lens is
35. A student measures the focal length of a convex lens by 31 [IIT-JEE 2006]
v cm
putting an object pin at a distance 'u' from the lens and 30
measuring the distance 'v' of the image pin. The graph
between 'u' and 'v' plotted by the student should look like 10

[AIEEE 2008]
u cm -31 -30 -20 -10 0
v (cm) v (cm)

(a) (b) (a) 0.50 ± 0.05 cm (b) 0.50 ± 0.10 cm

u (cm) O u (cm) (c) 5.00 ± 0.05 cm (d) 5.00 ± 0.10 cm

O
41. A converging lens is used to form an image on a screen.
v (cm) v (cm) When upper half of the lens is covered by an opaque screen
[IIT-JEE 1986]
(c) (d)
(a) Half the image will disappear
O u (cm) O u (cm) (b) Complete image will be formed of same intensity
(c) Half image will be formed of same intensity
36. In an optics experiment, with the position of the object fixed,
(d) Complete image will be formed of decreased intensity
a student varies the position of a convex lens and for each
position, the screen is adjusted to get a clear image of the 42. A convex lens of focal length 40 cm is in contact with a
object. A graph between the object distance u and the image concave lens of focal length 25 cm. The power of
distance v, from the lens, is plotted using the same scale for combination is [IIT-JEE 1982]
the two axes. A straight line passing through the origin and (a) – 1.5 D (b) – 6.5 D
making an angle of 45° with the x-axis meets the (c) + 6.5 D (d) + 6.67 D
experimental curve at P. The coordinates of P will be 43. Two lenses of power +12 and – 2 dioptres are placed in
[AIEEE 2009]
contact. What will the focal length of combination
f f [AIEEE 2007]
(a) (2 f , 2 f ) (b)  , 
 2 2 (a) 10 cm (b) 12.5 cm
(c) ( f , f ) (d) (4 f , 4 f ) (c) 16.6 cm (d) 8.33 cm
Chapter 28 : Ray Optics Compact Study Material Page 301

44. A bi-convex lens is formed with two thin plano-convex 50. A convex lens A of focal length 20 cm and a concave lens B
lenses as shown in the figure. Refractive index n of the first of focal length 5 cm are kept along the same axis with the
lens is 1.5 and that of the second lens is 1.2. Both the distance d between them. If a parallel beam of light falling
curved surfaces are of the same radius of curvature on A leaves B as a parallel beam, then distance d in cm will
R = 14 cm. For this bi-convex lens, for an object distance of be [IIT-JEE 1985]

40 cm, the image distance will be (a) 25 (b) 15

(c) 30 (d) 50
n = 1.5 [IIT-JEE 2012]
n = 1.2 51. The size of the image of an object, which is at infinity, as
formed by a convex lens of focal length 30cm is 2 cm. If a
concave lens of focal length 20 cm is placed between the
convex lens and the image at a distance of 26 cm from the
convex lens, calculate the new size of the image
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003]
(a) 1.25 cm (b) 2.5 cm
R = 14 cm (c) 1.05 cm (d) 2 cm
(a) −280 .0 cm (b) 40 .0 cm 52. A point object is placed at a distance of 20 cm from a thin
(c) 21 .5 cm (d) 13.3 cm plano-convex lens of focal length 15 cm , if the plane
surface is silvered. The image will form at [IIT-JEE 2006]
45. A convex lens is in contact with concave lens. The
A
magnitude of the ratio of their focal length is 2/3. Their
15 cm
equivalent focal length is 30 cm. What are their individual
(a) 60 cm left of AB
focal lengths [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2005]
(a) –75, 50 (b) – 10, 15 (b) 30 cm left of AB O L
20 cm
(c) 75, 50 (d) 10, –15 (c) 12 cm left of AB
46. A diminished image of an object is to be obtained on a
screen 1.0 m from it. This can be achieved by appropriately (d) 60 cm right of AB B

placing [IIT-JEE 1995] 53. A spherical surface of radius of curvature R separates air
(a) A convex mirror of suitable focal length (refractive index 1.0) from glass (refractive index 1.5). The
(b) A concave mirror of suitable focal length centre of curvature is in the glass. A point object P placed in
(c) A concave lens of suitable focal length air is found to have a real image Q in the glass. The line PQ
(d) A convex lens of suitable focal length less than 0.25 m cuts the surface at a point O, and PO = OQ. The distance
47. A plano-convex lens of refractive index 1.5 and radius of PO is equal to [IIT-JEE 1998]
curvature 30 cm is silvered at the curved surface. Now this (a) 5 R (b) 3 R
lens has been used to form the image of an object. At what (c) 2 R (d) 1.5 R
distance from this lens an object be placed in order to have
54. Two identical glass rods S1 and S2 (refractive index = 1.5)
a real image of the size of the object [AIEEE 2004]
have one convex end of radius of curvature 10cm. They are
(a) 20 cm (b) 30 cm
placed with the curved surfaces at a distance d as shown in
(c) 60 cm (d) 80 cm the figure, with their axes (shown by the dashed line)
48. A biconvex lens of focal length 15 cm is in front of a plane aligned. When a point source of light P is placed inside rod
mirror. The distance between the lens and the mirror is S1 on its axis at a distance of 50 cm from the curved face,
10 cm. A small object is kept at a distance of 30 cm from the the light rays emanating from it are found to be parallel to
lens. The final image is [IIT-JEE 2010] the axis inside S 2 . The distance d is [JEE 2015]
(a) Virtual and at a distance of 16 cm from mirror
S1 P S2
(b) Real and at distance of 16 cm from the mirror
50cm d
(c) Virtual and at a distance of 20 cm from the mirror
(d) Real and at a distance of 20 cm from the mirror (a) 60 cm (b) 70 cm
49. A concave mirror is placed on a horizontal table with its axis (c) 80 cm (d) 90 cm
directed vertically upwards. Let O be the pole of the mirror 55. A diverging lens with magnitude of focal length 25 cm is
and C its centre of curvature. A point object is placed at C. placed at a distance of 15 cm from a converging lens of
It has a real image, also located at C. If the mirror is now magnitude of focal length 20 cm. A beam of parallel light
filled with water, the image will be [IIT-JEE 1998] falls on the diverging lens. The final image formed is
(a) Real, and will remain at C [JEE (Main) 2017]
(a) Real and at a distance of 6 cm from the convergent lens
(b) Real, and located at a point between C and ∞
(b) Real and at a distance of 40 cm from convergent lens
(c) Virtual and located at a point between C and O
(c) Virtual and at a distance of 40 cm from convergent lens
(d) Real, and located at a point between C and O (d) Real and at distance of 40 cm from the divergent lens
Page 302 Compact Study Material Chapter 28 : Ray Optics

56. A convex lens is put 10 cm from a light source and it makes 61. A plano-convex lens (focal length f2 , refractive index µ 2 ,
a sharp image on a screen, kept 10 cm from the lens. Now a radius of curvature R ) fits exactly into a plano-concave lens
glass block (refractive index 1.5) of 1.5 cm thickness is (focal length f1 , refractive index µ1 , radius of curvature R) .
placed in contact with the light source. To get the sharp
Their plane surfaces are parallel to each other. Then, the
image again, the screen is shifted by a distance d. Then d is
focal length of the combination will be [JEE (Main) 2019]
[JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 1.1 cm away from the lens R
(a) (b) f1 − f2
µ 2 − µ1
(b) 0.55 cm away from the lens
2 f1 f2
(c) 0.55 cm towards the lens (c) (d) f1 + f2
f1 + f2
(d) 0
62. An upright object is placed at a distance of 40 cm in front of
57. A plano-convex lens of refractive index µ1 and focal length
a convergent lens of focal length 20 cm . A convergent
f1 is kept in contact with another plano-concave lens of
mirror of focal length 10 cm is placed at a distance of
refractive index µ 2 and focal length f2 . If the radius of
60 cm on the other side of the lens. The position and size of
curvature of their spherical faces is R each and f1 = 2 f2 ,
the final image will be [JEE (Main) 2019]
then µ1 and µ 2 are related as [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 40 cm from the convergent lens, same size of the object
(a) 2µ1 − µ 2 = 1 (b) µ1 + µ 2 = 3
(b) 20 cm from the convergent mirror, same size as the
(c) 3 µ 2 − 2µ1 = 1 (d) 2µ 2 − µ1 = 1 object
58. An object is at a distance of 20m from a convex lens of (c) 40 cm from the convergent mirror, same size as the
focal length 0.3m . The lens forms an image of the object. If object
the object moves away from the lens at a speed of 5m / s , (d) 20 cm from the convergent mirror, twice the size of the
the speed and direction of the image will be
object
[JEE (Main) 2019]
63. A convex lens (of focal length 20 cm) and a concave mirror,
(a) 0.92 × 10 −3 m / s away from the lens
having their principal axes along the same lines, are kept
(b) 3.22 × 10 −3 m / s towards the lens 80 cm apart form each other. The concave mirror is to the
(c) 1.16 × 10 −3 m / s towards the lens right of the convex lens. When an object is kept at a distance
(d) 2.26 × 10 −3 m / s away from the lens of 30 cm to the left of the convex lens, its image remains at
59. What is the position and nature of image formed by lens the same position even if the concave mirror is removed.
combination shown in figure The maximum distance of the object for which this concave
( f1 , f2 are focal lengths) [JEE (Main) 2019] mirror, by itself would produce a virtual image would be
[JEE (Main) 2019]
2cm
(a) 10 cm (b) 20 cm
O (c) 25 cm (d) 30 cm
A B
64. A convex lens of focal length 20 cm produces images of the
same magnification 2 when an object is kept at two
20cm distances x 1 and x 2 ( x1 > x 2 ) from the lens. The ratio of
f1=+5cm f2=–5cm x 1 and x 2 is [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 4 : 3 (b) 2 : 1
(a) 70 cm from point B at left; virtual
(c) 5 : 3 (d) 3 : 1
(b) 70 cm from point B at right, real 65. A thin convex lens L (refractive index = 1.5) is placed on a
(c) 40 cm from point B at right; real plane mirror M . When a pin is
A'
20 placed at A, such that
(d) cm from point B at right, real OA = 18 cm , its real inverted
3 A
image is formed at A itself, as
60. Formation of real image using a biconvex lens is shown
shown in figure. When a liquid of
below :
screen refractive index µ l is put between
2f the lens and the mirror, the pin has L
to be moved to A' , such that M
2f f f
OA ' = 27 cm, to get its inverted O

real image at A' itself. The value of µ l will be

If the whole set up is immersed in water without disturbing [JEE (Main) 2019]
the object and the screen positions, what will one observe 4
on the screen [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) (b) 2
3
(a) Erect real image (b) No change 3
(c) 3 (d)
(c) Image disappears (d) Magnified image 2
Chapter 28 : Ray Optics Compact Study Material Page 303

66. One plano-convex and one plano-concave lens of same 71. A graph is plotted between angle of deviation (δ) and angle
radius of curvature R but of different materials are joined of incidence (i) for a prism. The nearly correct graph is
side by side as shown in the figure. If the refractive index of [Similar JEE (Main) 2013]
the material of 1 is µ 1 and that of 2 is µ 2 then the focal y y
length of the combination is
δ δ
µ2 (a) (b)
1
µ1 2
[JEE (Main) 2019] O x O x
i i
R 2R y y
(a) (b)
2 − (µ1 − µ 2 ) (µ1 − µ2 )
(c) (d)
R R δ δ
(c) (d)
(µ1 − µ2 ) 2(µ1 − µ 2 )
67. The graph shows how the magnification m produced by a
O x O x
thin lens varies with image distance v . What is the focal i i
length of the lens used 72. In an experiment for determination of refractive index of
m
glass of a prism by i − δ , plot, it was found that a ray
incident at angle 35º, suffers a deviation of 40º and that it
emerges at angle 79º. In that case which of the following is
C closest to the maximum possible value of the refractive
index [JEE (Main) 2016]
(a) 1.6 (b) 1.7
a b v (c) 1.8 (d) 1.5
[JEE (Main) 2019]
73. An isosceles prism of angle 120° has a refractive index of
b 2c a 1.44. Two parallel monochromatic rays enter the prism
(a) (b)
a c parallel to each other in air as shown. The rays emerging
b b2 from the opposite faces [IIT-JEE 1995]
(c) (d)
c ac
68. The eye can be regarded as a single refracting surface. The
radius of curvature of this surface is equal to that of cornea
(7.8 mm) . This surface separates two media of refractive 120°
indices 1 and 1.34 . Calculate the distance from the
refracting surface at which a parallel beam of light will come
to focus [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 4.0 cm (b) 2 cm
(a) Are parallel to each other
(c) 1 cm (d) 3.1 cm
(b) Are diverging
69. Three prisms 1, 2 and 3 have the prism angle A = 60o, but
(c) Make an angle 2 sin −1 (0.72) with each other
their refractive indices are respectively 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6. If
δ1, δ2, δ3 be their respective angles of deviation then (d) Make an angle 2 {sin−1(0.72) − 30o } with each other
[Similar AIEEE 2006] 74. A triangular prism of glass is shown in the figure. A ray
(a) δ3 > δ2 > δ1 (b) δ1 > δ2 > δ3 incident normally to one face is totally reflected, if θ = 45o .
(c) δ1 = δ2 = δ3 (d) δ2 > δ1 > δ3 The index of refraction of glass is
70. A ray of light is incident on an equilateral glass prism placed [AIEEE 2004]
on a horizontal table. For minimum deviation which of the
following is true [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004]
θ
(a) PQ is horizontal
R
(b) QR is horizontal Q 45o
S
(c) RS is horizontal P
(a) Less than 1.41 (b) Equal to 1.41
(d) Either PQ or RS is horizontal
(c) Greater than 1.41 (d) None of the above
Page 304 Compact Study Material Chapter 28 : Ray Optics

75. Monochromatic light is incident on a glass prism of angle A. Dm Dm

If the refractive index of the material of the prism is µ , a
ray, incident at an angle θ , on the face AB would get
transmitted through the face AC of the prism provided (a) (b)
[JEE (Main) 2015]
λ(nm) λ(nm)
   1   400 500 600 700 400 500 600 700
(a) θ > sin − 1  µ sin  A − sin − 1    
 
   µ    A Dm Dm
θ
   1  
(b) θ < sin − 1  µ sin  A − sin − 1     (c) (d)
 
   µ   
B C
   1  
(c) θ > cos −1
 µ sin  A + sin − 1     λ(nm) λ(nm)
   µ    400 500 600 700 400 500 600 700
   1   80. A monochromatic light is incident at a certain angle on an
(d) θ < cos − 1  µ sin  A + sin − 1    
  equilateral triangular prism and suffers minimum deviation.
   µ   
If the refractive index of the material of the prism is 3 ,
76. A parallel beam of light is incident from air at an angle α
then the angle of incidence is [JEE (Main) 2019]
on the side PQ of a right angled triangular prism of
(a) 30° (b) 90°
refractive index n = 2 . Light undergoes total internal (c) 60° (d) 45°
reflection in the prism at the face PR when α has a 81. An eye specialist prescribes spectacles having a combination
minimum value of 45º. The angle θ of the prism is of convex lens of focal length 40 cm in contact with a
P [JEE 2016] concave lens of focal length 25 cm. The power of this lens
combination in dioptres is [IIT 1997 Cancelled]
(a) 15º θ
(a) + 1.5 (b) – 1.5
(b) 22.5º α (c) + 6.67 (d) – 6.67
82. Assuming human pupil to have a radius of 0.25 cm a
(c) 30º
n= 2 comfortable viewing distance of 25 cm, the minimum
(d) 45º Q R
separation between two objects that human eye can resolve
77. Colour of the sky is blue due to [AIEEE 2002]
at 500 nm wavelength is [JEE (Main) 2015]
(a) 1 µm (b) 30 µm
(a) Scattering of light (b) Total internal reflection
(c) 100 µm (d) 300 µm
(c) Total emission (d) None of the above
78. Which one of the following spherical lenses does not exhibit 83. An experiment is performed to find the refractive index of
dispersion? The radii of curvature of the surfaces of the glass using a travelling microscope. In this experiment
lenses are as given in the diagrams distances are measured by [AIEEE 2008]
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002] (a) A standard laboratory scale
(b) A meter scale provided on the microscope
(c) A screw gauge provided on the microscope
(a) R1 R2 (b) R ∞ (d) A vernier scale provided on the microscope
84. In a compound microscope, the intermediate image is
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000; Similar AIEEE 2003]
R 1 ≠ R2 (a) Virtual, erect and magnified
(b) Real, erect and magnified
(c) (d) (c) Real, inverted and magnified
R R R ∞
(d) Virtual, erect and reduced
85. Wavelength of light used in an optical instrument are
λ1 = 4000 Å and λ 2 = 5000 Å, then ratio of their respective
79. The variation of refractive index of a crown glass thin prism resolving power (corresponding to λ1 and λ 2 ) is
with wavelength of the incident light is shown. Which of the
[AIEEE 2002]
following graphs is the correct one, if Dm is the angle of
(a) 16 : 25 (b) 9 : 1
minimum deviation [JEE (Main) 2019] (c) 4 : 5 (d) 5 : 4
1.535 86. The separation between two microscopic particles is
1.530 measured P A and PB by two different lights of wavelength
1.525
2000 Å and 3000 Å respectively, then [AIEEE 2002]
1.520
1.515
(a) PA > PB (b) PA < PB
1.510 (c) PA < 3 / 2 PB (d) P A = PB
400 500 600 700 λ(nm)
Chapter 28 : Ray Optics Compact Study Material Page 305

87. The focal lengths of the objective and the eye-piece of a 95. The incident ray, reflected ray and the outward drawn
compound microscope are 2.0 cm and 3.0 cm respectively.   
normal are denoted by the unit vectors a, b, and c
The distance between the objective and the eye-piece is respectively. Then choose the correct relation for these
15.0 cm. The final image formed by the eye-piece is at vectors [JEE (Main) 2021]
infinity. The two lenses are thin. The distances in cm of the      
(a) b = a + 2c (b) b = 2a + c
object and the image produced by the objective measured        
from the objective lens are respectively [IIT 1995] (c) b = a − 2 (a ⋅ c ) c (d) b = a − c
(a) 2.4 and 12.0 (b) 2.4 and 15.0 96. Three rays of light, namely red (R), green (G) and blue (B)
(c) 2.3 and 12.0 (d) 2.3 and 3.0 are incident on the face PQ of a right-angled prism PQR as
88. A thin prism P1 with angle 4° and made from glass of shown in figure
P
refractive index 1.54 is combined with another thin prism P2
made from glass of refractive index 1.72 to produce B
dispersion without deviation. The angle of prism P2 is G
[IIT-JEE 1990] R
(a) 2.6° (b) 3°
Q R
(c) 4° (d) 5.33°
The refractive indices of the material of the prism for red,
89. The aperture of the objective lens of a telescope is made
green and blue wavelength are 1.27, 1.42 and 1.49
large so as to [AIEEE 2003]
respectively. The colour of the ray(s) emerging out of the
(a) Increase the magnifying power of the telescope face PR is [JEE (Main) 2021]
(b) Increase the resolving power of the telescope (a) Green (b) Blue
(c) Make image aberration less (c) Blue and Green (d) Red
(d) Focus on distant objects 97. Region I and II are separated by a spherical surface of radius
90. An observer looks at a distant tree of height 10 m with a 25 cm. An object is kept in region I at a distance of 40 cm
telescope of magnifying power of 20. To the observer the from the surface. The distance of the image from the surface
tree appears [JEE (Main) 2016] is
I II
(a) 10 times nearer (b) 20 times taller 25 cm
(c) 20 times nearer (d) 10 times taller
O C µ I = 1.25 µ II = 1.4
91. Calculate the limit of resolution of a telescope objective
[JEE (Main) 2021]
having a diameter of 200 cm, if it has to detect light of
(a) 9.52 cm (b) 37 .58 cm
wavelength 500 nm coming from a star [JEE (Main) 2019]
(c) 55 .44 cm (d) 18.23 cm
(a) 610 × 10 −9 radian (b) 152.5 × 10 −9 radian
98. A ray of laser of a wavelength 630 nm is incident at an angle
(c) 457 .5 × 10 −9 radian (d) 305 × 10 −9 radian of 30° at the diamond-air interface. It is going from diamond
92. Diameter of the objective lens of a telescope is 250 cm for to air. The refractive index of diamond is 2.42 and that of air
light of wavelength 600 nm coming from a distant object, is 1. Choose the correct option [JEE (Main) 2021]

the limit of resolution of the telescope is close to (a) Angle of refraction is 53.4°
[JEE (Main) 2019] (b) Angle of refraction is 24.41°
(c) Angle of refraction is 30°
(a) 1.5 × 10 −7 rad (b) 4.5 × 10 −7 rad
(d) Refraction is not possible
(c) 3.0 × 10 −7 rad (d) 2.0 × 10 −7 rad 99. A ray of light entering from air into a denser medium of
93. The value of numerical a aperture of the objective lens of a 4
refractive index , as shown in figure. The light ray suffers
microscope is 1.25 . If light of wavelength 5000 Å is used, 3
the minimum separation between two points, to be seen as total internal reflection at the adjacent surface as shown. The
distinct, will be [JEE (Main) 2019] maximum value of angle θ should be equal to
(a) 0.12 µ m (b) 0.48 µ m θ
(c) 0.38 µ m (d) 0.24 µ m
θ''
94. A double convex lens has power P and same radii of 4
curvature R of both the surfaces. The radius of curvature of µ=
θ'' 3
a surface of a plano-convex lens made of the same material
[JEE (Main) 2021]
with power 1.5 P is [JEE (Main) 2020]
7 7
R (a) sin −1 (b) sin −1
(a) 2 R (b) 4 3
2
3R R 5 5
(c) (d) (c) sin −1 (d) sin −1
2 3 3 4
Page 306 Compact Study Material Chapter 28 : Ray Optics

100. Find the distance of the image from object O, formed by the
combination of lenses in the figure Numerical Questions :
102. The image of an object placed in air formed by a convex
f = + 10cm f = − 10cm f = + 30cm
refracting surface is at a distance of 10 m behind the

O 2 rd
surface. The image is real and is at of the distance of
3

30cm 5cm 10cm the object from the surface. The wavelength of light inside
[JEE (Main) 2021]
(a) 75 cm (b) 10 cm 2
the surface is times the wavelength in air. The radius of
3
(c) Infinity (d) 20 cm
101. An object is placed at the focus of concave lens having focal x
the curved surface is m . The value of ' x ' is______
length f. What is the magnification and distance of the image 13
from the optical centre of the lens [JEE (Main) 2021]
[JEE (Main) 2021]
1 f 1 f
(a) , (b) ,
4 4 2 2
(c) Very high, ∞ (d) 1, ∞

CRITICAL QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 b 2 c 3 a 4 c 5 b 6 a 7 c 8 b 9 a 10 b

11 b 12 b 13 d 14 b 15 d 16 d 17 a 18 a 19 b 20 a

21 b 22 c 23 c 24 c 25 a 26 a 27 b 28 d 29 c 30 b

31 a 32 d 33 a 34 a 35 d 36 b 37 c 38 c 39 b 40 a

41 a 42 c 43 a 44 c 45 a 46 b 47 b 48 a 49 a 50 b

51 a 52 b 53 c 54 c 55 b 56 b 57 a 58 c 59 b

PAST YEAR QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 c 2 b 3 d 4 b 5 b 6 b 7 c 8 c 9 b 10 b

11 c 12 d 13 d 14 b 15 c 16 c 17 c 18 c 19 a 20 c

21 d 22 b 23 c 24 b 25 d 26 c 27 a 28 c 29 a 30 c

31 a 32 b 33 d 34 c 35 b 36 a 37 c 38 c 39 b 40 c

41 d 42 a 43 a 44 b 45 d 46 d 47 a 48 b 49 d 50 b

51 b 52 c 53 a 54 b 55 b 56 b 57 a 58 c 59 b 60 c

61 c 62 a 63 a 64 d 65 a 66 c 67 c 68 d 69 a 70 b

71 a 72 d 73 d 74 c 75 a 76 a 77 a 78 c 79 a 80 c

81 b 82 b 83 d 84 c 85 d 86 b 87 a 88 b 89 b 90 c

91 d 92 c 93 d 94 d 95 c 96 d 97 b 98 d 99 b 100 a

101 b 102 30

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution
 Wave Optics and
CHAPTER
IMPORTANT POINTS
29
 All the wavelengths produce their central maxima at the
Electromagnetic Theory
 Sometimes maximum number of maximas or minimas are
asked in the question which can be obtained on the screen. For
same position. this we use the fact that value of sin θ (or cos θ) can't be greater
than 1. For example in the first case when the slits are vertical
 The wave with smaller wavelength forms its maxima before
nλ
the wave with longer wavelength. sin θ = (for maximum intensity)
d
 The first maxima of violet colour is closest and that for the
nλ d
red colour is farthest. ∵ sin θ ≯1 ∴ ≯1 or n≯
d λ
 Central maxima means the maxima formed with zero
Suppose in some question d/λ comes out say 4.6, then total
optical path difference. It may be formed anywhere on the
number of maximus on the screen will be 9. Corresponding to
screen.
n = 0, ± 1, ± 2, ± 3 and ± 4.
 Fringes with red light are thicker than those for blue light.
(∵ λred > λblue ) .  Shape of wave front
 The angular thickness of fringe width is defined as If rays are parallel, wave front is plane. If rays are
β λ converging wave front is spherical of decreasing radius. If rays
δ = = , which is independent of the screen distance D. are diverging wave front is spherical of increasing radius.
D d
 In an interference pattern, whatever energy disappears at
the minimum, appears at the maximum.
 For two interfering waves if initial phase difference between
them is φ0 and phase difference due to path difference between
Wave front
them is φ' then total phase difference will be
2π  Most efficient antennas are those which have a size
φ = φ0 + φ ' = φ0 + ∆.
λ comparable to the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave they
 In interference redistribution of energy takes place in the emit or receive.
form of maxima and minima.  A substance (like calcite quartz) which exhibits different
I +I properties in different directions is called anisotropic substance.
 Average intensity : I av = max min = I 1 + I 2 = a12 + a 22
2
 Ratio of maximum and minimum intensities :
2 2
Critical Questions
 I + I2   
I max
= 1  =  I1 / I 2 + 1  1. Figure shown plane waves refracted for air to water using
I min  I − I   I / I −1
 1 2   1 2  Huygens’s principle a, b, c, d, e are lengths on the diagram.
  The refractive index of water w.r.t air is the ratio
 I max
2 2 +1
a +a   a / a +1 I1 a1  I min 
=  1 2  =  1 2  also
 = = 
I 2 a2  b
 a1 − a2   a1 / a2 − 1  I max
− 1 
a
 air c
 I min 
d e
 If two waves having equal intensity (I1 = I2 = I0) meet at
Water
two locations P and Q with path difference ∆1 and ∆2
respectively then the ratio of resultant intensity at point P and Q
φ1  π∆  (a) a /e (b) b/e
cos 2 cos 2  1 
IP 2 =  λ  (c) b/d (d) d/b
will be =
IQ 2 φ2 2  π∆ 2  2. When light is refracted into a denser medium,
cos cos  
2  λ  (a) Its wavelength and frequency both increases
 In YDSE, the nth maxima always comes before the nth (b) Its wavelength increase but frequency remains
minima. unchanged
I max (c) Its wavelength decrease but frequency remains
 In YDSE, the ratio is maximum when both the
I min unchanged
sources have same intensity. (d) Its wavelength and frequency both decrease
Page 308 Compact Study Material Chapter 29 : Wave Optics and Electromagnetic Theory

3. Two point source separated by d=5 µ m emit light of 7. In YDSE how many maxima can be obtained on the screen
wavelength λ=2 µ m in phase. A circular wire of radius if wavelength of light used is 200 nm and d = 700 nm.

20 µ m is placed around the source as shown in figure. (a) 12 (b) 7

A (c) 18 (d) None of these
8. In a YDSE, the central bright fringe can be identified
20 µ m (a) As it has greater intensity than the other bright fringes
(b) As it is wider than the other bright fringes
D B (c) As it is narrower than the other bright fringes
5 µm
(d) By using white light instead of single wavelength light
9. In Young’s double slit experiment, the wavelength of red
light is 7800 Å and that of blue light is 5200 Å. The value of
C n for which n th bright band due to red light coincides with
(a) Point A and B are dark and points C and D are bright (n + 1)th bright band due to blue light, is
(b) Points A and B are bright and points C and D are dark (a) 1 (b) 2
(c) Points A and C are dark and points B and D are bright (c) 3 (d) 4
(d) Points A and C are bright and points B and D are dark 10. If the Young’s double slit experiment is performed with
4. Plane microwaves from a transmitter are directed normally white light, then which of the following is not true
towards a plane reflector. A detector moves along the (a) The central maximum will be white
normal to the reflector. Between positions of 14 successive
maxima, the detector travels a distance 0.13 m. If the (b) There will not be a completely dark fringe
velocity of light is 3 × 108 m /s, find the frequency of the (c) The fringe next to the central will be red
transmitter (d) The fringe next to the central will be violet
10 10 11. Two identical narrow slits S1 and S2 are illuminated by light
(a) 1.5 × 10 Hz (b) 10 Hz

(c) 3 × 1010 Hz (d) 6 × 1010 Hz of wavelength λ from a point source P. If, as shown in the
diagram above the light is then allowed to fall on a screen,
5. Two monochromatic (wavelength = a /5 ) and coherent
and if n is a positive integer, the condition for destructive
sources of electromagnetic waves are placed on the x-axis at
interference at Q is that
the points (2a, 0) and (− a, 0) . A detector moves in a circle of
radius R(>> 2 a) whose centre is at the origin. The number
of maxima’s detected during one circular revolution by the S1
detector are l1
L3
(a) 60 (b) 15
(c) 64 (d) None P
l2
6. Two coherent narrow slits emitting light of wavelength λ in l4 Q
the same phase are placed parallel to each other at a small S4
separation of 3 λ . The light is collected on a screen S which
is placed at a distance D (>> λ ) from the slits. The smallest
distance x such that the P is a maxima (a) (l1 − l2 ) = (2n + 1)λ /2
P
(b) (l3 − l4 ) = (2n + 1)λ /2

(c) (l1 + l2 ) − (l2 + l4 ) = n λ

X (d) (l1 + l3 ) − (l2 + l4 ) = (2n + 1)λ /2
12. In Young’s double slit experiment, the two slits act as
O coherent sources of equal amplitude A and wavelength λ .
S1 S2
In another experiment with the same setup the two slits are
sources of equal amplitude A and wavelength l but are
incoherent. The ratio of the average intensity of light at the
D
midpoint of the screen in the first case to that in the second
(a) 3D (b) 8D case is

D
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 2 : 1
(c) 5D (d) 5
2 (c) 4 : 1 (d) None of these
Chapter 29 : Wave Optics and Electromagnetic Theory Compact Study Material Page 309

13. In a Young’s double slit experiment, a small detector 19. In a Young double slit experiment, the separation between
measures an intensity of illumination of I units at the centre the slits is d = 0.25 cm and the distance of the screen
of the fringe pattern. If one of the two (identical) slits is now D = 100 cm from the slits. If the wavelength of light used is
covered, the measured intensity will be
(a) 2 I (b) I λ = 6000 Å and I0 is the intensity of the central bright
(c) I /4 (d) I /2 fringe, the intensity at a distance x = 4 × 10−5 m from the
14. In a Young double slit experiment D equals the distance of central maximum is
screen and d is the separation between the slit. The distance (a) I0 (b) I 0 /2
of the nearest point to the central maximum where the (c) 3 I 0 /4 (d) I0 /3
intensity is same as that due to a single slit, is equal to
20. In Young’s double slit experiment, the value of λ = 500 nm.
Dλ Dλ
(a) (b) The value of d = 1 mm , D = 1 m. Then the minimum
d 2d
Dλ 2D λ distance from central maximum for which the intensity is
(c) (d) half the maximum intensity will be
3d d
(a) 2.5 × 10 −4 m (b) 2 × 10−4 m
15. A beam of light consisting of two wavelength 6300 Å and
(c) 1.25 × 10 −4 m (d) 10 −4 m
λ Å is used to obtain interference fringes in a Young’s
21. Two slits are separated by 0.3 mm. A beam of 500 nm light
double slit experiment. If 4 th bright fringe of 6300 Å strikes the slits producing an interference pattern. The
coincides with 5 th dark fringe of λ Å , the value of λ number of maxima observed in the angular range
−30° < θ < 30°.
(in Å ) is
(a) 5200 (b) 4800
(c) 6200 (d) 5600
16. A beam of light consisting of two wavelengths 6500 Å and θ
(a) 300
5200 Å is used to obtain interference fringes in Young’s (b) 150
double slit experiment. The distance between slits is 2mm (c) 599
and the distance of screen from slits is 120 cm. What is the (d) 149
least distance from central maximum where the bright due 22. In the figure shown if a parallel beam of white light is
to both wavelength coincide incident on the plane of the slits then the distance of the
(a) 0.156 cm (b) 0.312 cm white spot on the screen from O is
(c) 0.078 cm (d) 0.468 cm [Assume d << D , λ << d ]
17. The ratio of the intensity at the centre of a bright fringe to
the intensity at a point one-quarter of the fringe width from
the centre is 2d/3
(a) 0 d
O
(a) 2 (b) 1/2 (b) d / 2
(c) 4 (d) 16 (c) d /3
18. In a Young’s Double slit experiment, first maxima is (d) d /6 D
observed at a fixed point P on the screen. Now the screen is 23. In the above question if the light incident is monochromatic
continuously moved away from the plane of slits. The ratio and point O is a maxima, then the wavelength of the light
of intensity at point P to the intensity at point O (centre of incident cannot be
the screen) (a) d 2 /3 D (b) d 2 /6D
2
(c) d /12D (d) d 2 /18D
24. A thin mica sheet ( µ = 1.6) of 7 µ m thickness introduced in
the path of one of the interfering beams in a Fresnel’s
P biprism arrangement shifts the central fringe to a position
normally occupied by 7th bright fringe from the centre of
O
screen. Find the wavelength of light used
(a) 400 nm (b) 500 nm
(c) 600 nm (d) 700 nm
25. Light of wavelength λ in air enters a medium of refractive
index µ. Two points in this medium, lying along the path of
this light, are at a distance x apart. The phase difference
between these points is:
(a) Remains constant 2πµ x 2π x
(a) (b)
(b) Keeps on decreasing λ µλ
(c) First decreases and then increases 2π (µ − 1)x 2π x
(c) (d)
(d) First decreases and then becomes constant λ (µ − 1)λ
Page 310 Compact Study Material Chapter 29 : Wave Optics and Electromagnetic Theory

26. In YDSE, the source placed symmetrically with respect to 29. A thin slice is cut out of a glass cylinder along a plane
the slit is now moved parallel to the plane of the slits so that parallel to its axis. The slice is placed on a flat glass plate
it is closer to the upper slit, as shown. Then, with the curved surface downwards. Monochromatic light is
incident normally from the top. The observed interference
S S1 fringes from this combination do not follow one of the
following statements
S2
(a) The fringes are straight and parallel to the length of the
piece
(a) The fringe width will increase and fringe pattern will (b) The line of contact of the cylindrical glass piece and the
shift down glass plate appears dark
(b) The fringe width will remain same but fringe pattern will (c) The fringe spacing increases as we go outwards
shift up (d) The fringes are formed due to the interference of light
(c) The fringe width will decrease and fringe pattern will rays reflected from the curved surface of the cylindrical
shift down piece and the top surface of the glass plate
(d) The fringe width will remain same but fringe pattern will 30. A circular planar wire loop is dipped in a soap solution and
shift down after taking it out, held with its plane vertical in air.
27. In the figure shown in YDSE, a parallel beam of light is Assuming thickness of film at the top very small, as sunlight
incident on the slit from a medium of refractive index n1. falls on the soap film, and observer receive reflected light
The wavelength of light in this medium is λ1 . A transparent (a) The top portion appears dark while the first colour to be
observed as one moves down in red
slab to thickness ‘t’ and refractive index n3 is put infront of
(b) The top portion appears violet while the first colour to
one slit. The medium between the screen and the plane of be observed as one moves down is indigo
the slits is n2 . The phase difference between the light waves (c) The top portion appears dark while the first colour to be
reaching point ‘O’ (symmetrical, relative to the slits) is: observed as one move down is violet
(d) The top portion appears dark while the first colour to be
n1
n3 observed as one move down depends on the refractive
n2 index of the soap solution
O 31. A thin film of thickness t and index of refraction 1.33 coats a
glass with index of refraction 1.50. What is the least
thickness t that will strongly reflect light with wavelength
λ1 600 nm incident normally
2π 2π (a) 225 nm (b) 300 nm
(a) (n3 − n2 ) t (b) (n3 − n2 ) t
n1λ1 λ1 (c) 400 nm (d) 450 nm
2π n1  n3  2π n1 32. It is necessary to coat a glass lens with a nonreflecting layer.
(c)  − 1  t (d) (n3 − n1 ) t If the wavelength of the light in the coating is λ, the best
n2λ1  n2  λ1
choice is a layer of material having an index of refraction
28. In a YDSE experiment if a slab whose refractive index can
between those of glass and air and a thickness of
be varied is placed in front of one of the slits then the
variation of resultant intensity at mid-point of screen with ‘μ’ (a) λ / 4 (b) λ /2
will be best represented by (µ ≥ 1). [Assume slits of equal (c) 3 λ /8 (d) λ
width and there is no absorption by slab] 33. In a biprism experiment the distance of source from biprism
is 1 m and the distance of screen from biprism is
I0 I0
4 meters. The angle of refraction of biprism is
2 × 10 − 3 radians. µ of biprism is 1.5 and the wavelength of
light used is 6000 Å . How many fringes will be seen on the
(a) (b)
screen
(a) 4 (b) 5
µ µ
(c) 3 (d) 6
µ=1 µ=1
34. A parallel coherent beam of light falls on Fresnel biprism
I0 I0 of refractive index µ and angle α. The fringe width on
a screen at a distance D from biprism will be
(wavelength = λ )
(c) (d) λ λD
(a) (b)
2(µ − 1)α 2(µ − 1)α
µ µ D
(c) (d) None
µ=1 µ=1 2(µ − 1)α
Chapter 29 : Wave Optics and Electromagnetic Theory Compact Study Material Page 311

35. In Young’s double slit experiment, the separation between 43. A thin convex lens of refractive index 1.5 is coated with a
slits is 0.2 mm and they are 1 m from the screen. Find the thin of refractive index 1.2 in order to reduce the reflection
distance between 8th maxima and 12th minima, if from its surface at λ = 480 nm. Find the minimum thickness
wavelength of light used is 500 nm. of the film which will minimise the intensity of the reflected
(a) 2mm (b) 2.5 mm light
(a) 10–7 m (b) 10–6 m
(c) 8.75 mm (d) 12.75 mm
(c) 2 ×10–7 m (d) 3 ×10–7 m
36. Intensity on screen due to each slit is I0 in Young’s double
44. Calculate the minimum thickness of the film (µ = 1.4) in
slit experiment. The intensity at a point on screen where
which interference of violet component 0 (λ = 400 nm) of
λ
path difference between waves is incident light can take place by reflection
4
o o
(a) I0 (b) 2 I0 (a) 714.3 A (b) 4000 A
(c) 3 I0 (d) 4 I 0 (c) 200 A
o
(d) 314 A
o

37. Light waves from two coherent sources of amplitude ratio 45. Newton’s rings are observed normally in reflected light of
9 : 1 produce interference. Find the ratio of maximum and wavelength 5.9×10–7 m. The radius of 10th dark ring is 0.25
minimum intensities cm. Find the thickness of the film
(a) 5 : 4 (b) 9 : 1 (a) 10–6m
(c) 25 : 16 (d) 5 : 8 (b) 2×10–6 m
38. In Young’s double slit experiment, intensity at the centre of (c) 3×10–6m
screen is I0. Find the minimum distance from centre of (d) 4×10–6m
I
screen, when intensity is 0 . 46. A beam of light travelling in water strikes a glass plate which
4 also immersed in water. When the angle of incidence is 60°,
λD λD the reflected beam is found to be plane polarized. Find the
(a) (b)
3d d refractive index of glass, if refractive index of water is 2
λD λD
(c) (d) 3
2d 8d (a) 3 (b)
2
39. In two slits interference pattern, the intensity at a point on
screen can be represented as (c) 6 (d) None of these
kx
(a) I = A + Bx (b) I = A + B cos 2
2
Past Year Questions
3 kx kx
4
(c) I = A + B cos (d) I = A + B cos
2 2 1. To demonstrate the phenomenon of interference, we require
Where A, B and k are constant x is the linear distance of this two sources which emit radiation [AIEEE 2003]
point from centre of screen (a) Of the same frequency and having a definite phase
40. If interfering waves are polarized then they relationship
(a) Must be in same state of polarisation (b) Of nearly the same frequency
(b) Must not be in same state of polarisation (c) Of the same frequency
(c) May not be in same state of polarisation (d) Of different wavelengths
(d) None of the above 2. Two coherent point sources S1 and S2 are separated by a
41. If angle of Fresnel’ s biprism increases small distance 'd' as shown. The fringes obtained on the
(a) Fringes may be disappear screen will be [JEE (Main) 2013]
(b) Fringes will be more visible (a) Points
(c) Fringe width will increase (b) Straight lines d
(d) None of the above S1 S2 Scree
(c) Semi-circles
42. In an interference pattern of Young’s double slit experiment, D
(d) Concentric circles
we observe the 12th order maxima for wavelength 600 nm at
a point on the screen. What order will be visible at the same 3. Two coherent monochromatic light beams of intensities I
point, it the source is replaced by light of wavelength 480 and 4I are superposed. The maximum and minimum
nm possible intensities in the resulting beam are [IIT-JEE 1988]
(a) 4th (b) 10th (a) 5I and I (b) 5I and 3I
(c) 15th (d) 20th (c) 9I and I (d) 9I and 3I
Page 312 Compact Study Material Chapter 29 : Wave Optics and Electromagnetic Theory

4. Two beams of light having intensities I and 4I interfere to 11. A beam of electron is used in an YDSE experiment. The slit
produce a fringe pattern on a screen. The phase difference width is d. When the velocity of electron is increased, then
π [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2005]
between the beams is at point A and π at point B. Then
2 (a) No interference is observed
the difference between the resultant intensities at A and B is
(b) Fringe width increases
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001]
(c) Fringe width decreases
(a) 2I (b) 4I
(d) Fringe width remains same
(c) 5I (d) 7I
12. A thin slice is cut out of a glass cylinder along a plane
5. A ray of light of intensity I is incident on a parallel glass-slab
parallel to its axis. The slice is placed on a flat glass plate as
at a point A as shown in fig. It undergoes partial reflection
shown. The observed interference fringes from this
and refraction. At each reflection 25% of incident energy is
combination shall be [IIT-JEE (Screening)1999]
reflected. The rays AB and A'B' undergo interference. The
ratio I max / I min is [IIT 1990] (a) Straight
(a) 4 : 1 B B′ (b) Circular
I
(c) Equally spaced
(b) 8 : 1
A A′
(d) Having fringe spacing which increases as we go outwards
(c) 7 : 1
13. In the adjacent diagram, CP represents a wave front and AO
& BP, the corresponding two rays. Find the condition on θ
(d) 49 : 1
C for constructive interference at P between the ray BP and
reflected ray OP [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003]
6. Two coherent sources produce waves of different intensities
which interfere. After interference, the ratio of the maximum (a) cosθ = 3λ/2d Q O
R
intensity to the minimum intensity is 16. The intensity of the θθ
waves are in the ratio [JEE (Main) 2019]
(b) cosθ = λ/4d
C d
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 16 : 9 (c) secθ – cosθ = λ/d
(c) 5 : 3 (d) 25 : 9
(d) secθ – cosθ = 4λ/d A
7. In an interference experiment the ratio of amplitudes of P
A1 1
coherent waves is = . The ratio of maximum and B
A2 3
minimum intensities of fringes will be [JEE (Main) 2019] 14. In a Young’s double slit experiment the intensity at a point
λ
(a) 18 (b) 4 where the path difference is (λ being the wavelength of
6
(c) 2 (d) 9
I
8. A Young's double slit experiment uses a monochromatic the light used) is I. If I 0 denotes the maximum intensity,
I0
source. The shape of the interference fringes formed on a
screen is [AIEEE 2005] is equal to [AIEEE 2007]

(a) Straight line (b) Parabola 1 3

(a) (b)
(c) Hyperbola (d) Circle 2 2
9. In Young’s double slit experiment, the wavelength of the (c) 1/ 2 (d) 3 / 4
light used is doubled and distance between two slits is half of
15. In a double slit experiment, instead of taking slits of equal
initial distance, the resultant fringe width becomes
widths, one slit is made twice as wide as the other. Then in
[AIEEE 2002]
the interference pattern [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000]
(a) 2 times (b) 3 times
(a) The intensities of both the maxima and the minima
(c) 4 times (d) 1/2 times
increase
10. Young’s double slit experiment is carried out by using green,
(b) The intensity of maxima increases and the minima has
red and blue light, one colour at a time. The fringe widths
zero intensity
recorded are β G , β R and β B , respectively. Then
(c) The intensity of maxima decreases and that of the
[IIT-JEE 2012]
minima increases
(a) β G > β B > β R (b) β B > β G > β R
(d) The intensity of maxima decreases and the minima has
(c) βR > β B > βG (d) β R > β G > β B
zero intensity
Chapter 29 : Wave Optics and Electromagnetic Theory Compact Study Material Page 313

16. In Young’s double slit experiment, one of the slit is wider 23. The angular width of the central maximum in a single slit
than other, so that amplitude of the light from one slit is diffraction pattern is 60°. The width of the slit is 1 µm. The
double of that from other slit. If I m be the maximum slit is illuminated by monochromatic plane waves. If another
intensity, the resultant intensity I when they interfere at slit of same width is made near it, Young’s fringes can be
phase difference φ is given by [AIEEE 2012] observed on a screen placed at a distance 50 cm from the
Im Im  φ slits. If the observed fringe width is 1 cm, what is slit
(a) (4 + 5 cos φ ) (b)  1 + 2 cos 2 
9 3  2 separation distance (i.e. distance between the centres of
each slit.) [JEE (Main) 2018]
Im  φ Im  φ
(c)  1 + 4 cos 2  (d)  1 + 8 cos 2  (a) 75 µ m (b) 100 µ m
5  2 9  2
(c) 25 µ m (d) 50 µ m
17. In the Young’s double slit experiment using a
monochromatic light of wavelength λ , the path difference 24. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the slits are placed
(in terms of an integer n) corresponding to any point having 0.320mm apart. Light of wavelength λ = 500nm is
half the peak intensity is [JEE 2013] incident on the slits. The total number of bright fringes that
λ λ are observed in the angular range −30° ≤ θ ≤ 30° is
(a) (2n + 1) (b) (2n + 1) [JEE (Main) 2019]
2 4
λ λ (a) 320 (b) 641
(c) (2n + 1) (d) (2n + 1) (c) 640 (d) 321
8 16
25. In a Young’s double slit experiment with slit separation
18. In Young's double slit experiment intensity at a point is (1/4)
1
of the maximum intensity. Angular position of this point is 0.1mm , one observes a bright fringe at angle rad by
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2005] 40
(a) sin-1(λ/d) (b) sin-1(λ/2d) using light of wavelength λ1 . When the light of wavelength
-1
(c) sin (λ/3d) (d) sin-1(λ/4d) λ2 is used a bright fringe is seen at the same angle in the
19. If I 0 is the intensity of the principal maximum in the single same set up. Given that λ1 and λ2 are in visible range (
slit diffraction pattern, then what will be its intensity when 380 nm to 740 nm ), their values are [JEE (Main) 2019]
the slit width is doubled [AIEEE 2005] (a) 625 nm, 500 nm (b) 380 nm, 525 nm
Ι0
(a) I 0 (b) (c) 380 nm, 500 nm (d) 400 nm, 500 nm
2
(c) 2I 0 (d) 4 I 0 26. Consider a Young’s double slit experiment as shown in
figure. What should be the slit separation d in terms of
20. In Young’s double slit experiment, the two slits act as
wavelength λ such that the first minima occurs directly in
coherent sources of equal amplitude A and wavelength λ. In
front of the slit (S1 ) [JEE (Main) 2019]
another experiment with the same set up the two slits are of
equal amplitude A and wavelength λ but are incoherent. S1 P Ist Minima
The ratio of the intensity of light at the mid-point of the
screen in the first case to that in the second case is d
Source
[IIT-JEE 1986]
S2
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1 2d Screen
(c) 4 : 1 (d) 1 : 1 λ λ
(a) (b)
21. In the ideal double-slit experiment, when a glass-plate ( 5 − 2) 2(5 − 2 )
(refractive index 1.5) of thickness t is introduced in the path
λ λ
of one of the interfering beams (wavelength λ), the intensity (c) (d)
at the position where the central maximum occurred 2( 5 − 2) (5 − 2 )
previously remains unchanged. The minimum thickness of 27. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the path different, at a
the glass-plate is [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002] certain point on the screen, between two interfering waves is
2λ 1
(a) 2λ (b) th of wavelength. The ratio of the intensity at this point to
3 8
λ that at the centre of a bright fringe is close to
(c) (d) λ [JEE (Main) 2019]
3
(a) 0.94 (b) 0.74
22. In a Young's double slit experiment, slits are separated by
0.5 mm, and the screen is placed 150 cm away. A beam of (c) 0.85 (d) 0.80
light consisting of two wavelengths, 650 nm and 520 nm, is 28. In a double-slit experiment, green light (5303 Å) falls on a
used to obtain interference fringes on the screen. The least double slit having a separation of 19.44 µ m and a width of
distance from the common central maximum to the point
4.05 µ m . The number of bright fringes between the first
where the bright fringes due to both the wavelengths
coincide is [JEE (Main) 2017] and the second diffraction minima is [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 15.6 mm (b) 1.56 mm (a) 09 (b) 10
(c) 7.8 mm (d) 9.75 mm (c) 04 (d) 05
Page 314 Compact Study Material Chapter 29 : Wave Optics and Electromagnetic Theory

29. The figure shows a Young’s double slit experimental setup. 34. A polaroid is placed at 45o to an incoming light of intensity
It is observed that when a thin transparent sheet of thickness I 0 . Now the intensity of light passing through polaroid after
t and refractive index µ is put in front of one of the slits,
polarisation would be [JEE (Main) 2013]
the central maximum gets shifted by a distance equal to n
fringe widths. If the wavelength of light used is λ, t will be (a) I 0 (b) I 0 / 2
(c) I0 / 4 (d) Zero
35. When an unpolarized light of intensity I 0 is incident on a
Screen
a
polarizing sheet, the intensity of the light which does not get
transmitted is [AIEEE 2005]
D (a) Zero (b) I 0
[JEE (Main) 2019]
2 n Dλ Dλ 1 1
(a) (b) (c) I0 (d) I0
a (µ − 1) a (µ − 1) 2 4

n Dλ nλ 36. Two beams, A and B, of plane polarized light with mutually

(c) (d) perpendicular planes of polarization are seen through a
a(µ − 1) µ −1
Polaroid. From the position when the beam A has
30. In a Young’s double slit experiment the ratio of the slit’s maximum intensity (and beam B has zero intensity), a
width 4 : 1 . The ratio of the intensity of maxima to minima rotation of polaroid through 30º makes the two beams
close to the central fringe on the screen, will be appear equally bright. If the initial intensities of the two
[JEE (Main) 2019] I
beams are I A and I B respectively, then A equals
(a) 9 : 1 (b) ( 3 + 1)4 : 16 IB
(c) 4 :1 (d) 25 : 9 [JEE (Main) 2014]
31. In a double slit experiment, when a thin film of thickness t (a) 3 (b) 3 / 2
having refractive index µ is introduced in front of one of (c) 1 (d) 1 / 3
the slits, the maximum at the centre of the fringe pattern 37. Unpolarized light of intensity I passes through an ideal
shifts by one fringe width. The value of t is ( λ is the polarizer A. Another identical polarizer B is placed behind
wavelength of the light used) [JEE (Main) 2019] I
A. The intensity of light beyond B is found to be . Now
λ λ 2
(a) (b)
2(µ − 1) (µ − 1) another identical polarizer C is placed between A and B.
I
λ 2λ The intensity beyond B is now found to be . The angle
(c) (d) 8
(2µ − 1) (µ − 1)
between polarizer A and C is [JEE (Main) 2018]
32. The maximum number of possible interference maxima for
(a) 45° (b) 60°
slit-separation equal to twice the wavelength in Young’s
(c) 0° (d) 30°
double-slit experiment is [AIEEE 2004]
38. A system of three polarizers P1 , P2 , P3 is set up such that
(a) Infinite (b) Five
(c) Three (d) Zero the pass axis of P3 is crossed with respect to that of P1 . The

33. The box of a pin hole camera, of length L, has hole of pass axis of P2 is inclined at 60° to the pass axis of P3 .
radius a. It is assumed that when the hole is illuminated by When a beam of unpolarized light of intensity I 0 is incident
a parallel beam of light of wavelength λ the spread of the on P1 , the intensity of light transmitted by the three
spot (obtained on the opposite wall of the camera) is the polarizers is I . The ratio (I 0 / I ) equals (nearly)
sum of its geometrical spread and the spread due to
[JEE (Main) 2019]
diffraction. The spot would then have its minimum size (say
bmin ) when [JEE (Main) 2016]
(a) 10.67 (b) 5.33
(c) 16.00 (d) 1.80
 2λ2  39. Which of the following radiations has the least wavelength
(a) a = λ L and bmin =  

 L  [AIEEE 2003]
(a) γ -rays (b) β-rays
(b) a = λ L and bmin = 4 λ L
(c) α-rays (d) X-rays
λ2 40. Electromagnetic waves are transverse in nature is evident by
(c) a = and bmin = 4 λ L
L [AIEEE 2002]
λ2  2λ2  (a) Polarization (b) Interference
(d) a = and bmin =  

L  L  (c) Reflection (d) Diffraction
Chapter 29 : Wave Optics and Electromagnetic Theory Compact Study Material Page 315

41. The magnetic field amplitude of an electromagnetic wave is 48. An EM wave from air enters a medium. The electric fields
2 × 10 −7 T . Its electric field amplitude if the wave is    z 
are E1 = E01 xˆ cos  2πν  − t  in air and
travelling in free space is [Similar JEE (Main) 2013]  c 

(a) 6 Vm−1 (b) 60 Vm−1 E2 = E02 xˆ cos [k(2z − ct )] in medium, where the wave
(c) 10 / 6 Vm−1 (d) None of these number k and frequency ν refer to their values in air. The
medium is non-magnetic. If ε r1 and ε r2 refer to relative
42. During the propagation of electromagnetic waves in a
medium [JEE (Main) 2014] permittivity of air and medium respectively, which of the
following options is correct [JEE (Main) 2018]
(a) Electric energy density is double of the magnetic energy
density ε r1 1 ε r1 1
(a) = (b) =
(b) Electric energy density is half of the magnetic energy ε r2 4 ε r2 2
density ε r1 ε r1
(c) =4 (d) =2
(c) Electric energy density is equal to the magnetic energy ε r2 ε r2
density
49. The energy associated with electric field is (U E ) and with
(d) Both electric and magnetic energy densities are zero
magnetic field is (U B ) for an electromagnetic wave in free
43. The intensity of gamma radiation from a given source is I.
space. Then [JEE (Main) 2019]
I
On passing through 36 mm of lead, it is reduced to . The U
8 (a) U E < U B (b) U E = B
2
I
thickness of lead which will reduce the intensity to will be (c) U E > U B (d) U E = U B
2
[AIEEE 2005]
50. If the magnetic field of a plane electromagnetic wave is

(a) 18 mm (b) 12 mm given by (The speed of light = 3 × 108 / m / s)

(c) 6 mm (d) 9 mm   x 
B = 100 × 10 −6 sin  2π × 2 × 1015  t −  then the
44. The rms value of the electric field of the light coming from   c 
the Sun is 720 N/C. The average total energy density of the maximum electric field associated with it is
electromagnetic wave is [AIEEE 2006] [JEE (Main) 2019]
4 4
(a) 6.37 × 10 −9
J /m 3
(b) 81.35 × 10 −12
J /m 3 (a) 4.5 × 10 N / C (b) 4 × 10 N / C
4
(c) 3.3 × 10 −3 J / m 3 (d) 4.58 × 10 −6 J / m 3 (c) 6 × 10 N / C (d) 3 × 104 N / C
51. The electric field of a plane polarized electromagnetic wave
45. In hydrogen spectrum the wavelength of Hα line is 656 nm
in free space at time t = 0 is given by an expression
whereas in the spectrum of a distant galaxy, Hα line  
E( x, y) = 10 ˆj cos[(6 x + 8 z)] . The magnetic field Β(x, z, t) is
wavelength is 706 nm. Estimated speed of the galaxy with
given by (c is the velocity of light) [JEE (Main) 2019]
respect to earth is [IIT-JEE 1999]
1 ˆ ˆ
(a) 2 × 10 8 m / s (b) 2 × 107 m / s (a) (6k + 8i ) cos [(6 x − 8 z + 10ct )]
c
(c) 2 × 10 6 m / s (d) 2 × 10 5 m / s 1 ˆ ˆ
(b) (6k − 8i ) cos [(6 x + 8 z − 10ct )]
46. An electromagnetic wave in vacuum has the electric and c
 
magnetic field E and B , which are always perpendicular to 1 ˆ ˆ
(c) (6k + 8i ) cos [(6 x − 8 z + 10ct )]
 c
each other. The direction of polarization is given by X and
 1 ˆ ˆ
that of wave propagation by k . Then [AIEEE 2012] (d) (6k − 8i ) cos [(6 x + 8 z + 10ct )]
c
         
(a) X ∥ B and k ∥ B × E (b) X ∥ E and k ∥ E × B 52. An electromagnetic wave of intensity 50 Wm − 2 enters in a
          medium of refractive index ‘n’ without any loss. The ratio of
(c) X ∥ B and k ∥ E × B (d) X ∥ E and k ∥ B × E the magnitudes of electric fields, and the ratio of the
47. An observer is moving with half the speed of light towards magnitudes of magnetic fields of the wave before and after
stationary microwave source emitting waves at frequency entering into the medium are respectively, given by
10 GHz. What is the frequency of the microwave measured [JEE (Main) 2019]
8 −1  1 
by the observer (speed of light = 3 × 10 ms ) (a) ( n, n ) (b)  , n 
[JEE (Main) 2017]  n 
(a) 15.3 GHz (b) 10.1 GHz  1   1 1 
(c)  n ,  (d)  , 

(c) 12.1 GHz (d) 17.3 GHz  n   n n
Page 316 Compact Study Material Chapter 29 : Wave Optics and Electromagnetic Theory

53. A 27 m W laser beam has a cross-sectional area of 10 mm2 . 60. The magnetic field of a plane electromagnetic wave is given

The magnitude of the maximum electric field in this by B = B ˆi [cos(kz − ω t )] + B ˆj cos(kz + ω t)
0 1
electromagnetic wave is given by
where B0 = 3 × 10 T and B1 = 2 × 10 −6 T , the rms value
−5
[Given permittivity of space ε 0 = 9 × 10 −12 SI units, speed of
of the force experienced by a stationary charge Q = 10 −4 C
light c = 3 × 10 8 m / s] [JEE (Main) 2019]
at z = 0 is closest to [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 1 k V / m (b) 1.4 k V / m
(a) 0.9 N (b) 0.1 N
(c) 0.7 k V / m (d) 2 k V / m
54. A light wave is incident normally on a glass slab of refractive (c) 0.6 N (d) 3 × 10 −2 N
index 1.5 . If 4% of light gets reflected and the amplitude of 61. 50 W / m 2 energy density of sunlight is normally incident on
the electric field of the incident light is 30V / m , then the
the surface of a solar panel. Some part of incident energy
amplitude of the electric field for the wave propagating in
the glass medium will be [JEE (Main) 2019] (25%) is reflected from the surface and the rest is absorbed.
(a) 10 V / m (b) 6 V / m The force exerted on 1m2 surface area will be close to
(c) 24 V / m (d) 30 V / m (c = 3 × 10 8 m / s) [JEE (Main) 2019]
55. A 100 V carrier wave is made to vary between 160V and (a) 35 × 10 −8
N (b) 10 × 10 −8 N
40 V by a modulating signal. What is the modulation index (c) 15 × 10 −8 N (d) 20 × 10 −8 N
[JEE (Main) 2019]
62. The electric field of a plane electromagnetic wave is given by
(a) 0.4 (b) 0.6 
(c) 0.5 (d) 0.3 E = E0ˆi cos(k z) cos(ω t) . The corresponding magnetic field

56. To double the converging range of a TV transmission B is then given by [JEE (Main) 2019]
tower, its height should be multiplied by [JEE (Main) 2019]  E  E
(a) 4 (b) 2 (a) B = 0 ˆj cos(k z) sin(ω t ) (b) B = 0 kˆ sin (k z) sin(ω t )
C C
1
(c) 2 (d)  E  E
2 (c) B = 0 ˆj sin (k z) sin(ω t ) (d) B = 0 ˆj sin(k z) cos(ω t)
C C
57. A plane electromagnetic wave travels in free space along the
x  direction. The electric field component of the wave at a 63. An electromagnetic wave is represented by the electric field

particular point of space and time is E = 6 Vm −1 along E = E0 nˆ sin[ω t + (6 y − 8 z)] . Taking unit vectors in x, y and
y direction. Its corresponding magnetic field component, B
z directions to be ˆi , ˆj, kˆ. the direction of propagation ŝ , is
would be [JEE (Main) 2019]
[JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 6 × 10 −8 T along x − direction
(b) 2 × 10 −8 T along y − direction 4 ˆj − 3 kˆ  − 3 ˆj + 4 kˆ 
(a) ˆs = (b) ˆs =  
5  5 
(c) 6 × 10 −8 T along z − direction  
(d) 2 × 10 −8 T along z − direction
3 ˆi − 4 ˆj − 4 kˆ + 3 ˆj
58. In a line of sight radio communication, a distance of about (c) ˆs = (d) ˆs =
5 5
50 km is kept between the transmitting and receiving
64. A plane electromagnetic wave having a frequency
antennas. If the height of the receiving antenna is 70 m ,
ν = 23.9 GHz propagates along the positive z − direction in
then the minimum height of the transmitting antenna should
free space. The peak value of the electric field is 60 V / m .
be (Radius of the Earth = 6.4 × 10 6 m) . [JEE (Main) 2019]
(a) 32 m (b) 20 m Which among the following is the acceptable magnetic field
component in the electromagnetic wave [JEE (Main) 2019]
(c) 40 m (d) 51 m 
(a) B = 60 sin(0.5 × 10 3 x + 1.5 × 10 11 t )kˆ
59. The magnetic field of an electromagnetic wave is given by 
 Wb (b) B = 2 × 10 −7 sin(0.5 × 10 3 z − 1.5 × 10 11 t )ˆi
B = 1.6 × 10 − 6 cos(2 × 107 z + 6 × 1015 t) (2ˆi + ˆj ) 2 .
m 
(c) B = 2 × 10 7 sin (0.5 × 10 3 z + 1.5 × 10 11 t )ˆi
The associated electric field will be [JEE (Main) 2019]

 V (d) B = 2 × 10 −7 sin (1.5 × 10 2 x + 0.5 × 10 11 t) ˆj
(a) E = 4.8 × 10 2 cos(2 × 107 z + 6 × 1015 t)(ˆi − 2ˆj )
m 65. A Plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 50 MHz travels
 V
(b) E = 4.8 × 10 2 cos(2 × 107 z − 6 × 1015 t )(−2ˆj + ˆi ) in free space along the positive x- direction. At a particular
m 
point in space and time, Ε = 6.3ˆj V / m . The corresponding
 V 
(c) E = 4.8 × 10 2 cos(2 × 107 z + 6 × 1015 t)(−ˆi + 2ˆj ) magnetic field Β , at that point will be [JEE (Main) 2019]
m
 V (a) 6.3 × 10 −8 k̂T (b) 18.9 × 10 −8 k̂T
(d) E = 4.8 × 10 2 cos(2 × 107 z − 6 × 1015 t)(2ˆi + ˆj )
m (c) 2.1 × 10 −8 k̂T (d) 18.9 × 10 8 k̂T
Chapter 29 : Wave Optics and Electromagnetic Theory Compact Study Material Page 317

66. The mean intensity of radiation on the surface of the Sun is 74. In a Young's double slit experiment, the width of the one of
about 10 8 W / m 2 The rms value of the corresponding the slit is three times the other slit. The amplitude of the light
magnetic field is closest to [JEE (Main) 2019] coming from a slit is proportional to the slit-width. Find the
(a) 10 2 T (b) 1T ratio of the maximum to the minimum intensity in the
(c) 10 −2 T (d) 10 −4 T interference pattern [JEE (Main) 2021]
67. Light is incident normally on a completely absorbing surface (a) 4 : 1 (b) 1 : 4
with an energy flux of 25 W cm−2 . If the surface has an area (c) 2 : 1 (d) 3 : 1
75. Consider the diffraction pattern obtained from the sunlight
of 25 cm 2 , the momentum transferred to the surface in 40
incident on a pinhole of diameter 0.1 µm . If the diameter of
minutes time duration will be [JEE (Main) 2019]
the pinhole is slightly increased, it will affect the diffraction
(a) 3.5 × 10 −6 Ns (b) 5.0 × 10 −3 Ns pattern such that [JEE (Main) 2021]
(c) 1.4 × 10 −6 Ns (d) 6.3 × 10 −4 Ns (a) Its size decreases, but intensity increases
68. Visible light of wavelength 6000 × 10 −8 cm falls normally on (b) Its size increases, but intensity decreases
a single slit and produces a diffraction pattern. It is found (c) Its size decreases, and intensity decreases
that the second diffraction minimum is at 60 o from the (d) Its size increases, and intensity increases
central maximum. If the first minimum is produced at θ1 , 76. A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 100 MHz is
then θ1 is close to [JEE (Main) 2020] travelling in vacuum along the x-direction. At a particular

(a) 25 o (b) 30 o point in space and time, B = 2.0 × 10 −8 kˆ T . (where, k̂ is
(c) 20 o
(d) 45 o 
unit vector along z-direction) What is E at this point
69. Choose the correct option relating wavelengths of different
parts of electromagnetic wave spectrum [JEE (Main) 2020] (Speed of light c = 3 × 10 8 m / s) [JEE (Main) 2021]
(a) λvisible < λmicrowaves < λradiowaves < λx - rays
(a) 6.0 ˆj V / m (b) 0.6 kˆ V / m
(b) λratiowaves > λmicrowaves > λvisible > λx − rays
(c) 6.0 kˆ V / m (d) 0.6 ˆj V / m
(c) λx − rays < λmicrowaves < λradiowaves < λvisible
77. In an electromagnetic wave the electric field vector and
(d) λvisible > λx − rays > λradiowaves > λmicrowaves  
magnetic field vector are given as E = E 0ˆi and B = B0 kˆ
70. A polarizer-analyser set is adjusted such that the intensity of
light coming out of the analyser is just 10% of the original respectively. The direction of propagation of electromagnetic
intensity. Assuming that the polarizer-analyser set does not wave is along [JEE (Main) 2021]
absorb any light, the angle by which the analyser needs to (a) (kˆ) (b) (−ˆj )
be rotated further to reduce the output intensity to be zero is
[JEE (Main) 2020] (c) (−kˆ) (d) ĵ
o o
(a) 45 (b) 90 78. A monochromatic neon lamp with wavelength of 670.5 nm
(c) 71.6 o (d) 18 .4 o illuminates a photo-sensitive material which has a stopping
71. The critical angle of a medium for a specific wavelength, if the voltage of 0.48 V . What will be the stopping voltage if the
medium has relative permittivity 3 and relative permeability
source light is changed with another source of wavelength of
4
for this wavelength, will be [JEE (Main) 2020] 474.6 nm [JEE (Main) 2021]
3
(a) 15 o (b) 30 o (a) 0.96 V (b) 1.5 V
o
(c) 60 (d) 45 o (c) 1.25 V (d) 0.24 V
72. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the separation between
79. Electric field of a plane electromagnetic wave propagating
the slits is 0.15 mm . In the experiment, a source of light of
through a non–magnetic medium is given by
wavelength 589 nm is used and the interference pattern is
E = 20 cos(2 × 1010 t − 200 x)V / m. The dielectric constant of
observed on a screen kept 1.5 m away. The separation
the medium is equal to (Take µ r = 1) [JEE (Main) 2021]
between the successive bright fringes on the screen is
[JEE (Main) 2020] 1
(a) 2 (b)
(a) 4.9 mm (b) 3.9 mm 3
(c) 5.9 mm (d) 6.9 mm (c) 9 (d) 3
73. In a Young's double slit experiment, light of 500 nm is used Numerical Questions :
to produce an interference pattern. When the distance  315  2
between the slit is 0.05 mm, the angular width (in degree) of 80. Suppose that intensity of a laser is   W / m . The rms
 π 
the fringes formed on the distance screen is close to electric field in units of V / m associated with this source is
[JEE (Main) 2020]
(a) 0.17° (b) 0.57° close to the nearest integer is (ε 0 = 8.86 × 10 −12 C 2 Nm−2 ;
(c) 1.7° (d) 0.07° c = 3 × 10 8 ms −1 ) [JEE (Main) 2020]
Page 318 Compact Study Material Chapter 29 : Wave Optics and Electromagnetic Theory

81. An unpolarized light beam is incident on the polarizer of a 84. Sea water at a frequency f = 9 × 10 2 Hz, has permittivity
polarization experiment and the intensity of light beam ε = 80ε 0 and resistivity ρ = 0.25 Ωm . Imagine a parallel
emerging from the analyzer is measured as 100 Lumens.
plate capacitor is immersed in seawater and is driven by an
Now, if the analyzer is rotated around the horizontal axis
alternating voltage source V (t ) = V0 sin(2πft). Then the
(direction of light) by 30° in clockwise direction, the intensity
of emerging light will be _____ Lumens [JEE (Main) 2021] conduction current density becomes 10 3 times the
1
82. A radiation is emitted by 1000 W bulb and it generates an displacement current density after time t = s . The value
800
electric field and magnetic field at P, placed at a distance of of x is
2m . The efficiency of the bulb is 1.25%. The value of peak 1
(Given : = 9 × 10 9 Nm 2 C − 2 ) [JEE (Main) 2021]
electric field at P is x × 10 −1 V / m . Value of x is_______. 4πε 0
(Rounded-off to the nearest integer) 85. A message signal of frequency 20 kHz and peak voltage of
[Take ε 0 = 8.85 × 10 −12 C 2 N −1m −2 , c = 3 × 10 8 ms −1 ] 20 volt is used to modulate a carrier wave of frequency
[JEE (Main) 2021] 1 MHz and peak voltage of 20volt. The modulation index
83. If 2.5 × 10 −6 N average force is exerted by a light wave on a will be [JEE (Main) 2021]
non- reflecting surface of 30 cm 2 area during 40 minutes of 86. White light is passed through a double slit and interference is
observed on a screen 1.5 m away. The separation between
time span, the energy flux of light just before it falls on the
the slits is 0.3 mm. The first violet and red fringes are
surface is ………. W / cm2 . (Round off to the Nearest
formed 2.0 mm and 3.5 mm away from the central white
integer)
(Assume complete absorption and normal incidence fringes. The difference in wavelengths of red and voilet light
is________nm [JEE (Main) 2021]
conditions are there) [JEE (Main) 2021]

CRITICAL QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 c 2 c 3 d 4 a 5 a 6 d 7 b 8 d 9 b 10 abd

11 d 12 b 13 c 14 c 15 d 16 a 17 a 18 c 19 c 20 c

21 c 22 d 23 b 24 c 25 a 26 d 27 a 28 a 29 a 30 c

31 a 32 a 33 b 34 a 35 c 36 b 37 c 38 a 39 b 40 a

41 a 42 c 43 a 44 a 45 c 46 c

PAST YEAR QUESTIONS – ANSWER KEY

1 a 2 d 3 c 4 b 5 d 6 d 7 b 8 a 9 c 10 d

11 c 12 a 13 b 14 d 15 a 16 d 17 b 18 c 19 d 20 b

21 a 22 c 23 c 24 b 25 a 26 c 27 c 28 d 29 c 30 a

31 b 32 b 33 b 34 b 35 c 36 d 37 a 38 a 39 a 40 a

41 b 42 c 43 b 44 d 45 b 46 c 47 d 48 a 49 d 50 d

51 b 52 c 53 b 54 c 55 b 56 a 57 d 58 a 59 a 60 c

61 d 62 c 63 b 64 b 65 c 66 d 67 b 68 a 69 b 70 d

71 b 72 c 73 b 74 a 75 a 76 a 77 b 78 c 79 c 80 275

81 75 82 137 83 25 84 6 85 1 86 300

Scan the QR for

Detailed Solution